JP2020018420A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine with characteristic display means.SOLUTION: A game machine includes operation means, and display means capable of displaying an operation performance display. The operation performance display includes an operation valid period display indicating an operation valid period of the operation means. The operation valid period display is an animation display in which the area of at least a part of the display is reduced as time elapses. The display means can display a moving display of the operation performance display. The size of the operation performance display is the same at the start of the display of the moving display and at the end of the display of the moving display. The animation display may be performed while the moving display is displayed.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 190

Description

  The present invention relates to a game machine represented by a ball game machine (pachinko machine), a spinning game machine (slot machine), an enclosed game machine or a medalless slot machine.

  Conventionally, a gaming table provided with a display means is known (for example, see Patent Document 1).

JP 2008-200302 A

However, the conventional game console has room for improvement in the display means.
It is an object of the present invention to provide a game console having a display means.

  A game console according to the present invention is a game console including an operation unit and a display unit, wherein the display unit is a unit capable of displaying an operation effect display, and the operation effect display is the operation unit. Is a display including an operation validity period display indicating the operation validity period of the operation validity period display, the operation validity period display is an animation display for reducing the area of at least a part of the display as time passes, and the display means includes: Means for displaying a movement display of the operation effect display, wherein the size of the operation effect display is the same at the start of the display of the movement display and at the end of the display of the movement display, and during the display of the movement display. In some cases, the animation display is performed (hereinafter, referred to as “first case”).

  ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to this invention, the game stand which has a characteristic in a display means can be implement | achieved.

FIG. 2 is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 according to the embodiment as viewed from the front side (player side). FIG. 2 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 viewed from the back side. It is the schematic front view which looked at the game board 200 of the pachinko machine 100 from the front. FIG. 2 is a circuit block diagram of a control unit of the pachinko machine 100. It is an example of the display symbol of the pachinko machine 100, (a) shows an example of the stop display symbol of the special figure 1, (b) shows an example of the stop display symbol of the special figure 2, (c) is a decorative symbol And (d) is a diagram showing an example of a stop display symbol in a normal figure. 6 is a flowchart illustrating a flow of a main control unit main process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a main control part timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a special figure prefetch process. It is a figure which shows an example of the pre-reading result storage part for special figure 1 and special figure 2. It is a figure explaining the contents of a success / failure judgment table. It is a figure explaining the contents of a special figure determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process in the 1st sub-control part 400 of the pachinko machine 100, (a) is a flowchart of a 1st sub-control part main process, (b) is a 1st sub-control part command reception interruption. It is a flowchart of a process, (c) is a flowchart of a 1st sub-controller timer interrupt process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process in the 2nd sub-control part 500 of the pachinko machine 100, (a) is a flowchart of a 2nd sub-control part main process, (b) is a 2nd sub-control part command reception interrupt. It is a flowchart of a process, (c) is a flowchart of a 2nd sub-control part timer interrupt processing, (d) is a flowchart of a 2nd sub-control part image control processing. (A) is a figure explaining the 1st example of composition of production device 206, and (b) is a figure explaining the 2nd example of composition of production device 206. It is a figure explaining the production example applicable to this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of an effect centering on the decorative design display device 208 of the pachinko machine of this embodiment step by step. FIG. 17 is a view illustrating step by step a continuation of the example of the effect illustrated in FIG. 16. FIG. 18 is a diagram illustrating step by step the example of the effect illustrated in FIG. 17. FIG. 19 is a diagram illustrating stepwise another example of the effect illustrated in FIG. 18. It is a figure which shows some examples in which the navigation character YM of the main character is taking action with respect to the change icon h0. It is a figure which shows some examples in which the navigation character YM wearing a red kimono is taking action with respect to the change icon h0. It is a figure which shows some examples in which the display mode of an icon changes even if the navigation character YM is not displayed. It is a figure which shows some examples in which the navigation character YM has made the action several times with respect to the change icon h0 in one change display of a decoration symbol. FIG. 24 is a diagram illustrating another example different from the example illustrated in FIG. 23 in which the navigation character YM has performed a plurality of actions on the change icon h0 in one change display of the decorative symbol. It is a figure showing two examples of an icon change effect. It is a figure which shows some examples in which the navigation character YM has made several actions with respect to a hold | maintenance icon in one change display of a decoration symbol. FIG. 27 is a diagram showing another example different from the example shown in FIG. 26, in which the navigation character YM has performed a plurality of actions on the hold icon in one change display of the decorative symbol. It is a figure which shows some examples in which the navigation character YM has made the action several times with respect to a hold | maintenance icon in several times of the fluctuation | variation display of a decoration pattern. FIG. 29 is a diagram showing another example different from the example shown in FIG. 28, in which the navigation character YM has performed a plurality of actions on the hold icon in the plurality of variable displays of the decorative symbol. It is a figure showing two examples of icon change animation. It is a timing chart explaining the flow of the change display of the decoration symbol executed in the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example in which the navigation character NJ of the ninja of the default display form is taking action with respect to a hold icon. It is a figure which shows the example in which the navigation character NJ of a red ninja is taking action with respect to a hold icon. It is a figure showing an example of selection of an icon change notice display, and mode change. FIG. 35 is a diagram illustrating a continuation of the example shown in the third and subsequent columns from the left in FIG. 34 and yet another example of a change effect of the navigation character. FIG. 36 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example shown in the third and subsequent columns from the left in FIG. 35 and another effect example. FIG. 37 is a view illustrating a continuation of the example illustrated in the third and subsequent columns from the left in FIG. 36. It is a figure showing an example of production in pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of production in pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of production in pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of production in pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of production in pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of production in pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of production in pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of production in pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of production in pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of production in pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of production in pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of production in pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of production in pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of production in pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of production in pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of production in pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of production in pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of production in pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of production in pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of production in pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure showing an example of an item. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a meter increase effect and an item-giving effect according to the first embodiment in a time series. It is a figure which showed the meter increase effect and item provision effect which were based on Example 2 in time series. It is a figure which showed the meter increase effect and item provision effect which were based on Example 3 in time series. It is a figure which showed the meter increase effect and item provision effect which were based on Example 4 in time series. It is a figure which showed the meter increase effect and item provision effect which were based on Example 5 in time series. FIG. 17 is a diagram illustrating a meter increase effect and an item-giving effect according to a sixth embodiment in chronological order. It is a figure which showed the meter increase effect and item provision effect which were based on Example 7 in time series. FIG. 3 is a transition diagram showing an example of a screen transition in the pachinko machine 100. FIG. 6 is a diagram illustrating an example of a real screen transition in a time series. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example of screen transition when various menus are selected on a menu screen. It is a figure which showed the meter increase effect and item provision effect which were based on Example 8 in time series. FIG. 18 is a diagram illustrating a meter increase effect and an item-giving effect according to Example 9 in chronological order. It is a figure which showed the meter increase effect and item provision effect which were based on Example 10 in time series. FIG. 21 is a diagram showing a meter increase effect and an item-giving effect according to an eleventh embodiment in chronological order. FIG. 39 is a diagram illustrating a meter increase effect and an item-giving effect according to Example 12 in chronological order. FIG. 33 is a diagram illustrating a meter increase effect and an item-giving effect according to a thirteenth embodiment in chronological order. FIG. 19 is a diagram illustrating a meter increase effect and an item-giving effect according to Example 14 in chronological order. FIG. 33 is a diagram illustrating a meter increase effect and an item-giving effect according to Example 15 in a time series. FIG. 33 is a diagram illustrating a meter increase effect and an item-giving effect according to Example 16 in chronological order. FIG. 47 is a diagram illustrating a meter increase effect and an item-giving effect according to Example 17 in chronological order. FIG. 33 is a diagram showing a meter increase effect and an item-giving effect according to an example 18 in chronological order. It is the figure which showed the meter increase effect and item provision effect which concern on the modification 1 in time series. It is the figure which showed the meter increase effect and item provision effect which concern on the modification 2 in time series. It is the figure which showed the meter increase effect and item provision effect which concern on the modification 3 in time series. It is a figure explaining an example of a production using movable body 1 and movable body 2. It is a figure explaining an example of a production using movable body 1 and movable body 2. It is a figure explaining an example of a production using movable body 1 and movable body 2. It is a figure explaining a movable body 90 and an effect example using the movable body 90. It is a figure explaining a movable body 90 and an effect example using the movable body 90. It is a figure explaining a movable body 90 and an effect example using the movable body 90. It is a figure explaining a movable body 90 and an effect example using the movable body 90. It is a figure explaining a movable body 90 and an effect example using the movable body 90. It is a figure explaining a movable body 90 and an effect example using the movable body 90. It is a figure explaining a movable body 90 and an effect example using the movable body 90. It is a figure explaining a movable body 90 and an effect example using the movable body 90. It is a figure explaining a movable body 90 and an effect example using the movable body 90. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect using structure 247. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect using structure 247. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect using structure 247. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect using structure 247. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect using structure 247. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect using structure 247. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect using structure 247. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect using structure 247. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect using structure 247. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect using structure 247. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect using structure 247. It is a figure explaining an example of production using a reservation icon and a change icon. It is a figure explaining an example of production using a reservation icon and a change icon. It is a figure explaining an example of production using a reservation icon and a change icon. It is a figure explaining an example of production using a reservation icon and a change icon. It is a figure explaining an example of production using a reservation icon and a change icon. It is a figure explaining an example of production using a reservation icon and a change icon. It is a figure explaining an example of production using a reservation icon and a change icon. It is a figure explaining an example of production using a reservation icon and a change icon. It is a figure explaining an example of production using a reservation icon and a change icon. It is a figure explaining an example of production using a reservation icon and a change icon. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect of balloon display. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect of balloon display. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect of balloon display. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect of balloon display. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect of balloon display. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect of balloon display. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect of balloon display. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect of balloon display. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect of balloon display. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect of balloon display. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect of balloon display. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect of balloon display. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect of balloon display. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect of balloon display. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect of balloon display. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect of balloon display. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect of balloon display. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect of balloon display. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect of balloon display. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect of balloon display. It is a figure explaining an example of an effect of balloon display. It is a figure explaining the production example of a button production. It is a figure explaining the production example of a button production. It is a figure explaining the production example of a button production. It is a figure explaining the production example of a button production. It is a figure explaining the production example of a button production. It is a figure explaining the production example of a button production. It is a figure explaining the production example of a button production. It is a figure explaining the production example of a button production. It is a figure explaining the example of a production in which a mini game production and a button production are performed. It is a figure explaining the example of a production in which a mini game production and a button production are performed. It is a figure explaining the example of a production in which a mini game production and a button production are performed. It is a figure explaining the example of a production in which a mini game production and a button production are performed. It is a figure explaining the example of a production in which a mini game production and a button production are performed. It is a figure explaining the example of a production in which a mini game production and a button production are performed. It is a figure explaining the example of a production in which a selection production and a button production are performed. It is a figure explaining the example of a production in which a selection production and a button production are performed. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect in which a continuous hit operation effect and a button effect are performed. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect in which a continuous hit operation effect and a button effect are performed. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect in which a continuous hit operation effect and a button effect are performed. It is a figure explaining an example of production in which a mini game production is performed during a big hit game. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect in which a mini game effect is performed. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect in which a mini game effect is performed. It is a figure explaining an example of a production using a change icon. It is a figure explaining an example of a production using a change icon. It is a figure explaining an example of a production using a change icon. It is a figure explaining an example of a production using a change icon. It is a figure explaining the production example in which a frame change animation is performed. It is a figure explaining the production example in which a frame change animation is performed. It is a figure explaining the production example in which a frame change animation is performed. It is a figure explaining the production example in which a frame change animation is performed. It is a figure explaining the production example in which a frame change animation is performed. It is a figure explaining the production example in which a frame change animation is performed. It is a figure explaining the production example in which a frame change animation is performed. It is a figure explaining the production example in which a frame change animation is performed. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect where a timer notice effect and a frame change animation are performed. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect where a timer notice effect and a frame change animation are performed. It is a figure explaining the production example in which a frame change animation is performed. It is a figure explaining the production example in which a frame change animation is performed. (A) It is a figure which shows the operation effect display concerning Example 1-1 in a time series. (B) It is a figure which shows the operation effect display concerning Example 1-2 in a time series. (A) It is a figure which shows the operation effect display concerning Example 2-1 in a time series. (B) It is a figure which shows the operation effect display concerning Example 2-2 in time series. (A) It is a figure which shows the operation effect display concerning Example 3-1 in a time series. (B) It is a figure which shows the operation effect display concerning Example 3-2 in a time series. (A) It is a figure which shows the operation effect display concerning Example 4-1 in time series. (B) It is a figure which shows the operation effect display concerning Example 4-2 in time series. (A) It is a figure which shows the operation effect display concerning Example 5-1 in a time series. (B) It is a figure which shows the operation effect display concerning Example 5-2 in a time series. (A) It is a figure which shows the operation effect display concerning Example 6-1 in time series. (B) It is a figure which shows the operation effect display concerning Example 7-1 in a time series. It is a figure which shows the operation effect display based on Example 8 in time series. It is a figure which shows the operation effect display based on Example 9 in time series. (A) It is a figure which shows the operation effect display concerning Example 9-2 in a time series. (B) It is a figure which shows the operation effect display concerning Example 9-3 in a time series. (A) It is a figure which shows the operation effect display concerning Example 10-1 in a time series. (B) It is a figure which shows the operation effect display concerning Example 10-2 in a time series. (A) It is a figure which shows the operation effect display concerning Example 11-1 in a time series. (B) It is a figure which shows the operation effect display concerning Example 11-2 in a time series. (A) It is a figure which shows the operation effect display concerning Example 12-1 in a time series. (B) It is a figure which shows the operation effect display concerning Example 12-2 in a time series. (A) It is a figure which shows the operation effect display concerning Example 13-1 in a time series. (B) It is a figure which shows the operation effect display concerning Example 13-2 in a time series. FIG. 24 is a diagram illustrating an operation effect display according to Example 14 in chronological order. FIG. 25 is a diagram showing an operation effect display according to Example 15 in chronological order. (A) It is a figure which shows the operation effect display concerning Example 16-1 in a time series. (B) It is a figure which shows the operation effect display concerning Example 16-2 in a time series. (A) It is a figure which shows the operation effect display concerning Example 17-1 in a time series. (B) It is a figure which shows the operation effect display concerning Example 17-2 in a time series. (A) It is a figure which shows the operation effect display concerning Example 18-1 in a time series. (B) It is a figure which shows the operation effect display concerning Example 18-2 in a time series. (A) It is a figure which shows the operation effect display concerning Example 19-1 in a time series. (B) It is a figure which shows the operation effect display concerning Example 19-2 in a time series. (A) It is a figure which shows the operation effect display concerning Example 20-1 in a time series. (B) It is a figure which shows the operation effect display concerning Example 20-2 in a time series. 1 is a front view of an enclosed pachinko machine to which the present invention can be applied. It is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the slot machine applicable to this invention from the front side (player side). It is a figure which shows the gaming table by the modification of this invention, (a) shows the holding machine 2000, (b) shows the mobile telephone 3000 provided with the memory | storage part which stores the electronic data which implements this invention. , (C) shows a portable game machine 4000 having a storage unit for storing electronic data for realizing the present invention, and (d) has a storage unit for storing electronic data for realizing the present invention. A home video game machine 5000 is shown, and (e) shows a data server 6000 storing electronic data for realizing the present invention.

  Hereinafter, with reference to the drawings, a game machine according to the present invention (for example, a ball game machine such as the pachinko machine 100 and a spinning machine such as a slot machine) will be described in detail.

<Overall configuration>
First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 1 is an external perspective view of the pachinko machine 100 as viewed from the front side (player side).

  The pachinko machine 100 is a game console that allows a player to obtain a profit when predetermined conditions are satisfied, and includes an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a door 108 with a ball storage tray, The device 110 and the game board 200 are provided on the front side (on the player side).

  The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape to be fixed to an installation place (island facilities or the like) provided in a gaming machine installation store. A speaker 120 (a bass speaker that outputs bass) is attached to the outer frame 102, and when the main body 104 is housed in the outer frame 102, it is electrically connected (the main body 104 and the outer frame 102). Is provided with a pair of floating connectors. When the main body 104 is stored in the outer frame 102, the connector of the main body 104 and the connector of the outer frame 102 are connected. Become.

  The main body 104 is a door member that is provided inside the outer frame 102, has a locking function, and is a vertical rectangular game machine base shaft body rotatably mounted on the outer frame 102 via the hinge portion 112. . The main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space 114 inside. A clerk at a store (amusement store) where the pachinko machine 100 is installed can open and close the main body 104, and a main body opening sensor (inner frame opening sensor) for detecting that the main body 104 is opened is provided. ing.

  The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104, which is the front side of the pachinko machine 100, with a locking function via a hinge 112 so as to be openable and closable. Is a door member having an opening 116. A store clerk at the amusement store can also open and close the front frame door 106, and is also provided with a front frame door sensor 109 for detecting that the front frame door 106 is opened. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin in the opening 116, and a speaker 120 (a high-pitched loudspeaker that outputs high-pitched sounds) and a frame lamp 122 are mounted on the front side. Have been. The rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200 define a space in which the game area 124 is provided. In the present embodiment, an LED as a light source is also referred to as a lamp, and a lamp that emits light, such as a fluorescent lamp or a cold-cathode tube, may be referred to as a lamp. Is equivalent to

  The door 108 with a ball storage tray is a door member that has a locking function and is attached to the front side of the pachinko machine 100 below the main body 104 so as to be openable and closable. The door 108 with the ball storage tray is opened by pressing an opening lever (not shown) which can be operated with the front frame door 106 opened. In addition, you may provide the door sensor with a ball storage dish which detects that the door 108 with a ball storage dish was opened. The door 108 with a ball storage tray is provided with a door-side ball passage unit that can store a plurality of game balls (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “balls”) and guides the game balls to the launching device 110. An upper plate 126, a lower plate 128 for storing game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, and a ball release button 130 for discharging game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by operation of the player; A ball discharge lever 132 for discharging game balls stored in the lower plate 128 by a player's operation to a game ball collection container (commonly called a dollar box), and a game guided to the launching device 110 by a player's operation. A ball firing handle 134 for hitting a ball into the game area 124 of the game board, and an effect button 136 (chance button 136) for changing the effect of the effect device 206 (see FIG. 3) by the operation of the player. , A chance button lamp 138 that is built into the effect button 136 (chance button 136) and emits the effect button 136 (chance button 136), and gives a ball lending instruction to a card unit (CR unit) installed in a game arcade. A ball lending operation button 140 for performing, a return operation button 142 for instructing the card unit to return the balance of the player, a ball lending display unit (not shown) for displaying the balance of the player and the state of the card unit, Is provided. In addition, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 is provided with a lower plate full detection sensor (not shown) for detecting that the lower plate 128 is full by game balls. Further, an operation key unit 137 is provided. The operation key unit 137 includes, as cross keys, up and down keys of an up key and a down key, and left and right keys of a left key and a right key, and an enter key in the center of the cross key. I have. Further, a cancel key is also arranged below and below the cross key to the right. The pachinko machine 100 does not have the door 108 with a ball storage tray, and the front frame door 106 has an upper plate 126, a lower plate 128, a ball release button 130, a ball discharge lever 132, a ball firing handle 134, a chance button 136, and a chance button. All or a part of the lamp 138, the ball lending operation button 140, the return operation button 142, the ball lending display unit, the lower plate full detection sensor, and the operation key unit 137 may be provided. The front frame door 106 and the main body 104 are connected by a harness (not shown), and the front frame door 106 (which may include a door 108 with a ball storage tray) is open to the main body 104. Also, if the various control circuits of the front frame door 106 and the various control circuits of the main body 104 are connected by the harness, the effect means provided in the front frame door 106 (in this example, the speaker 120, the frame lamp 122 and the chance Button lamp 138. The effect by the effect movable body when the front frame door 106 is provided with the effect movable body), the display of the ball rental display section, the chance button 136, the ball rental operation button 140, the return operation button 142, and The operation of the operation key unit 137 and the detection of the lower plate full detection sensor can be performed. Further, in this embodiment, since the power supply board case 184 accommodating the power supply board 182 constituting the power supply control unit 660 described later is attached to the main body 104, the outer frame 102, the front frame door 106 (with a ball storage tray) The door 108 may be included), and the game board 200 is configured to be supplied with a power supply voltage from the main body 104.

  The firing device 110 is attached below the main body 104, and has a firing rod 146 that rotates when a ball firing handle 134 is operated by a player, and a firing hammer 148 that strikes a game ball with the tip of the firing rod 146. , Is provided. While the ball launching handle 134 is being continuously operated by the player, the launching device 110 sends the game ball to the game area 124 of the game board every predetermined firing period (eg, 0.6 seconds). It is fired toward and corresponds to an example of a firing means. It should be noted that a right-handed button that can maximize the firing intensity by being pressed when the ball firing handle 134 is operated may be provided. The ball firing handle 134 has a firing stop switch (not shown) for disabling the shooting (ejecting) of a game ball according to the operation of the ball firing handle 134 by the operation of the player, and that the player has touched the ball firing handle 134. And a touch sensor capable of detecting It should be noted that a right-handed button that can maximize the firing intensity by being pressed when the ball firing handle 134 is operated may be provided. In addition, when the touch sensor detects that the ball firing handle 134 has been changed from a non-operated state to an operated state during the display of the demonstration screen, a dedicated effect may be performed. . For example, there are an effect display by a display means, an effect sound by a sound output means, a light emitting effect by various decorative LEDs and a light guide plate, and an effect movable body (provided on a game board or a frame). The effect may be performed by four types of effect means, or may be performed by one or more effect means. In addition, even if it is the same kind of directing means, there may be directing means for performing a special directing and directing means not performing (for example, a directing movable body of a frame performs a dedicated directing, but a directing movable body of a game board has a special directing effect). There is a case where no effect is performed, or the effect movable body A of the game board performs the exclusive effect, but the effect movable body B of the game board does not perform the exclusive effect, etc. This example is also applicable to other effect means. Is.).

The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening 116 after the game board 200 is mounted on the main body 104. In FIG. 1, the specific configuration of the game area 124 is not shown, and the specific configuration is shown in FIG.
FIG. 2 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 1 as viewed from the rear side.

  At the upper back of the pachinko machine 100, there is an opening that opens upward, a ball tank 150 for temporarily storing game balls, and a ball tank 150 that is located below the ball tank 150 and is located at the bottom of the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 is provided for guiding a ball falling through the formed communication hole to the dispensing device 152 located on the right side in rear view.

  The dispensing device 152 is formed of a cylindrical member, and includes a dispensing motor (not shown), a sprocket, and a dispensing sensor inside. The dispensing device 152 is provided on the main body 104, is detachable from the main body 104, and is connected to the downstream end of the tank rail 154 when mounted at a predetermined position.

  The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor. The sprocket temporarily holds the game balls flowing into the payout device 152 through the tank rail 154 and drives the payout motor to rotate by a predetermined angle. Thereby, the game balls temporarily staying are sent out one by one below the payout device 152. That is, the payout device 152 is a type of ball feeding device that applies a driving force to a game ball and conveys the game ball.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket, and outputs one of a high signal and a low signal when the game ball is passing, and when the game ball is not passing, The other signal of high or low is output to the payout control unit 600. The game balls that have passed through the payout sensor are configured to pass through a ball rail (not shown) and reach the upper plate 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100. Based on the fulfillment of the condition, a game value (game ball) in an amount corresponding to the grant condition is given (paid out) to the player by this configuration.

On the left side of the payout device 152 in the drawing, a main board case 158 for storing a main board 156 constituting a main control section 300 (see FIG. 4) for performing a control process of the entire game, and processing information generated by the main control section 300 The first sub-board case 162 that houses the first sub-board 160 that constitutes the first sub-controller 400 (see FIG. 4) that performs control processing related to effects based on processing information generated by the first sub-controller 400. The second sub-board case 166 that houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the second sub-controller 500 (see FIG. 4) that performs control processing related to production, and a payout control unit 600 (which performs control processing related to payout of game balls) FIG. 4) and a payout board case 172 for storing a payout board 170 provided with an error release switch 168 for releasing an error by operation of a game store clerk, and launching of a game ball. A launch board case 176 that houses a launch board 174 that constitutes a launch control section 630 (see FIG. 4) that performs control processing, and a power control section 660 (see FIG. 4) that supplies power to various electric game machines, A power supply board case 184 that houses a power supply board 182 including a power switch 178 for turning on and off the power supply by operation of a game store clerk and a RAM clear switch 180 for outputting a RAM clear signal to the main control unit 300 when operated at power on; Also, a CR interface unit 186 for transmitting and receiving signals between the payout control unit 600 and the card unit is provided. The main board case 158 in which the main board 156 is stored, the first sub-board case 162 in which the first sub-board 160 is stored, and the second sub-board case 166 in which the second sub-board 164 is stored. A power supply including a payout board case 172 in which a payout board 170 having an error release switch 168 is housed, a firing board case 176 in which a firing board 174 is housed, a power switch 178 and a RAM clear switch 180 The power supply board case 184 that houses the board 182 and the CR interface unit 186 are provided in the main body 104.
FIG. 3 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front.

  An outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are provided on the game board 200 to form a game area 124 on which game balls can roll.

  At a substantially center of the game area 124, an effect device 206 is provided. In the effect device 206, a decorative symbol display device 208 is disposed substantially at the center, and around it, a normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, and A symbol holding lamp 216, a first special symbol holding lamp 218, a second special symbol holding lamp 220, and a high-accuracy middle lamp 222 are provided. Hereinafter, the ordinary symbol may be referred to as a “common symbol”, and one or more of the special symbol, the first special symbol, and the second special symbol may be referred to as a “special symbol”.

  The effect device 206 performs an effect by operating the effect movable body 224, and the details will be described later.

  The decorative design display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for decorative designs and effects. In the present embodiment, the decorative design display device 208 is configured by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display). The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display areas: a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c, and an effect display area 208d, and a left symbol display area 208a and a middle symbol display area 208b. The right symbol display area 208c and the right symbol display area 208c display different decorative symbols, respectively, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for the effect. Further, the position and size of each of the display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, 208d can be freely changed in the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Although a liquid crystal display device is adopted as the decorative design display device 208, it is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, and it is sufficient if it is configured to be able to display various effects and various game information. For example, a dot matrix display device Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (Electro-Luminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be employed.

  The general-purpose display device 210 is a display device for displaying a general-purpose image, and is configured by a 7-segment LED in the present embodiment. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are display devices for displaying a special figure, and in this embodiment, are configured by 7-segment LEDs. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are predetermined symbol display means. The decorative symbol displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is a symbol representing the symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device 212 or the second special symbol display device 214 in an enhanced effect. The display device 208 may also be a predetermined symbol display means.

  The general figure holding lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of the predetermined first variable game held (a general figure variable game described in detail later), and in the present embodiment, the general figure variable game is a predetermined number. (For example, four) can be reserved.

  The first special figure holding lamp 218 and the second special figure holding lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of predetermined second variable game games (special figure variable game described in detail later) that are held. In the embodiment, it is possible to suspend a special figure variable game up to a predetermined number (for example, four, eight in total for the first special figure and the second special figure). The term “suspending” here means suspending the start of various determination processes (lottery process and the like) based on start information described later.

  The high-probability middle lamp 222 is a lamp (notifying unit) for performing notification indicating the current symbol control state. This high-probability middle lamp 222 is configured to perform notification indicating the current symbol control state from the time the power is turned on until the start of the big hit game, and thereafter does not indicate the current symbol control state. I have. In the symbol control state, when the power is turned on again, the symbol control state returns to the symbol control state immediately before the power is turned off. Although the symbol control state will be described later, the symbol control state may be any of a normal state, a time-saving state (electric support state), and a probable change state. It may be one of the states without special figure probability change.

  In the present specification, description will be made using a word indicating a state inside the gaming table (pachinko machine 100) called a control state, but the wording of the control state includes a concept of a so-called gaming state.

  Around the effect device 206, a general winning opening 226, a general drawing starting opening 228, a first special drawing starting opening 230, a second special drawing starting opening 232, and a variable winning opening 234 are provided. ing.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of general winning openings 226 are provided on the gaming board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning opening 226 (not shown). When a prize is won, the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 2 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls to the upper plate 126 shown in FIG. 1 as prize balls. The ball discharged to the upper plate 126 can be freely taken out by the player, and with such a configuration, the prize ball is paid out to the player based on the winning. Note that the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side. In the present embodiment, the ball to be paid out to the player as a reward for winning may be referred to as “prize ball”, and the ball to be lent to the player may be referred to as “ball rental”, and “prize ball” and “ball rental” are collectively referred to. And call it "ball (game ball)".

  The general-purpose starting port 228 is constituted by a device called a gate or a through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed through a predetermined area of the game area 124. In the present embodiment, the left side of the game board 200 is provided. One. Unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the ordinary figure starting port 228 is not discharged to the gaming island side. When the predetermined ball detection sensor detects that the ball has passed the general-purpose starting port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts the general-purpose change game using the general-purpose display device 210.

  In this embodiment, only one first special figure starting port 230 is provided at the center of the game board 200. The first special figure starting port 230 is a first starting area in which the size of the entrance into which the game ball enters does not change. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the first special figure starting port 230, the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 2 is driven to set a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls as a prize ball and the upper plate. At the same time as discharging to 126, the special figure changing game by the first special figure display device 212 is started. Note that the ball that has entered the first special figure starting port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side. The first special figure starting port 230 is one of the starting areas, and corresponds to an example of a fixed starting area in which its size does not change.

  In the present embodiment, only one second special figure starting port 232 is provided below the first special figure starting port 230. In the vicinity of the second special figure starting port 232, a pair of blade members 2321 which can be opened and closed left and right by a solenoid is provided, and a combination of the pair of blade members 2321 and the second special figure starting port 232 is provided. It corresponds to a variable starting means, and is generally called an electric tulip (electric tuy). The pair of blade members 2321 is a member that changes the difficulty of winning the second special figure starting port 232. In other words, it is impossible to enter the second special figure starting port 232 while the pair of blade members 2321 is closed, and the mode in which the pair of blade members 2321 is closed is an opening and closing mode in which winning is difficult. On the other hand, when the player wins the general figure changing game and the general figure display device 210 stops and displays the symbol, the pair of blade members 2321 opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. Is possible (a winning state is easy), and the open state in which the pair of blade members 2321 is open is a state where the winning is easy. That is, the size of the entrance (the entrance of the game ball) of the second special figure starting port 232 is one of a small size (corresponding to the first size) and a large size (corresponding to the second size). It is a variable starting area in which the ease of entry of the game ball changes from one size to the other size, and corresponds to an example of a second starting area. The size of this large size is larger than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230. In a state where the pair of blade members 2321 are opened, of the game balls that have entered the game area 124, the second special feature that is the variable starting area is smaller than the game ball that enters the first special figure starting port 230 that is the fixed starting area. There are more game balls entering the starting port 232. On the other hand, the size of the small size is smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230, or smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the second special figure starting port 232, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, four) of balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. At the same time, the special figure changing game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball that has entered the second special figure starting port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the game island side. In the present embodiment, the first special figure starting port 230 and the second special figure starting port 232 are provided, but three starting ports may be provided. Here, when there are three starting ports, two first special figure starting ports may be provided, and one second special figure starting port may be provided. Conversely, one first special figure starting port may be provided. And two second special figure starting ports may be provided. When only one special figure display device is provided, three starting ports may be configured to correspond to the same special figure display device. Further, four or more starting ports may be provided.

  In the present embodiment, only one variable winning opening 234 is provided below the center of the gaming board 200. The variable winning opening 234 includes a variable winning opening and a door member 2341 which can be opened and closed by a solenoid. The variable winning opening may be called a large winning opening, and the variable winning opening 234 may be called an attacker. The door member 2341 changes the state from any one of a predetermined closed state and an open state in which the game ball can easily enter the variable winning opening than the closed state, to the other state. The closed state and the open state are both stationary states, the closed state is a predetermined first stationary state, and the closed state of the variable winning opening 234 of the present embodiment is such that the door member 2341 is on the player side of the gaming board 200 on the player side. It is a stationary state that matches the plane. On the other hand, the open state is a predetermined second stationary state, and the open state of the variable winning opening 234 of the present embodiment is rotated toward the player until the door member 2341 becomes substantially perpendicular to the game board 200. It is stationary. The variable winning opening 234 keeps a closed state until a big hit game, which will be described later, is started, and when the big hit game is started, the state is repeatedly changed between the open state and the closed state. In addition, the closed state may be a state in which the game ball is slightly opened to the extent that it is practically impossible to enter, in addition to a state in which the game ball is completely closed. Further, the variable winning opening is not limited to the one shown in FIG. 3 as long as it allows a game ball to be won by passing or entering the game ball. When the first special figure display device 212 or the second special figure display device 214 stops displaying the big hit symbol after winning the special figure change game, the door member 2341 opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the variable winning opening 234, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 15) of balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. Note that the ball that has entered the variable winning opening 234 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the gaming island side. In the present embodiment, only one variable winning port is provided, but two variable winning ports may be provided. Here, when two variable winning openings are provided, while one of the first variable winning opening and the second variable winning opening is open, the other variable winning opening is always closed. , But both variable winning openings may be opened. Further, three or more variable winning openings may be provided.

  Further, in the vicinity of the winning opening and the starting opening, a plurality of disc-shaped hitting direction changing members 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails 238 are arranged, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, An out port 240 is provided for guiding a ball that did not win any of the winning ports or starting ports to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging the ball to the game island side.

  The ball accommodated in the upper plate 126 is supplied to the firing position of the firing rail. In this pachinko machine 100, the firing motor is driven with an intensity corresponding to the operation amount of the ball firing handle 134 of the player, and the firing rod 146 and the firing hammer 148 pass the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 to the game area 124. Launch. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the traveling direction by the hitting ball direction conversion member 236, the game nail 238, or the like, and has a winning opening (a general winning opening 226, a variable winning opening 234) or a starting opening. (The first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232), the winning port, the winning port or the starting port without any prize, or passing through the general figure starting port 228, the out port 240 To reach. Note that an out sensor may be provided on the game board. The out sensor is a game ball that has passed the sensors of the winning opening (general winning opening 226, variable winning opening 234) and a game that has passed the sensors of the starting opening (first special figure starting opening 230 and second special figure starting opening 232). This is a sensor configured to detect a ball and a game ball that has entered the out mouth. Note that a sensor configured to be able to detect only a part of the winning opening, the starting opening, and the out opening may be used.

<Direction device 206>
Next, the effect device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  On the front side of the effect device 206, a warp device 242 and a stage 244 are arranged in a region where the game ball can roll, and a motion effector 224 is arranged in a region where the game ball cannot roll. . On the back side of the effect device 206, a decorative symbol display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as a door) are provided. That is, in the rendering device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding device 246 are located behind the warp device 242, the stage 244, and the rendering movable body 224.

  The warping device 242 discharges the game balls that have entered the warp entrance 242a provided at the upper left of the effect device 206 to the stage 244 below the front surface of the effect device 206 from the warp outlet 242b.

  The stage 244 is capable of rolling a ball discharged from the warp exit 242b, a ball riding on the game nail 238, or the like, and a ball passing through the stage 244 enters the first special figure starting port 230. A special route 244a that facilitates the ball is provided.

  In the present embodiment, the effect movable body 224 includes an upper arm 224a and a forearm 224b imitating the upper arm and forearm of a human right arm, and an upper arm motor (not shown) for rotating the upper arm 224a to the position of the shoulder and an elbow. A forearm motor (not shown) for rotating the forearm portion 224b at a position is provided. The effect movable body 224 moves in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by the upper arm motor and the forearm motor.

  The shielding device 246 includes a lattice-shaped left door 246a and a right door 246b, and is disposed between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front stage 244. A belt wound around two pulleys (not shown) is fixed to upper portions of the left door 246a and the right door 246b, respectively. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b move right and left, respectively, with the operation of the belt driven by the motor via the pulley. When the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the shielding device 246 overlaps the respective inner ends, and shields the decorative symbol display device 208 so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the decorative symbol display device 208. When the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened, the respective inner ends slightly overlap with the outer ends of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can visually recognize all the displays on the decorative symbol display device 208. It is. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can be stopped at arbitrary positions, for example, only a part of the decorative symbol is enough to allow the player to identify which decorative symbol is the displayed decorative symbol. Can be shielded. Note that the left door 246a and the right door 246b may allow a part of the decorative design display device 208 behind the lattice hole to be visible, or cover the sash part of the lattice hole with a translucent lens body. The display by the decorative design display device 208 may be vaguely visually recognized by the player, or the sash portion of the hole of the lattice may be completely closed (shielded), and the decorative design display device 208 at the rear may be made completely invisible. Is also good.

  The decorative lamps such as the speaker 120 and the frame lamp 122 shown in FIG. 1, the decorative symbol display device 208, the effect movable body 224, and the shielding device 246 shown in FIG. 3 correspond to the effect means, and among them, the decorative symbol display device 208. Corresponds to an example of the decorative symbol display means.

  Further, on the game board 200, a specification sticker 290 indicating the specification of the gaming table is attached at a position visible to the player.

  Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 3 is a circuit block diagram of the control unit. The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 is roughly divided into a main control unit 300 for controlling a central part of the game, and a main effect of the production in response to a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. A first sub-controller 400 for performing control, a second sub-controller 500 for controlling various devices based on a command transmitted from the first sub-controller 400, and a main controller 300 in response to a command transmitted by the main controller 300. A payout control unit 600 for controlling the payout of game balls, a launch control unit 630 for controlling launch of game balls, and a power control unit 660 for controlling power supplied to the pachinko machine 100. I have.

  First, the main controller 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing a control program and various data, a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, And a WDT 314 for monitoring abnormalities in the program processing, and a random number generation circuit (counter circuit) 318 (this circuit has two built-in counters). It is equipped with. Note that another storage device may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock. Further, the random number value generation circuit 318 is used as a hardware random number counter that changes a numerical value in a range of 0 to 65535 every time a clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received. Although the random number generation circuit 318 is incorporated in the basic circuit 302, it may be connected to the basic circuit 302.

  In addition, the basic circuit 302 receives signals output from various sensors 320 including a predetermined ball detection sensor, for example, a sensor for detecting a game ball passing through each starting port, a winning port, a variable winning port, and a bottom plate full sensor. Then, a sensor circuit 322 for outputting the amplification result and the comparison result with the reference voltage to the CPU 304 and the random number value generation circuit 318 in the basic circuit 302 and a predetermined symbol display device such as the first special figure display device 212 and the 2. A drive circuit 324 for performing display control of the special figure display device 214, a drive circuit 326 for performing display control of a predetermined symbol display device, for example, a general symbol display device 210, and various state display units 328 (for example, A drive circuit 330 for performing display control of a general-purpose holding lamp 216, a special-purpose holding lamp 218, a special-purpose holding lamp 220, and a high-accuracy middle lamp 222; Driving means, for example, a driving means for driving the tongue member 2321 of the second special figure starting port 232 as an ordinary electric accessory, a driving means for driving the door member 2341 of the variable winning opening 234 as a special electric accessory, and the like. And a drive circuit 334 for controlling the various solenoids 332 included therein. In this example, the crystal oscillator 316a and the random value generation circuit 318 are provided separately, but the crystal oscillator 316a may be included in the random value generation circuit 318.

  When the ball detection sensor 320 detects that the ball has entered the first special figure starting port 230, the sensor circuit 322 sends a signal indicating that the ball has been detected to the random value generation circuit 318 in the basic circuit 302. Output. Upon receiving this signal, the random number generation circuit 318 latches the value of the counter corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230 at that timing, and stores the latched value in the built-in counter corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230. The value is stored in the value storage register. Similarly, when the random number generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that a ball has won the second special figure starting port 232, the random number generation circuit 318 calculates the value of the counter corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232 at that timing. The latched value is stored in a built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 transmits an external hall computer (not shown) via the information output circuit 336 via an external terminal board (not shown). The game information (for example, a game state) of the pachinko machine 100 is output to the information input circuit 350 provided in the device.

  Further, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 for monitoring the voltage value of the power supply supplied to the main control unit 300 from the power supply control unit 660. Is smaller than a predetermined value (9 V in this example), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has decreased is output to the basic circuit 302.

  Further, the main controller 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When an activation signal is input, game control is started (a main control unit main process described later is started).

  In addition, the main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600. Communication with one sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is enabled. The information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the information communication between the main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 is two-way communication. The main control unit 300 is configured to be able to transmit a signal such as a command to the first sub-control unit 400, but is configured to be unable to transmit a signal such as a command to the main control unit 300 from the first sub-control unit 400. are doing. However, information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 may be performed by two-way communication. Further, the payout control unit 600 is configured to be able to transmit a signal such as a command to the main control unit 300, but is configured to be unable to transmit a signal such as a command from the payout control unit 600 to the main control unit 300. Is also good.

  Next, the first sub control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 mainly based on a command or the like transmitted by the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, a counter timer 412 for measuring time and the number of times, A serial communication control circuit 424 is mounted. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. Further, a ROM 406 for storing a control program and various effect data is connected to the basic circuit 402. The ROM 406 may store the control program and various effect data in separate ROMs. Further, a configuration in which the ROM 406 is provided in the basic circuit 402 may be employed. The serial communication control circuit 424 connects the game board lamp drive circuit 440 for controlling the game board lamp 442 and the game board frame lamp drive circuit 450 for controlling the game board frame lamp 452. Then, lighting control by serial communication is performed between the game board lamp drive circuit 440 and the game frame lamp drive circuit 450.

  The basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC (S-ROM) 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and the amplifier), and a drive circuit 422 for performing drive control of the effect movable body 224 and the shielding device 246. , A sensor circuit 428 and a volume switch 163 for adjusting the volume output from the speaker 120. The sensor circuit 428 detects various movable body sensors 430 that detect the current position of the shielding device 246, the effect movable body 224, and the like, and detects pressing of various buttons that constitute the effect button 136 (chance button 136) and the operation key unit 137. The detection signal from the button sensor 426 is output to the basic circuit 402.

  Next, the second sub control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives a control command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 via an input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control command. ing. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, a counter timer 512 for measuring time, number of times, and the like, and a CPU 504. (Video display processor) 516 that reads out image data and the like stored in the ROM 506 based on the signal from the CPU, generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 518, and displays the image on the decorative design display device 208. And, is equipped. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. Further, the basic circuit 502 is connected to a ROM 506 in which a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, data for image display, and the like are stored.

  Next, the payout control unit 600, the launch control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The payout control unit 600 mainly controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 based on a signal such as a command transmitted by the main control unit 300, and based on a control signal output from the payout sensor 604, a prize ball or a ball loan. It is detected whether or not the payout is completed. The payout control unit 600 communicates with the card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 via the interface unit 606. In addition, the payout control unit 600 has received prize ball information indicating that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of prize balls have been paid out, and has paid out a predetermined number (for example, 25) of lent balls. Is output to the information input circuit 350 via an external terminal board (not shown). In addition, a frame sensor 605 is connected to the payout control unit 600. The frame sensor 605 includes a body opening sensor that detects that the main body 104 has been opened, a front frame door sensor that detects that the front frame door 106 has been opened, and the like. When the sensor is open, these sensors detect it and output an open signal. When outputting the opening signal from the frame sensor 605, the payout control unit 600 outputs door opening information to the main control unit 300.

  The firing control unit 630 outputs a control signal for instructing permission or stop of firing, which is output from the payout control unit 600, and an operation of the ball firing handle 134 by the player, which is output from a firing intensity output circuit provided in the ball firing handle 134. Control of the firing solenoid 632 for driving the firing rod 146 and the firing hammer 148, and control of the ball feeder 634 for supplying a ball from the upper plate 126 to the firing device 110, based on a control signal instructing the firing intensity according to the amount. I do.

    The power control unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into DC, converts the DC power into a predetermined voltage, and controls each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 and the dispensing device 152 and the like. Supply to each device. Further, the power supply control unit 660 is a power storage circuit (for example, for supplying power to a predetermined component (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the external power supply is cut off (for example, for example). , Capacitors). In the present embodiment, power of a predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub-control unit 500, and the main control unit 300, the second sub-control unit 500 and the discharge unit Although the power supply of the predetermined voltage is supplied to the control unit 630, the power supply of the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit and each device through another power supply path.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 5A to 5D, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the decorative design display device 208, and the general figure display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed. The following describes the types of special maps and ordinary maps.

  The special figure 1 fluctuating game is started on condition that the first starting port sensor which is a ball detection sensor detects that a ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230, and the ball enters the special figure 2 starting port 232. The special figure 2 fluctuating game is started on condition that the ball is detected by the second starting port sensor which is a ball detection sensor. When the special figure 1 fluctuation game is started, the first special figure display device 212 repeats the lighting of all seven segments and the lighting of the central one segment. (Fluctuating game). In addition, when the special figure 2 variable game is started, the second special figure display device 214 repeats “lighting of special figure 2” by repeating all lighting of seven segments and lighting of one central segment ( (Figure game). Then, when the fluctuation time determined before the start of the change of the special figure 1 elapses, the first special figure display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol mode of the special figure 1, and the fluctuation time determined before the start of the change of the special figure 2 Is elapsed, the second special figure display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol mode of the special figure 2. Hereinafter, the variable display from the start of the “variable display of the special figure 1 or 2” to the stop display of the stop symbol mode of the special figure 1 or 2 may be referred to as the variable display of the special figure. The variable display of the special figure may be performed continuously plural times.

  FIG. 5A shows an example of the stop symbol mode of the special figure 1. FIG. 5A shows nine types of special figures from “special figure A” to “special figure I”. In FIG. 5A, a white portion in the figure indicates a location of a segment to be turned off, and a black portion indicates a location of a segment to be turned on.

  In the present embodiment, seven types of big hit symbols (“special symbol A” to “special symbol G”) are prepared as the stop symbol mode of the special symbol. "Special figure A" is a 15 round (R) big hit symbol, and a 15R certain variable big hit pattern that can expect to get a ball in all of the 15 rounds. "Special figure B" is a 15R big hit pattern. Therefore, while it is possible to expect winning in five of the fifteen rounds, in the remaining rounds, it is a real 5R sure-variable big hit symbol in which no winning can be expected, and the “special figure C” is a 15R big hit symbol. There is a 15R-Rank Up Bonus (RUB) symbol that can be expected to obtain a ball in all of the 15 rounds, and the “special figure D” is a 15R jackpot symbol and 8 of the 15 rounds. It is a real 8R-RUB in which it is not expected to obtain a ball in the remaining rounds while it is expected to obtain a ball in one round. It is a real 4R-RUB that is expected to obtain balls in the four rounds of the und, but is not expected to obtain balls in the remaining rounds. FIG. G "is a 2R jackpot design, which is called a latent probability change or hidden probability change in which it is not expected to obtain a ball in any round. Here, the rank-up bonus is, for example, a big hit in which it is difficult for the player to specify how long a round in which a winning is expected to be obtained at the start of the big hit in a specific round (for example, 5 rounds). (The 9th round or the 9th round), it is a jackpot in which the player is inspired to determine whether or not the round in which the expected payout can be obtained continues.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the determination as to whether or not a big hit in the special figure fluctuating game is made by lottery of a hardware random number, and the determination as to whether or not a special big hit is made by lottery of a software random number. The difference between the normal jackpot and the probable jackpot is whether the probability of winning the jackpot is high (probable jackpot) or low (normal jackpot) in the next special figure change game. Hereinafter, the state in which the probability of winning the jackpot is high is referred to as a special figure high probability state (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “special figure probable change” or simply “probable change”). Called a low probability state. In addition, the game may shift to the time-saving state (electric support state) after the end of the big hit game. Here, the electric support state is defined as a predetermined time where the advantage of the player is higher than the non-electric support state, for example, by shortening the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variable game to the start of the next big hit. Refers to the state. Although the time reduction will be described in detail later, the time reduction state is referred to as a general figure high probability state (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “general probability change”), and the state not in the time reduction state is referred to as a general figure low probability state. As described above, the electric support state (time saving state) is started on condition that the big hit game ends. Strictly speaking, the “electric support state” is a state related to ordinary figures, and the “time reduction state” is a state related to special figures or a state related to ordinary figures and special figures. A time-saving flag is provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. When the time-saving flag is set to ON, the vehicle is in the power-supply state and is in the normal high probability state. In the high probability state of the normal figure, it is easier to win the variable game in the normal state than in the low probability state of the general figure (probable change of the general figure). For example, the winning probability of the general-purpose fluctuating game is 1/100 in the general-purpose low-probability state (non-electric support state), but increases to 99/100 in the general-purpose high probability state (electric support state). In addition, in the electric support state, the fluctuation time of the general-purpose fluctuating game is shorter than in the non-electric support state (normal-figure variation). For example, in the non-electric support state, the fluctuation time of the ordinary figure fluctuation game of 10 seconds is reduced to 2 seconds in the electric support state. Further, in the electric support state, the open time in one opening of the blade member 2321 of the special figure 2 starting port 232 is likely to be longer than that in the non-electric support state (the electric chew open period is extended). For example, in the non-power support state, the power chew opening period of 0.5 seconds is extended to 2 seconds in the power support state. Further, the blade members 2321 are more likely to open in the electric support state than in the non-electric support state (the number of times the electric chew is opened). For example, a wing member 2321 that opens only once in the non-electric support state for one prize to the normal figure starting port 228 opens twice in the electric support state (opens for 2 seconds, closes for 1 second, and restarts for 2 seconds) Open). By extending the power chew opening period or increasing the number of times the power chew is opened, the probability of entering the special figure 2 starting port 232 increases. The time reduction flag is set to off during the big hit game. Therefore, the non-power support state is maintained during the big hit game. This is because a game ball is picked up by an electric chew with a small number of prize balls, especially in a big hit game, and if the winning of the game ball to the variable winning opening (attacker) 234 decreases, there is a case where a disadvantage is caused to the player. Because there is. In the present embodiment, in the power support state (time saving state), all of the normal figure change, the general figure change, the extension of the power chew opening period, and the increase in the number of times the power chew is opened are performed. If any one of them is performed, the player has a higher advantage, and may be in the electric support state (time saving state). Alternatively, if either the extension of the electric chew opening period or the increase in the number of times the electric chew is opened, the probability of entering the special figure 2 starting port 232 is increased, the electric support state (time saving state) may be set. In the non-electric support state, game balls are less likely to enter the special figure 2 starting port 232 than in the electric support state. As described above, the special figure 2 starting port 232 is changed into a prize difficult state in which game balls are hard to enter and an easy prize state in which game balls are easy to enter. The entrance of the special figure 2 starting port 232 is in an easy winning state for a longer time in the electric support state than in the non-electric support state. In the present embodiment, when the “special figure A” to the “special figure E” are stopped and displayed, after the big hit game that is performed thereafter is completed, the electric support state (the normal figure high probability state) is continued until the next big hit game is started. ) Is maintained and the “special figure F” is stopped and displayed, and after the big hit game that is performed thereafter, the electric support state is maintained while the special figure changing game is performed 100 times, and the non- Transition to the support state (low probability state in ordinary figure). On the other hand, when a big hit without an electric support ("Tokuzu G") is won, the game does not shift to the electric support state after the end of the big hit game.

    As described above, in the present embodiment, when the “special figure A” to the “special figure E” are stopped and displayed, the control state is changed to the special figure high probability general figure high probability state after the big hit game ends. When the "special figure F" is stopped and displayed, the control state is changed to the special figure low probability general figure high probability state after the big hit game is over. When the “special figure G” is stopped and displayed, the control state is changed to the special figure high probability general figure low probability state after the big hit game is over.

  In this embodiment, one type of stop symbol is prepared as a small hit symbol in addition to the big hit symbol. In the small hitting game, the door member 2341 of the variable winning opening 234 operates a predetermined number of times (for example, twice), and the door member 2341 keeps the open state for a maximum of only 0.1 second per operation. In addition, in the opening of the door member 2341 in the small hit, for example, when the game ball enters a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) at the first opening, or a predetermined amount of game value (the predetermined number of balls) is obtained. If so, the second and subsequent releases are not performed. During the small hit game, the state shifts to the special figure low probability ordinary figure low probability state. The small hit is a hit where the control state does not change before and after the small hit game, and returns to the control state before the start of the small hit game after the small hit game ends. “Special figure H” shown in FIG. 5A is a small hit symbol. In the present embodiment, the opening / closing mode (opening / closing count and opening time) of the variable winning port 234 in the small hitting game and the opening / closing mode (opening) of the variable winning port 234 in the big hit game to which the “special figure G” is stopped and displayed and shifted. Although the number of times and the opening time are substantially the same, they may be different, for example, at least one of the number of times of opening and the opening time may be different.

  Further, in the present embodiment, one type of stop symbol is prepared as a loss symbol. "Special figure I" is a lost pattern.

  FIG. 5B shows an example of the stop symbol mode of the special figure 2. FIG. 5B shows six types of special figures, “special figure a” to “special figure f”, of which five special figures are big hits (“special figure a” to “special figure a”). E)). The "special figure a" is a 15R jackpot symbol, and a 15R probability variable jackpot symbol that can be expected to obtain a ball in all of the 15 rounds. The "special figure b" is a 15R jackpot symbol. It is a 15R-RUB symbol that can be expected to obtain balls in all rounds of the round, and the "special figure c" is a 15R jackpot design, and is expected to obtain balls in eight of the 15 rounds On the other hand, it is a real 8R-RUB in which it is not expected to obtain a ball in the remaining rounds, and the “Tokuzu d” is a 15R jackpot design, and it is expected to obtain a ball in four of the 15 rounds On the other hand, in the remaining rounds, it is a real 4R-RUB for which it is not expected to obtain a payout, and the “special figure e” is a 2R normal big hit symbol.

  Further, in the present embodiment, one type of stop symbol is prepared as a loss symbol. "Special figure f" is a lost pattern.

  FIG. 5C shows an example of a decorative pattern. There are ten types of decorative patterns of the present embodiment, “decoration 1” to “decoration 10”. The first starting port sensor detects that a ball has won the special figure 1 starting port 230 or the special figure 2 starting port 232, that is, that the ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230, or the special figure 2 Each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided on condition that the second entrance sensor detects that a ball has entered the starting slot 232. In the pattern display area, the display is switched in the order of "decoration 1" → "decoration 2" → "decoration 3" → ... "decoration 9" → "decoration 10" → "decoration 1" → ... "Variable display of symbols" is performed. In other words, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the decorative symbol in a variable manner, separately from the first special symbol display device 212 and the second special symbol display device 214. Then, the stop symbol mode which is a combination of the decorative symbols is stopped and displayed.

  In the case of notifying the real 5R probability variable jackpot (“special figure B”), the 5R normal jackpot (“special figure F”), and the 2R normal jackpot (“special figure e”), the “decoration” is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. A combination of decorative patterns in which three decorative patterns of the same number other than "3-decoration 3-decoration 3" and "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7" are arranged (for example, "decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1" or "decoration 1-decoration 1" Decoration 4—decoration 4—decoration 4 ”). When notifying the 15R sure-change jackpot (“special figure A” and “special figure a”), “decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3” or “decoration 7-decoration 7” is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. −decoration 7 ”is stopped and displayed. Furthermore, when notifying 15R-RUB, real 8R-RUB, and real 4R-RUB, the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c are decorative symbols of the same number, and the middle symbol display area 208b is the lord. A combination of decorative patterns (for example, “decoration 1-decoration-decoration 1” or “decoration 4-decoration-decoration 4”) that is a decoration pattern is stopped and displayed. In addition, when the hidden probability change (“special figure G”) or the small hit (“special figure H”), which is the 2R big hit, is notified, “decorative 1-decorative 2-decorative” is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. A combination of decorative symbols such as "3" is stopped and displayed. A combination of decorative patterns such as "decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 3" may be referred to as a chance. In addition, when notifying a lost symbol of “Special Figure I” or “Special Figure f”, a combination of decorative patterns other than the combination of decorative patterns described above (for example, Eye) stop display.

  Hereinafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display from the start of the "decorative display of the decorative symbol" until the stop symbol mode of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed may be referred to as the variable display of the decorative symbol. The variable display of the decorative symbol is performed under the control of the first sub-control unit 400.

  FIG. 5 (d) shows an example of a stop symbol mode in a general figure. In this embodiment, there are two types of the stop display mode of the general symbol, namely, a general symbol "Picture A" and a non-standard symbol "Primary symbol B". Based on the fact that the gate sensor, which is a ball detection sensor, detects that a ball has passed through the general-purpose starting port 228, the general-purpose display device 210 displays all seven segments and turns on one central segment. Performing the “floating display of the ordinary figure” (the ordinary figure fluctuating game) that repeats lighting. Then, after the fluctuation time has elapsed, any one of the symbols "Picture B", which is different from the "Picture A", which is the winning symbol, is stopped and displayed. In FIG. 5D as well, a white portion in the figure indicates the location of the segment to be turned off, and a black portion indicates the location of the segment to be turned on.

  Hereinafter, the display from the start of the “floating display of the ordinary figure” to the stop display of the stop symbol mode of the ordinary figure may be referred to as the “floating display of the ordinary figure”.

<Main control unit main processing>
Next, the main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control section main processing.

  The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 stores a special figure random number, a special figure round decision random number, a special figure electric support decision random number, and a special figure design decision random number. Further, the RAM 308 is provided with a random number counter for generating these various random numbers. Further, the RAM 308 stores the number of reserved special figures, the special figure winning random number value, various determination (lottery) results, and the like. Hereinafter, the area for storing the reserved number of special figures in the RAM 308 may be referred to as a special figure reserved number storage area. Further, the RAM 308 is provided with a starting information storage unit for a special figure, which is divided into a maximum number (four in this example) of areas in which the start of the determination of the success or failure (lottery) can be suspended. A random number storage area for ordinary drawing is also provided. As will be described later, the start information storage unit for special maps stores a plurality of types of start information in a set in a winning order (holding order) for each area.

  As described above, the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 is provided with the start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 that has received the start signal performs a reset start by a reset interrupt, and executes a main control unit main process shown in FIG. 6 according to a control program stored in the ROM 306 in advance.

  In step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. In the initial setting 1, the stack initial value is set (temporary setting) in the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, the interrupt mask is set, the I / O 310 is initialized, various variables stored in the RAM 308 are initialized, and the WDT 314 is set. Operation permission, setting of initial values, and the like. In the present embodiment, a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in the WDT 314 as an initial value.

  In step S103, the value of the counter of the WDT 314 is cleared, and the time measurement by the WDT 314 is restarted.

  In step S105, it is determined whether or not the low-voltage signal is on, that is, the voltage monitoring circuit 338 determines the voltage value of the power supplied from the power control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 via the second sub-control unit 500. Is smaller than a predetermined value (9 v in the present embodiment), it is monitored whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has decreased is output. If the low-voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects the power-off), the process returns to step S103. If the low-voltage signal is off (the CPU 304 does not detect the power-off), the process returns to step S103. Proceed to S107. Note that, even immediately after the power is turned on, if the predetermined value (9 V) has not yet been reached, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly performed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

  In step S107, initialization 2 is performed. In the initial setting 2, a process for setting a value for determining a period for executing a main control unit timer interrupt process described later at regular intervals in the timer circuit 312, a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, A process of outputting a clear signal from an output port (output port to the first sub-control unit 400), a setting to permit writing to the RAM 308, and the like are performed.

  In step S109, it is determined whether or not the power supply returns to the state before the power interruption (before the power failure). ), The process proceeds to the initialization process (step S113).

  Specifically, first, a RAM clear signal transmitted when a store clerk or the like of the game store operates the RAM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board 182 shown in FIG. 2 (indicating that an operation has been performed). Is determined, that is, whether or not the RAM clear is required. If the RAM clear signal is ON (if the RAM clear is required), the process proceeds to step S113 to reset the basic circuit 302 to the initial state. move on. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is off (when RAM clear is not required), the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and the power status information is information indicating suspend. It is determined whether or not. If the power status information is not information indicating suspend, the process proceeds to step S113 to reset the basic circuit 302 to the initial state. If the power status information is information indicating suspend, a predetermined area of the RAM 308 is stored. A checksum is calculated by adding all the 1-byte data stored in (for example, all the areas) to a 1-byte configuration register whose initial value is 0, and the calculated checksum results in a specific value (for example, 0) (whether or not the checksum result is normal). When the result of the checksum is a specific value (for example, 0) (when the result of the checksum is normal), the process proceeds to step S111 to return to the state before the power failure, and the result of the checksum is the specific value. When the value is other than the value (for example, 0) (when the result of the checksum is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S113 to reset the pachinko machine 100 to the initial state. Similarly, when the power status information indicates information other than “suspend”, the process proceeds to step S113.

  In step S111, a power recovery process is performed. In the power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read out, and the stack pointer is reset (actually set). Further, at the time of power failure, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 is read out, and after resetting each register, interrupt permission is set. Thereafter, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the stack pointer and the register after the reset, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state at the time of power-off. That is, the process is restarted from the instruction following the (predetermined in step S115) instruction immediately before branching to the timer interrupt process (described later) immediately before the power interruption. Further, a transmission information storage area is provided in the RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 in the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. In step S111, a power restoration command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power restoration command is a command indicating that the state has been returned to the state at the time of power interruption, and is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 in step S233 in the timer interrupt processing of the main control unit 300 described later.

  In step S113, an initialization process is performed. In this initialization processing, setting of interrupt prohibition, setting of a stack initial value to a stack pointer (main setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed. Here, the normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S113) of the main control unit 300 has been performed. Like the power restoration command, the normal return command returns to step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300. Sent to one sub-control unit 400.

  In step S115, after setting interrupt prohibition, a basic random number initial value update process is performed. In the basic random number initial value updating process, two initial value generating random number counters for generating the initial values of the ordinary figure winning random number counter and the special figure random number value counter are updated. For example, assuming that the numerical range that can be taken as the general-purpose winning random number value is 0 to 20, the value is obtained from the random number counter storage area for generating the general-purpose winning random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the obtained value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the obtained value is 21, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. The other initial value generation random number counters and random number counters are similarly updated. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S115 except during the execution of the timer interrupt process started every predetermined period.

<Main controller timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main control unit timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control unit timer interrupt processing.

  The main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 includes a timer circuit 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (once about every 4 ms in the present embodiment). The unit timer interrupt process is started at a predetermined cycle.

  In step S201, a timer interrupt start process is performed. In the timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving the value of each register of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed.

  In step S203, the WDT 314 is periodically (set) so that the count value of the WDT 314 does not exceed the initial set value (32.8 ms in the present embodiment) and a WDT interrupt does not occur (does not detect a processing abnormality). In the embodiment, the restart is performed once about every 2 ms which is the cycle of the main control unit timer interrupt.

  In step S205, an input port state update process is performed. In this input port state update processing, detection signals of various sensors 320 shown in FIG. 4 including various sphere detection sensors are input through input ports of the I / O 310 to monitor presence / absence of the detection signals. It is stored in a signal state storage area provided for each sensor 320. To describe the detection signal of the ball detection sensor as an example, the information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor detected in the last two timer interrupt processes (about 4 ms before) is stored in the RAM 308 for each ball detection sensor. The information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area provided separately for each ball detection sensor, and this information is stored in the detection signal storage area provided two times before in the RAM 308 for each ball detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before) is performed. ) Is read from the present detection signal storage area provided in the RAM 308 for each of the sphere detection sensors, and the information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area. To memorize. Further, the detection signals of the respective ball detection sensors detected this time are stored in the above-described current detection signal storage area.

  In step S205, the information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each ball detection sensor stored in each of the above-described two-time detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared. It is determined whether or not the information on the presence / absence of the past three detection signals from the ball detection sensor matches the winning determination pattern information. This main control timer interrupt processing is repeated several times at a very short interval of about 2 ms while one game ball passes through one ball detection sensor. Therefore, every time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, in step S205 described above, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the above-mentioned two-time detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts passing through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal twice before, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a current detection signal. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection of the ball detection sensor and noise, if a detection signal is stored twice consecutively after no detection signal, it is determined that a prize has been won. The ROM 306 of the main controller 300 shown in FIG. 4 stores winning determination pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is no previous two-time detection signal, there is a previous detection signal, and there is a current detection signal). In this step S205, information on the presence or absence of the past three detection signals in each ball detection sensor is determined by predetermined winning determination pattern information (in the present embodiment, no detection signal before last time, presence of previous detection signal, presence of current detection signal) When the match is made with the general winning opening 226, the variable winning opening 234, the first special figure starting port 230, and the second special figure starting port 232, or the general figure starting port 228 Is determined to have passed. That is, it is determined that there is a winning in these winning openings 234, 226 and these starting openings 230, 232, 228. For example, if the information on the presence / absence of the past three detection signals in the first starting port sensor that detects a ball entering the first special figure starting port 230 matches the above-mentioned winning determination pattern information, the first special drawing It is determined that there is a prize in the starting port 230, that is, it is determined that a game medium passing through the predetermined area has been detected, and a process associated with a prize in the first special figure starting port 230 is performed. If the presence / absence information does not match the above-described winning determination pattern information, the process branches to the subsequent process without performing the subsequent process of winning the first special figure starting port 230. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in the present embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal before last time, no previous detection signal, and no current detection signal). After it is determined that there is a prize once, it is not determined that there is a prize until the information on the presence / absence of the past three detection signals in each ball detection sensor matches the prize determination clear pattern information. If it matches the pattern information, it is determined whether or not the pattern information matches the winning determination pattern information.

  In steps S207 and S209, a basic random number initial value updating process and a basic random number updating process are performed. In these basic random number initial value updating processing and basic random number updating processing, the value of the random number counter for initial value generation performed in step S115 is updated, and then the general-purpose winning random number value and Update the random number counter for generating each special figure random number value. For example, assuming that the numerical range that can be taken as the general-purpose winning random number value is 0 to 100, a value is obtained from a random number counter storage area for generating the general-purpose winning random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the obtained value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. Also, as a result of adding 1 to the obtained value, when it is determined that the random number counter has made one round, the value of the random number counter for initial value generation corresponding to each random number counter is obtained and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set. For example, a value obtained from a random number counter for generating a general-purpose winning random number value that fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 100 and a result obtained by adding 1 to the obtained value are stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), the value is obtained as an initial value from the initial value generating random number counter corresponding to the random number counter for generating the general winning random number value. The initial value set this time is stored in the above-mentioned initial value storage area in order to set the random number counter for generating the winning random number value and to determine that the random number counter for generating the general winning random number has made one round next time. Keep it. In addition to the above-described initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating the normal figure winning random number has made one round, it is determined that the random number counter for generating the special figure random number has made one round. Is provided in the RAM 308.

  In step S211, an effect random number update process is performed. In the effect random number updating process, the random number counter for generating the effect random number value used by the main control unit 300 is updated.

  In step S213, a timer update process is performed. In this timer update process, the ordinary symbol display symbol update timer for measuring the time for changing and stopping the symbol on the ordinary symbol display device 210, the symbol is displayed on the first special symbol display device 212, and the second special symbol display device 214. Various kinds of timers, including a special figure display symbol update timer for measuring the time of fluctuation / stop display, a timer for measuring a predetermined prize production time, a predetermined opening time, a predetermined closing time, a predetermined end production period, and the like. Update the timer.

  In step S215, a winning opening counter updating process is performed. In the winning opening counter updating process, when a winning is achieved in the winning opening 234, 226 or the starting opening 230, 232, the value of the prize ball storage area provided for each winning opening or each starting opening is stored in the RAM 308. Read, 1 is added, and the original prize ball number storage area is set.

  In step S217, a winning reception process is performed. In the winning reception process, if a predetermined condition is satisfied, a plurality of types of start information is acquired. The plurality of types of start information acquired here are stored as a set of start information in an empty area in the start information storage unit provided in the RAM 308 according to the winning order (holding order).

  In step S219 executed after step S217, a payout request number transmission process is performed. The output schedule information and the payout request information output to the payout control unit 600 shown in FIG. 4 are composed of 1 byte, and the strobe information (when ON, it indicates that data is set) and the bit 6 , Power-on information (in the case of ON, it indicates that this is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4 to 5 indicate the current processing type (0 to 3) for encryption, and bits 0 to 3 indicate encryption. The number of payout requests after chemical processing is shown.

  In step S221, a normal drawing state update process is performed. This ordinary figure state updating processing performs one of a plurality of processings corresponding to the ordinary figure state. For example, in the ordinary symbol state update process during the ordinary symbol change display (the value of the ordinary symbol display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the lighting and turning off of the 7-segment LED constituting the ordinary symbol display device 210 are repeated. Turn off drive control is performed. By performing this control, the ordinary symbol display device 210 performs a fluctuation display of a normal figure (normal figure fluctuation game).

  Also, in the ordinary symbol state update processing at the timing when the ordinary symbol fluctuation display time has elapsed (when the value of the ordinary symbol display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), when the hit flag is on, the winning symbol is displayed. The 7-segment LED constituting the ordinary symbol display device 210 is controlled to be turned on and off so as to be in a mode, and when the hit flag is off, the ordinary symbol display device 210 is configured to be in a lost symbol display mode. ON / OFF drive control of the 7-segment LED is performed. Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes in addition to the ordinary state updating process. Here, the above-mentioned lighting / light-off driving control is performed, and a setting indicating that the normal stop display is being performed is performed in the setting area. By performing this control, the ordinary symbol display device 210 determines one of the winning symbol (the ordinary symbol A shown in FIG. 5C) and the lost symbol (the ordinary symbol B shown in FIG. 5C). Display. After that, for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in a storage area of a general-purpose stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to maintain the display. With this setting, the symbol that has been confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the ordinary figure fluctuating game is notified to the player.

  Further, if the result of the normal figure fluctuation game is a hit, the general figure hit flag is turned on as described later. When the ordinary figure hit flag is ON, the ordinary figure state updating process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (timing when the value of the ordinary figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0) is used. In the set area, the normal operation is set, and the blade member 2321 is opened in the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the blade member 2321 of the second special figure starting port 232 for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds). And the information indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Also, in the general state updating process started at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (when the value of the blade opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the blade member is closed for a predetermined closing period (for example, 500 msec). A signal for holding the blade member 2321 in a closed state is output to a solenoid (332) for driving the opening and closing of the blade 2321, and information indicating the closing period is set in a storage area of a blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Also, in the general-state updating process started at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (timing when the value of the blade closing-time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the non-operating state of the general figure is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. I do. Further, if the result of the normal figure variable game is a loss, the general figure loss flag is turned on as described later. When the general-figure losing flag is on, even in the general-figure state update processing at the timing when the above-described predetermined stop display period ends (timing when the value of the general-figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, a setting is made to set the non-operating state of the ordinary drawing. In the ordinary figure state updating process when the ordinary figure is not operating, the process proceeds to the next step S223 without doing anything.

  In step S223, a general drawing related lottery process is performed. In this general drawing related lottery processing, the general figure changing game and the opening / closing control of the second special figure starting port 232 are not performed (the state of the general figure is not operating), and the holding of the general figure changing game is suspended. When the number is 1 or more, it is determined whether the result of the general-floor variation game is a winning or a non-winning by a random number lottery based on the random number winning random number value stored in the random number value storage area described above. A hit determination is made, and if a winning is determined, a hit flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. In the case of non-winning, the hit flag is set to off. Regardless of the result of the hit determination, the value of the predetermined random number counter is obtained as a general-purpose timer random value, and the general-purpose display device 210 is generated from a plurality of fluctuation times based on the obtained general-purpose timer random value. One time for changing and displaying the figure is selected, and this changing display time is stored in the normal figure changing time storage area provided in the RAM 308 as the general figure changing display time. It should be noted that the number of reserved general-floating fluctuation games is stored in a general-figure-remaining-number storage area provided in the RAM 308. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is stored again in this general-purpose reserved number storage area. Further, the random number value used for the hit determination is deleted.

  Subsequently, a special figure prefetching process (step S224) is executed. Details of the special figure prefetching process will be described later. Next, the special figure state update processing for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed. First, the special figure state update processing (the special figure 2 state update processing) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S225). In the special figure 2 state update processing, one of the following plurality of processings is performed according to the state of the special figure 2.

  For example, in the special figure 2 state update processing during the special figure 2 change display (the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED included in the special figure 2 display device 214 is turned on and off. The lighting / extinguishing drive control is repeated. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs a variable display of the special figure 2 (a special figure 2 variable game). Further, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and then the process ends.

  Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with flags such as a 15R big hit flag, a 5R big hit flag, a 2R big hit flag, a small hit flag, a miss flag, a special figure probability variation flag, and a general figure probability variation flag. . These flags are set on or off based on the determined stop symbol in a special drawing 2 related lottery process described later. In the special figure 2 state update processing started at the timing when the special figure 2 variable display time has elapsed (when the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), for example, the 15R big hit flag is on, When the probability variation flag is also on and the ordinary figure probability variation flag is also on, any of the special map a, the special map b, the special map c, and the special map d shown in FIG. The special figure 2 display device 214 is configured such that the figure probability fluctuation flag is off, the ordinary figure probability fluctuation flag is on, and the special figure f is on when the loss flag is on. The 7-segment LED is controlled to be turned on and off, and the setting area of the RAM 308 is set to indicate that the special figure 2 is being stopped. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 can display the 15R special big hit symbol (special figure a, special figure b, special figure c, special figure d), the 2R normal big hit symbol (special figure e), and the losing symbol ( One of the symbols in the special figure f) is confirmed and displayed.

  Thereafter, in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308. With this setting, the special figure 2 that is confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure 2 variable game is notified to the player. If the number of time savings stored in the number of time savings storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the number of time savings. If not, turn off the time reduction flag. Further, the time reduction flag is turned off even during the big hit game (during the special game state).

  Also, in the command setting transmission process (step S233), predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is to be executed is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and the symbol for stopping the variable display is shown in FIG. The special figure 2 identification information indicating the existence is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in the command data described later, and then the processing is terminated.

  If the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on. When the big hit flag is on, the RAM 308 is set in the special figure 2 state update processing at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (timing when the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0). To set the special figure 2 in operation in the area and wait for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period during which an image that informs the player of the start of the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. The information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Further, in the special figure 2 state update processing started at the timing when the predetermined prize effect period ends (when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), a predetermined opening period (for example, 29 seconds) Or a solenoid (a part of various solenoids 332) for driving the opening and closing of the door member of the variable winning opening 234 until a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected in the variable winning opening 234. Is output in the RAM 308, and information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the door opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening release setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special figure 2 state updating process started at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (when the value of the door opening time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member in a closed state is output to a solenoid (part of various solenoids 332) for opening and closing the door member of the variable winning opening 234, and a storage area of a door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308 is provided. Is set to indicate the closing period. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In addition, the opening / closing control of the door member is repeated a predetermined number of times (in this embodiment, 15 rounds, 5 rounds, or 2 rounds), and in the special figure 2 state updating process started at the timing of the end, a predetermined end effect period (for example, (3 seconds), that is, a storage area of an effect standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308 for setting to wait for a period during which an image notifying the player of the end of the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. Is set to indicate the effect standby period. Also, if the normal figure probability variation flag is set to ON, the number of time savings (for example, 100 times) is set in the time savings number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 and the RAM 308 is provided at the same time as the end of the big hit game. Turns on the saved time reduction flag. If the ordinary figure probability variation flag is set to off, the number of times saved is not set in the number of times saved storage unit, and the time reduction flag is not turned on.

  Here, the time reduction means that the pachinko machine becomes in an advantageous state for the player in order to shorten the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variable game to the start of the next big hit. When the time reduction flag is set to ON, it is in the state of high probability of general figure (probable change of general figure). In the high probability figure state, the probability of winning in the normal figure fluctuation game is higher than in the low probability state. In addition, the fluctuation time of the general-floor fluctuation game is shorter in the general-figure high-probability state than in the general-figure low-probability state. Furthermore, the opening time in one opening of the pair of blade members 2321 of the special figure 2 starting port 232 is more likely to be longer in the state of high probability in the general figure than in the state of low probability in the general figure (electric chewing spread). In addition, the pair of blade members 2321 is more likely to open in the state of high probability of public figure than in the state of low probability of general figure. The state in which any one of the normal figure change, the general figure change, and the electric power spread is set is referred to as an electric support (starting opening winning support by an electric tulip) state.

  Further, as described above, the time reduction flag is set to off during the big hit game (during the special game state). Therefore, during the big hit game, the ordinary figure low probability state is maintained. This means that if the game is in the high probability state during the jackpot game, a predetermined number of variable prize ports 234 will be inserted into the special figure 2 starting port 232 until the game balls enter the jackpot during the jackpot game. There is a problem that the number of game balls that can be acquired during the big hit increases when the ball hits and the gambling property is increased, and this problem is solved.

  Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission processing is to be executed in the command setting transmission processing (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Further, in the special figure 2 state update processing started at the timing when the predetermined end effect period ends (timing when the value of the effect standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 non-operation is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set medium.

  Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a loss, the loss flag is turned on. When the outlier flag is ON, the special figure 2 state updating process at the timing when the above-described predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0) The non-operating state of the special figure 2 is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. In the special figure 2 state updating process when the special figure 2 is not operating, the process proceeds to the next step S227 without doing anything.

  Subsequently, a special figure state update process for the special figure 1 (special figure 1 state update processing) is performed (step S227). In the special figure 1 state update processing, each processing described in the special figure 2 state update processing is performed according to the state of the special figure 1. Each process performed in the special figure 1 state update processing is the same as the processing described in the above-described special figure 2 state update processing in which “special figure 2” is replaced with “special figure 1”. Omitted. The order of the special figure 2 state update processing and the special figure 1 state update processing may be reversed.

  When the special figure state update processing in step S225 and step S227 is completed, special figure related lottery processing is performed for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. Here too, the special figure-related lottery processing for special figure 2 (special figure 2 related lottery processing) is performed first (step S229), and then the special figure related lottery processing for special figure 1 (special figure 1 related lottery processing) ) Is performed (step S231). In the special figure 2 related lottery process, the special game 1 and the special figure 2 are not performing the floating game, and the special figure 2 is in a non-operating state of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. It is executed using the first special figure 2 winning random number value and the special figure 2 random number value in the special figure 2 random number storage area under the condition that the number of variable games is 1 or more. In the special figure 1 related lottery process, the special game 1 and the special figure 2 are not performing the floating game, and the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are both inactive and are suspended. The process is executed using the first special figure 1 winning random number value and the special figure 1 random number value in the special figure 1 random value storage area on condition that the number of variable games is 1 or more.

  Also in these special figure related lottery processes, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery processing before the special figure 1 related lottery processing, so that the start condition of the special figure 2 variable game and the special figure 1 variable Even when the game start conditions are satisfied at the same time, the special figure 1 variable game does not start changing because the special figure 2 variable game is changing first. Further, when the number of suspended special figure 2 variable games is one or more, the lottery process and the variable game relating to the reservation of special figure 1 variable games are not performed. In addition, the notification of the result of the determination of the success or failure of the special figure variable game by the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed by the first sub-control unit 400, and the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning in the special figure 2 starting port 232 The lottery is performed prior to the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning of the special figure 1 starting port 230. In the present embodiment, a special figure variable game having a high degree of advantage (in this example, special figure 2 variable game) is given priority over a special figure variable game having a low degree of advantage (in this example, special figure 1 variable game). For this reason, it may be easy to give a difference in the advantage of the game state.

  In the case of the special figure 2 related lottery process in step S229, the main control unit 300 starts the special figure 2 start information (special) from the earliest (most previously stored) reserved position in the special figure 2 random number storage area. The combination of the random number value of FIG. 2 and the random number value of the special figure 2) is acquired, and the ROM 306 is determined based on the random number value of the special figure 2 in the acquired special figure 2 start information and the value of the special figure probability variation flag in the RAM 308. Is determined using the hit / fail judgment table stored in (1) to determine whether the hit is a big hit, a small hit, or a loss. Next, the main control unit 300 uses the special figure determination table stored in the ROM 306 based on the special figure 2 random number value in the acquired special figure 2 start information, the determined result of the determination as to whether or not the special figure 2 is used, and the like. A symbol (stop symbol) to be stopped and displayed after the fluctuation display is determined. Next, the main control unit 300 stores the result in the ROM 306 based on, for example, the determined hit / fail judgment result, the stop symbol, the special figure 2 hold number at the time of the hit / fail judgment, the obtained special figure variation time determination random number value, and the like. The variable display time (timer number) of the special figure 2 is determined using various tables.

  After extracting the first special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, the main controller 300 deletes the first special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, 2 subtracts 1 from the special figure 2 reserved number in the reserved number storage area. At this time, the special figure 2 start information extracted from the special figure 2 random value storage area is stored in a temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the above-described determination is made based on the special figure 2 start information stored in this temporary area. You may do so.

  After the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229), the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) is performed in the same manner. Note that the order of the special figure 1 related lottery processing and the special figure 2 related lottery processing may be reversed.

  In the above description, the special figure 2 variable game having a high degree of advantage is started prior to the special figure 1 variable game having a low degree of advantage, and the reservation of the special figure 2 is digested prior to the reservation of the special figure 1. The special figure 2 priority change is taken as an example, but the special figure 1 variable game with a low advantage is started in preference to the special figure 2 variable game with a high advantage, and the reservation of the special figure 1 The special figure 1 priority change which is digested prior to the reservation may be used. In addition, without giving priority to either the special figure 2 variable game having a high degree of advantage or the special figure 1 variable game having a low degree of advantage, the special figure variable game relating to the reservation of each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 can be awarded a starting mouth. The starting opening winning order may be changed in order. In the starting opening winning order change, since the upper limit of the number of suspensions is eight regardless of Toku-zu 1 and Toku-zu 2, compare with the priority change in which the upper-limit number of the suspension is 4 in each of Toku-zu 1 and Toku-zu 2. In some cases, the upper limit of the number of holds can be increased.

  In the above description, the lottery process and the variable game relating to the holding of the other special figure are not performed in accordance with the state of one special figure. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The process and the special drawing related lottery process may be performed independently for each of the special figures 1 and 2 so that a plurality of special figures may be changed simultaneously. In the case where a plurality of special figures are simultaneously changed in this way, a plurality of areas for displaying the lottery results of each special figure are provided in the decorative design display device 208, or the lottery results of each special figure are displayed. A plurality of decorative pattern display devices may be provided to display the lottery results separately, or one display may display the lottery results of a plurality of special figures. Further, when fluctuations regarding a plurality of special figures are performed simultaneously, the lottery result of the special figure whose fluctuation is stopped first may affect the lottery result of the special figure whose fluctuation is stopped later.

  In step S233 subsequent to step S231, a command setting transmission process is performed. In this command setting transmission process, various commands are transmitted to the first sub control unit 400. The output schedule information transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of, for example, 16 bits, bit 15 is strobe information (in the case of ON, it indicates that data is set), and bits 11 to 14 are Command type (in this embodiment, a basic command, a symbol variation start command, a symbol variation stop command, a winning effect start command, an end effect start command, a jackpot round number designation command, a power restoration command, a RAM clear command, a pre-read result information command, etc. Bits 0 to 10 are composed of command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on or off in the above-described command transmission processing. If the command type is a symbol variation start (rotation start) command, the command data includes various big hit flags, small hit flags, missed flags, special figure probability variation flags, and a timer selected in the special figure related lottery process. In the case of the symbol change stop (rotation stop) command, the information includes the number of the big change flag, the small hit flag, the missed flag, the special figure probability change flag, and the like. In the case of the production start command, the value of the special figure probability variation flag and the like are included, and in the case of the command for specifying the number of big hit rounds, the value of the special figure probability variation flag and the number of big hit rounds are included. When the command type indicates the basic command, the command data includes the device information, the presence or absence of a prize in the special figure 1 starting port 230, the presence or absence of a prize in the special figure 2 starting port 232, and the prize in the variable special prize ports 234 and 235. Including presence or absence. In the case of a prefetch result information command, information such as the types of special figures 1 and 2, the number of prefetches stored in a prefetch number storage area described later, and a stop symbol stored in a prefetch result storage unit are used as command data. Including.

  In the above-described rotation start setting transmission processing, the command data contains the values of various big hit flags, small hit flags, missed flags, special figure probability variation flags, special figure 1 related lottery processing, and special figure stored in the RAM 308. Information indicating the timer number selected in the 2-related lottery process, the number of reserved special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games, and the like are set. In the above-described rotation stop setting transmission processing, information indicating the values of various large hit flags, small hit flags, loss flags, special figure probability variation flags, and the like stored in the RAM 308 are set in the command data.

  In the above-described winning effect setting transmission process, the command data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information to be output to the decorative symbol display device 208, the various lamps 418, and the speakers 120 during the winning effect period, and the special figure probability variation flag A value, information indicating the number of reserved special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games are set. In the above-described end effect setting transmission process, the command data is stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information to be output to the decorative symbol display device 208, the various lamps 418, and the speakers 120 during the effect standby period, and the special figure probability variation flag. A value, information indicating the number of reserved special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games are set. In the above described special winning opening release setting transmission processing, the command data includes the number of jackpot rounds stored in the RAM 308, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, and the number of reserved special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games. Set information indicating such as. In the above-mentioned special winning opening closing setting transmission processing, the command data includes the number of jackpot rounds stored in the RAM 308, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, and the number of reserved special figure 1 variable games or special figure 2 variable games. Set information indicating such as.

  In addition, in this step S233, general command special figure reservation increase processing is also performed. In this general command special figure reservation increase processing, special figure identification information (information indicating special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308 in command data, and advance notice information (advance notice information, false notice) Advance notice information or no advance notice information).

  In the first sub-control unit 400, it is possible to determine the effect control according to the change of the game control in the main control unit 300, based on the command type included in the received output schedule information, and the command type is included in the output schedule information. The effect control contents can be determined based on the information of the command data.

  In step S235 subsequent to step S233, an external output signal setting process is performed. In the external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

  In step S237 subsequent to step S235, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of the various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read, and the presence or absence of a predetermined error, for example, the presence of a front frame door opening error or the presence of a lower plate full error is monitored. . When the front frame door opening error or the lower plate full error is detected, the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 includes device information indicating the presence or absence of the front frame door opening error or the lower plate full error. Set. Further, various solenoids 332 are driven to control opening / closing of the special figure 2 starting port 232 and the variable winning opening 234, and the general figure display device 210 and the special figure 1 display device 212 via the drive circuits 324, 326 and 330. The display data to be output to the special figure 2 display device 214, the various status display units 328, and the like are set to the output port of the I / O 310. The output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S219) is output to the payout control unit 600 via the output port of the I / O 310.

  In step S239 subsequent to step S237, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is on. When the low-voltage signal is on (when the interruption of the power is detected), the process proceeds to step S243. When the low-voltage signal is off (when the interruption of the power is not detected), the process proceeds to step S241. In step S241, a timer interrupt end process is performed. In this timer interrupt end processing, the values of the registers temporarily saved in step S201 are set in the original registers, interrupt permission is set, and the like. Thereafter, the main control unit main processing shown in FIG. Return to. On the other hand, in step S243, a specific variable and a stack pointer for returning to the state at the time of power failure when power is restored are saved as return data in a predetermined area of the RAM 308, and power failure processing such as initialization of input / output ports is performed. And then enter the HALT state.

  FIG. 8 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the flow of the special figure prefetching process (step S224) of the main control unit timer interrupt process. In the main controller timer interrupt process described later with reference to FIG. 51, a special figure prefetching process is performed in the winning opening winning process. In the special figure pre-reading process, the main control unit 300 pre-reads the start information increased in each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, and preliminarily judges the stop symbol before the hit / fail judgment processing, and determines the pre-judgment result (the special judgment result). The figure prefetch result is stored in a prefetch result storage unit (see FIGS. 9A to 9C) in the RAM 308.

  Here, in the RAM 308, the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit that stores the prefetch result of the special figure 1 and the number of the special figure 1 prefetch results stored in the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit are stored. A special figure 1 prefetch number storage area for storing as one prefetch number is provided. In this example, the prefetch result storage unit for special figure 1 can store up to four prefetch results. In the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit, every time the special figure 1 prefetch number is reduced by one, the data of the special figure 1 prefetch result of the highest rank (earliest) is deleted, and the remaining special figure 1 prefetch result is deleted. Are processed such that the rank of the data is moved up by one. Also, every time the number of the special figure 1 prefetch increases by one, new data of the special figure 1 prefetch result is written in the next order of the data of the lowest (last) special figure 1 prefetch result.

  Further, in the RAM 308, a special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit that stores the prefetch result of the special figure 2 and the number of the special figure 2 prefetch result stored in the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit are stored. A special figure 2 prefetch number storage area for storing as a number is provided. The pre-reading result storage unit for special figure 2 can store up to four pre-reading results in this example. In the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit, each time the special figure 2 prefetch number is decreased by one, the data of the special figure 2 prefetch result having the highest rank is deleted, and the remaining data of the special figure 2 prefetch result are ranked. Are processed to be moved up one by one. Also, every time the number of the special figure 2 prefetch increases by one, new data of the special figure 2 prefetch result is written in the order next to the data of the special figure 2 prefetch result of the lowest rank.

  In the special figure pre-reading process, first, the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the start information of the special figure 2 has increased (step S301). The determination as to whether or not the start information of the special figure 2 is increasing is made, for example, by storing the special figure 2 reservation number stored in the special figure 2 reservation number storage area and the special figure 2 prefetch number storage area. The comparison is made with the number of pre-reads in the special figure 2. The main control unit 300 determines that the start information of the special figure 2 is increasing when the special figure 2 reservation number is larger than the special figure 2 prefetch number, and determines that the special figure 2 reservation number is equal to the special figure 2 prefetch number. If they are equal, it is determined that the start information in FIG. 2 has not increased. If it is determined that the start information of Toku-zu 2 is increasing, the process proceeds to step S303. If it is determined that the start information of Toku-zu 2 is not increasing, the process proceeds to step S307.

  In step S303, the increased special figure 2 start information (a set of the special figure 2 winning random number value and the special figure 2 random number value) is obtained before the special figure 2 related lottery processing (step S229). FIG. 2 Read ahead from the random number storage area. Further, the processing in step S303 is performed before the special figure-related lottery processing shown in FIG. Then, using the pre-read special figure 2 start information, the hit / fail judgment table shown in FIG. 10, and the special figure determination table shown in FIG. 11, the stop pattern of the special figure 2 variable game according to the start information is specially determined. The preliminary determination is made before the success / failure determination processing in the related lottery processing (step S229) in FIG. In the special figure-related lottery processing shown in FIG. 53 to be described later, the preliminary determination of the special figure 2 variable game stop symbol related to the start information is performed before the display symbol lottery processing S708. In addition, this preliminary determination processing may be performed using a special table for preliminary determination instead of the table used at the time of the determination of success or failure.

  In step S305 subsequent to step S303, the stop symbol information as the special figure 2 prefetch result obtained in the preliminary determination is stored in the forefront free area of the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308. After that, the procedure moves to step S307.

  In step S307, main controller 300 determines whether or not the start information of FIG. 1 has increased. Whether the start information of the special figure 1 is increasing or not is determined, for example, as in the case of the special figure 2, by storing the special figure 1 hold number stored in the special figure 1 hold number storage area and the special figure 1 look-ahead number. The comparison is made with the special figure 1 prefetch number stored in the area. If it is determined that the start information of the special figure 1 is increasing, the process proceeds to step S309. If it is determined that the start information of the special figure 1 is not increasing, the special figure pre-reading process is terminated and the main control unit is started. Return to timer interrupt processing.

  In step S309, it is determined based on the various flags in the RAM 308 whether or not a non-power support is in progress. If it is determined that non-electric support is being performed, the process proceeds to step S311. If it is determined that non-electric support is not being performed (electrical support is being performed (normally high probability state)), the process proceeds to step S315. In this example, it is determined whether or not a non-electric support is being performed. However, it may be determined whether or not the execution condition of the special figure 1 prefetch notice is satisfied. For example, the execution condition of the special figure 1 pre-reading advance notice includes conditions such as not being in a big hit game in addition to being in non-electric support.

  In step S311, the increased special figure 1 start information (the set of the special figure 1 winning random number value and the special figure 1 random number value) is compared with the special figure 1 related lottery processing (step S231). FIG. 1 Read ahead from the random value storage area. Also, the processing in step S311 is performed before the special figure-related lottery processing shown in FIG. Then, using the pre-read special figure 1 start information and, for example, a success / failure determination table and a special figure determination table used at the time of success / failure determination, a special figure 1 fluctuating game stop pattern related to the start information is determined by a special figure 1 related lottery. A preliminary determination is made before the hit / fail determination process in the process (step S231). In the special figure-related lottery processing shown in FIG. 53 to be described later, the advance determination of the special symbol 1 variable game stop symbol related to the start information is performed before the display symbol lottery processing S708. In addition, this preliminary determination processing may be performed using a special table for preliminary determination instead of the table used at the time of the determination of success or failure.

  In step S313 following step S311, the stop symbol information as the special figure 1 prefetch result obtained in the preliminary determination is stored in the forefront free area of the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308. After that, the special figure pre-reading processing is ended, and the process returns to the main control section timer interrupt processing.

  In step S315, the pre-read result of the special figure 1 in the RAM 308 is stored in the RAM 308 in place of the "undetermined" information indicating that the start information is not pre-fetched without pre-reading the increased special figure 1 start information. The copy is stored in the first free area of the set. After that, the special figure pre-reading processing is ended, and the process returns to the main control section timer interrupt processing.

  In this embodiment, only the increased start information is pre-read and pre-determined, but all the start information may be pre-read and pre-determined. Further, in the above-described command setting transmission process (step S233), only the prefetch result of the increased start information may be transmitted to the first sub control unit 400, or the prefetch result storage for the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 may be stored. All the prefetch results in the unit may be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400.

  In the flowchart shown in FIG. 8, the prefetching is always performed for the increased start information of the special figure 2, and the prefetch is always performed for the increased start information of the special figure 1 except during power support. However, it may be determined by lottery whether or not to read the increased start information of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 in advance. Alternatively, the first sub-control unit 400, which has received the pre-read result from the main control unit 300, may determine by lottery whether or not to execute the pre-read notification for each hold. In addition, regardless of the game state (for example, whether or not a non-electric support is being performed), when the start information increases, the prefetch is always performed and the prefetch result is stored in the prefetch result storage unit. The result may be configured to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 may be configured to determine whether or not to execute a lottery and an effect using the pre-read result.

  FIG. 9 illustrates a state in which the prefetch result information and the like are stored in the prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308. FIG. 9A illustrates an example of a state where the special figure 1 prefetch result information is stored in the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 9A, the special figure 1 look-ahead result storage unit has, for example, the same number (four in the present embodiment) of storage areas as the number of holdable special figure 1 variable games. . Each storage area is associated with the reservation order (reservation 1 to retention 4) of the special figure 1 random value storage area. In each of the storage areas, the stop symbol information of the special figure 1 is stored. In the example shown in FIG. 9A, “special symbol I” (out) is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area “hold 1”, and “special symbol I” as stop symbol information is stored in the storage area “hold 2”. (Outlier) is stored in the storage area “hold 3”, and “special figure A” (15R probability variable hit) is stored as stop symbol information, and “special figure I” is stored in the storage area “hold 4” as stop symbol information. (Out) is stored.

  FIG. 9B illustrates an example of a state in which the special figure 2 prefetch result information is stored in the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 9B, the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit has, for example, the same number (four in the present embodiment) of storage areas as the number of holdable special figure 2 variable games. . Each storage area is associated with the reservation order (reservation 1 to reservation 4) of the special figure 2 random number storage area. In each of the storage areas, the stop symbol information of the special figure 2 is stored. In the example illustrated in FIG. 9B, “special figure f” (out) is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area “hold 1”, and stop symbols are stored in the storage areas “hold 2” to “hold 4”. Information is not stored. In FIG. 9B, a state in which the stop symbol information is not stored in the storage area is described as “none”.

  FIG. 9C shows an example of the pre-read result storage unit for special figure 1 in the electric support. As shown in FIG. 9C, the storage area “hold 1” stores “undetermined” information instead of the stopped symbol information. Neither the stopped symbol information nor the “undetermined” information is stored in the storage areas “hold 2” to “hold 4”.

  In the present embodiment, in addition to the above-described stop symbol information, the result of the determination on the success or failure of the special figure and the special figure variation time are preliminarily determined, and the information is stored in the prefetch result storage unit. Can be sent.

  Next, refer to FIG. 10 for the hit / failure determination table used in the special figure 2 related lottery processing (step S229) and the special figure 1 related lottery processing (step S231) in the main control unit timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. I will explain while. Here, FIG. 10A is a diagram illustrating an example of the hit / fail determination high probability table, and FIG. 10B is a diagram illustrating an example of the hit / fail determination low probability table. In the case of performing the determination of the special figure 1 in the special figure high probability state, the special figure high probability state shown in FIG. 10A is referred to in the special figure high probability state, and in the special figure low probability state in the special figure low probability state. 10 (b) is referred to. Then, based on the numerical range indicated in the referred winning / failing determination table and the obtained random number value, the winning / failing determination result of the special figure 1 variable game is selected. In the present embodiment, in the case of the special figure 1 variable game, a big hit, a small hit or a loss is selected as the result of the hit determination. It should be noted that the present invention is also applicable to a win / fail judgment table used in the special drawing per lottery process in step S801 in FIG.

  Similarly, in the case of performing the hit / fail determination of the special figure 2, if the special figure high probability state is set, the special figure low probability state is referred by referring to the hit / fail determination high probability table shown in FIG. In this case, the low-probability determination table shown in FIG. 10B is referred to. Then, based on the numerical range indicated in the referred hit / fail judgment table and the acquired random number, the hit / fail judgment result of the special figure 2 variable game is selected. In the present embodiment, in the case of the special figure 2 variable game, a big hit or a loss is selected as the result of the hit determination.

  FIG. 10C is a diagram illustrating an example of the small hit determination table. When the result of the big hit determination is out of order, the small hit determination table shown in FIG. 10C is referred to, and based on the numerical range indicated by the referred small hit determination table and the obtained random number value. Then, the result of the special figure small hit lottery determination is selected. In the present embodiment, when the result of the lottery hit / fail determination (lottery result) per special figure is the special figure 1, the small hit is selected with a probability of 2000/65536 as the hit / failure determination result, and a loss is made with a probability of 63536/65536. The small hit is not selected if the result of the lottery winning / non-performing judgment (lottery result) per special figure is special figure 2. Note that the present invention is also applicable to a small hit determination table used in a special figure small hit lottery process in step S803 in FIG.

  Next, the stop performed based on the result of determination as to whether the drawing is determined in the special figure 2 related lottery processing (step S229) and the special figure 1 related lottery processing (step S231) in the main control unit timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. A special figure determination table used for determining a symbol will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 11A is a diagram illustrating an example of the special figure 1 symbol determination table, and FIG. 11B is a diagram illustrating an example of the special figure 2 symbol determination table. When determining the stop symbol of the special figure 1, the special figure 1 symbol determination table shown in FIG. 11 (a) is referred to, and based on the result of the success / failure of the special figure 1 and the numerical range of the random number value, the special figure is determined. Select 1 stop symbol. In the present embodiment, when the result of the special figure 1 is a big hit, one of the special figures A to G is selected. When the result of the special figure 1 is a small hit, If the special figure H is selected and the result of the special figure 1 is a loss, the special figure I is selected.

  In addition, when determining the stop symbol of the special figure 2, referring to the special figure 2 symbol determination table shown in FIG. 11 (b), based on the success / failure result of the special figure 2 and the numerical range of the random number value, The lottery of the stop symbol of Tokujin 2 In the present embodiment, if the result of the special figure 2 is a big hit, any one of the special figures a to e is selected. If the result of the special figure 2 is a loss, the special figure is selected. f is selected. After the symbols to be stopped and displayed are determined, the symbol data to be stopped and displayed on the special figure display device is set.

  The design of the special figure in the special figure state updating process of FIG. 53 (a) may be determined using the special figure determination table of this example. When the determination is made, referring to the special figure 1 symbol determination table shown in FIG. Select the design symbol data of the special figure 1.

  Next, the processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described. FIG. 12A is a flowchart of a main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. First, in step S401 in FIG. 12A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, first, an initialization process is executed in step S401. In this initialization process, initialization of input / output ports, initialization of a storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed.

  In step S403 following step S401, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more. This process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S405. . In step S405, 0 is substituted for the timer variable.

  In step S407 following step S405, command processing is performed. CPU 404 of first sub-control unit 400 determines whether a command has been received from main control unit 300 or not.

  In step S409 following step S407, effect control processing is performed. For example, if there is a new command in step S407, processing such as reading the effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and if the effect data needs to be updated, effect data update processing is performed.

  In step S411 subsequent to step S409, a chance button control process is performed. In the chance button control processing, the operation of the effect button 136 (chance button 136) or the operation key unit 137 is detected, and the effect data updated in step S409 is transmitted to the effect button 136 (chance button 136) or the operation in accordance with the detection result. A process of changing to effect data according to the operation of the key unit 137 is performed.

  In step S413 following step S411, a sound control process is performed. In the sound control processing, if the effect data read in step S409 includes a command to the sound source IC 416, the command is output to the sound source IC 416.

  In step S415 subsequent to step S413, a lamp control process is performed. In the ramp control process, when the rendering data read in step S409 includes a command to the various lamps 442 and 452, the command is output to the game board lamp drive circuit 440 and the game frame lamp drive circuit 450. I do.

  In step S417 following step S415, a movable body control process is performed. For example, if the effect data read in step S409 includes a command to the effect movable body 224 and the shielding device 246, the command is output to the drive circuit 422.

  In step S419 following step S417, an information transmission process is performed. In the information transmission process, if there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 in the effect data read in step S409, a setting is made to output this control command. Then, the process returns to step S403.

  FIG. 12B is a flowchart of the first sub control unit command reception interrupt processing (strobe interrupt processing) executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. The command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub control unit 400 detects a strobe signal from the main control unit 300. In step S431 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

  FIG. 12C is a flowchart of the first sub-controller timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in the present embodiment). Execute in the cycle of In step S441 of the first sub-controller timer interrupt processing, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S403 of the first sub-controller main processing, and the value is stored in the original timer variable storage area. I do. Therefore, in step S403, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

  In step S443 following step S441, transmission of a control command to the second sub-control unit 500 set in the information transmission process of the first sub-control unit main process (step S419), and other update processing of the random number value for effect And so on.

  Next, the processing of the second sub control unit 500 will be described. FIG. 13A is a flowchart of a main process executed by a CPU (not shown) of the second sub control unit 500. First, in step S501 in FIG. 13A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, first, an initialization process is executed in step S501. In this initialization process, initialization of input / output ports, initialization of a storage area in a RAM (not shown), and the like are performed.

  In step S503 subsequent to step S501, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more. This process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S505. . In step S505, 0 is substituted for the timer variable.

  In step S507 subsequent to step S505, command processing is performed. The CPU of the second sub-control unit 500 determines whether a command has been received from the first sub-control unit 400.

  In step S509 subsequent to step S507, effect control processing is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S507, processing such as reading out the effect data (effect data by the decorative design display device 208) corresponding to this command from a ROM (not shown) is performed, and the effect data is updated. Is performed, the effect data is updated.

  In step S511 subsequent to step S509, an image control process is performed. In the image control process, if the effect data read in step S509 includes a command to the VDP 516, the command is output to the VDP 516 (details will be described later). Thereafter, the process returns to step S503.

  FIG. 13B is a flowchart of a command reception interrupt process executed by the CPU of the second sub control unit 500. The command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub control unit 500 detects a strobe signal from the first sub control unit 400. In step S531 of the command reception interrupt processing, the command received from the first sub control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM.

  FIG. 13C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process executed by the CPU of the second sub control unit 500. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in the present embodiment). Execute in the cycle of In step S541 of the timer interrupt processing, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM described in step S503 of the second sub-controller main processing, and the result is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S503, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S543 following step S541, other processing such as updating of the effect random number value is performed.

  FIG. 13D is a flowchart of the image control process in step S511 of the second sub control unit main process. In step S551, an instruction to transfer image data (movie data and texture data to be described later) is issued. Here, the CPU 504 first swaps the designation of the drawing areas of the frame buffer 1 and the frame buffer 2 of the VRAM 518. As a result, the image of one frame stored in the frame buffer not specified as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Next, the CPU 504 sets ROM coordinates (the transfer source address of the ROM 506), VRAM coordinates (the transfer destination address of the VRAM 518), etc., in the attribute register of the VDP 516 based on the position information table and the like. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 516 transfers image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518 based on a command set in the attribute register. After that, the VDP 516 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 504.

  In step S553 following step S551, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP 516 has been input. If a transfer end interrupt signal has been input (step S553: Yes), the process proceeds to step S555. Otherwise (step S553: No), it waits for a transfer end interrupt signal to be input.

  In step S555, parameters are set based on the rendering scenario configuration table and the attribute data. Here, in order to form a display image in the frame buffer 1 or 2 of the VRAM 518 on the basis of the image data transferred to the VRAM 518 in step S551, the CPU 504 obtains information on image data (coordinate axes, image size of the VRAM 518) constituting the display image. , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates, etc.) to the VDP 516. The VDP 516 performs parameter setting according to the attribute based on the instruction stored in the attribute register.

  In step S557 following step S555, a drawing instruction is issued. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 516 to start drawing an image. The VDP 516 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer in accordance with an instruction from the CPU 504.

  In a step S559 following the step S557, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 516 based on the drawing end of the image is input. If the generation end interrupt signal is input (step S559: Yes), The process proceeds to step S561, and if not (step S559: No), the process waits for the generation end interrupt signal to be input.

  In step S561, a scene display counter that is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 508 and counts the number of images generated is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

  Next, an example of the configuration of the rendering device 206 applicable to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 14A is a diagram illustrating a first configuration example of the rendering device 206, and FIG. 14B is a diagram illustrating a second configuration example of the rendering device 206.

  In the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14A, the decorative symbol display device 208 is configured so that the front side of the outer peripheral portion is covered by a decorative member constituting the effect device 206, and a part thereof is not visible. . The decorative member may be configured to be transparent, and the outer peripheral portion of the decorative symbol display device 208 may be configured to be visible. Further, the outer peripheral portion of the decorative symbol display device 208 may not be covered. In addition, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the general figure display device 210, the first special figure reservation lamp 218, the second special figure reservation lamp 220, and the general figure reservation lamp 216 are not shown. Omitted.

  In the decorative design display device 208, a first user interface (UI) unit 280 is arranged on the lower right side of the display screen, and a second UI unit 281 is arranged on the left side thereof. Hereinafter, the combination of the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 may be referred to as a hold frame. This reserved frame can be viewed as an area icon displayed in the icon display area. The first UI unit 280 is provided with a variable icon display area on the left side thereof, and a pedestal h0s is arranged in the variable icon display area. The fluctuating icon h0 can be displayed in a manner mounted on the pedestal h0s, and when the fluctuating icon h0 is displayed, it indicates that the symbol fluctuating is being displayed. In addition, in the case of the symbol confirmation display (during symbol stop), the change icon h0 is not displayed. On the right side of the change icon h0, a navigation character YM, which is a lord character, is displayed. The navigation character YM is a character that is always displayed at normal times, and performs, for example, a notice display or a pre-read notice display by changing the display mode according to the progress of the game. The second UI unit 281 has a reserved icon display area in which four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) are arranged so that four reserved icons can be displayed. The stage may indicate the pedestal of the hold icon. The pedestal hs0 of the change icon h0 is higher than the stages hs1 to hs4 of the hold icon. Further, the navigation character YM may not be constantly displayed, and specific notices and effects using the navigation character YM (for example, N pre-reading notices, notices in the symbol variation display, and suspension of the symbol variation display are accumulated N times. May be displayed at the time of an effect or the like that is sometimes displayed), or may be displayed when the navigation character YM is set to be displayed by user setting. In FIG. 14A, since four variable displays of the special figure 1 are reserved, four reserved icons h11, h12, h13, and h14 are displayed in the reserved icon display area. Note that the change icon h0 and the four hold icons h11 to h14 are both displayed in a default display mode (for example, a round blank pattern and white display mode), but are displayed according to the progress of the game. May change. As a result, it is possible to perform an advance notice display or a pre-read advance notice display. Here, the change icon may indicate an icon corresponding to the symbol change display. Further, the change icon h0 may indicate a hold (the hold) corresponding to the symbol change display. Note that the change icon h0 may not be displayed.

  The change icon is an icon that is displayed after the hold is exhausted and the special figure change game is started, that is, an icon corresponding to the special figure change game, in other words, an icon related to the symbol change display being executed. That is, the hold icon becomes a change icon simultaneously with the start of the special figure change game corresponding to the hold icon. More strictly, when the first hold icon with the oldest start winning prize moves from the hold icon display area to the change icon display area, the moving icon may be referred to as a change icon, or even if the change icon is expressed as moving Good. Alternatively, the icon after the movement to the variable icon display area is completed may be referred to as a variable icon. The change icon is displayed in a display size different from the hold icon (a display size larger or smaller than the hold icon). This may make it easier to identify the change icon and the hold icon, but they may be the same size. Further, the change icon may have a display mode related to the display mode of the hold icon. The fluctuating icon is capable of giving an advance notice of the feasibility of the fluctuating (the fluctuating notice) depending on the display mode, and is basically deleted at the timing when the feasibility result of the fluctuating is notified. Therefore, the change icon can be regarded as an icon relating to the hold, and can be considered as a kind of the hold icon in the sense that the notification of the success / failure result of the special figure change game is held. Note that the erasing timing may be a timing before, a same timing as, or a timing after the timing at which the result of the change is notified. Note that the change icon h0 may not be displayed.

  Further, in the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol (third symbol) is stopped and displayed in the combination of the decorative symbols "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7". In the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a second decorative symbol (fifth symbol) smaller than the first decorative symbol is a combination of the decorative symbols "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7". Stopped and displayed. The second decorative symbol may not be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and only the first decorative symbol may be displayed. Also, the second decorative symbol may not be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, but may be displayed on another effect display device (for example, a 7-segment, LED, dot matrix display device, or the like). In this embodiment, the combination of the decorative symbols in the second decorative symbol matches the combination of the decorative symbols in the first decorative symbol, but the combination of the decorative symbols in the first decorative symbol and the decoration in the second decorative symbol. A part (1 or 2 decorative patterns match) or all of the pattern combinations may not match. Further, in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the second reserved number displays (here, “4” and “0”) of the special figures 1 and 2 are displayed. The second reserved number display of the special figures 1 and 2 may not be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, but is displayed on another effect display device (for example, 7-segment, LED, dot matrix display device, or the like). Is also good. In addition, the second reserved number display may display the reserved number of only one special figure of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 or may display the reserved number of both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 Is also good.

  In addition, a background display is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a background display corresponding to an effect or a game state (a normal game state, a probable change state, a hidden probable change state, a time saving state, and the like) is displayed. The background display corresponding to the effect indicates a background display corresponding to a mode that can be set by the user, a background display performed as a notice or a pre-reading notice in the symbol variation display, and a background display that is not related to the result of pass / fail determination. Also, a plurality of types of background displays may be displayed in a certain gaming state (one or more of a normal gaming state, a probable change state, a hidden probable change state, and a time saving state). In this case, it may be changed with a rule (for example, the display is changed in the order of background display A → background display B → background display C → background display A →...). In the case of collapse, a big jackpot confirmation notice (premier notice) may be provided.), And the order may be changed at random regardless of the order.

  Further, a crest actor 224E, which is one of the effect movable bodies, is arranged below the decorative symbol display device 208, and can be moved up and down or rotated according to the effect content. It is configured. In the example shown in FIG. 14A, the family crest role object 224E is located at the initial position. Although the initial position of the family crest role item 224E is below the decorative symbol display device 208, it can be set to an appropriate position. Further, the crest role item 224E has a built-in light emitting means such as a full-color LED, and can emit light in various light emitting modes according to the effect contents.

  Also, on the left and right sides of the decorative symbol display device 208, one of the effect movable bodies, a first large-panel behavioral actor 224Ga with a character of "large" and a second with a character of "panel" A large-sized board role 224Gb, a third large-sized boarded role 224Gc provided with a character “M”, and a fourth large-sized boarded role 224Gd provided with a character “M” are arranged. Each of the first and second large-sized behavior elements 224Ga to 224Gd can rotate around the center and move toward the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. ing. At this time, the first large-scale behavioral character 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavioral character 224Gd are located on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, and can overlap the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. . Further, the first large-scale behavioral object 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavioral agent 224Gd have light-emitting means such as a full-color LED built therein, and can emit light in various light-emitting modes according to the effect contents.

  Above the decorative symbol display device 208, a thousand-role box role object 224H, which is one of the effect movable bodies, is arranged so as to be able to move up and down in accordance with the effect contents. . Thousands of box accessory 224H is arranged on the front side of decorative symbol display device 208, and can overlap the front side of decorative symbol display device 208. Further, a light emitting means such as a full-color LED is built in the Senryo Box Role 224H, and can emit light in various light emitting modes according to the content of the effect.

  A transparent light guide plate IL is disposed on the front side of the decorative pattern display device 208, the family crest role object 224E, the first large-scale behavior role component 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior role component 224Gd, and the thousand box behavior component 224H. The player can visually recognize the display state of the decorative design display device 208 and the operation of each effect movable body via the light guide plate. The light guide plate IL has a predetermined lens cut in the transmission area. A light-emitting body such as an LED is provided at an appropriate position near the side end of the light guide plate IL, and light from the light-emitting body is reflected forward by a lens cut portion, so that the transmission region emits light in a predetermined pattern. It is configured to be able to look like. In the embodiment shown in FIG. 14A, the light guide plate IL is provided with a lens cut having a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image. In addition, the light guide plate IL is configured such that the thickness of a part of the region where light is refracted toward the player side is smaller than the thickness of light irradiation. Therefore, the display state of the decorative symbol display device 208 may be easily visible. Further, the light guide plate IL may be movable.

  In the present embodiment, a fourth symbol display device 284 is provided on the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208. The fourth symbol display device 284 can display the display result of the fourth symbol by, for example, the light emission mode of the LED. Note that the fourth symbol display device 284 may be configured by an image display device such as an LCD or an EL. The drive of the fourth symbol display device 284 is controlled by the first sub control unit 400. While the symbol of the special figure is stopped, the LED is lit and displayed, while the symbol of the special figure fluctuates, the LED is blinked or turned off. It is to be noted that the pre-reading notice may be given by changing the display mode, the lighting mode, and the blinking mode of the fourth symbol. The fourth symbol may be displayed while the symbol is changing, and may be displayed off while the symbol is stopped.

  In the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14B, three decorative symbol display devices are arranged in a row. That is, a first decorative symbol display device 208L disposed at the center of the three decorative symbol display devices, a second decorative symbol display device 208M disposed on the left side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and a first decoration. The display is performed by the third decorative symbol display device 208N arranged on the right side of the symbol display device 208L. Note that the first decorative symbol display device 208L may be referred to as a main display device, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be referred to as sub-display devices, and the second decorative symbol display device. 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N have a length in the width direction shorter than substantially half the length of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and a display region has a slightly shorter height. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M has a right end portion overlapping the front side of the left edge portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N has a left edge portion corresponding to the left edge portion. One decorative symbol display device 208N overlaps the front side of the right end portion. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are configured to be slidable in directions approaching each other along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Further, when the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are closest to each other, they can rotate integrally along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It is configured to be able to. In addition, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are also configured to be able to slide up and down along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The effect of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N described above does not need to be configured to be able to perform all, and any one or two or more operations are performed. It may be configured to be able to In addition, one or both of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may not perform the rendering operation (ie, may be fixed). The effect operation that can be performed by the second decorative symbol display device 208M may be different from the effect operation that can be performed by the third decorative symbol display device 208N. For example, the number of effect operations that can be performed is different. The effect operation itself that can be performed may be different. Specifically, for example, the second decorative symbol display device 208M can move and rotate in the right direction, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N can move in the vertical direction. Good. Also, the first decorative symbol display device 208L may be configured to be able to perform an effect operation. Specifically, while the first decorative symbol display device 208L performs a staging operation, one or both of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may operate, Only one decorative symbol display device 208L may operate. In addition, the names of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N do not necessarily indicate that the decorative symbols are variably displayed for each display device. Is added here just in case that the interpretation of the display device is not narrowed. Also, a combination of these decorative symbol display devices (the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N) is used as the effect display means, and the effect display means is a decorative symbol. Can be displayed or a plurality of types of effect displays can be displayed. The first decorative symbol display device 208L is configured such that the front side of the outer peripheral portion is covered by a decorative member constituting the rendering device 206, and a part thereof is not visible. Note that the decorative member may be configured to be transparent, and the outer peripheral portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L may be configured to be visible. Further, the outer peripheral portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L may not be covered. In addition, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the general figure display device 210, the first special figure reservation lamp 218, the second special figure reservation lamp 220, and the general figure reservation lamp 216 are not shown. Omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a first user interface (UI) unit 280 is arranged on the lower right side of the display screen, and a second UI unit 281 is arranged on the left side thereof. Hereinafter, the combination of the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 may be referred to as a hold frame. This reserved frame can be viewed as an area icon displayed in the icon display area. On the first UI unit 280, a change icon h0 is displayed on the left side of the first UI unit 280 in a state of being placed on the pedestal, thereby notifying that the symbol change display is being performed. On the right side of the change icon h0, a navigation character YM, which is a lord character, is displayed. The second UI unit 281 has a reserved icon display area in which four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) are arranged so that four reserved icons can be displayed. The pedestal hs0 of the change icon h0 is higher than the stages hs1 to hs4 of the hold icon. In FIG. 14B, since four variable displays of the special figure 1 are reserved, four reserved icons h11, h12, h13, and h14 are displayed in the reserved icon display area. In FIG. 14 (b), the change icon h0 and the four hold icons h11 to h14 are all displayed in a default display mode (for example, a round blank pattern and white display mode). The display mode may change according to the progress. As a result, it is possible to perform an advance notice display or a pre-read advance notice display.

  In the center of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol (third symbol) is stopped and displayed in the combination of the decorative symbols "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7". In the upper left corner of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a second decorative symbol (fifth symbol) smaller than the first decorative symbol is a decorative symbol of "decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7". Stopped in combination. In the present embodiment, the second decorative symbol is displayed on the same decorative symbol display device as the first decorative symbol, but may be displayed on a different decorative symbol display device. Further, the second decorative symbol may not be displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and only the first decorative symbol may be displayed. Also, the second decorative symbol may not be displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, but may be displayed on another effect display device (for example, a 7-segment, LED, or dot matrix display device). In this embodiment, the combination of the decorative symbols in the second decorative symbol matches the combination of the decorative symbols in the first decorative symbol, but the combination of the decorative symbols in the first decorative symbol and the decoration in the second decorative symbol. A part (1 or 2 decorative patterns match) or all of the pattern combinations may not match. Further, in the upper right corner of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second reserved number display of the special figures 1 and 2 is displayed. In the present embodiment, the second reserved number display is displayed on the same decorative symbol display device as the reserved icon display area, but may be displayed on a different decorative symbol display device. In addition, the second reserved number display may be divided and displayed on different decorative symbol display devices for the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. Further, the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 may not be displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In addition, the second reserved number display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is not displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, but is displayed on another effect display device (for example, 7 segment, LED, dot matrix display device, or the like). May be done. In addition, the second reserved number display may display the reserved number of only one special figure of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 or may display the reserved number of both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 Is also good.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the background display is displayed so as to be connected to the background display displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. As the background display, for example, a background display corresponding to an effect or a game state (a normal game state, a probable change state, a hidden probable change state, a time reduction state, etc.) is displayed. The background display corresponding to the effect indicates a background display corresponding to a mode that can be set by the user, a background display performed as a notice or a pre-reading notice in the symbol variation display, and a background display that is not related to the result of pass / fail determination. Also, a plurality of types of background displays may be displayed in a certain gaming state (one or more of a normal gaming state, a probable change state, a hidden probable change state, and a time saving state). In this case, it may be changed with a rule (for example, the display is changed in the order of background display A → background display B → background display C → background display A →...). In the case of collapse, a big jackpot confirmation notice (premier notice) may be provided.), And the order may be changed at random regardless of the order. In the present embodiment, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N each have a frame (bezel) provided on the outer periphery, but may have a frameless form. Further, a decorative member or an LED may be provided on the frame.

  In addition, the above-described family crest role item 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and is configured to be able to move up and down and rotate according to the effect content. . In the example shown in FIG. 14B, the crest role 224E is located at the initial position, but the initial position of the crest role 224E illustrated in FIG. Although the portion slightly overlaps the lower end portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it can be set to an appropriate position.

    Above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the above-mentioned Senryo Box Role 224H is arranged, and is configured to be able to move up and down in accordance with the effect contents. Thousand box accessory 224H is arranged on the front side of first decorative symbol display device 208L, second decorative symbol display device 208M, and third decorative symbol display device 208N, and overlaps with the front side of these decorative symbol display devices. It is possible.

  The light guide plate IL described above is disposed on the front side of the decorative symbol display device, the crest role item 224E, and the Senryo box role item 224H, and the player can display the display state of each decorative symbol display device via the light guide plate. The movement of each of the production movable bodies can be visually recognized.

  In FIG. 14B, a fourth symbol display device 284 is provided below the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

  Next, an effect example using the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14A or FIG. 14B will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 15 is a diagram illustrating an effect example applicable to the present embodiment.

  FIGS. 15 (A1) and 15 (A2) show an operation mode of the production movable body in the production device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (a). That is, from the state shown in FIG. 15 (A1), when the first large-bodied-behavior role 224Ga to the fourth large-bodied-behavior role 224Gd and the thousand-and-two-box actor 224H operate, the state shown in FIG. 15 (A2) is obtained. More specifically, the first large-panel behavioral actor 224Ga to the fourth large-panel behavioral actor 224Gd are arranged until the characters “large”, “panel”, “shake”, and “mai” face the front. Each of them rotates, and then moves horizontally toward the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, the thousand box accessory 224H moves from the initial position to a position where the decorative symbol display device 208 overlaps substantially at the center. Here, Thousand Box Characters 224H is disposed on the front side of the first large plate behavior character 224Ga to the fourth Large Plate Character 224Gd. It is considered that it is more difficult to visually recognize compared to the case where it is not overlapped with 224H. In addition, you may be comprised so that 1000 box | box combination 224H may not overlap with the front side of the 1st large-board behavior combination 224Ga-the 4th large-box behavior combination 224Gd. In addition, the first large-scale behavior character 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavioral character 224Gd may be arranged on the front side of the thousand box character 224H, and may be configured to overlap with the thousand character box character 224H.

  In FIG. 15 (B1), in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (a), the light guide plate IL emits light, and a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image is displayed on the light guide plate IL in an easily visible manner. Is shown. Here, during the light emission of the light guide plate IL, the brightness of the backlight and various lamps of the decorative symbol display device 208 may be reduced to make the pattern appearing on the light guide plate IL more visible. .

  FIGS. 15 (C1) to (C4) show operation modes of the effect movable body in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (a). Here, in the example shown in FIG. 15 (C1) to FIG. 15 (C4), a POV (Persistence Of Vision) display 224I as an effect movable body is provided in place of the family crest role object 224E. The POV display 224I is also referred to as a versa lighter, is movable in the vertical direction, and is configured to be able to overlap the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. The initial position of the POV display 224I is below the decorative symbol display device 208, but can be set to any position. The POV display 280 has a lifting arm and an LED array rotatably attached to the tip of the lifting arm. The elevating arm can perform an elevating operation by a known mechanism such as a rack and pinion, for example. A plurality of LEDs are arranged in a row in the LED array, and a posture extending in the horizontal direction is an initial posture of the LED array. Note that the LEDs provided in the LED array may be full-color LEDs or single-color LEDs. A motor is built into the tip of the lifting arm, and the LED array is connected to the rotating shaft of the motor at the center in the extending direction. The first sub-control unit 400 (or the second sub-control unit 500) controls each lighting control for each of the plurality of LEDs arranged in the rotating LED array based on versa data, which is a type of effect data. Do. By doing so, the light emission mode of the plurality of LEDs changes during the rotation of the LED array, and the afterimage is visually recognized by the player. That is, an afterimage of light occurs on the rotation locus of each LED, and a picture is displayed. In addition, the POV display 224I is arranged on the front side of the first large-scale behavioral character 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavioral character 224Gd and the thousand-square box character 224H. Can be set.

  FIG. 15 (C1) shows a state where the POV display 224I is in the initial position and the LED array is in the initial posture.

  FIG. 15C2 shows a state in which the POV display 224I raises the LED array by the elevating arm, and the LED array overlaps the substantially central front surface of the decorative symbol display device 208. Therefore, the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is more difficult to view than in the case where the POV displays 224I are not overlapped.

  FIG. 15C3 shows a state where the LED array of the POV display 224I has started to rotate. The LED array is accelerating the rotation from a low speed to a high speed. The plurality of LEDs provided in the LED array may start lighting or blinking when the LED array starts rotating, or may start lighting or blinking after reaching a certain rotation speed. Good. In addition, the rotation area of the LED array overlaps with the fluctuating icon h0, the holding icons h11 to h14, and the first decorative symbol, and it is considered that these are difficult to see while the LED array is rotating.

  FIG. 15 (C4) shows a state where the LED array of the POV display 224I is rotated at a constant speed, characters of "heat" are displayed, and a notice display or a pre-read notice display is performed. Note that the image displayed by the POV display 224I is not limited to the above-described one, and may be, for example, a character image, a decorative pattern, a background image, or the like. In addition, while the image is displayed on the POV display 224I, the luminance of the backlight and various lamps of the decorative design display device 208 is reduced to improve the visibility of the image displayed on the POV display 224I. Is also good. Further, while the image is displayed on the POV display 224I, the decorative symbol display device 208 may be set to dark display.

  In FIG. 15 (D1), in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (b), light is emitted from the light guide plate IL, and a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image is displayed on the light guide plate IL in an easily visible manner. Is shown. Here, during the light emission of the light guide plate IL, the brightness of the backlight and various lamps of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N is reduced, and the like. The pattern appearing on the light plate IL may be made more easily visible.

  FIGS. 15 (E1) and (E2) show a state in which the crest role object 224E is operating in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (b). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15 (E1), the family crest role item 224E moves from the initial position to the raised position and overlaps the change icon h0, the hold icons h11 to h14, and the navigation character YM, It is more difficult to visually recognize the fluctuating icon h0, the holding icons h11 to h14, and at least a part of the navigation character YM than when they do not overlap. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 15 (E2), the family crest role item 224E is rotating clockwise (CW direction). Note that the family crest role object 224E may rotate at the initial position. Further, the crest role object 224E may vibrate with or instead of rotation. Alternatively, only the ascent may be performed, and the rotation and the vibration may not be performed. Note that the present invention is also applicable to the rendering device 206 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 15 (F1) shows a state in which the thousand box accessory 224H is operating in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (b). Specifically, a state is shown in which the thousand box accessory 224H has moved from the initial position to a position overlapping the front side of the approximate center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. At the timing shown in FIG. 15 (F1), the first decorative symbol is more difficult to see than in the non-overlapping state because the thousand decorative box objects 224H are overlapped. In this effect example, when the thousand-car box character 224H operates, the family crest character 224E is not operated so as not to interfere with the thousand-car box character 224H and the crest character 224E. In addition, there may be a case in which both the thousand box combination 224H and the family crest combination 224E are in operation. Further, when the thousand-box actor 224H operates, a retreat operation for moving the family crest actor 224E further downward may be performed.

  In FIG. 15 (G1), in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (b), the second decorative symbol display device 208M slides downward and the third decorative symbol display device 208N slides upward. It is shown. At this time, the slide movement is performed such that the background image displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N is continuous with the background image displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Scroll display is also performed. That is, the background image is configured such that an area that is not displayed before the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N slide can be visually recognized by sliding. In other words, it can be said that there is an image that is visible when the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N move. Thus, even if the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N move, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are integrated. Can be displayed. In addition, the second decorative symbol display device 208M may slide upward, the third decorative symbol display device 208N may slide downward, or the second decorative symbol display tail device 208M may slide upward, so that the second decorative symbol display device 208M slides upward. The third decorative symbol display device 208N may slide upward, the second decorative symbol display device 208M may slide downward, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may slide downward.

  In FIG. 15 (H1), in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (b), the first decorative symbol is enlarged, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the third decorative symbol display. A state in which the image is displayed over the device 208N is shown. That is, the left symbol of the enlarged first decorative symbol is displayed across the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the right symbol of the enlarged first decorative symbol is the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Is displayed over the third decorative symbol display device 208N. At this time, the second decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed only on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and is not displayed across the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. In addition, the fluctuating icon h0 and the holding icons h11 to h14 are also displayed only on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and do not straddle the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Note that the enlarged first decorative symbol does not have to be displayed over the two display devices. For example, only the enlarged left symbol is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The enlarged middle symbol may be displayed, and the enlarged right symbol may be displayed only on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Further, the fluctuating icon h0, the holding icons h11 to h14, and the second decorative symbol may be displayed across a plurality of display devices.

  FIGS. 15 (I1) and (I2) show the operation modes of the effect movable body in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (b). Here, in the example shown in FIGS. 15 (I1) and (I2), the POV display 224I described above is provided instead of the family crest combination 224E. At the timing shown in FIG. 15 (I1), a state is shown in which the POV display 224I is in the initial position and the LED array is in the initial posture.

  In FIG. 15 (I2), after the POV display 224I moves from the initial position to a position where the LED array overlaps the substantially central front surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the LED array rotates, and a certain rotation is performed. It shows a state in which the speed is reached and the rotation is made at a constant speed, and the letters "heat" are displayed.

  In FIG. 15 (J1), in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (b), the background display displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M is changed to the display on the first UI unit 280, and the third decorative symbol display is performed. A state in which the background display displayed on the device 208N is changed to the display on the second UI unit 281 is shown. That is, the navigation character YM and the change icon h0 are displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the hold icons h11 to h14 are displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. That is, a state is shown in which the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N perform different display from the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

  FIGS. 15 (K1) to (K4) show operation modes of the effect movable body in the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (b). In the example shown in FIGS. 15 (K1) to (K4), the outer periphery of the first decorative symbol display device 208L does not overlap with the decorative member, and the image displayed in the area is configured to be visible. ing. At this time, the left and right sides of the first decorative symbol display device 208L are partially overlapped by the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

  FIG. 15 (K1) shows a state where the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are at the initial positions.

  FIG. 15 (K2) shows a state where the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208M are slid to a position close to each other along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Have been. At this time, the display of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N scrolls in accordance with the slide movement so as to be continuous with the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L along the slide movement. The display has been made. As a result, the first decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. That is, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N adjust the image of the overlapping portion, which is the image displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, according to the slide movement. By performing the scroll display, a display with a sense of unity can be performed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. As shown in FIG. 15 (K2), the crest role item 224E is moved downward from the initial position to the retreat position so as not to interfere with the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Has become. Here, as shown in FIG. 15 (K2 ′), the display on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be slid without scrolling. In addition, when the operation of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the operation of the third decorative symbol display device 208N is performed, the family crest role item 224E may rotate at the initial position, may vibrate, You may vibrate while rotating.

  In FIGS. 15 (K3) to (K4), in a state where the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are close to each other, counterclockwise along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It shows a state in which it rotates integrally in the direction (CCW direction). FIG. 15 (K4) shows a state where the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are rotated by 90 degrees. At this time, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decoration are arranged such that the images displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N respectively match the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The display which rotates in the opposite direction to the rotation direction of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N about the rotation axis of the symbol display device 208N is performed. As a result, the player may see the displayed image as not rotating although the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are rotating.

  FIG. 15 (L1) shows a modification of the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14 (a). That is, in the example shown in FIG. 15 (L1), the sub display device 208S is disposed below the decorative symbol display device 208 in place of the crest role item 224E, and the upper end portion of the sub display device 208S is the decorative symbol display device 208. At least part of the lower end portion overlaps. On the sub-display device 208S, the respective displays on the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 are displayed. That is, on the sub display device 208S, the change icon h0 and the hold icons h11 to h14 are displayed, and the navigation character YM is also displayed. Further, the display on the sub display device 208S is different from the display on the decorative symbol display device 208. Also, the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the character SBH of Sabohani is walking from the right to the left, but a part of the character SBH is overlapped with the sub display device 208S, It is more difficult to view the display device 208S than when the display device 208S is not overlapped. As shown in FIG. 15 (L1 ′), a display image (a background image, the character SBH of Sabohani, etc.) may be displayed across the decorative design display device 208 and the sub-display device 208S.

  In FIG. 15 (M1), the operation modes of the sub-display device 208S and the first large-panel behavior 224Gd to the fourth large-panel behavior 224Gd are shown. In other words, the sub-display device 208S moves from the initial position to a position substantially in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 and overlaps at least a part of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. The first large-scale behavioral character 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavioral character 224Gd are respectively rotated to the positions where the characters “large”, “panel”, “shake”, and “mai” are in front, and then the decorative pattern display device 208 Has moved to a position near the left and right ends of the sub-display device 208S that has moved to a position near the front of the center of the sub-display device 208S. At this time, cut-in display is performed on the sub display device 208S, and a predetermined effect image is displayed on the decorative design display device 208, and a state in which a predetermined announcement effect or a pre-reading announcement effect is being performed is shown. ing.

  Next, a specific example of the effect performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. Here, FIG. 16 is a diagram showing step by step an example of an effect centering on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment, and FIG. 17 is a step-by-step example of the effect shown in FIG. FIG. 18 is a diagram showing stepwise the example of the effect shown in FIG. 17, and FIG. 19 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the effect shown in FIG. 18. .

  FIG. 16 shows a decorative symbol display device 208, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a normal symbol display device 210, a special symbol 1 holding lamp 218, a special symbol 2 holding lamp 220, and a general symbol holding. The lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284 are shown. In the following, description will be made by applying the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14A, but the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 14B can also be applied. In the following, illustrations of the crest actor 224E, the first large-story behavior actor 224Ga to the fourth large-story behavior actor 224Gd, the thousand-story box actor 224H, and the light guide plate IL are omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 16A, the combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 4—decoration 1—decoration 7” is stopped and displayed. Although the background is not displayed here, for example, a default background image (shore background image) as shown in FIG. 14A is displayed. In the following description, when the background is not displayed, a default background image is displayed unless otherwise specified. Various background images different from the default background image (for example, a background image according to the mode) may be displayed. Further, a second reserved number display is displayed at the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a second decorative symbol is displayed at the upper left corner. The second decorative symbol is also stopped and displayed in the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 4−decoration 1−decoration 7” in accordance with the stop display of the first decoration symbol. Further, a navigation character YM is displayed on the first UI unit 280 formed on the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208. At the timing shown in FIG. 16A, since the symbols are stopped and displayed, the change icon h0 is not displayed.

  Further, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 16 is a special figure low probability general figure low probability state. In the decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric support state, the hold icon of the special figure 1 is displayed on the second UI unit 281. Note that a reserved icon display area of the special figure 2 may be provided in a predetermined area (for example, the right end of the display screen) of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric support state.

  The second UI unit 281 displays a hold icon representing the hold of the special map 1. The number of reservations in Toku-zu 1 is represented by the number of the holding icons in Toku-zu 1 and the second number-of-holds display, in addition to the number of lighting of the Toku-zu 1 holding lamp 218. In addition to the number of lighting of the holding lamp 220, the number of the holding icons in the special map 2 and the second holding number display are also displayed. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest winning) may be referred to as a first hold icon, the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as a second hold icon. In the second UI unit 281, the hold icons are displayed side by side, and the hold icon on the right side is the hold icon with the older winning.

  In FIG. 16A, the two reserved icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are displayed on the second UI unit 281. The two reserved icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are both default display modes. (A circular pattern and a white display mode). That is, the default hold icon of Toku-zu 1 is a round hold icon. Note that, in FIG. 16A, a hold icon that is not actually displayed is indicated by a broken line in order to make it easy to understand that four hold icons are displayed on the second UI unit 281. Also, in FIG. 16A, the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 are shown by being sectioned by broken lines for ease of description, but these broken lines are not actually displayed.

  On the other hand, none of the suspension icons of the special map 2 are displayed. This is because, as described above, since the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 16 is the non-electric support state (non-time saving state), the electric chute is hard to open and it is difficult to win the special figure 2 starting port 232. This is because

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the special icon of the special figure which is easier to win in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is displayed according to the control state (game state), and the reserve icon of the other special figure is displayed. It is not displayed. That is, when the control state is the non-power support state, as shown in FIG. 16A, the hold icon of the special figure 1 is displayed on the second UI unit 281 and the hold icon of the special figure 2 is not displayed. On the other hand, when the control state is the power support state, on the other hand, the hold icon of Toku-zu 2 is displayed and the hold icon of Toku-zu 1 is not displayed. In the non-power support state, the hold icon of the special figure 2 may be displayed, or in the power support state, the hold icon of the special figure 1 may be displayed.

  In the present embodiment, the start of the symbol change display of the special figure is the start of the change in the special figure display device → the start of blinking or turning off of the fourth symbol → the start of the change of the second decorative symbol → the start of moving animation of the reserved icon or the deletion → decoration. It is performed in the order of the start of the change of the symbol, but this order may be changed.

  In FIG. 16 (2), the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, the symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 is started, and the turning off of the fourth symbol is performed. The pattern has not changed yet. Note that the symbol change and the fourth symbol change display on the first special figure display device 212 may simultaneously start, or the fourth symbol change display after the symbol change starts on the first special figure display device 212. May be started, or the symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 may be started after the variation display of the fourth symbol is started.

  FIG. 16 (3) shows a state where the second display of the number of reservations is updated from 2 to 1, and the variable display of the second decorative symbol is started. The update display of the second hold number display and the start of the change display of the second decorative symbol may be simultaneously performed, or the change of the second decorative symbol may be performed after the update display of the second hold number display is performed. The display may be started, or the update display of the second hold number display may be performed after the change display of the second decorative symbol is started.

  In FIG. 16D, the moving animation of the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special map 1 has started. In the movement (decrease) animation here, the hold icon (the target hold icon for the current symbol change) at the display position of the first hold icon h11 starts moving toward the base of the change icon in the first UI unit 280. At the same time, the holding icon at the display position of the second holding icon h12 starts moving toward the display position of the first holding icon h11 of the special figure 1 (see the first stage hs1 shown in FIG. 14). At this stage, the variable display of the decorative symbol has not been started.

In FIG. 16 (5), the movement animation continues, and in FIG. 16 (6), the hold icon which was the first hold icon h11 before the start of change reaches the base hs0 of the change icon and is displayed as the change icon h0. At the same time, the holding icon, which was the second holding icon h12 before the start of the change, reaches the display position of the first holding icon h11 and is displayed as the first holding icon h11, and thereafter, the change of the first decorative symbol Display starts. At the time when the symbol change in the first special figure display device 212 is started, the hold icon which was the first hold icon h11 may be viewed as the change icon h0, or the second hold icon may be used until then. The hold icon that was h12 may be viewed as the first hold icon h11. Note that the end of the moving animation and the start of the variable display of the first decorative symbol may be at the same timing, the variable display of the first decorative symbol may be started after the moving animation has ended, The moving animation may end after the variable display of one decorative symbol starts.
FIG. 16 (7) shows a state in which the variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 16 (8), a state in which a navigation character advance notice is given by the navigation character YM is shown. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, when the navi character notice is started, a balloon in which the character of "opportunity" is displayed is displayed near the navi character YM, thereby notifying that the expectation of the big hit is high.

  Thereafter, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 16 (9) shows a state in which the conversation notice starts while the navigation character notice is being performed. When the conversation notice is started, a conversation image CI1 of the lord displaying a character display of "chance" is displayed together with the character of the lord. The display of the conversation image CI1 of the lord is the first stage of the conversation notice. Further, the conversation image CI1 of the lord overlaps with the first decorative symbol, and it is determined that the first decorative symbol is more difficult to visually recognize than in a state where it does not overlap with the first decorative symbol. In addition, in the navi-chara notice, the display of the balloon changes from the character display of “opportunity” to the character display of “no”, thereby notifying that the sense of expectation for the big hit is increasing. The timing at which the conversation image CI1 of the lord is displayed may be the same as the timing at which the display in the balloon is updated to “No”, or the display in the balloon after the conversation image CI1 of the lord is displayed. May be updated to “No”, or the conversation image CI1 of the lord may be displayed after the display in the balloon is updated to “No”. In addition, there may be a case where an effect (for example, “No”) of elevating from a previously displayed notice (for example, “opportunity”) to a later displayed notice (for example, “hot fever”) is not performed. . In addition, the navi-chara notice is not only a notice in the symbol variation display, but also a pre-read notice, a notice for notifying that a certain notice is performed, and an explanation display (various notices, game states, characters appearing in the performance of the pachinko machine 100). Or a description of the stage of the production, or a tutorial display).

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 16 (10), the conversation notice is updated, and the navigation character notice is also updated. In the conversation notice, the conversation image CI1 of the lord is reduced and displayed below the display position of the second decorative symbol, and the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather displaying the operation promotion notification image together with the character of the grandfather is displayed. The operation promotion notification image is an image that prompts the user to press the effect button 136 (chance button 136) during the operation valid period, and includes a button image 136a imitating the effect button 136 (chance button 136) and the operation valid period. And a remaining time display meter MT indicating the remaining time. At the timing shown in FIG. 16 (10), the operation validity period has not been started, and even if the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated, the display corresponding thereto is not performed. The first decorative symbol is hidden by the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather, but the player can recognize that the special symbol is changing by the fourth symbol display device 284, the second decorative symbol, and the like. May be possible. The display position of the decorative symbol may be moved to a position that does not overlap with the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather or the conversation image CI1 of the lord so that the decorative symbol is not hidden. Also, as shown in FIG. 16 (10), the conversation image CI1 of the lord is at least partially overlapped by the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather, and the conversation of the lord is higher than in the non-overlapping state. It is determined that the display mode of the image CI1 is difficult to visually recognize. In addition, in the navi-chara notice, the display of the balloon changes from the character display of “No” to the character display of “hot”, and it is reported that the expectation of the big hit is considerably high. The display of the balloon overlaps a part of the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather. The timing at which the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather is displayed may be the same as the timing at which the display in the balloon is updated to “hot”, or the timing at which the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather is displayed after the conversation image CI2 is displayed. The display may be updated to “hot”, or the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather may be displayed after the display in the balloon is updated to “hot”. As described above, in this effect example, a big hit is more likely to occur when a conversation notice is given than when no conversation notice is given. In addition, when the conversation notice is updated, the conversation image CI1 of the lord need not be reduced (for example, the display of the same size as that in FIG. 16 (9) is displayed), and the conversation image CI1 of the lord is displayed. It may be deleted. Further, the conversation image displayed later may be different in size (large or small) from the conversation image displayed earlier, and when displayed, the conversation notice A having a high degree of expectation for the big hit is displayed in this conversation image. The size may be different (large or small) from conversation notice B, which has a lower degree of expectation of a big hit than notice A.

  Thereafter, the operation validity period is started at the timing shown in FIG. By operating the effect button 136 (chance button 136) after the timing shown in FIG. 16 (11), the player may be able to see the effect according to the operation.

  The remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 16 (12) is shown in a display mode when a predetermined time has elapsed after the operation effective period has started, and thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. The user is pressing the effect button 136 (chance button 136). At the timing shown in FIG. 16 (12), the navi-character announcement has ended, and the display of the balloon has been erased. When the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is pressed within the operation validity period, as shown in FIG. 16 (14), the grandfather's conversation image CI2 is replaced with the operation promotion notification image and "I'm fierce." May be displayed. Thereby, it is notified that the reliability of the jackpot is considerably high. In addition, the character display of the notice such as “I'm going to have a fever” may be displayed on condition that the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated, or the effect button 136 (chance button 136). May be displayed even when the operation validity period has elapsed without being operated.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 16 (15), the conversation image CI1 of the lord and the conversation image CI2 of the grandfather are erased, the conversation notice ends, and the first decorative symbol is made easily visible. It is shown.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 16 (16), after “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol of the first decorative symbol, as shown in FIG. 16 (17), “decoration 7” is displayed on the right symbol. 7 "is stopped and the reach state is formed. Here, when each symbol of the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, a symbol stop display animation may be performed to produce an effect that the symbol has been stopped and displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIGS. 16 (17) to (19), when the reach state is formed, the decorative symbol display device 208 performs an animation at the start of the reach. In the animation at the start of the reach in this effect example, when the reach state is formed, an animation display for enlarging / reducing the left symbol and the right symbol is performed. Note that an appropriate display mode of the animation at the start of the reach can be adopted. The player may be able to recognize that the reach effect is started by watching the reach start animation.

  When the reach effect is started, as shown in FIGS. 16 (20) to (21), the left symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol are moved and displayed on the left and right, respectively, and the first UI unit 280 changes the symbol. While leaving the frame below the display area while leaving the icon h0, the holding icons h11 to h14 (the holding icon h11 in the effect example shown in FIG. 16 (20)) displayed on the second UI unit 281 are also framed out. . Note that the start of the moving display of the left symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol and the start of the frame-out display of each image in the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 may be at the same timing. After the movement display of the left symbol and the right symbol of the decorative symbol starts, frame-out display of each image in the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 may start, or the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281. After the frame-out display of each image starts, the movement display of the left symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol may be started.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 16 (22), the first large-scale behavior character 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavioral character 224Gd operate, and overlap each other on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. The left symbol and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol are respectively overlapped by the first large-scale behavioral character 224Ga and the second large-scale behavioral character 224Gb, and are thus difficult to visually recognize. In addition, the second decorative symbol and the second reserved number display are at least partially overlapped by the first large-scale behavioral object 224Ga and the second large-scale behavioral accessory 224Gb, respectively, so that it is difficult to view them. It should be noted that only a part or all of the first large-scale behavioral agent 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavioral agent 224Gd may operate. The reliability may be different depending on the number of the four large-scale behavior actors 224Gd operating. In addition, the first large-scale behavioral character 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavioral character 224Gd may not operate.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 16 (23), light emission of the light guide plate IL is performed, and a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image is displayed on the light guide plate IL in an easily visible manner. Note that the light guide plate IL may not emit light in some cases. For example, there may be a case where both the operation of the first large-scale behavior actor 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior actor 224Gd and the light emission of the light guide plate IL are performed, or the first large-scale behavior actor 224Ga to the fourth large behavior is performed. There may be a case where only the operation of the accessory 224Gd is performed and the light guide plate IL does not emit light, or only the light guide plate IL emits light, and the first large plate behavior members 224Ga to the fourth large plate role The operation of the object 224Gd may not be performed, or the operation of the first large-scale behavioral agent 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavioral agent 224Gd and the light emission of the light guide plate Il may not be performed. Good.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 16 (24), after the light emission of the light guide plate IL is completed, as shown in FIG. 17 (25), the first large-panel behavior member 224Ga to the fourth large-panel behavior member 224Gd are respectively initialized. Return to position. Note that the light emission of the light guide plate IL may be terminated after the first large-panel behavior 224Ga to the fourth large-panel behavior 224Gd return to the initial position, respectively, or the first large-panel behavior 224Ga to the second large-panel behavior 224Gd may be terminated. The start of the movement of the four large-panel behavioral objects 224Gd to the initial position and the end of light emission of the light guide plate IL may be performed simultaneously. Here, in FIGS. 16 (22) to (24), a series of effects performed by the first large-bodied behavior actor 224Ga to the fourth large-bodied behavior actor 224Gd and the light guide plate IL are performed in a series. You may be comprised so that it may become a big hit more easily than when an effect is not performed.

  FIG. 17 (26) shows a state in which it has developed into a super reach (swordsman reach). The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 17 (26) displays a large image of the enemy swordsman, and the subsequent decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. Animation is displayed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 17 (28), the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed, and a state in which the button effect is started is shown. Thereafter, when the operation effective period of the effect button 136 (chance button 136) starts at the timing shown in FIG. 17 (29), the operation of the effect button 136 (chance button 136) by the player can be accepted.

  The remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 17 (30) shows that the operation validity period has started and the gauge has decreased, and thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. A state in which the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is pressed is shown. When the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is pressed within the operation validity period, as shown in FIG. 17 (32), a cut-in image CI3 of the lord is displayed to notify that the reliability of the big hit is high. A preview performance is performed. The lord's cut-in image CI3 overlaps with the animation display of the duel scene, and is considered to be more difficult to see than when the lord's cut-in image CI3 is not displayed. The cut-in image C13 of the lord may be displayed on condition that the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated, or the effect button 136 (chance button 136) may be operated. May be displayed even when the operation validity period has elapsed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 17 (33), the cut-in image CI3 of the lord is erased, and the animation display of the duel scene is continued.

    Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 17 (34), the button image 136a and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed, and a state in which the second button effect has been started after developing into super reach is shown. ing. Thereafter, when the operation effective period of the effect button 136 (chance button 136) starts at the timing shown in FIG. 17 (35), the operation of the effect button 136 (chance button 136) by the player can be accepted.

  The remaining time display meter MT shown in FIG. 17 (36) shows that the gauge is decreasing due to the start of the operation validity period. Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. A state in which the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is being pressed is shown. It should be noted that the operation valid period in the second button production after developing into super reach may be shorter than the operation valid period in the first button production after developing into super reach. The speed at which the gauge in the remaining time display meter MT decreases in the second button effect after the development of the super reach may be faster than the speed at which the gauge decreases in the remaining time display meter MT in the first button effect. In addition, the operation validity period in the first button production after developing into super reach may be shorter than the operation validity period in the second button production after developing into super reach, or after developing into super reach. The operation effective period in the first button effect and the operation effective period in the second button effect after developing into super reach may be the same length.

  When the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is pressed during the operation validity period, the decorative symbol display device 208 switches from the animation display of the duel scene to the display of the effect image, as shown in FIG. At the same time, the first large-scale behavior character 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavioral character 224Gd operate, and each overlaps on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. The left image and the right symbol of the effect image and the first decorative symbol are overlapped by the first large-scale behavioral character 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavioral character 224Gd, respectively, and the first large-scale behavioral character 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavioral character 224 Gd makes it more difficult to visually recognize compared to the case where they are not overlapped. In addition, the second decorative symbol and the second reserved number display are at least partially overlapped by the first large-scale behavioral object 224Ga and the second large-scale behavioral accessory 224Gb, respectively, so that it is difficult to view them. It should be noted that only a part or all of the first large-scale behavioral agent 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavioral agent 224Gd may operate. The reliability may be different depending on the number of the four large-scale behavior actors 224Gd operating. The effect shown in FIG. 17 (38) may be displayed on condition that the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is operated, or the effect button 136 (chance button 136) may be operated. It may be displayed even when the operation validity period elapses without being performed. Further, there may be a case where only one of the display of the effect image and the operation of the first large-scale behavioral character 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavioral character 224Gd is performed. When both the display of the effect image and the operations of the first large-scale behavioral agent 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavioral agent 224Gd are performed, the first large-scale behavioral agent 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavioral agent 224Gd are displayed after the effect image is displayed. The operation of the large-scale behavior role 224Gd may be started, the effect image may be displayed after the operation of the first large-scale behavior role 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavior role 224Gd is started, or the effect image may be displayed. May be started simultaneously with the operation of the first large-scale behavioral character 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavioral character 224Gd. Further, when the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is pressed within the operation validity period, the effect display may be performed without performing the effect illustrated in FIG. After the effect display is performed, the resurrection effect may be displayed to display a large hit effect display. Note that when the effect shown in FIG. 17 (38) is started, the displayed fluctuating icon h0 is not displayed, but may be displayed continuously.

  Thereafter, in FIG. 17 (39), the thousand-box actor 224H moves and moves downward, and overlaps with the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the first large actor 224Ga to the fourth large actor 224Gd. Is shown. Further, FIG. 17 (40) shows that the light guide plate IL emits light thereafter. The order in which the display of the effect image, the operation of the first large-scale behavioral object 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavioral object 224Gd, the operation of the thousand-sized box character 224H, and the order in which light emission of the light guide plate IL starts is limited to those described above. Instead, it can be set appropriately. In addition, all of the display of the effect image, the operation of the first large-bodied-behavior role 224Ga to the fourth large-bodied-behavior role 224Gd, the operation of the thousand-and-two-box behavior 224H, and the light emission of the light guide plate IL may be performed. There may be cases where the copy is not performed.

  FIG. 17 (41) shows a state where light emission of the light guide plate IL has been completed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 17 (42), the thousand box role object 224H starts rising toward the initial position. After that, in FIG. 17 (43), the effect image fades out, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. Has begun. At this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the animation display of the duel scene whose display has been interrupted is restarted while fading in. At this time, the display of the change icon h0 has also been restarted.

  Thereafter, the animation display of the duel scene continues until FIG. 17 (46). In FIG. 17 (46), the protagonist of the hero defeats the enemy swordsman, and in FIG. 17 (47), “decoration 7” is displayed on the middle symbol to inform that a big hit will occur. Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 17 (48), the animation display of the duel scene fades out, and as shown in FIG. 18 (49), the first decorative symbol is "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7". The swing fluctuation is started with the combination of the decorative symbols. In the second decorative symbol, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are still displayed in a variable manner. The background here may be non-display, a background image different from that before super-reach is performed, or the same background image as before super-reach is performed. . Further, at this time, the change icon h0 and the hold icon of the special figure 1 are not displayed, but the change icon h0 and the hold icon of the special figure 1 may be displayed. Further, the display of the navigation character YM is not performed, but the display of the navigation character YM may be performed.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 18 (50), the first special figure display device 212 is displayed in the display mode of the special figure A. At the timing shown in FIG. 18 (50), the first special figure display device 212 is stopped and displayed, but the first sub control unit 400 does not receive the symbol change stop command from the main control unit 300. Therefore, since it is not determined that the symbol has been determined to be stopped, the fluctuation of the first decorative symbol continues to fluctuate, and the second decorative symbol and the fourth symbol display device 284 are still displaying the fluctuation.

  After that, when the first sub-control unit 400 receives the symbol change stop command, as shown in FIG. In addition to the stop display in the combination of the symbols, the fourth symbol display device 284 performs the display in the form that the symbols are stopped.

  Thereafter, when the big hit game starts and a winning effect start command is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400, as shown in FIG. 18 (52), the decorative symbol display device 208 causes the big hit start effect. Display starts. In this case, since this is a jackpot game started as a jackpot with a combination of decoration symbols of “decoration 7−decoration 7−decoration 7”, “special bonus” is displayed on the decoration symbol display device 208, It is reported to a person that it is a 15R probability change big hit. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 18 (52), mini-right-handed display for instructing right-handedness is performed in the upper left corner of the display area. The mini-right-hand display may not be performed.

    Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 18 (53), a right-handed instruction screen for instructing the player to right-handed is displayed, and then, as shown in FIG. 18 (54), the first round is started. When the first round is started, the decorative design display device 208 performs a round effect display, and displays “decoration 7” indicating the combination of decorative designs when a big hit has occurred in the lower right corner of the display screen. Is being done. In the upper left corner of the display screen, mini right-handed display is performed, and in the upper right corner, the display of “1R”, which is the current round, is performed. The number of prize balls acquired in the big hit game or the total number of prize balls acquired during the extended play may be displayed.

  After that, when the big hit game is consumed and the fifteenth round is started, as shown in FIG. 18 (55), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a round effect display, and at the upper right corner of the display area, The display of “15R”, which is the current round, is performed.

  FIG. 18 (56) shows a state in which the big hit game has ended and the big hit end effect display is being performed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The big hit game this time is a big hit game started with a 15R probable big hit, so after the big hit game, the game state becomes a special figure high probability general figure high probability state (probable state with electric support). Therefore, in the big hit end effect display, "Yoshimune RUSH rush" indicating that is displayed, and it is notified that the state shifts to the probable change state with the electric support.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 18 (57), a display (alert display) for alerting the user to forget to take the prepaid card inserted in the card unit 608 (see FIG. 4) is performed. In addition, this alerting display may be displayed only when the big hit game in the first big hit that has become a big hit in the gaming state where the electric hit is not being performed, or regardless of the situation of the big hit, the big hit It may be displayed whenever the game is over.

  FIG. 18 (58) shows a state before the big hit game ends, the state shifts to the probable change state with the electric support, and the first symbol change display is started. In the probable change state with the electric support, the background image is the background image for the probable change state with the electric support, and the decorative pattern has a display mode different from that of the normal game state (the special figure low probability ordinary figure low probability state). . Further, a reserved icon display area 282 of the special figure 2 is formed in the lower center part of the display screen, and the number of reserved special figures 2 is notified by the number of displayed icons. Here, the default display mode of the reservation icon of Toku-zu 2 is a square, plain pattern and white display mode. Can be determined at a glance. Note that the default display mode of the hold icon of Toku-zu 1 and the default display mode of the hold icon of Toku-zu 2 may be the same. In FIG. 18 (58) to FIG. 63 (63), in order to make it easy to understand that four hold icons are displayed in the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2, the hold icons that are not actually displayed are displayed. The icons are indicated by dashed lines. Also, in FIGS. 18 (58) to (63), the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2 is divided by a broken line for easy explanation, but this broken line is actually displayed. Not done. Further, in the probable change state with the electric support, the hold icon of the special figure 1 is not displayed, but may be displayed. Also, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 18 (58), a mini right-handed display is performed in the upper left corner of the display screen, and a character “BONUS × O” indicating the number of consecutive games is displayed below the display. ing. At the timing shown in FIG. 18 (58), since the first big hit game has been completed, the display of “bonus × 1” indicating that fact has been made.

  Then, after the symbol variation display on the first special figure display device 212 is started at the timing shown in FIG. 18 (59), the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 18 (60) instructs the player to right-hand. Right-hand notification is displayed. This right-handed notification is displayed in such a manner that the character "Please right-handed" is displayed on the translucent belt image. The right strike notification overlaps the decorative symbol, and it is considered that the decorative symbol is more difficult to visually recognize than in the case where the decorative symbol does not overlap. The right strike notification is displayed only in the power support state in which the first big hit game has been completed and shifted, but may be displayed in the power support state in which the big hit game other than the first big hit game has been completed and shifted. For example, it may be displayed every time the big hit game ends and the state shifts to the electric support state. Also, after shifting to the power support state, a right-handed notification may be displayed even when left-handed is detected. For example, it is detected that the first special figure starting port 230 has been won. In such a case, it may be determined that a left-hand drive has been performed, and a right-hand drive notification may be displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 18 (60), the second reserved number display is displayed in the lower right corner of the display area.

  After that, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 18 (61) shows a state in which the variable display of the decorative symbol has started. After that, when a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses after the right-handed notification is displayed, the right-handed notification is not displayed as shown in FIG. The mini right-handed display is continuously performed.

  FIG. 18 (63) shows a state where the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is suspended four times. That is, in the special figure 2 holding lamp 220, all four lamps are turned on to indicate that the special figure 2 is held, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the holding icons h21 to h24 of the special figure 2 are displayed. Are displayed. Also, in the second hold number display, "4" indicating that the hold number of the special figure 2 is four is displayed.

  FIG. 19 (49a) shows another example of the effect following FIG. 17 (48). In addition, in FIG. 16 and FIG. 17, the case where the “decoration 7” is in the reach state and “decoration 7” is displayed on the middle symbol has been described. The case where "decoration 6" is displayed on the symbol will be described. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 19 (49a), a state is shown in which the first decorative symbol is fluctuating with a combination of decorative symbols “decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6”. In the second decorative symbol, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are still displayed in a variable manner. The background here may be non-display, a background image different from that before super-reach is performed, or the same background image as before super-reach is performed. Further, at this time, the change icon h0 and the hold icon of the special figure 1 are not displayed, but the change icon h0 and the hold icon of the special figure 1 may be displayed. Further, the display of the navigation character YM is not performed, but the display of the navigation character YM may be performed.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 19 (50a), the first special figure display device 212 is displayed in the display mode of the special figure B. At the timing shown in FIG. 19 (50a), the first sub control unit 400 has not received the symbol change stop command from the main control unit 300, and has not determined that the symbol change has been stopped. The first decorative symbol continues to fluctuate, and the second decorative symbol and the fourth symbol display device 284 are still displaying the fluctuation.

  After that, when the first sub-control unit 400 receives the symbol change stop command, as shown in FIG. 19 (51a), the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are each the decoration of “decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6”. In addition to the stop display in the combination of the symbols, the fourth symbol display device 284 performs the display in the form that the symbols are stopped. By looking at this, the player may be able to recognize that any of the 5R probability variable hits, the 5R normal hits, and the 2R normal hits has been achieved.

  Thereafter, when the big hit game is started and a winning effect start command is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit 400, as shown in FIG. 19 (52a), the decorative symbol display device 208 causes the big hit start effect. Display starts. In this case, since this is a jackpot game started as a jackpot with a combination of the decoration symbols of “decoration 6−decoration 6−decoration 6”, “bonus” is displayed on the decoration symbol display device 208, and the player Is reported to be either a 5R probability variable hit, a 5R normal hit, or a 2R normal hit. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 19 (52a), a mini right-handed display is displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen.

  FIG. 19 (38b) shows another effect example following FIG. 17 (37). FIG. 19 (38b) shows a state in which the effect button 136 (chance button 136) is pressed within the operation valid period, but the result of the loss is displayed. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 6" is displayed on the medium symbol, and it is notified that a loss has occurred. At this time, the display of the change icon h0 has been resumed. Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 19 (39b), the first decorative symbol fades out, and the animation display of the duel scene is restarted. Here, the protagonist of the hero loses to the enemy swordsman, and thereafter, the animation display of the duel scene fades out, and as shown in FIG. Leave and hidden.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 19 (41b) to (42b), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the first UI unit 280 and the second UI unit 281 (holding frame) scroll in from below the display area, and the holding icon is displayed. And the navigation character YM are displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 19 (42b), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol starts to fluctuate with a combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7”. In the second decorative symbol, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are still displayed in a variable manner.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 19 (43b), the first special figure display device 212 is displayed in the display mode of the special figure I. At the timing shown in FIG. 19 (43b), the first sub control unit 400 has not received the symbol change stop command from the main control unit 300, and has not determined that the symbol change has been stopped. The first decorative symbol continues to fluctuate, and the second decorative symbol and the fourth symbol display device 284 are still displaying the fluctuation.

  After that, when the first sub-control unit 400 receives the symbol change stop command, as shown in FIG. 19 (44b), the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are respectively decorations of “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7”. In addition to the stop display in the combination of the symbols, the fourth symbol display device 284 performs the display in the form that the symbols have stopped.

  Subsequently, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 19 (45b), a variable icon erasing animation is displayed. In the change icon erasure animation display, the animation display in which the change icon h0 gradually decreases and finally the change icon h0 disappears as shown in FIG. 19 (46b) is performed. The changing icon erasing animation may be started before the special figure stops.

  Next, a specific example of the effect performed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 20 to FIG. 30 are views showing step by step the change effects centering on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 applicable to the present embodiment. The effect example shown in FIGS. 20 to 30 is an example of an effect executed by one pachinko machine 100, and the pachinko machine 100 capable of executing the effect example shown in FIGS. 20 to 30 is shown in another drawing. Various effects can also be performed. Further, in FIGS. 20 to 30, instead of the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol display device 208L of the three decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208N may be used. The decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are not shown. 20 to 30, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the general figure display device 210, the first special figure reservation lamp 218, the second special figure reservation lamp 220, and the general figure reservation Illustration of the lamp 216 is omitted. Further, a transparent light guide plate IL or a POV display may be arranged on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  The reference numerals shown in FIGS. 20 to 30 represent common components when the same reference numerals are used. Further, even when different codes are used, there are cases where the technical ideas are common. That is, as the technical idea, the technical idea shown in FIGS. 14 to 19 and the technical idea shown in other drawings can be applied to the technical ideas shown in FIGS. 20 to 30. Conversely, the technical ideas shown in FIGS. 20 to 30 can be applied to the technical ideas shown in FIGS. 49 to 193 and the technical ideas shown in other drawings. At this time, components having the same reference numerals may be treated as the same component, and may be replaced.

  The description in FIGS. 20 to 30 can be applied to any of the effect examples in this specification, but is preferably applied to the effect examples described with reference to FIGS. 14 to 19.

  FIG. 20 is a diagram showing some examples in which the navigation character YM of the lord character as the effect icon is taking an action on the change icon h0.

  In the example shown on the left end of FIG. 20, first, in FIG. 20A, the decorative symbol display device 208 completes the variation display of the decorative symbol, and the combination of the lost decorative symbols (“decoration 2” − “decoration 3”). -"Decoration 2" is stopped and displayed. Note that the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed at the upper left of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG.

  In addition, a holding frame UI is displayed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. The hold frame UI has a hold icon display area HIS, a change icon display area CIS, and an effect icon display area DIS. The variable icon display area CIS is provided at the center, and the pedestal hs0 is arranged in the variable icon display area CIS. The reserved icon display area HIS is provided on the left side of the variable icon display area CIS, and four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) are arranged on the left base icon bI1. The effect icon display area DIS is provided on the right side of the fluctuating icon display area CIS, and a navigation character YM of a lord character is displayed on the right base icon bIr in FIG. In the effect icon display area DIS, various displays such as icons and mini items are performed. The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 20A is displayed in a display mode wearing a blue kimono. That is, at least a portion is displayed in blue. In other words, the whole may be displayed in blue, or only a part (for example, a kimono part) may be displayed in blue. The navigation character YM is a display that may be displayed across a plurality of continuous symbol change displays. Further, the display mode of the navigation character YM may change while the display is continued. Details of this point will be described later.

  In FIG. 20A, the number of reservations in Toku-zu 1 is 4, and the first holding icon h11, the second holding icon h12, the third holding icon h13, and the fourth holding icon h14 of Toku-zu 1 are displayed. ing. Each of the hold icons has a default (white) display mode. That is, at least a part of each of the hold icons is displayed in white. In other words, the whole may be displayed in white, or only a part (for example, the area inside the line of the black edge) may be displayed in white. The second reserved number display is displayed at the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 20A, and the reserved number of the special figure 1 is 4 and the reserved number of the special figure 2 is 0. Is reported.

  Further, FIG. 20A shows a state immediately after the combination of the lost decorative patterns (“decoration 2” − “decoration 3” − “decoration 2”) is stopped and displayed, and the change icon h0 is still displayed. is there. The change icon h0 disappears at the timing when the combination of the lost decorative symbols is definitely displayed. Note that the display of the navigation character YM does not disappear even at the timing of the final display, and the navigation character YM continues to be displayed during the final display.

  In FIG. 20 (b), the reservation of the special figure 1 has been exhausted, and the decorative symbol display device 208 has started to display the variation of the decorative symbol, and the moving animation of the reserved icon of the special figure 1 has been completed. As a result, three reserved icons of a first reserved icon h11, a second reserved icon h12, and a third reserved icon h13 are displayed in the reserved icon display area HIS, and the first reserved icon h11 is displayed in the variable icon display area CIS. The icon that was the hold icon h11 is displayed as the change icon h0. All of the hold icons h1 to h3 and the change icon h0 are in the default (white) display mode. This change icon is also displayed at least partially in white. In other words, the whole may be displayed in white, or only a part (for example, the area inside the line of the black edge) may be displayed in white. In the second reserved number display displayed on the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 20B, the reserved number of the special figure 1 is 3 and the reserved number of the special figure 2 is 0. Has been reported. Further, in the effect icon display area DIS, a navigation character YM in a display mode wearing a blue kimono is continuously displayed, and the navigation character YM is displayed across a continuous symbol variation display. become. The navigation character YM has been displayed in an initial posture facing the front. Note that the navigation character YM may be continuously displayed while performing a standby animation (for example, an animation that repeats a certain operation).

  In FIG. 20C, the navigation character YM in the initial posture starts the icon change animation, turns to the changing icon h0, and changes to a pose in which the sword is pulled out and shaken. In FIG. 20D, a wave is oscillated from the sword of the lord's navigation character YM. In FIG. 20E, at least a part of the fluctuating icon h0 is covered with the effect image Eh0 of the smoke image, and the fluctuating icon h0 is displayed. Are more difficult to see than before they are covered. Note that the fluctuation icon h0 may be partially covered with the effect image Eh0, or may be entirely covered with the effect image Eh0. In FIG. 20 (f), the change icon h0, which is the default (white) display mode before the effect image Eh0 disappears and is covered with the effect image Eh0, is replaced with a blue display mode which is the same display mode as the kimono of the navigation character YM. The display mode has changed. Further, the effect image Eh0 shown in FIG. 20E has the same display mode as the kimono of the navigation character YM, and the changing icon h0 has changed to the same mode as the effect image Eh0. In this example, the display mode of the navigation character YM or the display mode of the effect image Eh0 suggests (notices) the display mode of the changed icon h0 after the change. However, the mode of the effect image Eh0 may be different from the mode after the icon change (for example, white or red). The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 20 (g) has returned to the initial posture. Although the wave has disappeared from the sword of the navigation character YM shown in FIG. 20 (f), the wave may still be oscillating, or the navigation character YM may have the timing shown in FIG. It may return to the initial posture at the timing when Eh0 disappears).

  The icon change animation described above may be regarded as being started from FIG. 20C and ended immediately before (FIG. 20G) (immediately before returning to the initial posture), or while the wave is oscillating (FIG. 20). The animation may be regarded as an animation performed only in (d) to (e) of the same figure, or may be regarded as an animation performed only while the effect image Eh0 is displayed.

  The change of the display mode of the change icon means that a jackpot notice (normal notice) in the change display of the decorative symbol currently being performed has been performed, but the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. In, the variation display of the decorative symbols is finished, and the combination of the lost decorative symbols (“decoration 4”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 5”) is stopped and displayed. Therefore, the normal notice here is a false notice. At the point in time when the variation display of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the variation icon h0 whose display mode has changed is still displayed, and the navigation character YM is also displayed. Note that the fluctuating icon h0 whose display mode has changed may disappear earlier in the case of a false notice than in the case of a true notice.

  In the example illustrated at the left end of FIG. 20 described above, the A-th effect icon (icon of the lord's navigator character YM) of the A-th color (blue) is changed from the change icon in the default display mode to the A-th color. This is an example of changing at the A-th frequency (probability).

  Subsequently, the second example from the left in FIG. 20 will be described focusing on differences from the example shown on the left end in FIG. 20, and redundant description may be omitted. Note that, in the following description, a description overlapping with the example shown at the left end of FIG. 20 may be omitted, but the description in the example shown at the left end of FIG. 20 applies. In the second example shown from the left in FIG. 20, FIGS. (A) to (D) are the same as FIGS. (A) to (d) described above, and a blue kimono is used. The navigator character YM wearing the display mode turns to the fluctuation icon h0 of the default (white) display mode, changes to a pose of pulling out the sword and swinging, and the sword of the navigation character YM oscillates. ing. Subsequently, in FIG. 20E, at least a part of the variation icon h0 is covered by the effect image Eh0 that is a red smoke image, and the variation icon h0 is more difficult to recognize than before being covered. Note that the fluctuation icon h0 may be partially covered with the effect image Eh0, or may be entirely covered with the effect image Eh0. In FIG. 20 (F), the variation icon h0, which is the default (white) display mode before the effect image Eh0 disappears and is covered with the effect image Eh0, is displayed in red, which is the same mode as the effect image Eh0. Has changed to an aspect. At least a part of the change icon h0 changed to the red display mode is displayed in red. In other words, the whole may be displayed in red, or only a part (for example, the area inside the line of the black edge) may be displayed in red. The fluctuating icon h0 has changed to the same mode as the effect image Eh0, and the display mode of the effect image Eh0 indicates (advises) the display mode of the fluctuating icon h0 after the change. On the other hand, the mode of the change icon h0 after the change (the mode of red) is different from the mode of the kimono of the navigation character YM (the mode of blue). Also in this example, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 20H, the combination of the lost decorative symbols (“decoration 4” − “decoration 5” − “decoration 5”) is stopped and displayed. The normal notice by the changed fluctuation icon h0 is a false notice.

  In the second example from the left of FIG. 20 described above, the A-th production icon (icon of the lord's navigation character YM) of the A-th color (blue) is a variable icon of the default display mode and a B-th icon. In this example, the color (red) is changed at the B-th frequency (probability). Here, the relationship between the A-th frequency and the B-th frequency in the example shown at the left end of FIG. 20 may be such that the A-th frequency is higher than the B-th frequency, The frequency B may be higher than the frequency, or the frequency A and the frequency B may be the same.

  Subsequently, the third example from the left in FIG. 20 will be described focusing on differences from the example shown on the left end in FIG. 20, and redundant description may be omitted. Also in the third example from the left in FIG. 20, FIGS. (A) to (D) are the same as FIGS. (A) to (D) described above, and a blue kimono is used. The navigator character YM in the wearing display mode turns to the fluctuation icon h0 of the default (white) display mode, changes to a pose of pulling out the sword and swinging, and the sword of the navigator character YM oscillates. ing. Subsequently, in FIG. 20E, at least a part of the change icon h0 is covered by the effect image Eh0 which is the same blue smoke image as the kimono aspect of the navigation character YM, and the change icon h0 is visually recognized before being covered. It has become difficult. Note that the fluctuation icon h0 may be partially covered with the effect image Eh0, or may be entirely covered with the effect image Eh0. In FIG. 20F, the effect image Eh0 has disappeared, but in this example, the display mode of the variable icon h0 has not changed, and the variable icon h0 remains in the default (white) display mode. Thus, even if the icon is covered by the effect image Eh0, the icon may not only change but may not change. Of the icon change animations, an animation in which the display mode of the icon changes can be classified as a success animation, and an animation in which the display mode of the icon does not change can be classified as a failure animation. However, when the icon is covered by the effect image Eh0, the display mode of the covered icon may always be changed. In this example as well, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 20C, the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss (“decoration 4” − “decoration 5” − “decoration 5”) is stopped and displayed. In the first place, the normal notice using the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 is not performed, and when the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 does not change at the stage of FIG. Is low. However, even if the display mode of the change icon h0 does not change, a big hit may occur.

  Subsequently, the example shown in the upper half of the right end of FIG. 20 will be described focusing on the differences from the example shown in the left end of FIG. 20, and duplicate description may be omitted. In FIG. 20C shown at the left end, the change icon h0 has a default (white) display mode, but may have a blue display mode. This example is a case where the display mode of the change icon h0 shown in FIG. 20 (c) is a blue display mode, and FIG. 20 (d1) shows the navigation of the lord in a display mode wearing a blue kimono. The character YM swings his sword toward the change icon h0 in the blue display mode, and a wave is oscillated from the sword. That is, at least a part of the change icon h0 shown in FIG. 20 (d1) is displayed in blue. In other words, the whole may be displayed in blue, or only a part (for example, the area inside the black border line) may be displayed in blue. Subsequently, in FIG. 20 (e1), at least a part of the fluctuating icon h0 is the same as the form of the kimono of the navigation character YM, and the effect image Eh0 is a blue smoke image that is the same as the display form of the fluctuating icon h0. The covered and fluctuating icon h0 is more difficult to view than before being covered. Note that the fluctuation icon h0 may be partially covered with the effect image Eh0, or may be entirely covered with the effect image Eh0. In FIG. 20 (f1), the effect icon Eh0 disappears, and the change icon h0, which was a blue display mode before being covered by the effect image Eh0, has changed to a red display mode. That is, the change icon h0 has changed to a mode different from the effect image Eh0 and from the kimono mode (blue mode) of the navigation character YM. Also in this example, after that, the combination of the lost decorative symbols is stopped and displayed, and the normal notice by the variable icon h0 whose display mode has changed is a false notice.

  Subsequently, the example shown in the lower half of the right end of FIG. 20 will be described focusing on the differences from the example shown on the left end of FIG. 20, and duplicate description may be omitted. In FIG. 20C shown at the left end, the change icon h0 has a default (white) display mode, but may have a blue display mode. In addition, the navigation character YM of the lord is a display mode wearing a blue kimono, but may be a display mode wearing a red kimono. In this example, the display mode of the change icon h0 shown in FIG. 20C is a blue display mode, and the navigation character YM of the lord is a display mode wearing a red kimono. In (d2), a lord-like navigation character YM in a display mode wearing a red kimono swings a sword toward a change icon h0 in a blue display mode, and a wave is oscillated from the sword. That is, at least a part of the navigation character YM shown in FIG. 20 (d2) is displayed in red. In other words, the whole may be displayed in red, or only a part (for example, a kimono part) may be displayed in red. Subsequently, in FIG. 20 (e2), at least a part of the fluctuating icon h0 is covered by an effect image Eh0 that is a blue smoke image that is the same as the display mode of the fluctuating icon h0. It is difficult to see. Note that the fluctuation icon h0 may be partially covered with the effect image Eh0, or may be entirely covered with the effect image Eh0. In FIG. 20 (f2), the effect image Eh0 has disappeared, but in this example, the display mode of the fluctuating icon h0 has not changed, and the fluctuating icon h0 remains in the blue display mode. The change icon h0 has the same mode as the effect image Eh0, and the display mode of the effect image Eh0 indicates (notices) that the display mode of the change icon h0 does not change.

  As described above, all the examples described with reference to FIG. 20 are examples in which the change icon h0 is targeted, but the same applies to the case in which the hold icon is targeted.

  Further, as an embodiment, white, blue, and red have been described as examples, but other colors and patterns may be used. That is, a plurality of types of modes are prepared as modes that indicate the player's advantage and the jackpot expectation. For example, the lowest aspect is a white or non-patterned aspect (A-th aspect), a blue or diagonal pattern aspect (B-th aspect), a green or diamond-shaped aspect (C-th aspect), a red or The shape of the lattice pattern (the D-th embodiment), the color and the vertical line pattern (the E-th embodiment) increase in order, and the rainbow color and the horizontal line-pattern (the F-th embodiment) become the highest. . A plurality of types of modes are prepared for each of the change icon, the hold icon, the navigation character YM, and the effect image Eh0, but each mode is not limited to the mode described with reference to FIG. That is, white in the example described with reference to FIG. 20 may be replaced with blue. For example, the fluctuating icon h0 that was in the white display mode may be in a blue display mode or a green display mode. Furthermore, the fluctuating icon h0 which was a white display mode may be a red display mode, a gold display mode, or a rainbow display mode. Further, blue in the example described with reference to FIG. 20 may be replaced with white or green. For example, the lord-like navigation character YM, which was a display mode wearing a blue kimono, may be a display mode wearing a white kimono or a display mode wearing a green kimono. The effect image Eh0 having the display mode of may be a white display mode or a green display mode. Alternatively, the lord-like navigation character YM, which was the display mode wearing the blue kimono, may be the display mode wearing the red kimono, or may be the display mode wearing the gold kimono, The effect image Eh0, which is a display mode wearing a rainbow-colored kimono, may be a red display mode, a gold display mode, or a rainbow display mode. It may be a color display mode. In addition, when the modes are roughly divided, a mode of a green color or a rhombus pattern (a C mode) (the first group which is a group of the A mode, the B mode, and the C mode) and a red or Lattice Pattern Mode (D-th Mode) The grid pattern can be divided into the above-described modes (the second group which is a group of the D-th mode, the E-th mode, and the F-th mode). Here, the mode belonging to the first group cannot be changed to the mode belonging to the second group, and the mode belonging to the second group cannot be changed to the mode belonging to the first group. On the other hand, the modes may be interchanged in the first group, and the modes may be interchanged in the second group. Further, in addition to the color and the pattern, the player's advantage and the expectation of a big hit may be represented by a difference in size or number. In addition, the player's advantage is that the player is likely to be in an advantageous control state (for example, a probable change state and / or a time saving state), that a premiere effect is easily started, or that a big hit confirmation effect is started. It may be easy. In addition, it is easy to execute an effect that is indirectly connected to the jackpot without directly connecting to the jackpot. For example, an SP reach production with a high jackpot reliability may be started, or another announcement with a high jackpot reliability may easily appear. The matters related to the mode described in this paragraph are the same in the examples before and in the examples thereafter.

  Furthermore, the mode of each icon may be the mode of the entire icon (entire area) or the mode of only a part (partial area) of the icon.

    Further, in each of the examples described with reference to FIG. 20, the normal notice by the fluctuating icon h0 whose display mode has changed is a false notice, but may be a true notice due to a big hit.

  FIG. 21 is a diagram illustrating some examples in which the navigation character YM wearing a red kimono is taking an action on the change icon h0.

  The example illustrated at the left end of FIG. 21 will be described focusing on the differences from the example illustrated at the left end of FIG. 20, and overlapping description may be omitted. In the effect icon display area DIS of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 21A, a navigation character YM wearing a red kimono is displayed.

  In FIG. 21B, the fluctuating display of the decorative pattern is started, and in FIG. 21C, the navigation character YM, which has been in the initial posture, faces the fluctuating icon h0 in the white display mode. The pose changes to a pose where the sword is pulled out and shaken. In FIG. 21 (d), a wave is oscillated from the sword of the lord's navigation character YM. In FIG. 21 (e), at least a part of the change icon h0 is covered by the blue smoke image effect image Eh0, The icon h0 is more difficult to view than before being covered. Note that the fluctuation icon h0 may be partially covered with the effect image Eh0, or may be entirely covered with the effect image Eh0. In FIG. 21F, the change icon h0, which is the default (white) display mode before the effect image Eh0 disappears and is covered with the effect image Eh0, is displayed in blue, which is the same mode as the effect image Eh0. Has changed to an aspect. In this example, the display mode of the effect image Eh0 suggests (preliminary notice) the display mode of the changed icon h0 after the change. Also in this example, after that, the combination of the lost decorative patterns (“decoration 4” − “decoration 5” − “decoration 5”) is stopped and displayed, and the normal notice by the variable icon h0 whose display mode has changed is a false notice. That was.

  In the example illustrated at the left end of FIG. 21 described above, the A-th effect icon (icon of the lord's navigator character YM) of the B-th color (red) is replaced with the change icon of the default display mode by the A-color ( This is an example in which the color (blue) is changed at the C-th frequency (probability).

  Subsequently, the second example from the left in FIG. 21 will be described focusing on differences from the example shown on the left end in FIG. 21, and overlapping description may be omitted. In the second example from the left in FIG. 21, FIGS. (A) to (D) are the same as FIGS. (A) to (d) described above. The navigator character YM in the wearing display mode turns to the fluctuation icon h0 of the default (white) display mode, changes to a pose of pulling out the sword and swinging, and the sword of the navigator character YM oscillates. ing. Subsequently, in FIG. 21E, at least a part of the change icon h0 is covered by the effect image Eh0 that is a red smoke image, and the change icon h0 is more difficult to visually recognize than before the cover. Note that the fluctuation icon h0 may be partially covered with the effect image Eh0, or may be entirely covered with the effect image Eh0. In FIG. 21 (F), the change icon h0, which was the default (white) display mode before the effect image Eh0 disappeared and was covered by the effect image Eh0, has changed to a red display mode. That is, the change icon h0 has changed to the same display mode as the kimono of the navigation character YM, and also has changed to the same mode as the effect image Eh0. In this example, the display mode of the navigation character YM or the display mode of the effect image Eh0 suggests (notices) the display mode of the changed icon h0 after the change. Also in this example, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 21H, the combination of the lost decorative symbols (“decoration 4” − “decoration 5” − “decoration 5”) is stopped and displayed, and the display mode is changed. The normal notice by the changed fluctuation icon h0 is a false notice.

  In the second example from the left of FIG. 21 described above, the A-th effect icon (icon of the lord's navigator character YM) of the B-color (red) is a change icon of the default display mode, This is an example in which the color (red) is changed at the D-th frequency (probability). Note that, instead of the fluctuating icon h0 in the default display mode, for example, the fluctuating icon h0 in a green display mode may be used. In this case, the B-th color (red) A-direction effect icon (icon of the lord's navigation character YM) changes the C-color (green) display mode change icon to the B-th color (red) ) Is an example of changing at the D-th frequency (probability).

  Subsequently, the third example from the left in FIG. 21 will be described focusing on differences from the example shown on the left end in FIG. 21, and redundant description may be omitted. In the third example from the left in FIG. 21, FIGS. (A) to (D) are the same as FIGS. (A) to (D) described above. The navigator character YM wearing the display mode turns to the fluctuation icon h0 of the default (white) display mode, changes to a pose of pulling out the sword and swinging, and the sword of the navigation character YM oscillates. ing. Subsequently, in FIG. 21E, at least a part of the change icon h0 is covered by the effect image Eh0 that is a golden smoke image, and the change icon h0 is more difficult to recognize than before being covered. Note that the fluctuation icon h0 may be partially covered with the effect image Eh0, or may be entirely covered with the effect image Eh0. In FIG. 21F, the variation icon h0, which was the default (white) display mode before the effect image Eh0 disappeared and was covered with the effect image Eh0, is replaced by the golden display mode which is the same display mode as the effect image Eh0. Has changed. In this example, the display mode of the effect image Eh0 suggests (preliminary notice) the display mode of the changed icon h0 after the change. Also in this example, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 21H, the combination of the lost decorative symbols (“decoration 4” − “decoration 5” − “decoration 5”) is stopped and displayed, and the display mode is changed. The normal notice by the changed fluctuation icon h0 is a false notice.

  In the third example from the left of FIG. 21 described above, the A-th effect icon (icon of the lord's navigation character YM) of the B-th color (red) is a variable icon of the default display mode and a C-th effect icon. In this example, the color (gold) is changed at the E-th frequency (probability). Here, the relationship between the C-th frequency in the example shown at the left end of FIG. 21, the D-th frequency in the second example from the left in FIG. 21, and the E-th frequency is the D-th frequency. > E-th frequency> C-th frequency. Alternatively, the Dth frequency may be smaller than the Eth frequency, or the Dth frequency may be equal to the Eth frequency. The C-th frequency may be zero.

  Furthermore, the D-th frequency may be greater than the B-th frequency in the second example from the left in FIG. 20, or the A-th frequency in the example shown at the left end in FIG. There may be.

  Next, the example illustrated at the right end of FIG. 21 will be described focusing on the differences from the example illustrated at the left end of FIG. 21, and redundant description may be omitted. In the example shown at the right end of FIG. 21 as well, FIGS. (A) to (E) are the same as FIGS. (A) to (D) described above, and show a display wearing a red kimono. The navigation character YM of the lord of the mode changes to the pose in which the sword of the navigation character YM is directed toward the change icon h0 of the default (white) display mode, with the sword pulled out, and the sword of the navigation character YM is oscillating. Subsequently, in FIG. 21 (o), at least a part of the change icon h0 is covered by the effect image Eh0 that is a red smoke image, and the change icon h0 is more difficult to recognize than before being covered. Note that the fluctuation icon h0 may be partially covered with the effect image Eh0, or may be entirely covered with the effect image Eh0. In FIG. 21 (K), the effect image Eh0 has disappeared, but in this example, the display mode of the fluctuating icon h0 has not changed, and the fluctuating icon h0 remains in a white display mode. In this example as well, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 21C, the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss (“decoration 4” − “decoration 5” − “decoration 5”) is stopped and displayed. In the first place, the normal notice using the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 is not performed, and when the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 does not change at the stage of FIG. Is low. However, even if the display mode of the change icon h0 does not change, a big hit may occur.

  As described above, all of the examples described with reference to FIG. 21 are examples in which the change icon h0 is targeted. However, the same applies to the case in which the hold icon is targeted. Further, as an embodiment, white, blue, red, and gold have been described as examples, but other colors and patterns may be used. Further, the modes of the change icon, the hold icon, the navigation character YM, and the effect image Eh0 are not limited to the modes described with reference to FIG. For example, the fluctuating icon h0 that was in the white display mode may be in a blue display mode, a green display mode, a red display mode, or a gold display mode. Or an iridescent display mode. Further, the navigation character YM of the lord who was in the display mode of wearing a red kimono may be a display mode of wearing a gold kimono or a display mode of wearing a rainbow kimono. Alternatively, the display mode may be a display mode wearing a white kimono, a display mode wearing a blue kimono, or a display mode wearing a green kimono.

  Further, in any of the examples described with reference to FIG. 21, the normal notice by the fluctuating icon h0 in which the display mode is changed is a false notice, but may be a big hit and a true notice.

  FIG. 22 is a diagram illustrating some examples in which the display mode of the icon changes even when the navigation character YM is not displayed.

  In the example shown in the left end of FIG. 22, first, in the state shown in FIG. The number of reservations in FIG. 1 is two, and the first reservation icon h11 and the second reservation icon h12 of the special figure 1 are displayed. Each of the hold icons has a default (white) display mode. In addition, the second reserved number display is displayed at the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 22A, and the reserved number of the special figure 1 is 2 and the reserved number of the special figure 2 is 0. Is reported. FIG. 22A shows a state immediately after the combination of the decorative patterns of the loss (“decoration 2”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 2”) is stopped and displayed, and the change icon h0 is also displayed. Up to.

  In FIG. 22 (b), the reservation of the special figure 1 has been exhausted, and the decorative symbol display device 208 has started to change the display of the decorative symbol, and the moving animation of the reserved icon of the special figure 1 has been completed. As a result, only the first hold icon h11 is displayed in the hold icon display area HIS, and the change icon h0 is displayed in the change icon display area CIS. Both the hold icon h1 and the change icon h0 are in the default (white) display mode. In the second reserved number display displayed on the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 22B, the reserved number of the special figure 1 is 1 and the reserved number of the special figure 2 is 0. Has been reported. Note that no icon is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS.

  In FIG. 22C, the icon change animation is started, and at least a part of the change icon h0 is covered by the blue effect image Eh0, and the change icon h0 is more difficult to recognize than before being covered. Note that the fluctuation icon h0 may be partially covered with the effect image Eh0, or may be entirely covered with the effect image Eh0.

  In FIG. 22D, the change icon h0, which is the default (white) display mode before the effect image Eh0 disappears and is covered with the effect image Eh0, is displayed in blue, which is the same as the effect image Eh0. Has changed to an aspect. In this example, the display mode of the effect image Eh0 suggests (preliminary notice) the display mode of the changed icon h0 after the change. However, the mode of the effect image Eh0 may be different from the mode after the icon change (for example, white or red).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 22 (e), the combination of the lost decorative symbols (“decoration 4”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 5”) is stopped and displayed, and the changing icon whose display mode has changed The normal notice by h0 is a false notice.

  The example illustrated at the left end of FIG. 22 described above is an example in which the change icon in the default display mode changes to the A-th color (blue) at the F-th frequency (probability).

  Subsequently, the second example from the left in FIG. 22 will be described focusing on differences from the example shown on the left end in FIG. 22, and redundant description may be omitted. In the second example shown from the left in FIG. 22, FIGS. 23A and 23B are the same as FIGS. 21A and 21B described above, and are default (white). Is displayed. In FIG. 22C, the icon change animation is started in a state where no icon is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS, and at least a part of the change icon h0 is an effect image in which a red smoke image is displayed. The fluctuation icon h0 is covered by Eh0, and is more difficult to see than before being covered. Note that the fluctuation icon h0 may be partially covered with the effect image Eh0, or may be entirely covered with the effect image Eh0. In FIG. 22D, the change icon h0, which is the default (white) display mode before the effect image Eh0 disappears and is covered with the effect image Eh0, is displayed in red, which is the same mode as the effect image Eh0. Has changed to an aspect. Also in this example, the display mode of the effect image Eh0 suggests (preliminary notice) the display mode of the changed icon h0 after the change. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 22 (E), the combination of the lost decorative symbols (“decoration 4” − “decoration 5” − “decoration 5”) is stopped and displayed, and the display mode has changed. The normal notice by the change icon h0 is a false notice.

  The second example from the left in FIG. 22 described above is an example in which the change icon in the default display mode changes to the B color (red) at the G frequency (probability).

  Next, an example shown below will be described. In FIG. 22 (B ′), a change icon h0 in a blue display mode is displayed. In FIG. 22 (C ′), an icon change animation is started, and at least a part of the change icon h0 is displayed in red. The fluctuation icon h0 is covered with the effect image Eh0, which is a smoke image of, and is more difficult to see than before being covered. Note that the fluctuation icon h0 may be partially covered with the effect image Eh0, or may be entirely covered with the effect image Eh0. In FIG. 22 (D ′), the change icon h0, which was a blue display mode before the effect image Eh0 disappeared and was covered with the effect image Eh0, is changed to a red display mode, which is the same mode as the effect image Eh0. Is changing. Also in this example, the display mode of the effect image Eh0 suggests (preliminary notice) the display mode of the changed icon h0 after the change. Also in this example, after that, the combination of the lost decorative symbols is stopped and displayed, and the normal notice by the variable icon h0 whose display mode has changed is a false notice.

  Subsequently, the third example from the left in FIG. 22 will be described focusing on differences from the example shown on the left end in FIG. 22, and overlapping description may be omitted. Also in the third example from the left in FIG. 22, FIGS. (A) to (B) are the same as FIGS. (A) and (B) described above, and default (white). Is displayed. Subsequently, in FIG. 22 (c), at least a part of the change icon h0 is covered by the effect image Eh0 that is a golden smoke image, and the change icon h0 is more difficult to recognize than before being covered. Note that the fluctuation icon h0 may be partially covered with the effect image Eh0, or may be entirely covered with the effect image Eh0. In FIG. 22D, the variation icon h0, which is the default (white) display mode before the effect image Eh0 disappears and is covered with the effect image Eh0, is replaced by the golden display mode which is the same display mode as the effect image Eh0. Has changed. Also in this example, the display mode of the effect image Eh0 suggests (preliminary notice) the display mode of the changed icon h0 after the change. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 22E, the combination of the lost decorative symbols (“decoration 4” − “decoration 5” − “decoration 5”) is stopped and displayed, and the display mode has changed. The normal notice by the change icon h0 is a false notice.

  The third example from the left of FIG. 22 described above is an example in which the change icon in the default display mode changes to the C-th color (gold) at the H-th frequency (probability). Here, the relationship between the F-th frequency in the example shown at the left end of FIG. 22, the G-th frequency in the second example from the left in FIG. 22, and the H-th frequency is represented by the F-th frequency. > Gth frequency> Hth frequency.

  Next, the example illustrated at the right end of FIG. 22 will be described focusing on the differences from the example illustrated at the left end of FIG. 22, and redundant description may be omitted. Also in the example shown at the right end of FIG. 22, the figures (a) to (i) are the same as the figures (a) to (c) described above, and the default (white) display mode Is displayed. Subsequently, in FIG. 22C, at least a part of the variation icon h0 is covered with the effect image Eh0 that is a white smoke image, and the variation icon h0 is more difficult to recognize than before being covered. Note that the fluctuation icon h0 may be partially covered with the effect image Eh0, or may be entirely covered with the effect image Eh0. In FIG. 22E, the effect image Eh0 has disappeared, but in this example, the display mode of the fluctuating icon h0 does not change, and the fluctuating icon h0 remains in a white display mode. Also in this example, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 22 (O), the combination of the lost decorative symbols (“decoration 4” − “decoration 5” − “decoration 5”) is stopped and displayed. In the first place, the normal notice using the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 is not performed, and at the time when the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 does not change at the stage of FIG. Is low. However, even if the display mode of the change icon h0 does not change, a big hit may occur.

  As described above, all of the examples described with reference to FIG. 22 are examples in which the change icon h0 is targeted, but the same applies to the case in which the hold icon is targeted. Further, as an embodiment, white, blue, red, and gold have been described as examples, but other colors and patterns may be used. In addition, the mode of each of the change icon and the effect image Eh0 is not limited to the mode described with reference to FIG. For example, the fluctuating icon h0 that was a blue display mode may be a green display mode, a white display mode, a red display mode, or a gold display mode. It may be a display mode or a rainbow display mode. Further, the effect image Eh0 having the gold display mode may be a rainbow display mode, and in this case, the display mode of the changed icon h0 after the change may be a gold display mode. Alternatively, a rainbow display mode may be used. Further, the effect image Eh0 having the gold display mode may have a red display mode, a white display mode, a blue display mode, or a green display mode. It may be.

  Also, in any of the examples described with reference to FIG. 22, the normal notice by the fluctuating icon h0 whose display mode has changed is a false notice, but may be a true notice due to a big hit.

    FIG. 23 is a diagram illustrating some examples in which the navigation character YM has performed a plurality of actions on the change icon h0 in one change display of the decorative symbol.

  In the example shown in the left half of FIG. 23, first, in FIG. 23A, in a state where the combination of the decorative patterns of the loss (“decoration 2”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 2”) is stopped and displayed, The reserved number of Toku-zu 1 is four, and four reserved icons h11 to h14 of Toku-zu 1 are displayed. Each of the hold icons has a default (white) display mode. The second reserved number display is displayed at the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 23A, and the reserved number of the special figure 1 is four and the reserved number of the special figure 2 is zero. Is reported. Further, FIG. 23A shows a state immediately after the combination of the lost decorative patterns (“decoration 2” − “decoration 3” − “decoration 2”) is stopped and displayed, and the change icon h0 is also displayed. Up to. Further, in the effect icon display area DIS, a navigation character YM in a display mode wearing a red kimono is displayed in an initial posture on the right base icon bIr.

  In FIG. 23 (b), the reservation of the special figure 1 has been exhausted, and the decorative symbol display device 208 has started to change the display of the decorative symbol, and the moving animation of the reserved icon of the special figure 1 has been completed. As a result, three holding icons such as a first holding icon h11, a second holding icon h12, and a third holding icon h13 are displayed in the holding icon display area HIS, and the changing icon h0 is displayed in the changing icon display area CIS. Is displayed. Both of the three hold icons and the change icon h0 are default (white) display modes. In the second reserved number display displayed at the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 23B, the reserved number of the special figure 1 is 3 and the reserved number of the special figure 2 is 0. Is reported. Further, in the effect icon display area DIS, a navigation character YM in a display mode wearing a red kimono is continuously displayed in the initial posture, and the navigation character YM is displayed across a continuous pattern variation display. It will be. Note that the navigation character YM may be continuously displayed while performing a standby animation (for example, an animation that repeats a certain operation).

  In FIG. 23C, the navigation character YM in the initial posture starts the icon change animation, turns to the changing icon h0, and changes to a pose in which the sword is pulled out and shaken. In FIG. 23 (d), a wave is oscillated from the sword of the navigator character YM. In FIG. 23 (e), at least a part of the change icon h0 is covered with the red smoke image effect image Eh0, and the change icon h0 changes. The icon h0 is more difficult to view than before being covered. Note that the fluctuation icon h0 may be partially covered with the effect image Eh0, or may be entirely covered with the effect image Eh0. In FIG. 23 (f), the change icon h0, which is the default (white) display mode before the effect image Eh0 disappears and is covered with the effect image Eh0, is replaced with a red display mode which is the same display mode as the kimono of the navigation character YM. The display mode has changed. That is, the effect image Eh0 shown in FIG. 23E has the same display mode as the kimono of the navigation character YM, and the changing icon h0 has changed to the same mode as the effect image Eh0. In this example, the display mode of the navigation character YM or the display mode of the effect image Eh0 suggests (notices) the display mode of the changed icon h0 after the change. However, the mode of the effect image Eh0 may be different from the mode after the icon change (for example, white, blue, or gold). The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 23 (g) has returned to the initial posture. Although the wave has disappeared from the sword of the navigation character YM shown in FIG. 23 (f), the wave may still be oscillating, or the navigation character YM may have the timing shown in FIG. It may return to the initial posture at the timing when Eh0 disappears).

  The icon change animation described above may be regarded as being started from FIG. 23 (c) and ended immediately before (FIG. 23 (g)) (immediately before returning to the initial posture) or while the wave is oscillating (FIG. 23 (c)). The animation may be regarded as an animation performed only in (d) to (e) of the drawing, or may be regarded as an animation performed only while the effect image Eh0 is displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 23H, the first stop of the decorative symbol to be variably displayed is performed, and “decoration 4” is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a. That is, “decoration 4” has started to fluctuate. In the effect icon display area DIS, the navigation character YM in a display mode wearing a red kimono is continuously displayed in the initial posture.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 23 (i), a second stop of the decorative symbol to be fluctuated is performed, and in the right symbol display area 208c, “decoration 4” is temporarily stopped and the reach state is formed. Then, in the same figure (j), the character display of "reach" is displayed. That is, “decoration 4”, which is swinging in the left symbol display area 208a, “medium symbol display area 208b, which continues to fluctuate at high speed,” and “decoration 4”, which is swinging in the right symbol display area 208c, are placed on the front side (player). The character display of "reach" is displayed so as to overlap from the side), and the display in each of the symbol display areas 208a to 208c is more difficult to recognize than before the character display of "reach" is displayed. . In the effect icon display area DIS, the navigation character YM in a display mode wearing a red kimono is still displayed in the initial posture.

  In FIG. 23 (k), in the reach state, the second icon change animation is started, and the navigation character YM in the display mode wearing the red kimono swings his sword toward the change icon h0 in the red display mode. In FIG. 1 (l), a wave is oscillated from the sword. Subsequently, in FIG. 23 (m), at least a part of the change icon h0 is covered with the effect image Eh0 that is a golden smoke image, and the change icon h0 is more difficult to recognize than before being covered. Note that the fluctuation icon h0 may be partially covered with the effect image Eh0, or may be entirely covered with the effect image Eh0. In FIG. 23 (n), the effect icon Eh0 disappears, and the change icon h0, which was a red display mode before being covered with the effect image Eh0, changes to a gold display mode, which is the same mode as the current effect image Eh0. are doing. Also in this second time, the display mode of the effect image Eh0 suggests (notices) the display mode of the changed icon h0 after the change. However, the mode of the effect image Eh0 may be different from the mode after the icon change (for example, the same mode (here, red) as the display mode of the variable icon h0 before the change). The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 23 (o) has returned to the initial posture.

  The second icon change animation described above may be regarded as starting from FIG. 23 (k) and ending immediately before (o) in FIG. 23 (o) (immediately before returning to the initial posture), or while the wave is oscillating. It may be regarded as an animation that is performed only in FIGS. (1) to (m), or as an animation performed only while the effect image Eh0 is displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 23 (p), the combination of the lost decorative symbols (“decoration 4” − “decoration 5” − “decoration 4”) is stopped and displayed, and the changing icon whose display mode has changed is displayed. The normal notice by h0 is a false notice.

  In the example described above, the first icon change animation is started after the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol and before the reach state or before the first stop is performed. It is started after reaching the reach state, that is, during the reach state. The start timing of the icon change animation, that is, the start timing of the icon change effect is not limited to this example, and may be at the start of the fluctuating display of the decorative symbol, and the display indicating the pseudo continuous effect (pseudo continuous pattern) is displayed. May be the time, the time of the timer notice may be 0, the operation of the operation means such as the chance button 136 may be performed, or the variation display of the decorative symbol is completed. Time (during stop display). In addition, a period during which the character display of “reach” is displayed, during super-reach, during fluctuation of three decorative patterns, or start of an operation effect (button effect, etc.) using operation means such as the chance button 136. It may be after or after the operation of the stage-moving means such as the crest actor 224E, the first large-story behavior actor 224Ga to the fourth large-story behavior actor 224Gd, and the thousand-story box actor 224H. Regarding the start timing of the icon change effect described here, the same applies to the icon change effect described before and the same applies to the icon change effect described later.

  Further, in the example shown in the left half of FIG. 23, of the two icon change animations, the first icon change animation is a successful animation in which the display mode of the icon changes, and the second icon change animation is also the same. It was a successful animation in which the display mode of the icons changed. That is, in the one variation display of the decorative symbol, the successful animation is an example.

  Further, since the navigation character YM continues to be displayed without disappearing, the icon change animation described here can be regarded as one time instead of two times. That is, it can be considered that the processing is started from FIG. 23C and ended immediately before (FIG. 23O) (immediately before returning to the initial posture). Note that the navigation character YM may temporarily disappear between FIGS. 23 (g) to (j). For example, the navigation character YM disappears once in FIG. 23 (g), or disappears immediately after FIG. 23 (g), and is displayed again immediately before FIG. In this case, the boundary between the two icon change animations becomes clear.

  The example shown in the right half of FIG. 23 will be described focusing on the differences from the example shown in the left half of FIG. 23, and duplicate description may be omitted. In the example shown in the right half of FIG. 23, FIGS. (A) to (D) are the same as FIGS. (A) to (d) described above, and wear red kimono. The navigation character YM in the display mode changes to a pose in which the variation icon h0 of the default (white) display mode is drawn and the sword of the navigation character YM is shaken out, and a wave is oscillated from the sword of the navigation character YM. . Subsequently, in FIG. 23E, at least a part of the change icon h0 is covered by the effect image Eh0 that is a white smoke image, and the change icon h0 is more difficult to visually recognize than before being covered. Note that the fluctuation icon h0 may be partially covered with the effect image Eh0, or may be entirely covered with the effect image Eh0. In FIG. 23F, the effect image Eh0 has disappeared, but in this example, the display mode of the fluctuating icon h0 has not changed, and the fluctuating icon h0 remains in a white display mode. The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 23 (G) has returned to the initial posture.

  23 (H) to 23 (L), except that the display mode of the fluctuating icon h0 is not a red display mode but a white display mode, FIGS. After reaching the reach state, the navi character YM in the display mode wearing a red kimono faces the change icon h0 in the white display mode, and pulls out the sword after the reach state is reached. The pose changes to the waving pose, and a wave is oscillating from the sword of the navigation character YM. Subsequently, in FIG. 23 (M), at least a part of the fluctuation icon h0 is again covered by the effect image Eh0 which is a white smoke image, and the fluctuation icon h0 is more difficult to recognize than before being covered. Note that the fluctuation icon h0 may be partially covered with the effect image Eh0, or may be entirely covered with the effect image Eh0. In FIG. 23 (N), although the effect image Eh0 has disappeared, the display mode of the fluctuating icon h0 remains unchanged, and the fluctuating icon h0 remains in a white display mode. The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 23 (O) has returned to the initial posture. Also in this example, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 23 (P), the combination of the lost decorative symbols (“decoration 4” − “decoration 5” − “decoration 4”) is stopped and displayed. In the first place, normal announcement using the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 is not performed. However, even if the display mode of the change icon h0 does not change, a big hit may occur.

  Both of the two icon change animations described above are failure animations in which the icon display mode does not change. That is, in one variation display of the decorative symbol, the failed animation is continuous. In this case as well, since the navigation character YM continues to be displayed without disappearing, the icon change animation can be regarded as one time instead of two times.

  FIG. 24 is a diagram illustrating another example different from the example illustrated in FIG. 23 in which the navigation character YM has performed a plurality of actions on the change icon h0 in one change display of the decorative symbol. .

  The example shown in the left half of FIG. 24 will be described focusing on the differences from the example shown in the left half of FIG. 23, and duplicate description may be omitted. In the example shown in the left half of FIG. 24, FIGS. 23A to 23D are the same as FIGS. 23A to 23D described above, and a red kimono is worn. The navigation character YM in the display mode changes to a pose in which the variation icon h0 of the default (white) display mode is drawn and the sword of the navigation character YM is shaken out, and a wave is oscillated from the sword of the navigation character YM. . Subsequently, in FIG. 24E, at least a part of the fluctuation icon h0 is covered by the effect image Eh0 that is a white smoke image, and the fluctuation icon h0 is more difficult to recognize than before being covered. Note that the fluctuation icon h0 may be partially covered with the effect image Eh0, or may be entirely covered with the effect image Eh0. In FIG. 24F, the effect image Eh0 has disappeared, but in this example, the display mode of the fluctuating icon h0 has not changed, and the fluctuating icon h0 remains in a white display mode. The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 24 (g) has returned to the initial posture.

  24 (h) to FIG. 24 (l), except that the display mode of the change icon h0 is not a red display mode but a white display mode. After the reach state is reached, the navigation character YM in the display mode wearing the red kimono faces the change icon h0 in the white display mode, and pulls out the sword. The pose changes to the waving pose, and a wave is oscillating from the sword of the navigation character YM. Subsequently, in FIG. 24 (m), at least a part of the fluctuating icon h0 is covered by the effect image Eh0 that is a golden smoke image, and the fluctuating icon h0 is more difficult to recognize than before being covered. Note that the fluctuation icon h0 may be partially covered with the effect image Eh0, or may be entirely covered with the effect image Eh0. In FIG. 24 (n), the change icon h0, which is the default (white) display mode before the effect image Eh0 disappears and is covered with the effect image Eh0, is changed to a gold display mode which is the same mode as the effect image Eh0. Is changing. In the second icon change animation, the display mode of the effect image Eh0 indicates (notices) the display mode of the changed icon h0 after the change. However, the mode of the effect image Eh0 may be different from the mode after the icon change (for example, blue or red). The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 24 (o) has returned to the initial posture.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 24 (p), the combination of the lost decorative symbols (“decoration 4”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 4”) is stopped and displayed, and the changing icon whose display mode has changed is displayed. The normal notice by h0 is a false notice.

  Of the two icon change animations described above, the first icon change animation was a failure animation in which the icon display mode did not change, whereas the second icon change animation changed the icon display mode. It was a successful anime. That is, in one variation display of the decorative symbol, the failed animation is displayed first, and then the successful animation is displayed. In this case as well, since the navigation character YM continues to be displayed without disappearing, the icon change animation can be regarded as one time instead of two times.

  The example shown in the right half of FIG. 24 will be described focusing on the differences from the example shown in the left half of FIG. 24, and redundant description may be omitted. In the example shown in the right half of FIG. 24, FIGS. (A) to (D) are the same as FIGS. (A) to (d) described above, and wear red kimono. The navigation character YM of the lord of the display mode changes to the pose of pulling out the sword and swinging over with the sword of the navigation character YM facing the change icon h0 of the default (white) display mode, and a wave is oscillated from the sword of the navigation character YM. . Subsequently, in FIG. 24 (E), at least a part of the fluctuation icon h0 is covered by the effect image Eh0 that is a red smoke image, and the fluctuation icon h0 is more difficult to recognize than before being covered. Note that the fluctuation icon h0 may be partially covered with the effect image Eh0, or may be entirely covered with the effect image Eh0. In FIG. 24 (F), the change icon h0, which is the default (white) display mode before the effect image Eh0 disappears and is covered with the effect image Eh0, is changed to a red display mode which is the same mode as the effect image Eh0. Is changing. In the icon change animation here, the display mode of the effect image Eh0 indicates (notices) the display mode of the changed icon h0 after the change. However, the mode of the effect image Eh0 may be different from the mode after the icon change (for example, green, gold, rainbow, etc.). The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 24 (G) has returned to the initial posture.

  FIGS. 24 (H) to 24 (L) are the same as FIGS. 24 (h) to (l) described above, and show a display mode in which a red kimono is put on after reaching the reach state. The lord's navigator character YM faces the change icon h0 in the red display mode, changes to a pose in which the sword of the navi character YM is swung up with the sword pulled out, and a wave is oscillating from the sword of the navi character YM. Subsequently, in FIG. 24 (M), at least a part of the change icon h0 is again covered by the effect image Eh0 that is a white smoke image, and the change icon h0 is more difficult to recognize than before being covered. Note that the fluctuation icon h0 may be partially covered with the effect image Eh0, or may be entirely covered with the effect image Eh0. In FIG. 24 (N), the effect image Eh0 has disappeared, but the display mode of the change icon h0 has not changed, and the change icon h0 remains in the red display mode. The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 24 (O) has returned to the initial posture. Also in this example, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 24 (P), the combination of the lost decorative symbols (“decoration 4”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 4”) is stopped and displayed. The normal notice by the change icon h0 in which the mode has changed is a false notice.

  Of the two icon change animations described above, the first icon change animation was a successful animation in which the icon display mode was changed, whereas the second icon change animation was a change in the icon display mode. Not a failed anime. That is, in one variation display of the decorative symbol, the failed animation is displayed after the successful animation is displayed first. In this case as well, since the navigation character YM continues to be displayed without disappearing, the icon change animation can be regarded as one time instead of two times.

  As described above, in the examples shown in FIGS. 23 and 24, white, red, and gold have been described as examples, but other colors and patterns may be used. Further, the modes of the fluctuating icon, the navigation character YM, and the effect image Eh0 are not limited to the modes described with reference to FIGS. For example, the fluctuating icon h0 which was a white display mode may be a blue display mode, a green display mode, a red display mode, or a gold display mode. It may be a display mode or a rainbow display mode. Further, the navigation character YM of the lord who was in the display mode of wearing a red kimono may be a display mode of wearing a gold kimono or a display mode of wearing a rainbow kimono. Alternatively, the display mode may be a display mode wearing a white kimono, a display mode wearing a blue kimono, or a display mode wearing a green kimono.

  Further, in each of the examples described with reference to FIGS. 23 and 24, the normal notice by the fluctuating icon h0 in which the display mode is changed is a false notice. Good. Here, when the examples described with reference to FIGS. 23 and 24 are summarized, in one variation display of the decorative symbol, an example shown in the left half of FIG. 23. An example shown in the right half of FIG. 23, in which failed animations continue (hereinafter, referred to as a "continuous failure example"), and an example shown in the left half of FIG. 24, an example in which a successful animation is displayed after a failed animation is displayed (hereinafter, referred to as a “failed success example”), which is an example shown in the right half of FIG. There is an example in which an animation is displayed (hereinafter, referred to as a “success / failure example”). High, then high success cases, then high success cases High when we, the lowest when the continuous failures is performed (continuous success> Failure successes> Success failures> continuous failures). In the case where a continuous failure example is performed, a losing may always occur (the jackpot probability is 0%) or a jackpot may occur (the jackpot probability is higher than 0%).

  In each of the examples described with reference to FIG. 23 and FIG. 24, the icon change animation is performed only twice in one change display of the decorative symbol, but the icon change animation is performed only once in the change display of the decorative symbol. Inside, the icon change animation may be performed three or more times.

Further, when the change of the display mode fails, the effect image Eh0 of the white smoke image, which is the default color, may be always displayed, and conversely, the effect image Eh0 of the white smoke image may be displayed. The display mode may be successfully changed.
FIG. 25 is a diagram illustrating two examples of the icon change effect.

  In the example shown in the left half of FIG. 25, the icon change effect performed even when the navigation character YM is not displayed and the icon change effect using the navigation character YM described with reference to FIG. This is an example performed during the variable display of the times.

  First, in FIG. 25A, in a state where the combination of the lost decorative patterns (“decoration 2” − “decoration 3” − “decoration 2”) is stopped and displayed, the number of reservations in the special figure 1 is two. The first hold icon h11 and the second hold icon h12 of the special map 1 are displayed. Each of the hold icons has a default (white) display mode. The second reserved number display is displayed at the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25A, and the reserved number of the special figure 1 is 2 and the reserved number of the special figure 2 is 0. Is reported to be. FIG. 25A shows a state immediately after the combination of the lost decorative patterns (“decoration 2”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 2”) is stopped and displayed, and the change icon h0 is also displayed. Up to.

  In FIG. 25 (b), the reservation of the special figure 1 has been exhausted, and the decorative symbol display device 208 has started to display the variation of the decorative symbol, and the moving animation of the reserved icon of the special figure 1 has been completed. As a result, only the first hold icon h11 is displayed in the hold icon display area HIS, and the change icon h0 is displayed in the change icon display area CIS. Both the hold icon h1 and the change icon h0 are in the default (white) display mode. In the second reserved number display displayed on the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25 (b), the reserved number of the special figure 1 is 1 and the reserved number of the special figure 2 is 0. Has been reported. Note that no icon is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS.

    In FIG. 25C, the icon change animation is started, and at least a part of the change icon h0 is covered with the red effect image Eh0, and the change icon h0 is more difficult to recognize than before being covered. Note that the fluctuation icon h0 may be partially covered with the effect image Eh0, or may be entirely covered with the effect image Eh0.

  In FIG. 25D, the variation icon h0, which is the default (white) display mode before the effect image Eh0 disappears and is covered with the effect image Eh0, is displayed in red, which is the same mode as the effect image Eh0. Has changed to an aspect. In this example, the display mode of the effect image Eh0 suggests (preliminary notice) the display mode of the changed icon h0 after the change. However, the mode of the effect image Eh0 may be different from the mode after the icon change (for example, white or gold). In this example, no icon is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS, and the navigation character YM is not displayed. A certain period during display (for example, a period during super reach, a period during dark display in which the display screen is completely dark, and a period during which the display of the navigation character YM overlaps another display (notice display or error display)) In the case of (), the navigation character YM may be hidden or invisible, and even in such a case, an icon change animation as shown in FIG. 25C may be executed.

  In FIG. 25 (e), there is one ball in the special figure 1 starting port 230, and the number of reserves in the special figure 1 increases by one. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25 (f), the increase animation of the reserved icon is completed, and the second reserved icon h12 is additionally displayed. Further, the second reserved number display at the upper right indicates that the reserved number of Toku-zu 1 is 2 and the reserved number of Toku-zu 2 is 0.

  In FIG. 25 (g), there is one more ball in the special figure 1 starting port 230, and the reserved number of the special figure 1 increases by one. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25 (h), the increase animation of the reserved icon is completed, and the third reserved icon h13 is additionally displayed. Also, the second reserved number display at the upper right indicates that the reserved number of Toku-zu 1 is 3 and the reserved number of Toku-zu 2 is 0. Further, in this example, the navigation character YM appears or disappears according to the number of holds. That is, when the number of reservations becomes N (here, N = 3), the navigation character YM appears (display starts), and when the number of reservations becomes M (here, M = 2), the navigation character YM disappears (the display ends). Do). The relationship between N and M under this condition of the navigation character YM may be a relationship of N> M, and may be N = 4, M = 1, and the like. Note that this condition can be applied to the examples up to this point, and this condition can be applied to the subsequent examples, but need not be applied. In FIG. 25 (h), on the right base icon bIr in the effect icon display area DIS, a lord-like navigation character YM in a display mode wearing a red kimono appears in an initial posture. The navigation character YM is displayed with a balloon indicating “one more is reserved and full”. Further, in FIG. 25 (h), the first stop of the decorative symbol to be fluctuated is performed, and “decoration 4” is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a. The navigation character YM may appear in response to the first stop of the decorative symbol, or may appear in response to the second stop. Furthermore, the navigation character YM appears after the start of the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol and before the reach state or before the first stop is performed, or after the reach state, that is, during the reach state. May be. Also, it may appear at the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol, may appear when a display indicating a pseudo continuous effect (pseudo continuous symbol) is displayed, or when the timer of the timer notice becomes zero. It may appear, may appear when operating the operation means such as the chance button 136, or may appear when the variable display of the decorative symbol is finished (at the time of stop display). In addition, a period during which the character display of “reach” is displayed, during super-reach, during fluctuation of three decorative patterns, or start of an operation effect (button effect, etc.) using operation means such as the chance button 136. It may appear later, or during or after the operation of the staging effect means such as the crest actor 224E, the first large behavior actor 224Ga to the fourth large behavior actor 224Gd, and the thousand-roof actor 224H. The appearance timing of the navigation character YM described here can be applied to the examples described before and to the examples described later.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25 (i), a second stop of the decorative symbol to be variably displayed is performed, and in the right symbol display area 208c, “decoration 4” is temporarily stopped and the reach state is formed. Then, in the same figure (j), the character display of "reach" is displayed. That is, “decoration 4”, which is swinging in the left symbol display area 208a, “medium symbol display area 208b, which continues to fluctuate at high speed,” and “decoration 4”, which is swinging in the right symbol display area 208c, are placed on the front side (player). The character display of "reach" is displayed so as to overlap from the side), and the display in each of the symbol display areas 208a to 208c is more difficult to recognize than before the character display of "reach" is displayed. . In the effect icon display area DIS, a navigation character YM in a display mode wearing a red kimono is displayed in an initial posture.

  In FIG. 25 (k), during the reach state, the second icon change animation is started, and the navigation character YM in the display mode wearing the red kimono swings his sword toward the change icon h0 in the red display mode. In FIG. 1 (l), a wave is oscillated from the sword. Subsequently, in FIG. 25 (m), at least a part of the fluctuating icon h0 is covered by the effect image Eh0 that is a golden smoke image, and the fluctuating icon h0 is more difficult to recognize than before being covered. Note that the fluctuation icon h0 may be partially covered with the effect image Eh0, or may be entirely covered with the effect image Eh0. In FIG. 25 (n), the effect icon Eh0 disappears, and the change icon h0, which was a red display mode before being covered with the effect image Eh0, changes to a gold display mode, which is the same mode as the current effect image Eh0. are doing. Also in this second time, the display mode of the effect image Eh0 suggests (notices) the display mode of the changed icon h0 after the change. However, the mode of the effect image Eh0 may be different from the mode after the icon change (for example, the same mode (here, red) as the display mode of the variable icon h0 before the change). The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 25 (o) has returned to the initial posture.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25 (p), the combination of the lost decorative symbols (“decoration 4” − “decoration 5” − “decoration 4”) is stopped and displayed, and the changing icon whose display mode has changed is displayed. The normal notice by h0 is a false notice.

  In the example shown in the left half of FIG. 25, the icon change effect performed even when the navigation character YM is not displayed is performed only once, but even if the change is performed multiple times. Also, in the icon change effect using the navigation character YM, only one change is performed, but a plurality of changes may be performed.

  In the example shown in the right half of FIG. 25, the icon change animation using the navigation character YM is performed twice in one change display of the decorative pattern. This is an example in which the display mode is different.

  First, in FIG. 25 (A), in a state where the combination of the decorative patterns of the loss (“decoration 2” − “decoration 3” − “decoration 2”) is stopped and displayed, the number of reservations in the special figure 1 is four. , Four hold icons h11 to h14 are displayed. Each of the hold icons has a default (white) display mode. The second reserved number display is displayed at the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25 (A), and the reserved number of the special figure 1 is 4 and the reserved number of the special figure 2 is 0. Is reported to be. FIG. 25 (A) shows a state immediately after the combination of the lost decorative patterns (“decoration 2” − “decoration 3” − “decoration 2”) is stopped and displayed, and the change icon h0 is also displayed. Up to. Further, in the effect icon display area DIS, a navigation character YM in a display mode wearing a blue kimono is displayed in an initial posture on the right base icon bIr.

  In FIG. 25 (B), the reservation of the special figure 1 is exhausted, and the decorative symbol display device 208 has started to display the variation of the decorative symbol, and the moving animation of the reserved icon of the special figure 1 has been completed. As a result, three holding icons such as a first holding icon h11, a second holding icon h12, and a third holding icon h13 are displayed in the holding icon display area HIS, and the changing icon h0 is displayed in the changing icon display area CIS. Is displayed. Both of the three hold icons and the change icon h0 are default (white) display modes. In the second reserved number display displayed on the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25B, the reserved number of the special figure 1 is 3 and the reserved number of the special figure 2 is 0. Has been reported. Further, in the effect icon display area DIS, a navigation character YM in a display mode wearing a blue kimono is continuously displayed in an initial posture, and the navigation character YM is displayed over a continuous symbol variation display. Will have been. Note that the navigation character YM may be continuously displayed while performing a standby animation (for example, an animation that repeats a certain operation).

  In FIG. 25C, the navigation character YM in the initial posture starts the icon change animation, turns to the changing icon h0, and changes to a pose in which the sword is pulled out and shaken. In FIG. 25 (D), a wave is oscillated from the sword of the navigator character YM, and in FIG. 25 (E), at least a part of the fluctuating icon h0 has the same blue smoke image as the kimono form of the navi character YM. , And the fluctuating icon h0 is more difficult to view than before being covered. Note that the fluctuation icon h0 may be partially covered with the effect image Eh0, or may be entirely covered with the effect image Eh0. In FIG. 25 (F), the change icon h0, which is the default (white) display mode before the effect image Eh0 disappears and is covered with the effect image Eh0, is changed to the blue display mode which is the same display mode as the kimono of the navigation character YM. The display mode has changed. Note that the change icon h0 has changed to the same mode as the effect image Eh0. In this example, the display mode of the navigation character YM or the display mode of the effect image Eh0 suggests (notices) the display mode of the changed icon h0 after the change. However, the mode of the effect image Eh0 may be different from the mode after the icon change (for example, white or red). The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 25 (G) has returned to the initial posture. Although the wave has disappeared from the sword of the navigation character YM shown in FIG. 25 (F), the wave may still be oscillating, or the navigation character YM may have the timing shown in FIG. 25 (F) (effect image It may return to the initial posture at the timing when Eh0 disappears).

  The icon change animation described above may be regarded as being started from FIG. 25 (C) and ended immediately before (FIG. 25 (G)) (immediately before returning to the initial posture), or while the wave is oscillating (FIG. 25 (C)). (D) to (E) of FIG. 7 may be regarded as an animation performed only, or an animation performed only while the effect image Eh0 is displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25H, the first stop of the decorative symbol to be variably displayed is performed, and "decoration 4" is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a. That is, “decoration 4” has started to fluctuate. In FIG. 25H, the navigation character YM is covered by the effect image EYM, which is a red smoke image, and the navigation character YM is more difficult to view than before being covered. Note that the navigation character YM0 may be partially covered with the effect image EYM, or may be entirely covered with the effect image EYM. In FIG. 25 (I), the navigation character YM, which is a display mode wearing a blue kimono before the effect image EYM disappears and is covered with the effect image EYM, is a red display mode which is the same mode as the effect image Eh0. Has changed. The change effect of the navigation character YM, which is an effect icon, may be started in response to the first stop of the decorative pattern, or may be started in response to the second stop. Furthermore, the change effect is started after the display of the variation of the decorative symbol is started and before the reach state is reached, or before the first stop is performed, or after the reach state is reached, that is, during the reach state. May be done. In addition, it may be started in accordance with the start of the variation display of the decorative symbol, may be started when a display indicating the pseudo continuous effect (pseudo continuous symbol) is displayed, or the timer of the timer notice becomes zero. May be started at the same time, may be started at the time of operating the operation means such as the chance button 136, or may be started when the variable display of the decorative symbol is finished (at the time of stop display). In addition, a period during which the character display of “reach” is displayed, during super reach, during fluctuation of three decorative patterns, or start of an operation effect (button effect, etc.) using the operation means such as the chance button 136. It may be started later, or during or after the operation of the effect moving means such as the crest role 224E, the first large-scale behavioral role 224Ga to the fourth large-scale behavioral role 224Gd, and the thousand-size box role 224H. The start timing of the change effect of the effect icon (here, the navigation character YM) described here can be applied to the examples described before and to the examples described later.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25 (I), the decorative symbol to be displayed in a variable manner is stopped for a second time. In the following FIG. (J), the character display of “reach” is displayed. That is, “decoration 4”, which is swinging in the left symbol display area 208a, “medium symbol display area 208b, which continues to fluctuate at high speed,” and “decoration 4”, which is swinging in the right symbol display area 208c, are placed on the front side (player). The character display of "reach" is displayed so as to overlap from the side), and the display in each of the symbol display areas 208a to 208c is more difficult to recognize than before the character display of "reach" is displayed. . In addition, in the effect icon display area DIS, the navigation character YM changed to the display mode wearing the red kimono is displayed in the initial posture.

  In FIG. 25 (K), in the reach state, the second icon change animation is started, and the navigation character YM in the display mode wearing the red kimono swings his sword toward the change icon h0 in the blue display mode. In the figure (L), a wave is oscillated from the sword. Subsequently, in FIG. 25 (M), at least a part of the change icon h0 is covered with the effect image Eh0 which is the same red smoke image as the changed aspect of the kimono of the navigation character YM, and the change icon h0 is before being covered. It is more difficult to see. Note that the fluctuation icon h0 may be partially covered with the effect image Eh0, or may be entirely covered with the effect image Eh0. In FIG. 25 (N), the change icon h0, which was a blue display mode before the effect image Eh0 disappeared and was covered with the effect image Eh0, is changed to a red display mode, which is the same display mode as the kimono of the navigation character YM. Is changing. Note that the change icon h0 has changed to the same mode as the effect image Eh0. Also in the second time, the display mode of the navigation character YM or the display mode of the effect image Eh0 suggests (notices) the display mode of the changed icon h0 after the change. However, the mode of the effect image Eh0 may be different from the mode after the icon change (for example, the same mode (here, blue) as the display mode of the variable icon h0 before the change). The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 25 (O) has returned to the initial posture.

  The second icon change animation described above may be considered to be started from FIG. 25K and ended just before (O) in FIG. (L) to (M) in FIG. 7 may be regarded as an animation performed only while the effect image Eh0 is displayed.

  In addition, when a change effect of the effect icon (here, the navigation character YM) is performed and the display mode of the effect icon changes, a change effect of the display mode of the change icon h0 (or the hold icon) is always performed. You may. Furthermore, the display mode of the change icon h0 (or the hold icon) may be changed to the same display mode as the display mode of the changed effect icon.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25 (P), the combination of the lost decorative symbols (“decoration 4” − “decoration 5” − “decoration 4”) is stopped and displayed, and the fluctuating icon whose display mode has changed is displayed. The normal notice by h0 is a false notice.

  In the example described above, the icon change effect by the effect icon of the A-th display mode and the icon change effect by the effect icon of the B-th display mode are performed in one change display of the decorative symbol. In the example shown in the right half of FIG. 25, the icon change effect by the effect icon of the A-th display mode is performed only once, but may be performed multiple times. In the icon change effect by the effect icon in the B display mode, only one change is performed, but a plurality of changes may be performed.

  The example described with reference to FIG. 25 is an example in which the fluctuating icon h0 is targeted, but the same applies to the case in which the pending icon is targeted. Further, as an embodiment, white, blue, red, and gold have been described as examples, but other colors and patterns may be used. Further, each mode of the change icon, the hold icon, the navigation character YM, and the effect image Eh0 is not limited to the mode described with reference to FIG. For example, the fluctuating icon h0 which was a white display mode may be a blue display mode, a green display mode, a red display mode, or a gold display mode. It may be a display mode or a rainbow display mode. In addition, the navigator-like navigation character YM, which was a display mode wearing a blue kimono, may be a display mode wearing a white kimono, a display mode wearing a green kimono, Alternatively, the display mode may be a display mode of wearing a red kimono, a display mode of wearing a golden kimono, or a display mode of wearing a rainbow kimono. Further, the lord-like navigation character YM, which was the display mode wearing the red kimono, may be the display mode wearing the gold kimono, or the display mode wearing the rainbow kimono. Alternatively, the display mode may be a display mode wearing a white kimono, a display mode wearing a blue kimono, or a display mode wearing a green kimono.

  FIG. 26 is a diagram showing some examples in which the navigation character YM has performed a plurality of actions on the hold icon in one change display of the decorative symbol.

  In the example shown in the left half of FIG. 26, first, in FIG. 26A, in the state where the combination of the decorative patterns of the loss (“decoration 2” − “decoration 3” − “decoration 2”) is stopped and displayed, The reserved number of Toku-zu 1 is four, and four reserved icons h11 to h14 of Toku-zu 1 are displayed. Each of the hold icons has a default (white) display mode. In addition, the second reserved number display is displayed at the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 26A, and the reserved number of the special figure 1 is 4 and the reserved number of the special figure 2 is 0. Is reported. FIG. 26A shows a state immediately after the combination of the decorative patterns of the loss (“decoration 2” − “decoration 3” − “decoration 2”) is stopped and displayed, and the change icon h0 is also displayed. Up to. Further, in the effect icon display area DIS, a navigation character YM in a display mode wearing a red kimono is displayed in an initial posture on the right base icon bIr.

  In FIG. 26 (b), the reservation of the special figure 1 has been exhausted, and the decorative symbol display device 208 has started to display the variation of the decorative symbol, and the moving animation of the reserved icon of the special figure 1 has been completed. As a result, three holding icons such as a first holding icon h11, a second holding icon h12, and a third holding icon h13 are displayed in the holding icon display area HIS, and the changing icon h0 is displayed in the changing icon display area CIS. Is displayed. Both of the three hold icons and the change icon h0 are default (white) display modes. In the second reserved number display displayed on the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 26B, the reserved number of the special figure 1 is 3 and the reserved number of the special figure 2 is 0. Is reported. Further, in the effect icon display area DIS, a navigation character YM in a display mode wearing a red kimono is continuously displayed in the initial posture, and the navigation character YM is displayed across a continuous pattern variation display. It will be. Note that the navigation character YM may be continuously displayed while performing a standby animation (for example, an animation that repeats a certain operation).

  In FIG. 26C, the navigation character YM in the initial posture starts the icon change animation, turns to the left side, and changes to a pose in which the sword is pulled out and swung up. In FIG. 26D, a wave is oscillated from the sword of the lord's navigation character YM. This wave extends through the fluctuation icon h0 and reaches just before the first hold icon h11. In FIG. 26 (e), at least a part of the first fluctuation icon h11 is covered with the effect image Eh1 of the red smoke image, and the first fluctuation icon h11 is more difficult to recognize than before being covered. Note that the first hold icon h11 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh1, or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh1. Further, the effect image Eh1 may overlap at least a part of another icon (a fluctuation icon or another holding icon). In FIG. 26 (f), the first hold icon h11, which is the default (white) display mode before the effect image Eh1 disappears and is covered with the effect image Eh1, is the same display mode as the kimono of the navigation character YM. It has changed to a red display mode. Note that the first hold icon h11 has changed to the same mode as the effect image Eh1. In this example, the display mode of the navigation character YM or the display mode of the effect image Eh1 suggests (notices) the display mode of the changed first hold icon h11. However, the mode of the effect image Eh1 may be different from the mode after the icon change (for example, white, blue, or gold). The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 26 (g) has returned to the initial posture. Although the wave has disappeared from the sword of the navigation character YM shown in FIG. 26 (f), the wave may still be oscillating, or the navigation character YM may have the timing shown in FIG. It may return to the initial posture at the timing when Eh1 disappears).

  The icon change animation described above may be regarded as being started from FIG. 26C and ended immediately before (FIG. 26G) (immediately before returning to the initial posture), or while the wave is oscillating (FIG. 26). It may be regarded as an animation performed only in (d) to (e) of the same figure, or as an animation performed only while the effect image Eh1 is displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 26H, the first stop of the decorative symbol to be variably displayed is performed, and "decoration 4" is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a. That is, “decoration 4” has started to fluctuate. In the effect icon display area DIS, the navigation character YM in a display mode wearing a red kimono is continuously displayed in the initial posture.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 26 (i), a second stop of the decorative symbol to be fluctuated is performed, and in the right symbol display area 208c, “decoration 4” is temporarily stopped and the reach state is formed. Then, in the same figure (j), the character display of "reach" is displayed. That is, “decoration 4”, which is swinging in the left symbol display area 208a, “medium symbol display area 208b, which continues to fluctuate at high speed,” and “decoration 4”, which is swinging in the right symbol display area 208c, are placed on the front side (player). The character display of "reach" is displayed so as to overlap from the side), and the display in each of the symbol display areas 208a to 208c is more difficult to recognize than before the character display of "reach" is displayed. . In the effect icon display area DIS, the navigation character YM in a display mode wearing a red kimono is still displayed in the initial posture.

  In FIG. 26 (k), in the reach state, the second icon change animation is started, and the navigation character YM in a display mode wearing a red kimono swings his sword to the left, and in FIG. Waves are oscillating from the sword. The wave here also passes through the fluctuating icon h0 and reaches just before the first holding icon h11. Subsequently, in FIG. 26 (m), at least a part of the first hold icon h11 is covered by the effect image Eh1 which is a golden smoke image, and the first change icon h11 is more difficult to recognize than before the cover. . Note that the first hold icon h11 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh1, or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh1. Further, the effect image Eh1 may overlap at least a part of another icon (a fluctuation icon or another holding icon). In FIG. 26 (n), the first hold icon h11 which was in a red display mode before the effect image Eh1 disappeared and was covered with the effect image Eh1 is replaced by a gold display mode which is the same as the current effect image Eh1. Has changed. Also in this second time, the display mode of the effect image Eh1 suggests (preliminary notice) the display mode of the changed first hold icon h11. However, the mode of the effect image Eh1 may be different from the mode after the icon change (for example, the same mode (here, red) as the display mode of the first hold icon h11 before the change). The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 26 (o) has returned to the initial posture.

  The second icon change animation described above may be regarded as being started from FIG. 26 (k) and ended immediately before (o) in FIG. 26 (o) (immediately before returning to the initial posture), or while the wave is oscillating. It may be regarded as an animation performed only in (FIGS. (L) to (m)) or as an animation performed only while the effect image Eh1 is displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 26 (p), the combination of the lost decorative symbols (“decoration 4”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 4”) is stopped and displayed, but the first hold is exhausted. May be a big hit in the variation display of the decoration symbol performed by the user (variation display of the decoration symbol started next). That is, the pre-reading notice by the first hold icon h11 whose display mode has changed may be a true notice.

  In the example shown in the left half of FIG. 26, of the two icon change animations, the first icon change animation is a successful animation in which the display mode of the reserved icon changes, and the second icon change animation is also the same. It was a successful animation in which the display mode of the hold icon changed. That is, in the one variation display of the decorative symbol, the successful animation is an example.

  Further, since the navigation character YM continues to be displayed without disappearing, the icon change animation described here can be regarded as one time instead of two times. That is, it can be considered that the process starts from FIG. 26C and ends immediately before (FIG. 26O) (just before returning to the initial posture). Note that the navigation character YM may temporarily disappear between FIGS. 26 (g) to (j). For example, the navigation character YM disappears once in FIG. 26 (g), or disappears immediately after FIG. 26 (g), and is displayed again immediately before FIG. In this case, the boundary between the two icon change animations becomes clear.

  The example shown in the right half of FIG. 26 will be described focusing on the differences from the example shown in the left half of FIG. 26, and redundant description may be omitted. In the example shown in the right half of FIG. 26, FIGS. (A) to (D) are the same as FIGS. (A) to (d) described above, and wear red kimono. The navigation character YM of the lord in the display mode changes to a pose in which the sword of the navigation character YM is turned to the left, and the sword of the navigation character YM is swinging. This wave extends through the fluctuation icon h0 and reaches just before the first hold icon h11. Subsequently, in FIG. 26 (E), at least a part of the first hold icon h11 is covered by the effect image Eh1 that is a white smoke image, and the first change icon h11 is more difficult to recognize than before the cover. . Note that the first hold icon h11 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh1, or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh1. Further, the effect image Eh1 may overlap at least a part of another icon (a fluctuation icon or another holding icon). In FIG. 26 (F), although the effect image Eh1 has disappeared, in this example, there is no change in the display mode of the first hold icon h11, and the first hold icon h11 remains in the white display mode. The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 26 (G) has returned to the initial posture.

  FIGS. 26 (H) to (L) illustrate the first hold icon h11 described above, except that the display mode is not a red display mode but a white display mode. After the reach state is reached, the navigation character YM in a display mode wearing a red kimono changes to a pose in which the navigation character YM faces the left side, pulls out the sword, and swings over. Waves are oscillating from the sword of the navigation character YM. The wave here also passes through the fluctuating icon h0 and reaches just before the first holding icon h11. Subsequently, in FIG. 26M, at least a part of the first hold icon h11 is again covered with the effect image Eh1 that is a white smoke image, and the first change icon h11 is more difficult to recognize than before being covered. ing. Note that the first hold icon h11 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh1, or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh1. Further, the effect image Eh1 may overlap at least a part of another icon (a fluctuation icon or another holding icon). In FIG. 26 (N), although the effect image Eh1 has disappeared, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 remains unchanged, and the first hold icon h11 remains in the white display mode. The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 26 (O) has returned to the initial posture. Also in this example, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 26 (P), the combination of the lost decorative symbols (“decoration 4”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 4”) is stopped and displayed. Even in the variation display of the decoration symbol (variation display of the decoration symbol to be started next) performed after the 1 hold is completed, there is a case where the player loses the game or a big hit. However, since the display mode has not changed from the default display mode, the pre-reading notice by the first hold icon h11 has not been performed, and in the next variation display of the decorative pattern, it is possible to lose more than a big hit. High in nature.

  Both of the two icon change animations described above are failure animations in which the display mode of the hold icon does not change. That is, in one variation display of the decorative symbol, the failed animation is continuous. In this case as well, since the navigation character YM continues to be displayed without disappearing, the icon change animation can be regarded as one time instead of two times.

  FIG. 27 is a diagram showing another example different from the example shown in FIG. 26, in which the navigation character YM has performed a plurality of actions on the hold icon in one change display of the decorative symbol.

  The example shown in the left half of FIG. 27 will be described focusing on the differences from the example shown in the left half of FIG. 26, and duplicate description may be omitted. In the example shown in the left half of FIG. 27, FIGS. 26 (a) to (d) are the same as FIGS. 26 (a) to (d) described above, and wear red kimono. The navigation character YM of the lord in the display mode changes to a pose in which the navigation character YM faces the left side, pulls out the sword, and swings, and extends from the sword of the navigation character YM to the position before the first holding icon h11 through the change icon h0. Waves are oscillating. Subsequently, in FIG. 27E, at least a part of the first hold icon h11 is covered by the effect image Eh1 that is a white smoke image, and the first change icon h11 is more difficult to recognize than before the cover. . Note that the first hold icon h11 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh1, or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh1. Further, the effect image Eh1 may overlap at least a part of another icon (a fluctuation icon or another holding icon). In FIG. 27F, the effect image Eh1 has disappeared. However, in this example, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 has not changed, and the first hold icon h11 remains in the white display mode. The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 27 (g) has returned to the initial posture.

  27 (h) to FIG. 27 (l) described above, except that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is not a red display mode but a white display mode. After the reach state is reached, the navigation character YM in a display mode wearing a red kimono changes to a pose in which the navigation character YM faces the left side, pulls out the sword, and swings over. , A wave oscillating from the sword of the navigation character YM to the position before the first holding icon h11 through the fluctuation icon h0 is oscillated. Subsequently, in FIG. 27 (m), at least a part of the first hold icon h11 is covered by the effect image Eh1 which is a golden smoke image, and the first change icon h11 is more difficult to recognize than before the cover. . Note that the first hold icon h11 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh1, or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh1. Further, the effect image Eh1 may overlap at least a part of another icon (a fluctuation icon or another holding icon). In FIG. 27 (n), the first hold icon h11, which is the default (white) display mode before the effect image Eh1 disappears and is covered with the effect image Eh1, is replaced by a gold display in the same mode as the effect image Eh1. Has changed to an aspect. In the second icon change animation, the display mode of the effect image Eh1 indicates (preliminary notice) the display mode of the first hold icon h11 after the change. However, the mode of the effect image Eh1 may be different from the mode after the icon change (for example, blue or red). The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 27 (o) has returned to the initial posture.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 27 (p), the combination of the lost decorative symbols (“decoration 4”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 4”) is stopped and displayed, but the first hold is exhausted. May be a big hit in the variation display of the decoration symbol performed by the user (variation display of the decoration symbol started next). That is, the pre-reading notice by the first hold icon h11 whose display mode has changed may be a true notice.

  Of the two icon change animations described above, the first icon change animation is a failed animation in which the display mode of the hold icon does not change, whereas the second icon change animation is the display mode of the hold icon. Was a changing successful anime. That is, in one variation display of the decorative symbol, the failed animation is displayed first, and then the successful animation is displayed. In this case as well, since the navigation character YM continues to be displayed without disappearing, the icon change animation can be regarded as one time instead of two times.

  The example shown in the right half of FIG. 27 will be described focusing on the differences from the example shown in the left half of FIG. 27, and redundant description may be omitted. In the example shown in the right half of FIG. 27, FIGS. (A) to (D) are the same as FIGS. (A) to (d) described above, and wear red kimono. The navigation character YM of the lord of the display mode changes to the pose of pointing to the left, pulling out the sword and swinging over, and extends from the sword of the navigation character YM to the position before the first hold icon h11 through the change icon h0. Waves are oscillating. Subsequently, in FIG. 27 (E), at least a part of the first hold icon h11 is covered by the effect image Eh1 that is a red smoke image, and the first change icon h11 is more difficult to recognize than before being covered. . Note that the first hold icon h11 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh1, or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh1. Further, the effect image Eh1 may overlap at least a part of another icon (a fluctuation icon or another holding icon). In FIG. 27 (F), the first hold icon h11, which is the default (white) display mode before the effect image Eh1 disappears and is covered with the effect image Eh1, is displayed in red, which is the same mode as the effect image Eh1. Has changed to an aspect. In the icon change animation here, the display mode of the effect image Eh1 indicates (preliminary notice) the display mode of the first hold icon h11 after the change. However, the mode of the effect image Eh1 may be different from the mode after the icon change (for example, green, gold, rainbow, etc.). The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 27 (G) has returned to the initial posture.

  FIGS. 27 (H) to 27 (L) are the same as FIGS. 27 (h) to (l) described above, and show a display mode in which a red kimono is worn after reaching the reach state. Nono-sama's navigation character YM turns to the left, pulls out the sword, and swings up. It is oscillating. Subsequently, in FIG. 27 (M), at least a part of the first hold icon h11 is again covered with the effect image Eh1 that is a white smoke image, and the first change icon h11 is more difficult to recognize than before being covered. ing. Note that the first hold icon h11 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh1, or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh1. Further, the effect image Eh1 may overlap at least a part of another icon (a fluctuation icon or another holding icon). In FIG. 27 (N), the effect image Eh1 has disappeared, but the display mode of the first hold icon h11 has not changed, and the first hold icon h11 remains in the red display mode. The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 27 (O) has returned to the initial posture. Also in this example, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 27 (P), the combination of the lost decorative symbols (“decoration 4” − “decoration 5” − “decoration 4”) is stopped and displayed. There is a case where a large hit occurs in the variation display of the decoration symbol (the variation display of the decoration symbol to be started next) performed by digesting the first hold. That is, the pre-reading notice by the first hold icon h11 whose display mode has changed may be a true notice.

  Of the two icon change animations described above, the first icon change animation is a successful animation in which the display mode of the hold icon changes, whereas the second icon change animation is the display mode of the hold icon. It was a failed animation that did not change. That is, in one variation display of the decorative symbol, the failed animation is displayed after the successful animation is displayed first. In this case as well, since the navigation character YM continues to be displayed without disappearing, the icon change animation can be regarded as one time instead of two times.

  26 and 27, white, red, and gold have been described as examples, but other colors and patterns may be used. Further, the modes of the hold icon, the navigation character YM, and the effect image Eh1 are not limited to the modes described with reference to FIGS. 26 and 27. For example, a hold icon that was in a white display mode may have a blue display mode, a green display mode, a red display mode, or a gold display mode. It may be a mode or a rainbow display mode. Further, the navigation character YM of the lord who was in the display mode of wearing a red kimono may be a display mode of wearing a gold kimono or a display mode of wearing a rainbow kimono. Alternatively, the display mode may be a display mode wearing a white kimono, a display mode wearing a blue kimono, or a display mode wearing a green kimono. Furthermore, the display mode of the second holding icon h12, the third holding icon h13, and the fourth holding icon h14 may change in addition to the first holding icon h11. Furthermore, the display mode of a plurality of hold icons, the display mode of the change icon h0, and the display mode of one or more hold icons may change.

  Further, in any of the examples described with reference to FIGS. 26 and 27, the pre-reading advance notice based on the hold icon whose display mode has changed is a false advance or a true advance notice. Here, the examples described with reference to FIGS. 26 and 27 can be summarized as follows. In one variation display of a decorative symbol, an example shown in the left half of FIG. 26. The example shown in the right half of FIG. 26 is an example in which failed animations are continuous (hereinafter, referred to as a "continuous failure example"), and the example shown in the left half of FIG. 28, an example in which a successful animation is displayed after a failed animation is displayed (hereinafter, referred to as a "failed success example"). In the example shown in the right half of FIG. There is an example in which an animation is displayed (hereinafter, referred to as a “success / failure example”). High, then high success cases, then high success cases High when we, the lowest when the continuous failures is performed (continuous success> Failure successes> Success failures> continuous failures). In the case where a continuous failure example is performed, a losing may always occur (the jackpot probability is 0%) or a jackpot may occur (the jackpot probability is higher than 0%).

  Also, in each of the examples described with reference to FIGS. 26 and 27, the icon change animation is performed only twice in one change display of the decorative symbol, but the icon change animation of one change display of the decorative symbol is performed. Inside, the icon change animation may be performed three or more times.

  FIG. 28 is a diagram illustrating some examples in which the navigation character YM has performed an action a plurality of times with respect to the hold icon in a plurality of variable displays of the decorative symbol.

  In the example shown in the left half of FIG. 28, first, in FIG. 28A, in the state where the combination of the decorative patterns of the loss (“decoration 2”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 2”) is stopped and displayed, The reserved number of Toku-zu 1 is four, and four reserved icons h11 to h14 of Toku-zu 1 are displayed. Each of the hold icons has a default (white) display mode. In addition, the second reserved number display is displayed at the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 28A, and the reserved number of the special figure 1 is 4 and the reserved number of the special figure 2 is 0. Is reported. Further, FIG. 28A shows a state immediately after the combination of the lost decorative patterns (“decoration 2”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 2”) is stopped and displayed, and the change icon h0 is also displayed. Up to. Further, in the effect icon display area DIS, a navigation character YM in a display mode wearing a red kimono is displayed in an initial posture on the right base icon bIr.

  In FIG. 28 (b), the reservation of the special figure 1 has been exhausted, and the decorative symbol display device 208 has started to change the display of the decorative symbol, and the moving animation of the reserved icon of the special figure 1 has been completed. As a result, three holding icons such as a first holding icon h11, a second holding icon h12, and a third holding icon h13 are displayed in the holding icon display area HIS, and the changing icon h0 is displayed in the changing icon display area CIS. Is displayed. Both of the three hold icons and the change icon h0 are default (white) display modes. In the second reserved number display displayed on the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 28B, the reserved number of the special figure 1 is 3 and the reserved number of the special figure 2 is 0. Is reported. Further, in the effect icon display area DIS, a navigation character YM in a display mode wearing a red kimono is continuously displayed in the initial posture, and the navigation character YM is displayed across a continuous pattern variation display. It will be. Note that the navigation character YM may be continuously displayed while performing a standby animation (for example, an animation that repeats a certain operation).

  In FIG. 28C, the navigation character YM in the initial posture starts the icon change animation, turns to the left side, and changes to the pose of pulling the sword and swinging. In the subsequent FIG. 28 (d), a wave is oscillated from the sword of the lord's navigation character YM. This wave passes through the fluctuation icon h0, further passes through the first reservation icon h11, and extends to just before the second reservation icon h12. In FIG. 28 (e), at least a part of the second fluctuation icon h12 is covered by the effect image Eh2 of the red smoke image, and the second fluctuation icon h12 is more difficult to recognize than before being covered. Note that the second hold icon h12 may be partially covered with the effect image Eh2, or may be entirely covered with the effect image Eh2. Further, the effect image Eh2 may overlap at least a part of another icon (a fluctuation icon or another holding icon). In FIG. 28F, the second hold icon h12, which is the default (white) display mode before the effect image Eh2 disappears and is covered with the effect image Eh2, has the same display mode as the kimono of the navigation character YM. It has changed to a red display mode. Note that the second hold icon h12 has changed to the same mode as the effect image Eh2. In this example, the display mode of the navigation character YM or the display mode of the effect image Eh2 suggests (notices) the display mode of the changed second hold icon h12. However, the mode of the effect image Eh2 may be different from the mode after the icon change (for example, white, blue, or gold). The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 28 (g) has returned to the initial posture. Although the wave has disappeared from the sword of the navigation character YM shown in FIG. 28 (f), the wave may still be oscillating, or the navigation character YM may have the timing shown in FIG. It may return to the initial posture at the timing when Eh2 disappears).

  The icon change animation described above may be regarded as being started from FIG. 28C and ended immediately before (FIG. 28G) (just before returning to the initial posture) or while the wave is oscillating (FIG. 28). The animation may be regarded as an animation performed only in (d) to (e) of the drawing, or may be regarded as an animation performed only while the effect image Eh2 is displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 28H, the combination of the lost decorative symbols (“decoration 4” − “decoration 4” − “decoration 5”) is stopped and displayed.

  In the subsequent FIG. 28 (i), the suspension of the special figure 1 is exhausted, and the decorative symbol display device 208 has started to display the decorative symbols in a fluctuating manner, and the moving animation of the reserved icon of the special figure 1 has been completed. As a result, two hold icons such as a first hold icon h11 and a second hold icon h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area HIS, and a change icon h0 is displayed in the change icon display area CIS. The first hold icon h11 is an icon whose display mode has changed due to the previous change, and is displayed in a red display mode. In the second reserved number display displayed on the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 28 (i), the reserved number of the special figure 1 is 2 and the reserved number of the special figure 2 is 0. Has been reported. When the number of reservations becomes 2, the display of the navigation character YM disappears. No icon is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS shown in FIG.

  From FIG. 28 (j) to FIG. 28 (l), the change display of the decorative pattern continues, and in FIG. 28 (m), the second icon change animation is performed with the display of the navigation character YM kept disappearing. Has been started. In FIG. 28 (m), at least a part of the first hold icon h11 in the red display mode is covered by the effect image Eh1 that is a golden smoke image, and the first change icon h11 is more difficult to recognize than before being covered. It has become. Note that the first hold icon h11 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh1, or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh1. In FIG. 28 (n), the first hold icon h11 that was in a red display mode before the effect image Eh1 disappeared and was covered with the effect image Eh1 is now replaced by a gold display mode in the same mode as the current effect image Eh1. Has changed. Also in this second time, the display mode of the effect image Eh1 suggests (preliminary notice) the display mode of the changed first hold icon h11. However, the mode of the effect image Eh1 may be different from the mode after the icon change (for example, the same mode (here, red) as the display mode of the first hold icon h11 before the change). As shown in FIG. 28 (o), the change display of the decorative symbol continues for a while.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 28 (p), the combination of the lost decorative symbols (“decoration 4” − “decoration 5” − “decoration 4”) is stopped and displayed, but the first hold is exhausted. May be a big hit in the variation display of the decoration symbol performed by the user (the variation display of the decoration symbol to be started next). That is, the pre-reading notice by the first hold icon h11 whose display mode has changed may be a true notice.

  In the example shown in the left half of FIG. 28, of the two icon change animations, the first icon change animation is a successful animation in which the display mode of the pending icon changes, and the second icon change animation is also the same. It was a successful animation in which the display mode of the hold icon changed. In other words, this is an example in which successful animations are continuously performed in a plurality of variable displays of the decorative symbol. In addition, the hold icon whose display mode changes by the icon change animation is a hold icon representing the same hold, but may be a hold icon representing a different hold (the same applies to the following examples). For example, in the second icon change animation, the display mode of the second hold icon h12 shown in FIG. 28 (m) may be changed from the third hold icon h12 in FIG. 28 (f).

  The example shown in the right half of FIG. 28 will be described focusing on the differences from the example shown in the left half of FIG. 28, and duplicate description may be omitted. In the example shown in the right half of FIG. 28, FIGS. (A) to (D) are the same as FIGS. (A) to (d) described above, and wear red kimono. The navigation character YM of the lord in the display mode changes to a pose in which the sword of the navi character YM is turned to the left, and the sword of the navi character YM is swinging. The wave here also passes through the fluctuation icon h0, further passes through the first reservation icon h11, and reaches just before the second reservation icon h12. Subsequently, in FIG. 28 (E), at least a part of the second hold icon h12 is covered by the effect image Eh2 which is a white smoke image, and the second change icon h12 is more difficult to recognize than before being covered. . Note that the second hold icon h12 may be partially covered with the effect image Eh2, or may be entirely covered with the effect image Eh2. In FIG. 28 (F), although the effect image Eh2 has disappeared, in this example, there is no change in the display mode of the second hold icon h12, and the second hold icon h12 remains in the white display mode. The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 28 (G) has returned to the initial posture.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 28H, the combination of the lost decorative symbols (“decoration 4”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 5”) is stopped and displayed.

  In FIG. 28 (I) that follows, the reservation of the special figure 1 has been exhausted, and the decorative symbol display device 208 has started to change the display of the decorative symbol, and the moving animation of the reserved icon of the special figure 1 has been completed. As a result, two reserved icons, a first reserved icon h11 and a second reserved icon h12, are displayed in the reserved icon display area HIS, and a variable icon h0 is displayed in the variable icon display area CIS. Both the hold icon and the change icon h0 are in the default (white) display mode. In addition, the display of the navigation character YM disappears due to the hold number being 2, and no icon is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS shown in FIG.

  28 (J) to FIG. 28 (L), FIG. 28 (j) described above, except that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is not a red display mode but a white display mode. (L) is the same as that of FIG. 28. In the state where the display of the navigation character YM has disappeared, the variation display of the decorative pattern is continued. In FIG. Animation has started. In FIG. 28 (M), at least a part of the first hold icon h11 in the white display mode is covered by the effect image Eh1 which is a white smoke image, and the first change icon h11 is more difficult to see than before the cover. It has become. Note that the first hold icon h11 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh1, or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh1. In FIG. 28 (N), although the effect image Eh1 has disappeared, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 remains unchanged, and the first hold icon h11 remains in the white display mode. As shown in FIG. 28 (O), the change display of the decorative symbol continues for a while.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 28 (P), the combination of the lost decorative symbols (“decoration 4” − “decoration 5” − “decoration 4”) is stopped and displayed, and the first hold is exhausted. Even in the displayed variation of the decorative symbol (variable display of the decorative symbol to be started next), there is a case where the player loses the game or a big hit. However, since the display mode has not changed from the default display mode, the pre-reading notice by the first hold icon h11 has not been performed, and in the next variation display of the decorative pattern, it is possible to lose more than a big hit. High in nature.

  Both of the two icon change animations described above are failure animations in which the display mode of the hold icon does not change. That is, in one variation display of the decorative symbol, the failed animation is continuous.

  FIG. 29 is a diagram showing another example different from the example shown in FIG. 28, in which the navigation character YM has performed a plurality of actions on the hold icon in the plurality of variable displays of the decorative symbol.

  The example shown in the left half of FIG. 29 will be described focusing on the differences from the example shown in the left half of FIG. 28, and duplicate description may be omitted. In the example shown in the left half of FIG. 29, FIGS. 28A to 28D are the same as FIGS. 28A to 28D described above, and wear red kimono. The navigation character YM of the lord of the display mode changes to the pose of pointing to the left, pulling out the sword, and swinging, and from the sword of the navigation character YM, passes through the change icon h0 and further passes through the first hold icon h11. A wave is oscillating up to the position before the 2 hold icon h12. Subsequently, in FIG. 29 (e), at least a part of the second holding icon h12 is covered by the effect image Eh2 which is a white smoke image, and the second fluctuation icon h12 is more difficult to recognize than before being covered. . Note that the second hold icon h12 may be partially covered with the effect image Eh2, or may be entirely covered with the effect image Eh2. In FIG. 29 (f), the effect image Eh2 has disappeared, but in this example, the display mode of the second hold icon h12 does not change, and the second hold icon h12 remains in the white display mode. The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 29 (g) has returned to the initial posture.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 29 (h), the combination of the lost decorative symbols (“decoration 4”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 5”) is stopped and displayed.

  In the subsequent FIG. 29 (i), the reservation of the special figure 1 is exhausted, and the decorative symbol display device 208 has started to display the variation of the decorative symbol, and the moving animation of the reserved icon of the special figure 1 has been completed. As a result, two reserved icons, a first reserved icon h11 and a second reserved icon h12, are displayed in the reserved icon display area HIS, and a variable icon h0 is displayed in the variable icon display area CIS. Both the hold icon and the change icon h0 are in the default (white) display mode. In addition, the display of the navigation character YM disappears due to the hold number being 2, and no icon is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS shown in FIG.

  In the subsequent FIGS. 29 (j) to (l), FIG. 28 (i) described above, except that the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is not a red display mode but a white display mode. FIG. 29 is the same as FIG. 29, and the display of the variation of the decorative pattern is continued in a state where the display of the navigation character YM has disappeared. In FIG. Change animation has begun. In FIG. 29 (m), at least a part of the first hold icon h11 in the white display mode is covered by the effect image Eh1 which is a white smoke image, and the first change icon h11 is more difficult to see than before the cover. It has become. Note that the first hold icon h11 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh1, or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh1. In FIG. 29 (n), the first hold icon h11, which is the default (white) display mode before the effect image Eh1 disappears and is covered with the effect image Eh1, is replaced by a gold display in the same mode as the effect image Eh1. Has changed to an aspect. In the second icon change animation, the display mode of the effect image Eh1 indicates (preliminary notice) the display mode of the first hold icon h11 after the change. However, the mode of the effect image Eh1 may be different from the mode after the icon change (for example, blue or red). As shown in FIG. 29 (o), the change display of the decorative symbol continues for a while.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 29 (p), the combination of the lost decorative symbols (“decoration 4”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 4”) is stopped and displayed, but the first hold is exhausted. May be a big hit in the variation display of the decoration symbol performed by the user (variation display of the decoration symbol started next). That is, the pre-reading notice by the first hold icon h11 whose display mode has changed may be a true notice.

  Of the two icon change animations described above, the first icon change animation is a failed animation in which the display mode of the hold icon does not change, whereas the second icon change animation is the display mode of the hold icon. Was a changing successful anime. That is, in one variation display of the decorative symbol, the failed animation is displayed first, and then the successful animation is displayed.

  The example shown in the right half of FIG. 29 will be described focusing on the differences from the example shown in the left half of FIG. 28, and redundant description may be omitted. In the example shown in the right half of FIG. 29, FIGS. 28A to 28D are the same as FIGS. 28A to 28D described above, and a red kimono is worn. The navigation character YM of the lord in the display mode changes to the pose of pointing to the left, pulling out the sword, and swinging over the sword. A wave is oscillating up to the position before the 2 hold icon h12. Subsequently, in FIG. 29E, at least a part of the second hold icon h12 is covered by the effect image Eh2 which is a red smoke image, and the second change icon h12 is more difficult to recognize than before the cover. . Note that the second hold icon h12 may be partially covered with the effect image Eh2, or may be entirely covered with the effect image Eh2. In FIG. 29 (F), the second hold icon h12, which is the default (white) display mode before the effect image Eh2 disappears and is covered with the effect image Eh2, is displayed in red in the same mode as the effect image Eh2. Has changed to an aspect. In the icon change animation here, the display mode of the effect image Eh2 indicates (preliminary notice) the display mode of the second hold icon h12 after the change. However, the mode of the effect image Eh2 may be different from the mode after the icon change (for example, green, gold, rainbow, etc.). The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 29 (G) has returned to the initial posture.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 29H, the combination of the lost decorative symbols (“decoration 4”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 5”) is stopped and displayed.

  In the subsequent FIG. 29 (I), the reservation of the special figure 1 is exhausted, and the decorative symbol display device 208 has started to change the display of the decorative symbol, and the moving animation of the reserved icon of the special figure 1 has been completed. As a result, two reserved icons, a first reserved icon h11 and a second reserved icon h12, are displayed in the reserved icon display area HIS, and a variable icon h0 is displayed in the variable icon display area CIS. The first hold icon h11 is an icon whose display mode has changed due to the previous change, and is displayed in a red display mode. In addition, the display of the navigation character YM disappears due to the hold number being 2, and no icon is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS shown in FIG. 29 (I).

  The following FIGS. 29 (J) to (L) are the same as FIGS. 28 (i) to (l) described above, with the display of the navigation character YM disappearing and the change of the decorative pattern. The display is continued, and in FIG. 29 (M), the second icon change animation is started in that state. In FIG. 29 (M), at least a part of the first hold icon h11 in the red display mode is covered by the effect image Eh1 that is a white smoke image, and the first change icon h11 is more difficult to recognize than before being covered. It has become. Note that the first hold icon h11 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh1, or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh1. In FIG. 29 (N), the effect image Eh1 has disappeared, but here, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 has not changed, and the first hold icon h11 remains in the white display mode. As shown in FIG. 29 (O), the change display of the decorative symbol continues for a while.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 29 (p), the combination of the lost decorative symbols (“decoration 4”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 4”) is stopped and displayed, but the first hold is exhausted. May be a big hit in the variation display of the decoration symbol performed by the user (variation display of the decoration symbol started next). That is, the pre-reading notice by the first hold icon h11 whose display mode has changed may be a true notice.

  Of the two icon change animations described above, the first icon change animation is a successful animation in which the display mode of the hold icon changes, whereas the second icon change animation is the display mode of the hold icon. It was a failed animation that did not change. That is, in one variation display of the decorative symbol, the failed animation is displayed after the successful animation is displayed first.

  As described above, in FIG. 28 and FIG. 29, white, red, and gold have been described as examples, but other colors and patterns may be used. Further, the modes of the hold icon, the navigation character YM, and the effect image Eh1 are not limited to the modes described with reference to FIGS. 28 and 29. For example, a hold icon that was in a white display mode may have a blue display mode, a green display mode, a red display mode, or a gold display mode. It may be a mode or a rainbow display mode. Further, the navigation character YM of the lord who was in the display mode of wearing a red kimono may be a display mode of wearing a gold kimono or a display mode of wearing a rainbow kimono. Alternatively, the display mode may be a display mode wearing a white kimono, a display mode wearing a blue kimono, or a display mode wearing a green kimono. Furthermore, the display mode of the second holding icon h12, the third holding icon h13, and the fourth holding icon h14 may change in addition to the first holding icon h11. Furthermore, the display mode of a plurality of hold icons, the display mode of the change icon h0, and the display mode of one or more hold icons may change.

  Also, in any of the examples described with reference to FIGS. 28 and 29, the pre-reading notice by the hold icon whose display mode has changed is a false notice or a true notice. Here, when the examples described with reference to FIGS. 28 and 29 are summarized, an example in which the successful animation is continuous, which is an example shown in the left half of FIG. 28. The example shown in the right half of FIG. 28 is an example in which failed animations are continuous (hereinafter, referred to as “continuous failure example”), and the example shown in the left half of FIG. 29, an example in which a successful animation is displayed after a failed animation is displayed (hereinafter, referred to as a "failed success example"). In the example shown in the right half of FIG. There is an example in which an animation is displayed (hereinafter, referred to as a “success / failure example”). Easiness of a big hit, that is, a probability that a big hit symbol is finally determined and displayed is greatest when a continuous success example is performed. High, then high success case, then high, then success failure case High if done, the lowest when the continuous failures is performed (continuous success> Failure successes> Success failures> continuous failures). In the case where a continuous failure example is performed, a losing may always occur (the jackpot probability is 0%) or a jackpot may occur (the jackpot probability is higher than 0%).

Also, in each of the examples described with reference to FIGS. 28 and 29, the icon change animation is performed only once in one variation display of the decorative symbol. Inside, the icon change animation may be performed a plurality of times. In other words, even if the icon change animation is performed a plurality of times during one change display of the decorative symbol, and the icon change animation is performed a plurality of times during the multiple change display of the decorative design, Good.
FIG. 30 is a diagram illustrating two examples of the icon change animation.

  The example shown in the left half of FIG. 30 is an example in which the icon to be changed in the icon change animation can be easily recognized.

  First, in FIG. 30A, the combination of the lost decorative patterns (“decoration 2”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 2”) is stopped and displayed, and the number of reservations in the special figure 1 is four. , Four reserve icons h11 to h14 of the special map 1 are displayed. Each of the hold icons has a default (white) display mode. In addition, the second reserved number display is displayed at the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 30A, and the reserved number of the special figure 1 is 4 and the reserved number of the special figure 2 is 0. Is reported. FIG. 30 (a) shows a state immediately after the combination of the lost decorative patterns (“decoration 2”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 2”) is stopped and displayed, and the change icon h0 is also displayed. Up to. Further, in the effect icon display area DIS, a navigation character YM in a display mode wearing a blue kimono is displayed in an initial posture on the right base icon bIr.

  In FIG. 30 (b), the reservation of the special figure 1 has been exhausted, and the decorative symbol display device 208 has started to change the display of the decorative symbol, and the moving animation of the reserved icon of the special figure 1 has been completed. As a result, three holding icons such as a first holding icon h11, a second holding icon h12, and a third holding icon h13 are displayed in the holding icon display area HIS, and the changing icon h0 is displayed in the changing icon display area CIS. Is displayed. Both of the three hold icons and the change icon h0 are default (white) display modes. In the second reserved number display displayed on the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 25B, the reserved number of the special figure 1 is 3 and the reserved number of the special figure 2 is 0. Is reported. Further, in the effect icon display area DIS, a navigation character YM in a display mode wearing a blue kimono is continuously displayed in an initial posture, and the navigation character YM is displayed over a continuous symbol variation display. Will have been. Note that the navigation character YM may be continuously displayed while performing a standby animation (for example, an animation that repeats a certain operation).

  In FIG. 30C, the navigation character YM in the initial posture starts the icon change animation, turns to the left side, and changes to the pose of pulling the sword and swinging. In the subsequent FIG. 30D, a wave is oscillated from the sword of the navigation character YM in the display mode wearing a blue kimono. The wave here extends to just before the second holding icon h12 so as to avoid the fluctuation icon h0 and the first holding icon h11. Further, an arrow extends from the point of the sword toward the second holding icon h12. Since the wave shown in FIG. 28D passes through the change icon h0 and also passes through the first reservation icon h11, the change icon h0 can be viewed as a change target, and the first reservation icon h11 can also be viewed as a change target. . On the other hand, the wave shown in FIG. 30D avoids the fluctuation icon h0 and the first holding icon h11, and thus does not occur. Further, the display of the arrow indicates that the second holding icon h12 is a change target. Some things are clearer.

  In FIG. 30 (e), at least a part of the second holding icon h12 is covered by the red smoke image effect image Eh2, and the second fluctuation icon h12 is more difficult to recognize than before being covered. Note that the second hold icon h12 may be partially covered with the effect image Eh2, or may be entirely covered with the effect image Eh2. Further, the effect image Eh2 may overlap at least a part of another icon (a fluctuation icon or another holding icon).

  In FIG. 30F, the second hold icon h12, which is the default (white) display mode before the effect image Eh2 disappears and is covered with the effect image Eh2, is replaced with a red color which is the same as the effect image Eh2. Is displayed. In this example, the display mode of the effect image Eh2 indicates (preliminary notice) the display mode of the second hold icon h12 after the change. However, the mode of the effect image Eh2 may be different from the mode after the icon change (for example, white or gold). Thereafter, the navigation character YM returns to the initial posture. Although the wave has disappeared from the sword of the navigation character YM shown in FIG. 30 (f), the wave may still be oscillating, or the navigation character YM may have the timing shown in FIG. It may return to the initial posture at the timing when Eh2 disappears).

  In FIG. 30 (g), there is one ball in the special figure 1 starting port 230, and the reserved number of the special figure 1 increases by one. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 30 (h), the animation for increasing the reserved icon is completed, and the fourth reserved icon h14 is additionally displayed. Further, the second reserved number display at the upper right indicates that the reserved number of Toku-zu 1 is 4 and the reserved number of Toku-zu 2 is 0. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 30H, the combination of the lost decorative symbols (“decoration 4”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 5”) is stopped and displayed.

  In the subsequent FIG. 30 (i), the reservation of the special figure 1 is exhausted, and the decorative symbol display device 208 has started to change the display of the decorative symbol, and the moving animation of the reserved icon of the special figure 1 has been completed. As a result, three reserved icons such as a first reserved icon h11, a second reserved icon h12, and a third reserved icon h13 are displayed in the reserved icon display area HIS, and a variable icon h0 is displayed in the variable icon display area CIS. Have been. The first hold icon h11 is an icon whose display mode has changed due to the previous change, and is displayed in a red display mode. Further, in the effect icon display area DIS, a navigation character YM in a display mode wearing a blue kimono is continuously displayed in an initial posture, and the navigation character YM is displayed over a continuous symbol variation display. Will have been.

  In FIG. 30 (j), the display of the variation of the decorative pattern continues, and in FIG. 30 (k), the second icon change animation is started, and the navigation character YM in the initial posture faces the left side and pulls out the sword. The pose changes to the pose you are shaking. In the subsequent FIG. 30 (l), a wave is oscillated from the sword of the navigation character YM in a display mode wearing a blue kimono. The wave here extends to the position before the first holding icon h11 so as to avoid the fluctuation icon h0. Further, an arrow extends from the point of the sword toward the first holding icon h11. The wave shown in FIG. 30 (l) also avoids the fluctuating icon h0, so that the fluctuating icon h0 is not considered to be a change target, and furthermore, the first hold icon h11 is a change target by displaying an arrow. Is more clear.

  In FIG. 30 (m), at least a part of the first hold icon h11 is covered with the effect image Eh1 of the golden smoke image, and the first change icon h11 is more difficult to recognize than before being covered. Note that the first hold icon h11 may be partially covered by the effect image Eh1, or may be entirely covered by the effect image Eh1. Further, the effect image Eh1 may overlap at least a part of another icon (a fluctuation icon or another holding icon).

  In FIG. 30 (n), the first hold icon h11 that was in a red display mode before the effect image Eh1 disappeared and was covered with the effect image Eh1 is now replaced with a gold display mode in the same mode as the effect image Eh1. Has changed. In this example, the display mode of the effect image Eh1 indicates (preliminary notice) the display mode of the first hold icon h11 after the change. However, the mode of the effect image Eh1 may be different from the mode after the icon change (for example, white or red). The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 30 (o) has returned to the initial posture.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 illustrated in FIG. 30 (p), the combination of the lost decorative symbols (“decoration 4” − “decoration 5” − “decoration 4”) is stopped and displayed, but the first hold is exhausted. May be a big hit in the variation display of the decoration symbol performed by the user (variation display of the decoration symbol started next). That is, the pre-reading notice by the first hold icon h11 whose display mode has changed may be a true notice.

  In the example shown in the left half of FIG. 30, the effect icon (navi character YM) in the A-th display mode (display mode in which a blue kimono is worn) is displayed in the B-th display mode (red kimono) shown in FIG. This is an example in which the icon to be changed can be more easily recognized than the effect icon (navigation character YM) in the display mode wearing the character.

  The example shown in the right half of FIG. 30 is an example in which the hold icon whose display mode has changed becomes a change icon and the display mode changes again.

  First, in FIG. 30A, the combination of the decorative patterns of the loss (“decoration 2” − “decoration 3” − “decoration 2”) is stopped and displayed, and the number of reservations in the special figure 1 is four. , Four reserve icons h11 to h14 of the special map 1 are displayed. Each of the hold icons has a default (white) display mode. In addition, the second reserved number display is displayed at the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 30A, and the reserved number of the special figure 1 is 4 and the reserved number of the special figure 2 is 0. Is reported to be. FIG. 30 (A) shows a state immediately after the combination of the lost decorative patterns (“decoration 2”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 2”) is stopped and displayed, and the change icon h0 is also displayed. Up to. Further, in the effect icon display area DIS, a navigation character YM in a display mode wearing a red kimono is displayed in an initial posture on the right base icon bIr.

  In FIG. 30 (B), the reservation of the special figure 1 is exhausted, and the decorative symbol display device 208 has started to display the decorative symbols in a fluctuating manner, and the moving animation of the reserved icon of the special figure 1 has been completed. As a result, three holding icons such as a first holding icon h11, a second holding icon h12, and a third holding icon h13 are displayed in the holding icon display area HIS, and the changing icon h0 is displayed in the changing icon display area CIS. Is displayed. Both of the three hold icons and the change icon h0 are default (white) display modes. In the second reserved number display displayed at the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 30B, the reserved number of the special figure 1 is three and the reserved number of the special figure 2 is zero. Is reported. Further, in the effect icon display area DIS, a navigation character YM in a display mode wearing a red kimono is continuously displayed in the initial posture, and the navigation character YM is displayed across a continuous pattern variation display. It will be. Note that the navigation character YM may be continuously displayed while performing a standby animation (for example, an animation that repeats a certain operation).

  In FIG. 30C, the navigation character YM in the initial posture starts the icon change animation, turns to the left side, and changes to a pose in which the sword is pulled out and swung up. In the following FIG. 30D, a wave is oscillated from the sword of the navigation character YM in the display mode wearing the red kimono. The wave here passes through the fluctuation icon h0 and reaches just before the first holding icon h11. In FIG. 30 (E), at least a part of the first hold icon h11 is covered by the red smoke image effect image Eh1, and the first change icon h11 is more difficult to visually recognize than before the cover. Note that the first hold icon h11 may be partially covered with the effect image Eh2, or may be entirely covered with the effect image Eh1. Further, the effect image Eh1 may overlap at least a part of another icon (a fluctuation icon or another holding icon).

  In FIG. 30 (F), the first hold icon h11 which was the default (white) display mode before the effect image Eh1 disappeared and was covered with the effect image Eh1 is the same display mode as the kimono of the navigation character YM. It has changed to a red display mode. Note that the first hold icon h11 has changed to the same mode as the effect image Eh1. In this example, the display mode of the navigation character YM or the display mode of the effect image Eh1 suggests (notices) the display mode of the changed first hold icon h11. However, the mode of the effect image Eh1 may be different from the mode after the icon change (for example, white, blue, or gold). Thereafter, the navigation character YM returns to the initial posture. Although the wave has disappeared from the sword of the navigation character YM shown in FIG. 30 (F), the wave may still be oscillating, or the navigation character YM may have the timing shown in FIG. It may return to the initial posture at the timing when Eh1 disappears).

  In FIG. 30 (G), there is one ball in the special figure 1 starting port 230, and the number of reserved special figure 1 is increased by one. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 30H, the animation for increasing the reserved icon is completed, and the fourth reserved icon h14 is additionally displayed. Further, the second reserved number display at the upper right indicates that the reserved number of Toku-zu 1 is 4 and the reserved number of Toku-zu 2 is 0. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 30H, the combination of the lost decorative symbols (“decoration 4”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 5”) is stopped and displayed.

  In the following FIG. 30 (I), the suspension of the special figure 1 is exhausted, and the decorative symbol display device 208 has started to display the decorative symbols in a fluctuating manner, and the moving animation of the reserved icon of the special figure 1 has been completed. As a result, three reserved icons such as a first reserved icon h11, a second reserved icon h12, and a third reserved icon h13 are displayed in the reserved icon display area HIS, and a variable icon h0 is displayed in the variable icon display area CIS. Have been. The change icon h0 is an icon in which the first hold icon h11 whose display mode has changed due to the previous change has changed, and is displayed in a red display mode. Further, in the effect icon display area DIS, a navigation character YM in a display mode wearing a red kimono is continuously displayed in the initial posture, and the navigation character YM is displayed across a continuous pattern variation display. It will be.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 30 (J), the reach state is formed and the character display of “reach” is displayed. That is, “decoration 4”, which is swinging in the left symbol display area 208a, “medium symbol display area 208b, which continues to fluctuate at high speed,” and “decoration 4”, which is swinging in the right symbol display area 208c, are placed on the front side (player). The character display of "reach" is displayed so as to overlap from the side), and the display in each of the symbol display areas 208a to 208c is more difficult to recognize than before the character display of "reach" is displayed. . In addition, in the effect icon display area DIS, the navigation character YM changed to the display mode wearing the red kimono is displayed in the initial posture.

  In FIG. 30 (K), in the reach state, the second icon change animation is started, and the navigation character YM in the display mode wearing the red kimono swings his sword toward the change icon h0 in the red display mode. In the figure (L), a wave is oscillated from the sword. Subsequently, in FIG. 30 (M), at least a part of the change icon h0 is covered by the effect image Eh0 that is a golden smoke image, and the change icon h0 is more difficult to recognize than before being covered. Note that the fluctuation icon h0 may be partially covered with the effect image Eh0, or may be entirely covered with the effect image Eh0. In FIG. 30 (N), the effect icon Eh0 disappears, and the change icon h0, which was a red display mode before being covered with the effect image Eh0, changes to a gold display mode, which is the same mode as the effect image Eh0. are doing. In this example, the display mode of the effect image Eh0 suggests (preliminary notice) the display mode of the changed icon h0 after the change. However, the mode of the effect image Eh0 may be different from the mode after the icon change (for example, white or red). The navigation character YM shown in FIG. 30 (O) has returned to the initial posture.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 30 (P), the combination of the lost decorative symbols (“decoration 4” − “decoration 5” − “decoration 4”) is stopped and displayed, and the changing icon whose display mode has changed is displayed. The normal notice by h0 is a false notice.

  In the example shown in the right half of FIG. 30, the icon change effect is performed only once for the hold icon, but may be performed multiple times. The icon change effect is performed only once for the changing icon, but may be performed multiple times. That is, after one or more icon change effects are performed on a certain hold icon, the hold icon becomes a change icon, and the icon change effect may be performed on the change icon one or more times. You may.

  In the above description, it has been described that the navigation character YM appears when the number of reservations reaches N (here, N = 3) and disappears when the number of reservations reaches M (here, M = 2). , May be always displayed. However, the navigation character YM may disappear or become invisible for a certain period during the variable display of the decorative pattern, although it is always displayed. For example, during a period of super reach, a period of dark display in which the display screen is completely dark, a period in which the display of the navigation character YM is overlapped with another display (notice display or error display), and the like, the navigation character YM is It may disappear or be invisible. Also, it may be displayed during the big hit game, or may not be displayed during the big hit game. Further, when the number of reserved special figures is 0 and the symbol variation display (decorative symbol variation display) is completed, a demonstration display (hereinafter, referred to as "demo display") is displayed. That is, the demonstration display is a display in which the number of holds is 0 and the special symbol display is displayed in a stopped state. Examples of the demonstration display include a symbol demonstration display in which a decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, and a moving image demonstration display in which an animation including a title of a game console is displayed. Note that a still image demonstration display may be displayed instead of the moving image demonstration display. Also in these demonstration displays, the navigation character YM may be displayed. Further, during the display period of the demo display, the navigation characters YM in all display modes may be displayed, or only the navigation characters YM in the display modes belonging to the first group may be displayed. That is, only the navigation character YM in the display mode of white, blue, and green may be displayed. Alternatively, during the display period of the demonstration display, only the navigation character YM in the white display mode may be displayed, only the navigation character YM in the blue display mode may be displayed, or the navigation character in the green display mode may be displayed. Only the character YM may be displayed. Furthermore, only the navigation character YM in the red display mode may be displayed.

  In addition, the description has been given of only the effect example using the lord character's navigation character YM as the effect icon. However, the effect icon is not limited to the lord character's navigation character YM, and the bomber icon I3 shown in FIG. 119, or icons of various icon change notices shown in FIG. 119 (b).

The icon to be changed may be a change icon or a hold icon. When the icon is a hold icon, the icon may be a first hold icon, a second hold icon, a third hold icon, or a fourth hold icon. . Further, the type of the mode of the icon to be changed may be the type of the hold icon or the change icon shown in FIG. 119 (a).
In the above description,

[Display means [for example, only the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a plurality of combinations (including all) of the first to third decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208N, the second display device] 208S etc.],

The display means is a means in which a certain icon [for example, a change icon h0 or a hold icon h11 to h14] may be displayed,
The certain icon is an icon related to a symbol variation display,

  The certain icon is an icon that may be displayed in a first display mode [for example, a blue display mode],

  The certain icon is an icon that may be displayed in the second display mode [for example, a red display mode],

When a certain icon of the second display mode [for example, red display mode] is displayed, a certain icon of the first display mode [for example, blue display mode] is displayed Finally, the jackpot symbol mode is more likely to be finally displayed [e.g., the jackpot expectation is higher],
The display means is a means in which an effect icon may be displayed,

  The effect icon is an icon different from the certain icon [for example, an icon of the navigation character YM or the like],

  The effect icon is an icon that may be displayed in a fourth display mode [for example, a display mode of a lord wearing a red kimono].

  When the effect of changing the certain icon of the first display mode is performed by the effect icon of the fourth display mode, when the display mode of the certain icon changes to the second display mode [for example, FIG. 25 (N)].

  The effect icon of the fourth display mode is an icon including an area [for example, a kimono area] displayed in a certain mode [for example, red],

  The certain icon of the second display mode is an icon including an area [for example, an area inside an edge line] displayed in the certain mode [for example, red],

When the effect of changing the certain icon of the first display mode is performed by the effect icon of the fourth display mode, the display mode of the certain icon does not change to the second display mode [for example, , FIG. 20 (f2)]. 』
Was explained.

  According to this gaming table, there is a case where the interest of the player can be improved by displaying a result different from the expectation of the player who expects to change to the second display mode.

  Here, the certain aspect may be only one of the color, the pattern, the size, the shape, the type of the character, all or a part of the character, or a combination of all of them. Or some combination.

  In the effect icon of the fourth display mode, the area displayed in the certain mode may be a part, or the entire area may be displayed in the certain mode.

  Further, in the certain icon of the second display mode, the area displayed in the certain color may be a part, or the entire area may be displayed in the certain mode.

The display means may be a means for displaying a certain icon without fail. Further, the display means may be means for displaying an effect icon without fail. Further, when an effect of changing a certain icon of the first display mode is performed by the effect icon of the fourth display mode, the display mode of the certain icon always changes to the second display mode. Is also good.
In the above description,

[Display means [for example, only the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a plurality of combinations (including all) of the first to third decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208N, the second display device] 208S etc.],

The display means is a means in which a certain icon [for example, a change icon h0 or a hold icon h11 to h14] may be displayed,
The certain icon is an icon related to a symbol variation display,

  The certain icon is an icon that may be displayed in a first display mode [for example, a blue display mode],

  The certain icon is an icon that may be displayed in a second display mode [for example, a red display mode],

When a certain icon of the second display mode [for example, red display mode] is displayed, a certain icon of the first display mode [for example, blue display mode] is displayed Finally, the jackpot symbol mode is more likely to be finally displayed [e.g., the jackpot expectation is higher],
The display means is a means in which an effect icon may be displayed,

  The effect icon is an icon different from the certain icon [for example, an icon of the navigation character YM or the like],

  The effect icon is an icon that may be displayed in a fourth display mode [for example, a display mode of a lord wearing a red kimono].

  When the effect of changing the certain icon of the first display mode is performed by the effect icon of the fourth display mode, when the display mode of the certain icon changes to the second display mode [for example, FIG. 25 (N)].

  The effect icon of the fourth display mode is an icon including an area [for example, a kimono area] displayed in a certain mode [for example, red],

  The certain icon of the second display mode is an icon including an area [for example, an area inside an edge line] displayed in the certain mode [for example, red],

When an effect in which a certain icon of the first display mode is changed during a period in which the effect icon is not displayed, when the display mode of the certain icon changes to the second display mode [for example, FIG. 22 (D ′)],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was explained.

  According to this gaming table, a certain icon in the second display mode may be displayed even when the change effect using the effect icon is not performed, and the interest of the player may be improved.

  Here, the certain aspect may be only one of the color, the pattern, the size, the shape, the type of the character, all or a part of the character, or a combination of all of them. Or some combination.

The display means may be a means for displaying a certain icon without fail. Further, the display means may be means for displaying an effect icon without fail. Further, when an effect of changing a certain icon of the first display mode is performed by the effect icon of the fourth display mode, the display mode of the certain icon always changes to the second display mode. Is also good. Further, when an effect in which a certain icon of the first display mode is changed during a period in which the effect icon is not displayed, the display mode of the certain icon always changes to the second display mode. Is also good.
Also,

"The effect icon is an icon that may be displayed in a third display mode [for example, a display mode of a hall wearing a blue kimono],

The certain icon is an icon that may be displayed in a default display mode [for example, a white display mode],
The default display mode is a display mode different from the first display mode,
The default display mode is a display mode different from the second display mode,

  The default display mode is a display mode that is most likely to be displayed among all display modes of the certain icon,

  When an effect of changing a certain icon of the default display mode is performed by the effect icon of the third display mode, the display mode of the certain icon is changed to the first display mode by a first frequency [for example, , A-th frequency (A-th probability)] [for example, FIGS. 20A to 20H],

When an effect of changing a certain icon of the default display mode is performed by the effect icon of the third display mode, the display mode of the certain icon is changed to the second display mode by a second frequency [for example, , B-th frequency (B-th probability)] [for example, FIG. 20 (A) to FIG. 20 (H)],
The first frequency is higher than the second frequency,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.
The frequency mentioned here may be a probability (the same applies hereinafter).
In the above description,

[Display means [for example, only the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a plurality of combinations (including all) of the first to third decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208N, the second display device] 208S etc.],

  The display means is a means in which a certain icon [for example, a change icon h0 or a hold icon h11 to h14] may be displayed,

  The certain icon is an icon related to symbol variation display, and the certain icon is an icon that may be displayed in a first display mode [for example, a blue display mode],

  The certain icon is an icon that may be displayed in a second display mode [for example, a red display mode],

When a certain icon of the second display mode [for example, red display mode] is displayed, a certain icon of the first display mode [for example, blue display mode] is displayed Finally, the jackpot symbol mode is more likely to be finally displayed [e.g., the jackpot expectation is higher],
The display means is a means in which an effect icon may be displayed,

  The effect icon is an icon different from the certain icon [for example, an icon of the navigation character YM or the like],

  The effect icon is an icon that may be displayed in a third display mode [for example, a display mode of a hall wearing a blue kimono].

The effect icon is an icon that may be displayed in a fourth display mode [for example, a display mode of a lord wearing a red kimono].
The third display mode and the fourth display mode are different display modes,

  When the effect of changing the certain icon of the first display mode is performed by the effect icon of the fourth display mode, when the display mode of the certain icon changes to the second display mode [for example, FIG. 25 (N)].

  The effect icon of the fourth display mode is an icon including an area [for example, a kimono area] displayed in a certain mode [for example, red],

  The certain icon of the second display mode is an icon including an area [for example, an area inside an edge line] displayed in the certain mode [for example, red],

When the effect of changing the certain icon of the first display mode is performed by the effect icon of the third display mode, when the display mode of the certain icon changes to the second display mode [for example, FIG. 20 (f1)],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was explained.

  According to this gaming table, a certain icon of the second display mode may be displayed even from the change effect by the effect icon of the third display mode, so that the interest of the player can be improved. There is.

  In addition, a certain aspect may be only one of a color, a pattern, a size, a shape, a type of a character, all or a part of a character, or a combination of all of them, Some combinations may be used.

The display means may be a means for displaying a certain icon without fail. Further, the display means may be means for displaying an effect icon without fail. Further, when an effect of changing a certain icon of the first display mode is performed by the effect icon of the fourth display mode, the display mode of the certain icon always changes to the second display mode. Is also good. Further, when an effect of changing a certain icon of the first display mode is performed by the effect icon of the third display mode, the display mode of the certain icon always changes to the second display mode. Is also good.
Also,

“The certain icon is an icon that may be displayed in a default display mode [for example, a white display mode],
The default display mode is a display mode different from the first display mode,

  The default display mode is a display mode different from the second display mode, and the default display mode is a display that is most likely to be displayed among all the display modes of the certain icon. An embodiment,

  When an effect of changing a certain icon of the default display mode is performed by the effect icon of the third display mode, the display mode of the certain icon is changed to the first display mode by a first frequency [for example, , A-th frequency (A-th probability)] [for example, FIGS. 20A to 20H],

When an effect of changing a certain icon of the default display mode is performed by the effect icon of the third display mode, the display mode of the certain icon is changed to the second display mode by a second frequency [for example, , B-th frequency (B-th probability)] [for example, FIG. 20 (A) to FIG. 20 (H)],
The first frequency is higher than the second frequency,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.
Also,
"The certain icon is an icon that may be displayed in a fifth display mode,

  When a certain icon of the fifth display mode [for example, a gold display mode] is displayed, a certain icon of the second display mode [for example, a red display mode] is displayed Finally, the jackpot symbol mode is more likely to be finally displayed [e.g., the jackpot expectation is higher],

  When the effect of changing the certain icon of the default display mode is performed by the effect icon of the fourth display mode, the display mode of the certain icon is changed to the first display mode by a third frequency [for example, , C-th frequency (C-th probability)] [for example, FIGS. 21 (a) to 21 (h)],

  When the effect of changing the certain icon of the default display mode is performed by the effect icon of the fourth display mode, the display mode of the certain icon is changed to the second display mode by a fourth frequency [for example, , D-th frequency (D-th probability)] [for example, FIGS. 21 (A) to 21 (H)],

When the effect of changing the certain icon of the default display mode is performed by the effect icon of the fourth display mode, the display mode of the certain icon is changed to the fifth display mode by a fifth frequency [for example, , E-th frequency (E-th probability)] [e.g., FIG.
The fifth frequency is higher than the third frequency,
The fourth frequency is higher than the fifth frequency,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.
Also,
"The third frequency is 0,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.
Also,
"The fourth frequency is higher than the second frequency,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.
Also,
"The first frequency is higher than the third frequency,
A gaming table characterized by the following. ] Was also explained.
Also,

“The certain icon is changed from the default display mode to the first display mode at a sixth frequency [for example, F-th frequency (F-th probability)] even if the effect icon is not displayed. Change [for example, FIGS. 22 (a) to 22 (e)],

  The certain icon changes from the default display mode to the second display mode at a seventh frequency [for example, a G-th frequency (G-th probability)] even when the effect icon is not displayed. [For example, FIGS. 22 (A) to 22 (E)],

The certain icon changes from the default display mode to the fifth display mode at an eighth frequency [for example, an H-th frequency (H-th probability)] even when the effect icon is not displayed. [For example, FIGS. 22A to 22E]
The seventh frequency is higher than the eighth frequency,
The sixth frequency is higher than the seventh frequency,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.
Also,

“The certain icon is an icon [for example, hold icons h11 to h14] that may be displayed plurally,

  In the effect of changing the certain icon by the effect icon, when a plurality of the certain icon is displayed, change the display mode of a certain icon to be changed,

The effect of changing the certain icon by the effect icon of the third display mode is more than the effect of changing the certain icon by the effect icon of the fourth display mode. It is easy to recognize which of the icons is a certain one of a plurality of displayed icons [for example, the wave and arrow shown in FIG. 11 (d) and FIG. 11 (l)],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

Here, the number of certain icons to be changed may be one or more.
Also,

“The display unit is a unit that may display a demonstration display (hereinafter, referred to as“ demo display ”).

  The demonstration display is displayed in a state where the number of holds is 0 and the special symbol display [for example, the symbol variation display on the first special figure display device 212 or the second special figure display device 214] is stopped. Display that may be

The effect icon of the third display mode may be displayed during the display period of the demonstration display,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, examples of the demonstration display include a symbol demonstration display in which a decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, and a moving image demonstration display in which an animation including a title of a game console is displayed. Note that a still image demonstration display may be displayed instead of the moving image demonstration display.

  Further, the difference between the third display mode and the fourth display mode is not a difference due to a different displayed dialogue, but the difference between the third display mode and the fourth display mode is It may not be the difference depending on the presence or absence.

The display means may be a means for always displaying a demonstration display (hereinafter, referred to as "demo display"). The demonstration display may be a display in which the number of suspensions is 0 and the special symbol display is always displayed in a stopped state. Further, the effect icon of the third display mode may be always displayed during the display period of the demonstration display.
Also,

"The display means displays a change effect display [for example, a treasure chest icon I1, a UFO icon UFI, a button hold icon, a meter display MW, MG icon, a giant panda, and a" navi character changed "by a grandfather character. Means that may be

  After the effect icon of the third display mode is displayed, the change effect display may be displayed,

  When the first change animation using the change effect display is performed during the display of the effect icon in the third display mode, the effect icon changes to the fourth display mode [for example, FIG. Fig. 3-1)-Fig. (A6-1), Fig. 76 (A-6-3-2)-Fig. 76 (A6-3-4a), Fig. 83 (C1-3-1)-Fig. (C 1-3-4), the meter effect shown in FIG. 91, FIG. 89 (C2-2-1) to FIG. 89 (C2-2-3)],

If the second change animation using the change effect display is performed while the effect icon of the third display mode is being displayed, the display mode of the effect icon does not change [see, for example, FIG. -1) to the same figure (A-3-2-2), FIG. 83 (C1-3-1) to FIG. 83 (C1-3-3b2)],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

The display means may be a means for always displaying a change effect display. Further, the change effect display may be always displayed after the effect icon of the third display mode is displayed.
Also,

`` During the display of the decorative pattern in one variation display, the effect of the effect icon of the third display mode, the display mode of the certain icon changes one or more times, during the display of the variation display, Depending on the effect of the effect icon of the fourth display mode, the display mode of the certain icon may change one or more times [for example, FIGS. 25A to 25P].
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.
Also,

[During the single display of the decorative pattern, the display mode of the certain icon may change a plurality of times due to the effect of the effect icon [for example, FIG. 23 (a) to FIG. 23 (p). ],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.
Also,

[During the display of one variation display of the decorative pattern, the display mode of the certain icon is successfully changed for the first time or the second time while the effect icon is displayed, and the variation display ends. There are cases (hereinafter referred to as “first case”) [for example, FIGS. 23 (a) to 23 (p)],

  In the state where the effect icon is displayed during the display of the one-time display of the decorative pattern, the change of the display mode of the certain icon fails for the first time and succeeds for the second time, and the change display is performed. In some cases, the processing is terminated (hereinafter, referred to as “second case”) [for example, FIGS. 24A to 24P],

  In the state where the effect icon is displayed during the display of the one-time variation display of the decorative pattern, the change of the display mode of the certain icon succeeds for the first time and fails for the second time, and the variation display is performed. In some cases, the processing is terminated (hereinafter, referred to as a “third case”) [for example, FIGS. 24A to 24P],

  In the case where the display icon is displayed while the decorative icon is being displayed once, the display mode of the certain icon fails to change for the first time or the second time, and the variable display ends. (Hereinafter, referred to as “fourth case”) [for example, FIGS. 23 (A) to 23 (P)],

  In the third case, the big hit symbol form is more likely to be finally displayed and determined than in the fourth case [for example, the big change is easily made in the variable display or the subsequent variable display],

  In the second case, it is easier to finally display the big hit symbol mode than in the third case [for example, it is easier to make a big hit in the variable display or the subsequent variable display],

In the first case, the jackpot symbol form is more likely to be finally determined and displayed than in the second case [for example, it is easier to make a big hit in the variable display or the subsequent variable display],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

The description of the gaming table here is that the display mode of the certain icon is changed only twice in a state where the effect icon is displayed during the display of the single variation display of the decorative symbol. This is a limitation on how easy it is to hit the jackpot.
Also,

The display mode of the certain icon changes one or more times in a state where the effect icon is displayed during the display of the single change display of the decorative symbol, and during the display of the change display, the effect icon is displayed. May be changed one or more times in a state where is not displayed [for example, FIG. 25 (a) to FIG. 25 (p)].
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.
Also,
"The certain aspect is a certain color [for example, red],

  The effect icon of the fourth display mode is an icon including a region [for example, a kimono region] displayed in the certain color,

The certain icon of the second display mode is an icon including a region (for example, a region inside an edge line) displayed in the certain color.
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

Here, in the effect icon of the fourth display mode, the area displayed in the certain color may be a part, or the entire area may be displayed in the certain color. Further, in the certain icon of the second display mode, the region displayed in the certain color may be a part, or the entire region may be displayed in the certain color.
Also,

“The effect icon is an icon that may be displayed over a continuous pattern variation display [eg, FIG. 77 (I1) to FIG. 77 (I12), an example shown in FIG. 30, etc.),
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

The effect icon may be an icon that is always displayed over a continuous symbol change display.
Also,

"The display means is a means in which a third change animation may be displayed,

  The third change animation is an animation for performing an effect of changing the display mode of the effect icon without the effect of another icon [for example, the treasure box icon I1 shown in FIG. 78 (U17) or the like]. ,

The third change animation is an animation in which an effect image [for example, a smoke image] of the certain aspect [for example, red] is displayed at least [for example, FIG. 79 (e2) to FIG. 79 (e3-2)]. ]
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

The display unit may be a unit that always displays the third change animation. Further, the third change animation may be an animation in which only the effect image of the certain mode is displayed, or an animation in which an image or the like is displayed in addition to the effect image of the certain mode. You may.
Also,

"The certain icon is an icon that may be displayed in a sixth display mode [for example, a green display mode],

A certain icon in the sixth display mode is changed by an effect icon [for example, an icon of the navigation character YM or the like] displayed in the fourth display mode [for example, a display style of a red kimono]. When the effect is performed, the display mode of the certain icon may change to the second display mode [for example, a red display mode] [for example, FIG. 21 (F)].
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

When an effect of changing an icon in the sixth display mode is performed by the effect icon displayed in the fourth display mode, the display mode of the certain icon is always changed to the second display mode. It may change.
Also,

"The display means is a means in which a fourth change animation may be displayed,

The fourth change animation is an animation for performing an effect of changing the display mode of the certain icon [for example, FIGS. 77 (I9) to (I11), and FIGS. 20 (C) to (F). 20 (C) to FIG. 20 (F) etc.]
The display unit is a unit that may display an invariant animation,

The invariant animation is an animation that performs an effect that does not change the display mode of the certain icon [for example, FIG. 77 (I-4-1) to FIG. (I-6), FIG. 20 (U) to FIG. Etc.]
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  The display means may be a means that always displays a fourth change animation. Further, the display means may be a means for displaying an invariable animation without fail.

Also, "the display means is a means in which a change icon [for example, a change icon h0] may be displayed,
The change icon is an icon related to a running pattern change display.
The certain icon is the change icon;
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.
The display means may be a means that always displays a change icon.
Also,

“The display unit is a unit that may display a hold icon [for example, hold icons h11 to h14],

The hold icon is an icon related to a symbol variation display to be started later,
The hold icon is an icon displayed corresponding to the number of holds,
The certain icon is the hold icon;
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.
The display means may be a means that always displays a hold icon.
Also,
"The gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100].
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.
In the above description,

[Display means [for example, only the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a plurality of combinations (including all) of the first to third decorative symbol display devices 208L to 208N, the second display device] 208S etc.],

  The display means is a means in which a change icon [for example, a change icon h0] may be displayed,

The display unit is a unit that may display a hold icon [for example, hold icons h11 to h14],
The change icon is an icon related to a running pattern change display.

The hold icon is an icon related to a symbol variation display to be started later,
The hold icon is an icon displayed corresponding to the number of holds,

  The change icon is an icon that may be displayed in a first display mode [for example, a blue display mode],

  The change icon is an icon that may be displayed in a second display mode [for example, a red display mode],

The case where the change icon of the second display mode [for example, red display mode] is displayed is higher than the case where the change icon of the first display mode [for example, blue display mode] is displayed. Finally, the jackpot symbol mode is likely to be confirmed and displayed [for example, the jackpot is highly expected],
The display means is a means in which an effect icon may be displayed,

The effect icon is an icon (for example, an icon of the navigation character YM or the like) different from the change icon,
The effect icon is an icon different from the hold icon,

  The effect icon is an icon that may be displayed in a fourth display mode [for example, a display style of a red kimono dressed in a kimono], and the first display is performed by the effect icon in the fourth display mode. When the effect of changing the changing icon of the mode is performed, there is a case where the display mode of the changing icon changes to the second display mode (for example, FIG. 25 (N)).

  The effect icon of the fourth display mode is an icon including an area [for example, a kimono area] displayed in a certain mode [for example, red],

  The change icon of the second display mode is an icon including an area [for example, an area inside an edge line] displayed in the certain mode [for example, red],

When an effect of changing the hold icon by the effect icon of the fourth display mode is performed, the display mode of the hold icon changes to a display mode including the area displayed in the certain mode [for example, FIG. 26 (f)],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was explained.

  According to this gaming table, after the change of the hold icon, the hold icon of the display mode including the area displayed in the certain mode may be displayed, and the interest of the player may be improved. .

  Here, the certain aspect may be only one of the color, the pattern, the size, the shape, the type of the character, all or a part of the character, or a combination of all of them. Or some combination.

The display means may be a means that always displays a change icon. Further, the display means may be a means that always displays a hold icon. Further, the display means may be means for displaying an effect icon without fail. Further, when an effect of changing the variable icon of the first display mode is performed by the effect icon of the fourth display mode, the display mode of the variable icon may necessarily change to the second display mode. . Further, when an effect of changing the hold icon by the effect icon of the fourth display mode is performed, even if the display mode of the hold icon always changes to the display mode including the area displayed in the certain mode. Good.
Also,

"The effect icon is an icon that may be displayed in a third display mode [for example, a display mode of a hall wearing a blue kimono],

The change icon is an icon that may be displayed in a default display mode [for example, a white display mode],
The default display mode is a display mode different from the first display mode,
The default display mode is a display mode different from the second display mode,

  The default display mode is a display mode that is most likely to be displayed among all display modes of the change icon,

  When an effect of changing the variable icon of the default display mode is performed by the effect icon of the third display mode, the display mode of the variable icon is changed to the first display mode by a first frequency [for example, A frequency (A-th probability)] [for example, FIG. 20 (a) to FIG. 20 (h)],

When an effect of changing the variable icon of the default display mode is performed by the effect icon of the third display mode, the display mode of the variable icon is changed to the second display mode by a second frequency [for example, B frequency (B-th probability)] [for example, FIG. 20 (A) to FIG. 20 (H)],
The first frequency is higher than the second frequency,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.
Also,
"The fluctuation icon is an icon that may be displayed in a fifth display mode,

  The change icon of the fifth display mode [for example, a gold display mode] is displayed more than the change icon of the second display mode [for example, a red display mode] is displayed. Finally, the jackpot symbol mode is likely to be confirmed and displayed [for example, the jackpot is highly expected],

  When an effect of changing the fluctuating icon of the default display mode is performed by the effect icon of the fourth display mode, the display mode of the fluctuating icon is changed to the first display mode by a third frequency [for example, C frequency (Cth probability)] [for example, FIGS. 21A to 21H],

  When an effect of changing the variable icon of the default display mode is performed by the effect icon of the fourth display mode, the display mode of the variable icon is changed to the second display mode by a fourth frequency [for example, D frequency (Dth probability)] [for example, FIGS. 21 (A) to 21 (H)],

When an effect of changing the fluctuating icon of the default display mode is performed by the effect icon of the fourth display mode, the display mode of the fluctuating icon is changed to the fifth display mode by a fifth frequency [for example, E frequency (E-th probability)] [e.g., FIG.
The fifth frequency is higher than the third frequency,
The fourth frequency is higher than the fifth frequency,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.
Also,
"The third frequency is 0,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.
Also,
"The fourth frequency is higher than the second frequency,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.
Also,
"The first frequency is higher than the third frequency,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.
Also,

“The change icon changes from the default display mode to the first display mode at a sixth frequency [for example, F-th frequency (F-th probability)] even if the effect icon is not displayed. [For example, FIGS. 22 (a) to 22 (e)],

  The fluctuating icon changes from the default display mode to the second display mode at a seventh frequency [eg, a G-th frequency (G-th probability)] even when the effect icon is not displayed. [For example, FIGS. 22 (A) to 22 (E)],

  The fluctuating icon changes from the default display mode to the fifth display mode at an eighth frequency [for example, an H-th frequency (H-th probability)] even when the effect icon is not displayed. [For example, FIGS. 22A to 22E],

The seventh frequency is higher than the eighth frequency, and the sixth frequency is higher than the seventh frequency.
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.
Also,

"The change icon is an icon [for example, hold icons h11 to h14] that may be displayed in a plurality,

  In the effect of changing the fluctuating icon by the effect icon, when a plurality of fluctuating icons are displayed, the display mode of the fluctuating icon to be changed is changed,

The effect of changing the fluctuating icon by the effect icon of the third display mode is better than the effect of changing the fluctuating icon by the effect icon of the fourth display mode. It is easy to recognize which of the plurality of displayed fluctuating icons is the fluctuating icon [for example, the wave and arrow shown in FIG.
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.
Also,

“The display unit is a unit that may display a demonstration display (hereinafter, referred to as“ demo display ”).

  The demonstration display is displayed in a state where the number of holds is 0 and the special symbol display [for example, the symbol variation display on the first special figure display device 212 or the second special figure display device 214] is stopped. Display that may be

The effect icon of the third display mode may be displayed during the display period of the demonstration display,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, examples of the demonstration display include a symbol demonstration display in which a decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, and a moving image demonstration display in which an animation including a title of a game console is displayed. Note that a still image demonstration display may be displayed instead of the moving image demonstration display.

  Further, the difference between the third display mode and the fourth display mode is not a difference due to a different displayed dialogue, but the difference between the third display mode and the fourth display mode is It may not be the difference depending on the presence or absence.

The display means may be a means for always displaying a demonstration display (hereinafter, referred to as "demo display"). The demonstration display may be a display in which the number of suspensions is 0 and the special symbol display is always displayed in a stopped state. Further, the effect icon of the third display mode may be always displayed during the display period of the demonstration display.
Also,

"The display means displays a change effect display [for example, a treasure chest icon I1, a UFO icon UFI, a button hold icon, a meter display MW, MG icon, a giant panda, and a" navi character changed "by a grandfather character. Means that may be

  After the effect icon of the third display mode is displayed, the change effect display may be displayed,

  When the first change animation using the change effect display is performed during the display of the effect icon in the third display mode, the effect icon changes to the fourth display mode [for example, FIG. Fig. 3-1)-Fig. (A6-1), Fig. 76 (A-6-3-2)-Fig. 76 (A6-3-4a), Fig. 83 (C1-3-1)-Fig. (C 1-3-4), the meter effect shown in FIG. 91, FIG. 89 (C2-2-1) to FIG. 89 (C2-2-3)],

If the second change animation using the change effect display is performed while the effect icon of the third display mode is being displayed, the display mode of the effect icon does not change [see, for example, FIG. -1) to the same figure (A-3-2-2), FIG. 83 (C1-3-1) to FIG. 83 (C1-3-3b2)],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

The display means may be a means for always displaying a change effect display. Further, the change effect display may be always displayed after the effect icon of the third display mode is displayed.
Also,

`` During the display of the decorative pattern in one variation display, the effect of the effect icon of the third display mode, the display mode of the variation icon changes one or more times, during the display of the variation display, Depending on the effect of the effect icon of the fourth display mode, the display mode of the changing icon may change one or more times [for example, FIGS. 25A to 25P].
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.
Also,

[During the single display of the decorative pattern, the display mode of the variable icon may change a plurality of times due to the effect by the effect icon [for example, FIGS. 23 (a) to 23 (p)]. ,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.
Also,

[In the case where the display icon of the decorative symbol is displayed once while the effect icon is displayed, the display mode of the variable icon is successfully changed for the first time or the second time, and the variable display ends. (Hereinafter, referred to as “first case”) [for example, FIGS. 23 (a) to 23 (p)],

  In the state in which the effect icon is displayed during the display of one variation display of the decorative pattern, the change of the display mode of the variation icon fails for the first time and succeeds for the second time, and the variation display ends. (Hereinafter, referred to as “second case”) [for example, FIG. 24 (a) to FIG. 24 (p)],

  In the state where the effect icon is displayed during the display of one variation display of the decorative pattern, the change of the display mode of the variation icon succeeds for the first time and fails for the second time, and the variation display ends. (Hereinafter referred to as “third case”) [for example, FIG. 24 (A) to FIG. 24 (P)],

  In the state where the effect icon is displayed during the display of one variation display of the decorative symbol, the first and second changes in the display mode of the variation icon fail, and the variation display ends ( Hereinafter, it will be referred to as a “fourth case”) (for example, FIGS. 23A to 23P),

  In the third case, the big hit symbol form is more likely to be finally displayed and determined than in the fourth case [for example, the big change is easily made in the variable display or the subsequent variable display],

  In the second case, it is easier to finally display the big hit symbol mode than in the third case [for example, it is easier to make a big hit in the variable display or the subsequent variable display],

In the first case, the jackpot symbol form is more likely to be finally determined and displayed than in the second case [for example, it is easier to make a big hit in the variable display or the subsequent variable display],
A gaming table characterized by the following. ] Was also explained.

The description of the gaming table here is based on the case where the change of the display mode of the fluctuating icon is performed only twice while the effect icon is displayed during the display of the fluctuating symbol once. It is a limitation on the ease of hitting the jackpot.
Also,

[During the display of a single decorative display, the display mode of the fluctuating icon changes one or more times in a state where the effect icon is displayed, and during the display of the fluctuating display, the effect icon is displayed. The display mode of the fluctuating icon may change one or more times in a state where it is not displayed [for example, FIGS. 25 (a) to 25 (p)],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.
Also,
"The certain aspect is a certain color [for example, red],

  The effect icon of the fourth display mode is an icon including a region [for example, a kimono region] displayed in the certain color,

The change icon of the second display mode is an icon including an area (for example, an area inside an edge line) displayed in the certain color.
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Here, in the effect icon of the fourth display mode, the area displayed in the certain color may be a part, or the entire area may be displayed in the certain color. Further, in the variable icon of the second display mode, the area displayed in the certain color may be a part, or the entire area may be displayed in the certain color.

Further, the certain mode may be a display mode using a certain character or a display mode using a certain type of picture.
Also,

“The effect icon is an icon that may be displayed over a continuous pattern variation display [eg, FIG. 77 (I1) to FIG. 77 (I12), an example shown in FIG. 30, etc.),
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

The effect icon may be an icon that is always displayed over a continuous symbol change display.
Also,

"The display means is a means in which a third change animation may be displayed,

  The third change animation is an animation for performing an effect of changing the display mode of the effect icon without the effect of another icon [for example, the treasure box icon I1 shown in FIG. 78 (U17) or the like]. ,

The third change animation is an animation in which an effect image [for example, a smoke image] of the certain aspect [for example, red] is displayed at least [for example, FIG. 79 (e2) to FIG. 79 (e3-2)]. ]
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

The display unit may be a unit that always displays the third change animation. Further, the third change animation may be an animation in which only the effect image of the certain mode is displayed, or an animation in which an image or the like is displayed in addition to the effect image of the certain mode. You may.
Also,

“The change icon is an icon that may be displayed in a sixth display mode [for example, a green display mode],

The effect of changing the fluctuating icon of the sixth display mode by the effect icon [for example, the icon of the navigation character YM or the like] displayed in the fourth display mode [for example, the display mode of a red kimono]. Is performed, the display mode of the changing icon may change to the second display mode [for example, a red display mode] (for example, FIG. 21 (F)).
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

In addition, when the effect of changing the variable icon of the sixth display mode is performed by the effect icon displayed in the fourth display mode, the display mode of the variable icon always changes to the second display mode. You may.
Also,

"The display means is a means in which a fourth change animation may be displayed,

The fourth change animation is an animation that performs an effect of changing the display mode of the change icon [for example, FIGS. 77 (i9) to (11), FIGS. 20 (c) to (f), 20 (C) to FIG. 20 (F) etc.]
The display unit is a unit that may display an invariant animation,

The invariant animation is an animation for performing an effect that does not change the display mode of the fluctuating icon [for example, FIG. 77 (I-4-1) to FIG. (I-6), FIG. 20 (U) to FIG. ]
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

The display means may be a means that always displays a fourth change animation. Further, the display means may be a means for displaying an invariable animation without fail.
Also,
"The gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100].
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Next, the icon change effect will be further described. The icon change effect referred to here changes an icon of a mini item displayed in the effect icon display area DIS, a notice icon, a mini game icon, and an icon of an icon change notice in addition to the hold icon and the change icon. It is a production.

  FIG. 31 is a timing chart for explaining the flow of the variable display of the decorative symbols executed in the present embodiment, and FIG. 31A shows the flow of the variable display of the decorative symbols that are lost without entering the reach state. FIG. 2B is a timing chart for explaining a flow of a variable display of a decorative symbol which becomes a big hit or a loss after the reach state is reached.

  FIG. 31 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol is fixedly stopped after the decorative symbol is started to be displayed (the start of the variation), the first stop of the decorative symbol, the second stop of the decorative symbol, and the third stop of the decorative symbol. Shows the flow. In the following description, the stop order of the decorative symbols is, in principle, the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, but is not limited thereto. In addition, the first stop and the second stop may be performed at the same time depending on the advance notice (the advance notice of the change and the advance notice), the production of the mini game, the pseudo-run, or the like, or the first stop may be performed. , The second stop and the third stop may be performed simultaneously. Here, the period from the start of the change to the first stop, the period from the first stop to the second stop, the period from the second stop to the third stop, and the period from the third stop to the final stop are respectively referred to as "( 11) "in some cases. In the following description, with respect to the effect performed in the effect example in which the game does not reach the reach state and is lost, “FIG. XX (11) -1”, “FIG. XX (11) -2”,. Etc. may be used, and examples with these branch numbers can be replaced with each other. In addition, in the timing chart shown in FIG. 31A, an effect that can be combined as various effects may be able to be performed in a period indicated by “(11)” (for example, a fake notice). In addition, during the period from the second stop to the third stop, or during the period from the third stop to the final stop, the pseudo-rendition production and announcement of a chance (stop ahead notice) by stopping the same color (same kind) design Sometimes you can. This is a concept that can be applied to each effect example of the embodiment described above.

  FIG. 31 (b) shows that, after the start of the change display of the decorative symbol (the start of the change), the formation of the reach state, the transition to the super reach (SP reach), and the derivation of the result of the reach effect, the decorative symbol is lost or a big hit. This shows the flow from the final stop in the manner described above until the big hit game ends. Here, the period from the start of the fluctuation to the formation of the reach state is represented by the period of “(1)”, and the period from the formation of the reach state to the shift to the SP reach is represented by the period of “(2)”. The period from the shift to SP reach until the result of the reach effect is derived is represented by the period of “(3)”, and the period from the result of the reach effect to the stop of the determination is “(4)”. In some cases, the period from the final stop to the end of the big hit game can be represented by the period of “(5)”. In the following description, as for the effects performed in the effect example in which the big hit or the loss occurs after the reach state is reached, “FIG. XX (2) -1”, “FIG. XX (2) -2”, In some cases, “FIG. XX (3) -1”, “FIG. XX (3) -2”,... May be used, and examples with these branch numbers can be interchanged. In the description of the present embodiment, in the period of “(1)”, various notices including mini-games, pre-reading notices and the like, and effects such as pseudo-runs may be performed. In the period of “(2)”, , A normal reach or a preview by displaying a cut-in image, a group preview, or the like may be performed. During the period of “(3)”, a chance increase notification during SP reach or a preview by displaying a cut-in image is performed. In the period of “(4)”, swing fluctuation, resurrection jackpot effect, wipe display, etc. may be performed. In the period of “(5)”, an effect during a jackpot game is performed. There is a case where a certainty change notification or a reservation consecutive villa notification during the game is performed. In the above-described embodiment and the embodiments described below, each executed notice or effect may be configured to be performed in a period other than the period in which the notice or effect is executed. In addition, it may be configured such that these notices and effects may be performed in combination, and in this case, even if one notice (effect) may overlap with the other notice (effect), Good. Further, in the embodiments described so far and the embodiments described below, portions described by the same branch numbers can be appropriately replaced.

  FIG. 32 to FIG. 37 are views showing step by step the change effects centering on the first decorative symbol display device 208L of the pachinko machine 100 applicable to the present embodiment. The change effects shown in FIGS. 32 to 37 are effects performed by one pachinko machine 100. The pachinko machines 100 capable of executing the change effects shown in FIGS. Direction is also possible. Further, in FIGS. 32 to 37, the second first decorative symbol display device 208LM and the third first decorative symbol display device 208LN are also provided, but these are omitted from the drawings, but are shown in FIGS. 32 to 37. The effect example may be an effect example in the pachinko machine 100 in which the second first decorative symbol display device 208LM and the third first decorative symbol display device 208LN are not provided. 32 to 37, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the general figure display device 210, the first special figure reservation lamp 218, the second special figure reservation lamp 220, and the general figure reservation Illustration of the lamp 216 is omitted. Further, a transparent light guide plate IL or a POV display may be arranged on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

  The reference numerals shown in FIGS. 32 to 37 represent common components when the same reference numerals are used. Further, even when different codes are used, there are cases where the technical ideas are common. That is, as the technical idea, the technical idea shown in FIGS. 14 to 31 and the technical idea shown in other drawings can be applied to the technical ideas shown in FIGS. Conversely, the technical ideas shown in FIGS. 32 to 37 can be applied to the technical ideas shown in FIGS. 14 to 31 and the technical ideas shown in other drawings. At this time, components having the same reference numerals may be treated as the same component, and may be replaced.

  The description in FIGS. 31 to 37 can be applied to any of the effect examples in this specification, but is preferably applied to the effect examples described with reference to FIGS. 14 to 31.

  FIG. 32 is a diagram illustrating an example in which the ninja navigation character NJ in the default display mode is performing an action on the hold icon.

  First, in FIG. 32A, in the first decorative symbol display device 208 </ b> L, the variable display of the decorative symbol is finished, and the combination of the lost decorative symbols (“decoration 2” − “decoration 5” − “decoration 7”) is displayed. Stopped and displayed. The second decorative symbol is not displayed at the upper left of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. Α (a), but may be displayed.

  Further, a holding frame UI is displayed in the effect display area 208d of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. The hold frame UI has a hold icon display area HIS, a change icon display area CIS, and an effect icon display area DIS. The variable icon display area CIS is provided at the center, and the pedestal hs0 is arranged in the variable icon display area CIS. The reserved icon display area HIS is provided on the left side of the variable icon display area CIS, and four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) are arranged on the left base icon bI1. The effect icon display area DIS is provided on the right side of the variable icon display area CIS, and various displays of icons, mini items, and the like are performed on the right base icon bIr. In FIG. Character NJ is displayed. The navigation character is also a kind of display of the effect icon, and is also a kind of the icon change notice display. The navigation character is also a display for giving a notice that there is a case where any of the icons may change, and some of the icons may actually change due to the animation using the navigation character.

  The ninja navigation character NJ shown in FIG. 32 (a) is displayed in a default display mode, and may be displayed across a plurality of continuous symbol change displays. A plurality of types of display modes are prepared for the ninja navigation character NJ, and the default display mode is a display mode that is most likely to be displayed among all display modes. Here, the default display mode is a white display mode, and may be hereinafter referred to as a white display mode. In addition, the plurality of types of display modes include a white or non-pattern mode (A mode) and a blue or diagonal pattern mode (B mode) as modes that represent the player's advantage and jackpot expectation. ), Green or rhombic pattern (C mode), red or lattice pattern (D mode), gold or vertical line pattern (E mode), iridescent or horizontal pattern ( F mode) is prepared. Among these aspects, the aspect in which the player's advantage or jackpot expectation is the lowest is the A mode, the B mode, the C mode, the D mode, and the E mode. As the order increases, the F-th mode is the mode in which the player's advantage and the jackpot expectation are the highest. Note that the player's advantage here means that the player is likely to be in an advantageous control state (for example, a probable change state and / or a time saving state), that a premiere effect is easily started, or that a big hit is determined. May be easily started. In addition, it is easy to execute an effect that is indirectly connected to the jackpot without directly connecting to the jackpot. For example, an SP reach production with a high jackpot reliability may be started, or another announcement with a high jackpot reliability may easily appear. Further, in addition to the color and the pattern, the player's advantage and the expectation of a big hit may be represented by a difference in size or number.

  Further, the display mode of the ninja navigation character NJ may change while the display is continued. Details of this point will be described later.

  Further, in FIG. 32A, the number of reservations in the special figure 1 and the number of reservations in the special figure 2 are 0, and neither the reservation icon nor the change icon is displayed. Therefore, the white ninja navigator character NJ may be displayed even during the period in which the decorative pattern is not fluctuated, and may be displayed even when the number of holds is zero. is there. It should be noted that even if the ninja navigation character NJ has another display mode (for example, a red display mode), it may be displayed during a period in which the decorative pattern is not changed, or the number of holds may be reduced. It may be displayed in a period of 0. Alternatively, only the white ninja navigation character NJ, which is the default display mode, may be displayed in a period in which the number of holds is zero. In this case, during the period in which the number of suspensions is one or more and the decorative design is not displayed in a variable manner (the period of the stop display or the fixed display), the ninja navigation character NJ of a display mode other than the default display mode is used. May also be displayed. In addition, during the period in which the decorative design is not displayed in a variable manner, the display may be limited to the white ninja navigation character NJ, which is the default display mode, regardless of the number of holds.

  Further, a second reserved number display is displayed at the upper right of the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 32 (0) -1, and both the reserved number of the special figure 1 and the reserved number of the special figure 2 are 0. It is reported that there is.

  In FIG. 32 (11) -1, there is one ball in the special figure 1 starting port 230, and the number of reserves in the special figure 1 increases by one. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 32 (11) -1, the increase animation of the reserved icon is completed, and the first reserved icon h11 in the default (white) display mode is displayed for a moment. In the second hold number display at the upper right, the hold number of the special figure 1 becomes 1 for a moment. In FIG. 32 (11) -2, the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, and the variation display of the decoration symbol is started on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. When the variation display of the decorative symbol is started from the state where the number of reservations is 0, a message display of "Hello!" Is added to the ninja navigation character NJ, and the start of the variation is blessed. Further, in FIG. 32 (11) -2, the moving animation of the hold icon of the special figure 1 has been completed, and the icon that was the first hold icon h11 displayed first for a moment is displayed in the variable icon display area CIS. It is displayed as a change icon h0. The change icon h0 is also in the default (white) display mode.

  In FIG. 32 (11) -3, there is one ball in the special figure 1 starting port 230 again, and the reserved number of the special figure 1 increases by one. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 32 (11) -3, the increase animation of the reserved icon is completed, and the first reserved icon h11 is displayed. In the second reserved number display at the upper right, the reserved number of the special figure 1 is 1. During the display of the variation display of the decorative symbol started in FIG. 32 (11) -2, the ball entering the special figure 1 starting port 230 continuously occurs, and the first decorative symbol display illustrated in FIG. 32 (11) -4. In the device 208L, the increase animation of the holding icon is completed, four holding icons (first holding icon h11 to fourth holding icon h14) are displayed, and in the second holding number display on the upper right, the holding number of the special figure 1 is displayed. It is four. Further, the ninja navigation character NJ is provided with a message display of "HOLD MAX". All of the four holding icons are holding icons in a default (white) display mode.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 32 (11) -5, the first stop of the decorative symbol to be variably displayed is performed, and "decoration 7" is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a. That is, the “decoration 7” starts to fluctuate. In the effect icon display area DIS, a white ninja navigation character NJ is continuously displayed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 32 (11) -6, a second stop of the decorative symbol to be variably displayed is performed, and in the right symbol display area 208c, "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped, and the reach state is set. In the following FIG. (11) -7 which is not formed, the third stop is performed, and the "decoration 7"-"decoration 2"-"decoration 2", which is a combination of the lost decorative patterns, fluctuates. Then, in FIG. 32 (11) -8, the fixed display of the combination of the decoration patterns of “decoration 7”-“decoration 2”-“decoration 2” is performed.

  In the following FIG. 32 (11) -1, the reservation of the special figure 1 is exhausted, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L has started to display the variation of the decorative symbol, and the moving animation of the reserved icon of the special figure 1 is completed. are doing. As a result, three reserved icons of a first reserved icon h11, a second reserved icon h12, and a third reserved icon h13 are displayed in the reserved icon display area HIS, and the first reserved icon h11 is displayed in the variable icon display area CIS. The icon that was the hold icon h11 is displayed as the change icon h0. Both the hold icons h11 to h13 and the change icon h0 are in the default (white) display mode. In the upper right second reserved number display, it is notified that the reserved number of Toku-zu 1 is 3 and the reserved number of Toku-zu 2 is 0. Further, in the effect icon display area DIS, a white ninja navigator character NJ is continuously displayed, and this navigator character is displayed across a continuous symbol variation display. The ninja navigator character NJ has been displayed in the initial posture facing the front, but the ninja navigator character NJ may be continuously displayed while performing a standby animation (for example, an animation that repeats a certain motion).

  In the subsequent FIG. 32 (11) -2, a message display “Attention to me” is added to the ninja navigation character NJ, and an icon change effect is started. In other words, the start timing of the icon change effect is after the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol, but may be at the same time as the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol. It can also be said that after the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol and before the first stop of the variable display of the decorative symbol, or after the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol and before the start of the reach effect. . This icon change effect is an animation using the white ninja navigator character NJ. In the next FIG. 32 (11) -3, the white ninja navigator character NJ previously displayed in the effect icon display area DIS However, it moves to the upper left corner, and in the following FIG. (11) -4, the white ninja navigation character NJ is throwing three shurikens toward the effect display area 208d. The mode of the shuriken is different from the display mode of the ninja navigator character NJ, but may be the same mode (white here). In FIG. 32 (11) -5, the three shurikens reach the reserved icon display area HIS in the effect display area 208d, and the reserved icon display area HIS is covered by the flash effect image EHI. As a result, the three reserved icons h11 to h13 are also covered by the white flash effect image EHI, and the three reserved icons h11 to h13 are more difficult to recognize than before being covered. Note that the three hold icons h11 to h13 may be partially covered with the effect image EHI, or may be entirely covered with the effect image EHI. The mode of the flash effect image EHI may be the same as the display mode of the ninja navigation character NJ (here, white). Further, the flash effect image EHI covers the variable icon display area CIS in addition to the hold icon display area HIS, and the variable icon h0 may not be easily recognized. Alternatively, the flash effect image EHI may cover only one of the three hold icons h11 to h13 and the change icon h0. In FIG. 32 (11) -6, the effect image EHI has disappeared, but in this example, there is no change in the display mode of any of the three holding icons h11 to h13, and the three holding icons h11 do not change. To h13 all remain in the default (white) display mode. As described above, even when the icon is covered with the effect image EHI, the icon may not only change but may not change. Of the icon change animations, an animation in which the display mode of the icon changes can be classified as a success animation, and an animation in which the display mode of the icon does not change can be classified as a failure animation. However, when the icon is covered by the effect image EHI, the display mode of the covered icon may always be changed. In addition, even if the shuriken flies to a completely misplaced place, disappears halfway, or reaches the effect display area 208d, the effect image EHI may not be generated. Also becomes a failure animation. However, the icon may change even if it is not covered by the effect image EHI, and if the icon changes, the animation becomes a successful animation.

  In FIG. 32 (11) -7, the white ninja navigator character NJ that has been moved to the upper left corner has returned to the effect icon display area DIS, and is called “Smile” on the right base icon bIr. A display of a failure message has been added. The icon change effect (animation using the white ninja navigator character NJ) is an effect performed in the period from FIG. 32 (11) -2 to FIG. 32 (11) -7, but moves from the effect icon display area DIS. (11) -3 to (11) -6 in FIG. 11), and it may be considered that the effect is performed from when the shuriken is thrown until the effect image EHI disappears (see FIG. 11). (11) -4 to (11) -6) (just before (11) -6), it may be regarded as an effect performed only while the effect image EHI is displayed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 32 (11) -8, a first stop of the decorative symbol to be variably displayed is performed, and “decoration 7” is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a. 11) In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in -6, the second stop is performed, and in the right symbol display area 208c, "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped. In (11) -7, the third stop is performed, and the "decoration 7"-"decoration 2"-"decoration 2", which is a combination of the lost decorative patterns, fluctuates. Then, in FIG. 32 (11) -11, the final display of the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 7”-“decoration 2”-“decoration 2” is performed.

  In the following FIG. 32 (1) -1, the reservation of the special figure 1 is exhausted, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L starts to change the display of the decorative symbol again. Completed. As a result, the two reserved icons, the first reserved icon h11 and the second reserved icon h12, are displayed in the reserved icon display area HIS, and the first reserved icon h11 is displayed in the variable icon display area CIS. Is displayed as the change icon h0. Both the hold icons h11 and h12 and the change icon h0 are in the default (white) display mode. In the upper right second reserved number display, it is notified that the reserved number of Toku-zu 1 is 2 and the reserved number of Toku-zu 2 is 0. Further, in the effect icon display area DIS, a white ninja navigation character NJ is still displayed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 32 (1) -2, a first stop of the decorative symbol to be variably displayed is performed, and in the left symbol display area 208a, "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in 1) -3, the second stop is performed, and in the right symbol display area 208c, “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped, and the reach state is formed. The ninja navigation character NJ shown in FIG. 32 (2) -1 has a message display of "reach" added thereto.

  However, as shown in FIG. 32 (4) -1, in the third stop, not “decoration 2” but “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped, and “decoration 2” − “decoration 3” which is a combination of the lost decorative patterns. -“Decoration 2” fluctuates. Then, in FIG. 32 (4) -2, the fixed display of the decoration pattern combination of "decoration 2"-"decoration 3"-"decoration 2" is performed.

  Here, as with the ninja navigation character NJ, a plurality of types of display modes are prepared for the hold icon, and the default (white) display mode is most likely to be displayed among all the display modes. It is a display mode. Further, as a plurality of types of display modes of the hold icon, as a display mode of the pre-reading notice, a white or non-pattern mode (A mode), a blue or diagonal pattern mode (B mode), a green or diamond pattern Mode (C mode), red or lattice pattern mode (D mode), gold or vertical line pattern mode (E mode), rainbow or horizontal line pattern mode (F mode). It is prepared. Among these aspects, the aspect with the lowest expectation (reliability) of the jackpot is the A mode, and the B mode, the C mode, the D mode, and the E mode increase in order. Then, the F-th mode becomes a mode in which the jackpot expectation degree is the highest (for example, a jackpot-determined mode).

  (11) -6 'shown at the right end of FIG. 32 is another example different from (11) -6 in FIG. 32 after the effect image EHI shown in (11) -5 has disappeared. Only the first hold icon h11 of the three hold icons h11 to h13 has changed from the default (white) display mode to a blue display mode. That is, the example shown in FIG. 32 (11) -6 'is an example of a successful animation, but has a lower jackpot expectation (reliability) than in the case of changing to a red display mode.

  (11) -6 '' shown at the right end of FIG. 32 and (11) -6 after the effect image EHI shown in (11) -5 disappears. -6 ') is another example, and among the three holding icons h11 to h13, only the first holding icon h11 changes from the default (white) display mode to the red display mode. That is, the example shown in FIG. 32 (11) -6 ″ is also an example of a successful animation, and the big hit is expected more than when the display mode is changed to a blue display mode ((11) -6 ′ in FIG. 32). Degree (reliability) is high, but not 100%.

  As described above, in the icon change effect which is an animation using the ninja navigation character NJ in the default display mode, the icon change may succeed or may fail. Note that the icon change effect that is an animation using the blue (the B-th mode) ninja navigator character NJ is more effective than the icon change effect that is an animation using the white (the A-th mode) ninja navigator character NJ. In the icon change effect which is an animation using the green (the C-th mode) ninja navigation character NJ, the blue (the B-th mode) ninja navigation character NJ is changed. The probability of succeeding in changing the icon is higher than in the icon change effect that is the animation used.

  Similarly, a plurality of types of display modes are prepared for the change icon h0, which are the same as the modes A to E. Also in the display mode of the change icon h0, the default (white) display mode is the display mode that is most likely to be displayed among all the display modes. Further, each display mode is a display mode of a notice (so-called normal notice) regarding a big hit in the currently performed variable display, and represents an expectation (reliability) of the big hit. That is, the mode in which the jackpot expectation (reliability) is the lowest is the mode A, and increases in the order of the mode B, the mode C, the mode D, and the mode E. The mode of F is the mode in which the expectation degree of the jackpot is the highest (for example, the jackpot determination mode).

  FIG. 33 is a diagram illustrating an example in which a red ninja navigation character NJ is performing an action on a hold icon.

  Hereinafter, differences from the example illustrated in FIG. 32 will be mainly described, and redundant description may be omitted.

  33 (0) -1 to (11) -3 in the second column from the left in FIG. 33 (0) -1 to (11) in the second column from the left in FIG. -3, and all three hold icons h11 to h13 are in the default (white) display mode, and the fluctuating icon h0 is also in the default (white) display mode. In addition, in FIG. 33 (11) -2, a message display of “attention to me” is added to the white ninja navigation character NJ, and an icon change effect is started. In the next FIG. Ninja navigation character NJ has moved to the upper left corner.

  In FIG. 33 (11) -4, at least a part of the white ninja navigator character NJ that has moved to the upper left is covered with the effect image EIH, and the navigator character is more difficult to recognize than before being covered. The navigation character may be partially covered by the effect image EIH, or may be entirely covered by the effect image EIH. In FIG. 33 (11) -5, the effect image EIH disappears, and the ninja navigation character NJ, which had been in a white display mode before being covered with the effect image EIH, has changed to a red display mode. The mode of the effect image EIH is different from the display mode of the navigation character NJ after the change, but may be the same mode (here, red).

  In the following FIG. 33 (11) -6, the red ninja navigation character NJ is throwing three shurikens toward the effect display area 208d. The mode of the shuriken may be the same as the display mode of the ninja navigation character NJ (here, red). In FIG. 33 (11) -7, the three shurikens reach the reserved icon display area HIS in the effect display area 208d, and the reserved icon display area HIS is covered by the flash effect image EHI. As a result, the three reserved icons h11 to h13 are also covered by the white flash effect image EHI, and the three reserved icons h11 to h13 are more difficult to recognize than before being covered. Note that the three hold icons h11 to h13 may be partially covered with the effect image EHI, or may be entirely covered with the effect image EHI. The mode of the flash effect image EHI is different from the display mode of the ninja navigation character NJ, but may be the same mode (here, red). Further, the flash effect image EHI covers the variable icon display area CIS in addition to the hold icon display area HIS, and the variable icon h0 may not be easily recognized. Alternatively, the flash effect image EHI may cover only one of the three hold icons h11 to h13 and the change icon h0. In FIG. 33 (11) -8, the effect image EHI disappears, and only the first holding icon h11 of the three holding icons h11 to h13 has changed from the default (white) display mode to the red display mode. . That is, the animation using the red ninja navigation character NJ is a successful animation. The animation using the red ninja navigation character NJ is a successful animation that always changes one or more of the pending icon and the change icon. Here, the mode of change (the mode after the change) may be the same as that of the navigation character NJ, that is, may be predetermined in red, or may not be predetermined until the mode after the change. However, it is changed to a mode in which the jackpot reliability increases. Therefore, the rainbow color may be changed to a jackpot determined rainbow color mode. In the animation using the red ninja navigator character NJ, the mode may always be changed to the same mode as the mode of the effect image EHI covering the icon. It should be noted that an animation using the red ninja navigation character NJ may be provided as a failure animation (the icon mode does not change).

  In FIG. 33 (11) -9, the red ninja navigator character NJ that has moved to the upper left corner has returned to the effect icon display area DIS. Is displayed. In this example, a change effect of the navigation character is also performed in the icon change effect. Note that the icon change effect and the change effect of the navigation character can be considered separately. In this case, the change effect of the navigation character is as shown in FIGS. 33 (11) -3 to (11) -5. The icon change effects are shown in FIGS. 33 (11) -6 to (11) -9. Further, the change effect of the navigation character may be performed in the effect icon display area DIS, or conversely, may not be performed in the effect icon display area DIS.

  FIG. 33 (11) -10 to FIG. 33 (11) -13 show that the ninja navigation character NJ has a red display mode and that the first hold icon h11 has a red display mode. Except for this, it is the same as FIG. 32 (11) -8 to FIG. 32 (11) -11 described above, and is a combination of a lost decorative pattern “decoration 7” − “decoration 2” − “decoration 2” Is confirmed and displayed.

  In the subsequent FIG. 33 (1) -1, the reservation of the special figure 1 is exhausted, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L starts to change the display of the decorative symbol again. Completed. As a result, two reserved icons, a first reserved icon h11 and a second reserved icon h12, are displayed in the reserved icon display area HIS, and a red first reserved icon h11 has been displayed in the variable icon display area CIS. Is displayed as a change icon h0. FIG. 33 (1) -1 shows a red fluctuation icon h0 which is larger than the fluctuation icon h0 in the default display mode shown in FIG. 32 (1) -1. , Larger than the hold icon. Note that the two hold icons h11 and h12 are in a default (white) display mode. The red ninja navigation character NJ is still displayed in the effect icon display area DIS.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 33 (1) -2, a first stop of the decorative symbol to be variably displayed is performed, and "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in 11) -3, the second stop is performed, and in the right symbol display area 208c, “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped, and the reach state is formed. The red ninja navigation character NJ shown in FIG. 32 (2) -1 is not accompanied by a message display of "reach" but by a message display of red "super heat".

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 33 (2) -2, the Sabohani group notice is started, and at least a part of the red ninja navigation character NJ displayed in the effect icon display area DIS is displayed. , Sabohani are overlapping. It should be noted that the navigation character may not overlap with the Sabohani, but may overlap at least a part of the Sabohani. Also, at least a part of the message display of "super heat" may be overlapped with Savohani, and conversely, at least a part of the message display of "super heat" may overlap with the message display of "super heat". In the following FIG. 33 (2) -3, a red "Now SP" message display is added to the red ninja navigator character NJ, and it is informed that the game has developed to super reach. Further, when the Sabohani group notice is started, the display of the decorative symbol is reduced and displayed below the second reserved number display. In this example, the holding icon, the fluctuating icon, and the navigation character remain without disappearing even if the Sabohani group notice is started. At the same time, the display of the hold icon disappears, and the change icon h0 may also disappear along with the pedestal hs0. The navigation character may also disappear. Further, even if the hold icon or the like disappears, only the navigation character may be continuously displayed.

  Subsequently, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 33 (3) -1, a screen is displayed in which the main character Yoshimune and the enemy swordsman confront each other in a super reach (swordsman reach). In addition, a message display “Swordsman Reach” is added to the red ninja navigation character NJ. Note that at least a part of the enemy swordsman overlaps with the red ninja navigation character NJ, but at least a part of the navigator character NJ may overlap with the enemy swordsman.

  As shown in FIG. 33 (3) -2, a deca button image 136ab, which is a large image imitating the chance button 136, is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L as a result of the development of the super reach. The deca-button image 136ab overlaps all of the confronting Yoshimune and the swordsman displayed as the super-reach effect display, and the Yoshimune and the swordsman are no longer visible. The deca-button image 136ab also overlaps at least a part of the red ninja navigator character NJ, and the navigator character is more difficult to visually recognize than before the overlap. Furthermore, the deca-button image 136ab also overlaps at least a part of the red variation icon h0, and the variation icon h0 is more difficult to visually recognize than before the overlap. In addition, in the deca-button image 136ab, the character of “push” that promotes the operation is displayed in a large size according to the size of the deca-button image 136ab. Further, instead of displaying the message of "Swordsman Reach", a message display of "Deca button" is added to the red ninja navigation character NJ.

  In FIG. 33 (3) -3, the chance button 136 is operated. Then, as shown in FIG. 33 (3) -4, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the deck button image 136ab disappears, and the display is switched to the strong cut-in image CIs. The strong cut-in image CIs also overlaps at least a part of the red ninja navigation character NJ, and the navigation character NJ is more difficult to visually recognize than before the overlap. Further, the strong cut-in image CIs also overlaps at least a part of the red variation icon h0, and the variation icon h0 is more difficult to visually recognize than before the overlap. In addition, the red ninja navigation character NJ has a message display of “strong cut-in” instead of the message display of “deca button”, but a message display of “swordsman reach” has been added again. Is also good.

  Usually, an operation valid period for accepting the operation of the chance button 136 is provided, and a response effect (here, the display of the strong cut-in image CIs is provided only when the chance button 136 is operated within the operation valid period). ) May be performed, and even if the chance button 136 is not operated within the operation effective period, the same effect as the response effect or an effect different from the response effect is performed after the operation effective period elapses. It may be.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 33 (3) -5, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a scene in which the main character Yoshimune defeated the enemy swordsman is displayed together with the character "WIN", and the first decorative symbol is displayed. At the approximate center of the symbol display device 208L, "decoration 2" which is to be stopped and displayed in a medium symbol is displayed, and is to be stopped and displayed in a combination of decoration symbols of "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2". Will be notified.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 33 (4) -1, the display of the decorative symbol that has been reduced and displayed below the second hold number display is restored and displayed. That is, in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, a combination of decorative symbols of "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" is displayed in a temporary stop state due to swing fluctuation. . Note that no message display is added to the red ninja navigator character NJ, but a message display of "big hit" may be added. If the hold icon or the change icon has disappeared, the display is restored at this timing.

In the first decorative symbol display device 208L illustrated in FIG. 33 (4) -2, the combination of the big hit decorative symbols of “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2” is definitely displayed. The red change icon h0 is erased at the timing of the final display. Note that the red fluctuation icon h0 is a true notice. The red ninja navigation character NJ has returned to the white ninja navigation character NJ. That is, in this example, until the variable display started in FIG. 33 (1) -1 corresponding to the icon whose display mode has changed (the first hold icon h11 in the timing of FIG. 33 (11) -8) ends. The red ninja navigation character NJ continues to be displayed, and when the corresponding variable display ends and the final display is performed, the red ninja navigation character NJ returns to the default display mode.
FIG. 34 is a diagram showing an example of the selection of the icon change notice display and the change of the mode.

  The example shown on the left end of FIG. 34 is an example in which the type of the icon change notice display is selected from the demonstration display. In FIG. Are completed, and the combination of the lost decorative patterns ("decoration 2"-"decoration 5"-"decoration 7") is stopped and displayed. On the right base icon bIr in the effect icon display area DIS shown in FIG. 34 (0) -1, a palace-like navigation character YM is displayed. The lord's navigation character YM shown in FIG. 34 (0) -1 is displayed in a default display mode.

  If a new symbol change display is not started until a fixed time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses after the display of the stop symbol of the special symbol is performed in a state where the suspension of the special symbol is 0, the first decorative symbol display is performed. A demonstration display is displayed on the device 208L. In the demonstration display, the pattern display in which the combination of the decorative symbols stopped and displayed continues to be displayed in the background screen where the symbol variation display was performed, the combination of the decorative symbols stopped and disappeared, and the symbol variation display is performed. There is an animation demo display in which a dedicated animation is displayed by switching from the background screen that has been displayed. Note that a dedicated background screen may be displayed even in the symbol demonstration display. An animation demo display is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 34 (0) -2, but an animation demo display may be displayed via a symbol demo display, or a symbol demo display. The animation demo display may be displayed without going through the. In the animation demonstration display shown in FIG. 34 (0) -2, an animation in which the model title of the pachinko machine is displayed in a large size is displayed. At the bottom, it is notified that a menu screen is displayed when the chance button 136 is operated. I have.

  In FIG. 34 (0) -3, the chance button 136 is operated, and a menu screen is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. This menu screen is the same as the option menu screen shown in FIG. In FIG. 34 (0) -3, the cursor icon cs is displayed on the left side of the top effect customization icon, and the other effect icons are displayed in white, whereas the effect customization icon is lit in red. . In addition, on the option menu screen, a pattern of an operation means that can be used for a selection operation or a determination operation is displayed at the lower right. That is, of the operation key unit 137, the pattern of the cross key used for the selection operation and the pattern of the chance button 136 used for the determination operation are displayed. Further, the patterns of the chance button 136 and the up / down keys 137u and d used for moving the cursor icon cs and the cursor display among the cross keys are displayed in red. For the determination operation, the determination key of the operation key unit 137 may be used together with the chance button 136, or the determination key may be used instead of the chance button 136.

  When the down key 137d is operated once while the menu screen is displayed, as shown in FIG. 34 (0) -4, the cursor icon cs previously displayed on the effect customization icon moves down by one. Then, a cursor icon cs is displayed on the left side of the character selection icon, and the character selection icon lights up in red. When the chance button 136 is pressed while the cursor icon cs is displayed on the character selection icon, as shown in FIG. 34 (0) -5, a character selection screen is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Is displayed. On the character selection screen shown in FIG. 34 (0) -5, the character of the lord, the character of the chief keeper, and the character of the ninja are all displayed in the default display mode. , A selection frame CF is displayed. When the right key 137r is operated twice, the selection frame CF moves, and the selection frame CF is displayed on the ninja character. When the chance button 136 is pressed in this state, a character selection determination screen is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, as shown in FIG. 34 (0) -7, and FIG. 34 (0) -6. Only the ninja character among the three characters shown in FIG. 3 is displayed in a large size, and a large message "I'll leave it to you" is added. Thereafter, the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L returns to the screen before the animation demonstration display is displayed, and is displayed on the right base icon bIr in the effect icon display area DIS shown in FIG. 34 (0) -8. Indicates that a white ninja navigation character NJ is displayed with a message display of “Hello”.

  In the selection of a character by the player, the type of character can be selected, but the display mode of each character cannot be selected, and the display mode of each character is the default display mode. However, on the character selection screen shown in FIG. 34 (0) -5, a character having a mode different from the default display mode is automatically displayed. When the character is selected, the character is initially displayed in a mode different from the default display mode. It may be displayed in the effect icon display area DIS, or when the character which has been in the default display mode on the character selection screen is switched to the character selection determination screen shown in FIG. 34 (0) -7, the default display is performed. The character may be automatically changed to a character in a mode different from the mode, and may be displayed in the effect icon display area DIS from the beginning in a mode different from the default display mode. When the character in the mode is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS, a default display mode It may in some cases automatically changes the character of the different aspects. In these cases, the display mode is determined internally by the lottery for the effect.

  The second example from the left in FIG. 34 is an example in which the type of the icon change notice display is selected from the variable display of the decorative pattern, and (0) -1 in the second column from the left in FIG. In the state where the number of reserved symbols is 0, the variation display of the decorative symbol is finished, and the combination of the lost decorative symbols (“decoration 2”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 7”) is stopped and displayed. Also, a white ninja navigation character NJ is displayed on the right base icon bIr in the effect icon display area DIS here. In FIG. 34, (0) -1 to (11) -2 in the second column are the same as in (0) -1 to (11) -2 in FIG. , And the variable display of the decorative symbol has been started. However, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 34 (11) -2, a tutorial display indicating that the navigation character can be changed by operating the cross key is displayed.

  In FIG. 34 (11) -3, the cross key is operated, and a navigation character BC having a default display mode is displayed on the right base icon bIr in the effect icon display area DIS. In this state, when the chance button 136 is pressed, the character with the longest character is determined as the navigation character, and a message display of “yesshape” is added to the navigation character BC with the longest character.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 34 (11) -4, the first stop of the decorative symbol to be variably displayed is performed, and "decoration 7" is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a. In this example, the character change of the navigation character by the cross key operation during the change is possible until the first stop is performed in the change display of the decorative pattern, and until then, the tutorial display is displayed. When the stop is performed, the above tutorial display disappears. Note that the character change of the navigation character by the cross key operation during the change may be possible until the second stop is performed, may be possible until the state shifts to the reach state, or may be changed from the start of the change display. It may be possible for a certain period of time, or it may be possible until the variable display of the decorative symbol ends.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 34 (11) -5, the second stop is performed, and in the right symbol display area 208c, "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped, and the reach state is not formed here, either. In the following (11) -6, the third stop is performed, and the "decoration 7"-"decoration 2"-"decoration 2", which is a combination of the lost decorative patterns, fluctuates. Then, in FIG. 34 (11) -7, the fixed display of the combination of the decorative symbols of "decoration 7"-"decoration 2"-"decoration 2" is performed.

  The example shown in the third and subsequent columns from the left in FIG. 34 is a diagram illustrating an example of a change effect of the navigation character. Also in this example, the variation display of the decorative pattern is terminated with the number of reserved special figures being 0, and the combination of the lost decorative patterns (“decoration 2”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 7”) is stopped and displayed. I have. Also, a white ninja navigation character NJ is displayed on the right base icon bIr in the effect icon display area DIS here. 34. From (0) -1 in the third column in FIG. 34 to (11) -10 in the fourth column (right end) in FIG. 34, (11) in the second column in FIG. The same is true up to -2, the decorative symbol variation display is performed once, and the second decorative symbol variation display is started, and the three hold icons h11 to h13 in the default (white) display mode are displayed. Is displayed. In FIG. 34 (11) -10, a white ninja navigator character NJ is displayed on the right base icon bIr in the effect icon display area DIS, and a message display of "attention to me" is added. Here, a change effect directed to a ninja navigation character NJ is started, instead of an icon change effect directed to a hold icon or a change icon.

  In FIG. 34 (11) -11, the white ninja navigation character NJ does not move to the upper left corner, and at least a part of the ninja navigation character NJ is displayed on the right base icon bIr in the effect icon display area DIS. The navigation character NJ is covered with the effect image EIH, and is more difficult to recognize than before being covered. Note that the navigation character NJ may be partially covered with the effect image EIH, or may be entirely covered with the effect image EIH. In FIG. 34 (11) -12, the effect image EIH disappears, and the ninja navigation character NJ in a white display mode before being covered with the effect image EIH is displayed on the right base icon bIr in the effect icon display area DIS. , The display mode has changed to a red display mode. Note that the mode of the effect image EIH may be the same as the display mode of the navigation character NJ after the change (here, red). A message display such as “Atsuize” is added to the navigation character NJ that has changed to the red display mode.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 34 (11) -13, the first stop of the decorative symbol to be displayed in a variable manner is performed, and in the left symbol display area 208a, "decoration 7" is temporarily stopped. In (11) -14, the second stop is performed. In the right symbol display area 208c, the "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped, and the reach state is not formed here again. Stopping is performed, and “decoration 7” − “decoration 2” − “decoration 2”, which is a combination of lost decorative patterns, fluctuates. Then, in FIG. 34 (11) -16, the fixed display of the decoration pattern combination of "decoration 7"-"decoration 2"-"decoration 2" is performed. In this example, in the change display in which the change effect for the navigation character is performed, the icon change effect for the hold icon or the change icon is not started.

  In the following FIG. 34 (1) -1, the reservation of the special figure 1 is exhausted, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L starts to change the display of the decorative symbol again. Completed. As a result, two reserved icons, a first reserved icon h11 and a second reserved icon h12, are displayed in the reserved icon display area HIS, and a variable icon h0 is displayed in the variable icon display area CIS. Regardless of the first hold icon h11, the second hold icon h12, or the variable icon h0, the display mode is the default (white) display mode. In the effect icon display area DIS, a red ninja navigation character NJ is continuously displayed.

  FIG. 35 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example shown in the third and subsequent columns from the left in FIG. 34 and still another example of the change effect of the navigation character.

  In FIG. 35 (1) -2, which follows from FIG. 34 (1) -1, the icon change effect is started. In the next FIG. 33 (11) -3, the red ninja navigation character NJ displays the effect icon display area. It has moved from DIS to the upper left corner.

  In FIG. 35 (1) -4, the red ninja navigation character NJ that has moved to the upper left is throwing three shurikens toward the effect display area 208d. The mode of the shuriken may be the same as the display mode of the ninja navigation character NJ (here, red). In FIG. 35 (1) -4, three shurikens reach the reserved icon display area HIS in the effect display area 208d, and at least a part of each of the reserved icon display area HIS and the variable icon display area CIS is It is covered by a flash effect image EHI. As a result, at least a part of each of the two hold icons h11 to h13 and the change icon h0 is covered with the flash effect image EHI, and the icons h11, h12, and h0 are more difficult to recognize than before being covered. ing. Note that these three icons h11, h12, and h0 may be partially covered with the effect image EHI, or may be entirely covered with the effect image EHI. The mode of the flash effect image EHI may be the same (here, red) as the display mode of the ninja navigation character NJ. Note that the flash effect image EHI covers only the variable icon display area CIS of the hold icon display area HIS and the variable icon display area CIS, and only the variable icon h0 may be difficult to visually recognize. In FIG. 35 (1) -5, the effect image EHI disappears, and among the three icons h11, h12, h0, only the change icon h0 changes from the default (white) display mode to the red display mode, and the size also changes. It is getting bigger. In addition, only the color may be changed without changing the size, or conversely, the color may be the same and be increased by the size. Here, the animation using the red ninja navigation character NJ is a successful animation. In FIG. 35 (1) -6, the red ninja navigator character NJ that has moved to the upper left corner has returned to the effect icon display area DIS, and “Done” on the right base icon bIr. Is displayed.

  FIG. 35 (1) 7-10 to FIG. (4) -2 are the same as FIG. 33 (1) -2 to FIG. A group announcement is made, then a super reach is reached, and a deca-button effect is performed during the swordsman reach. Is confirmed and displayed. The ninja navigation character NJ which has been in the red display mode has returned to the white display mode at the timing of the final display.

  The example shown in the third and subsequent columns from the left in FIG. 35 is a diagram showing another example of the change effect of the navigation character. Also in this example, the variation display of the decorative pattern is terminated with the number of reserved special figures being 0, and the combination of the lost decorative patterns (“decoration 2”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 7”) is stopped and displayed. I have. Also, a white ninja navigation character NJ is displayed on the right base icon bIr in the effect icon display area DIS here. 35. From (0) -1 in the third column in FIG. 35 to (11) -4 in the fourth column (right end) in FIG. 35, (11) in the second column in FIG. -4, the display of the decoration pattern is changed once, the second display of the decoration pattern is started, and the three holding icons h11 to h13 in the default (white) display mode are displayed. Is displayed. Further, in FIG. 35 (11) -2, a white ninja navigator character NJ is displayed integrally on the right base icon bIr in the effect icon display area DIS, and a message display “attention to me” is added. I have. Subsequently, in FIG. 35 (11) -3, the integrated white ninja navigation character NJ has moved from the effect icon display area DIS to the upper left corner.

  In FIG. 35 (11) -4, at least a part of the white ninja navigator character NJ that has moved to the upper left is covered by the three effect images EIH, and the navigator character NJ is more difficult to recognize than before being covered. . Note that the navigation character NJ may be partially covered with the effect image EIH, or may be entirely covered with the effect image EIH. In FIG. 35 (11) -5, the three effect images EIH disappear, and the ninja navi character NJ, which was in an integrated white display mode before being covered with the effect image EIH, has the same white color, though the color is the same. The body is increasing. In other words, the same number of white ninja navigation characters NJ as the number of reserved special figures are displayed. Note that the number of effect images EIH is also the same as the number of reserved special figures.

  In the following FIG. 35 (11) -6, each of the three white ninja navi characters NJ throws a shuriken one at a time to the effect display area 208d, and a total of three shurikens fly toward the effect display area 208d. It is done in. The mode of the shuriken may be the same as the display mode of the ninja navigation character NJ (here, white). In FIG. 35 (11) -7, the three shurikens reach the reserved icon display area HIS in the effect display area 208d, and the reserved icon display area HIS is covered by the flash effect image EHI. As a result, the three reserved icons h11 to h13 are also covered by the white flash effect image EHI, and the three reserved icons h11 to h13 are more difficult to recognize than before being covered. Note that the three hold icons h11 to h13 may be partially covered with the effect image EHI, or may be entirely covered with the effect image EHI. The mode of the flash effect image EHI may be the same as the display mode of the ninja navigation character NJ (here, white). Further, the flash effect image EHI covers the variable icon display area CIS in addition to the hold icon display area HIS, and the variable icon h0 may not be easily recognized. Alternatively, the flash effect image EHI may cover only one of the three hold icons h11 to h13 and the change icon h0.

  In FIG. 35 (11) -8, the effect image EHI disappears, and only the first holding icon h11 of the three holding icons h11 to h13 has changed from the default (white) display mode to a red display mode. . That is, the animation using the white ninja navigation character NJ is a successful animation. Also, in FIG. 35 (11) -8, at least a part of each of the three white ninja navigation characters NJ is covered with three or more effect images EIH, and the three white ninja navigation characters NJ are displayed. Each of the NJs is more difficult to view than before being covered. Note that each of the three white ninja navigation characters NJ may be partially covered by the effect image EIH, or may be entirely covered by the effect image EIH. In FIG. 35 (11) -9, many effect images EIH disappear, the three white ninja navigation characters NJ displayed in the upper left corner disappear, and the right base icon bIr in the effect icon display area DIS includes: An integrated white ninja navigator character NJ is displayed, and a display of a success message "Yaze-ze" is added on the right base icon bIr. Note that, of the three white ninja navigation characters NJ, only one may be the red ninja navigation character NJ. In addition, the position of the red ninja navigation character NJ may be at the right end according to the position of the changed holding icon. In this way, the icon to be changed in the mode and the display position of the navigation character NJ, The display mode after the change can be suggested (notified) by the navigation character NJ.

  Also in this example, the change effect of the navigation character is performed in the icon change effect, and the icon change effect and the change effect of the navigation character can be considered separately. In this case, the change of the navigation character can be considered. The effects are shown in FIGS. 35 (11) -3 to (11) -5, and the icon change effects are shown in FIGS. 35 (11) -6 to (11) -9. Also, in this example, in FIG. 35 (11) -9, the three white ninja navigation characters NJ return to the integrated white ninja navigation character NJ, but the three white ninja navigation characters NJ are used. The NJ may be continuously displayed on the right base icon bIr in the effect icon display area DIS.

  FIG. 36 is a diagram showing a continuation of the example shown in the third and subsequent columns from the left in FIG. 35 and another effect example.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 36 (11) -10 continuing from FIG. 35 (11) -9, the first stop of the decorative symbol to be fluctuated is performed, and in the left symbol display area 208a, “decoration 7” Is temporarily stopped, and in FIG. (11) -11, the second stop is performed, and in the right symbol display area 208c, "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped. In (11) -12, the third stop is performed, and the "decoration 7"-"decoration 2"-"decoration 2", which is a combination of the lost decorative patterns, fluctuates. Then, in FIG. 36 (11) -13, the final display of the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 7”-“decoration 2”-“decoration 2” is performed. In this example, the icon change effect on the hold icon or the change icon is also performed in the change display in which the change effect on the navigation character is performed.

  The example shown in the second column from the left in FIG. 36 is a diagram showing another example of the change effect of the navigation character. FIG. 36 (11) -4 ′ is an example different from FIG. 35 (11) -4 following FIG. 35 (11) -3, in which at least a part of the white ninja navigation character NJ that has moved to the upper left is shown. The navigation character is covered with the plurality of effect images EIH, and the navigation character is more difficult to recognize than before the covering. The navigation character may be partially covered by the effect image EIH, or may be entirely covered by the effect image EIH. In FIG. 36 (11) -5 ', the navigation character is displayed in which all of the plurality of effect images EIH have disappeared, the display mode has changed to a red display mode, and the display size has increased. Here, a plurality of modes (colors and sizes) change simultaneously, but a plurality of modes (colors and sizes) may change at different timings. In addition, the ninja navigation character NJ may have a large change only in the display size while being white. The size of the display size corresponds to the expectation (reliability) of the jackpot, and the larger the display size, the higher the expectation (reliability) of the jackpot.

  In the subsequent FIG. 36 (11) -6 ', the red large ninja navigator character NJ is throwing a shuriken toward the effect display area 208d. The mode of the shuriken may be the same as the display mode of the ninja navigation character NJ (here, red). In FIG. 36 (11) -7, the three shurikens reach the reserved icon display area HIS in the effect display area 208d, and the reserved icon display area HIS is covered by the flash effect image EHI. As a result, the three reserved icons h11 to h13 are also covered by the white flash effect image EHI, and the three reserved icons h11 to h13 are more difficult to recognize than before being covered. Note that the three hold icons h11 to h13 may be partially covered with the effect image EHI, or may be entirely covered with the effect image EHI. The mode of the flash effect image EHI may be the same (here, red) as the display mode of the ninja navigation character NJ.

  In FIG. 36 (11) -8 ′, the effect image EHI disappears, and among the three holding icons h11 to h13, only the first holding icon h11 is displayed from the default (white) display mode of the ninja navigation character NJ. It has changed to the same red display mode as the mode. Further, in FIG. 36 (11) -8, the large red ninja navigation character NJ is covered with a number of effect images EIH, and the navigation character is more difficult to recognize than before being covered. Note that the navigation character NJ of the large red ninja may be partially covered with the effect image EIH, or may be entirely covered with the effect image EIH. In FIG. 36 (11) -9 ', many effect images EIH disappear, the red large ninja navigation character NJ displayed in the upper left corner disappears, and the right base icon bIr in the effect icon display area DIS includes the original A white ninja navigator character NJ that has returned to the above size is displayed, and a display of a success message “I'm done” is added on the right base icon bIr.

  The example shown in the third and subsequent columns from the left in FIG. 36 is a diagram showing an example of a preview animation using a navigation character. In (11) -1 to (1) -3 in the third column from the left in FIG. 36, the number of reservations in Toku-zu 1 does not decrease from 4 to 3, but decreases from 3 to 2. Except for this point, it is the same as (11) -8 at the lower end of the third column in FIG. 35 to (11) -2 in the fourth column in FIG. 35, and is the first decorative pattern shown in FIG. On the display device 208L, the display of the variation of the decorative symbol is started, and two hold icons h11 and h12 in the default (white) display mode are displayed. Also, in FIG. 36 (1) -2, a white ninja navigation character NJ with a message display of "attention to me" is displayed on the right base icon bIr in the effect icon display area DIS. .

  In the following FIG. 36 (1) -3, the white ninja navigation character NJ moves from the effect icon display area DIS to the upper left corner, and in FIG. 36 (1) -4, the mini game is started. In other words, a large message display is added to the white ninja navigator character NJ that has moved to the upper left corner, indicating that there is a high possibility of a big hit if the chance button 136 is pressed and the third die rolls. Subsequently, in FIG. 36 (1) -5, a button image 136a imitating the chance button 136 and a remaining period meter MT indicating the remaining period of the operation valid period of the chance button 136 are displayed, and the button effect has been started. . In addition, the white ninja navigator character NJ shown in FIG. 36 (1) -5 has a message "press" for urging the user to press the chance button 136. Then, the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started, and in FIG. 36 (1) -6, the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT is reduced, and the chance button 136 is operated within the operation valid period. Then, as shown in FIG. 36 (1) -7, the first decorative symbol display device 208L displays an image of the third eye of the dice, and the white ninja navigator character NJ displays “Yoshisha”. A message display is added first, and then a message of "super heat" is added (FIG. 36 (1) -8). In this example, it is a mini game. In FIG. 36 (11) -9, the image of the third eye of the dice disappears, and the white ninja navigation character NJ displayed in the upper left corner has returned to the right base icon bIr in the effect icon display area DIS. . The ninja navigation character NJ that has returned to the effect icon display area DIS is provided with a message display of "hot". The animation using the white ninja navigator character NJ in FIGS. 36 (1) -4 to (1) -9 described above is not an animation for changing an icon, but a decoration pattern which is currently performed. This is a preview animation related to a big hit in a variable display. Here, since the third image of the dice is displayed, the possibility of a big hit is announced in advance, which is an announcement animation by a mini game.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 36 (1) -10, the first stop of the decorative symbol to be variably displayed is performed, and "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a. 1) In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in -11, the second stop is performed, and in the right symbol display area 208c, "decoration 2" is temporarily stopped, and the reach state is formed.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 36 (2) -2, the Sabohani group notice is started. Before the Sabohani group notice is started, or simultaneously with the start of the Sabohani group notice, and further after the start of the Sabohani group notice, a change effect of the navigation character is performed on the right base icon bIr of the effect icon display area DIS. The ninja navigation character NJ, which has been in a white display mode, has changed to a red display mode. The change of the navigation character may be performed when the player wins the mini game, or may be performed independently of the result of the mini game. Further, the display mode of the fluctuating icon h0, which has been the default display mode until then, also changes, and the display mode of the fluctuating icon h0 shown in FIG. Has been changed to a combined display mode. The change of the display mode of the fluctuating icon may be performed when the player wins the mini game, or may be performed independently of the result of the mini game. In FIG. 36 (2) -2, a red “icon change” message is displayed on the right base icon bIr. The change timing of the display mode of the change icon h0 may be after the end of the navigation effect of the navigation character, but before the start of the navigation effect of the navigation character, or during the execution of the navigation effect of the navigation character. Good.

  As shown in FIG. 36 (2) -2, at least a part of the red ninja navigator character NJ displayed in the effect icon display area DIS overlaps with Sabohani. It should be noted that the navigation character may not overlap with the Sabohani, but may overlap at least a part of the Sabohani. In addition, although the message display of “icon change” overlaps at least a part of Savohani, on the contrary, the message display of “icon change” may overlap at least a part of the message display of “icon change”. Further, although the fluctuating icon h0 in which the display mode has changed does not overlap with Savohani, the Sabohani may overlap at least a part of the fluctuating icon h0, and conversely, the fluctuating icon h0 may overlap with at least a part of the Savohani. May overlap. Note that when the Sabohani group notice is started, the display of the decorative symbol is reduced and displayed below the second reserved number display.

  In the subsequent FIG. 36 (2) -3, a message display of red "Premier" is added to the red ninja navigator character NJ, and it is notified that the premier effect is started. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 36 (3) -1, a super reach (swordsman reach) production is started before the premier production, and a screen is displayed in which the main character Yoshimune and the enemy swordsman confront each other. I have. In addition, a message display “Swordsman Reach” is added to the red ninja navigation character NJ. Note that at least a part of the enemy swordsman overlaps with the red ninja navigation character NJ, but at least a part of the navigator character NJ may overlap with the enemy swordsman. Further, at least a part of the fluctuating icon h0 whose display mode has changed overlaps with the enemy swordsman, but at least a part of the enemy swordsman may overlap with the fluctuating icon h0.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 36 (3) -2, the premiere effect is started in the middle of the swordsman reach effect. The premier effect here is an effect in which the fluctuating icon h0 whose display mode has been changed is enlarged and displayed earlier. The image overlaps when the main character Yoshimune and the enemy sword fight each other, and the display of the swordsman reach reach is more difficult to see than before the overlap. With the premiere production, the jackpot is confirmed or almost confirmed.

When the premier effect ends, the image that has been displayed large in the center of the screen until now is reduced and displayed again as the change icon h0 (FIG. 36 (3) -5). Also, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a scene in which the main character Yoshimune defeated the enemy swordsman is displayed together with the character "WIN". "Decoration 2" to be stopped and displayed is displayed, and it is notified that the display is to be stopped and displayed in the combination of the decoration symbols "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2". At least a part of the re-displayed fluctuation icon h0 is overlapped with the display of “decoration 2” to be stopped and displayed in the middle symbol.
FIG. 37 is a diagram illustrating a continuation of the example illustrated in the third and subsequent columns from the left in FIG. 36.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 37 (4) -1 subsequent to FIG. 36 (3) -5, the display of the decorative symbol which has been reduced and displayed below the second reserved number display is restored and displayed. That is, in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, a combination of decorative symbols of "decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2" is displayed in a temporary stop state due to swing fluctuation. . Note that no message display is added to the red ninja navigator character NJ, but a message display of "big hit" may be added. Further, a change icon h0 is also displayed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L illustrated in FIG. 37 (4) -2, the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2” is definitely displayed. The change icon h0 is deleted at the timing of the final display. The red ninja navigation character NJ has returned to the white ninja navigation character NJ.

  In FIG. 36 (1) -4 to FIG. 36 (1) -9, although a white ninja navigator character NJ is used, a preview animation using a mini game is executed instead of an animation for changing icons. In addition, a mini game in which an icon is changed may be successful or failed. That is, if the mini game is successful, the white ninja navigation character NJ changes to the red ninja navigation character NJ, and if the mini game fails, the white ninja navigation character NJ is replaced by the red ninja navigation character NJ. , The white ninja navigation character NJ remains the white ninja navigation character NJ.

  Here, a summary of the animation that can be executed is an animation using the white ninja navigator character NJ, in which the changing icon or the holding icon may be changed from the default mode to the notice mode (the A-th mode). Anime) and an animation (for example, a preview animation) that has nothing to do with the aspect change in the first place, and as a result, is an animation that does not change from the default mode to the announcement mode (the B-th anime) can do. An animation using a red ninja navigator character NJ, in which the change icon or the hold icon is always changed from the default mode to the notice mode (the C-th anime), is completely related to the mode change in the first place. The animation may be classified as an animation (for example, a preview animation), which is an animation that does not change from the default mode to the preview mode as a result. Further, changing the display mode of the navigation character can be classified into a successful animation (E-th animation) and a failed animation (F-th animation). Further, even for the same preview animation, a preview animation (Gth animation) that does not change the display mode of the navigation character and a preview animation (Hth animation) that does not change the display mode of the fluctuating icon or the hold icon are displayed. Anime). Furthermore, there is also an animation (first animation) in which the fluctuating icon or the holding icon may be changed from the default mode to the notice mode without using the navigation character. Examples of the first animation include animations shown in FIGS. 22A to 22E, animations shown in FIGS. 22A to 22E, and animations shown in FIGS. An animation in which the display mode of the change icon h0 changes, such as the animation shown in (e).

  Here, the G-th animation and the E-th animation may be animations in which the white (default) ninja navigation character NJ is used in common, or may be a part (for example, the first part (Including a part) may be an animation performed in the same manner. The G-th animation may be an animation that does not change the change icon or the hold icon from the default mode to the notice mode.

  In addition, the C-th animation and the D-th animation may be animations in which a red ninja navigation character NJ is used in common, and in addition, background images and some scenes may be used. The type, color, shape, and size of the display (for example, a character or an icon) displayed separately from the red ninja navigation character NJ may be common.

  The C-th animation and the D-th animation may be animations partially performed in the same manner. In addition, the C-th animation and the D-th animation may be animations in which a part including the first part is performed in the same manner, and may be performed in a different manner from the middle.

  In addition, the A-th animation and the C-th animation may be animations in which a navigation character is used in common, or may be background images or some scenes in common. Alternatively, types (colors, shapes, and sizes) of displays (for example, characters and icons) displayed separately from the navigation character may be common.

  The A-th animation and the C-th animation may be animations partially performed in the same manner. In addition, the A-th animation and the C-th animation may be animations in which a part including the first part is performed in the same manner, and animations performed in a different manner from the middle.

  Further, the D-th animation and the H-th animation may be animations having certain items in common. That is, they may be common at least in that the navigation character is displayed. In addition, background images and some scenes may be common, and types (colors, shapes, and sizes) of displays (eg, characters and icons) displayed separately from the navigation character may be common. It may be.

  The D-th animation and the H-th animation may be animations partially performed in the same manner. Also, the D-th animation and the H-th animation are animations in which a part including the first part is performed in the same manner, and may be animations performed in a different manner from the middle.

  Further, in the example of changing the hold icon in FIGS. 32 to 37, the change icon may be changed instead of the hold icon, and in the example of changing the change icon in FIGS. 32 to 37, the change icon may be changed instead of the change icon. The hold icon may be changed.

In addition, although none of the examples shown in FIGS. 32 to 37 is an example in which the icon or the like of the mini item displayed in the effect icon display area DIS is changed, the icon of the mini item is replaced with the hold icon or the change icon. For example, various icons may be changed.
In the above description,

A game console provided with a display unit capable of displaying a plurality of types of icons, wherein one of the plurality of types of icons is a first icon [for example, a white (default) hold icon h11 or a white (Default) fluctuation icon h0, and further, a white meter ascending item UpI icon], and one of the plurality of types of icons is a second icon [for example, a red (prefetch notice mode) hold icon] h11, or a red fluctuation icon h0, and further, a red meter ascending item UpIr icon], and the display means displays a certain display in a first mode (for example, a white (default) mode). Means capable of displaying a first animation using a white (default) ninja navigator character NJ] The display means is capable of displaying a second animation using the certain display [for example, a red ninja navigation character NJ] in a second mode [for example, a red mode]; The first display is a display that may be displayed during a period in which the decorative symbol variation display is not performed [for example, during a stop display, during a demonstration, or during a big hit game], and the first animation is: An animation that may change the displayed first icon to the second icon [for example, FIG. 32 (11) -2 to FIG. 32 (11) -6 ″ to FIG. 32 (11) -7) Icon change animation shown in FIG. 35, and the icon change animation shown in FIGS. 35 (11) -2 to (11) -9]], wherein the second animation replaces the displayed first icon with the second icon. Animation that changes to an icon 33 (11) -2 to (11) -9, and icon change animations shown in FIGS. 35 (1) -2 to (1) -6). Is a display selected by the player from a plurality of types of displays [for example, FIG. 34 (0) -5 to FIG. 34 (0) -8]. ] Was explained.

  According to this gaming table, the player can be entertained by giving a notice on the display selected by the player.

  Here, the first animation is an animation that may not change the displayed first icon to the second icon, and the second animation is the displayed first icon. This is an animation that always changes the icon to the second icon.

  The display means may be a means for always displaying a plurality of types of icons. The display unit may be a unit that always displays the first animation, or may be a unit that always displays the second animation. The first display may be a display that is always displayed during a period in which the decorative design change display is not performed.

  Also, "the first aspect is a default aspect, and the first aspect is most likely to be displayed in the certain display than other aspects including the second aspect. This is an aspect, wherein the first display is displayed when the player selects the certain display [for example, FIG. 34 (0) -6 to FIG. 34 (0) -8]. Game console. ] Was also explained.

  In addition, “the certain display is a display that may be selectable even during the period in which the decorative design variable display is performed [for example, FIG. 34 (11) -2 to FIG. 34 (11) -3). ], A gaming table characterized by the above. ] Was also explained.

  For example, selection is always possible during the period from the start of the decorative symbol change display to the reaching state, but may not be selectable during the period after the reaching state.

  Further, the certain display may be a display that can be selected even during the period in which the decorative symbol change display is being performed. That is, it may be selectable at any time during the entire period in which the decorative design variable display is performed. Furthermore, the certain display may be a display that can always be selected.

  Note that the certain display may be a display that is always selected during a period in which the decorative design variable display is performed.

  In addition, "the certain display is a display that can be selected only when a certain condition is satisfied, and the certain condition is a condition that the demonstration display is being displayed [for example, FIG. 34 (0) -2]. A gaming table, characterized in that: ] Was also explained.

  Here, a plurality of conditions may be prepared as the certain condition. For example, in addition to the condition that the demonstration display is being displayed, a condition that a certain big hit game is being played (for example, a big hit game with a certain change, a big hit game without a certain change, a round, or an interval between rounds). May be a condition that the cumulative number of executions of the decorative symbol variation display has reached a certain number, and the number of executions of the decorative symbol variation display has reached a certain number without hitting the big hit game. May be the condition.

  Also, only one condition may be prepared as the certain condition. This one condition may be a condition that the demonstration display is being displayed, a condition that a certain big hit game is being played, or a condition that the cumulative number of executions of the decorative symbol change display is a certain value. Or the condition that the number of executions of the decorative symbol variation display has reached a certain number without hitting the big hit game.

  In addition, the demonstration display is a display that is displayed in a state where the decorative symbol change display is not performed. More specifically, the display is a display that is started when a predetermined time elapses after the stop display of the decorative symbol is displayed in a state where the special symbol is not suspended, and the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. A demonstration display and a moving image demonstration display in which an animation including a title of a game console or the like is displayed can be given. Note that a still image demonstration display may be displayed instead of the moving image demonstration display.

  The certain display may be a display that is always selected only when a certain condition is satisfied.

In the above description, “a game console provided with display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of icons, wherein one of the plurality of types of icons is a first icon [for example, a white (default) hold Icon h11, or a white (default) variable icon h0, and a white meter ascending item UpI icon], and one of the plurality of types of icons is a second icon [for example, red (prefetch notice) Mode), the display icon is a hold icon h11, a red change icon h0, and a red meter ascending item UpIr icon], and the display means is a first mode (for example, a white (default) mode). First animation using display (hereinafter referred to as “first display”) [eg, white (default) ninja navigation character NJ] The display means is a display capable of displaying the certain display (hereinafter, referred to as “second display”) in a second mode [for example, a red mode] [for example, a red ninja navigation character NJ ] That can display a second animation using the third animation [for example, FIG. 33 (11) -4 to FIG. 33 (11) -4) which changes the first display to the second display. The character change animation shown in FIG. (11) -5, the character change animation shown in FIGS. 34 (11) -11 to (11) -12, and the character change animations shown in FIGS. 35 (11) -4 to (11) -5 36 (11) -4 ′ to (11) -5 ′ in FIG. 36 (11) -5 ′), and the first display is a decorative symbol change display. During periods of no activity [e.g. During the big hit game], the first animation is an animation that may change the displayed first icon to the second icon [for example, FIG. 32 (11) -2 to (11) -6 ″ to the icon change animation shown in FIG. (11) -7, and the icon change animation shown in FIGS. 35 (11) -2 to (11) -9. And the second animation is an animation that changes the displayed first icon to the second icon [for example, as shown in FIGS. 33 (11) -2 to (11) -9). Icon change animation, icon change animations shown in FIGS. 35 (1) -2 to (1) -6, icon change animations shown in FIGS. 35 (11) -2 to (11) -9, FIG. 36 (11) ) -4 'to the same figure ( 1) -9 ', and the second animation is an animation whose display may be started after the display of the third animation is started [for example, FIG. ) -2 to an icon change animation shown in FIG. 1 (1) -6]. ] Was explained.
According to this gaming table, the certain display can be noticed.

  Here, the first animation is an animation that may not change the displayed first icon to the second icon, and the second animation is the displayed first icon. This is an animation that always changes the icon to the second icon.

  In addition, the second display may be displayed from the beginning in addition to the case where the second display is changed from the first display by the third animation. That is, the certain display may appear (start display) in the second mode.

  Further, the second animation may be an animation whose display is always started after the display of the third animation is started.

  Further, the display of the second animation may be started before the display of the third animation is started. In this case, the first display is displayed, and the third animation is displayed on a second display different from the second display of the second animation whose display has been started earlier. The first display may be changed.

  Further, the first display may be started after the display of the third animation is started. In this case, a scene in which the first display is changed to the second display is displayed after the first display is displayed. Further, the first display may be started at the same time as the display of the third animation, or may be displayed before the display of the third animation is started. There may be.

  The display means may be a means for always displaying a plurality of types of icons. Further, the display means may be means for always displaying the first animation, or may be means for always displaying the second animation. Further, the first display may be a display that is always displayed during a period in which the decorative design variable display is not performed.

  In addition, the “third animation is a decorative symbol variation display in which the display of the second animation is started [for example, the decorative symbol variation display shown in FIGS. 33 (11) -1 to (11) -13, The decorative design variation display shown in FIGS. 35 (11) -1 to 36 (11) -13, and the same decorative design variation as the decorative design variation display shown in FIGS. 36 (11) -4 'to (11) -9' A game console, in which display may be started in display. ] Was also explained.

  The display of the third animation may be started in the same decorative design variation display as the decorative design variation display in which the display of the second animation is started.

  In addition, “the third animation is a decorative symbol variation display at which the display of the second animation is started [for example, a decorative symbol variation display shown in FIGS. 34 (1) -1 to 35 (4) -2]). A game console characterized in that the display may be started in a different decorative symbol variation display [for example, the decorative symbol variation display shown in FIGS. 34 (11) -9 to (11) -16]. ] Was also explained.

  For example, the third animation may start displaying in the decorative design change display before the decorative design change display in which the display of the second animation is started, and the third animation The scene to be changed to the second display and the second animation may be displayed in the same decorative design variable display, or may be displayed in a different decorative design variable display. Good.

  It should be noted that the display of the third animation may be always started in a decorative symbol variation display different from the decorative symbol variation display in which the display of the second animation is started.

Also, the "third animation is an animation in which a mini-game in which a success or failure may occur is performed, and the mini-game succeeds, and the first display is changed to the second display. The display means is a means capable of displaying a fourth animation, wherein the fourth animation is performed in the mini-game, fails in the mini-game, and the first display is the second display. A game console characterized by an animation that does not change to. ] Was also explained.
The display means may be a means for always displaying the fourth animation.

  The display means is means capable of displaying a fifth animation, the fifth animation is an animation that does not change the first display to the second display, The fifth animation is an animation related to a notice [for example, the animation shown in FIG. 36 (1) -2 to FIG. 36 (1) -9], and the fifth animation and the third animation are a certain matter For example, a white (default) ninja navigation character NJ is used] is a common animation. ] Was also explained.

  Here, the fifth animation may be an animation that does not change the displayed first icon into the second icon.

  Further, as an example of the “certain item”, there are a character appearing, a background image, a part of a scene, a display having the same color, shape, and size.

  The fifth animation and the third animation may be animations partially performed in the same manner. In addition, the fifth animation and the third animation may be animations in which a part including an initial part is performed in the same manner, and animations performed in a different manner from the middle.

In addition, the “notification” here may be a notification regarding a big hit. In addition, it may be a notice (for example, a timer notice or the like) that an effect that is not directly connected to the big hit but is indirectly connected to the big hit is executed. Here, the “effect” may be an SP reach effect with a high reliability of a big hit. In other words, the “notification” here may be an advance notice of a big hit.
The display means may be a means for always displaying the fifth animation.

  In the above description, “a game console provided with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of icons, wherein one of the plurality of types of icons is a first icon [for example, a white (default) hold Icon h11, or a white (default) variable icon h0, and a white meter ascending item UpI icon], and one of the plurality of types of icons is a second icon [for example, red (prefetch notice) Mode), the display icon is a hold icon h11, a red change icon h0, and a red meter ascending item UpIr icon], and the display means is a first mode (for example, a white (default) mode). First animation using display (hereinafter referred to as “first display”) [eg, white (default) ninja navigation character NJ] The display means is a display capable of displaying the certain display (hereinafter, referred to as “second display”) in a second mode [for example, a red mode] [for example, a red ninja navigation character NJ ] Means that can display a second animation using the first display, during the period during which the decorative pattern variation display is not performed [for example, during a stop display, during a demonstration, or during a big hit game]. This is a display that may be displayed, and the first animation is an animation that may change the displayed first icon to the second icon [for example, FIG. (11) -6 '' to (11) -7 in FIG. 35, and icon change animations in (11) -2 to (11) -9 in FIG. 35). The anime is the first eye displayed (For example, the icon change animations shown in FIGS. 33 (11) -2 to (11) -9 and FIGS. 35 (1) -2 to (1) -6) Icon change animation shown in the following), wherein the display means is a means capable of displaying a sixth animation using the first display, and the sixth animation is the first icon being displayed. Is not changed to the second icon, and the sixth animation is an animation related to a notice [for example, an animation shown in FIGS. 36 (1) -2 to (1) -9]. A gaming table characterized by the following. ] Was explained.

  Here, the sixth animation is an animation using the first display, but may be an animation in which the first display does not change to the second display.

  In addition, the “notification” here may be a notification regarding a big hit. In addition, it may be a notice (for example, a timer notice or the like) that an effect that is not directly connected to the big hit but is indirectly connected to the big hit is executed. Here, the “effect” may be an SP reach effect with a high reliability of a big hit. In other words, the “notification” here may be an advance notice of a big hit.

  Further, the sixth animation may be an animation related to a tutorial instead of an animation related to a notice. For example, the animation may be an animation that describes an effect or an animation that describes an operation method (for example, how to strike left or right).

  Further, the sixth animation and the first animation are animations in which certain items are common. That is, they are common in that at least "first display" is displayed. In addition, the background image, some scenes may be common, and the type, color, shape, and size of the display (eg, character or icon) displayed separately from the “first display” may be different. May be common.

  Also, the sixth animation and the first animation may be animations partially performed in the same manner. In addition, the sixth animation and the first animation may be animations in which a part including an initial part is performed in the same manner, and animations performed in a different manner from the middle.

  The display means may be a means for always displaying a plurality of types of icons. The display unit may be a unit that always displays the first animation, or may be a unit that always displays the second animation. The first display may be a display that is always displayed during a period in which the decorative design change display is not performed. The display unit may be a unit that always displays a sixth animation using the first display.

  Also, the display means is a means capable of displaying a seventh animation using the second display, and the seventh animation replaces the displayed first icon with the second icon. The seventh animation is an animation related to a notice, and the seventh animation is an animation that is easier to be displayed than the sixth animation. Game console. ] Was also explained.

  Here, the seventh animation and the second animation are animations in which certain items are common. That is, they are common in that at least “second display” is displayed. In addition, the background image, some scenes may be common, and the type (color, shape, size, etc.) of the display (eg, character or icon) displayed separately from the “second display” May be common.

  Further, the seventh animation and the second animation may be animations partially performed in the same manner. Further, the seventh animation and the second animation may be animations in which a part including an initial part is performed in the same mode, and may be performed in a different mode from the middle.

  Further, the first animation and the second animation are animations in which certain items are common. That is, they are common in that at least "a certain display" is displayed. In addition, the background image, some scenes may be common, and the type, color, shape, and size of a display (for example, a character or an icon) displayed separately from the “certain display” May be common.

  Also, the first animation and the second animation may be animations partially performed in the same manner. In addition, the first animation and the second animation may be animations in which a part including an initial part is performed in the same manner, and animations performed in a different manner from the middle.

  Further, the sixth animation and the seventh animation are animations in which certain items are common. That is, they are common in that at least "a certain display" is displayed. In addition, the background image, some scenes may be common, and the type, color, shape, and size of a display (for example, a character or an icon) displayed separately from the “certain display” May be common.

  Also, the sixth animation and the seventh animation may be animations partially performed in the same manner. Further, the sixth animation and the seventh animation may be animations in which a part including an initial part is performed in the same manner, and may be performed in a different manner from the middle.

  Note that the display means may be a means for always displaying a seventh animation using the second display.

  In the above description, “a game console provided with a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of icons, wherein one of the plurality of types of icons is a first icon [for example, a white (default) hold Icon h11, or a white (default) fluctuation icon h0, and a white meter rising item UpI icon], and one of the plurality of types of icons is a second icon [for example, red (look-ahead). Notice icon), a red change icon h0, and a red meter ascending item UpIr icon], and the display means includes a first mode [for example, a white (default) mode]. (For example, a white (default) ninja navigator character NJ). Which is capable of displaying a second animation using the certain display [for example, a red ninja navigation character NJ] of a second mode [for example, a red mode]. The first display is a display that may be displayed during a period during which the decorative symbol variation display is not performed [for example, during a stop display, during a demonstration, or during a big hit game], The first animation is an animation which may change the displayed first icon to the second icon [for example, FIG. 32 (11) -2 to FIG. 32 (11) -6 ″ to FIG. (11) -7, an icon change animation shown in FIG. 35 (11) -2 to FIG. 35 (11) -9), and the second animation is the displayed first animation. Icon changes to the second icon Animation (for example, the icon change animation shown in FIGS. 33 (11) -2 to (11) -9, the icon change animation shown in FIGS. 35 (1) -2 to (1) -6), The display means is a means capable of displaying an eighth animation that does not use the certain display, and the eighth animation is an animation that changes the displayed first icon to the second icon. [For example, the animations shown in FIGS. 22A to 22E, the animations shown in FIGS. 22A to 22E, and the animations shown in FIGS. 22A to 22E] A gaming table characterized by the above-mentioned. ] Was explained.

  Here, the eighth animation is an animation that always changes the displayed first icon to the second icon, but the eighth animation is the displayed first icon May be changed to the second icon, and may not be changed.

  The display means may be a means for always displaying a plurality of types of icons. The display unit may be a unit that always displays the first animation, or may be a unit that always displays the second animation. The first display may be a display that is always displayed during a period in which the decorative design change display is not performed. The display means may be a means for always displaying an eighth animation that does not use the certain display.

  In addition, "the first icon may be displayed with one or more icons, the second icon may be displayed with one or more icons, the second icon, A game console characterized by having a higher reliability as a notice of a big hit than the first icon. ] Was also explained.

  Here, the first animation may be an animation that may change a plurality of the displayed first icons to the second icon, and the second animation may be displayed. There may be an animation in which a plurality of the first icons are changed to the second icons.

  Note that one or more icons may always be displayed as the first icon, and one or more icons may be displayed as the second icon.

  In addition, “One of the plurality of types of icons is a third icon [for example, a blue (pre-reading notice mode) hold icon h11, a blue change icon h0, and a blue meter rise item UpIb icon] ], And one or more icons may be displayed as the third icon, and the third icon is an icon having a higher reliability as a notice of a big hit than the first icon. The second icon is an icon having a higher degree of reliability as a notice about a big hit than the third icon, and the first animation replaces the displayed first icon with the third icon. (For example, as shown in FIGS. 32 (11) -2 to (11) -6 'to (11) -7). A automation, amusement machine, characterized in that. ] Was also explained.

  Note that one or more icons may always be displayed as the third icon. Further, the first animation may be an animation that always changes the displayed first icon to the third icon.

  In addition, the game console is characterized in that the second animation is an animation that does not change the displayed first icon into the third icon. ] Was also explained.

  Also, the display means is a means capable of displaying a first invariable animation using the first display, and the first invariant animation displays the first display, An animation that fails to change the displayed first icon to the second icon [for example, in FIG. 32 (11) -2 to FIG. 32 (11) -6 to FIG. Icon change failure animation shown]. ] Was also explained.

  Here, the first animation is an animation that may include a scene that succeeds in changing the displayed first icon to the second icon, and the second animation is , Is an animation including a scene in which the displayed first icon is successfully changed to the second icon.

  The display means may be a means for always displaying a first invariant animation using the first display.

  Also, "the first invariant animation is halfway [for example, FIG. 32 (11) -2 to FIG. 32 (11) -5]] is the same animation as the first animation. Game console. ] Was also explained.

  Here, the display means is a means capable of displaying a second invariant animation using the second display, and the second invariant animation displays the second display, The animation may fail to change the displayed first icon to the second icon. Still further, the second invariant animation may be the same animation as the second animation up to the middle.

    Or, conversely, when the second display is displayed, the second animation may always be displayed. That is, when the second display is displayed, the first icon may always change to the second icon.

  Further, even if the first display is displayed, the first animation may not be displayed in some cases, and even if the second display is displayed, the second animation may not be displayed. You may.

Further, the failed animation may be an animation in which an effect display is displayed, and may be an animation in which the display mode has not changed despite the effect display being displayed. That is, an animation in which the first icon is not changed to the second icon without displaying the effect display may be excluded. However, the failed animation may include an animation in which the effect icon is not displayed and the first icon does not change to the second icon.
Was also explained.

  In addition, “the display means is a means that a hold icon may be displayed, and the hold icon is an icon displayed corresponding to the number of holds, and the first icon is A first hold icon [for example, a white (default) hold icon h1 shown in FIG. 32 (11) -1 or the like], and the second icon is a second hold icon [for example, FIG. -8 or the like, a red (prefetch notice mode) hold icon h1]. ] Was also explained.

  The display means is a means in which a fluctuating icon may be displayed, and the fluctuating icon is an icon related to a decorative design fluctuating display being executed, and the first icon is a first icon. (For example, a white (default) variation icon h0 shown in FIG. 35 (1) -2), and the second icon is a second variation icon [for example, FIG. 35 (1) -5]. And the like, which is a red fluctuation icon h0]. ] Was also explained.

  In addition, "the decorative design change display corresponding to the second icon changed by the second animation is more final than the decorative design change display corresponding to the second icon changed by the first animation. A gaming table characterized in that the big hit symbol mode may be easily confirmed and displayed. ] Was also explained.

  Here, the decorative design change display corresponding to the second icon changed by the second animation is more final than the decorative design change display corresponding to the second icon changed by the first animation. The jackpot symbol mode may be easily displayed.

  In addition, “the first display is a display that may be displayed over a plurality of successive decorative pattern change displays [for example, FIG. 32 (0) -1 to FIG. 32 (4) -2]). A gaming table, characterized in that: ] Was also explained.

  Here, the first display may be a display that may be displayed during a predetermined number of decorative symbol change displays, or may be a display of the predetermined number of decorative symbol change displays. Or a display that may temporarily disappear.

  In addition, the second display may be a display that may be displayed over a plurality of successive decorative pattern change displays. In addition, the second display may be a display that may be displayed during a predetermined number of decorative symbol change display, or may be a display of the predetermined number of decorative symbol change display. Even during the display, a display that may temporarily disappear may be used.

  In addition, the certain display may be a display that may be displayed over a plurality of successive decorative symbol change displays. In addition, the certain display may be a display that may be displayed during a predetermined number of decorative symbol change displays, or may be a display during the predetermined number of decorative symbol change displays. Or a display that may temporarily disappear.

  Note that the first display may be a display that is always displayed over a plurality of continuous decorative symbol change displays.

  In addition, "the first display may be displayed in a certain period, and the certain period is a period in which the decorative symbol is stopped and the number of holdings is 0 [for example, FIG. 34 (0) -1, FIG. (0) -8]. ] Was also explained.

Here, in a certain period, the second display may be displayed, and the certain period may be a period in which the decorative design is stopped and the number of holdings is zero. Good.
Note that the first display may be always displayed during the certain period.

  Also, a gaming machine characterized in that the first mode and the second mode are modes in which at least one of a color, a pattern, a size, and a shape is different. ] Was also explained.

  Therefore, only one of the colors, patterns, sizes, and shapes may be different, all may be different, or two or three combinations may be different. Is also good.

  Also, the game machine is characterized in that the game machine is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100). ] Was also explained.

  Here, an operation means provided at a position operable by the player is provided, and the first aspect is an aspect including a display related to the operation means, and during the display of the first display, The first display may change to the second display when the operation means is operated.

  In addition, before the display of the first animation is started, there may be a case where the user is notified that the displayed first icon is in a state of being easily changed.

  In addition, one of the plurality of types of icons is a fourth icon, and the fourth icon is an icon having a display mode that indicates that the icon itself may change, and the fourth icon is a fourth icon. May change to the second icon in the animation using the certain display. Note that the animation using the certain display may be the first animation, the second animation, or another animation.

  Further, one of the plurality of types of icons is a fifth icon, the fifth icon is an icon of a display mode indicating that the fourth icon failed to change, The fourth icon may change to the fifth icon in the animation using the certain display. Note that the animation using the certain display may be the first animation, the second animation, or another animation.

  Note that the display means is a means capable of displaying a second invariant animation using the second display, and the second invariant animation is a display in which the second display is displayed. The animation may fail to change the displayed first icon to the second icon.

  Here, conversely, when the second display is displayed, the second animation may always be displayed. That is, when the second display is displayed, the first icon may always change to the second icon.

  Further, even if the first display is displayed, the first animation may not be displayed in some cases, and even if the second display is displayed, the second animation may not be displayed. You may.

  Further, the second invariant animation may be the same animation as the second animation up to a certain point.

  Further, another specific example of the effect performed by the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 38 to 57 are used in principle only for the description of the embodiment shown in FIGS. 38 to 57, and even if a duplicated code is shown in another drawing, 38 to 57 are given priority.

  First, the effect display on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of this example will be described with reference to FIG. At the left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reserved number aa1, the fourth figure aa2 of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 reserved number aa3, the fourth figure aa4 of the special figure 2 and the ordinary figure reserved number aa5 , The fourth symbol aa6 of the ordinary figure is displayed. The special figure 1 reserved number aa1 is a display that indicates the reserved number of the special figure 1 by a number, the special figure 2 reserved number aa3 is a display that represents the reserved number of the special figure 2 by a number, and the general figure reserved number aa5 is a general figure. This is a display showing the number of reservations in a number. Further, in the lower right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a variable icon display area c capable of displaying a variable icon is provided. The right side of the variable icon display area c is a reserved icon display area. In the example shown in FIG. 38A, the special figure 1 reserved icons a1, a2, a3, and a4 and the special figure 2 reserved icons b1, b2, b3 Are displayed side by side in this order, alternately from the left. The pachinko machine 100 of this example is a winning order changing machine in which a mechanism is provided on the game board in which game balls are alternately won at the special figure 1 starting port and the special figure 2 starting port, and the holding is completed in the winning order. . A horizontally long rectangular display area d is provided at the lower right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the display area d, a tutorial display, a message display, and the like are displayed. When there is no content to be displayed, a character string image of “under preparation” is displayed.

  Next, an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIGS. 38 (1) to 38 (38) show an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 in chronological order. FIG. 38A shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, "decoration 3-decoration 4-decoration 8" which is a lost symbol mode is stopped and displayed.

  FIG. 38 (2) shows a state in which the variation display of the decorative symbol and the variation display of the fourth symbol have been started in response to the start of the special figure 1 variable game by the special figure 1 display device 212 (not shown). I have. In addition, with the start of the special figure 1 floating game, a holding icon decrease animation is executed, and the special figure 1 holding icon a1 displayed in the holding icon display area is changed to the changing icon c1 and moves to the changing icon display area c. Then, the special figure 1 hold icons a2 to a4 and the special figure 2 hold icons b1 to b3 move to the left.

  FIG. 38 (3) shows a state in which a button image f1 simulating the appearance of the chance button 136 and a meter image f2 indicating an operation valid period during which the operation of the chance button 136 is valid are displayed. The button image f1 and the meter image f2 are displays that prompt the player to operate the chance button 136.

  FIG. 38 (4) shows a state where the operation validity period has started. The remaining time of the operation valid period indicated by the meter image f2 has decreased.

  FIG. 38 (5) shows a state where the player is operating the chance button 136. In this example, the chance button 136 is pressed once. In this example, when the chance button 136 is pressed once during the operation validity period, the display of the conversation notice is started. If the chance button 136 is not pressed once during the operation valid period, the display of the conversation notice may be started, or the display of the conversation notice may not be started with a predetermined probability.

FIG. 38 (6) shows a state in which the conversation notice display has been started. In the conversation notice display of this example, first, a character image of a grandfather (hereinafter, referred to as “grandfather”) g2 is displayed. The grandfather g2 appears from the upper right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.
FIG. 38 (7) shows a state where the old man g2 is moving to the left.
FIG. 38 (8) shows a state where the old man g2 is moving to the left.

  FIG. 38 (9) shows a state in which the grandfather g2 changes to a character image (hereinafter, referred to as a “lord”) g1 while the grandfather g2 is moving to the left. The main hall g1 is moving to the left.

  FIG. 38 (10) shows a state where the gate g1 has stopped. As shown in FIGS. 38 (6) to (10), the decorative symbol display device 208 can display a moving animation of the character. The animation of the movement of the character in this example is a display including the main building g1 and the grandfather g2.

  FIG. 38 (11) shows a state in which the display of the character name including the character image of “dono” (hereinafter referred to as “character name display”) h1 is started. The character name display h1 appears from the upper right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The character name display h1 has moved to the left.

  FIG. 38 (12) shows a state where the balloon display i1 has been started to be displayed. The balloon display i1 appears from the center of the right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The balloon display i1 has moved to the left.

  FIG. 38 (13) shows a state where the character name display h1 and the balloon display i1 are moving to the left.

  FIG. 38 (14) shows a state where the character name display h1 and the balloon display i1 are moving to the left.

  FIG. 38 (15) shows a state where the character name display h1 and the balloon display i1 are stopped. The character name display h1 stops above the main hall g1, and the balloon display i1 stops near the right side of the main hall g1.

  FIG. 38 (16) shows a state in which a speech display, which is the speech (line) of the tongue g1, has been started in the balloon display i1. The line display is started from the left side of the character string image. In FIG. 38 (16), a character image of “noon” is displayed.

  FIG. 38 (17) shows a state in which a dialogue display is displayed in the balloon display i1. In FIG. 38 (17), a character string image of “morning” is displayed.

  FIG. 38 (18) shows a state in which a speech display is displayed in the balloon display i1. In FIG. 38 (18), a character string image of “weather in the morning” is displayed.

  FIG. 38 (19) shows a state where the display of the dialogue display in the balloon display i1 is completed. In the balloon display i, a character string image of "weather in the morning" and a symbol of "sun mark" are displayed as a line display.

  FIG. 38 (20) shows a state in which a button image f1 simulating the appearance of the chance button 136 and a meter image f2 indicating an operation valid period during which the operation of the chance button 136 is valid are displayed.

  FIG. 38 (21) shows a state where the operation validity period has started. The remaining time of the operation valid period indicated by the meter image f2 has decreased.

  FIG. 38 (22) shows a state where the player is operating the chance button 136. In this example, the chance button 136 is pressed once. In this example, when the chance button 136 is pressed once during the operation validity period, the conversation notice display is continuously started. If the chance button 136 is not pressed once during the operation validity period, the conversation notice display may be continuously displayed, or the conversation notice display may be terminated without continuing with a predetermined probability. Good.

FIG. 38 (23) shows a state where the conversation notice display is continued. In this example, first, when the conversation notice display is continued, the old man g2 is displayed. The grandfather g2 appears from the lower left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.
FIG. 38 (24) shows a state in which the old man g2 is moving rightward.
FIG. 38 (25) shows a state where the old man g2 is moving rightward.
FIG. 38 (26) shows a state where the old man g2 is moving rightward.
FIG. 38 (27) shows a state where the old man g2 has stopped.

  FIG. 38 (28) shows a state where the display of the character name h2 including the character image of “grandfather” has been started. The character name display h2 appears from the center of the left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The character name display h2 has moved rightward.

  FIG. 38 (29) shows a state where the balloon display i2 has been started to be displayed. The balloon display i2 appears from the lower left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The balloon display i2 has moved rightward.

  FIG. 38 (30) shows a state where the character name display h2 and the balloon display i2 are moving rightward.

  FIG. 38 (31) shows a state where the character name display h2 and the balloon display i2 are moving rightward.

  FIG. 38 (32) shows a state where the character name display h2 and the balloon display i2 are stopped. The character name display h2 stops above the old man g2, and the balloon display i2 stops near the left side of the old man g2.

  FIG. 38 (33) shows a state in which a speech display which is the speech (line) of grandfather g2 has been started in balloon display i2. The line display is started from the left side of the character string image. In FIG. 38 (33), a character image of “O” is displayed.

  FIG. 38 (34) shows a state in which a dialogue display is displayed in the balloon display i2. In FIG. 38 (34), a character string image of "noon" is displayed.

  FIG. 38 (35) shows a state in which a dialogue display is displayed in the balloon display i2. In FIG. 38 (35), a character string image of “the weather of noon” is displayed.

  FIG. 38 (36) shows a state where the display of the dialogue display in the balloon display i2 is completed. In the balloon display i2, a character image of "weather at noon" and a symbol of "cloudy mark" are displayed as a dialogue display.

  FIG. 38 (37) shows a state in which “decoration 7” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a after the conversation notice display is finished.

  FIG. 38 (38) shows a state in which “decoration 7” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c after the conversation notice display ends. Although illustration is omitted hereafter, in this example, the reach effect in “decoration 7” is started thereafter. It should be noted that the reach effect may not be started after the end of the conversation notice display.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present example has a first display (first dialogue notice display shown in FIG. 38 (19)) and a second display (second dialogue shown in FIG. 38 (36)). Notice display) can be displayed. The first display includes a main window g1, a balloon display i1, a serif display in the balloon display i1, and a character name display h1 displayed in FIG. 38 (19). The second display includes the grandfather g2, the balloon display i2, the words in the balloon display i2, and the character name display h2 displayed in FIG. 38 (36). A first conversation notice display is displayed by the first display and the second display. Further, the first display and the second display of the present example are advance notice displays of the change. In this example, the first display is displayed after the grandfather g2 is displayed in FIGS. 38 (6) to (8). The grandfather g2 may be displayed before the display of the first display. According to the pachinko machine 100 of the present example, by notifying that the second display including the grandfather g2 is displayed, the player can expect that the second display may be displayed, In some cases, the interest of the player can be improved.

  Next, an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIGS. 39 (1) to (38) show an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 in chronological order. The states shown in FIGS. 39 (1) to (5) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 38 (1) to (5), and a description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 39 (6) shows a state where the conversation notice display has been started. In the conversation notice display of this example, first, the gate g1 is displayed. The main hall g1 appears from the upper right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.
FIGS. 39 (7) to (10) show a state in which the tongue g1 is moving to the left.

  The states shown in FIGS. 39 (10) to (38) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 38 (10) to (38), and a description thereof will be omitted. In this example, before the main line dialogue is displayed in FIG. 39 (19), the main room g1 is displayed from the beginning, and other characters such as the grandfather g2 are not displayed. Thus, there is a case where the grandfather g2 is not displayed before the display of the first display.

  Next, an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described using FIGS. 40 (1) to (38). 40 (1) to (38) show an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 in chronological order. The states shown in FIGS. 40 (1) to (22) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 38 (1) to (22), and a description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 40 (23) shows a state where the conversation notice display is continued. In this example, first, when the conversation notice display is continued, a princess character image (hereinafter, referred to as “princess”) g3 is displayed. The princess g3 appears from the lower left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.
FIG. 40 (24) shows a state where princess g3 is moving rightward.
FIG. 40 (25) shows a state where princess g3 is moving rightward.

  FIG. 40 (26) shows a state where princess g3 has changed to grandfather g2 while princess g3 is moving rightward. Old man g2 is moving to the right.

  The states shown in FIGS. 40 (27) to (38) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 38 (27) to (38), and a description thereof will be omitted. In this example, the princess g3 is a character that does not appear in the second display shown in FIG. According to the pachinko machine 100 of the present example, the character is different when the second display is displayed by performing the gase notice that displays the princess g3 that does not appear in the second display shown in FIG. 40 (36). In some cases, the player's surprise can be surprised and the interest of the player can be improved.

  Next, an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 41 (1) to (38). 41 (1) to (38) show an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 in chronological order. The states shown in FIGS. 41 (1) to (5) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 38 (1) to (5), and a description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 41 (6) shows a state where the conversation notice display has been started. In the conversation notice display of this example, first, the princess g3 is displayed. The princess g3 appears from the upper right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.
FIG. 41 (7) shows a state where princess g3 is moving to the left.
FIG. 41 (8) shows a state in which the princess g3 is moving to the left.

  FIG. 41 (9) shows a state in which the princess g3 has changed to the main hall g1 while the princess g3 is moving to the left. The main hall g1 is moving to the left.

  The states shown in FIGS. 41 (10) to (38) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 38 (10) to (38), and thus description thereof will be omitted. In this example, the princess g3 is a character that does not appear in the first display shown in FIG. 41 (10). According to the pachinko machine 100 of the present example, by performing a gase notice that displays the princess g3 that does not appear in the first display shown in FIG. 41 (10), the character is different when the first display is displayed. In some cases, the player's surprise can be surprised and the interest of the player can be improved.

  Next, an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIGS. 42 (1) to (38) show an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 in chronological order. The states shown in FIGS. 42 (1) to (25) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 38 (1) to (25), and a description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 42 (26) shows a state where grandfather g2 has changed to princess g3 while grandfather g2 is moving rightward. Princess g3 is moving to the right.
FIG. 42 (27) shows a state where princess g3 has stopped.

  FIG. 42 (28) illustrates a state where the display of the character name h3 including the character image of “princess” has been started. The character name display h3 appears from the center of the left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The character name display h3 has moved to the right.

  FIG. 42 (29) shows a state in which the balloon display i3 has been started to be displayed. The balloon display i3 appears from below the left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The balloon display i3 has moved rightward.

  FIG. 42 (30) shows a state where the character name display h3 and the balloon display i3 are moving rightward.

  FIG. 42 (31) shows a state where the character name display h3 and the balloon display i3 are moving rightward.

  FIG. 42 (32) shows a state where the character name display h3 and the balloon display i3 are stopped. The character name display h3 stops above the princess g3, and the balloon display i3 stops near the left side of the princess g3.

  FIG. 42 (33) shows a state in which a speech display, which is a speech (line) of princess g3, has been started in balloon display i3. The line display is started from the left side of the character string image. In FIG. 42 (33), a character image of “PM” is displayed.

  FIG. 42 (34) shows a state in which a dialogue display is displayed in the balloon display i3. In FIG. 42 (34), a character string image of “weather in the afternoon” is displayed.

  FIG. 42 (35) shows a state in which a dialogue display is displayed in the balloon display i3. In FIG. 42 (35), a character string image of “weather in the afternoon” is displayed.

  FIG. 42 (36) shows a state where the display of the dialogue display in the balloon display i3 is completed. In the balloon display i3, a character image of "weather in the afternoon" and a symbol of "rain mark" are displayed as a dialogue display.

  The states shown in FIGS. 42 (37) and (38) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 38 (37) and (38), and a description thereof will be omitted. The decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present example has a first display (first dialogue notice display shown in FIG. 42 (19)) and a second display (second dialogue shown in FIG. 42 (36)). Notice display) can be displayed. The first display includes a hall g1, a balloon display i1, a dialogue display in the balloon display i1, and a character name display h1 displayed in FIG. 42 (19). The second display includes a princess g3, a balloon display i3, a serif display in the balloon display i3, and a character name display h3 displayed in FIG. 42 (36). A first conversation notice display is displayed by the first display and the second display. Further, the first display and the second display of the present example are advance notice displays of the change. Also, in this example, after the old man g2 is displayed in FIGS. 42 (6) to (8), the old man g2 is displayed in FIGS. 42 (23) to (25). ) Is a notice that does not appear in the conversation notice display shown in (). According to the pachinko machine 100 of the present example, it is possible to make the character different when the conversation notice display is displayed by performing the gaseous notice that displays the grandfather g2 that does not appear in the conversation notice display, thereby surprising the player's surprise. In some cases, the interest of the player can be improved.

  Next, an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 43 (1) to (38). 43 (1) to (38) show an example of the effect of the pachinko machine 100 in chronological order. The states shown in FIGS. 43 (1) to (5) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 38 (1) to (5), and a description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 43 (6) shows a state where the conversation notice display has been started. In the conversation notice display of this example, first, the old man g2 is displayed. The grandfather g2 appears from the upper right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.
FIG. 43 (7) shows a state where the old man g2 is moving to the left.

  FIG. 43 (8) shows a state where grandfather g2 has changed to princess g3 while grandfather g2 is moving to the left. Princess g3 has moved to the left.

  FIG. 43 (9) shows a state in which the princess g3 has changed to the main hall g1 while the princess g3 is moving to the left. The main hall g1 is moving to the left.

  The states shown in FIGS. 43 (10) to (38) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 38 (10) to (38), and a description thereof will be omitted. In this example, as shown in FIGS. 43 (6) to (10), the character image changes twice during the moving animation of the character (during the moving display), and the moving display of the three character images is displayed. In addition, in this example, the grandfather g2, the princess g3, and the lord g1 are displayed in this order, but the princess g3, the princess g2, and the lord g1 may be displayed in this order. Further, the number of character images displayed during the moving display of the character image may be four or more.

    Next, an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIGS. 44 (1) to (38) show an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 in chronological order. The states shown in FIGS. 44 (1) to (5) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 38 (1) to (5), and a description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 44 (6) shows a state where the conversation notice display has been started. In the conversation notice display of this example, first, the gate g1 is displayed. The main hall g1 appears from the upper right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 44 (7) shows a state in which the lord g1 has changed to the grandfather g2 while the lord g1 is moving to the left. Old man g2 is moving to the left.

  FIG. 44 (8) shows a state in which grandfather g2 has changed to princess g3 while grandfather g2 is moving to the left. Princess g3 has moved to the left.

  FIG. 44 (9) shows a state in which the princess g3 has changed to the main hall g1 while the princess g3 is moving to the left. The main hall g1 is moving to the left.

  The states shown in FIGS. 44 (10) to (38) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 38 (10) to (38), and a description thereof will be omitted. In this example, as shown in FIGS. 44 (6) to (10), during the display of the moving animation of the character, the character images are arranged such that the three characters make a round in the order of ton g1, grandfather g2, princess g3, and ton g1. Is displayed. Note that four or more characters may be displayed so as to make one cycle or one and a half cycle during the movement animation display of the character. Also, a plurality of character images may be displayed so as to make a round during the moving animation display of the character shown in FIGS. 44 (23) to (27).

  Next, an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described using FIGS. 45 (1) to (38). FIGS. 44 (1) to (38) show an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 in chronological order. The states shown in FIGS. 44 (1) to (5) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 38 (1) to (5), and a description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 45 (6) shows a state where the conversation notice display has been started. In the conversation notice display of this example, first, the gate g1 is displayed. The main hall g1 appears from the upper right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 45 (7) shows a state in which the lord g1 has changed to the grandfather g2 while the lord g1 is moving to the left. Old man g2 is moving to the left. It should be noted that at a point in time when the entirety of the main part g1 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 45 (8) shows a state in which grandfather g2 has changed to princess g3 while grandfather g2 is moving to the left. Princess g3 has moved to the left.

  FIG. 45 (9) shows a state where princess g3 has changed to grandfather g2 while princess g3 is moving to the left. The main hall g1 is moving to the left.

  FIG. 45 (10) shows a state in which while the grandfather g2 is moving to the left, the grandfather g1 stops after the grandfather g2 changes to the grandfather g1. After the grandfather g2 stops or at the same time as the grandfather g2 stops, it may change to the main building g1.

  The states shown in FIGS. 45 (11) to (38) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 38 (11) to (38), and a description thereof will be omitted. In the present example, as shown in FIGS. 45 (6) to (10), during the display of the moving animation of the character, the character image makes three rounds in the order of ton g1, grandfather g2, princess g3, grandfather g2, and ton g1. Will be displayed. The character may change in the order of the princess g1, the grandfather g2, and the princess g3, and then change in the reverse direction, such as the princess g3, the grandfather g2, and the princess g1. Note that, during the display of the animation of the movement of the character, four or more characters may be displayed so as to make a circuit and change in a direction opposite to the circuit. Further, during the moving animation display of the character shown in FIGS. 45 (23) to (27), a display in which the character changes as shown in FIGS. 45 (6) to (10) may be displayed.

  Next, an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 46 (1) to (38). 46 (1) to (38) show an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 in chronological order. The states shown in FIGS. 46 (1) to (5) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 38 (1) to (5), and a description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 46 (6) shows a state where the conversation notice display has been started. In the conversation notice display of this example, first, the old man g2 is displayed. The grandfather g2 appears from the upper right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 46 (7) shows a state in which an animation in which the expression of the old man g2 changes while the old man g2 is moving to the left is displayed. As described above, an animation in which the mode of the old man g2 changes may be displayed during the moving animation of the old man g2.

  FIG. 46 (8) shows a state in which the old man g2 has changed to the main house g1 while the old man g2 is moving to the left. The main hall g1 is moving to the left.

  FIG. 46 (9) shows a state in which an animation in which the expression of the hall g1 changes is displayed while the hall g1 is moving to the left. As described above, an animation in which the mode of the main hall 1 changes during the moving animation of the main hall g1 may be displayed.

  FIG. 46 (10) shows a state where the main body g1 stops after the facial expression of the main body g1 has changed. Note that an animation in which the expression of the gallary g1 changes after or simultaneously with the halt g1 may be displayed. Further, in this example, in the animation of the movement of the character, the display period of the g1 displayed in the conversation notice shown in FIG. 46 (19) is longer than the display period of the grandfather g2. Thus, in the animation of the movement of the character, the display period of the character displayed in the conversation notice display may be the longest.

  The states shown in FIGS. 46 (11) to (22) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 38 (11) to (22), and a description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 46 (23) shows a state where the conversation notice display is continued. In this example, first, when the conversation notice display is continued, the old man g2 is displayed. The grandfather g2 appears from the lower left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 46 (24) shows a state in which an animation in which the expression of grandfather g2 changes is displayed while grandfather g2 is moving rightward. As described above, an animation in which the mode of the old man g2 changes may be displayed during the moving animation of the old man g2.

  FIG. 46 (25) shows a state in which an animation in which the expression of grandfather g2 changes is displayed while grandfather g2 is moving rightward. As described above, an animation in which the mode of the old man g2 changes may be displayed during the moving animation of the old man g2.

  FIG. 46 (26) shows a state in which an animation in which the expression of the old man g2 changes while the old man g2 is moving rightward is displayed. As described above, an animation in which the mode of the main hall 1 changes during the moving animation of the main hall g1 may be displayed.

  FIG. 46 (27) shows a state where the old man g2 has stopped. Note that an animation in which the expression of the old man g2 changes after or simultaneously with the stop of the old man g2 may be displayed.

  The states shown in FIGS. 46 (28) to (38) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 38 (38) to (38), and thus description thereof will be omitted. As in this example, a display in which the aspect (for example, expression) of the character changes while the moving animation of the character is displayed may be displayed.

  Next, an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described using FIGS. 47 (1) to (40). 47 (1) to (40) show an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 in chronological order. The state shown in FIG. 47A is the same as the state shown in FIG.

  FIG. 47 (2) shows a state where “decoration 7” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a.

  FIG. 47 (3) shows a state where “decoration 8” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c.

  FIG. 47 (4) shows a state in which the decorative symbol of the pseudo series is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208a. The decorative pattern of the pseudo-ren is displayed when the effect display of the pseudo-ren is performed. The pseudo-run is an effect of performing a pseudo-change as if the display of the change of the decorative symbol was performed a plurality of times during one special-figure change game, and is a notice effect of the change. After the decoration symbol of the pseudo ream is displayed, the second variation display of the decoration symbol (the second repetition of the pseudo ream) is started.

  FIG. 47 (5) shows a state where the second pseudo run is started. Further, the movable body 700 moves upward and stops. In addition, during the second execution of the pseudo run, “× 2” is displayed in the display area d to notify that the second execution of the pseudo run is being executed.

  FIG. 47 (6) shows a state in which a button image f1 simulating the appearance of the chance button 136 and a meter image f2 indicating an operation valid period during which the operation of the chance button 136 is valid are displayed. The button image f1 and the meter image f2 are displays that prompt the player to operate the chance button 136.

  FIG. 47 (7) shows a state where the operation validity period has started. The remaining time of the operation valid period indicated by the meter image f2 has decreased.

  FIG. 47 (8) shows a state where the player is operating the chance button 136. In this example, the chance button 136 is pressed once. In this example, when the chance button 136 is pressed once during the operation validity period, the display of the second conversation notice display is started. Note that the first conversation notice display is the conversation notice display shown in FIG. If the chance button 136 is not pressed even once during the operation validity period, the display of the second conversation notice may be started, or the display of the second conversation notice may not start with a predetermined probability. You may.

FIG. 47 (9) shows a state where the second conversation notice display has been started. In the conversation notice display of this example, first, the princess g3 is displayed. The princess g3 appears from the upper right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.
FIG. 47 (10) shows a state where princess g3 is moving to the left.
FIG. 47 (11) shows a state in which the princess g3 is moving to the left.
FIG. 47 (12) shows a state in which the princess g3 is moving to the left.

  FIG. 47 (13) shows a state where princess g3 has stopped. Note that the character movement animations shown in FIGS. 47 (9) to (13) are shown in FIGS. 38 (6) to (10), FIGS. 40 (6) to (10), FIGS. 41 (6) to (10), and FIGS. 42 (6) to (10), FIGS. 43 (6) to (10), FIGS. 44 (6) to (10), FIGS. 45 (6) to (10), and FIGS. 46 (6) to (10) An animation similar to the animation may be displayed.

  FIG. 47 (14) shows a state where the display of character name display h3 has started. The character name display h3 appears from the upper right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The character name display h3 has moved to the left.

  FIG. 47 (15) shows a state in which the balloon display i3 has been displayed. The balloon display i3 appears from the center of the right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The balloon display i3 has moved to the left.

  FIG. 47 (16) shows a state where the character name display h3 and the balloon display i3 are moving to the left.

  FIG. 47 (17) shows a state where the character name display h3 and the balloon display i3 are moving to the left.

  FIG. 47 (18) shows a state where the character name display h3 and the balloon display i3 are stopped. The character name display h3 stops above the princess g3, and the balloon display i3 stops near the right side of the princess g3.

  FIG. 47 (19) shows a state in which a speech display, which is a speech (line) of princess g3, has been started to be displayed in balloon display i3. The line display is started from the left side of the character string image. In FIG. 47 (19), a character image of “noon” is displayed.

  FIG. 47 (20) shows a state in which a dialogue display is displayed in the balloon display i3. In FIG. 47 (21), a character string image of “afternoon” is displayed.

  FIG. 47 (21) shows a state in which a dialogue display is displayed in the balloon display i3. In FIG. 47 (21), a character string image of “weather in the afternoon” is displayed.

  FIG. 47 (22) shows a state where the display of the dialogue display in the balloon display i3 is completed. In the balloon display i3, a character string image of "weather in the afternoon" and a symbol of "rain mark" are displayed as a dialogue display.

  FIG. 47 (23) shows a state in which a button image f1 simulating the appearance of the chance button 136 and a meter image f2 indicating an operation valid period during which the operation of the chance button 136 is valid are displayed.

    FIG. 47 (24) shows a state in which the operation validity period has started. The remaining time of the operation valid period indicated by the meter image f2 has decreased.

  FIG. 47 (25) shows a state where the player is operating the chance button 136. In this example, the chance button 136 is pressed once. In this example, when the chance button 136 is pressed once during the operation validity period, the conversation notice display is continuously started. If the chance button 136 is not pressed once during the operation validity period, the conversation notice display may be continuously displayed, or the conversation notice display may be terminated without continuing with a predetermined probability. Good.

FIG. 47 (26) shows a state where the conversation notice display is continued. In this example, first, when the conversation notice display is continued, the old man g2 is displayed. The grandfather g2 appears from the lower left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.
FIG. 47 (27) shows a state where the old man g2 is moving rightward.
FIG. 47 (28) shows a state where the old man g2 is moving rightward.
FIG. 47 (29) shows a state where the old man g2 is moving rightward.
FIG. 47 (30) shows a state where the old man g2 has stopped.

  FIG. 47 (31) shows a state in which the display of the character name h2 including the character image of "grandfather" has been started. The character name display h2 appears from the center of the left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The character name display h2 has moved rightward.

  FIG. 47 (32) shows a state in which the balloon display i2 is started to be displayed. The balloon display i2 appears from the lower left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The balloon display i2 has moved rightward.

  FIG. 47 (33) shows a state where the character name display h2 and the balloon display i2 are moving rightward.

  FIG. 47 (34) shows a state where the character name display h2 and the balloon display i2 are moving rightward.

  FIG. 47 (35) shows a state where the character name display h2 and the balloon display i2 are stopped. The character name display h2 stops above the old man g2, and the balloon display i2 stops near the left side of the old man g2.

  FIG. 47 (36) shows a state in which the display of the dialogue, which is the dialogue (line) of grandfather g2, has been started in balloon display i2. The line display is started from the left side of the character string image. In FIG. 47 (36), a character image of “O” is displayed.

  FIG. 47 (37) shows a state in which a dialogue display is displayed in the balloon display i2. In FIG. 47 (37), a character string image of "noon" is displayed.

  FIG. 47 (38) shows a state in which a dialogue display is displayed in the balloon display i2. In FIG. 47 (38), a character string image of "weather at noon" is displayed.

  FIG. 47 (39) shows a state where the display of the dialogue display in the balloon display i2 is completed. In the balloon display i2, a character image of "weather at noon" and a symbol of "cloudy mark" are displayed as a dialogue display. Further, the mode of the balloon display i2 changes from white to blue, and the mode of the character name display h2 changes from white to blue. The jackpot reliability is set higher for blue than for white. As described above, in the second conversation notice display, a display with high jackpot reliability may be displayed.

  FIG. 47 (40) shows a state in which “decoration 7” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c after the conversation notice display ends. Although illustration is omitted hereafter, in this example, the reach effect in “decoration 7” is started thereafter.

  In this example, after the first conversation notice display (first conversation notice display) shown in FIG. 47 (1) is displayed, as shown in FIG. 47 (39), the second conversation notice display (second conversation notice display) (Conversation notice display) is displayed. In this way, a plurality of conversation notice displays may be displayed in one special figure changing game. Note that the larger the number of conversation announcement displays, the higher the jackpot reliability may be set.

  Next, an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 48 (1) to (38) show an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 in chronological order. The states shown in FIGS. 48 (1) to (15) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 38 (1) to (15), and a description thereof will be omitted.

  FIGS. 48 (16) to (18) show a state in which a moving display (moving animation) of the dialogue display is displayed. The serif display is moving from the right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 to the inside of the balloon display h1 on the left. In this manner, the moving animation of the dialogue display may be displayed.

  FIG. 48 (19) shows a state where the dialogue display is stopped within the balloon display h1.

  The states shown in FIGS. 48 (20) to (32) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 38 (20) to (32), and thus description thereof will be omitted.

  FIGS. 48 (33) to (35) show a state in which a moving display (moving animation) of the dialogue display is displayed. The dialogue display moves from the left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 to the inside of the balloon display h2 on the left. In this manner, the moving animation of the dialogue display may be displayed.

  FIG. 48 (36) shows a state in which the dialogue display is stopped within the balloon display h1.

  The states shown in FIGS. 48 (37) and (38) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 38 (37) and (38), and thus description thereof will be omitted. In this example, a moving animation of dialogue display is displayed. In this manner, the moving animation of the dialogue display may be displayed.

  Next, an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 49 (1) to (38). FIGS. 49 (1) to (38) show an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 in chronological order. The states shown in FIGS. 49 (1) to (5) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 38 (1) to (5), and a description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 49 (6) shows a state where the conversation notice display has been started. In the conversation notice display of this example, the old man g2 is displayed. The grandfather g2 appears from the lower right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.
FIG. 49 (7) shows a state where the old man g2 is moving to the left.
FIG. 49 (8) shows a state where the old man g2 is moving to the left.

  FIG. 49 (9) shows a state in which the grandfather g2 changes to a character image (hereinafter, referred to as a “lord”) g1 while the grandfather g2 is moving to the left. The main hall g1 is moving to the left.

  FIG. 49 (10) shows a state where the gate g1 has stopped. As shown in FIGS. 49 (6) to (10), the decorative symbol display device 208 can display a moving animation of the character. The animation of the movement of the character in this example is a display including the main building g1 and the grandfather g2.

  FIG. 49 (11) shows a state in which the display of the character name h1 including the character image of “dono” (hereinafter, referred to as “character name display”) is started. The character name display h1 appears from the center of the right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The character name display h1 has moved to the left.

  FIG. 49 (12) shows a state where the balloon display i1 has been started to be displayed. The balloon display i1 appears from the lower right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The balloon display i1 has moved to the left.

  FIG. 49 (13) shows a state where the character name display h1 and the balloon display i1 are moving to the left.

  FIG. 49 (14) shows a state where the character name display h1 and the balloon display i1 are moving to the left.

  FIG. 49 (15) shows a state where the character name display h1 and the balloon display i1 are stopped. The character name display h1 stops above the main hall g1, and the balloon display i1 stops near the right side of the main hall g1.

  FIG. 49 (16) shows a state in which a speech display, which is a speech (line) of the tongue g1, has been started to be displayed in the balloon display i1. The line display is started from the left side of the character string image. In FIG. 49 (16), a character image of “noon” is displayed.

  FIG. 49 (17) shows a state in which a dialogue display is displayed in the balloon display i1. In FIG. 49 (17), a character string image of “morning” is displayed.

  FIG. 49 (18) shows a state in which a dialogue display is displayed in the balloon display i1. In FIG. 49 (18), a character string image of “weather in the morning” is displayed.

  FIG. 49 (19) shows a state where the display of the dialogue display in the balloon display i1 is completed. In the balloon display i, a character string image of "weather in the morning" and a symbol of "sun mark" are displayed as a line display. In this example, as compared with FIG. 38 (19), the main building g1, the character name display h1, the balloon display h1, and the serif display are displayed below the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 49 (20) shows a state in which a button image f1 simulating the appearance of the chance button 136 and a meter image f2 indicating an operation valid period during which the operation of the chance button 136 is valid are displayed. The button image f1 and the meter image f2 are displayed so as to overlap a part (a part of the first display) of the balloon display h1.

  FIG. 49 (21) shows a state where the operation validity period has started. The remaining time of the operation valid period indicated by the meter image f2 has decreased.

  FIG. 49 (22) shows a state where the player is operating the chance button 136. In this example, the chance button 136 is pressed once. In this example, when the chance button 136 is pressed once during the operation validity period, the conversation notice display is continuously started. If the chance button 136 is not pressed once during the operation validity period, the conversation notice display may be continuously displayed, or the conversation notice display may be terminated without continuing with a predetermined probability. Good.

  FIG. 49 (23) shows a state where the conversation notice display is continued. In this example, first, when the conversation notice display is continued, the old man g2 is displayed. The grandfather g2 appears from the lower left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Simultaneously with the appearance of the grandfather g2, an animation is displayed in which the tongue g1, the character name display h1, the balloon display h1, and the dialogue display move upward. Note that the start timing of the animation may be before the appearance of the old man g2 or after the appearance of the old man g2.

  FIG. 49 (24) shows a state where the grandfather g2 has moved rightward, and the main hall g1, the character name display h1, the balloon display h1, and the dialogue display have moved upward. In addition, the grandfather g2 is displayed so as to overlap a part of the hall g1 and the balloon h1.

  FIG. 49 (25) shows a state where the grandfather g2 has moved rightward, and the main hall g1, the character name display h1, the balloon display h1, and the dialogue display have moved upward.

  FIG. 49 (26) shows a state where the grandfather g2 has moved rightward, and the main hall g1, the character name display h1, the balloon display h1, and the dialogue display have moved upward.

  FIG. 49 (27) shows a state in which the grandfather g2 has stopped and the main building g1, the character name display h1, the balloon display h1, and the dialogue display have stopped.

  The states shown in FIGS. 49 (28) to (38) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 38 (28) to (38), and thus description thereof will be omitted. In this example, an animation in which the first display such as the main j1 moves at the start of the display of the second display such as the grandfather g2 of the conversation notice display is displayed.

  Next, an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 50 (1) to (38) show an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 in chronological order. The states shown in FIGS. 50 (1) to (22) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 49 (1) to (22), and a description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 50 (23) shows a state where the conversation notice display is continued. In this example, first, when the conversation notice display is continued, the old man g2 is displayed. The grandfather g2 appears from the lower left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Simultaneously with the appearance of the grandfather g2, an animation is displayed in which the tongue g1, the character name display h1, the balloon display h1, and the dialogue display move upward. Note that the start timing of the animation may be before the appearance of the old man g2 or after the appearance of the old man g2.

  FIG. 50 (24) shows a state in which the grandfather g2 has moved rightward, and the tongue g1, character name display h1, balloon display h1, and dialogue display have moved upward. In addition, the grandfather g2 is displayed so as to overlap a part of the hall g1 and the balloon h1.

  FIG. 50 (25) shows a state where the grandfather g2 has moved rightward, and the main hall g1, the character name display h1, the balloon display h1, and the dialogue display have moved upward.

FIG. 50 (26) shows a state in which the grandfather g2 has moved to the right, and the hall g1, the character name display h1, the speech balloon display h1, and the dialogue display have stopped.
FIG. 50 (27) shows a state where the old man g2 has stopped.

  In the states shown in FIGS. 50 (28) to (32), as in the states shown in FIGS. 38 (28) to (32), an animation in which the character name display h2 and the balloon display i2 move to the left is displayed. In this example, the character name display h2 and the balloon display i2 are displayed so as to overlap the hall g1, the character name display h1, the balloon display h1, and the dialogue display. In this example, the moving animation of the second display such as the grandfather g2 of the conversation notice display is displayed so as to overlap the first display such as the main hall j1.

  FIGS. 50 (32) to (35) show a state in which the dialogue display is displayed in the balloon display h2, similarly to the states shown in FIGS. 38 (32) to (35).

  FIG. 50 (36) shows a state where the display of the dialogue display in the balloon display i2 is completed. In the balloon display i2, a character image of "weather at noon" and a symbol of "cloudy mark" are displayed as a dialogue display. In this example, the balloon display h2 and the dialogue display in the balloon display h2 are overlapped and displayed in the balloon display h1 and the dialogue display in the balloon display h1.

  The states shown in FIGS. 50 (37) and (38) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 50 (37) and (38), and a description thereof will be omitted. In this example, the second display such as the grandfather g2 of the conversation notice display is displayed so as to overlap the first display such as the main hall j1.

  Next, an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 51 (1) to (38). 51 (1) to (38) show an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 in chronological order. The states shown in FIGS. 51 (1) to (5) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 38 (1) to (5), and a description thereof will be omitted.

  FIGS. 51 (6) to (10) show a state where the moving animation of the character is displayed as in FIGS. 38 (6) to (10). In the present example, the display size of the grandfather g2 and the main house g1 is displayed in a larger size than in the examples shown in FIGS.

  FIGS. 51 (11) to (19) show a state in which the character name display h1, the balloon display h1, and the dialogue display are displayed as in FIGS. 38 (11) to (19). In this example, the display size of the character name display h1, the balloon display h1, and the dialogue display is displayed in a larger size than the examples shown in FIGS. 38 (11) to (19).

  FIG. 51 (20) shows a state in which a button image f1 simulating the appearance of the chance button 136 and a meter image f2 indicating an operation valid period during which the operation of the chance button 136 is valid are displayed. The button image f1 is displayed so as to overlap a part of the balloon display h1 (a part of the first display).

  FIG. 51 (21) shows a state in which the operation validity period has started. The remaining time of the operation valid period indicated by the meter image f2 has decreased.

  FIG. 51 (22) shows a state where the player is operating the chance button 136. In this example, the chance button 136 is pressed once. In this example, when the chance button 136 is pressed once during the operation validity period, the conversation notice display is continuously started. If the chance button 136 is not pressed once during the operation validity period, the conversation notice display may be continuously displayed, or the conversation notice display may be terminated without continuing with a predetermined probability. Good.

  FIG. 51 (23) shows a state where the conversation notice display is continued. In this example, first, when the conversation notice display is continued, the old man g2 is displayed. The grandfather g2 appears from the lower left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. At the same time as the appearance of the grandfather g2, an animation is displayed in which the display size of the main building g1, the character name display h1, the balloon display h1, and the dialogue display is reduced. Note that the start timing of the animation may be before the appearance of the old man g2 or after the appearance of the old man g2.

  FIG. 51 (24) shows a state in which an animation is displayed in which the grandfather g2 moves to the right and the display size of the main hall g1, character name display h1, balloon display h1, and dialogue display is reduced.

  FIG. 51 (25) shows a state in which an animation is displayed in which the grandfather g2 moves to the right and the display size of the main hall g1, character name display h1, balloon display h1, and dialogue display is reduced.

  FIG. 51 (26) shows a state in which an animation is displayed in which the grandfather g2 moves to the right and the display size of the main hall g1, character name display h1, balloon display h1, and dialogue display is reduced.

  FIG. 51 (27) shows a state in which the animation in which the display size of the grandfather g2 is stopped and the display size of the main character g1, the character name display h1, the balloon display h1, and the dialogue display is reduced has ended. The display sizes of the main hall g1, the character name display h1, the balloon display h1, and the dialogue display are the same as the examples shown in FIGS. 38 (6) to (36).

  The states shown in FIGS. 51 (28) to (38) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 38 (28) to (38), and thus description thereof will be omitted. In the present example, the first display such as the g1 of the conversation notice display is enlarged and displayed until the display of the second g2 or the like is started, and during the animation of the movement of the g2, the first display such as the g1 is displayed. The first display is reduced. In the state shown in FIG. 51 (36), a part of the balloon display h1 may be displayed so as to overlap a part of the balloon display h2. In this case, the display size of the balloon display h1 is changed to the balloon display. The display size may overlap with a part of h2.

Next, an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 52 (1) to (38). FIGS. 52 (1) to (38) show an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 in chronological order. In FIGS. 52 (1) to (38), the same effect as the conversation notice display shown in FIGS. 49 (1) to (38) is performed. For this reason, detailed description of the conversation announcement display in this example is omitted.
FIG. 52 (1) shows the same state as FIG. 49 (1).

  FIG. 52 (2) shows a state where the display of the timer notice display j is started. In the timer notice display j, a character string image of “attention!” Is displayed in a horizontally long rectangular frame. The timer notice display j performs a countdown display for a predetermined time, and when the countdown reaches 0 seconds, a predetermined effect (for example, an operation of the movable body or a predetermined notification display) is performed. Before the countdown is started, a character string image of “attention!” Is displayed in the timer notice display j.

FIGS. 52 (3) and (4) show the same state as FIGS. 49 (3) and (4) except that the timer notice display j is displayed.
FIG. 52 (5) shows the same state as FIG. 49 (5).

  FIG. 52 (6) shows a state where the conversation notice display has been started as in FIG. 49 (6). In this example, the countdown display of the timer advance display j is started together with the start of the conversation advance display. In this example, a countdown display of 40 seconds is performed.

  In FIGS. 52 (6) to (19), the conversation notice display is displayed in the same manner as in FIGS. 49 (6) to (19). In this example, the countdown display of the timer notice display j is also displayed. As shown in FIGS. 52 (6) to (19), the timer notice display j is displayed so as to overlap with the character of the g1 and the grandfather g2, the character name display h1, the balloon display i1, and the dialogue display. For example, in FIG. 52 (14) and thereafter, the entire character name display h1 is displayed overlapping the timer notice display j, and the character name display h1 is not visible.

FIGS. 52 (20) and (21) show the same state as FIGS. 49 (20) and (21) except that the timer notice display j is displayed.
FIG. 52 (22) shows the same state as FIG. 49 (5).

  FIG. 52 (23) shows a state where the conversation notice display is continued similarly to FIG. 49 (23). In FIG. 49 (23), the remaining time of the countdown display of the timer notice display j is 36.99 seconds.

  In FIGS. 52 (24) to (36), a conversation notice display is displayed as in FIGS. 49 (24) to (36). In this example, a countdown display of the timer notice display j is also displayed. As shown in FIGS. 52 (24) to (36), the timer notice display j is displayed so as to overlap with the character of the grandfather g2, the character name display h2, the balloon display i2, and the dialogue display. For example, in FIG. 52 (30), the entire character name display h2 is displayed overlapping the timer notice display j, and the character name display h2 is not visible.

  FIGS. 52 (37) and (38) show the same state as FIGS. 49 (37) and (38) except that the timer notice display j is displayed. Thus, the timer notice display j may be displayed together with the conversation notice display. Instead of the timer notice display j, another display (ball-off error display, door open error display, other notice display, change effect display of the hold icon) or the like may be displayed. Further, as shown in the timer notice display j, the length of the display period of the character movement animation shown in FIGS. 52 (6) to (10) is the length of the character g1, the character name shown in FIGS. 52 (19) to (36). The display period of the conversation notice display including the display h1, the balloon display i1, and the dialogue notice display is shorter than the display period.

Next, an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIGS. 53 (1) to (38) show an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 in chronological order. In FIGS. 52 (1) to (38), the same effect as the conversation notice display shown in FIGS. 49 (1) to (38) is performed. For this reason, detailed description of the conversation announcement display in this example is omitted.
FIG. 53 (1) shows the same state as FIG. 49 (1).

    FIG. 53 (2) shows a state where the movable body k has moved to a position in front of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this example, the movable body k is moved before the display of the conversation notice display is started. The movable body k may perform reciprocating movements such as up, down, left, and right in front of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, or may perform a vibration operation. In this example, the movable body k is located in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 from the start of the symbol variation display to the start of the reach effect.

FIGS. 53 (3) and (4) show the same state as FIGS. 49 (3) and (4) except that the movable body k is located in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. In FIGS. 52 (3) and (4), the entire button image f1 is hidden by the movable body k.
FIG. 53 (5) shows the same state as FIG. 49 (5).

  In FIGS. 53 (6) to (19), a conversation notice display is displayed in the same manner as in FIGS. 49 (6) to (19). At least part of h1, the balloon display i1, and the dialogue display become invisible to the player.

FIGS. 53 (20) and (21) show the same state as FIGS. 49 (3) and (4) except that the movable body k is located in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. In FIGS. 53 (20) and (21), the entire button image f1 is hidden by the movable body k.
FIG. 53 (22) shows the same state as FIG. 49 (22).

  FIG. 53 (23) shows a state where the conversation notice display is continued as in FIG. 49 (23). In FIGS. 53 (24) to (36), the conversation notice display is displayed in the same manner as in FIGS. 49 (24) to (36). In this example, the characters of the g1 and g2 and the character name are displayed by the movable body k. At least some of h1, h2, balloon displays i1, i2, and dialogue display become invisible to the player.

  FIG. 53 (37) shows the same state as FIG. 49 (37) except that the movable body k is located in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. 53 (38) shows a state where the reach effect has been started. When the reach effect is started, the movable body k moves from the position in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 and returns to the initial position. In this way, the movement effect of the movable body k may be performed together with the conversation notice display.

Next, an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIGS. 54 (1) to (38) show an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 in chronological order. In FIGS. 54 (1) to (38), the same effect as the conversation notice display shown in FIGS. 49 (1) to (38) is performed. For this reason, detailed description of the conversation announcement display in this example is omitted.
FIG. 54 (1) shows the same state as FIG. 49 (1).

  FIG. 54 (2) shows a state in which the pattern display m is displayed by the light guide plate arranged in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the pachinko machine 100 of this example, a light guide plate is disposed in front of the decorative design display device 208, and the pattern display m can be displayed by the light emission of the light guide plate. As shown in FIGS. 54 (2) to (37), the pattern display m is displayed so as to overlap the display on the decorative symbol display device 208. For example, as shown in FIG. 54 (36), the pattern display m is displayed so as to overlap the first display such as the main hall g1 and the second display such as the grandfather g2.

  FIG. 54 (38) shows a state where the reach effect has been started. When the reach effect is started, the pattern display m is deleted. As described above, the display by the light guide plate may be displayed together with the conversation notice display.

  Next, an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 55 (1) to (38). 55 (1) to (38) show an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 in chronological order. FIGS. 55 (1) to 55 (5) show the same states as those shown in FIGS. 38 (1) to 38 (5), and a description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 55 (6) shows a state where the conversation notice display has been started. In the conversation notice display of this example, the character image is displayed in a square frame, and the inside of the square frame is displayed in a predetermined color. The colors in the square frame are set to white, blue, and green in ascending order of the jackpot reliability. In FIG. 55 (6), the inside of the square frame surrounding the old man g2 is displayed in white. Note that the conversation notice display of this example is the same as the conversation notice display shown in FIG. 38 except that the character is displayed in a square frame.

  FIG. 55 (7) shows a state where the old man g2 is moving to the left. The inside of the square frame surrounding the old man g2 is displayed in blue.

  FIG. 55 (8) shows a state where the old man g2 is moving to the left. The inside of the square frame surrounding the old man g2 is displayed in green.

  FIG. 55 (9) shows a state in which grandfather g2 has changed to g1 while grandfather g2 is moving to the left. The main hall g1 is moving to the left. The inside of the square frame surrounding the hall g1 is displayed in blue.

  FIG. 55 (10) shows a state where the gate g1 has stopped. As shown in FIGS. 56 (6) to (10), the decorative symbol display device 208 can display a moving animation of the character. The animation of the movement of the character in this example is a display including the main building g1 and the grandfather g2. The inside of the square frame surrounding the hall g1 is displayed in white. As described above, the inside of the square frame surrounding the character changes in the order of white, blue, green, blue, and white. The order of the color change can be set arbitrarily. This color change is performed during the animation of the movement of the character.

  In the states shown in FIGS. 55 (11) to (21), the gate g1 is displayed surrounded by a square frame, and the states shown in FIGS. ) Is the same as the state shown in FIG.

  FIG. 55 (22) shows a state where the player is operating the chance button 136.

  FIG. 55 (23) shows a state where the conversation notice display is continued. In this example, first, when the conversation notice display is continued, the old man g2 is displayed. The grandfather g2 appears from the lower left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The inside of the square frame surrounding the old man g2 is displayed in white.

  FIG. 55 (24) shows a state where the old man g2 is moving rightward. The inside of the square frame surrounding the old man g2 is displayed in blue.

  FIG. 55 (25) shows a state where the old man g2 is moving rightward. The inside of the square frame surrounding the old man g2 is displayed in green.

  FIG. 55 (26) shows a state where the old man g2 is moving rightward. The inside of the square frame surrounding the old man g2 is displayed in blue.

  FIG. 55 (27) shows a state where the old man g2 has stopped. The inside of the square frame surrounding the old man g2 is displayed in blue.

  The states shown in FIGS. 55 (28) to (36) show the grandfather g2 surrounded by a square frame, and the states shown in FIGS. 38 (28) to (36) except that the inside of the frame is blue. ), The description is omitted.

  FIGS. 55 (37) and (38) show the same state as FIGS. 38 (37) and (38). In this example, the character of the conversation notice display is displayed in a frame, and the frame is displayed in a predetermined color. The jackpot reliability is set by the color in the frame.

  Next, an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 56 (a1) to (a20). FIGS. 56 (a1) to (a20) show an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. FIGS. 56 (a1) to (a5) show the same state as the states shown in FIGS. 38 (1) to (5), and therefore description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 56 (a6) shows a state where the conversation notice display has been started. In the conversation notice display of this example, the display of the character and the character name is simultaneously started. In FIG. 56 (a6), the old man g2 and the character name display h1 have moved to the left. The character name display is different from the character, and the character name of the conversation notice display is displayed from the beginning.

  FIG. 56 (a7) shows a state where the grandfather g2 and the character name display h1 are moving to the left. Further, the balloon display i1 has been started to be displayed.

  FIG. 56 (a8) shows a state where the grandfather g2, character name display h1, and balloon display i1 are moving to the left.

  FIG. 56 (a9) shows a state where the grandfather g2 has changed to the g1 while the grandfather g2 is moving to the left. The hall g1, the character name display h1, and the balloon display i1 have moved to the left.

  FIG. 56 (a10) shows a state where the gate g1, the character name display h1, and the balloon display i1 are stopped. As described above, in the conversation notice display, the moving animation of the character name display h1 and the balloon display i1 may be displayed during the moving animation of the character.

  FIGS. 56 (a11) to (a13) show the same state as the states shown in FIGS. 38 (20) to (22).

  FIG. 56 (a14) shows a state where the conversation notice display is continued. In the conversation notice display of this example, the display of the character and the character name is simultaneously started. In FIG. 56 (a12), the old man g2 and the character name display h2 have moved to the left.

  FIG. 56 (a15) shows a state where the grandfather g2 and the character name display h2 are moving rightward.

  FIG. 56 (a16) shows a state where the grandfather g2 and the character name display h2 are moving rightward. The balloon display i2 has been started to be displayed.

  FIG. 56 (a17) shows a state where the grandfather g2, character name display h2, and balloon display i2 are moving rightward.

  FIG. 56 (a18) shows a state where the grandfather g2, character name display h2, and balloon display i2 are stopped. As described above, in the conversation notice display, the moving animation of the character name display h2 and the balloon display i2 may be displayed during the moving animation of the character.

  FIGS. 56 (a19) and (a20) show the same state as the states shown in FIGS. 38 (37) and (38). As in the present example, the moving animation of the character name display and the balloon display may be displayed during the moving animation of the character. Further, the balloon displays i1 and i2 may include a dialogue display from the beginning of the display.

  Next, an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 56 (b1) to (b20). FIGS. 56 (b1) to (b20) show an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 in chronological order. FIGS. 56 (b1) to (b5) show the same state as the states shown in FIGS. 38 (1) to (5), and a description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 56 (b6) shows a state where the conversation notice display has been started. In the conversation notice display of this example, the display of the character and the character name is simultaneously started. In FIG. 56 (b6), the old man g2 and the character name display h1 have moved to the left. The character name display is different from the character, and the character name of the conversation notice display is displayed from the beginning. Further, in this example, three square images are displayed below the character side by side in the horizontal direction. The inside of each of the three square images is displayed in white, blue, and green. At the time shown in FIG. 56 (b6), the left square image and a part of the middle square image are displayed. The left square image is white, and the middle square image is blue. These square images also move to the left with the character.

  FIG. 56 (b7) shows a state where the grandfather g2 and the character name display h1 are moving to the left. At the time shown in FIG. 56 (b7), a left square image, a center square image, and a part of the right square image are displayed. The left square image is blue, the middle square image is green, and the right square image is white. The display colors of these square images change while moving.

  FIG. 56 (b8) shows a state where the grandfather g2, character name display h1, and balloon display i1 are moving to the left. At the point shown in FIG. 56 (b8), the left square image is green, the middle square image is white, and the right square image is blue.

  FIG. 56 (b9) shows a state where the grandfather g2 has changed to the main hall g1 while the grandfather g2 is moving to the left. The hall g1, the character name display h1, and the balloon display i1 have moved to the left. At the time shown in FIG. 56 (b9), the left square image is white, the middle square image is blue, and the right square image is green.

  FIG. 56 (b10) shows a state where the gate g1, the character name display h1, and the balloon display i1 are stopped. Further, the inside of the gate g1 is displayed with a white frame surrounded by a white frame. As described above, in the conversation notice display, a frame surrounding the character is displayed in any one of the three squares displayed during the moving animation of the character. The display colors in the frame surrounding the character are white, blue, and green in ascending order of the jackpot reliability.

  FIGS. 56 (b11) to (b13) show the same state as the states shown in FIGS. 38 (20) to (22).

  FIG. 56 (b14) shows a state where the conversation notice display is continued. In the conversation notice display of this example, the display of the character and the character name is simultaneously started. In FIG. 56 (b12), the grandfather g2 and the character name display h2 have moved to the left. The character name display h2 is displayed in blue. Further, in this example, three square images are displayed below the character side by side in the horizontal direction. The inside of each of the three square images is displayed in white, blue, and green. At the time shown in FIG. 56 (b14), the right square image and a part of the middle square image are displayed. The right square image is green, and the middle square image is white. These square images also move rightward with the character.

  FIG. 56 (b15) shows a state where the grandfather g2 and the character name display h2 are moving rightward. At the time shown in FIG. 56 (b7), a right square image, a center square image, and a part of the left square image are displayed. The right square image is white, the middle square image is green, and the left square image is blue. The display colors of these square images change while moving.

  FIG. 56 (b16) shows a state where the grandfather g2 and the character name display h2 are moving rightward. The balloon display i2 has been started to be displayed. The inside of the balloon display i2 is displayed in blue. At the time shown in FIG. 56 (b16), the right square image is blue, the middle square image is white, and the left square image is green. The display colors of these square images change while moving.

  FIG. 56 (b17) shows a state where the grandfather g2, character name display h2, and balloon display i2 are moving rightward. At the time shown in FIG. 56 (b17), the right square image is green, the middle square image is blue, and the left square image is white.

  FIG. 56 (b18) shows a state where the grandfather g2, character name display h2, and balloon display i2 are stopped. The grandfather g2 is displayed with the inside of the frame surrounded by a blue frame display. The character name display h2 and the balloon display i2 are also displayed in blue. These display colors are white, blue, and green, in ascending order of the jackpot reliability.

  FIGS. 56 (b19) and (b20) show the same state as the states shown in FIGS. 38 (37) and (38). The three square images displayed during the animation of the movement of the character are candidate display colors in a frame surrounded by the character after stopping. As in the present example, display color candidates in a frame surrounded after the character is stopped may be displayed during the moving animation of the character.

  Next, an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 57 (a1) to (a5). FIGS. 57 (a1) to (a5) show an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 in chronological order. FIGS. 57 (a1) to (a5) show the moving animation of the character shown in FIGS. 38 (6) to (10).

  FIG. 57 (a1) shows a state where the movement animation of the character has been started. Old man g2 appears and moves to the left.

  FIG. 57 (a2) shows a state in which a moving animation of the character is displayed. Old man g2 is moving to the left.

  FIG. 57 (a3) shows a state in which a moving animation of the character is displayed. While the old man g2 is moving to the left, the main building g1 is displayed. The main hall g1 is displayed to the left of the old man g2, and is partially overlapped with the old man g2. The gate g1 is displayed with, for example, a transmittance of 50%. Both g1 and g2 move to the left.

    FIG. 57 (a4) shows a state where a moving animation of the character is displayed. Part of the grandfather g2 is displayed overlapping with the main hall g1. The old man g2 is displayed with, for example, a transmittance of 50%. Both g1 and g2 move to the left.

  FIG. 57 (a5) shows a state where the movement animation of the character has been completed. The old man g2 is deleted at the end of the moving animation.

  As in this example, the number of characters may increase during the animation of the movement of the character. In this example, the number of characters is increased by one, but may be two or more. Further, the character may be displayed at a transmittance of 1 to 99% during the animation of the movement of the character. Further, one character may be displayed so as to overlap with the whole of another character.

  Next, an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 57 (b1) to (b5). FIGS. 57 (b1) to 57 (b5) show an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. FIGS. 57 (b1) to (b5) show the moving animations of the characters shown in FIGS. 38 (6) to (10).

  FIG. 57 (b1) shows a state in which the movement animation of the character has been started. The main building g1 and the grandfather g2 appear and move to the left. The main hall g1 is displayed to the left of the old man g2, and is partially overlapped with the old man g2.

  FIG. 57 (b2) shows a state where a moving animation of the character is displayed. Prince g1 and grandfather g2 are moving to the left. A part of the grandfather g2 is displayed overlapping the main hall g1.

  FIG. 57 (b3) shows a state where a moving animation of the character is displayed. Prince g1 and grandfather g2 are moving to the left. A part of the main hall g1 is displayed overlapping with the old man g2.

  FIG. 57 (a4) shows a state where a moving animation of the character is displayed. Prince g1 and grandfather g2 are moving to the left. A part of the grandfather g2 is displayed overlapping the main hall g1.

  FIG. 57 (a5) shows a state where the movement animation of the character has been completed. The old man g2 is deleted at the end of the moving animation.

  As in this example, a plurality of characters may be displayed from the beginning of the character movement animation. Overlapping characters may alternate between one character and another character.

  Next, an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 57 (c1) to (c5). FIGS. 57 (c1) to (c5) show an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. FIGS. 57 (c1) to (c5) show the moving animation of the character shown in FIGS. 38 (6) to (10).

  FIG. 57 (c1) shows a state in which the moving animation of the character has been started. Prince g1, grandfather g2, and princess g3 appear and move to the left.

  FIG. 57 (c2) shows a state where a moving animation of the character is displayed. Princess g3 has been deleted.

  FIG. 57 (c3) shows a state where a moving animation of the character is displayed. Old man g2 has been deleted.

  FIG. 57 (c4) shows a state in which a moving animation of the character is displayed. The main hall g1 is moving to the left.

  FIG. 57 (a5) shows a state where the movement animation of the character has been completed. The old man g2 is deleted at the end of the moving animation.

  As in the present example, a plurality of characters are displayed from the beginning of the character movement animation, and the characters may be deleted one by one during the character movement animation, and one character may remain at the end.

  Next, an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 57 (d1) to (d5). FIGS. 57 (d1) to (d5) show an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 in chronological order. FIGS. 57 (d1) to (d5) show the animation of the movement of the character shown in FIGS. 38 (6) to (10).

  FIG. 57 (d1) shows a state in which the movement animation of the character has been started. Prince g1, grandfather g2, and princess g3 appear and move to the left.

  FIG. 57 (d2) shows a state where a moving animation of the character is displayed. Princess Chibi g4 is displayed in place of lord g1, and ninja g5 is displayed in place of princess g3. Note that the character may be entirely replaced from the beginning, or may be changed a plurality of times and the original character may be displayed again.

  FIG. 57 (d3) shows a state where a moving animation of the character is displayed. Ninja g4 has been deleted.

  FIG. 57 (d4) shows a state where a moving animation of the character is displayed. Old man g2 has been deleted.

  FIG. 57 (a5) shows a state where the movement animation of the character has been completed. Princess Chibi g4 has stopped.

  As in this example, a plurality of characters are displayed from the beginning of the character movement animation, another character is displayed instead of one character during the character movement animation, and then the characters are sequentially erased. One character may remain. Further, a plurality of characters may be deleted at a time.

  FIG. 57 (e) shows a table used for determining a conversation notice display to be executed in the effect control processing. For example, the conversation notice shown in FIG. 38 is “conversation notice 1”, and the conversation notice shown in FIG. 39 is “conversation notice 2”. The pachinko machine 100 can select and execute an arbitrary conversation notice from a plurality of conversation notices. Also, for example, a plurality of conversation notices such as “conversation notice 1” and “conversation notice 2” can be executed in combination. Further, the pachinko machine 100 can display a dialogue notice display during the conversational notice display of the present example, and can also display a combination of the conversational notice display and the dialogue notice display of the present example.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 100, when any one of a plurality of effects, not shown, is selected by “***” in the conversation effect determination table of FIG. 57 (e), selects one of the conversation announcements. It is possible to display any of the balloon displays of FIGS. 38 to 57 as the first balloon display and then display any of the balloon displays of FIGS. 38 to 57 as the second balloon display. is there. In addition, the pachinko machine 100, when any one of a plurality of effects, not shown, is selected by “***” in the conversation effect determination table of FIG. 57 (e), selects one of the conversation announcements. As a first balloon display, a balloon display combining a plurality of elements of any of the balloon displays of FIGS. 38 to 57 is displayed, and then, as a second balloon display, one of the balloon displays of FIGS. It is possible to display a balloon display in which a plurality of elements of the balloon display are combined. In addition, the pachinko machine 100, when any one of a plurality of effects not shown by “***” in the conversation effect determination table of FIG. 57 (e) is selected, 3 or more as one conversation notice. Can be displayed. In addition, the pachinko machine 100 displays one symbol variation display when any one of a plurality of effects not shown by “***” in the conversation effect determination table of FIG. 57 (e) is selected. Two or three or more conversation notices can be displayed during the period. In addition, the pachinko machine 100 is configured to display the balloon display or the conversation notice when the execution condition of another effect display, an error display, or the effect of the movable body described in the embodiment or the drawing is satisfied. And the operation can be executed.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present example can display a conversation notice display shown in FIG. 38 and the like. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment can display a dialogue notice display. For example, the conversation notice display shown in FIG. 38 may be displayed while the conversation notice display is being displayed, or in the same symbol variation display as the conversation notice display.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present example can display a conversation notice display shown in FIG. 38 and the like. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment can execute a preliminary announcement effect and a timer announcement effect. For example, the preliminary announcement effect or the timer announcement effect may be executed during the display of the conversation announcement display or within the same symbol variation display as the conversation announcement display.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present example can display a conversation notice display shown in FIG. 38 and the like. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present example can execute the meter increase effect and the item addition effect shown in FIG. For example, the meter increase effect and the item addition effect may be executed during the display of the conversation announcement display or within the same symbol variation display as the conversation announcement display.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present example can display a conversation notice display in which the character display in the balloon display i1 shown in FIG. 38 is moved and displayed. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present example can display a conversation notice display in the effect display mode shown in FIG. For example, a balloon having a different display size (small display size, large display size) from balloon displays f1 and f2 shown in FIGS. 120 (b) and (e), such as a balloon display f4 shown in FIG. 120 (k). The display may be displayed to display the conversation notice display. Note that the balloon display f1 shown in FIG. 120 corresponds to the balloon display i1 shown in FIG. 38, and the balloon display f2 shown in FIG. 120 corresponds to the balloon display i2 shown in FIG.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present example can display a conversation notice display in which the character display in the balloon display i1 shown in FIG. 38 is moved and displayed. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present example can display a conversation notice display in the effect display mode shown in FIG. For example, as shown in FIGS. 120B to 120F, in the moving animation in which the balloon displays f1 and f2 move upward, the moving distance of the balloon display f1 is longer than the moving distance of the balloon display f2. To display a conversation notice display. Note that the balloon display f1 shown in FIG. 120 corresponds to the balloon display i1 shown in FIG. 38, and the balloon display f2 shown in FIG. 120 corresponds to the balloon display i2 shown in FIG.

    The pachinko machine 100 according to the present example can display a conversation notice display in which the character display in the balloon display i1 shown in FIG. 38 is moved and displayed. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present example can display a conversation notice display in the effect display mode shown in FIG. For example, the movement animation in which the balloon display f2 moves upward ends at the time shown in FIG. 120 (e), and a part of the balloon display f2 is displayed so as to be overlapped with another display to give a conversation notice. A display may be displayed. Note that the balloon display f1 shown in FIG. 120 corresponds to the balloon display i1 shown in FIG. 38, and the balloon display f2 shown in FIG. 120 corresponds to the balloon display i2 shown in FIG. The pachinko machine 100 may display at least one of the balloon display i1 and the balloon display i2 shown in FIG. 38 at a position where the balloon display i1 or the balloon display i2 overlaps another display and displays the conversation notice display.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present example can display a conversation notice display in which the character display in the balloon display i1 shown in FIG. 38 is moved and displayed. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present example can display a conversation notice display in the effect display mode shown in FIG. For example, as shown in FIGS. 120B to 120F, when the display of the balloon displays f1 and f2 is started, a moving animation in which the balloon displays f1 and f2 move upward is performed. As shown in (t), at the end of the display of the balloon displays f1 and f2, when the display of the balloon display f1 and f2 moves to the right, a moving animation is performed. In this case, the moving direction of the balloon display may be different. The pachinko machine 100 may make the moving direction of at least one of the balloon display i1 and the balloon display i2 shown in FIG. 38 different between when the display starts and when the display ends.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present example can display a conversation notice display shown in FIG. 38 and the like. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present example can execute a pseudo continuous production. For example, the pseudo continuous production may be executed during the display of the conversation announcement display or in the same symbol variation display as the conversation announcement display.

  Next, the characteristic configuration of the pachinko machine 100 described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 38 to 57 again.

(B1) A game console provided with display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) capable of displaying a plurality of displays, wherein one of the plurality of displays is a first display (for example, FIG. 38 (19), one of the plurality of displays is a second display (for example, a conversation advance display shown in FIG. 38 (36)), and the first The display is a display including a first line (for example, the morning weather is a “fine mark”), the first display is a display including a first character (for example, a lord g1), The second display is a display including a second dialogue (for example, the daytime weather is “cloudy mark”), the second display is a display including a second character (for example, grandfather g2), The second display may be displayed after the first display is displayed, and Amusement machine which may the second character is displayed before the display of the first display, characterized in that.

  According to the gaming table having the above configuration, by notifying that the second display including the second character is displayed, the player expects that the second display may be displayed. May be able to improve the interest of the player.

(B2) The game console according to B1, wherein a third character (for example, princess g3) may be displayed before the display of the first display. .

  According to the gaming table with this configuration, it is possible to make the character different when the first display is displayed by performing a gaseous notice that displays a character that does not appear in the first display and hit the player's surprise In some cases, the interest of the player can be improved.

(B3) The gaming table according to B2, wherein one of the plurality of displays is a third display (for example, a conversation notice display shown in FIG. 47 ()), and the third display is a third display. The display is a display including a third line (for example, the afternoon weather is a “rain mark”), the third display is a display including the third character (for example, princess g3), A game console characterized in that the third display may be displayed after the second display is displayed (for example, see FIG. 47 (9)).

By causing the third character to appear in the third display instead of the second display, the player's surprise can be struck and the interest of the player can be improved in some cases.

(B4) The gaming table according to B3, wherein one of the plurality of displays is a first conversation notice display (for example, a conversation notice shown in FIG. 47 (1)). Is a second notice of conversation (for example, a notice of conversation shown in FIG. 47 (39)), and the first notice of conversation is a display including the first display. A game console, wherein the first conversation notice display is a display including the second display, and the second conversation notice display is a display including the third display.

  According to the gaming table having the above configuration, the third character that appeared in the first conversation notice display can appear in the second conversation notice display to strike the player's surprise. Can be improved in some cases.

(B5) The gaming table according to B4, wherein the second conversation advance display is displayed after the first conversation advance display is displayed during a period in which a certain symbol variation display is displayed. A game console characterized by the following:

  According to the gaming table having the above configuration, the third character that appeared in the first conversation notice display can appear in the second conversation notice display to strike the player's surprise. Can be improved in some cases.

(B6) The gaming table according to any one of B1 to B5, wherein one of the plurality of displays is a first animation display (for example, a moving animation of a character). The first animation display is displayed before the display of the first display, and the first animation display is a display including a movement display of the character,

  The game console according to claim 1, wherein the first animation display is a display including the first character, and the first animation display is a display that may include the second character.

  According to the gaming table having the configuration, since the second character is displayed in the first animation display, it is possible to make the player expect that the first display may be performed by the second character. May be possible.

(B7) The gaming table according to B6, wherein the first character and the second character are simultaneously displayed at a certain timing in a display period of the first animation display. A gaming table that features.

  According to the gaming table having such a configuration, there is a case where the player can infer by which character the first display is displayed and entertain.

(B8) The gaming table according to B6 or B7, wherein in the first animation display, the display start of the second character is earlier than the display start of the first character. A gaming table.

  According to the gaming table having the configuration, when the first display is displayed by the second character, it may be possible to make the player think and entertain.

(B9) The gaming table according to any one of B6 to B8, wherein one of the plurality of displays is a second animation display (for example, a moving animation of a character). The second animation display is displayed before the display of the second display, the second animation display is a display including a moving display of a character, and the second animation display is the second animation display. A game console comprising a character, and wherein the second animation display does not include the first character.

  According to the gaming table provided with the configuration, there is a case where the character appearing in the first display can be made to appear and the player can play the game without getting aroused.

(B10) The game console according to B9, wherein the number of characters in the second animation display is smaller than the number of characters in the first animation display.

  According to the gaming table having such a configuration, the number of character candidates in the second display may be reduced, thereby increasing the hitting accuracy of the character by the player and making the player entertain.

(B11) The gaming table according to B9 or B10, wherein a character displayed first in the second animation display is different from a character displayed first in the first animation display. A gaming table that features.

In some cases, by reducing the number of character candidates in the second display, it is possible to increase the predictive accuracy of the character by the player and entertain the player.

(B12) The gaming table according to any one of B9 to B11, wherein a display period of the first animation display is shorter than a display period of the first display. A gaming table characterized by the following.

(B13) The gaming table according to any one of B1 to B12, wherein the first display is a display including a first color (for example, white), and the second display is a display including a first color (for example, white). Is a display including a second color (for example, blue), the reliability in the first color is different from the reliability in the second color, and the display of the first display A display including the second color before the display.

  According to the gaming table having the above configuration, it is possible to expect the reliability when the second display is displayed by notifying the reliability of the second display, thereby improving the interest of the player. May be possible.

(B14) The gaming table according to B13, wherein the reliability in the second color is higher than the reliability in the first color.

  According to the gaming table having such a configuration, the reliability of the second display to be displayed later may be increased to allow the player to expect that the second display is displayed.

(B15) The game console according to any one of B1 to B14, wherein the first line is displayed before the display of the first display.

  According to the gaming table having the configuration, even if the second character is displayed before the display of the first display, it is possible to make the player expect that the first character appears by the first dialogue. May be possible.

(B16) The gaming table according to any one of B1 to B15, wherein the first display is a display including a first name (for example, “dono”), and the first name is a first name. Means a name of the first character, wherein the first name is displayed before the display of the first display.

  According to the gaming table having the above configuration, even if the second character is displayed before the display of the first display, it is possible to make the player expect that the first character appears by the first name. May be possible.

(B17) The gaming table according to any one of B1 to B16, further comprising an operation unit (for example, a chance button 136) operable by a player, wherein the operation is performed while the first display is displayed. A gaming table, wherein the second display is displayed when a means is operated.

(B18) The game console according to any one of B1 to B17, wherein the second display is displayed after the first display is displayed.

(B19) The gaming table according to any one of B1 to B18, further comprising a movable body (for example, a movable body k) movable to a position overlapping the display means, wherein the first display is performed. A gaming table, wherein the movable body may overlap at least one of the second display and the second display.

(B20) The gaming table according to any one of B1 to B19, wherein a certain display overlaps at least one of the first display and the second display. There is a gaming table.

(B21) The game console according to any one of B1 to B20, wherein the game console is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).

(B22) The gaming table according to any one of B1 to B20, wherein the gaming table is a slot machine (for example, slot machines 1000 and 2000).

  The first display may be overlapped with another display, and the area where the first display is overlapped by the second animation is the first display being overlapped by the second display. It may be larger than the area to be wrapped. In this case, during the second animation, the second animation can be noticed by greatly overlapping the first display, and while the second display is being displayed, the association with the first display is ensured. May be able to.

The area where the first dialogue overlaps with the second animation may be larger than the area where the first dialogue overlaps with the second display. In this case, during the second animation, the second animation can be noticed by greatly overlapping the first dialogue, and while the second display is displayed, the association with the first dialogue is ensured. May be able to.
The dialogue of the conversation notice may be inconsistent.

  A plurality of characters may be sequentially displayed in the first animation, and a certain character may be displayed a plurality of times in the first animation.

  A plurality of characters may be displayed in order in the first animation, and the order may go around in the first animation.

  A plurality of characters may be displayed in order in the first animation, and the order may rewind at a certain timing in the first animation.

  A plurality of characters may be sequentially displayed in the first animation, and each character may perform an animation in the first animation.

  A plurality of characters may be displayed simultaneously in the first animation, and the number of characters may increase or decrease in the first animation.

  A plurality of characters may be displayed simultaneously in the first animation, and certain characters may change in the first animation.

A plurality of characters may be displayed simultaneously in the first animation, and the first display may be displayed after the characters have been reduced one or more in the first animation.
After the display of the second display, a transition may be made to a reach effect corresponding to the second character.

  A conversation announcement display is performed for each pseudo variation display, a first conversation advance display is performed in a first pseudo variation display, and a second conversation is displayed in a second pseudo variation display after the first pseudo variation display. A notice display may be performed.

  The movable body may be operated for each pseudo variation display, and a part of the first conversation notice display may be overlapped with the movable body, and a part of the second conversation notice display may be overlapped with the movable body.

  A part of the first conversation notice may be overlapped with the timer notice, and a part of the second conversation notice may be overlapped with the timer notice.

  Next, another specific example of the effect performed by the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. Note that the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 58 to 82 are used only for the description of the embodiment shown in FIGS. 58 to 82 in principle, and even if duplicated reference numerals are shown in other drawings, 58 to 82 are given priority.

<Item type>
Next, the types of items that the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment has will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 58 is a diagram illustrating an example of an item.

  Here, the item is a general term of benefits, equipment, functions, and the like that can be given to the player by the pachinko machine 100. The items according to the present embodiment are roughly classified into two types, a custom item and a non-custom item. Can be different. The custom item is an item that allows the player to modify (customize) the display, sound, function, various probabilities, etc. of the pachinko machine according to his / her preference. A non-custom item is an item for which the display, sound, function, various probabilities, etc. of the pachinko machine 100 cannot be modified (customized), but a predetermined profit is given to the player.

  The pachinko machine 100 is configured to, when an item providing condition set for each item is satisfied, provide the item to the player. When a custom item is provided, the player performs a setting operation of the provided custom item using an effect customizing screen (see FIG. 67 (q) and the like) described later, thereby displaying the pachinko machine 100. , Voice, functions, various probabilities, etc., can be modified (customized) according to their own preference. In addition, when a non-custom item is given, the player can obtain a predetermined profit through the item (for example, a profit that is advantageous to the player such as a notice, a pre-read notice, and a tutorial display).

    In the example shown in FIG. 58, for example, the item provision condition of item A (normal BGM custom 1), item B (normal BGM custom 2), or item C (normal BGM custom 3) is satisfied, and the item is provided. In this case, the background sound (BGM) of the pachinko machine 100 during the normal game can be modified (customized) according to the user's preference. In addition, when the item providing condition of the item D (holding base custom 1), the item E (holding base custom 2), or the item F (holding base custom 3) is satisfied, and the item is given, the pachinko machine is used. A part of the display of the hold icon (hold display) at 100 (in this example, the image of the pedestal displayed below the hold icon) can be modified (customized) according to the user's preference.

  In addition, when the item providing condition of “heat” is satisfied and the item is provided, the notice 1 indicating that the result of the change is “hot (high degree of expectation)” is given, and the player Can obtain information on the winning result of the fluctuation (for example, information that the winning result of the special figure fluctuation game is a hit or that there is a high possibility of a hit). In addition, when the item providing condition of “hot” is satisfied and the item is provided, a notice 2 indicating that the result of the change is “hot” (expectation is extremely high) is performed. In this way, the player can obtain information on the winning result of the change (for example, information that the winning result of the special figure changing game is a big hit or that there is a high possibility of a big hit).

<Meter increase effect and item grant effect>
Next, the meter increase effect and the item giving effect will be described. Here, the meter increase effect is an effect that is executed in connection with the ball entering the meter increase entrance 227. In the present embodiment, a predetermined number (10 in this example) of gauges ( A meter having a scale is displayed, and a display is provided for turning off (decreasing) one gauge at the entrance 227 for meter increase and one gauge each time the ball enters the meter (details will be described later).

    By executing such a meter increase effect, the player can determine whether the number of balls that have entered the meter increase entrance 227 or whether the gauge of the meter has become full (a predetermined number of meters increase the meter increase entrance 227). It is possible to determine the number (whether or not 10 balls in this example) have entered. Note that the mode of the meter increase effect is not limited to this example. For example, a display may be displayed in which one ball is inserted into the meter increase entrance 227 and the meter gauge is turned on (increases) one by one each time the vehicle enters. Good.

  Further, the item giving effect is an effect executed in connection with the item giving. In the present embodiment, when the gauge of the meter is full (a predetermined number of the meter increasing entrance 227 (this example) In this case, it is determined that the item provision condition has been satisfied when 10) balls have entered), and a display or the like that notifies the user that the item has been provided, the type of the item, and the like, using the decorative symbol display device 208. (Details will be described later). By executing such an item provision effect, the player can grasp that an item has been provided, the type of the item, and the like. Note that the item provision conditions and the mode of the item provision effects are not limited to this example. For example, the number and type of items that have already been obtained may be displayed, or the item may be special (for rare items). May be displayed.

<Meter increase effect and item addition effect / Example 1>
Next, with reference to FIG. 59, a meter increase effect and an item-giving effect according to the first embodiment will be described. FIG. 59 is a diagram illustrating a meter increase effect and an item-giving effect according to the first embodiment in chronological order.

  The first embodiment is an example in which an item-giving effect is started based on the fact that the item-giving condition is satisfied during the symbol change (the meter gauge is full). The game state shown in FIG. 59 (a) is a state in which a variable game of a special figure is being executed (during symbol change). Further, in this example, there is a special figure variable game that is suspended, and in the display area on the left side of the decorative symbol display device 208, the number of special figure 1 variable game reservations is three, and the number of special figure 2 variable game reservations is three. , A number indicates that the number of pending regular-floating games is 0. In addition, in the lower display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the number of reserved special figure variable games (special figure 1 variable game and special figure 2 variable game) is six by displaying six reserve icons PI. Is displayed, nine gauges are turned off, and one gauge GG is turned on, so that nine balls have entered the meter increase entrance 227 (another one ball has been turned on). The gauge will be full if you enter). Furthermore, in the lower display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, performing the character display CD1 of "item not set" indicates that the custom item has not been set by the player.

  During such a symbol change, when one ball enters the meter increasing entrance 227 as shown in FIG. 59 (b), the lit-up light 1 as shown in FIG. 59 (c). After executing the meter increase effect in which all ten gauges are turned off by turning off one gauge, as shown in FIG. 59 (d), a character display CD2 of "full" is displayed instead of the meter display. By executing the meter increase effect, a predetermined number (ten in this example) of balls enter the meter increase entrance 227, and it is notified that the item provision condition is satisfied.

  The subsequent state shown in FIG. 59 (e) is a state in which the item giving effect has started. In the item giving effect according to the present example, the image CG imitating the appearance of the capsule is stepwise displayed over the period shown in FIGS. 59 (e) to 59 (g) when the item giving condition is satisfied. While the display is enlarged, animation display is performed to move from the lower display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 to the center, and as shown in FIG. 59 (h), information on items appears from inside the image CG imitating the capsule. After performing the animation display, as shown in FIG. 59 (i), the display of the item name (item A in this example) IN and the item description IT (in this example, the item (The contents are omitted in the figure)).

  In this example, at least a part of the display related to the item-attached effect is displayed by displaying the display related to the item-attached effect before the variable display of the decorative symbol. Part overlaps. With such a configuration, the visibility of the item-giving effect is not hindered, so that information about the acquired items can be accurately notified to the player, and the visibility of the variable display of the decorative pattern can be improved. In some cases, the effect can be enhanced by temporarily lowering the effect.

  The state shown in FIG. 59 (j) is a state in which a button effect has been started in addition to the item-giving effect. In this example, the display of the information on the item (in this example, the item name and the description of the item) in the item provision effect triggers the display of the button over the period shown in FIGS. 59 (j) to 59 (m). Perform the production.

  In this example, the display related to the button effect is displayed before the display related to the item-attached effect and the display of the change in the decorative pattern, so that at least a part of the display related to the button effect is related to the item-attached effect. It overlaps at least a part of the display of the display and the variation of the decorative design. With such a configuration, the visibility of the button effect is not hindered, so that the operation by the operation means and the effective time can be accurately notified to the player, and the display of the decorative pattern and the item can be changed. In some cases, the effect of the effect can be enhanced by temporarily lowering the visibility of the applied effect.

  In this button effect, the appearance of a selection display SG that allows a specific selection from a plurality of options (in this example, selection of whether or not to set an acquired item) and the appearance of a chance button 136 in which operation reception is valid are simulated. The button image BG1 including the image that has been pressed and a character string (in this example, PUSH) that prompts the user to press the chance button 136, and the appearance of left and right keys of the up, down, left, and right direction keys (not shown) for which operation acceptance is effective The button image BG2 and an operation valid period display TG including a meter display indicating a period during which operation reception by the operation means (in this example, the chance button 136 and the left / right key) is valid are displayed.

  In the state where the option of “Yes” is provisionally selected during such a button effect, as shown in FIG. 59 (l), when a pressing operation of the chance button 136 is received, as shown in FIG. 59 (m), By highlighting the option of “Yes”, it is notified that the selection of “Yes” has been confirmed (that the selection to set the acquired item has been made).

  The state shown in FIG. 59 (n) is a state in which the button effect has been finished and the item-giving effect has been restarted. In the item provision effect after the resumption, a specific selection (in this example, a selection to set the acquired item) is made from a plurality of options in the button effect, and the trigger is shown in FIGS. 59 (n) to 59 (p). After performing an animation display in which the image including the item name is gradually reduced and displayed from the center of the decorative design display device 208 to the lower display area over the period shown in FIG. By performing the character display CD3 of “Item A is being set” instead of the character display CD1, it is indicated that the item A has been set as a custom item by the player.

<Meter increase effect and item addition effect / Example 2>
Next, with reference to FIG. 60, a meter increase effect and an item-giving effect according to the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 60 is a diagram illustrating a meter increase effect and an item-giving effect according to the second embodiment in chronological order.

  The second embodiment is an example in which an item provision effect is started based on the fact that the item provision condition is satisfied during the SP (super) reach change (the gauge of the meter is full). In the second embodiment, the fluctuation game of the special figure evolves from the normal symbol fluctuation to the SP reach fluctuation over the period shown in FIGS. The SP reach effect is executed in addition to the SP reach fluctuation over the period shown in FIG.

  During such SP reach fluctuation, when one ball enters the meter increase entrance 227 as shown in FIG. 60 (d), it is lit as shown in FIG. 60 (e). After turning off one gauge, a meter increase effect in which all 10 gauges are turned off is performed, and then, as shown in FIG. 60 (f), a character display CD2 of “full” is displayed instead of the meter display. By executing the meter increase effect to be performed, a predetermined number (ten in this example) of balls enter the meter increase entrance 227, and it is notified that the item provision condition is satisfied.

  Note that the subsequent meter increase effect, item addition effect, and button effect effect are the same as those in the first embodiment except that the SP reach is changing, so the same reference numerals are given in FIG. Although the description is omitted, the display of the item giving effect is displayed in front of the display of the SP reach effect and the meter over the period shown in FIGS. At least a part of the display related to the effect is overlapped with at least a part of the display and the meter related to the SP reach effect. With such a configuration, the visibility of the item-giving effect is not hindered, so that information about the acquired item can be accurately notified to the player, and the SP reach effect and the visibility of the meter can be improved. In some cases, the effect can be enhanced by temporarily lowering the effect.

  In addition, by displaying the variable display of the decorative symbol in front of the display related to the item provision effect over the period shown in FIGS. 60 (k) to 60 (o), at least a part of the variable display of the decorative symbol is displayed. Is overlapped with at least a part of the display related to the item giving effect. With such a configuration, the visibility of the fluctuating display of the decorative symbol is not hindered, so that the progress of the fluctuating game can be accurately notified to the player, and the visibility of the item provision effect is temporarily reduced. In some cases, the effect can be enhanced by lowering the effect.

  Further, over the period shown in FIG. 60 (l) to FIG. 60 (o), the display related to the button effect and the variation display of the decorative pattern are displayed before the display related to the SP reach effect and the item-giving effect. Thus, at least a part of the display related to the button effect and the change display of the decorative design overlap at least a part of the display related to the SP reach effect and the item-giving effect. With such a configuration, the visibility of the fluctuating display of the decorative symbols and the visibility of the button effects are not hindered, so that it is possible to accurately inform the player of the progress of the fluctuating game, the operation by the operation means, and the valid time. In addition, there are cases where the effect of the effect can be enhanced by temporarily lowering the visibility of the SP reach effect and the item-attached effect.

<Meter increase effect and item addition effect / Example 3>
Next, a meter increase effect and an item-giving effect according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 61 is a diagram illustrating a meter increase effect and an item-giving effect according to the third embodiment in chronological order.

  The third embodiment is an example in which the item provision effect is started based on the fact that the item provision condition is satisfied (the gauge of the meter is full) during the non-design change (during the stop display of the design). The gaming state shown in FIG. 61 (a) is a state in which the variable game of the special figure is not executed (during non-symbol fluctuation). In this example, there is no special figure variable game held, and in the display area on the left side of the decorative symbol display device 208, the number of special figure 1 variable games held is 0, the number of special figure 2 variable games held is 0, The figure shows that the number of pending games is 0. In addition, in the lower display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the reserved icon PI is not displayed, so that the reserved number of the special figure variable game (the special figure 1 variable game and the special figure 2 variable game) may be zero. As shown, nine gauges are turned off and one gauge GG is turned on, so that nine meters have entered the meter increase entrance 227 (one more ball has entered the meter increasing entrance 227). That the gauge will be full). Furthermore, in the lower display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, performing the character display CD1 of "item not set" indicates that the custom item has not been set by the player.

  During such a non-design change, when one ball enters the meter increasing entrance 227 as shown in FIG. 61 (b), it is turned on as shown in the following FIG. 61 (c). After performing the meter increase effect in which all the 10 gauges are turned off by turning off one gauge, as shown in FIG. 61 (d), the character display CD2 of “full” is displayed instead of the meter display. By executing the meter increase effect to be performed, a predetermined number (ten in this example) of balls enter the meter increase entrance 227, and it is notified that the item provision condition is satisfied.

  Note that the subsequent meter increase effect, item addition effect, and button effect effect are the same as those in the first embodiment except that the SP reach is fluctuating. Although the description is omitted, the display related to the item giving effect is displayed before the stop display of the decorative pattern over the period shown in FIGS. At least a part of the display related to the effect is overlapped with at least a part of the stop display of the decorative symbol. With such a configuration, the visibility of the item-giving effects is not hindered, so that the information on the acquired items can be accurately notified to the player, and the visibility of the stop of the fluctuation of the decorative pattern can be improved. In some cases, the effect can be enhanced by temporarily lowering the effect.

<Meter increase effect and item addition effect / Example 4>
Next, a meter increase effect and an item-giving effect according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 62 is a diagram illustrating a meter increase effect and an item-giving effect according to the fourth embodiment in chronological order.

  In the fourth embodiment, based on the fact that the item provision condition is satisfied during the non-design change (during the stop display of the design) (the gauge of the meter is full), the item provision effect is started during the design change. Here is an example. During the non-symbol change shown in FIG. 62 (a), as shown in FIG. 62 (b), one ball entered the meter increasing entrance 227, and in the following FIG. 62 (c), it was lit. A meter increase effect of turning off one of the two gauges is being performed. Subsequently, during the non-design change shown in FIG. 62 (c), as shown in FIG. 62 (d), based on the fact that a ball has entered the starting port (in this example, the first special figure starting port 230). Then, in FIG. 62 (e), the symbol variation display is started.

  During such a symbol change, as shown in FIG. 62 (f), when one ball enters the meter increasing entrance 227, as shown in the following FIG. After performing the meter increase effect in which all ten gauges are turned off by turning off one gauge, as shown in FIG. 62 (h), a character display CD2 of “full” is displayed instead of the meter display. By executing the meter increase effect, a predetermined number (ten in this example) of balls enter the meter increase entrance 227, and it is notified that the item provision condition is satisfied.

  The state shown in FIG. 62 (e) is a state in which the item giving effect has started. In the item giving effect according to the present example, the image CG imitating the appearance of the capsule is stepwise displayed over the period shown in FIGS. 62 (i) to 62 (k) when the item giving condition is satisfied. While the display is enlarged, animation display is performed to move from the lower display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 to the center, and as shown in FIG. 62 (l), information on items appears from inside the image CG imitating the capsule. After performing the animation display, the item image IG including the character display of "heat" is displayed as shown in FIG. In the item image IG, the item providing condition of “heat” which is a non-custom item is satisfied, and the result of the special figure variable game is “hot (high expectation)” (the winning result of the special figure variable game is Or the likelihood of a hit).

  In this example, at least a part of the display related to the item-attached effect is displayed by displaying the display related to the item-attached effect before the variable display of the decorative symbol. Part overlaps. With such a configuration, the visibility of the item-giving effect is not hindered, so that information about the acquired items can be accurately notified to the player, and the visibility of the variable display of the decorative pattern can be improved. In some cases, the effect can be enhanced by temporarily lowering the effect.

  In the state shown in FIG. 62 (n), the item giving effect is finished and the SP reach is started. As described above, if the display related to the item giving effect is erased before the start of the SP reach, the visibility of the SP reach is not hindered, so that the progress of the variable game can be accurately given to the player. You may be able to inform.

<Meter increase effect and item addition effect / Example 5>
Next, a meter increase effect and an item-giving effect according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 63 is a diagram illustrating a meter increase effect and an item-giving effect according to the fifth embodiment in chronological order.

  In the fifth embodiment, the item provision condition is satisfied after the mode shifts to the increase mode (double mode) based on the fact that the ball has entered the meter increase entrance 227 during the symbol change when the number of reserves is full. This is an example in which an item-giving effect is started based on the fact that the meter gauge has become full.

  The gaming state shown in FIG. 63 (a) is a state in which a variable game of a special figure is being executed (during symbol fluctuation). In this example, there is a special figure variable game that is suspended, and in the display area on the left side of the decorative symbol display device 208, the number of special figure 1 variable games held is 3, the special figure 2 variable game is The figure shows that the number of pending games is 0. In addition, in the lower display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the number of reserved special figure variable games (special figure 1 variable game and special figure 2 variable game) is seven by displaying seven reserve icons PI. Is displayed, the six gauges are turned off, and the four gauges GG are turned on, so that the six balls have entered the meter increasing entrance 227 (the remaining four balls have been turned on). The gauge will be full if you enter). Furthermore, in the lower display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, performing the character display CD1 of "item not set" indicates that the custom item has not been set by the player.

  During such a symbol change, when one ball enters the meter increasing entrance 227 as shown in FIG. 63 (b), it is turned on as shown in FIG. 63 (c). The meter increase effect of turning off one of the two gauges is being performed. Subsequently, during the symbol change shown in FIG. 63 (c), as shown in FIG. 63 (d), a ball enters the starting port (in the present example, the first special figure starting port 230), and the following FIG. As shown in (e), in the display area on the left side of the decorative symbol display device 208, it is indicated by a number that the number of suspended special figure 1 variable games has increased from 3 to 4, and the decorative symbol display device 208 In the lower display area, the number of reserved special figure variable games (special figure 1 variable game and special figure 2 variable game) increases from 7 to 8 due to the display of eight hold icons PI, and the tank becomes full. Is shown.

  In this example, when the number of reserved special figure variable games (special figure 1 variable game and special figure 2 variable game) is full (8 in this example), the meter increase effect shifts to the increase mode. Make up. Here, the increase mode of the meter increase effect is a mode in which the meter gauge advances N times (N is a positive integer of 2 or more) each time one ball enters the meter increase entrance 227. In this example, N is set to 2 and the mode is referred to as a double mode.

  The state shown in FIG. 63 (f) is a state in which the meter increase effect has shifted to the increase mode (double mode). In this increase mode, when one ball enters the meter increase entrance 227 as shown in FIG. 63 (g), the three lights which were turned on as shown in FIG. A meter increase effect of turning off two of the gauges is performed. Further, as shown in FIG. 63 (i), when one ball further enters the meter increasing entrance 227, as shown in FIG. 63 (j), the lit one gauge is turned off. By doing so, a meter increase effect in which all ten gauges are turned off is executed, and the right to erase another gauge can be carried over to the next game or later. The subsequent meter increase effect, item addition effect, and button effect effect are the same as those in the first embodiment except that the meter increase effect is in the increase mode (double mode), and therefore are the same in FIG. 63. The reference numerals are used, and the description is omitted.

  In this example, an example has been described in which the mode shifts to the increase mode (double mode) based on the fact that a ball has entered the meter increase entrance 227 during the symbol change with the number of reserves being full. May be configured to shift to the increase mode when the condition (1) is satisfied, and the increase mode is not limited to the double mode. Also, when the item granting condition is satisfied (when the meter gauge is full), the right to erase the meter gauge is configured to be carried over to the next game or later, but not to be carried over. The number of games that can be carried over may be made variable.

<Meter increase effect and item addition effect / Example 6>
Next, a meter increase effect and an item-giving effect according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 64 is a diagram illustrating a meter increase effect and an item-giving effect according to the sixth embodiment in chronological order.

    In the sixth embodiment, an item-giving effect is started based on the fact that the item-giving condition is satisfied during the symbol change (the gauge of the meter is full), and a plurality of items (in this example) In this example, two types of custom items are added. In addition, since the production mode of the meter increase production, the item provision production, and the button production is the same as that of the first embodiment except that a plurality of items are provided in the item provision production, the same reference numerals are given in FIG. The description is omitted.

  In the item giving effect according to the present example, as shown in FIG. 64 (h), after performing animation display in which information on two types of items appears from the inside of the image CG imitating the capsule, FIG. As shown, as information on two types of items, display of item names (in this example, items A and B) IN1 and IN2 and description of the items (in this example, descriptions of item A and item B (contents in the figure) Is omitted)) IT1 and IT2 are displayed. Note that three or more types of items may be provided in the item provision effect.

  The state shown in FIG. 64 (j) is a state in which a button effect has been started in addition to the item-giving effect. In the button effect according to the present example, a selection display SG that allows a specific selection from a plurality of options (in this example, whether or not to set the acquired item A or item B) and a reception of an operation is effective The button image BG1 including an image simulating the appearance of the chance button 136 and a character string (in this example, PUSH) for urging the user to press the chance button 136, and the reception of an operation among the up, down, left, and right direction keys (not shown) is valid. A button image BG2 imitating the appearance of the right and left keys and an operation valid period display TG composed of a meter display indicating a period during which operation acceptance by the operation means (in this example, the chance button 136 and the left and right keys) are valid are displayed. .

  In the state where the option of “item A” is provisionally selected during such a button effect, as shown in FIG. 64 (l), when a pressing operation of the chance button 136 is received, as shown in FIG. 64 (m). The selection of “item A” is highlighted to notify that the selection of “item A” has been confirmed (the selection of setting item A among item A and item B has been made). I do.

  The state shown in FIG. 64 (n) is a state in which the button effect has been finished and the item-giving effect has been restarted. In the item provision effect after the resumption, a specific selection (in this example, the selection of setting the item A among the acquired item A and item B) from the plurality of options in the button effect is triggered, and FIG. During the period shown in (n) to (p), an animation display is performed in which the image including the item name is moved from the center to the lower display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 while being gradually reduced and displayed. After that, the character display CD3 of "Item A is being set" is displayed instead of the character display CD1 of "Item not set", thereby indicating that the player has set the item A as a custom item.

<Meter increase effect and item addition effect / Example 7>
Next, a meter increase effect and an item-giving effect according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 65 is a diagram illustrating a meter increase effect and an item-giving effect according to the seventh embodiment in chronological order.

    In the seventh embodiment, an item-giving effect is started based on the fact that the item-giving condition is satisfied during the symbol change (the gauge of the meter is full), and a plurality of items (in this example) In this example, a custom item and a non-custom item are added. Note that the production modes of the meter increase production, the item provision production, and the button production are the same as those in the first embodiment except that a plurality of items are provided in the item provision production. The description is omitted.

  In the item giving effect according to the present example, as shown in FIG. 65 (h), after performing animation display in which information on two types of items appears from the inside of the image CG imitating the capsule, FIG. As shown, as information relating to the two types of items, display of an item name (item A in this example) IN and description of the item (in this example, description of item A (contents omitted)) display of IT1 and “ The item image IG including the character display of “heat” is displayed. Note that the non-custom item to be provided in the item provision effect may be another non-custom item described with reference to FIG. 58 (for example, a change in hold, a description of a model 1 to 3, a loss, and the like).

  The state shown in FIG. 65 (j) is a state in which a button effect has been started in addition to the item-giving effect. The subsequent production modes of the item provision effect and the button effect are the same as those in the first embodiment, and therefore are denoted by the same reference numerals in FIG. 65 and the description thereof will be omitted.

<Demo screen>
Next, a demonstration screen in the pachinko machine 100 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 66 is a transition diagram showing an example of screen transition in the pachinko machine 100, FIG. 67 is a diagram showing an example of screen transition in chronological order, and FIG. FIG. 9 is a diagram showing an example of a screen transition in a case where the screen is changed.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to this embodiment displays at least a demo screen, a menu screen, a volume adjustment screen, a brightness adjustment screen, and a symbol variation display as shown in FIG. It is configured to be possible. The demonstration screen is a screen that starts to be displayed when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses during non-pattern change, and in this example, a menu screen, a volume adjustment screen, or a brightness adjustment screen. Display the top menu screen that can be changed to the screen. When the operation of the first operation means (in this example, the chance button 136) is received during the display of the demonstration screen, the display of the menu screen from which various menus can be selected is started.

  When the operation of the second operation means (the right key in this example) or the third operation means (the left key in this example) is received while the demo screen (or the brightness adjustment screen) is displayed, , The display of the volume adjustment screen capable of adjusting the volume of the speaker 120 or the like is started, and the fourth operation means (up key in this example) or the fifth operation means is displayed while the demo screen (or the volume adjustment screen) is displayed. When the operation of the operation means (the down key in this example) is received, the display of the brightness adjustment screen on which the brightness of the various lamps 418 and the decorative design display device 208 can be adjusted is started.

  If the operation of the second operation means (the right key in this example) is received while the volume adjustment screen is being displayed, the volume is increased by one level and a meter display indicating that the volume has been increased by one level is displayed. If the operation is performed and the operation of the third operation means (the left key in this example) is received while the volume adjustment screen is being displayed, the meter display indicating that the volume has been lowered by one step and the volume has been lowered by one step. Execute If the operation of the fourth operation means (up key in this example) is received while the brightness adjustment screen is displayed, the brightness is increased by one step and a meter display indicating that the brightness has been raised by one step is executed. If the operation of the fifth operation means (down key in this example) is received while the brightness adjustment screen is being displayed, the brightness is reduced by one step and a meter display indicating that the brightness is lowered by one step is executed. I do.

  Further, when the elapse of a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) is detected during the display of the menu screen, the volume adjustment screen, or the brightness adjustment screen, the display of the demo screen is started, and the symbol variation display is started. When the start condition is satisfied, the symbol variation display is started.

<Demo screen / Menu screen>
FIG. 66B is a transition diagram showing an example of transition of the menu screen. The menu screen according to this example is composed of four menus: effect customization, mobile terminal interlocking service, initialization, and returning to the demonstration screen. When each menu is selected, the effect customization screen, the mobile terminal It is configured to transition to the linked service screen, the initialization confirmation screen, and the demonstration screen.

  For example, in the example shown in FIG. 67, since the elapse of a predetermined time (30 seconds) has been detected during the non-design change shown in FIG. 67 (a), the demo screen (top menu screen) shown in FIG. Since the display is started and the operation of the fifth operation means (down key 161d in this example) is received as shown in FIG. The display of the brightness adjustment screen shown in FIG.

  Subsequently, while the brightness adjustment screen is being displayed, the operation of the fifth operation means (the down key 161d in this example) is received as shown in FIG. 67 (e). As shown in the figure, a meter display indicating that the luminance has decreased by one step while the luminance has been decreased by one step is executed, and as shown in FIG. 67 (g), the fourth operation means (the up key 161c in this example) ), The meter display is executed to increase the luminance by one step and to indicate that the luminance has increased by one step, as shown in FIG. 67 (h).

  Subsequently, during the display of the brightness adjustment screen, as shown in FIG. 67 (i), since the operation of the second operation means (the right key 161a in this example) is received, the screen is replaced with the brightness adjustment screen. , The display of the volume adjustment screen shown in FIG. While the volume adjustment screen is being displayed, the operation of the second operation means (the right key 161a in this example) has been received as shown in FIG. 67 (k). As described above, the meter display indicating that the volume is increased by one step and the volume is decreased by one step is executed.

  Subsequently, since it is detected that a predetermined time (30 seconds) has elapsed during the display of the volume adjustment screen shown in FIG. 67 (l), the display of the demonstration screen (top menu screen) shown in FIG. 67 (m) is started. During the display of this demo screen, as shown in FIG. 67 (n), the operation of the first operation means (in this example, the chance button 136) is received, so that the menu screen shown in FIG. 67 (o) is received. Has begun to be displayed.

  Subsequently, in the state where the effect customization menu is temporarily selected on this menu screen, as shown in FIG. 67 (p), the operation of the first operation means (in this example, the chance button 136) is received. , The display of the effect customization screen has started. While the effect customization screen shown in FIG. 67 (q) is being displayed, the operation of the second operation means (the right key 161a in this example) is received as shown in FIG. 67 (r). The light display is moved to the next selectable item (in this example, item P), and the first operation is performed with the item P temporarily selected as shown in FIG. 67 (t). Since the operation of the means (in this example, the chance button 136) is received, the customization corresponding to the item P is enabled, and the character display of “Item P is being set” is displayed in the display area below the decorative symbol display device 208. Is performed, the item P is set as a custom item by the player.

<Demo screen / Menu screen / Mobile terminal linked service screen>
FIG. 66C is a transition diagram illustrating an example of transition of the mobile terminal-linked service screen. The mobile terminal interlocking service screen according to the present example includes six menus: trial play, password input, data storage, data clear, quick start, and returning to the menu screen.

  For example, when the menu of the mobile terminal-linked service is selected on the menu screen shown in FIG. 68B, the display of the mobile terminal-linked service screen shown in FIG. When the menu of the trial play is selected on the screen, after the display of the trial play screen shown in FIG. 68 (b1-1) is started, when new registration is selected on the trial play screen , The display of the new registration screen shown in FIG. 68 (b1-2) is started.

  When the menu for password input is selected on the mobile terminal link service screen shown in FIG. 68 (b2), the password as shown in FIG. 68 (b2-1) and FIG. 68 (b2-1-1) is selected. The display of the input screen is started, and when an incorrect password is input on the password input screen, a screen for notifying a password input error as shown in FIG. 68 (b2-1-2) is displayed. On the other hand, when the correct password is input, the display of a screen notifying the completion of the input of the password as shown in FIG. 68 (b2-1-3) is started.

  When the data saving menu is selected on the mobile terminal linked service screen shown in FIG. 68 (b3), the display of a confirmation screen as shown in FIG. 68 (b3-1) is started. When "Yes" is selected in step 2, the display of the two-dimensional code display screen as shown in FIG. 68 (b3-2) is started, and "End" is selected during the display of the two-dimensional code display screen. In this case, the display of the confirmation screen as shown in FIG. 68 (b3-2-1) is started.

  When the data clear menu is selected on the mobile terminal link service screen shown in FIG. 68 (b4), a confirmation screen as shown in FIG. 68 (b4-1) starts to be displayed. If "Yes" is selected in, the display of the completion screen as shown in FIG. 68 (b4-1-1) is started. Further, when the quick start menu is selected on the portable terminal interlocking service screen shown in FIG. 68 (b5), the display of the start screen as shown in FIG. In the mobile terminal-linked service screen shown in b6), when the menu of returning to the menu screen is selected, the display of the top menu is started.

<Meter increase effect and item addition effect / Example 8>
Next, a meter increase effect and an item-giving effect according to the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 69 is a diagram illustrating, in chronological order, the meter increase effect and the item-giving effect according to the eighth embodiment.

  Example 8 is an example in which an item provision effect is started based on the fact that the item provision condition is satisfied (the meter gauge is full) while the demo screen (top menu screen) is displayed. The game state shown in FIG. 69 (a) is a state in which the demonstration screen (top menu screen) is displayed during the non-design change. Further, in this example, there is no special figure variable game that is suspended, and in the display area on the left side of the decorative symbol display device 208, the number of reserved special figure 1 variable games is 0, and the number of reserved special figure 2 variable games is 0. , A number indicates that the number of pending regular-floating games is 0. In addition, in the lower display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the reserved icon PI is not displayed, so that the reserved number of the special figure variable game (the special figure 1 variable game and the special figure 2 variable game) may be zero. As shown, nine gauges are turned off and one gauge GG is turned on, so that nine meters have entered the meter increase entrance 227 (one more ball has entered the meter increasing entrance 227). That the gauge will be full). Furthermore, in the lower display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, performing the character display CD1 of "item not set" indicates that the custom item has not been set by the player.

  During the display of such a demo screen (top menu screen), when one ball enters the meter increasing entrance 227 as shown in FIG. 69 (b), as shown in FIG. 69 (c). After executing a meter increase effect in which all the 10 gauges are turned off by turning off one lit gauge, as shown in FIG. 69 (d), the display is replaced with "full" By executing the meter increase effect of performing the character display CD2, a predetermined number (ten in this example) of balls enter the meter increase entrance 227, and it is notified that the item provision condition is satisfied.

  Note that the subsequent meter increase effect, item addition effect, and button effect effect are the same as those in the first embodiment except that the demonstration screen (top menu screen) is being displayed. Although a reference numeral is attached and the description is omitted, the display related to the item giving effect is displayed before the display related to the demo screen (top menu screen) over the period illustrated in FIGS. 69 (e) to (n). , At least a part of the display related to the item provision effect is overlapped with at least a part of the display related to the demonstration effect (top menu screen). With such a configuration, the visibility of the item provision effect is not hindered, so that it is possible to accurately notify the player that the item has been provided and information on the provided item, In some cases, the effect can be enhanced by temporarily lowering the visibility of the demo screen (top menu screen).

  In this example, the operation by the chance button 136 is received at the timing shown in FIG. 69 (l). However, since the display related to the button effect is displayed closer to the front than the display related to the demo screen (top menu screen). , Rather than operations related to the demo screen (top menu screen) (in this example, operations for menu selection, volume adjustment, or brightness adjustment), operations related to button effects (in this example, setting of items acquired by the player) ) Is given priority.

  Therefore, when the operation by the chance button 136 is received at the timing shown in FIG. 69 (l) (the timing at which the button effect is displayed before the demo screen (top menu screen)), the operation relating to the button effect (this example) is performed. In FIG. 69 (n), the corresponding processing is performed assuming that the player has received the operation for setting the acquired item (the button effect is not displayed and the demo screen (top menu screen) If the operation by the chance button 136 is received at the timing when () is displayed), an operation related to the demo screen (top menu screen) (in this example, an operation for performing menu selection, volume adjustment, or brightness adjustment) And the corresponding processing is performed. Even if the operation by the chance button 136 is received at the timing shown in FIG. 69 (l) (the timing at which the button effect is displayed before the demo screen (top menu screen)), the demo screen (top menu screen) ) (In this example, an operation for performing menu selection, volume adjustment, or brightness adjustment) may be configured to perform corresponding processing.

<Meter increase effect and item addition effect / Example 9>
Next, a meter increase effect and an item-giving effect according to the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 70 is a diagram illustrating a meter increase effect and an item-giving effect according to the ninth embodiment in chronological order.

    In the ninth embodiment, an item provision effect is started based on the fact that the item provision condition is satisfied (the meter gauge is full) while the menu screen described with reference to FIGS. 66 and 67 is being displayed. It is an example. In addition, since the production mode of the meter increase production, the item provision production, and the button production is the same as that of the eighth embodiment except that the menu screen is being displayed, the same reference numerals are given in FIG. Although the description is omitted, in this example, the display related to the item provision effect is displayed before the display related to the menu screen over the period illustrated in FIGS. 70 (e) to (n). At least a part of the display related to the item provision effect is overlapped with at least a part of the display related to the menu screen. With such a configuration, the visibility of the item provision effect is not hindered, so that it is possible to accurately notify the player that the item has been provided and information on the provided item, In some cases, the effect can be enhanced by temporarily lowering the visibility of the menu screen.

  In this example, the operation by the chance button 136 is received at the timing shown in FIG. 70 (l). However, since the display related to the button effect is displayed in front of the display related to the menu screen, the operation related to the menu screen is performed. An operation relating to button effects (in this example, an operation for setting an item acquired by a player) is preferentially accepted over an operation (in this example, an operation for selecting a menu of a mobile terminal-linked service or the like). It is configured as follows.

  Therefore, when the operation by the chance button 136 is received at the timing shown in FIG. 70 (l) (the timing at which the button effect is displayed before the menu screen), the operation related to the button effect (in this example, the player The corresponding processing is performed assuming that the operation for setting the acquired item has been received, but the timing shown in FIG. 70 (n) (the timing at which the button effect is not displayed and the menu screen is displayed) If the operation using the chance button 136 is received, it is determined that an operation related to the menu screen (in this example, an operation for selecting a menu of a mobile terminal-linked service or the like) has been received, and a corresponding process is performed. Even if the operation by the chance button 136 is received at the timing shown in FIG. 70 (l) (the timing at which the button effect is displayed before the menu screen), the operation on the menu screen (in this example, An operation for selecting a menu of a mobile terminal-linked service or the like) may be accepted and the corresponding processing may be performed.

<Meter increase effect and item addition effect / Example 10>
Next, a meter increase effect and an item-giving effect according to the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 71. FIG. 71 is a diagram illustrating a meter increase effect and an item-giving effect according to the tenth embodiment in chronological order.

  In the tenth embodiment, an item provision effect is started based on the fact that the item provision condition is satisfied (the meter gauge is full) while the volume adjustment screen described with reference to FIGS. 66 and 67 is being displayed. Here is an example. Note that the production modes of the meter increase production, the item provision production, and the button production are the same as those in the eighth embodiment except that the volume adjustment is being displayed. Although the description is omitted, in this example, the display related to the item provision effect is displayed before the display related to the volume adjustment over the period illustrated in FIGS. 71 (e) to (n). At least a part of the display related to the item provision effect is overlapped with at least a part of the display related to the volume adjustment. With such a configuration, the visibility of the item provision effect is not hindered, so that it is possible to accurately notify the player that the item has been provided and information on the provided item, In some cases, the effect of rendering can be enhanced by temporarily lowering the visibility of the volume adjustment.

    In this example, the operation by the chance button 136 is received at the timing shown in FIG. 71 (l). However, since the display related to the button effect is displayed in front of the display related to the volume adjustment, the operation related to the volume adjustment is performed. An operation relating to button effects (in this example, an operation for setting an item acquired by a player) is preferentially received over an operation (in this example, an operation for adjusting the volume). .

  Therefore, when the operation by the chance button 136 is received at the timing shown in FIG. 71 (l) (the timing at which the button effect is displayed before the volume adjustment), the operation related to the button effect (in this example, the player The corresponding processing is performed assuming that the operation for setting the acquired item has been received, but the timing shown in FIG. 71 (n) (the timing at which the button effect is not displayed and the volume adjustment is displayed) If the operation by the chance button 136 is received, it is determined that an operation related to volume adjustment (in this example, an operation for adjusting the volume) has been received, and a corresponding process is performed. Even when the operation by the chance button 136 is received at the timing shown in FIG. 71 (l) (the timing at which the button effect is displayed before the volume adjustment), the operation related to the volume adjustment (in this example, (Operation for adjusting the volume) may be accepted and the corresponding processing may be performed.

<Meter increase effect and item addition effect / Example 11>
Next, a meter increase effect and an item-giving effect according to the eleventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 72 is a diagram illustrating, in chronological order, the meter increase effect and the item-giving effect according to the eleventh embodiment.

  In the eleventh embodiment, the item provision effect is started based on the fact that the item provision condition is satisfied (the gauge of the meter is full) while the two-dimensional code display screen described with reference to FIG. 68 is being displayed. It is an example. Note that the effect forms of the meter increase effect, the item addition effect, and the button effect are the same as those of the eighth embodiment except that the two-dimensional code display screen is being displayed. At the same time, although the description is omitted, in this example, the display related to the item provision effect is displayed before the display related to the two-dimensional code display screen over the period shown in FIGS. 72 (g) to 72 (n). , At least a part of the display related to the item giving effect is overlapped with at least a part of the two-dimensional code. With such a configuration, the visibility of the item provision effect is not hindered, so that it is possible to accurately notify the player that the item has been provided and information on the provided item, In some cases, the rendering effect can be enhanced by temporarily lowering the visibility of the two-dimensional code.

  In this example, the operation by the chance button 136 is received at the timing shown in FIG. 72 (l). However, since the display related to the button effect is displayed in front of the two-dimensional code, the operation related to the two-dimensional code is performed. The operation related to the button effect (in this example, the operation for setting the item acquired by the player) is given priority over the operation (in this example, the operation for ending the two-dimensional code display screen). Make up.

  Therefore, when the operation by the chance button 136 is received at the timing shown in FIG. 72 (l) (the timing at which the button effect is displayed before the two-dimensional code), the operation related to the button effect (in this example, the game The corresponding processing is performed assuming that the user has received the operation for setting the acquired item), but the timing (the button effect is not displayed but the two-dimensional code is displayed) shown in FIG. If the operation by the chance button 136 is received at (timing), it is assumed that an operation related to the two-dimensional code (in this example, an operation for terminating the two-dimensional code display screen) is received, and the corresponding process is performed. Even if the operation by the chance button 136 is received at the timing shown in FIG. 72 (l) (the timing at which the button effect is displayed before the two-dimensional code display screen), the operation (two-dimensional code operation) In this example, it may be configured that the corresponding process is performed on the assumption that an operation for terminating the two-dimensional code display screen has been received.

<Meter increase effect and item addition effect / Example 12>
Next, a meter increase effect and an item-giving effect according to the twelfth example will be described with reference to FIG. 73. FIG. 73 is a diagram illustrating a meter increase effect and an item-giving effect according to the twelfth embodiment in chronological order.

  In the twelfth embodiment, the item provision effect is started based on the fact that the item provision condition is satisfied (the gauge of the meter is full) while the effect customization screen described with reference to FIGS. 66 and 67 is being displayed. Then, the item is set using the effect customization screen. In addition, since the production mode of the meter increase production, the item provision production, and the button production is the same as that of the eighth embodiment except that the production customization screen is being displayed, the same reference numerals are given in FIG. Although the description is omitted, in this example, the display related to the item provision effect is displayed before the display related to the effect customization screen over the period illustrated in FIGS. 73 (e) to 73 (o). Thus, at least a part of the display related to the item giving effect is overlapped with at least a portion of the effect customizing screen. With such a configuration, the visibility of the item provision effect is not hindered, so that it is possible to accurately notify the player that the item has been provided and information on the provided item, In some cases, the effect of the effect can be enhanced by temporarily lowering the visibility of the effect customizing screen.

  In this example, the operation by the chance button 136 is received at the timing shown in FIG. 73 (l). However, since the display related to the button effect is displayed closer to the front than the effect customization screen, the effect customization screen is displayed. The operation related to the button effect (in this example, the operation for setting the item acquired by the player) is preferentially accepted over the operation (in this example, the operation for determining the item to be set on the effect customization screen). It is composed.

  Therefore, when the operation by the chance button 136 is received at the timing shown in FIG. 73 (l) (the timing at which the button effect is displayed before the effect customizing screen), the operation related to the button effect (in this example, the game The corresponding processing is performed assuming that the user has received the operation for setting the acquired item), but the timing (button effect is not displayed but the effect customizing screen is displayed as shown in FIG. 73 (n)) When the operation by the chance button 136 is received at (timing), it is assumed that an operation related to the effect customization screen (in this example, an operation to determine an item to be set on the effect customization screen) is received, and a corresponding process is performed. Even if the operation by the chance button 136 is received at the timing shown in FIG. 73 (l) (the timing at which the button effect is displayed before the effect customizing screen), the operation related to the effect customizing screen (this example) Then, on the effect customization screen, an operation of determining an item to be set) may be received, and the corresponding process may be performed.

  Further, in this example, in the state where the option of “Yes” is provisionally selected during the button effect, as shown in FIG. 73 (l), a pressing operation of the chance button 136 is received, and as shown in FIG. 73 (m). Even if the option of "yes" is highlighted, the process of immediately setting the acquired item is not performed, and the menu screen is renewed as shown in FIGS. 73 (q) to 73 (u). In FIG. 73, when the mobile terminal interlocking service screen is selected and the effect customization screen is displayed, as shown in FIG. 73 (v), the item (item A in this example) acquired in the item providing effect can be set. It is configured as follows.

<Meter increase effect and item addition effect / Example 13>
Next, a meter increase effect and an item-giving effect according to the thirteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 74 is a diagram illustrating a meter increase effect and an item-giving effect according to the thirteenth embodiment in chronological order.

  In the thirteenth embodiment, the item provision effect is started based on the fact that the item provision condition is satisfied (the gauge of the meter is full) while the effect customization screen described with reference to FIGS. 66 and 67 is being displayed. This is an example in which an item is immediately set by an operation in a button effect after performing the operation.

  Since the production mode of the meter increase production, the item provision production, and the button production is the same as that of the twelfth embodiment, the same reference numerals are given in FIG. 74 and the description is omitted. In the state where the option of “Yes” is provisionally selected during the button effects shown in j) to (k) of FIG. 74, when the pressing operation of the chance button 136 is received as shown in FIG. As shown in (m), by highlighting the option of “Yes”, it is notified that the selection of “Yes” has been confirmed (that the selection to set the acquired item A has been made). When an item is acquired while the effect customizing screen is displayed, as shown in FIG. 74 (i), item A is additionally displayed as a selectable item on the displayed effect customizing screen.

<Meter increase effect and item addition effect / Example 14>
Next, a meter increase effect and an item-giving effect according to the fourteenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 75. FIG. 75 is a diagram illustrating, in chronological order, the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the fourteenth embodiment.

  In the fourteenth embodiment, the item provision effect is started based on the fact that the item provision condition is satisfied (the meter gauge is full) while the effect customization screen described with reference to FIGS. 66 and 67 is being displayed. After that, the point of setting an item using the effect customization screen is the same as that of the twelfth embodiment described with reference to FIG. 73, but in this example, the effect customization screen is set before the display related to the item provision effect. By displaying, at least a part of the effect customization screen is overlapped with at least a part of the display related to the item provision effect (in this example, all the gauges of the meter).

  With such a configuration, the visibility of the effect customization effect is not hindered, so that the information about the acquired item can be accurately notified to the player, and the visibility of the item-attached effect is temporarily reduced. In some cases, the effect can be enhanced by lowering the effect. In addition, you may comprise so that at least one part of an effect customization screen may not overlap at least one part of the display regarding item provision effect.

<Meter increase effect and item addition effect / Example 15>
Next, a meter increase effect and an item-giving effect according to Example 15 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 76 is a diagram illustrating, in chronological order, the meter increase effect and the item addition effect according to the fifteenth embodiment.

  In the fifteenth embodiment, the item provision effect is started based on the fact that the item provision condition is satisfied (the gauge of the meter is full) while the effect customization screen described with reference to FIGS. 66 and 67 is being displayed. Then, even if the symbol variation display is started during the display of the effect customization screen, the item provision effect is continued. In addition, since the production mode of the meter increase production, the item provision production, and the button production is the same as that of the twelfth embodiment except that the production customization screen is being displayed, the same reference numerals are given in FIG. The description is omitted.

  In the present example, during the item giving effect shown in FIG. 76 (k), as shown in FIG. 76 (l), a ball enters the starting port (in this example, the first special figure starting port 230). Then, in FIG. 76 (m), the symbol variation display is started, but the item giving effect is continued. With such a configuration, the item provision effect is not stopped at an unexpected timing of the player, and the player's willingness to play is not hindered.

<Meter increase effect and item addition effect / Example 16>
Next, a meter increase effect and an item-giving effect according to Example 16 will be described with reference to FIG. 77. FIG. 77 is a diagram illustrating a meter increase effect and an item-giving effect according to the sixteenth embodiment in chronological order.

  The sixteenth embodiment is different from the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 59 in that the item provision effect is started based on the fact that the item provision condition is satisfied during the symbol change (the gauge of the meter is full). In the present example, the items are displayed over the two changes, the change and the next change.

  Specifically, during the execution of the item-giving effect shown in FIG. 77 (k), the change ends, and after the symbols are stopped and displayed, as shown in FIG. 77 (l), the suspension of the special figure 2 is performed. Has started a new variable game based on Then, the button effect is continued also in the next symbol change following the symbol change in which the item provision condition is satisfied, and as shown in FIG. 77 (m), based on the reception of the pressing operation of the chance button 136, the button effect is performed. Is ended, the item provision effect is resumed, and the items obtained by the player are displayed. As in this example, if the items can be displayed over a plurality of symbol variations, the item giving effect is not interrupted when the symbol variations are stopped or started, and the player's willingness to play the game is ensured. Can be sustained. In addition, the symbol change which continues the display of an item is not limited to two times, may be three times or more, and may not be a continuous symbol change.

<Meter increase effect and item addition effect / Example 17>
Next, the meter increase effect and the item-giving effect according to the seventeenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 78 is a diagram illustrating a meter increase effect and an item-giving effect according to the seventeenth embodiment in chronological order.

  The seventeenth embodiment is different from the embodiment described with reference to FIG. 59 in that the item provision effect is started based on the fact that the item provision condition is satisfied during the symbol change (the gauge of the meter is full). In the present example, it is possible to detect the entry of a ball into the meter increase entrance 227 during the execution of the item provision effect, and in this example, the meter increase effect is executed when the entry of the ball is detected. ing.

  More specifically, during the execution of the item provision effect shown in FIG. 77 (j), as shown in FIG. 77 (k), it is detected that the ball has entered the meter increase entrance 227, so that the following FIG. As shown in ()), a meter increase effect in which the gauge of the meter is advanced while an item is being displayed by the item provision effect. As in this example, if the meter can be increased during the display of the item, the player's willingness to play may be further enhanced. Note that, in addition to allowing the meter to be increased during the display of the item, the item provision condition may be satisfied (the gauge of the meter may be full), In this case, a configuration may be made so that the right to grant an item can be carried over to the next game or later.

<Meter increase effect and item addition effect / Example 18>
Next, a meter increase effect and an item-giving effect according to the eighteenth example will be described with reference to FIG. 79. FIG. 79 is a diagram illustrating a meter increase effect and an item-giving effect according to Example 18 in chronological order.

  In the eighteenth embodiment, the mini-game is executed based on the fact that the item provision condition is satisfied during the symbol change (the gauge of the meter is full), and the item provision effect is started after the mini-game is completed. I do. FIG. 79 (e) shows a state in which the mini game has been started. In the present example, the display area for displaying the gauge of the meter is enlarged, and in the display area after the enlargement, the lottery is executed. Needless to say, the mini game may be another type of game.

  The start position of the character in the draw of this example may be a predetermined position, may be determined by lottery, may be determined based on the selection operation of the player, the selection operation of the player Regardless, the result may be predetermined. In addition, the sign of "x" in the result of the amiduji is out of place, the image imitating the capsule means that the item is acquired, and the letter E means that the item E is acquired. Is configured to notify the item to be acquired. If the pattern or color of the image imitating the capsule is different from the normal, the appearance rate of the specific item may be high, there may be a plurality of types of mini-games, and the type of item may be different depending on the type of mini-game. The easiness of acquisition and the appearance rate of the specific item may be different.

  In this example, since the result of the mini game (Amidakuji) is an image imitating a capsule, an item giving effect using the image is started, and the items obtained by the player are displayed. With the configuration as in the present example, there is a case where the player can be enjoyed without getting tired of the period from when the item providing condition is satisfied to when the item is displayed.

<Meter increase effect and item addition effect / Modification 1>
Next, a meter increase effect and an item-giving effect according to the first modification will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 80 is a diagram showing a meter increase effect and an item-giving effect according to the first modification in a time series.

  In the above embodiment, “the entry of the ball into the entrance 227 for increasing the meter” was the trigger of the effect of increasing the meter. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Conditions other than "ball entry" may be used as an opportunity for the meter increase effect. Therefore, for example, as shown in FIGS. 80 (a) and 80 (b), the meter increases when a ball enters the starting port (in this example, the first special figure starting port 230) during a non-design change. An effect may be executed, or as shown in FIGS. 80 (c) to (e), a ball enters the starting opening (in the present example, the first special figure starting opening 230) during the symbol change. In this case, a meter increase effect may be executed.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 80 (e) to 80 (g), the hold icon PI1 in the first display mode is changed to the hold icon PI2 in the second display mode based on the prefetch result of the variable game. In this case, a meter increase effect may be executed, or, as shown in FIGS. 80 (i) to (l), a meter increase effect may be executed when a pseudo-run is executed.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 80 (m) to 80 (o), even if an operation by the operation means (in this example, the chance button 136) is received during execution of the button effect, the meter increase effect is executed. If the reach is executed as shown in FIG. 80 (p), the meter increase effect may be executed, or as shown in FIG. 80 (q), the SP reach or the SP reach effect may be executed. The meter increase effect may be executed when the notice display (display of the princess character image in this example) is performed as shown in FIG. 80 (r). .

<Meter increase effect and item addition effect / Modification 2>
Next, a meter increase effect and an item-giving effect according to the second modification will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 81 is a diagram illustrating a meter increase effect and an item-giving effect according to Modification 2 in chronological order.

  The point that the item giving effect is started based on the fact that the item giving condition is satisfied (the gauge of the meter is full) during the display of the volume adjustment screen described with reference to FIGS. However, in this example, even when the display related to the volume adjustment is displayed in front of the display related to the button effect, the operation related to the volume adjustment (in this example, , An operation related to button effects (in this example, an operation for setting items acquired by a player) is given priority over an operation related to button effects.

  Specifically, when a single ball enters the meter increase entrance 227 as shown in FIG. 81 (d) while the volume adjustment screen shown in FIG. 81 (c) is being displayed, the subsequent FIG. e) As shown in FIG. 81 (f), after performing a meter increase effect in which all the ten gauges are turned off by turning off one lit gauge as shown in FIG. Alternatively, by executing the meter increase effect of performing the character display CD2 of “full”, a predetermined number (ten in this example) of balls enter the meter increase entrance 227, and the item provision condition is satisfied. Notify.

  The state shown in FIG. 81 (g) is a state in which the item giving effect has started. In the item giving effect according to the present example, the image CG imitating the appearance of the capsule is stepwise displayed over the period shown in FIGS. 81 (g) to 81 (i) when the item giving condition is satisfied. While the image is enlarged and displayed, the animation is moved from the lower display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 to the center, and as shown in FIG. 81 (j), information about the item appears from inside the image CG imitating the capsule. As shown in FIG. 81 (k), an item name (in this example, item A) IN display and an item description IT (in this example, item A (Contents omitted)) is displayed.

  In this example, by displaying the display related to the item provision effect at the back of the display of the volume control screen, at least a part of the display of the volume control screen is changed to at least the display related to the item provision effect. Some overlap. With such a configuration, the visibility of the volume adjustment screen is not hindered, so that the information regarding the volume adjustment can be accurately notified to the player, and the visibility of the item provision effect is temporarily reduced. In some cases, the effect can be enhanced by lowering it.

  In this example, the display relating to the volume adjustment is displayed in front of the display relating to the button effect. However, as shown in FIG. 81 (n), the second operation means (the right key 161a in this example) is used. When the operation of (1) is accepted, the display for switching the provisional selection between “Yes” and “No” is performed during the button effect without performing the process of increasing the volume by one level, and the third operation means (this example) Then, when the operation of the left key 161b) is received, the display for switching the temporary selection between “Yes” and “No” during the button effect is executed without executing the process of lowering the volume by one step.

  In addition, when the operation of pressing the chance button 136 is received as shown in FIG. 81 (r) in a state where the option of “Yes” is tentatively selected during the button effect, after the button effect is ended, the button effect shown in FIG. (s) to (u), after performing an animation display in which the item names are moved from the center to the lower display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 while the item names are gradually reduced and displayed. A character display CD3 of "Item A is being set" is displayed instead of the character display CD1 of "Item not set".

<Meter increase effect and item addition effect / Modification 3>
Next, a meter increase effect and an item-giving effect according to Modification 3 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 82 is a diagram showing a meter increase effect and an item-giving effect according to the third modification in a time series.

  In the above embodiment, “entry of the ball into the entrance 227 for meter increase” is set as a condition for establishing the item provision. However, the present invention is not limited to this. A condition other than "ball entry" may be set as a condition for establishing item provision. Therefore, for example, as shown in FIGS. 82 (a) to (c), the cumulative number of balls entering the variable winning opening 234 (for example, the total number of obtained balls during the big hit game) is a predetermined number (in this example, (10000 balls), an item may be given, or as shown in FIGS. 82 (d) to (h), when a specific operation is received by the operating means (in this example, Items may be given in the order of the key 161c → the right key 161a → the down key 161d → the left key 161b).

  As described above, the game console (for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) according to the present embodiment is a game console provided with a display unit (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208), and the display unit is , An effect setting display (for example, an effect customizing screen shown in FIG. 73, a volume adjusting screen shown in FIG. 71, a luminance adjusting screen shown in FIG. 67), and one or more effect setting displays This is a display including settings (for example, item settings shown in FIG. 73, volume settings shown in FIG. 70, and luminance settings shown in FIG. 67). Apart from the setting display, a display (hereinafter, referred to as “first display”) including one setting (for example, the setting of item A shown in FIGS. 71 and 73). Indicates that it has been granted It can be displayed on the display means displays the (item name display and item description IT indication of IN)) that it is the amusement machine according to claim.

  According to the gaming table according to the present embodiment, during the display of the effect setting display, the first display including one setting can be displayed separately from the effect setting display being displayed. Even during the display, the player may be able to entertain.

  Further, a count display means (for example, a gauge GG of a meter shown in FIG. 59 (a) or the like) capable of displaying a display in which the number or the amount increases or decreases is provided. For example, a display in which all ten gauges are turned off as shown in FIG. 59 (c) or a character display CD2 of “full” shown in FIG. 59 (d)) In this case, the first display may be displayed on the display means, and the display by the count display means may be a display that can be changed during the period of the non-design change display.

  With such a configuration, the display of the count display means changes during the non-symbol variation display, so that the player may be able to play the game without getting bored. Further, even if the suspension of the variable game is lost, the player may not be awakened.

  In addition, when the display of the count display means becomes the first count display, a second display different from the first display is displayed on the display means, and the second display is an advance notice. (For example, the display of the item image IG including the character display of “heat” shown in FIG. 62 (m) and the like).

    With such a configuration, the display other than the display including the setting may be displayed, thereby improving the interest of the player in some cases.

  Further, when the display of the count display means becomes the first count display, the first display is displayed on the display means after a mini game (for example, a mini game shown in FIG. 79) is executed. You may.

  With such a configuration, there is a case where the player can be entertained for a period until the first display is displayed.

  Further, an operation means (for example, a chance button 136 shown in FIG. 59 (l) or the like) is provided, and the display means displays a display related to the operation means (hereinafter, “first operation”) during the display of the first display. For example, it is a means capable of displaying a button effect shown in FIG. 59 (j) or the like, and the first operation display is a display of a valid period of the operation means (for example, FIG. 59 (j) or the like). May be displayed including the operation validity period display TG) shown in FIG.

  With such a configuration, even when the first display is displayed, the player can operate and participate in the operation means, the degree of intervention of the player can be increased, and the interest of the player can be improved. There is.

  Further, when the symbol change display is started during the display of the effect setting display and the first display, the effect setting display may be erased.

  With such a configuration, the first display can be displayed longer than the effect setting display to appeal to the player, and the player's motivation to play can be increased in some cases.

  Further, when the first display is displayed on the display means, the selectable settings (for example, the setting of the items shown in FIG. 73) in the effect setting display may be increased.

  With such a configuration, there are cases where the number of options by the player can be increased and the player's desire to play can be increased.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 82 (o) to (r), when a ball enters a predetermined game area during the display of the effect setting display (for example, effect customizing screen) (for example, for increasing a meter). When the ball enters the entrance, or when the ball enters the starting opening or the winning opening), the first display (for example, when the player has set the item A), in addition to the effect setting display being displayed. Display indicating that the display has been acquired) can be displayed on the display means, and a setting (for example, item A) corresponding to the first display is added to one or more settings in the effect setting display. What can be displayed on the display means may be used.

  Note that the configuration of the gaming table according to the present invention is not limited to the configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the above-described embodiment. For example, during the display of an item that has appeared during the non-design change, the design change has started. Even in this case, the item need not be deleted. Further, even when the design starts to change during the display of the custom display and the item, only the custom display may be deleted without deleting the item. Further, even when the meter is difficult to visually recognize (or cannot be visually recognized) during the display of the custom display, an item may appear when the meter is full. Further, an item may appear after the meter is full during non-symbol fluctuation.

  Alternatively, an item indicating reliability may appear after a meter that has been partially stored during non-design fluctuations becomes full during design fluctuations. Further, the item indicating the degree of reliability (heat, intense heat, etc.) may be made to appear more easily at the time of the design change than at the time of the non-design change, or may not be made to appear at the time of the non-design change. Further, a button effective meter (operation effective period display) may be displayed during non-symbol fluctuation. In addition, the display of the demo screen may be canceled (or without canceling) to display the item, the menu display may be canceled (or without canceling) to display the item, The item may be displayed by canceling the display of the two-dimensional code (or without canceling).

  Further, the meter may be accumulated at an opportunity other than the ball passing. Further, there may be an increase mode in which the amount of increase of the meter increases more than usual. Further, in this case, the system may be configured to shift to the increase mode when the hold is full or the electric support is completed. Alternatively, an item may appear after the mini-game when the meter is full. Also, an effect in which an item appears even during SP reach may be performed. Further, the period of the button effect of the reach and the period of the button effect of customization may or may not overlap, and the button may be effective for the other effect than for one. Also, the appearing items may change depending on the gaming state, each stage, or the timing.

  Also, when an item appears during the display of the customization screen, the display of “?” On the customization screen may be changed (additional display of the item), or when the customization screen is redisplayed without changing the item. Alternatively, the display of “?” On the customization screen may be changed. In addition, a notice of an appearing item may be given, and if the color of the meter is different from the normal time, a specific item may be made easier to appear, or the color may be changed over time. In addition, the item may be displayed over a plurality of changes, the meter may be accumulated during the display of the item, or the meter may be filled up with one kind of trigger.

  In addition, other display devices other than the decorative design display device 208 (for example, another liquid crystal display device, one or more single-color or full-color LED, a dot matrix display device, a seven-segment display device, an organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) display device, The meter display may be performed only by the reel (drum) display device, the leaf display device, the plasma display, or the projector), or the meter display may be performed by the decorative design display device 208 and another display device (for example, When the ball enters the meter entry entrance 227, the meter display of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the meter display of the other display devices increase by the same increment.) One of the decorative symbol display device 208 and another display device is used. Count display means for performing meter display may be used.

  Further, the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to the pachinko machine, for example, a plurality of reels provided with a plurality of types of symbols, a start lever for instructing the rotation of the reel, each reel , A stop button for individually stopping the rotation of the reels, lottery means for judging the success or failure of internal winning of a plurality of combinations by lottery, and reel rotation based on the lottery result of the lottery means. Whether the symbol combination displayed by the reel stop control means for performing the stop control relating to the stop of the reel and the reel stopped based on the lottery result of the lottery means is a symbol combination determined in advance corresponding to the internally won combination. Determination means for determining whether or not, when the symbol stop mode is a predetermined winning mode, payout control means for performing a game medium payout process for paying out a game medium corresponding to the predetermined winning mode, It is also suitable, such as a slot machine equipped.

  Further, the gaming table according to the present invention can be applied to an enclosed gaming machine. Here, the "enclosed game machine" is one in which game balls enclosed in the game machine are used in a circulating manner. Further, the main control unit, the first sub-control unit, and the second sub-control unit may be configured as one chip, or the main control unit and the first sub-control unit may be configured to enable two-way communication. Good. Further, while the main control unit and the first sub-control unit enable bidirectional communication, the communication from the first sub-control unit to the second sub-control unit may be one-way communication.

  Next, another specific example of the effect performed by the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. It should be noted that the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 83 to 136 are used in principle only for the description of the embodiment shown in FIGS. 83 to 136, and even if duplicated reference numerals are shown in other drawings, 83 to 136 are given priority.

Next, an effect example using the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 will be described with reference to FIGS.
FIG. 83 shows an effect example using the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 in a stepwise manner.

  FIG. 83A shows a state where the movable bodies 1 and 2 are located at an initial position above the decorative symbol display device 208. When each of the movable bodies 1 and 2 is located at the initial position, the movable body 1 overlaps the movable body 2. For this reason, when each of the movable bodies 1 and 2 is located at the initial position, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the movable body 2 with the movable body 1. Each of the movable bodies 1 and 2 is a movable body including a light emitting unit (for example, a plurality of LEDs), and is a movable body that can emit light in various light emission patterns according to the effect. FIG. 83A shows a state where the light emitting means of the movable bodies 1 and 2 does not emit light. In the left end area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the fourth figure aa2 of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the fourth figure aa4 of the special figure 2, the normal figure reservation number aa5, the general figure The fourth symbol aa6 in the figure is displayed. The area below the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 is an area for displaying a fluctuating icon display, and a fluctuating icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed in the fluctuating icon display display area. To the left of the display area of the fluctuating icon display is a special figure 1 hold icon display area, and in the special figure 1 hold icon display area, a hold icon ab1 in a merchant character mode and hold icons ab2 and ab3 in a default mode are displayed. Is displayed. The holding icon in the form of a merchant character is a holding icon used as a prefetch notice. On the right side of the display area of the fluctuating icon display is a special figure 2 reservation icon display area, and the special form 2 reservation icon display area displays a reservation icon ac1 in a default mode. In FIGS. 83 to 85, when the light emitting means provided in the movable bodies 1 and 2 emits light, the light emitting means is shown in light black, and when the light emitting means does not emit light, it is shown in white.

  The display on the decorative symbol display device 208 is composed of a plurality of layers. On the innermost layer, a decorative display of the decorative pattern is displayed. In the foremost layer, a ball removal error display h111 is displayed with a character string “Please remove the ball”. In a layer between the layer on which the decorative pattern is displayed and the layer on which the ball-dropping error display h111 is displayed, a button notice display h110 imitating the chance button 136, and an operation expiration date indicating the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 by a gauge. A display h112 and a notice display (or a tutorial display) h113 by a balloon of “dono” character and “chance when reach”!

  FIG. 83 (b) following FIG. 83 (a) shows a state in which the respective light emitting means emits light with the movable bodies 1 and 2 remaining at the initial position.

  FIG. 83 (c) following FIG. 83 (b) shows a state in which the movable body 1 has moved from the initial position to substantially the front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the movable body 2 is located at the initial position. I have. Since the movable body 1 is positioned substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the movable member 1 is configured to include a part of the decorative symbol, the reserved number of ordinary symbols aa5, a portion of the fourth symbol aa6 of the ordinary symbol, and a button notice display h110. , A part of the ball-drop error display h111, an operation expiration date display h112, and a part of the notice display (or tutorial display) h113. It should be noted that the movable body 1 may be positioned substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, so that the movable body 1 may overlap other displays, or any one of these displays may be used. May not overlap with the display of.

  FIG. 83 (d) subsequent to FIG. 83 (c) shows a state in which the movable body 1 is positioned substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 and a deformation operation is being performed. The movable part 11 of the movable body 1 rotates clockwise about 30 ° from the initial posture, the movable part 12 rotates clockwise about 30 ° from the initial posture, and the movable part 14 moves downward.

  FIG. 83 (e) subsequent to FIG. 83 (d) shows a state where the movable body 1 is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the deformation operation has been completed. The movable part 11 of the movable body 1 is rotated approximately 120 ° clockwise from the initial posture, the movable part 12 is rotated approximately 120 ° counterclockwise from the initial posture, and the movable part 14 is moving downward. Due to the deformation of the movable body 1, a part of the holding icons ab1 to ab3, a part of the fluctuating icon ad1, a part of the holding icon ac1, another part of the button notice display h110, and a ball-drop error display are newly displayed. The other part of h111 and the like are overlapped by the movable body 1. Note that the movable body 1 may be deformed at a position substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, so that the movable body 1 may overlap other displays, or any of these displays. The display may not overlap with the one display.

  FIG. 83 (f), following FIG. 83 (e), moves the movable body 1 to the initial position after performing the operation of returning to the shape before deformation, and turns off the respective light emitting means of the movable bodies 1 and 2. The state is shown.

As described above, in the present example, only the movable body 1 on the front side of the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 located at the position overlapping in the front-rear direction in the initial position is dropped in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. This is an example in which an operation of changing the shape is performed. This production example may be performed as a pre-reading advance notice, or may be performed as an advance notice of the change. In the case where the present effect example is performed, there may be a case where the big hit symbol is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed than in the case where the present effect example is not performed.
FIG. 84 shows an effect example using the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 in a stepwise manner.

  FIG. 84A shows a state where the movable bodies 1 and 2 are located at an initial position above the decorative symbol display device 208. When each of the movable bodies 1 and 2 is located at the initial position, the movable body 1 overlaps the movable body 2. For this reason, when each of the movable bodies 1 and 2 is located at the initial position, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the movable body 2 with the movable body 1. Each of the movable bodies 1 and 2 is a movable body including a light emitting unit (for example, a plurality of LEDs), and is a movable body that can emit light in various light emission patterns according to the effect. FIG. 84A shows a state where the light emitting means of the movable bodies 1 and 2 does not emit light. In the left end area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the fourth figure aa2 of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the fourth figure aa4 of the special figure 2, the normal figure reservation number aa5, the general figure The fourth symbol aa6 in the figure is displayed. The area below the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 is an area for displaying a fluctuating icon display, and a fluctuating icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed in the fluctuating icon display display area. To the left of the display area of the fluctuating icon display is a special figure 1 hold icon display area, and in the special figure 1 hold icon display area, a hold icon ab1 in a merchant character mode and hold icons ab2 and ab3 in a default mode are displayed. Is displayed. The holding icon in the form of a merchant character is a holding icon used as a prefetch notice. On the right side of the display area of the fluctuating icon display is a special figure 2 reservation icon display area, and the special form 2 reservation icon display area displays a reservation icon ac1 in a default mode.

    The display on the decorative symbol display device 208 is composed of a plurality of layers. On the innermost layer, a decorative display of the decorative pattern is displayed. In the foremost layer, a ball removal error display h111 is displayed with a character string “Please remove the ball”. In a layer between the layer on which the decorative pattern is displayed and the layer on which the ball-dropping error display h111 is displayed, a button notice display h110 imitating the chance button 136, and an operation expiration date indicating the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 by a gauge. A display h112 and a notice display (or a tutorial display) h113 by a balloon of “dono” character and “chance when reach”!

  FIG. 84 (b) following FIG. 84 (a) shows a state in which each of the light emitting means emits light with the movable bodies 1 and 2 remaining at the initial position.

  FIG. 84 (c) following FIG. 84 (b) shows a state in which the movable body 2 has moved from the initial position substantially forward of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the movable body 1 is located at the initial position. I have. Since the movable body 2 is positioned substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the movable member 2 is a part of the decorative symbol, a part of the reserved number aa3 of the special figure 2, the fourth symbol aa4 of the special figure 2, a button notice. A part of the display h110, a ball-drop error display h111, an operation expiration date display h112, and a part of a notice display (or tutorial display) h113 are overlapped. It should be noted that the movable body 2 may be positioned substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 so that the movable body 2 may overlap other displays, or any one of these displays may be used. May not overlap with the display of.

  FIG. 84 (d) following FIG. 84 (c) shows a state in which the movable body 2 is positioned substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 and a deformation operation is being performed. Each of the pair of movable parts 23 of the movable body 2 is rotated clockwise by about 70 ° from the initial posture.

  FIG. 84 (e) following FIG. 84 (d) shows a state where the movable body 2 is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the deformation operation is completed. Each of the pair of movable parts 23 of the movable body 2 is rotated clockwise by about 90 ° from the initial posture. Due to the deformation of the movable body 2, a part of the holding icons ab1 and ab2 and another part of the button notice display h110 are newly overlapped by the movable body 2. Note that the movable body 2 may be deformed at a position substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 so that the movable body 2 may overlap other displays, or any of these displays. The display may not overlap with the one display.

  FIG. 84 (f) following FIG. 84 (e) moves the movable body 2 to the initial position after performing an operation of returning to the shape before deformation, and turns off the respective light emitting means of the movable bodies 1 and 2. The state is shown.

As described above, in the present example, only the movable body 2 on the rear side of the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 located at the position overlapping in the front-rear direction in the initial position is located in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. This is an example in which an operation of dropping and deforming is performed. This production example may be performed as a pre-reading advance notice, or may be performed as an advance notice of the change. In the case where the present effect example is performed, there may be a case where the big hit symbol is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed than in the case where the present effect example is not performed. In the case where the present example is performed, there may be a case where the big hit symbol is finally displayed more easily than the case where the present example shown in FIG. 83 is performed. In some cases, the effect example shown in FIG. 83 may be configured so that the big hit symbol is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed than the case where the effect example is performed.
FIG. 85 shows an effect example using the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 in a stepwise manner.

  FIG. 85A shows a state where the movable bodies 1 and 2 are located at an initial position above the decorative symbol display device 208. When each of the movable bodies 1 and 2 is located at the initial position, the movable body 1 overlaps the movable body 2. For this reason, when each of the movable bodies 1 and 2 is located at the initial position, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the movable body 2 with the movable body 1. Each of the movable bodies 1 and 2 is a movable body including a light emitting unit (for example, a plurality of LEDs), and is a movable body that can emit light in various light emission patterns according to the effect. FIG. 85A shows a state where the light emitting means of the movable bodies 1 and 2 does not emit light. In the left end area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the fourth figure aa2 of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the fourth figure aa4 of the special figure 2, the normal figure reservation number aa5, the general figure The fourth symbol aa6 in the figure is displayed. The area below the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 is an area for displaying a fluctuating icon display, and a fluctuating icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed in the fluctuating icon display display area. To the left of the display area of the fluctuating icon display is a special figure 1 hold icon display area, and in the special figure 1 hold icon display area, a hold icon ab1 in a merchant character mode and hold icons ab2 and ab3 in a default mode are displayed. Is displayed. The holding icon in the form of a merchant character is a holding icon used as a prefetch notice. On the right side of the display area of the fluctuating icon display is a special figure 2 reservation icon display area, and the special form 2 reservation icon display area displays a reservation icon ac1 in a default mode.

  The display on the decorative symbol display device 208 is composed of a plurality of layers. On the innermost layer, a decorative display of the decorative pattern is displayed. In the foremost layer, a ball removal error display h111 is displayed with a character string “Please remove the ball”. In a layer between the layer on which the decorative pattern is displayed and the layer on which the ball-dropping error display h111 is displayed, a button notice display h110 imitating the chance button 136, and an operation expiration date indicating the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 by a gauge. A display h112 and a notice display (or a tutorial display) h113 by a balloon of “dono” character and “chance when reach”!

  FIG. 85 (b) following FIG. 85 (a) shows a state in which the respective light emitting means emits light while the movable bodies 1 and 2 remain at the initial position.

  FIG. 85 (c) following FIG. 85 (b) shows a state in which the movable bodies 1 and 2 have started moving from the initial position at the same time and are located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 at the same time. Since the movable bodies 1 and 2 are located substantially in front of the center of the decorative design display device 208, the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 are part of the decorative design, part of the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, and Four symbols aa4, the number of reserved symbols aa5, a portion of the fourth symbol aa6 of the ordinary symbols, a portion of the button notice display h110, a ball-out error display h111, an operation expiration date display h112, and a notice display (or a tutorial display) h113. Partly overlaps. In addition, since the movable bodies 1 and 2 are positioned substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 may overlap with other displays, or these displays may be used. May not overlap with any one of the displays. It should be noted that the movement start timings of the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 may be different from each other. In addition, even if the timings of the movement start of the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 are made different, the timing of the movement end may be the same, or the movement start timing of the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 may be made the same. However, the timing of the end of the movement may be different.

  FIG. 85 (d) following FIG. 85 (c) shows a state where the movable bodies 1 and 2 are positioned substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the deformation operation is being performed. The movable section 11 of the movable body 1 rotates clockwise about 30 ° from the initial posture, the movable section 12 rotates about 30 ° counterclockwise from the initial posture, the movable section 14 moves downward, and the pair of the movable bodies 2 Each of the movable portions 23 is rotated about 70 ° clockwise from the initial posture. Note that the timing of starting the deformation operation of the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 may be different.

  FIG. 85 (e) subsequent to FIG. 85 (d) shows a state where the movable bodies 1 and 2 are located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the deformation operation has been completed at the same time. The movable portion 11 of the movable body 1 rotates clockwise approximately 120 ° from the initial posture, the movable portion 12 rotates approximately 120 ° counterclockwise from the initial posture, the movable portion 14 moves downward, and the pair of the movable bodies 2 Each of the movable parts 23 is rotated approximately 90 ° clockwise from the initial posture. When the movable bodies 1 and 2 are deformed, a part of the holding icons ab1 to ab3, a part of the fluctuating icon ad1, a part of the holding icon ac1, a part of the button notice display h110, and a ball are newly removed. Another part of the error display h111 is overlapped by the movable body 1 and the movable body 2. In addition, the movable bodies 1 and 2 may be deformed at a position substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, so that the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 may overlap other displays. May not overlap with any one of the displays. Note that the end timing of the deformation operation of the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 may be different.

  FIG. 85 (f), following FIG. 85 (e), shows that after the movable bodies 1 and 2 simultaneously perform the operation of returning to the shape before the deformation, the movement of the movable bodies 1 and 2 is simultaneously started and terminated to the initial position. 2 and 2 are simultaneously turned off. The operation of returning the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 to the shape before the deformation may be started at different timings or may be ended at different timings. Further, even if the start timing of the operation of returning the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 to the shape before the deformation is made different, the end timing may be the same, or the deformation of the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 may be changed. Even if the start timing of the operation to return to the previous shape is the same, the end timing may be different. Further, the timing of starting the movement of the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 to the initial position may be different, and the timing of starting the movement of the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 to the initial position may be different. Is also good. Further, the timing of the end of the movement may be the same even if the timing of starting the movement of the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 to the initial position may be different, or the movement of the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 may be shifted to the initial position. Even if the movement start timing is the same, the movement end timing may be different. There may be a case where the light emitting units of the movable bodies 1 and 2 are turned off at different timings.

  As described above, in the present effect example, in the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 which are located at the positions overlapping in the front-rear direction in the initial position, both the movable bodies fall simultaneously in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 and fall. This is an example in which the deformation is performed at the same time. This production example may be performed as a pre-reading notice or may be performed as a notice of the change. In the case where the present effect example is performed, there may be a case where the big hit symbol is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed than in the case where the present effect example is not performed. In the case where the present effect example is performed, even if there is a case where the big hit symbol is more likely to be finally determined and displayed than in the case where the effect example illustrated in FIG. 83 or the effect example illustrated in FIG. 84 is performed. It is preferable that, in the case where the effect example shown in FIG. 83 or the effect example shown in FIG. 84 is performed than in the case where the present effect example is performed, it is easier to finally display the jackpot symbol. There may be cases.

  Next, a movable body 90 and an effect example using the movable body 90 will be described with reference to FIGS. 86 to 94.

  The movable body 90 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 86 (a) is a schematic front view of the movable body 90, and FIG. 86 (b) is a schematic left side view of the movable body 90.

  The movable body 90 includes a movable body 90a, a movable body 90b provided at the lower left of the movable body 90a, a motor m1 and a rotation axis d1 for operating the movable body 90b, and a movable body 90c provided at the lower right of the movable body 90a. , And a motor m2 and a rotation axis d2 for operating the movable body 90c. The movable body 90a has a board-shaped horizontally long rectangular board mounting base 90a1, an LED board 90a2, and a cover 90a3. The movable body 90b has a plate-shaped fan-shaped board mounting base 90b1, an LED board 90b2, and a cover 90b3. The movable body 90c has a plate-shaped fan-shaped board mounting base 90c1, an LED board 90c2, and a cover. 90c3.

  On the LED substrate 90a2 of the movable body 90a, the light emitting diodes a11 to a35 are provided in an array of 3 rows and 6 columns (however, the second row, the first column, the third row, the first column, and the second row, the sixth column). , And a light emitting diode is not provided in the third row and the sixth column). The light emitting diodes b1 to b4 are provided on the LED board 90b2 of the movable body 90b along the outer circumference of the arc portion, and the light emitting diodes c1 are provided on the LED board 90c2 of the movable body 90c along the outer circumference of the arc portion. To c4. All of the light emitting diodes (a11 to c4) may be constituted by light emitting diodes of a single color (same color or different color), or a part may be a single color light emitting diode and another part may be a full color LED. , May be composed of full-color LEDs. Further, a light source other than the light emitting diode may be used for the light emitting diodes (a11 to c4) mounted on the movable body 90a.

  The initial operation of the movable body 90 will be described with reference to FIG. FIGS. 87 (a) to 87 (g) show stepwise the initial operation of the movable body 90 performed when the power of the pachinko machine 100 is turned on. In FIGS. 87 to 93, the case where the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable bodies 90a, 90b and 90c are turned off is shown in white, and the case where they are turned on is shown in light black. In addition, in FIGS. 87 to 93, illustration of the cover portions 90a3, 90b3, and 90c3 is omitted.

  FIG. 87A shows a state in which the movable body 90 is located at the initial position, and the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable bodies 90a, 90b, and 90c are off. The movable body 90 can move up and down by arm portions provided at both ends. The arms provided at both ends of the movable body 90 may be transparent, translucent, or colored, or may emit light by disposing a light emitting diode. A cable connected to the movable body 90 may be arranged behind the arm portion so that the cable is invisible to the player. In addition, a character string “Under preparation” is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 87 (b), following FIG. 87 (a), shows that the movable body 90 is moved to be located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and all the movable bodies 90a, 90b, and 90c are mounted. This shows a state where the light emitting diode is lit. In addition, the display of the character string “under preparation” is overlapped by the movable body 90.

  FIG. 87 (c) subsequent to FIG. 87 (b) shows a state where the operation of rotating each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c provided on the movable body 90 has been performed. The movable body 90b is rotated about 60 degrees counterclockwise, and the movable body 90c is rotated about 60 degrees clockwise. In addition, as the movable bodies 90b and 90c rotate, some of the light emitting diodes a32 to a35 of the light emitting diodes overlapped by the movable bodies 90b and 90c become visible.

  FIG. 87 (d) subsequent to FIG. 87 (c) shows a state in which each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c provided on the movable body 90 has been simultaneously rotated. The movable body 90b is rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise from the initial posture, and the movable body 90c is rotated 90 degrees clockwise from the initial posture. Further, by rotating the movable bodies 90b and 90c, all the light emitting diodes a11 to a35 mounted on the movable body 90a can be visually recognized.

  FIG. 87 (e) following FIG. 87 (d) turns off all the light emitting diodes provided on the movable body 90, and performs a rotating operation in which each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c returns to the original posture. The state is shown. The movable body 90b is rotated approximately 30 ° clockwise from the posture of FIG. 87 (d), and the movable body 90c is rotated approximately 30 ° counterclockwise from the posture of FIG. 87 (d).

  FIG. 87 (f) subsequent to FIG. 87 (e) shows a state where each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c has returned to the original posture. The movable body 90b is rotated 90 ° clockwise from the posture of FIG. 87D, and the movable body 90c is rotated 90 ° counterclockwise from the posture of FIG. 87D.

  FIG. 87 (g) following FIG. 87 (f) shows a state where the movable body 90 has moved to the initial position.

  An example of an effect example of the movable body 90 will be described with reference to FIG. FIGS. 88 (a) to 88 (n) show an effect example using the movable body 90 in a stepwise manner.

  FIG. 88A shows a state in which the movable body 90 is located at the initial position, and the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable bodies 90a, 90b, and 90c are off. The decorative symbol display device 208 displays a decorative symbol variable display.

  FIG. 88 (b) following FIG. 88 (a) shows that all of the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90 are moved after the movable body 90 is moved and is positioned substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. The lit state is shown. Note that all the light-emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90 may be turned on before the movable body 90 moves, or all the light-emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90 while the movable body 90 is moving. The diodes may be turned on, or the light emitting diodes (light emitting diodes a22, a25, a32, a33, a34, and the light emitting diodes a22, a25, a32, a33, a34, among the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90a, which are overlapped by the movable bodies 90b, 90c. And a35) may be turned off.

  FIG. 88 (c) subsequent to FIG. 88 (b) shows a state in which each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c provided in the movable body 90 has been simultaneously rotated. The movable body 90b is rotated about 60 degrees counterclockwise, and the movable body 90c is rotated about 60 degrees clockwise. In addition, as the movable bodies 90b and 90c rotate, light of some of the light emitting diodes a32 to a35 of the light emitting diode overlapped by the movable bodies 90b and 90c can be visually recognized.

  FIG. 88 (d) subsequent to FIG. 88 (c) shows a state where the operation of rotating each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c provided on the movable body 90 has been performed. The movable body 90b is rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise from the initial posture, and the movable body 90c is rotated 90 degrees clockwise from the initial posture. In addition, by rotating the movable bodies 90b and 90c, light from all the light emitting diodes a11 to a35 mounted on the movable body 90a can be visually recognized.

  In FIG. 88 (e) following FIG. 88 (d), all light emitting diodes provided on the movable body 90 are turned off, and a rotating operation is performed in which each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c returns to the original posture. The state is shown. The movable body 90b is rotated approximately 30 ° clockwise from the posture of FIG. 88 (d), and the movable body 90c is rotated approximately 30 ° counterclockwise from the posture of FIG. 88 (d).

  FIG. 88 (f) subsequent to FIG. 88 (e) shows a state where each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c has returned to the original posture. The movable body 90b is rotated 90 ° clockwise from the posture of FIG. 88 (d), and the movable body 90c is rotated 90 ° counterclockwise from the posture of FIG. 88 (d).

  FIG. 88 (g) following FIG. 88 (f) shows a state where the movable body 90 has moved to the initial position.

  FIG. 88 (h) following FIG. 88 (g) shows that the movable body 90 moves from the initial position and is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and all the light-emissions mounted on the movable body 90 are shown. This shows a state in which the diode is lit. Note that all the light-emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90 may be turned on before the movable body 90 moves, or all the light-emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90 while the movable body 90 is moving. The diodes may be turned on, or the light emitting diodes (light emitting diodes a22, a25, a32, a33, a34, and the light emitting diodes a22, a25, a32, a33, a34, among the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90a, which are overlapped by the movable bodies 90b, 90c. And a35) may be turned off.

  In FIG. 88 (i) following FIG. 88 (h), only the movable body 90b provided in the movable body 90 is rotated clockwise by about 60 °. By rotating the movable body 90b, light from some of the light emitting diodes (light emitting diodes a32 and a33) of the light emitting diode overlapped by the movable body 90b can be visually recognized.

  FIG. 88 (j) following FIG. 88 (i) shows that only the movable body 90b provided on the movable body 90 is rotated 90 ° counterclockwise from the initial posture. Further, by rotating the movable body 90b, the light of all the light-emitting diodes (light-emitting diodes a22, a32, and a33) among the light-emitting diodes overlapped by the movable body 90b becomes visible.

  In FIG. 88 (k) following FIG. 88 (j), only the movable body 90c provided in the movable body 90 is rotated clockwise by about 60 °. By rotating the movable body 90c, light of some light emitting diodes (light emitting diodes a34 and a35) of the light emitting diodes overlapped by the movable body 90c can be visually recognized.

  In FIG. 88 (l) following FIG. 88 (k), only the movable body 90c provided in the movable body 90 is rotated clockwise by 90 ° from the initial posture. In addition, the rotation of the movable body 90c allows all the light-emitting diodes (light-emitting diodes a25, a34, and a35) of the light-emitting diodes overlapped by the movable body 90c to be visually recognized. The light of all the provided light emitting diodes is visible.

  FIG. 88 (m) subsequent to FIG. 88 (l) shows a state in which all the light emitting diodes provided on the movable body 90 are turned off, and then each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c simultaneously returns to the original posture. ing. The movable body 90b is rotated 90 ° clockwise from the posture of FIG. 88 (l), and the movable body 90c is rotated 90 ° counterclockwise from the posture of FIG. 88 (l). After each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c returns to the original posture at the same time, all the light emitting diodes provided on the movable body 90 may be turned off, or each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c may return to the original posture. All the light emitting diodes provided on the movable body 90 may be turned off while returning. In addition, each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c may return to the original posture so as to return the operation of the movable bodies 90b and 90c in FIGS. 88 (i) to (l).

  FIG. 88 (n) following FIG. 88 (m) shows a state in which the movable body 90 has moved to the initial position and the reach effect of the decoration 7 has been started on the decorative symbol display device. The reach effect of the decoration 7 may be started before the movable body 90 starts moving to the initial position, may be started while the movable body 90 is moving to the initial position, or the movable body 90 may be moved to the initial position. May be started after moving to.

  As described above, the present effect example is an effect used as a notice of the change, but may be used as an effect of a pre-read notice. In the case where the present effect example is performed, there may be a case where the big hit symbol is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed than in the case where the present effect example is not performed. In the case where the present effect example is performed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is finally more easily determined and displayed than in the case where any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 89 to 92 is performed.

  With reference to FIG. 89, an example of an effect example using a modification of the movable body 90 shown in FIG. 86 will be described. FIGS. 89 (a) to 89 (n) show an effect example using a modified example of the movable body 90 in a stepwise manner. In this modified example of the movable body 90, the movable bodies 90b and 90c are configured to move in the vertical direction on the movable body 90a.

  FIG. 89A shows a state in which the modification of the movable body 90 is located at the initial position, and the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable bodies 90a, 90b, and 90c are turned off. The decorative symbol display device 208 displays a decorative symbol variable display.

  FIG. 89 (b) following FIG. 89 (a) shows that all the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90 are moved after the movable body 90 moves and is positioned substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. The lit state is shown. Note that all the light-emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90 may be turned on before the movable body 90 moves, or all the light-emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90 while the movable body 90 is moving. The diodes may be turned on, or the light emitting diodes (light emitting diodes a22, a25, a32, a33, a34, and the light emitting diodes a22, a25, a32, a33, a34, among the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90a, which are overlapped by the movable bodies 90b, 90c. And a35) may be turned off.

  FIG. 89 (c) subsequent to FIG. 89 (b) shows a state in which each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c provided on the movable body 90 is simultaneously moved upward. As the movable bodies 90b and 90c move, the light of some of the light emitting diodes a32 to a35 of the light emitting diodes overlapped by the movable bodies 90b and 90c becomes visible. Note that the movable bodies 90b and 90c may move at different timings.

  FIG. 89 (d) subsequent to FIG. 89 (c) shows a state in which each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c provided on the movable body 90 simultaneously moves further upward and stops at the target position. As the movable bodies 90b and 90c move upward, the light emitting diodes a11 to a16 mounted on the movable body 90a overlap with the movable bodies 90b and 90c, and the light emitting diodes a22 mounted on the movable body 90a. To a35 are visible.

  FIG. 89 (e) following FIG. 89 (d) shows a state in which all the light emitting diodes provided on the movable body 90 are turned off and each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c is simultaneously moving downward. I have. By the movement of the movable bodies 90b and 90c, the light emitting diodes a22 to a25 are overlapped by the movable bodies 90b and 90c, and the light emitting diodes a13 and a14 are made visible.

  FIG. 89 (f), following FIG. 89 (e), shows a state where each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c has simultaneously returned to the original position. Note that the movable bodies 90b and 90c may return to their original positions at different timings.

  FIG. 89 (g) following FIG. 89 (f) shows a state where the movable body 90 has moved to the initial position.

  FIG. 89 (h), following FIG. 89 (g), shows that all the light-emissions mounted on the movable body 90 are located at the approximate center front of the decorative symbol display device 208 after the movable body 90 has moved from the initial position. This shows a state in which the diode is lit. Note that all the light-emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90 may be turned on before the movable body 90 moves, or all the light-emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90 while the movable body 90 is moving. The diodes may be turned on, or the light emitting diodes (light emitting diodes a22, a25, a32, a33, a34, and the light emitting diodes a22, a25, a32, a33, a34, among the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90a, which are overlapped by the movable bodies 90b, 90c. And a35) may be turned off.

  FIG. 89 (i) subsequent to FIG. 89 (h) shows that only the movable body 90b provided on the movable body 90 moves upward, so that a part of the light emitting diodes overlapped by the movable body 90b is shown. The light from the light emitting diodes (light emitting diodes a32 and a33) becomes visible, and the light emitting diodes a11 and a12 are overlapped by the movable body 90b.

  FIG. 89 (j) following FIG. 89 (i) shows a state where only the movable body 90b provided on the movable body 90 has moved upward and stopped at the target position. When the movable body 90bc moves upward, the light emitting diodes a11 to a13 mounted on the movable body 90a are overlapped by the movable body 90b, and the light emitted from the light emitting diodes a22 and a23 mounted on the movable body 90a. Is visible.

  FIG. 89 (k) subsequent to FIG. 89 (j) shows that only the movable body 90c provided in the movable body 90 moves upward, so that a part of the light emitting diodes overlapped by the movable body 90c. The light from the light emitting diodes (light emitting diodes a34, a35) becomes visible, and the light emitting diodes a15, a16 are overlapped by the movable body 90c.

  FIG. 89 (l) subsequent to FIG. 89 (k) shows a state where only the movable body 90c provided in the movable body 90 has moved upward and stopped at the target position. As the movable body 90c moves upward, the light emitting diodes a14 to a16 mounted on the movable body 90a are overlapped by the movable body 90c, and the light emitted from the light emitting diodes a24 and a25 mounted on the movable body 90a. Is visible.

  FIG. 89 (m) following FIG. 89 (l) shows a state where all the light emitting diodes provided on the movable body 90 are turned off, and then each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c simultaneously returns to the original position. ing. After each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c returns to the original position at the same time, all the light emitting diodes provided in the movable body 90 may be turned off, or each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c may be returned to the original position. All the light emitting diodes provided on the movable body 90 may be turned off while returning. In addition, each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c may return to the original position so as to return the operation of the movable bodies 90b and 90c in FIGS. 89 (i) to (l).

  FIG. 89 (n) subsequent to FIG. 89 (m) shows a state in which the movable body 90 has moved to the initial position and the reach effect of the decoration 7 has been started on the decorative symbol display device. The reach effect of the decoration 7 may be started before the movable body 90 starts moving to the initial position, may be started while the movable body 90 is moving to the initial position, or the movable body 90 may be moved to the initial position. May be started after moving to.

  As described above, the present effect example is an effect used as a notice of the change, but may be used as an effect of a pre-read notice. In the case where the present effect example is performed, there may be a case where the big hit symbol is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed than in the case where the present effect example is not performed. In the case where the present effect example is performed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is finally more easily determined and displayed than in the case where any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 88 to 92 is performed.

    With reference to FIG. 90, an example of an effect example using a modification of the movable body 90 shown in FIG. 86 will be described. FIGS. 90 (a) to 90 (n) show an effect example using the modified example of the movable body 90 in a stepwise manner. In this modified example of the movable body 90, the movable bodies 90b and 90c are provided on the rear side of the movable body 90a.

  FIG. 90A shows a state in which the modification of the movable body 90 is located at the initial position, and the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable bodies 90a, 90b, and 90c are turned off. The decorative symbol display device 208 displays a decorative symbol variable display.

  FIG. 90 (b) following FIG. 90 (a) shows that all the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90 are moved after the movable body 90 is moved to be positioned substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. The lit state is shown. Note that all the light-emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90 may be turned on before the movable body 90 moves, or all the light-emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90 while the movable body 90 is moving. The diodes may be turned on, or the light emitting diodes (light emitting diodes b1 to b3, c1 to c3) mounted on the movable bodies 90b and 90c may be turned off.

  FIG. 90 (c) subsequent to FIG. 90 (b) shows a state in which each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c provided on the movable body 90 has been simultaneously rotated. The movable body 90b is rotated about 60 degrees counterclockwise, and the movable body 90c is rotated about 60 degrees clockwise. In addition, as the movable bodies 90b and 90c rotate, light of some light emitting diodes (light emitting diodes b1, b2, c1, and c2) of the light emitting diodes of the movable bodies 90b and 90c can be visually recognized.

  FIG. 90 (d) subsequent to FIG. 90 (c) shows a state in which the operation of rotating each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c provided on the movable body 90 has been performed. The movable body 90b is rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise from the initial posture, and the movable body 90c is rotated 90 degrees clockwise from the initial posture. Further, by rotating the movable bodies 90b and 90c, the light of all the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable bodies 90b and 90c can be visually recognized.

  FIG. 90 (e) following FIG. 90 (d) turns off all the light emitting diodes provided on the movable body 90, and performs a rotating operation in which each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c returns to the original posture. The state is shown. The movable body 90b is rotated about 30 ° clockwise from the posture of FIG. 88 (d), and the movable body 90c is rotated about 30 ° counterclockwise from the posture of FIG. 90 (d).

  FIG. 90 (f) following FIG. 90 (e) shows a state where each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c has returned to the original posture. The movable body 90b is rotated 90 ° clockwise from the posture of FIG. 88 (d), and the movable body 90c is rotated 90 ° counterclockwise from the posture of FIG. 90 (d).

  FIG. 90 (g) subsequent to FIG. 90 (f) shows a state where the movable body 90 has moved to the initial position.

  FIG. 90 (h) following FIG. 90 (g) shows that the movable body 90 moves from the initial position and is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and all the light-emitting elements mounted on the movable body 90 are displayed. This shows a state in which the diode is lit. Note that all the light-emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90 may be turned on before the movable body 90 moves, or all the light-emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90 while the movable body 90 is moving. The diodes may be turned on, or the light emitting diodes (light emitting diodes b1 to b4, c1 to c4) mounted on the movable bodies 90b and 90c may be turned off.

  FIG. 90 (i) following FIG. 90 (h) shows that only the movable body 90b provided on the movable body 90 is rotated counterclockwise by about 60 °. By rotating the movable body 90b, light of the light emitting diodes b1 and b2 mounted on the movable body 90b can be visually recognized.

  FIG. 90 (j) following FIG. 90 (i) shows that only the movable body 90b provided on the movable body 90 is rotated counterclockwise by 90 ° from the initial posture. Further, by rotating the movable body 90b, the light of all the light emitting diodes b1 to b3 among the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90b can be visually recognized.

  FIG. 90 (k) following FIG. 90 (j) shows that only the movable body 90c provided on the movable body 90 is rotated clockwise by about 60 °. By rotating the movable body 90c, light from the light emitting diodes b1 and b2 mounted on the movable body 90c can be visually recognized.

  FIG. 90 (l) subsequent to FIG. 90 (k) shows that only the movable body 90c provided on the movable body 90 is rotated clockwise by 90 ° from the initial posture. Further, by rotating the movable body 90c, the light of all the light emitting diodes c1 to c3 mounted on the movable body 90c can be visually recognized.

  FIG. 90 (m) subsequent to FIG. 90 (l) shows a state where all the light emitting diodes provided on the movable body 90 are turned off, and then each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c simultaneously returns to the original posture. ing. The movable body 90b is rotated 90 ° clockwise from the posture of FIG. 90D, and the movable body 90c is rotated 90 ° counterclockwise from the posture of FIG. 90D. After each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c returns to the original posture at the same time, all the light emitting diodes provided on the movable body 90 may be turned off, or each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c may return to the original posture. All the light emitting diodes provided on the movable body 90 may be turned off while returning. Also, each of the movable bodies 90b, 90c may return to the original posture so as to return the operation of the movable bodies 90b, 90c in FIGS. 90 (i) to (l).

  FIG. 90 (n) subsequent to FIG. 90 (m) shows a state where the movable body 90 has moved to the initial position and the reach effect of the decoration 7 has been started on the decorative symbol display device. The reach effect of the decoration 7 may be started before the movable body 90 starts moving to the initial position, may be started while the movable body 90 is moving to the initial position, or the movable body 90 may be moved to the initial position. May be started after moving to.

  As described above, the present effect example is an effect used as a notice of the change, but may be used as an effect of a pre-read notice. In the case where the present effect example is performed, there may be a case where the big hit symbol is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed than in the case where the present effect example is not performed. In the case where the present effect example is performed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is finally more easily determined and displayed than in the case where any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 88 to 92 is performed.

  An effect example using the movable body 90 shown in FIG. 86 will be described with reference to FIG. FIGS. 91A to 91 show examples of effects using the movable body 90.

  FIG. 91A shows a decorative symbol display on the decorative symbol display device 208. The movable body 90 in a state where the light of all the light emitting diodes can be visually recognized is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, a part of the decorative pattern, a part of the reserve icon a1 in the default mode, a part of the reserve icon a2 in the prefetch notice mode, and a part of the change icon ad1 are overlapped by the movable body 90.

  FIG. 91 (b), following FIG. 91 (a), displays a fixed display of “decoration 5—decoration 6—decoration 5” on the decoration symbol display device 208. The movable body 90 in a state where the light of all the light emitting diodes can be visually recognized is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, a part of the decorative symbol, a part of the reserve icon a2 in the look-ahead notice mode, and a part of the change icon ad2 are overlapped by the movable body 90.

  FIG. 91 (c), which follows FIG. 91 (b), displays on the decorative symbol display device 208 a decorative symbol change display due to digestion of the reserved icon a2 in the prefetch notice mode. In the decorative symbol display device 208, a part of the character string "press button!", A button notice display h110, and an operation expiration date display h112 are displayed, and a notice effect of button operation is performed. The movable body 90 in a state where the light of all the light emitting diodes can be visually recognized is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, a part of the decorative pattern, a part of the change icon ad3 of the merchant character mode, a part of the display of the character string of “press the button!”, The button notice display h110, and the operation expiration date display h112 are displayed by the movable body 90. Overlapped.

  FIG. 91 (d), which follows FIG. 91 (c), shows that "decoration 7" is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a when the player operates the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date. An image is displayed. The movable body 90 in a state where the light of all the light emitting diodes can be visually recognized is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, a part of the decorative pattern, a part of the change icon ad1 of the merchant character mode, and a part of the sun image are overlapped by the movable body 90.

  In FIG. 91 (e), following FIG. 91 (d), when the player operates the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date, “decoration 7” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c, and reach effect is performed. Has been started. The movable body 90 in a state where the light of all the light emitting diodes can be visually recognized is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, a part of the decorative design and a part of the change icon ad1 of the merchant character mode are overlapped by the movable body 90.

  FIG. 91 (f), which follows FIG. 91 (e), shows the decorative symbol display device 208, in which the SP reach effect display by the character display of the hall displaying the character string “game!” Is started, and the decorative symbol display device. The decorative symbol change display is reduced and displayed at the upper right of 208. The movable body 90 in a state where the light of all the light emitting diodes can be visually recognized is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, a part of the SP reach effect display by the character display of the palace is overlapped by the movable body 90.

  FIG. 91 (g) subsequent to FIG. 91 (f) shows that the decoration design display device 208 has completed the SP reach effect, and the decoration “decoration 7−decoration 7−decoration 7” is displayed on the upper right of the decoration design display device 208. The symbol combination is reduced and the temporary stop is displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208, an effect display in which the character string of “WIN”, the character of the lord, and the enemy character have finished the confrontation scene and the character of the lord has won. The movable body 90 in a state where the light of all the light emitting diodes can be visually recognized is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, a part of the effect display in which the character of the tongue has won is overlapped by the movable body 90.

  In FIG. 91 (h), following FIG. 91 (g), the decoration pattern display device 208 displays a stop display of "decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7". The movable body 90 in a state where the light of all the light emitting diodes can be visually recognized is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. A part of the decorative pattern is overlapped by the movable body 90.

  FIG. 91 (i), which follows FIG. 91 (h), displays a big hit game effect display of the first R of the 15R special big hit game on the decorative symbol display device 208. At the upper left of the decorative symbol display device 208, "decoration 7" which is a big hit stop symbol is displayed, and at the upper right, a character string of "1R" indicating the number of rounds is displayed. A character string of "80 balls" indicating the total number and a character string of "number of big hits: 1" indicating the number of big hits are displayed at the lower right. The movable body 90 in a state where the light of all the light emitting diodes can be visually recognized is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, a part of the big hit game effect display of the 1R is overlapped by the movable body 90.

  FIG. 91 (j) following FIG. 91 (i) shows that the 15R special big hit game has ended on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the character string “Dito” is displayed. The movable body 90 in a state where the light of all the light emitting diodes can be visually recognized is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. A part of the character string “Dito” is overlapped by the movable body 90.

  FIG. 91 (k) following FIG. 91 (j) shows a transition to the power support state after the end of the big hit game. On the decorative symbol display device 208, a decorative symbol variable display, a character string of "Please right-click!", A symbol indicating a right-handed symbol, a variable icon ad4, and a special figure 2 hold icon ac1 are displayed. . The movable body 90 in a state where the light of all the light emitting diodes can be visually recognized is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, a part of the decorative pattern change display, a part of the character string of "Please right-click!" A part of the icon ac1 is overlapped by the movable body 90.

  In FIG. 91 (l) following FIG. 91 (k), the power support state is continued. In the decorative symbol display device 208, a decorative symbol variable display, a character string of "door open error", a character string of "ball full error", a variable icon ad5, and a special figure 2 reservation icon ac2 in a prefetch notice mode are displayed. The movable body 90 in a state where the light of all the light emitting diodes can be visually recognized is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, a part of the decorative pattern change display, a part of the character string of “door open error”, a part of the character string of “full ball error”, a part of the change icon ad5, and a special figure 2 reserve icon of the look-ahead notice mode A part of ac2 is overlapped by the movable body 90.

As shown in the present effect example, in various effects and game states, the movable body 90 may be located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. All of the above-described displays may be overlapped by the movable body 90, or the overlapped display by the movable body 90 may not be overlapped.
An effect example using the movable body 90 shown in FIG. 86 will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 92A shows a state in which a notice effect by the movable body 90 shown in FIG. 88 is performed by the player pressing the chance button 136 during the operation validity period of the chance button 136 of the notice effect of the button operation. Is shown. Note that even if the player does not operate the chance button 136 during the operation period of the chance button 136, the notice effect by the movable body 90 shown in FIG. 88 may be performed after the operation period of the chance button 136 is ended. . The series of effects shown in FIG. 92A may be used as a notice of the change or may be used as a pre-read notice. Further, when the series of effects shown in FIG. 92 (a) is performed, the big hit symbol is more easily displayed in a finalized manner than when the series of effects shown in FIG. 92 (a) is not performed. May be done. In the case where the present effect example is performed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is finally more easily determined and displayed than in the case where any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 88 to 92 is performed.

  FIG. 92 (b) shows a state in which a notice effect by the movable body 90 shown in FIG. 88 has been performed after the end of the countdown due to the notice effect of the countdown. The series of effects shown in FIG. 92 (b) may be used as a notice of the change, or may be used as a pre-read notice. Further, when the series of effects shown in FIG. 92 (b) is performed, the big hit symbol is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed than when the series of effects shown in FIG. 92 (b) is not performed. In the case where the series of effects shown in FIG. 92 (b) are performed, the big hit symbol is more likely to be finally displayed in a finalized manner than in the case where the series of effects shown in FIG. 92 (a) is performed. The configuration may be such that, when the series of effects shown in FIG. 92 (a) is performed, the big hit symbol is finally determined as compared with the case where the series of effects shown in FIG. 92 (b) is performed. It may be configured to be easily displayed. In the case where the present effect example is performed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is finally more easily determined and displayed than in the case where any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 88 to 92 is performed.

  A modification of the appearance of the movable body 90 at the initial position shown in FIG. 86 will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the movable body 90 is located behind the game board 125 having the game nail.

  FIG. 93A shows an example in which the movable body 90 is located behind the structure 30a at the initial position. The structure 30a has a flat plate shape, and has a horizontally long rectangular opening at a substantially central portion. The structure 30a is made of an opaque member. When the movable body 90 is located at the initial position, a part of the movable body 90a, a part of the movable body 90b, and a part of the movable body 90c are visually recognized through the opening of the structure 30a. It is possible. In some cases, a part of any one of the movable bodies 90a to 90c may be visible and the other movable body may not be visible, or any of the movable bodies 90a to 90c may be invisible. In some cases, some of the two movable bodies may be visible and the other movable body may not be visible.

  FIG. 93B is an example in which the movable body 90 is located behind the structure 30b at the initial position. The structure 30b has a flat plate shape, and has a vertically long rectangular notch at a substantially central portion. The structure 30b is made of an opaque member. When the movable body 90 is located at the initial position, a part of the movable body 90a, a part of the movable body 90b, and a part of the movable body 90c of the movable body 90 are cut through the cutout portion of the structure 30b. It is visible. In some cases, a part of any one of the movable bodies 90a to 90c may be visible and the other movable body may not be visible, or any of the movable bodies 90a to 90c may be invisible. In some cases, some of the two movable bodies may be visible and the other movable body may not be visible.

  FIG. 93C shows an example in which the movable body 90 is located behind the structure 30c at the initial position. The structure 30c is made of an opaque member. When the movable body 90 is located at the initial position, the movable body 90 is invisible to a player because it is overlapped with the structure 30c. By disposing the transmissive liquid crystal device on the structure 30c, the movable body 90 located behind the structure 30c may be more easily recognized during non-display than during display on the transmissive liquid crystal device.

  A modification of the position and the movement of the movable body 90 shown in FIG. 86 will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 94A is a schematic view of the liquid crystal display device a208, the movable body 90, and the light emitting panel unit 919 as viewed from the left side. In this example, the movable body 90 moves in the vertical direction in front of the liquid crystal display device a208 and behind the light emitting panel unit 919. Note that the liquid crystal display device a208 and the light emitting panel unit 919 may be movable in the vertical direction, may be movable in the horizontal direction, or may be rotatable.

  FIG. 94B is a schematic view of the transmissive liquid crystal display device b208 and the movable body 90 as viewed from the left side. This example is an example in which the movable body 90 moves up and down behind the transmissive liquid crystal display device b208. Note that the transmissive liquid crystal display device b208 may be movable in the vertical direction, may be movable in the horizontal direction, or may be rotatable.

  FIG. 94C is a schematic view of the movable liquid crystal display device c208 and the movable body 90 as viewed from the left side. This example is an example in which the movable body 90 moves in the vertical direction behind and in front of the movable liquid crystal display device c208. The left view in FIG. 94 (c) shows the moving direction of the movable body 90 when the movable body 90 and the movable liquid crystal display device c208 are located at the initial position. When the movable body 90 and the movable liquid crystal display device c208 are located at the initial position, the movable body 90 is located behind the movable liquid crystal display device c208, and the movable body 90 can move only in the vertical direction. The middle diagram in FIG. 94 (c) shows a state where the movable liquid crystal display device c208 has moved downward. The right view in FIG. 94 (c) shows a state where the movable body 90 has moved forward of the movable liquid crystal display device c208 after the movable liquid crystal display device c208 has moved downward. When the movable body 90 is located in front of the movable liquid crystal display device c208, the movable body 90 can move in the vertical direction. Note that the movable liquid crystal display device c208 may be movable in the left-right direction or may be rotatable.

  Next, an effect example using the structure 247 will be described with reference to FIGS. The structure 247 used in the effect examples of FIGS. 95 to 105 is a structure having a substantially circular front surface and a pattern of a family crest on the surface, and can be moved up and down. Also, in FIGS. 95 to 104, the left-hand diagrams show the state of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the structure 247, and the middle diagrams show the decorative-pattern display device 208 and the structure 247 in the state of the left-hand diagram. This shows a case where the user sees through it. The diagram on the right is a schematic diagram for determining whether or not a predetermined character display (for example, the character display SB of Sabohani or the display of sun sun su1) displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is visible based on the angle of the player's eyes. FIG. In the figure, the line of sight at which the player can visually recognize the predetermined character display is represented by ○, and the line of sight at which the player cannot visually recognize the predetermined character display is represented by X. It should be noted that the shape and arrangement position of the structure 247 of the present example are determined by setting a predetermined character displayed behind the structure 247 at a predetermined line of sight (for example, a general sitting height (for example, a sitting height of 70 cm to 100 cm)). The angle of the line of sight in the normal playing posture of the player) may be calculated and designed to be invisible. Further, the decorative design display device 208 used in this example may be a movable liquid crystal display device or a transmission liquid crystal display device.

  FIG. 95 shows an effect example using the structure 247 in a stepwise manner. The diagram on the left side of FIG. 95 (a) shows a state where the structure 247 is located in front of the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the left end area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the fourth figure aa2 of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the fourth figure aa4 of the special figure 2, the normal figure reservation number aa5, the general figure The fourth symbol aa6 in the figure is displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area for displaying a variable icon display, and a variable icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area. To the right of the fluctuating icon display area are special figure 1 and 2 reserved icon display areas, and special figure 1 reserved icons a1 to a4 and special figure 2 reserved icons b1 to b4 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. Is displayed. FIG. 95 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol display device 208 is performing a variable display of the decorative symbol.

  FIG. 95 (b) subsequent to FIG. 95 (a) shows the character display SB of Sabohani at a position overlapping with the structure 247 during the display of the decorative symbol display on the decorative symbol display device 208. It is displayed as if it appeared from below. The character display SB of Sabohani is a display used as a notice of the change. In the state of FIG. 95 (b), a player who looks at the structure 247 from substantially the front cannot see the character display SB of Savohani, while a player who looks at the display from almost obliquely above has a character of Sabohani. Part of the display SB can be visually recognized. In the present example and the description of the player's eyes in the following examples, the substantially front means that the angle of the eyes is within ± 10 ° when the horizontal direction is 0 °. The term “approximately obliquely above” means that the angle of the line of sight is + about 20 ° or more and is defined as substantially obliquely upward, and the term “substantially obliquely below” means that the angle of the line of sight is not more than about −20 ° and is substantially obliquely below. Is not necessarily limited to these. In the description of the line of sight of the player, it is sufficient that the position of the line of sight substantially above is approximately higher than the front, and the position of the line of sight substantially obliquely below is lower than the approximately front.

  FIG. 95 (c) subsequent to FIG. 95 (b) shows the entire character display SB of Sabohani in the decorative symbol display device 208 at a position overlapping the structure 247. In the state of FIG. 95 (c), a player looking at the structure 247 from substantially the front cannot see the character display SB of Savohani, while a player looking at the display from almost obliquely above has a character of Savohani. At least a part of the display SB can be visually recognized.

  FIG. 95 (d) subsequent to FIG. 95 (c) shows a state in which the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an animation display in which the character display SB of Sabohani moves upward. The upper body part of the character display SB of Sabohani is displayed above the upper end of the structure 247 and is displayed so as to overlap the special figure 2 reservation icon b3. In the state of FIG. 95 (d), a player who looks at the structure 247 from substantially the front can visually recognize a part of the character display SB of Savohani, and a player who looks at the structure obliquely from above has a character display of the Savohani. The entire SB is visible.

  FIG. 95 (e) following FIG. 95 (d) shows a state in which the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an animation display in which the character display SB of Sabohani moves further upward. The character display SB of Sabohani is displayed substantially at the center of the screen located above the structure 247, and is displayed so as to overlap a part of the middle decoration pattern.

  As described above, the present example is an example in which the character display SB of Savohani used for the advance notice of the change is moved from the position where the structure 247 overlaps to the position where it does not overlap. This example may be performed as a pre-reading notice. In addition, when the effect of the present example is performed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is finally displayed more easily than when the effect of the present example is not performed. In the case where the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is finally more easily confirmed and displayed than in the case where any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 96 to 104 is performed. Note that the decorative symbol display device 208 does not move and display the character display SB of Sabohani displayed at a position overlapping the structure 247, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is at least one of upward, downward, left, right, and rotation. By performing one or a plurality of movements, a player who is looking substantially from the front may be able to visually recognize at least a part of the character display SB of Savohani, or may be overlapped with the structure 247. While moving and displaying the Sabohani character display SB displayed at the position, the decorative symbol display device 208 performs at least one or more of upward, downward, leftward, rightward, and rotation movements. This may make it possible for a player who is looking from substantially the front to be able to visually recognize at least a part of the character display SB of Sabohani.

  FIG. 96 shows an effect example using the structure 247 in a stepwise manner. The left view of FIG. 96 (a) shows a state where the structure 247 is located in front of the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the left end area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the fourth figure aa2 of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the fourth figure aa4 of the special figure 2, the normal figure reservation number aa5, the general figure The fourth symbol aa6 in the figure is displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area for displaying a variable icon display, and a variable icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area. To the right of the fluctuating icon display area are special figure 1 and 2 reserved icon display areas, and special figure 1 reserved icons a1 to a4 and special figure 2 reserved icons b1 to b4 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. Is displayed. FIG. 96 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol display device 208 is performing a variable display of the decorative symbol.

  FIG. 96 (b) following FIG. 96 (a) shows, in the decorative symbol display device 208, during the display of the decorative symbol variable display, the entire character display SB of Sabohani is located at a position overlapping with the structure 247. It is displayed as if it appeared from the bottom of the screen. The character display SB of Sabohani is a display used as a notice of the change. In the state of FIG. 96 (b), a player looking at the structure 247 from substantially the front cannot visually recognize the Sabohani character display SB, whereas a player looking at the slant from above has a Sabohani character display SB. At least a part of the display SB can be visually recognized.

  FIG. 96 (c) following FIG. 96 (b) shows a state in which the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an animation display in which the character display SB of Sabohani moves further upward. The character display SB of Sabohani is displayed substantially at the center of the screen located above the structure 247, and is displayed so as to overlap a part of the middle decoration pattern.

  FIG. 96 (d) following FIG. 96 (c) shows a state in which the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an animation display in which the character display SB of Sabohani moves downward. The lower half of the Sabohani character display SB is displayed at a position overlapping with the structure 247, and is displayed so as to overlap the special figure 2 reservation icon b3. In the state shown in FIG. 96 (d), a player who looks at the structure 247 from substantially the front can visually recognize a part of the character display SB of Savohani, and a player who looks at the display from substantially obliquely above the character display SB. The entire SB is visible.

  FIG. 96 (e) following FIG. 96 (d) shows a state in which the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an animation display in which the character display SB of Sabohani moves downward. The entire Sabohani character display SB is displayed at a position overlapping the structure 247. In the state of FIG. 96 (e), a player looking at the structure 247 from substantially the front cannot visually recognize the Sabohani character display SB, whereas a player looking at the display from substantially obliquely above has a Sabohani character. At least a part of the display SB can be visually recognized.

  As described above, in the present example, after the character display SB of Savohani used for the advance notice of the change is moved from the position overlapping the structure 247 to the position not overlapping, the character display SB overlaps the structure 247 again. This is an example in which a moving display is performed at a position to be performed. This example may be performed as a pre-reading notice. In addition, when the effect of the present example is performed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is finally displayed more easily than when the effect of the present example is not performed. In the case where the effect of the present example is performed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is more likely to be finally determined and displayed than in the case where any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 95 to 104 is performed.

  FIG. 97 shows an effect example using the structure 247 and the structure 50t in a stepwise manner. The structure 50t is a structure formed of an opaque thin plate, and the title of the game console is displayed on the surface. The diagram on the left side of FIG. 97 (a) shows a state where the structure 247 is located in front of the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the structure 50t is located in front of the upper part. In the left end area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the fourth figure aa2 of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the fourth figure aa4 of the special figure 2, the normal figure reservation number aa5, the general figure The fourth symbol aa6 in the figure is displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area for displaying a variable icon display, and a variable icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area. To the right of the fluctuating icon display area are special figure 1 and 2 reserved icon display areas, and special figure 1 reserved icons a1 to a4 and special figure 2 reserved icons b1 to b4 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. Is displayed. FIG. 97 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol display device 208 is performing a variable display of the decorative symbol.

  FIG. 97 (b) following FIG. 97 (a) shows, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the entire character display SB of Sabohani at the position overlapping with the structure 247 during the display of the decorative symbol variable display. It is displayed as if it appeared from the bottom of the screen. The character display SB of Sabohani is a display used as a notice of the change. In the state of FIG. 97 (b), a player looking at the structure 247 from substantially the front cannot see the Savohani character display SB, whereas a player looking at the slant from above is a Savohani character. At least a part of the display SB can be visually recognized.

  FIG. 97 (c) subsequent to FIG. 97 (b) shows a state in which the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an animation display in which the character display SB of Sabohani moves further upward. The character display SB of Sabohani is displayed substantially at the center of the screen located above the structure 247, and is displayed so as to overlap a part of the middle decoration pattern.

  FIG. 97 (d) subsequent to FIG. 97 (c) shows a state in which the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an animation display in which the character display SB of Sabohani moves further upward. The upper half of the Sabohani character display SB is displayed at a position overlapping the structure 50t, and is displayed so as to overlap a part of the middle decorative pattern.

  FIG. 97 (e) following FIG. 97 (d) shows a state in which the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an animation display in which the character display SB of Sabohani moves further upward. The entire Sabohani character display SB is displayed at a position overlapping with the structure 50t, and is displayed so as to overlap a part of the middle decorative pattern. In the state of FIG. 97 (d), a player who looks at the structure 50t from substantially the front cannot visually recognize the Sabohani character display SB, while a player who looks at the structure obliquely from below has a Sabohani character. At least a part of the display SB can be visually recognized.

  As described above, in this example, the character display SB of Savohani used for the advance notice of the change is moved from the position overlapping the structure 247 to the position not overlapping and then overlapped with the structure 50t. This is an example of moving and displaying a position. This example may be performed as a pre-reading notice. In addition, when the effect of the present example is performed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is finally displayed more easily than when the effect of the present example is not performed. In the case where the effect of the present example is performed, it is configured such that the big hit symbol is more likely to be finally determined and displayed than in the case where any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 95 to 105 is performed. Is also good.

  FIG. 98 shows an effect example using the structure 247 in a stepwise manner. The left view of FIG. 98 (a) shows a state in which the structure 247 is located in front of the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the left end area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the fourth figure aa2 of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the fourth figure aa4 of the special figure 2, the normal figure reservation number aa5, the general figure The fourth symbol aa6 in the figure is displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area for displaying a variable icon display, and a variable icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area. To the right of the fluctuating icon display area are special figure 1 and 2 reserved icon display areas, and special figure 1 reserved icons a1 to a4 and special figure 2 reserved icons b1 to b4 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. Is displayed. FIG. 98 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol display device 208 is performing a variable display of the decorative symbol.

  FIG. 98 (b) following FIG. 98 (a) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 such that the entire character display SB of Sabohani appears from the lower left of the screen during the display of the decorative symbol variable display. I have. The character display SB of Sabohani is displayed so as to overlap a part of the change icon ad1.

  FIG. 98 (c) subsequent to FIG. 98 (b) shows a state in which the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an animation display in which the character display SB of Sabohani moves further rightward. The lower right part of the character display SB of Sabohani is displayed at a position overlapping with the structure 247.

  FIG. 98 (d), following FIG. 98 (c), shows a state in which the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an animation display in which the character display SB of Sabohani moves further rightward. The entire Sabohani character display SB is displayed at a position overlapping the structure 247. In the state of FIG. 98D, a player who looks at the structure 247 from substantially the front cannot see the character display SB of Sabohani, whereas a player who looks at the structure obliquely from above has a character of Sabohani. At least a part of the display SB can be visually recognized.

  FIG. 98 (e) subsequent to FIG. 98 (d) shows a state in which the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an animation display in which the character display SB of Sabohani moves further rightward. The entire Sabohani character display SB is displayed at a position that does not overlap the structure 247.

  As described above, in this example, the position where the character display SB of Savohani used for the advance notice of the change is moved from the position where the structure 247 does not overlap to the position where the character display SB overlaps and then the position where the character display SB does not overlap the structure 247 is displayed. This is an example in which the moving display is performed. This example may be performed as a pre-reading notice. In addition, when the effect of the present example is performed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is finally displayed more easily than when the effect of the present example is not performed. In the case where the effect of the present example is performed, it is configured such that the big hit symbol is more likely to be finally determined and displayed than in the case where any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 95 to 105 is performed. Is also good.

  FIG. 99 shows an effect example using the structure 247 in a stepwise manner. The left view of FIG. 99 (a) shows a state in which the structure 247 is located in front of the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the left end area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the fourth figure aa2 of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the fourth figure aa4 of the special figure 2, the normal figure reservation number aa5, the general figure The fourth symbol aa6 in the figure is displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area for displaying a variable icon display, and a variable icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area. To the right of the fluctuating icon display area are special figure 1 and 2 reserved icon display areas, and special figure 1 reserved icons a1 to a4 and special figure 2 reserved icons b1 to b4 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. Is displayed. FIG. 99 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol display device 208 is performing a variable display of the decorative symbol.

  FIG. 99 (b), which follows FIG. 99 (a), is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 such that the entire character display SB of Sabohani appears from the lower left of the screen during the display of the decorative symbol variable display. I have. The character display SB of Sabohani is displayed so as to overlap a part of the change icon ad1. Further, the character display SB of Savohani in this example is a display larger than the character display SB of Savohani shown in FIG. 98 and the like.

  FIG. 99 (c) subsequent to FIG. 99 (b) shows a state in which the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an animation display in which the character display SB of Sabohani moves further rightward. The lower right part of the Sabohani character display SB is displayed at a position where it overlaps with the structure 247, and the substantially upper half of the Sabohani character display SB is displayed so as to overlap a part of the special figure 1 reserve icon a3. ing.

  FIG. 99 (d) subsequent to FIG. 99 (c) shows a state in which the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an animation display in which the character display SB of Sabohani moves further rightward. A substantially lower half of the character display SB of Sabohani is displayed at a position where it overlaps the structure 247. In the state of FIG. 99 (d), a player who looks at the structure 247 from substantially the front can visually recognize the substantially upper half of the character display SB of Savohani, and a player who looks at the display from almost obliquely above is the character of the Savohani. At least a part of the display SB can be visually recognized.

  FIG. 99 (e) subsequent to FIG. 99 (d) shows a state in which the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an animation display in which the character display SB of Sabohani moves further rightward. The entire Sabohani character display SB is displayed at a position that does not overlap the structure 247.

  As described above, in the present example, the movement display is performed from the position where the character display SB of Savohani used for the notice of the change does not overlap with the structure 247 to the position where a part of the character display SB of the Savohani overlaps. This is an example in which a moving display is performed later on a position that does not overlap with the structure 247, and a part of the character display SB of Savohani is an effect example in which a player with a substantially straight line of sight can always visually recognize the SB. This example may be performed as a pre-reading notice. In addition, when the effect of the present example is performed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is finally displayed more easily than when the effect of the present example is not performed. In the case where the effect of the present example is performed, it is configured such that the big hit symbol is more likely to be finally determined and displayed than in the case where any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 95 to 105 is performed. Is also good.

  FIG. 100 shows an effect example using the structure 247 in a stepwise manner. The diagram on the left side of FIG. 100 (a) shows a state where the structure 247 is located in front of the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the left end area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the fourth figure aa2 of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the fourth figure aa4 of the special figure 2, the normal figure reservation number aa5, the general figure The fourth symbol aa6 in the figure is displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area for displaying a variable icon display, and a variable icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area. To the right of the fluctuating icon display area are special figure 1 and 2 reserved icon display areas, and special figure 1 reserved icons a1 to a4 and special figure 2 reserved icons b1 to b4 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. Is displayed. FIG. 100 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol display device 208 is performing a variable display of the decorative symbol.

  FIG. 100 (b) following FIG. 100 (a) shows, in the decorative symbol display device 208, during the display of the decorative symbol variable display, the entire character display SB of the Sabohani is located at a position overlapping with the structure 247. It is displayed as if it appeared from the bottom of the screen. The character display SB of Sabohani is a display used as a notice of the change. In the state shown in FIG. 100 (b), a player who looks at the structure 247 from substantially the front cannot see the Sabohani character display SB, whereas a player who looks at the display from almost obliquely above has a Sabohani character display SB. At least a part of the display SB can be visually recognized.

  FIG. 100 (c) subsequent to FIG. 100 (b) is displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208 such that the entire sun display su1 appears at the position overlapping the structure 247 from below the screen. ing. The sun display su1 is a display used as a notice of the change. In the state of FIG. 100 (c), a player who looks at the structure 247 from substantially the front cannot visually recognize the sun display su1 and the character display SB of Sabohani, whereas a player who looks at the structure obliquely from above. Can visually recognize at least a part of the sun display su1 and at least a part of the Sabohani character display SB.

  FIG. 100 (d) following FIG. 100 (c) is an animation display in which the character display SB of Sabohani throws the sun display su1 upward on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the sun display su1 moves upward. This shows a state where an animated animation display is displayed. A substantially upper half of the sun display su1 is displayed at a position that does not overlap with the structure 247, and is displayed so as to overlap a part of the special figure 1 reserve icon a3.

  FIG. 100 (e) following FIG. 100 (d) shows that the sun display su1 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 while the character display SB of Sabohani is displayed at a position overlapping the structure 247. Shows a state in which an animation display for moving to is displayed. The sun display su1 is displayed substantially at the center of the screen located above the structure 247, and is displayed so as to overlap a part of the middle decoration pattern.

  As described above, in this example, only the sun display su1 is displayed on the structure 247 after the character display SB of the Sabohani and the display su1 of the sun used for the advance notice of the change are displayed at the position overlapping the structure 247. This is an example in which a moving display is performed at a position that does not overlap with. This example may be performed as a pre-reading notice. In addition, when the effect of the present example is performed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is finally displayed more easily than when the effect of the present example is not performed. In the case where the effect of the present example is performed, it is configured such that the big hit symbol is more likely to be finally determined and displayed than in the case where any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 95 to 105 is performed. Is also good.

  FIG. 101 shows an effect example using the structure 247 in a stepwise manner. The diagram on the left side of FIG. 101A shows a state in which the structure 247 is located in front of the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the left end area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the fourth figure aa2 of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the fourth figure aa4 of the special figure 2, the normal figure reservation number aa5, the general figure The fourth symbol aa6 in the figure is displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area for displaying a variable icon display, and a variable icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area. To the right of the fluctuating icon display area are special figure 1 and 2 reserved icon display areas, and special figure 1 reserved icons a1 to a4 and special figure 2 reserved icons b1 to b4 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. Is displayed. FIG. 101 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol display device 208 is performing a variable display of the decorative symbol.

  FIG. 101 (b), which follows FIG. 101 (a), shows the entire character display SB of the Sabohani character and the sun at a position overlapping with the structure 247 during the display of the decorative symbol display on the decorative symbol display device 208. Is displayed so as to appear from the bottom of the screen. The character display SB of Sabohani and the display su1 of the sun are displays used as a notice of the change. In the state of FIG. 101 (b), a player who looks at the structure 247 from substantially the front cannot see the character display SB of Sabohani and the sun display su1, whereas a player who looks at the structure obliquely from above. Can visually recognize at least part of the character display SB of Sabohani and at least part of the display su1 of the sun.

  FIG. 101 (c) following FIG. 101 (b) shows a state in which the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an animation display in which the character display SB of Sabohani and the sun display su1 move upward. The Sabohani character display SB and the sun display su1 are displayed substantially at the center of the screen located above the structure 247, and are displayed so as to overlap a part of the middle decoration pattern.

  FIG. 101 (d) subsequent to FIG. 101 (c) shows a state in which the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an animation display in which only the sun display su1 moves downward. A substantially lower half of the sun display su1 is displayed at a position overlapping the structure 247, and is displayed so as to overlap the special figure 2 reservation icon a3. In the state of FIG. 101 (d), a player who looks at the structure 247 from substantially the front can visually recognize a part of the sun display su1, and a player who looks at the display from substantially obliquely above the sun display su1. The whole is visible.

  FIG. 101 (e), which follows FIG. 101 (d), shows the sun display su1 further downward in the decorative symbol display device 208 while the character display SB of Savohani is displayed at a position not overlapping the structure 247. Shows a state in which an animation display for moving to is displayed. The sun display su1 is displayed at a position overlapping the structure 247. A player who looks at the structure 247 from substantially the front cannot see the sun display su1, whereas a player who looks at the display substantially obliquely from above can see at least a part of the sun display su1. .

  As described above, in this example, after the character display SB of the Sabohani and the display su1 of the sun used for the advance notice of the change are displayed at a position where the structure display 247 overlaps, the character display SB of the Savohani and the display of the sun In this example, the display is performed so that su1 does not overlap with the structure 247, and then only the sun display su1 is moved and displayed at a position where the structure overlaps with the structure 247. This example may be performed as a pre-reading notice. In addition, when the effect of the present example is performed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is finally displayed more easily than when the effect of the present example is not performed. In the case where the effect of the present example is performed, it is configured such that the big hit symbol is more likely to be finally determined and displayed than in the case where any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 95 to 105 is performed. Is also good.

  FIG. 102 shows an effect example using the structure 247 in a stepwise manner. The left drawing in FIG. 102 (a) shows a state in which the structure 247 is located in front of the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the left end area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the fourth figure aa2 of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the fourth figure aa4 of the special figure 2, the normal figure reservation number aa5, the general figure The fourth symbol aa6 in the figure is displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area for displaying a variable icon display, and a variable icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area. To the right of the fluctuating icon display area are special figure 1 and 2 reserved icon display areas, and special figure 1 reserved icons a1 to a4 and special figure 2 reserved icons b1 to b4 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. Is displayed. In FIG. 102 (a), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a decorative symbol in a fluctuating manner, and the effect image ef1 is displayed so as to protrude radially from the structure 247. The effect image ef1 is an effect image covering the character display SB of Sabohani used as a notice of the change, and is a display accompanying the character display SB of the Sabohani.

  FIG. 102 (b), following FIG. 102 (a), shows approximately the upper half of the Sabohani character display SB at a position overlapping with the structure 247 during the display of the decorative symbol display on the decorative symbol display device 208. Are displayed so as to appear from the bottom of the screen, and the effect image ef1 is moved upward so as to appear from the bottom of the screen. In the state of FIG. 102 (b), a player who is looking at the structure 247 from substantially the front cannot see the character display SB of Sabohani, but can see a part of the effect image ef1, whereas the player can see a part of the effect image ef1. The watching player can visually recognize at least a part of the character display SB of Sabohani and a part of the effect image ef1.

  FIG. 102 (c), which follows FIG. 102 (b), shows the entire character display SB of Sabohani in the decorative pattern display device 208 at a position overlapping the structure 247, and the effect image ef1 is displayed on the screen. The display is moved upward so that it appears from below. In the state of FIG. 102 (c), a player who looks at the structure 247 from substantially the front cannot visually recognize the Sabohani character display SB, whereas a player who looks at the display from substantially obliquely above has a Sabohani character. At least a part of the display SB can be visually recognized.

  FIG. 102 (d) following FIG. 102 (c) shows a state in which the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an animation display in which the character display SB of Sabohani and the effect image ef1 move upward. A substantially upper body portion of the character display SB of Sabohani is displayed above the position of the upper end of the structure 247, and is displayed so as to overlap the special figure 2 reservation icon b3. In the state of FIG. 95 (d), a player who looks at the structure 247 from substantially the front can visually recognize a part of the character display SB of Savohani, and a player who looks at the structure obliquely from above has a character display of the Savohani. The entire SB is visible.

  FIG. 102 (e) subsequent to FIG. 102 (d) shows a state in which the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an animation display in which the character display SB of Sabohani and the effect image ef1 move further upward. The character display SB of Sabohani and the effect image ef1 are displayed substantially at the center of the screen located above the structure 247, and are displayed so as to overlap a part of the middle decoration pattern.

  As described above, the present example is an example in which the character display SB of Savohani used for the advance notice of the change is moved from the position where the structure 247 overlaps to the position where it does not overlap. This is an example in which the effect image ef1 accompanying the character display SB of Sabohani is displayed at a position where it does not overlap with the structure 247 before is displayed at a position where it overlaps with the structure 247. This example may be performed as a pre-reading notice. In addition, when the effect of the present example is performed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is finally displayed more easily than when the effect of the present example is not performed. In the case where the effect of the present example is performed, it is configured such that the big hit symbol is more likely to be finally determined and displayed than in the case where any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 95 to 105 is performed. Is also good.

  FIG. 103 shows three effect examples using the structure 247. The left drawing in FIG. 103 (a) shows a state in which the structure 247 is located in front of the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the left end area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the fourth figure aa2 of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the fourth figure aa4 of the special figure 2, the normal figure reservation number aa5, the general figure The fourth symbol aa6 in the figure is displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area for displaying a variable icon display, and a variable icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area. To the right of the fluctuating icon display area are special figure 1 and 2 reserved icon display areas, and special figure 1 reserved icons a1 to a4 and special figure 2 reserved icons b1 to b4 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. Is displayed. In FIG. 103 (a), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a decorative symbol in a fluctuating manner, and the character display h113 of the palace and the balloon display h114 of the character string "chance if a character is found!" It is displayed so as to partially overlap. The balloon display h114 of the character string "Challenge if you find a character!" Is a display for giving a notice that the character display SB of Sabohani will appear, and the character display SB of the Sabohani is a display used as a notice of the change.

  FIG. 103 (b) following FIG. 103 (a) shows, in the decorative symbol display device 208, during the display of the decorative symbol variable display, the entire character display SB of Sabohani is located at a position overlapping the structure 247. It is displayed as if it appeared from the bottom of the screen. In addition, a character string of “Character is appearing!” Is displayed in balloon display h114. The character string “Character is appearing!” May be displayed before the appearance of the character display SB of Sabohani, may be displayed simultaneously with the appearance, or may be displayed after the appearance. In the state of FIG. 103 (b), a player who looks at the structure 247 from substantially the front cannot see the character display SB of Savohani, whereas a player who looks at the display from almost obliquely above has a character of Sabohani. At least a part of the display SB can be visually recognized.

  FIG. 103 (c), which follows FIG. 103 (b), shows a magnified display of the Sabohani character display SB displayed at a position overlapping the structure 247 on the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, a character string of “Character is being expanded!” Is displayed in balloon display h114. The character string “Character is being expanded!” May be displayed before the enlargement of the character display SB of Sabohani starts, may be displayed at the same time as the enlargement starts, or may be displayed after the enlargement starts. In the state of FIG. 102 (c), the player who is looking at the structure 247 from substantially the front can visually recognize a part of the character display SB of Sabohani.

  As described above, in this example, before displaying the character display SB of Savohani used for the advance notice of the change at the position overlapping the structure 247, the display foreseeing that the character display SB of the Savohani is displayed. After displaying the character display SB of Savohani at the position overlapping the structure 247, a display indicating that the character display SB of Savohani is displayed is performed, and the position overlapping the structure 247 is displayed. This is an example in which the character display SB of Sabohani displayed on the screen is enlarged and displayed to inform that the character display SB of Sabohani is enlarged and displayed. This example may be performed as a pre-reading notice. In addition, when the effect of the present example is performed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is finally displayed more easily than when the effect of the present example is not performed. In the case where the effect of the present example is performed, it is configured such that the big hit symbol is more likely to be finally determined and displayed than in the case where any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 95 to 105 is performed. Is also good. Further, it may be configured such that the larger the size of the character display SB of Savohani to be enlarged is, the more likely the jackpot symbol is finally determined and displayed.

  The left drawing in FIG. 103 (A) shows a state in which the structure 247 is located in front of the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. 103 (A) shows a decorative symbol display device 208 in which a decorative symbol change display is performed, and a character display SB1 and a Sabohani 2 of Sabohani 1 serving as advance notice of the change are provided at positions overlapping with the structure 247. Character display SB2 is displayed. In the state of FIG. 103 (A), a player who looks at the structure 247 from substantially the front cannot see the character display SB1 of the Sabohani 1 and the character display SB2 of the Sabohani 2, but sees it from a substantially obliquely upper position. The player who is present is able to visually recognize at least a part of the character display SB1 of Sabohani 1 and at least a part of the character display SB2 of Sabohani 2.

  As described above, this example is an example in which the character display SB1 of Savohani 1 used for the advance notice of the change and the character display SB2 of the Sabohani 2 used for the advance notice of the change are displayed at positions overlapping the structure 247. is there. This example may be performed as a pre-reading notice. In addition, when the effect of the present example is performed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is finally displayed more easily than when the effect of the present example is not performed. In the case where the effect of the present example is performed, it is configured such that the big hit symbol is more likely to be finally determined and displayed than in the case where any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 95 to 105 is performed. Is also good. Further, the configuration may be such that the larger the number of notice displays displayed at the position overlapping with the structure 247, the easier the final determination of the big hit symbol.

  103A shows a state in which the structure 247 is located in front of the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the structure 50t is located in front of the upper part of the decorative symbol display device 208. I have. FIG. 103A shows a decorative symbol display device 208 in which a decorative symbol change display is performed, and a character display SB1 of the Sabohani 1 serving as an advance notice of the change is displayed at a position overlapping the structure 247; A character display SB2 of Sabohani 2 is displayed at a position overlapping with the structure 50t to be a warning display of the change. In the state shown in FIG. 103A, the player who is looking at the structure 247 from substantially the front cannot see the character display SB1 of the Sabohani 1 and the character display SB2 of the Sabohani 2, but sees the character display SB1 from an obliquely upper position. The player who is present can visually recognize at least a part of the character display SB1 of Sabohani 1, and the player who is looking from substantially obliquely below can visually recognize at least a part of the character display SB2 of Sabohani 2.

  As described above, in this example, the character display SB1 of Savohani 1 used for the advance notice of the change is displayed at a position overlapping the structure 247, and the character display SB2 of the Savohani 2 used for the advance notice of the change is displayed. This is an example of displaying at a position overlapping the body 50t. This example may be performed as a pre-reading notice. In addition, when the effect of the present example is performed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is finally displayed more easily than when the effect of the present example is not performed. In the case where the effect of the present example is performed, it is configured such that the big hit symbol is more likely to be finally determined and displayed than in the case where any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 95 to 105 is performed. Is also good. Further, the configuration may be such that the larger the number of the advance display displayed at the position overlapping with the plurality of structures, the more likely the final jackpot symbol is finally displayed.

  FIG. 104 shows an effect example using the structure 247 in a stepwise manner. 104A shows a state in which the structure 247 is located in front of the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. In the left end area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the fourth figure aa2 of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the fourth figure aa4 of the special figure 2, the normal figure reservation number aa5, the general figure The fourth symbol aa6 in the figure is displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area for displaying a variable icon display, and a variable icon ad1 in a default mode is displayed in the variable icon display area. To the right of the fluctuating icon display area are special figure 1 and 2 reserved icon display areas, and special figure 1 reserved icons a1 to a4 and special figure 2 reserved icons b1 to b4 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. Is displayed. FIG. 104 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol display device 208 is performing a variable display of the decorative symbol.

  FIG. 104 (b) following FIG. 104 (a) shows, in the decorative symbol display device 208, during the display of the decorative symbol variable display, the entire Sabohani character display SB is placed at a position overlapping the structure 247. It is displayed as if it appeared from the bottom of the screen. The character display SB of Sabohani is a display used as a notice of the change. In the state of FIG. 104 (b), a player who looks at the structure 247 from substantially the front cannot visually recognize the Sabohani character display SB, whereas a player who looks at the display from substantially obliquely above has a Sabohani character. At least a part of the display SB can be visually recognized.

  FIG. 104 (c) following FIG. 104 (b) shows a state in which the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an animation display in which the character display SB of Sabohani moves further upward. The character display SB of Sabohani is displayed substantially at the center of the screen located above the structure 247, and is displayed so as to overlap a part of the middle decoration pattern.

  FIG. 104 (d) following FIG. 104 (c) shows a state in which the structure 247 moves upward and overlaps the Sabohani character display SB displayed substantially at the center of the screen. Is shown. In the state of FIG. 104 (d), a player who looks at the structure 247 from substantially the front cannot see the character display SB of Savohani, but a player who looks at the display from almost obliquely below has a character display SB of Savohani. At least part of it is visible.

  As described above, in this example, the character display SB of Savohani used for the advance notice of the change is displayed at a position overlapping with the structure 247, and then moved to a position not overlapping with the structure 247, and thereafter, the structure is displayed. This is an example in which the body 247 is moved so that the character display SB of Savohani is overlapped by the structure 247. This example may be performed as a pre-reading notice. In addition, when the effect of the present example is performed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is finally displayed more easily than when the effect of the present example is not performed. In the case where the effect of the present example is performed, it is configured such that the big hit symbol is more likely to be finally determined and displayed than in the case where any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 95 to 105 is performed. Is also good. In this example, the structure 247 is moved after the moving display of the Sabohani character display SB, which is the advance notice display. However, the structure display 247 is always displayed in accordance with the Sabohani character display SB moving display. The movement of the structure 247 may be performed so as to overlap, or the movement of the structure 247 may be performed first, and the movement display of the character display SB of Savohani may be performed later.

  FIG. 105 shows an effect example using the structure 247. FIG. 105 (a) shows a state in which the effect image ef1 and the character display SB of Sabohani are displayed at a position where they overlap with the structure 247. The character display SB of Sabohani is a display used as a notice of the change. In FIG. 105B, the structure 247 is viewed obliquely from the upper left to the lower right. The player who is visually recognizing the structure 247 from the front can visually recognize a part of the effect image ef1 but cannot visually recognize the character display SB of Sabohani. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 105 (b), a player who is viewing the structure 247 from diagonally upper left to lower right can view part of the effect image ef1 and substantially the entire character display SB of Sabohani. is made of. In this manner, by displaying the effect image ef1, it is possible to change the line of sight of the player who is visually recognizable from the front. The effect of the present example may be performed as a pre-reading notice. Further, when the effect of the present example is performed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is finally displayed more easily than when the effect of the present example is not performed. In the case where the effect of the present example is performed, it is configured such that the big hit symbol is more likely to be finally determined and displayed than in the case where any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 95 to 104 is performed. Is also good.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 106 to 115, an effect example using the hold icon and the change icon will be described. The arrows in FIGS. 106 to 115 are used to explain the trajectory and movement direction of the hold icon and the change icon. May be displayed as a display indicating the direction of

  FIG. 106 shows two examples of an effect example using the hold icon in a stepwise manner. FIG. 106 shows an example of the pattern 1 in which the effects shown in FIGS. 106 (h) and (i) are performed after FIGS. 106 (a) to (g), and FIGS. An example of pattern 2 for performing the effect of (k) is shown.

<Example of Pattern 1>
Hereinafter, an example of pattern 1 of the present effect example will be described with reference to FIGS. 106 (a) to 106 (i). FIG. 106 (a) shows the special symbol 1 reserved number aa1, the special symbol 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special symbol 2 reserved number aa3, the special symbol 2 fourth symbol aa4, The number of ordinary symbols aa5 and the fourth symbol aa6 of the ordinary symbols are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuating icon display area 280 for displaying a fluctuating icon display, and the fluctuating icon display area 280 displays a fluctuating icon ad1 in a default mode. To the right of the fluctuating icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 reserved icon display area 280ab, where the special figure 1 reserved icons a1 and a2 and the special figure 2 reserved icons b1 and b2 are alternately arranged in this order from left to right. It is displayed facing. The right side of the special figure 1 and 2 reserved icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, in which a character string of "Under preparation" is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, the contents of the effect currently being performed and the contents of the effect not currently being performed may be displayed. FIG. 106 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c.

  FIG. 106 (b) following FIG. 106 (a) shows a state in which an increase animation of the special figure 1 suspension icon a3 in the default mode is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 106 (c) following FIG. 106 (b) shows the default state of the special figure 2 suspension icon b3 in the decorative pattern display device 208 in parallel with the end of the animation of increasing the special figure 1 suspension icon a3. This shows a state where the increase animation is displayed.

  FIG. 106 (d) following FIG. 106 (c) shows a state where the animation for increasing the special figure 2 reservation icon b3 has been completed in the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 106 (e) following FIG. 106 (d) shows a state in which the temporary stop display of “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5” is displayed on the decoration symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 106 (f) following FIG. 106 (e) shows the special figure 1 hold icon a3 during the temporary stop display of “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5” on the decoration pattern display device 208. 2 shows a state in which a moving animation that jumps out of the 2 hold icon display area 280ab and moves as the notice display m1 is displayed. The notice display m1 and the special figure 1 hold icon a3 have the same display mode. Also, the pedestal on which the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab is displayed does not display the hold icon. In this example, the notice display m1 is a notice display used for producing a pseudo continuous notice, but may be a notice display indicating that the pseudo continuous notice is performed, or a display used as a notice of the change. It may be. In addition, the advance notice m1 may be an advance notice indicating that the operation effect display is performed, or may be an advance display that the SP reach effect is performed.

  FIG. 106 (g) subsequent to FIG. 106 (f) shows, in the decorative symbol display device 208, during the temporary stop display of “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5”, the notice display m1 is displayed in the middle symbol display area. A state in which a collision animation that collides with the “decoration 4” temporarily displayed at 208b is displayed. The notice display m1 may collide with “decoration 4” temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a, or “decoration 5” temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208c. May collide with all decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed in the left, middle, and right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c.

  FIG. 106 (h) following FIG. 106 (g) shows, on the decorative symbol display device 208, a moving animation of a notice display m1 returning to the position (pedestal) where the special figure 1 hold icon a3 was displayed. This shows a state in which the temporary stop display of “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5” has been completed and the decorative symbol change display is being displayed again. In the tutorial display area tu1, a character string of “× 2” indicating that the second pseudo variation is performed is displayed. Note that the decoration design change display may be resumed before the notice animation m1 starts the movement animation, or the decoration design change display may be restarted when the notice display m1 starts the movement animation. After the start of the moving animation of the notice display m1, the decorative symbol change display may be restarted.

  FIG. 106 (i) subsequent to FIG. 106 (h) shows a state in which, on the decorative symbol display device 208, the moving animation in which the notice display m1 returns to the position before the movement as the special figure 1 hold icon a3. .

<Example of pattern 2>
Hereinafter, an example of pattern 2 of the present effect example will be described with reference to FIGS. 106 (j) and (k).

  106 (j) subsequent to FIGS. 106 (a) to (g), the collision animation of the preview display m1 shown in FIG. 106 (g) ends on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the preview display m1 is deleted. Then, a reservation icon reappearance animation in which the special figure 1 reservation icon a3 reappears is displayed on the pedestal where the special figure 1 reservation icon a3 was displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a state is shown in which the temporary stop display of “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5” has been completed and the decorative symbol change display is displayed again. In the tutorial display area tu1, a character string of “× 2” indicating that the second pseudo variation is performed is displayed. Note that the decoration design change display may be resumed before the notice display m1 is deleted, or the decoration design change display may be restarted when the notice display m1 is deleted, or after the notice display m1 is deleted, The decorative symbol change display may be restarted. Also, the re-appearance animation of the special figure 1 suspension icon a3 may be started at the timing of erasing the notice display m1, or the re-appearance animation of the special figure 1 suspension icon a3 may be started before the notice display m1 is erased. Alternatively, a re-appearance animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 may be started after the notice display m1 is deleted.

  FIG. 106 (k) subsequent to FIG. 106 (j) shows a state in which the reappearance animation of the special figure 1 reservation icon a3 is completed and the special figure 1 reservation icon a3 is displayed at the position before the movement on the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG.

  As described above, in the present example, the pseudo-continuous notice in which the decorative design variable display is re-fluctuated by the predetermined holding icon colliding with the middle design of the decorative design as the preliminary display during the temporary stop display of the missing design is performed. It is. In the case where the effect of the present example is performed, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol is finally more easily confirmed and displayed than in the case where the effect of the present example is not performed, or in the case where the effect of the present example is performed May be configured so that the big hit symbol is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed than in the case where any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 106 to 115 is performed. In addition, when the hold icon used for the pseudo continuous notice is not displayed, the variable icon may be used as the notice display m1.

  FIG. 107 shows two examples of an effect example using the hold icon in a stepwise manner. FIG. 107 shows an example of pattern 1 for performing the effects of FIGS. 107 (h) to (j) after FIGS. 107 (a) to (g) and FIGS. 107 (k) to 107 (k) after FIGS. 107 (a) to (g). An example of the pattern 2 for performing the effect of (m) is shown.

<Example of Pattern 1>
Hereinafter, an example of pattern 1 of the present effect example will be described with reference to FIGS. 107 (a) to 107 (j). FIG. 107 (a) shows the special figure 1 reserved number aa1, the fourth figure aa2 of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 reserved number aa3, the fourth figure aa4 of the special figure 2, The number of ordinary symbols aa5 and the fourth symbol aa6 of the ordinary symbols are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuating icon display area 280 for displaying a fluctuating icon display, and the fluctuating icon display area 280 displays a fluctuating icon ad1 in a default mode. To the right of the fluctuating icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 reserved icon display area 280ab, where the special figure 1 reserved icons a1 and a2 and the special figure 2 reserved icons b1 and b2 are alternately arranged in this order from left to right. It is displayed facing. The right side of the special figure 1 and 2 reserved icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, in which a character string of "Under preparation" is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, the contents of the effect currently being performed and the contents of the effect not currently being performed may be displayed. FIG. 107 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c.

  FIG. 107 (b) subsequent to FIG. 107 (a) shows a state in which the decoration pattern display device 208 displays an animation for increasing the hold icon a3 in the default mode.

  FIG. 107 (c) following FIG. 107 (b) shows the default state of the special figure 2 reservation icon b3 in the decorative pattern display device 208 in parallel with the end of the increase animation of the special figure 1 reservation icon a3. This shows a state where the increase animation is displayed.

  FIG. 107 (d) subsequent to FIG. 107 (c) shows a state where the animation for increasing the special figure 2 suspension icon b3 has been completed in the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 107 (e) subsequent to FIG. 107 (d) shows a state where the temporary stop display of “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5” is displayed on the decoration symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 107 (f) following FIG. 107 (e) shows the special figure 1 hold icon a3 during the temporary stop display of “decoration 4−decoration 4−decoration 5” on the decoration symbol display device 208. 2 shows a state in which a moving animation that jumps out of the 2 hold icon display area 280ab and moves as the notice display m1 is displayed. The notice display m1 and the special figure 1 hold icon a3 have the same display mode. On the pedestal that recently displayed the special figure 1 hold icon a3, a vertically long rectangular hold icon displaying a character string of “out of office” is displayed as the special figure 1 hold icon a3. . ") Is displayed. Note that, instead of the out-of-office holding icon, a holding icon having a default shape with a lighter color may be used.

  FIG. 107 (g) subsequent to FIG. 107 (f) shows, in the decorative symbol display device 208, during the temporary stop display of “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5”, the notice display m1 is displayed in the middle symbol display area. A state in which a collision animation that collides with the “decoration 4” temporarily displayed at 208b is displayed. The notice display m1 may collide with “decoration 4” temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a, or “decoration 5” temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208c. May collide with all decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed in the left, middle, and right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c.

  FIG. 107 (h) following FIG. 107 (g) shows a moving animation of a notice display m1 for returning to the pedestal where the special figure 1 reservation icon a3 was displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and “decoration 4- This shows a state in which the temporary stop display of “decoration 4−decoration 5” has been completed and the decorative design change display is displayed again. In the tutorial display area tu1, a character string of “× 2” indicating that the second pseudo variation is performed is displayed. Note that the decoration design change display may be resumed before the notice animation m1 starts the movement animation, or the decoration design change display may be restarted when the notice display m1 starts the movement animation. After the start of the moving animation of the notice display m1, the decorative symbol change display may be restarted.

    FIG. 107 (i) subsequent to FIG. 107 (h) shows an animation in which the notice display m1 returns to the pedestal before movement as the special figure 1 hold icon a3 on the decorative symbol display device 208, and A hold icon in the same mode as the notice display m1 is displayed so as to overlap with the out-of-office hold icon.

  In FIG. 107 (j), following FIG. 107 (i), the out-of-office holding icon is deleted in the decorative symbol display device 208.

<Example of pattern 2>
Hereinafter, an example of the pattern 2 of this effect example will be described with reference to FIGS. 107 (k) to 107 (m).

  FIG. 107 (k), following FIGS. 107 (a) to (g), shows that the collision animation of the preview display m1 shown in FIG. 107 (g) ends on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the preview display m1 is erased. Is done. On the pedestal on which the out-of-home holding icon is displayed, a holding icon re-appearance animation in which the holding icon in the mode of the notice display m1 (default mode) overlaps with the out-of-home holding icon and reappears is displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a state is shown in which the temporary stop display of “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5” has been completed and the decorative symbol change display is displayed again. In the tutorial display area tu1, a character string of “× 2” indicating that the second pseudo variation is performed is displayed. Note that the decoration design change display may be resumed before the notice display m1 is deleted, or the decoration design change display may be restarted when the notice display m1 is deleted, or after the notice display m1 is deleted, The decorative symbol change display may be restarted. Also, a re-appearance animation of the special figure 1 suspension icon a3 may be displayed at the timing of erasing the notice display m1, or a re-appearance animation of the special figure 1 suspension icon a3 may be displayed before the notice display m1 is erased. Alternatively, a re-appearance animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 may be displayed after the notice display m1 is deleted.

  FIG. 107 (l), which follows FIG. 107 (k), shows that the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the decorative symbol display device 208 has finished re-emerging animation and the default state of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 is not moved. The state displayed on the pedestal is shown. FIG. 107 (m) shows a state where the out-of-office holding icon is deleted.

  As described above, in the present example, the pseudo-continuous notice in which the decorative design variable display is re-fluctuated by the predetermined holding icon colliding with the middle design of the decorative design as the preliminary display during the temporary stop display of the missing design is performed. Is an example of temporarily displaying a holding icon of another mode in place of the holding icon being moved. In the case where the effect of the present example is performed, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol is finally more easily confirmed and displayed than in the case where the effect of the present example is not performed, or in the case where the effect of the present example is performed May be configured so that the big hit symbol is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed than in the case where any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 106 to 115 is performed.

  FIG. 108 shows two examples of an effect example using the hold icon in a stepwise manner. FIG. 108 shows an example of the pattern 1 for performing the effects of FIGS. 108 (h) and (i) after FIGS. 108 (a) to (g) and FIGS. 108 (j) after FIGS. 108 (a) to (g). An example of pattern 2 for performing the effect of (k) is shown.

<Example of Pattern 1>
Hereinafter, an example of pattern 1 of the present effect example will be described with reference to FIGS. 108 (a) to 108 (i). FIG. 108 (a) shows the special symbol 1 reserved number aa1, the special symbol 4 fourth symbol aa2, the special symbol 2 reserved number aa3, the special symbol 2 fourth symbol aa4, The number of ordinary symbols aa5 and the fourth symbol aa6 of the ordinary symbols are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuating icon display area 280 for displaying a fluctuating icon display, and the fluctuating icon display area 280 displays a fluctuating icon ad1 in a default mode. To the right of the fluctuating icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 reserved icon display area 280ab, where the special figure 1 reserved icons a1 and a2 and the special figure 2 reserved icons b1 and b2 are alternately arranged in this order from left to right. It is displayed facing. The right side of the special figure 1 and 2 reserved icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, in which a character string of "Under preparation" is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, the contents of the effect currently being performed and the contents of the effect not currently being performed may be displayed. FIG. 108 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c.

  FIG. 108 (b) following FIG. 108 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an animation for increasing the special figure 1 suspension icon a3 in the default mode.

  FIG. 108 (c), which follows FIG. 108 (b), shows the default state of the special figure 2 reservation icon b3 in the decorative pattern display device 208 in parallel with the end of the increase animation of the special figure 1 reservation icon a3. This shows a state where the increase animation is displayed.

  FIG. 108 (d) subsequent to FIG. 108 (c) shows a state where the animation for increasing the special figure 2 reservation icon b3 has been completed in the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 108 (e) following FIG. 108 (d) shows a state where the temporary stop display of “decoration 4−decoration 4−decoration 5” is displayed on the decoration symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 108 (f) following FIG. 108 (e) shows the special figure 1 hold icon a3 during the temporary stop display of “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5” on the decoration design display device 208. 2 shows a state in which a moving animation that jumps out of the 2 hold icon display area 280ab and moves as the notice display m1 is displayed. The notice display m1 and the special figure 1 hold icon a3 have the same display mode. Also, a temporary holding icon temporary movement animation is displayed in which the special figure 2 reservation icon b3 temporarily moves to the pedestal where the special figure 1 reservation icon a3 was displayed. Further, in this example, the notice display m1 is a notice display used for producing a pseudo continuous notice, but may be a notice display indicating that the pseudo continuous notice is performed, or may be used as a notice of the change. May be displayed.

  FIG. 108 (g) subsequent to FIG. 108 (f) shows the preliminary symbol display in the decorative symbol display device 208 during the temporary stop display of “decorative 4-decorative 4-decorative 5”. A state in which a collision animation that collides with the “decoration 4” temporarily displayed at 208b is displayed. In the special figure 1 and 2 reserved icon display areas 280ab, the reserved icon temporary movement animation is continuously displayed, and the special figure 2 reserved icon b3 is temporarily displayed on the pedestal where the special figure 1 reserved icon a3 was recently displayed. Is displayed in. The notice display m1 may collide with “decoration 4” temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a, or “decoration 5” temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208c. May collide with all decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed in the left, middle, and right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c.

  FIG. 108 (h) following FIG. 108 (g) shows a moving animation of a notice display m1 returning to the position (pedestal) where the special figure 1 hold icon a3 was displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. This shows a state in which the temporary stop display of “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5” has been completed and the decorative symbol change display is being displayed again. In the special figure 1 and 2 reserved icon display areas 208ab, the reserved icon temporary movement animation is continuously displayed, and the special figure 2 reserved icon b3 is moved to the original pedestal. Further, in the tutorial display area tu1, a character string of “× 2” indicating that the second pseudo variation is performed is displayed. Note that the decoration design change display may be resumed before the notice animation m1 starts the movement animation, or the decoration design change display may be restarted when the notice display m1 starts the movement animation. After the start of the moving animation of the notice display m1, the decorative symbol change display may be restarted.

  FIG. 108 (i) subsequent to FIG. 108 (h) shows a state in which the notice animation m1 returns to the position before movement as the special figure 1 hold icon a3 on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the special figure 1 is displayed. This shows a state where the hold icon a3 is displayed at the position before the movement. In addition, the temporary movement animation of the reserved icon b3 of the special figure 2 reservation icon b3 is completed, and the special figure 2 reservation icon b3 is displayed at the position before the movement.

<Example of pattern 2>
Hereinafter, an example of pattern 2 of the present effect example will be described with reference to FIGS. 108 (j) and (k).

  FIG. 108 (j) subsequent to FIGS. 108 (a) to (g) shows the decorative symbol display device 208 in which the collision animation of the preview display m1 shown in FIG. 108 (g) ends and the preview display m1 is erased. Then, a special icon 1 reservation icon a3 reappears on the pedestal on which the special figure 2 reservation icon b3 is temporarily displayed, and a reservation icon reappearance animation in which the special figure 2 reservation icon b3 moves toward the original pedestal. The temporary movement animation is displayed. In this example, the hold icon that appears in the hold icon reappearance animation is displayed so as to overlap the special figure 2 hold icon b3. However, the special figure 2 hold icon b3 becomes the hold icon that appears in the hold icon reappearance animation. It may be displayed so as to overlap. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a state is shown in which the temporary stop display of “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5” has been completed and the decorative symbol change display is displayed again. In the tutorial display area tu1, a character string of “× 2” indicating that the second pseudo variation is performed is displayed. Note that the decoration design change display may be resumed before the notice display m1 is deleted, or the decoration design change display may be restarted when the notice display m1 is deleted, or after the notice display m1 is deleted, The decorative symbol change display may be restarted. Also, the re-appearance animation of the special figure 1 suspension icon a3 may be started at the timing of erasing the notice display m1, or the re-appearance animation of the special figure 1 suspension icon a3 may be started before the notice display m1 is erased. Alternatively, a re-appearance animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 may be started after the notice display m1 is deleted.

  FIG. 108 (k) following FIG. 108 (j) shows that the re-emergence animation of the special figure 1 reservation icon a3 is completed and the special figure 1 reservation icon a3 is displayed at the position before the movement on the decorative symbol display device 208. Then, the temporary movement animation of the reserved icon b3 for the special figure 2 is completed, and the special figure 2 reserved icon b3 is displayed at the position before the movement.

  As described above, in the present example, the pseudo-continuous notice in which the decorative design variable display is re-fluctuated by the predetermined holding icon colliding with the middle design of the decorative design as the preliminary display during the temporary stop display of the missing design is performed. In this example, the hold icon on the right is temporarily displayed in place of the moving hold icon, and the temporarily displayed hold icon returns to the original position when the moving hold icon returns to the original position. . In the case where the effect of the present example is performed, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol is finally more easily confirmed and displayed than in the case where the effect of the present example is not performed, or in the case where the effect of the present example is performed May be configured so that the big hit symbol is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed than in the case where any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 106 to 115 is performed.

  FIG. 109 shows two examples of an effect example using the hold icon in a stepwise manner. FIG. 109 shows an example of the pattern 1 for performing the effects of FIGS. 106 (h) and (i) after FIGS. 109 (a) to (g) and FIGS. An example of pattern 2 for performing the effect of (k) is shown.

<Example of Pattern 1>
Hereinafter, an example of pattern 1 of the present effect example will be described with reference to FIGS. 109 (a) to 109 (i). FIG. 109 (a) shows the special figure 1 reserved number aa1, the fourth figure aa2 of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 reserved number aa3, the fourth figure aa4 of the special figure 2, in the left end area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The number of ordinary symbols aa5 and the fourth symbol aa6 of the ordinary symbols are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuating icon display area 280 for displaying a fluctuating icon display, and the fluctuating icon display area 280 displays a fluctuating icon ad1 in a default mode. To the right of the fluctuating icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 reserved icon display area 280ab, where the special figure 1 reserved icons a1 and a2 and the special figure 2 reserved icons b1 and b2 are alternately arranged in this order from left to right. It is displayed facing. The right side of the special figure 1 and 2 reserved icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, in which a character string of "Under preparation" is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, the contents of the effect currently being performed and the contents of the effect not currently being performed may be displayed. FIG. 109 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c.

  FIG. 109 (b) following FIG. 109 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an animation for increasing the special figure 1 suspension icon a3 in the default mode.

  FIG. 109 (c) following FIG. 109 (b) shows the default state of the special figure 2 reservation icon b3 in the decorative pattern display device 208 in parallel with the end of the animation of increasing the special figure 1 reservation icon a3. This shows a state where the increase animation is displayed.

  FIG. 109 (d) following FIG. 109 (c) shows a state where the animation for increasing the special figure 2 suspension icon b3 has been completed in the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 109 (e) following FIG. 109 (d) shows a state where the temporary stop display of “decoration 4−decoration 4−decoration 5” is displayed on the decoration symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 109 (f), following FIG. 109 (e), shows the special figure 1 hold icon a3 during the temporary stop display of “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5” on the decoration symbol display device 208. 2 shows a state in which a moving animation that jumps out of the 2 hold icon display area 280ab and moves as the notice display m1 is displayed. The notice display m1 and the special figure 1 hold icon a3 have the same display mode. Also, the pedestal on which the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab is displayed does not display the hold icon. In this example, the advance notice m1 is an advance notice of gas.

  FIG. 109 (g) following FIG. 109 (f) shows the preliminary symbol display in the decorative symbol display device 208 while the temporary stop display of “decorative 4-decorative 4-decorative 5” is displayed. A state in which a collision animation that collides with the “decoration 4” temporarily displayed at 208b is displayed. The notice display m1 may collide with “decoration 4” temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a, or “decoration 5” temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208c. May collide with all decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed in the left, middle, and right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c.

  FIG. 109 (h) following FIG. 109 (g) shows a moving animation of a notice display m 1 returning to the position (pedestal) where the special figure 1 hold icon a 3 was displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The state where the stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, the character string "Under preparation" is still displayed.

  FIG. 109 (i) subsequent to FIG. 109 (h) shows a state in which, on the decorative symbol display device 208, the notice animation m1 has ended as a special figure 1 hold icon a3 and the movement animation to return to the position before the movement has ended. .

<Example of pattern 2>
Hereinafter, an example of pattern 2 of the present effect example will be described with reference to FIGS. 109 (j) and (k).

  FIG. 109 (j) following FIGS. 109 (a) to (g) shows the decorative symbol display device 208, in which the collision animation of the preview display m1 shown in FIG. 109 (g) ends and the preview display m1 is erased. Recently, a special icon 1 reservation icon a3 is displayed on the pedestal, and a special icon 1 reservation icon a3 reappearing animation is displayed on the pedestal. Further, a stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is displayed on the decoration symbol display device 208, and the text string "in preparation" is still displayed in the tutorial display area tu1.

  FIG. 109 (k), which follows FIG. 109 (j), shows that the re-appearance animation of the special figure 1 reservation icon a3 has been completed and the special figure 1 reservation icon a3 is displayed at the position before the movement on the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG.

Thus, in this example, during the temporary stop display of the missing symbol, the predetermined pending icon collides with the middle symbol of the decorative symbol as the gasket announcement display, so that a pseudo continuous announcement in which the decorative symbol variable display re-changes is performed. There is no example.
FIG. 110 shows an effect example using the hold icon step by step.

  FIG. 110 (a) shows the special figure 1 reserved number aa1, the fourth figure aa2 of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 reserved number aa3, the fourth figure aa4 of the special figure 2, The number of ordinary symbols aa5 and the fourth symbol aa6 of the ordinary symbols are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuating icon display area 280 for displaying a fluctuating icon display, and the fluctuating icon display area 280 displays a fluctuating icon ad1 in a default mode. To the right of the fluctuating icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 reserved icon display area 280ab, where the special figure 1 reserved icons a1 and a2 and the special figure 2 reserved icons b1 and b2 are alternately arranged in this order from left to right. It is displayed facing. The right side of the special figure 1 and 2 reserved icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, in which a character string of "Under preparation" is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, the contents of the effect currently being performed and the contents of the effect not currently being performed may be displayed. FIG. 110 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c.

  FIG. 110 (b) following FIG. 110 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an increase animation of the special figure 1 suspension icon a3 in the default mode.

  FIG. 110 (c) following FIG. 110 (b) shows the default state of the special figure 2 suspension icon b3 in the decorative pattern display device 208 in parallel with the end of the increase animation of the special figure 1 suspension icon a3. This shows a state where the increase animation is displayed.

  FIG. 110 (d) following FIG. 110 (c) shows a state where the animation for increasing the special figure 2 suspension icon b3 has been completed in the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 110 (e) following FIG. 110 (d) shows a state where the temporary stop display of “decoration 4−decoration 4−decoration 5” is displayed on the decoration symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 110 (f) following FIG. 110 (e) shows the special figure 1 hold icon a3 during the temporary stop display of “decoration 4−decoration 4−decoration 5” on the decoration symbol display device 208. 2 shows a state in which a moving animation that jumps out of the 2 hold icon display area 280ab and moves as the notice display m1 is displayed. The notice display m1 and the special figure 1 hold icon a3 have the same display mode. Also, the pedestal on which the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab is displayed does not display the hold icon. In this example, the notice display m1 is a notice display used for producing a pseudo continuous notice, but may be a notice display indicating that the pseudo continuous notice is performed, or a display used as a notice of the change. It may be.

  FIG. 110 (g) subsequent to FIG. 110 (f) shows, in the decorative symbol display device 208, during the temporary stop display of “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5”, the notice display m1 is displayed in the middle symbol display area. A state in which a collision animation that collides with the “decoration 4” temporarily displayed at 208b is displayed. The notice display m1 may collide with “decoration 4” temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a, or “decoration 5” temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208c. May collide with all decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed in the left, middle, and right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c.

  FIG. 110 (h) following FIG. 110 (g) shows a moving animation of a notice display m 1 returning to the position (pedestal) where the special figure 1 hold icon a 3 was displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, This shows a state in which the temporary stop display of “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5” has been completed and the decorative symbol change display is being displayed again. In the tutorial display area tu1, a character string of “× 2” indicating that the second pseudo variation is performed is displayed. Note that the decoration design change display may be resumed before the notice animation m1 starts the movement animation, or the decoration design change display may be restarted when the notice display m1 starts the movement animation. After the start of the moving animation of the notice display m1, the decorative symbol change display may be restarted.

  FIG. 110 (i) subsequent to FIG. 110 (h) shows a state in which, on the decorative symbol display device 208, the moving animation in which the notice display m1 returns to the position before the movement as the special figure 1 hold icon a3. .

  FIG. 110 (j) subsequent to FIG. 110 (i) shows a state in which the temporary stop display of “decoration 4−decoration 4−decoration 5” is displayed on the decoration symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 110 (k) following FIG. 110 (j) shows the special figure 1 hold icon a3 during the temporary stop display of “decoration 4−decoration 4−decoration 5” on the decoration symbol display device 208. 2 shows a state in which a moving animation that jumps out of the 2 hold icon display area 280ab and moves as the notice display m1 is displayed. The notice display m1 and the special figure 1 hold icon a3 have the same display mode. Also, the pedestal on which the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab is displayed does not display the hold icon.

  FIG. 110 (l) following FIG. 110 (k) shows, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the preliminary display m1 changes to the middle symbol display area during the temporary stop display of “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5”. A state in which a collision animation that collides with the “decoration 4” temporarily displayed at 208b is displayed. The notice display m1 may collide with “decoration 4” temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a, or “decoration 5” temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208c. May collide with all decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed in the left, middle, and right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c.

  FIG. 110 (m) following FIG. 110 (l) shows a re-moving animation of the notice display m1 returning to the position (pedestal) where the special figure 1 hold icon a3 was displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, This shows a state in which the temporary stop display of “decoration 4−decoration 4−decoration 5” has been completed and the decoration design change display has been displayed again. In the tutorial display area tu1, a character string of "x3" indicating that the third pseudo fluctuation is performed is displayed. Note that the decoration design change display may be resumed before the notice animation m1 starts the movement animation, or the decoration design change display may be restarted when the notice display m1 starts the movement animation. After the start of the moving animation of the notice display m1, the decorative symbol change display may be restarted.

  FIG. 110 (n) following FIG. 110 (m) shows a state in which the re-moving animation in which the notice display m1 returns to the position before the movement as the special figure 1 hold icon a3 on the decorative symbol display device 208 is completed. I have.

As described above, in the present example, during the temporary stop display of the missing symbol, the predetermined continuous icon collides with the middle symbol of the decorative symbol as a preview display, so that the pseudo symbol advance display in which the decorative symbol change display is re-varied a plurality of times continuously. This is an example of performing this. In the case where the effect of the present example is performed, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol is finally more easily confirmed and displayed than in the case where the effect of the present example is not performed, or in the case where the effect of the present example is performed May be configured so that the big hit symbol is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed than in the case where any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 106 to 115 is performed. In addition, when the hold icon used for the pseudo continuous notice is not displayed, the variable icon may be used as the notice display m1.
FIG. 111 shows an effect example using the hold icon in a stepwise manner.

  FIG. 111 (a) shows the special figure 1 reserved number aa1, the fourth figure aa2 of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 reserved number aa3, the fourth figure aa4 of the special figure 2, The number of ordinary symbols aa5 and the fourth symbol aa6 of the ordinary symbols are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuating icon display area 280 for displaying a fluctuating icon display, and the fluctuating icon display area 280 displays a fluctuating icon ad1 in a default mode. To the right of the fluctuating icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 reserved icon display area 280ab, where the special figure 1 reserved icons a1 and a2 and the special figure 2 reserved icons b1 and b2 are alternately arranged in this order from left to right. It is displayed facing. The right side of the special figure 1 and 2 reserved icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, in which a character string of "Under preparation" is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, the contents of the effect currently being performed and the contents of the effect not currently being performed may be displayed. FIG. 111 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol change display is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c.

  FIG. 111 (b) following FIG. 111 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an animation for increasing the special figure 1 suspension icon a3 in the default mode.

  FIG. 111 (c) following FIG. 111 (b) shows the default state of the special figure 2 suspension icon b3 in the decorative symbol display device 208 in parallel with the end of the animation of increasing the special figure 1 suspension icon a3. This shows a state where the increase animation is displayed.

  FIG. 111 (d) following FIG. 111 (c) shows a state where the animation for increasing the special figure 2 suspension icon b3 has been completed in the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 111 (e) subsequent to FIG. 111 (d) shows a state where the temporary stop display of “decoration 4−decoration 4−decoration 5” is displayed on the decoration symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 111 (f) following FIG. 111 (e) shows the special figure 1 hold icon a3 during the temporary stop display of “decoration 4−decoration 4−decoration 5” on the decoration symbol display device 208. 2 shows a state in which a moving animation that jumps out of the 2 hold icon display area 280ab and moves as the notice display m1 is displayed. The notice display m1 and the special figure 1 hold icon a3 have the same display mode. Also, the pedestal on which the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab is displayed does not display the hold icon. In this example, the notice display m1 is a notice display used for producing a pseudo continuous notice, but may be a notice display indicating that the pseudo continuous notice is performed, or a display used as a notice of the change. It may be.

  FIG. 111 (g) subsequent to FIG. 111 (f) shows, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the preliminary display m1 changes to the middle symbol display area during the temporary stop display of “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5”. A state in which a collision animation that collides with the “decoration 4” temporarily displayed at 208b is displayed. The notice display m1 may collide with “decoration 4” temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a, or “decoration 5” temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208c. May collide with all decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed in the left, middle, and right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c.

  FIG. 111 (h) following FIG. 111 (g) shows a moving animation of a notice display m 1 returning to the position (pedestal) where the special figure 1 hold icon a 3 was displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. This shows a state in which the temporary stop display of “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5” has been completed and the decorative symbol change display is being displayed again. In the tutorial display area tu1, a character string of “× 2” indicating that the second pseudo variation is performed is displayed. Note that the decoration design change display may be resumed before the notice animation m1 starts the movement animation, or the decoration design change display may be restarted when the notice display m1 starts the movement animation. After the start of the moving animation of the notice display m1, the decorative symbol change display may be restarted.

  FIG. 111 (i) subsequent to FIG. 111 (h) shows a state in which, on the decorative symbol display device 208, the moving animation in which the notice display m1 returns to the position before moving as the special figure 1 hold icon a3. .

  FIG. 111 (j) subsequent to FIG. 111 (i) shows a state in which a temporary stop display of “decoration 4−decoration 4−decoration 5” is displayed on the decoration symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 111 (k) following FIG. 111 (j) shows the special figure 2 suspension icon b3 during the temporary stop display of “decoration 4−decoration 4−decoration 5” on the decoration symbol display device 208. 2 shows a state in which a moving animation that jumps out of the 2 hold icon display area 280ab and moves as the notice display m1 is displayed. The notice display m1 and the special figure 2 hold icon b3 have the same display mode. Also, the pedestal on which the special figure 2 reservation icon b3 is displayed in the special figure 1 and 2 reservation icon display area 280ab does not display the reservation icon.

    FIG. 111 (l) following FIG. 111 (k) shows the preliminary symbol display in the decorative symbol display device 208 while the temporary stop display of “decorative 4-decorative 4-decorative 5” is displayed. A state in which a collision animation that collides with the “decoration 4” temporarily displayed at 208b is displayed. The notice display m1 may collide with “decoration 4” temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a, or “decoration 5” temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208c. May collide with all decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed in the left, middle, and right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c.

  FIG. 111 (m) following FIG. 111 (l) shows, on the decorative symbol display device 208, a re-moving animation of the notice display m1 returning to the position (pedestal) where the special figure 2 reservation icon b3 was displayed, This shows a state in which the temporary stop display of “decoration 4−decoration 4−decoration 5” has been completed and the decoration design change display has been displayed again. In the tutorial display area tu1, a character string of "x3" indicating that the third pseudo fluctuation is performed is displayed. Note that the decoration design change display may be resumed before the notice animation m1 starts the movement animation, or the decoration design change display may be restarted when the notice display m1 starts the movement animation. After the start of the moving animation of the notice display m1, the decorative symbol change display may be restarted.

  FIG. 111 (n) subsequent to FIG. 111 (m) shows a state in which the re-moving animation in which the notice display m1 returns to the position before the movement as the special figure 2 holding icon b3 has been completed on the decorative symbol display device 208. I have.

As described above, this example is an example in which the pseudo continuous notice using two different holding icons as the notice display m1 is performed a plurality of times in one change. In the case where the effect of the present example is performed, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol is finally more easily confirmed and displayed than in the case where the effect of the present example is not performed, or in the case where the effect of the present example is performed May be configured so that the big hit symbol is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed than in the case where any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 106 to 115 is performed. In addition, when there are not enough reserved icons used for the pseudo-continuous notice, a variable icon may be used as the notice display m1.
FIG. 112 shows an effect example using the hold icon in a stepwise manner.

  FIG. 112 (a) shows the special figure 1 reserved number aa1, the fourth figure aa2 of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 reserved number aa3, the fourth figure aa4 of the special figure 2, The number of ordinary symbols aa5 and the fourth symbol aa6 of the ordinary symbols are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuating icon display area 280 for displaying a fluctuating icon display, and the fluctuating icon display area 280 displays a fluctuating icon ad1 in a default mode. To the right of the fluctuating icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 reserved icon display area 280ab, where the special figure 1 reserved icons a1 and a2 and the special figure 2 reserved icons b1 and b2 are alternately arranged in this order from left to right. It is displayed facing. The right side of the special figure 1 and 2 reserved icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, in which a character string of "Under preparation" is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, the contents of the effect currently being performed and the contents of the effect not currently being performed may be displayed. FIG. 112 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol change display is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c.

  FIG. 112 (b) following FIG. 112 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an animation for increasing the special figure 1 suspension icon a3 in the default mode.

    FIG. 112 (c) following FIG. 112 (b) shows the default state of the special figure 2 suspension icon b3 in the decorative pattern display device 208 in parallel with the end of the increase animation of the special figure 1 suspension icon a3. This shows a state where the increase animation is displayed.

  FIG. 112 (d) subsequent to FIG. 112 (c) shows a state where the animation for increasing the special figure 2 suspension icon b3 has been completed in the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 112 (e) subsequent to FIG. 112 (d) shows a state in which the temporary stop display of “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5” is displayed on the decoration symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 112 (f), following FIG. 112 (e), shows the special figure 1 suspension icon a3 during the temporary stop display of “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5” on the decoration symbol display device 208. 2 shows a state in which a moving animation that jumps out of the 2 hold icon display area 280ab and moves as the notice display m1 is displayed. The notice display m1 and the special figure 1 hold icon a3 have the same display mode. Also, the pedestal on which the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab is displayed does not display the hold icon. In this example, the notice display m1 is a notice display used for producing a pseudo continuous notice, but may be a notice display indicating that the pseudo continuous notice is performed, or a display used as a notice of the change. It may be.

  FIG. 112 (g), following FIG. 112 (f), shows the preliminary display m1 in the decorative symbol display device 208 while the temporary stop display of “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5” is displayed in the middle symbol display area. A state in which a collision animation that collides with the “decoration 4” temporarily displayed at 208b is displayed. The notice display m1 may collide with “decoration 4” temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a, or “decoration 5” temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208c. May collide with all decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed in the left, middle, and right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c.

  FIG. 112 (h), following FIG. 112 (g), displays a moving animation of a notice display m1 returning to the position (pedestal) where the special figure 1 hold icon a3 was displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. This shows a state in which the temporary stop display of “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5” has been completed and the decorative symbol change display is being displayed again. In the tutorial display area tu1, the character string "Under preparation" is still displayed. Note that the decoration design change display may be resumed before the notice animation m1 starts the movement animation, or the decoration design change display may be restarted when the notice display m1 starts the movement animation. After the start of the moving animation of the notice display m1, the decorative symbol change display may be restarted.

  FIG. 112 (i) subsequent to FIG. 112 (h) shows a state in which, on the decorative symbol display device 208, the notice animation m1 has ended as a special figure 1 hold icon a3, and the movement animation to return to the position before the movement has ended. .

  In FIG. 112 (j), following FIG. 112 (i), a reach effect by “decoration 4” is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In the tutorial display area tu1, a character string “REACH!” Is displayed.

As described above, in this example, during the temporary stop display of the missing symbol, the predetermined design icon collides with the middle symbol of the decorative symbol as a preview display, so that the decorative symbol variable display is again changed and the reach effect is started. It is an example. In the case where the effect of the present example is performed, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol is finally more easily confirmed and displayed than in the case where the effect of the present example is not performed, or in the case where the effect of the present example is performed May be configured so that the big hit symbol is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed than in the case where any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 106 to 115 is performed.
FIG. 113 shows an effect example using the change icon in a stepwise manner.

  FIG. 113 (a) shows, in the left end area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reserved number aa1, the fourth figure aa2 of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 reserved number aa3, the fourth figure aa4 of the special figure 2, The number of ordinary symbols aa5 and the fourth symbol aa6 of the ordinary symbols are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuating icon display area 280 for displaying a fluctuating icon display, and the fluctuating icon display area 280 displays a fluctuating icon ad1 in a default mode. To the right of the fluctuating icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 reserved icon display area 280ab, where the special figure 1 reserved icons a1 and a2 and the special figure 2 reserved icons b1 and b2 are alternately arranged in this order from left to right. It is displayed facing. The right side of the special figure 1 and 2 reserved icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, in which a character string of "Under preparation" is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, the contents of the effect currently being performed and the contents of the effect not currently being performed may be displayed. FIG. 113 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c.

  FIG. 113 (b) subsequent to FIG. 113 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an increasing animation of the special figure 1 suspension icon a3 in the default mode.

  FIG. 113 (c) following FIG. 113 (b) shows the default state of the special figure 2 reservation icon b3 in the decorative pattern display device 208 in parallel with the end of the increase animation of the special figure 1 reservation icon a3. This shows a state where the increase animation is displayed.

  FIG. 113 (d) following FIG. 113 (c) shows a state where the animation for increasing the special figure 2 reservation icon b3 has been completed in the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 113 (e) following FIG. 113 (d) shows a state in which the temporary stop display of “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5” is displayed on the decoration symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 113 (f) following FIG. 113 (e) shows that the fluctuating icon ad1 is displayed from the fluctuating icon display area 280 during the temporary stop display of “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5” on the decoration symbol display device 208. This shows a state in which a moving animation that jumps out and moves as a notice display m2 is displayed. The notice display m2 and the special fluctuation icon ad1 have the same display mode. Further, no change icon is displayed on the base of the change icon display area 280. In this example, the preview display m2 is a preview display used for producing a pseudo continuous preview, but may be a preview display indicating that a pseudo continuous preview is performed, or a display used as a pre-reading preview. You may.

  FIG. 113 (g), following FIG. 113 (f), shows the preliminary display m2 in the decorative symbol display device 208 while the temporary stop display of “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5” is displayed in the middle symbol display area. A state in which a collision animation that collides with the “decoration 4” temporarily displayed at 208b is displayed. The notice display m2 may collide with the “decoration 4” temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, or the “decoration 5” temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. May collide with all decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed in the left, middle, and right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c.

  FIG. 113 (h) following FIG. 113 (g) shows a moving animation of a notice display m2 for returning to the position (pedestal) of the fluctuating icon display area 280 on the decorative symbol display device 208. This shows a state in which the temporary stop display of “decoration 5” has been completed and the decorative symbol change display has been displayed again. In the tutorial display area tu1, a character string of “× 2” indicating that the second pseudo variation is performed is displayed. Note that the decoration design change display may be restarted before the notice animation m2 starts the movement animation, or the decoration design change display may be restarted when the notice display m2 starts the movement animation. After the start of the movement animation of the notice display m2, the decorative design change display may be restarted.

  FIG. 113 (i) subsequent to FIG. 113 (h) shows a state in which the moving animation for returning to the position of the fluctuating icon display area 280 with the notice display m2 as the fluctuating icon ad1 is completed on the decorative symbol display device 208. .

As described above, the present example is an example in which a simulated continuous notice in which the decorative design variable display is re-fluctuated by the change icon colliding with the middle symbol of the decorative symbol as the preliminary display during the temporary stop display of the missing symbol is displayed. . In the case where the effect of the present example is performed, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol is finally more easily confirmed and displayed than in the case where the effect of the present example is not performed, or in the case where the effect of the present example is performed May be configured so that the big hit symbol is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed than in the case where any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 106 to 115 is performed. It should be noted that not only the fluctuating icon in the default mode, but also a fluctuating icon in a mode other than the default mode may be used as the notice display m2 of the present example. FIG. Is shown.

  FIG. 114 (a) shows the special figure 1 reserved number aa1, the fourth figure aa2 of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 reserved number aa3, the fourth figure aa4 of the special figure 2, The number of ordinary symbols aa5 and the fourth symbol aa6 of the ordinary symbols are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuating icon display area 280 for displaying a fluctuating icon display, and the fluctuating icon display area 280 displays a fluctuating icon ad1 in a default mode. To the right of the fluctuating icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 reserved icon display area 280ab, where the special figure 1 reserved icons a1 and a2 and the special figure 2 reserved icons b1 and b2 are alternately arranged in this order from left to right. It is displayed facing. The right side of the special figure 1 and 2 reserved icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, in which a character string of "Under preparation" is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, the contents of the effect currently being performed and the contents of the effect not currently being performed may be displayed. FIG. 114 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol change display is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c.

  FIG. 114 (b) following FIG. 114 (a) shows a state in which the decorative pattern display device 208 displays an animation for increasing the special figure 1 suspension icon a3 in the default mode.

  FIG. 114 (c) following FIG. 114 (b) shows the default state of the special figure 2 reservation icon b3 in the decorative pattern display device 208 in parallel with the end of the animation of increasing the special figure 1 reservation icon a3. This shows a state where the increase animation is displayed.

  FIG. 114 (d) subsequent to FIG. 114 (c) shows a state in which the increase animation of the special figure 2 suspension icon b3 has ended in the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 114 (e) subsequent to FIG. 114 (d) shows a state where the temporary stop display of “decoration 4−decoration 4−decoration 5” is displayed on the decoration symbol display device 208.

    FIG. 114 (f), which follows FIG. 114 (e), shows the special figure 1 suspension icon a3 during the temporary stop display of “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5” on the decoration symbol display device 208. 2 shows a state in which a moving animation that jumps out of the 2 hold icon display area 280ab and moves as the notice display m1 is displayed. The notice display m1 and the special figure 1 hold icon a3 have the same display mode. Also, the pedestal on which the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab is displayed does not display the hold icon. In this example, the notice display m1 is a display used as a pre-read notice.

  FIG. 114 (g) subsequent to FIG. 114 (f) shows the preliminary symbol display in the decorative symbol display device 208 during the temporary stop display of “decorative 4-decorative 4-decorative 5”. A state in which a collision animation that collides with the “decoration 4” temporarily displayed at 208b is displayed. The notice display m1 may collide with “decoration 4” temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a, or “decoration 5” temporarily stopped in the right symbol display area 208c. May collide with all decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed in the left, middle, and right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c.

  FIG. 114 (h) following FIG. 114 (g) shows a moving animation of a notice display m1 returning to the position (pedestal) where the special figure 1 hold icon a3 was displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The state where the stop display of "decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5" is displayed.

  FIG. 114 (i), following FIG. 114 (h), shows a state in which the moving image in which the notice display m1 returns to the position before the movement as the special figure 1 holding icon a3 has been completed on the decorative symbol display device 208. .

  FIG. 114 (j) following FIG. 114 (i) shows a state in which the next symbol change is executed. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variable display is displayed, and the animation of moving the hold icon, in which the hold icon moves to the left, and the animation of moving the hold / change icon, in which the hold icon moves to the change icon display area 208, have ended. .

  FIG. 114 (k) following FIG. 114 (j) shows a state in which the temporary stop display of “decoration 2−decoration 2−decoration 3” is displayed on the decoration symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 114 (l) following FIG. 114 (k) shows the special figure 1 hold icon a3 during the temporary stop display of “decoration 2−decoration 2−decoration 3” on the decoration symbol display device 208. 2 shows a state in which a moving animation that jumps out of the 2 hold icon display area 280ab and moves as the notice display m1 is displayed. The notice display m1 and the special figure 1 hold icon a3 have the same display mode. Also, the pedestal on which the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab is displayed does not display the hold icon.

  FIG. 114 (m) subsequent to FIG. 114 (l) shows the preliminary symbol display area in the decorative symbol display device 208 during the temporary stop display of “decorative 2-decorative 2-decorative 3”. A state in which a collision animation that collides with the “decoration 2” temporarily displayed at 208b is displayed. Note that the notice display m1 may collide with “decoration 2” temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, or “decoration 3” temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. May collide with all decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed in the left, middle, and right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c.

  FIG. 114 (n) following FIG. 114 (m) shows, on the decorative symbol display device 208, a moving animation of a notice display m1 that returns to the position (pedestal) where the special figure 1 hold icon a3 was displayed. The stop display of “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 3” is displayed.

  FIG. 114 (o) subsequent to FIG. 114 (n) shows a state in which the movement animation in which the notice display m1 returns to the position before the movement as the special figure 1 hold icon a3 on the decorative symbol display device 208 has ended. .

  FIG. 114 (p) following FIG. 114 (o) shows a state in which the next symbol change has been executed. In the decorative symbol display device 208, a decorative symbol change display is displayed, and a moving animation of the holding icon in which the holding icon moves to the left and a moving animation between the holding and changing icons in which the holding icon moves to the changing icon display area 208 are completed. I have.

  FIG. 114 (q) subsequent to FIG. 114 (p) shows a state where the temporary stop display of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 8” is displayed on the decoration symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 114 (r) following FIG. 114 (q) shows the special figure 1 suspension icon a3 during the temporary stop display of “decoration 7−decoration 7−decoration 8” on the decoration design display device 208. 2 shows a state in which a moving animation that jumps out of the 2 hold icon display area 280ab and moves as the notice display m1 is displayed. The notice display m1 and the special figure 1 hold icon a3 have the same display mode and are used as a notice of the change. Also, the pedestal on which the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab is displayed does not display the hold icon.

  FIG. 114 (s) subsequent to FIG. 114 (r) shows, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the preliminary display m1 changes to the middle symbol display area during the temporary stop display of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 8”. A state in which a collision animation that collides with the “decoration 7” temporarily displayed at 208b is displayed. Note that the notice display m1 may collide with the “decoration 7” temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, or the “decoration 8” temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. May collide with all decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed in the left, middle, and right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c.

  FIG. 114 (t) following FIG. 114 (s) shows, on the decorative symbol display device 208, a moving animation of a notice display m1 returning to the position (pedestal) where the special figure 1 hold icon a3 was displayed. The temporary stop display of “decoration 2−decoration 2−decoration 3” is ended, and the decorative symbol change display is displayed.

  FIG. 114 (u), which follows FIG. 114 (t), ends the movement animation in which the notice display m1 returns to the position before the movement as the special figure 1 hold icon a3 on the decoration symbol display device 208, and the "decoration 7" Reach production is performed.

As described above, this example is an example in which a predetermined holding icon performs a continuous notice of colliding with a middle symbol of a decorative symbol as a preliminary display during a plurality of changes during the temporary stop display of a missing symbol, and develops into a reach effect. is there. The first and second notices in this example are used as pre-read notices, and the third notice is used as a notice of the change. Further, when the effect of the present example is performed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is finally displayed more easily than in the case where the effect of the present example is not performed, or the effect of the present example is performed. In this case, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed than when any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 106 to 115 is performed.
FIG. 115 shows an effect example using the hold icon in a stepwise manner.

  FIG. 115 (a) shows the special figure 1 reserved number aa1, the fourth figure aa2 of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 reserved number aa3, the fourth figure aa4 of the special figure 2, The number of ordinary symbols aa5 and the fourth symbol aa6 of the ordinary symbols are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuating icon display area 280 for displaying a fluctuating icon display, and the fluctuating icon display area 280 displays a fluctuating icon ad1 in a default mode. To the right of the fluctuating icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 reserved icon display area 280ab, where the special figure 1 reserved icons a1 and a2 and the special figure 2 reserved icons b1 and b2 are alternately arranged in this order from left to right. It is displayed facing. The special figure 2 hold icon b2 is a hold icon in the form of a character of a palace. The right side of the special figure 1 and 2 reserved icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, in which a character string of "Under preparation" is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, the contents of the effect currently being performed and the contents of the effect not currently being performed may be displayed. FIG. 115 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c. Note that the hold icon in the form of the character may be used as a pre-reading notice.

  FIG. 115 (b), following FIG. 115 (a), shows a state in which the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an animation of increasing the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the form of a tonomiya character.

  FIG. 115 (c) subsequent to FIG. 115 (b) is a special figure 2 in which the character of the tongue is displayed in parallel with the end of the animation of increasing the special figure 1 reserve icon a3 on the decorative symbol display device 208. This shows a state where an increase animation of the hold icon b3 is displayed.

  FIG. 115 (d) subsequent to FIG. 115 (c) shows a state in which the increase animation of the special figure 2 suspension icon b3 has ended in the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 115 (e) following FIG. 115 (d) shows a state where the temporary stop display of “decoration 4−decoration 4−decoration 5” is displayed on the decoration symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 115 (f), which follows FIG. 115 (e), shows the special figure 2 suspension icon b2 during the temporary stop display of “decoration 4−decoration 4−decoration 5” on the decoration symbol display device 208. The special icon 1 reserve icon a3 jumps out of the 1 and 2 reserved icon display area 280ab and moves as the notice display c1, the special figure 1 reserved icon a3 jumps out of the special figure 1 and 2 reserved icon display area 280ab and moves as the notice display c2, and the special figure 2 reserved icon. A moving animation is displayed in which b3 jumps out of the special figure 1 and 2 reserved icon display area 280ab and moves as the notice display c3. All of the notice displays c1 to c3, the special figure 2 reservation icons b2 and b3, and the special figure 1 reservation icon a3 have the same display mode. Further, the pedestal on which the special figure 2 reservation icons b2 and b3 and the special figure 1 reservation icon a3 in the special figure 1 and 2 reservation icon display area 280ab are displayed does not display the reservation icon. In this example, the advance notices c1 to c3 are displays used as advance notice of the change, but may be advance notices used for producing an effect of pseudo-continuous notice, or suggest that pseudo-continuous notice is performed. The notice may be displayed in advance, or may be shared with the pre-reading notice.

  FIG. 115 (g) subsequent to FIG. 115 (f) shows, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the notice display c1 changes to the notice display c1 ′, the notice display c2 changes to the notice display c2 ′, and the notice display c3 changes to The state changed to the notice display c3 'is shown. The notice displays c1 'to c3' are all the same display mode, and have a display mode in which the character of the large displayed hall is drawing a Japanese sword and fighting. In the decorative symbol display measure 208, during the temporary stop display of “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5”, the notice display c1 ′ fights with “decoration 4” temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208a, The battle animation in which the notice display c2 'fights with "decoration 4" temporarily displayed in the left symbol display area 208b and the notice display c3' fights with "decoration 5" temporarily displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. Is displayed.

  FIG. 115 (h), which follows FIG. 115 (g), shows the advance notice c1 ′ being changed to c1, the advance notice c2 ′ being changed to c2, and the advance notice c3 ′ being changed to c3 in the decorative symbol display device 208. The display c1 displayed the special figure 2 suspension icon b3 at the position where the display c1 displayed the special figure 2 reservation icon b2, and the preview display c3 displayed the special figure 2 reservation icon b3 at the position where the preview display c2 displayed the special figure 1 reservation icon a3. The moving animation of the notices c1 to c3 returning to the position is displayed, and the temporary stop display of “decoration 4−decoration 4−decoration 5” is completed and the decoration symbol change display is displayed again.

  115 (i) following FIG. 115 (h), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the notice display c1 returns to the position before the movement as the special figure 2 reservation icon b2, and the notice display c2 changes to the special figure 1 reservation icon a3. Then, the movement animation in which the notice display c3 returns to the position before the movement as the special figure 2 hold icon b3 has ended. In the decorative symbol display device 208, a reach effect of “decoration 7” is executed.

As described above, in the present example, during the temporary stop display of the missing symbol, a plurality of holding icons collide with a plurality of decorative symbols as a plurality of advance displays, the decorative symbol variable display re-fluctuations, and a reach effect is started. This is an example. In the case where the effect of the present example is performed, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol is finally more easily confirmed and displayed than in the case where the effect of the present example is not performed, or in the case where the effect of the present example is performed May be configured such that the big hit symbol is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed than the case where any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 106 to 114 is performed. In addition, when the number of hold icons used as the notice display in the present example is insufficient, the variable icon may be used as the notice display.
Next, an example of the effect of the balloon display will be described with reference to FIGS.
FIGS. 116 (a) to 116 (c) show an effect example using balloon display step by step.

  FIG. 116 (a) shows the special figure 1 reserved number aa1, the fourth figure aa2 of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 reserved number aa3, the fourth figure aa4 of the special figure 2, The number of ordinary symbols aa5 and the fourth symbol aa6 of the ordinary symbols are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuating icon display area 280 for displaying a fluctuating icon display, and the fluctuating icon display area 280 displays a fluctuating icon ad1 in a default mode. To the right of the fluctuating icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 reserved icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 reserved icons a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 reserved icons b1 to b3 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed facing. The right side of the special figure 1 and 2 reserved icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, in which a character string of "Under preparation" is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, the contents of the effect currently being performed and the contents of the effect not currently being performed may be displayed. FIG. 112 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol change display is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c.

  In FIG. 116 (a), a balloon display f1 by the character of the lord is displayed substantially at the center of the screen. The balloon display f1 displays a face image of the character of the main building, a character image of the main building displayed above the facial image of the main character, a character string of "morning weather", and a pattern of a sunny mark. This is a display that includes a balloon portion that is located. The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative design.

  FIG. 116 (b) following FIG. 116 (a) shows a button notice display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 above the balloon display f1 on the decorative symbol display device 208, and Shows a state in which a notice effect prompting operation of the chance button 136 is performed.

FIG. 116 (c) following FIG. 116 (b) shows that when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. The balloon display f2 by the grandfather character is displayed above the balloon display f1. In the balloon display f2, a face image of the grandfather character, a character image of "grandfather" displayed on the face image of the grandfather character, a character string of "daytime weather", and a pattern of a cloudy mark are displayed. This is a display that includes a balloon portion that is located. Note that the width of the balloon display f1 and the width of the balloon display f2 are the same, and the height of the balloon display f1 and the height of the balloon display f2 are configured to be the same, but when the width and the height are different from each other. May be present, only the width may be different, or only the height may be different. The same applies to balloon displays f1 and f2 in the following description.
Next, an example of the effect of the balloon display will be described with reference to FIG.
FIGS. 117 (a) to 117 (i) show an effect example using balloon display step by step.

  FIG. 117 (a) shows the special figure 1 reserved number aa1, the fourth figure aa2 of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 reserved number aa3, the fourth figure aa4 of the special figure 2, The number of ordinary symbols aa5 and the fourth symbol aa6 of the ordinary symbols are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuating icon display area 280 for displaying a fluctuating icon display, and the fluctuating icon display area 280 displays a fluctuating icon ad1 in a default mode. To the right of the fluctuating icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 reserved icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 reserved icons a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 reserved icons b1 to b3 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed facing. The right side of the special figure 1 and 2 reserved icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, in which a character string of "Under preparation" is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, the contents of the effect currently being performed and the contents of the effect not currently being performed may be displayed. FIG. 117 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol change display is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c.

  FIG. 117 (b) following FIG. 117 (a) is displayed such that a balloon display f1 by the character of the forehead appears from the left end of the screen. The balloon display f1 displays a face image of the character of the main building, a character image of the main building displayed above the facial image of the main character, a character string of "morning weather", and a pattern of a sunny mark. This is a display that includes a balloon portion that is located. The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap with the decorative symbol, and overlaps with the ordinary symbol reservation number aa5 and the fourth symbol aa6 of the ordinary symbol.

  FIG. 117 (c) following FIG. 117 (b) shows a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 appearing from the left end of the screen moves from left to right on the decorative symbol display device 208, and stops at substantially the center of the screen. Is displayed. Note that the balloon display f1 does not display the character string and the pattern of the sunny mark displayed in the balloon until the state immediately before being stopped and displayed at substantially the center of the screen (only the frame of the balloon is displayed). Then, after stopping and displaying approximately at the center of the screen, the character string and the pattern of the sunny mark may be displayed in order from the beginning of the character string, or the entire pattern of the character string and the sunny mark may be displayed at once. Good. The same configuration may be applied to other balloon displays.

  FIG. 117 (d) following FIG. 117 (c) shows a button notice display h110 and an operation expiration date display h112 imitating the chance button 136 above the balloon display f1 on the decorative symbol display device 208, and Shows a state in which a notice effect prompting operation of the chance button 136 is performed.

  FIG. 117 (e) following FIG. 117 (d) shows that when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. The balloon display f2 by the grandfather character is displayed so as to appear from the right end of the screen. In the balloon display f2, a face image of the grandfather character, a character image of "grandfather" displayed on the face image of the grandfather character, a character string of "daytime weather", and a pattern of a cloudy mark are displayed. This is a display that includes a balloon portion that is located. Further, in this example, the balloon display f2 is a display that has priority over the balloon display f1. Therefore, when the balloon displays f1 and f2 overlap, the balloon display f2 is displayed so as to overlap the balloon display f1. In this example, a part of the pattern of the fine mark in the balloon display f1 may overlap with the balloon part of the balloon display f2, but a part other than the pattern of the sunny mark may overlap with the balloon display f2. .

  FIG. 117 (e) shows a state where a balloon animation f1 moves upward due to the appearance of the balloon display f2. In this example, the balloon animation f1 simultaneously performs a moving animation of moving upward and a balloon animation f2 of moving toward the left.

  FIG. 117 (f), following FIG. 117 (e), shows a balloon animation f2 appearing from the right end of the screen moving to the left, and is displayed at approximately the center of the screen, and balloon f1 moves upward. This shows a state in which a moving animation is performed and displayed at the upper center of the screen.

  FIG. 117 (g) subsequent to FIG. 117 (f) shows a button notice display h110 and an operation expiration date display imitating the chance button 136 at a position overlapping the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2 on the decorative symbol display device 208. h112 is displayed, indicating a state where a notice effect has been performed to prompt the player to operate the chance button 136.

  FIG. 117 (h) following FIG. 117 (g) shows that when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button notice display h 110 and the operation expiration date display h 112 are erased. , A balloon display f3 by the princess character is displayed so as to appear from the left end of the screen. The balloon display f3 displays a princess character face image, a character image of "princess" displayed on the face image of the princess character, a character string of "afternoon weather", and a picture of a rain mark. This is a display including a balloon portion that is open. In this example, the balloon display f3 is a display that has priority over the balloon display f2. Therefore, when the balloon display f3 and f2 overlap, the balloon display f3 is displayed so as to overlap the balloon display f2. In this example, the character string of the balloon part of the balloon display f2 may overlap the balloon part of the balloon display f3, but a part other than the character string of the balloon part may overlap the balloon display f3. Note that the width of the balloon display f3 is the same as the width of the balloon displays f1 and f2, and the height of the balloon display f3 is the same as the height of the balloon displays f1 and f2, but the width and the height are different from each other. May be present, only the width may be different, or only the height may be different. The same applies to balloon displays f1 to f3 in the following description.

  FIG. 117 (h) shows a state in which the balloon display f3 and the balloon display f2 are moved upward by the appearance of the balloon display f3, and the balloon display f1 is erased so as to go out from the upper end of the screen. Is shown. In this example, a moving animation in which the balloon displays f1 and f2 move upward and a moving animation in which the balloon display f3 moves rightward are performed simultaneously.

  FIG. 117 (i), following FIG. 117 (h), shows a balloon animation f3 appearing from the left end of the screen moving rightward, and is displayed at approximately the center of the screen, and balloon f2 moves upward. A moving animation is performed and displayed in the upper center of the screen. After this frame, the balloon display f2 of the grandfather character and the balloon display f3 of the princess character may be deleted after the balloon display f2 is deleted, or the balloon display f2 and the balloon display f3 may be deleted. The balloon display f2 may be deleted at the same time, or the balloon display f2 may be deleted after the balloon display f3 is deleted. In addition, at least one of the balloon display f2 and the balloon display f3 may be deleted before the reach symbol in the decorative symbol variation display is displayed, or the n-th pseudo continuous display (where n is an arbitrary number) ) May be erased before starting, or may be erased before displaying the temporary stop display. The balloon display f2 and the balloon display f3 may be immediately erased on the spot, or may be erased on the spot so as to become gradually thinner and fade out, and may be the same as the balloon display f1 of the character of the shrine. After displaying a moving animation of moving upward, the moving animation may be erased so as to come out from the upper end of the screen, or may be erased so as to come out from the direction at the time of appearance. The same may be applied to the balloon display described in the following drawings.

The effect of this example may be used as a pre-reading notice or may be used as a notice of the change. Further, when the effect of the present example is performed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is finally displayed more easily than in the case where the effect of the present example is not performed, or the effect of the present example is performed. In this case, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is finally more easily determined and displayed than when any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 116 to 136 is performed. Note that the balloon display described in the present example and the following drawings includes the configuration of the balloon display (design of weather mark (sunny mark, cloudy mark, rain mark), display of character string, display of frame, display of character name, display of character name) In each of the (face images), at least a part of each configuration may be displayed as an animation, only a part may be displayed as an animation, or the whole may be displayed as an animation. For example, an animation display in which the pattern of the sunny mark is rotated may be displayed, an animation display in which the character string display blinks, or an animation display in which the character lips may be displayed. Alternatively, the whole balloon display may be moved and displayed while displaying one or more of an animation display in which the pattern of the sunny mark rotates, a character string display blinks, and an animation display in which the character lips. Alternatively, the character string may be displayed in order from the first character, so that an animation display in which the character is palpated during a period in which the number of characters in the character string is increasing may be displayed. The animation display of each component of the balloon display may be a repeatable animation display in which operations from the beginning to the end of the animation display are connected. For example, one animation display that rotates and returns to the original posture may be repeated, one animation display that returns to the original size after enlarging or reducing may be repeated, or the original animation may be repeated after moving the position. One animation display returning to the position may be repeated, one blinking animation display may be repeated, or one animation display in which the gloss display moves or changes may be repeated. Further, a part of at least one animation display of each configuration of the balloon display may overlap a part of another animation of each configuration of the balloon display. Further, the balloon display is not limited to this example, and a part of each configuration of the balloon display may be transparent or translucent, only a part may be transparent or translucent, or all may be translucent.
Next, an example of the effect of the balloon display will be described with reference to FIG.
FIGS. 118 (a) to 118 (m) show an effect example using balloon display step by step.

  FIG. 118 (a) shows the special figure 1 reserved number aa1, the fourth figure aa2 of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 reserved number aa3, the fourth figure aa4 of the special figure 2, in the left end area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The number of ordinary symbols aa5 and the fourth symbol aa6 of the ordinary symbols are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuating icon display area 280 for displaying a fluctuating icon display, and the fluctuating icon display area 280 displays a fluctuating icon ad1 in a default mode. To the right of the fluctuating icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 reserved icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 reserved icons a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 reserved icons b1 to b3 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed facing. The right side of the special figure 1 and 2 reserved icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, in which a character string of "Under preparation" is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, the contents of the effect currently being performed and the contents of the effect not currently being performed may be displayed. FIG. 118 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c.

  FIG. 118 (b) subsequent to FIG. 118 (a) is displayed such that a balloon display f1 by the character of the forehead appears from the left end of the screen. The balloon display f1 displays a face image of the character of the main building, a character image of the main building displayed above the facial image of the main character, a character string of "morning weather", and a pattern of a sunny mark. This is a display that includes a balloon portion that is located. The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap with the decorative symbol, and overlaps with the ordinary symbol reservation number aa5 and the fourth symbol aa6 of the ordinary symbol.

  FIG. 118 (c) following FIG. 118 (b) shows a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 appearing from the left end of the screen moves from left to right on the decorative symbol display device 208, and stops at approximately the center of the screen. Is displayed.

  FIG. 118 (d) following FIG. 118 (c) shows a button notice display h110 and an operation expiration date display h112 imitating the chance button 136 above the balloon display f1 on the decorative symbol display device 208. Shows a state in which a notice effect prompting operation of the chance button 136 is performed.

  FIG. 118 (e), following FIG. 118 (d), erases the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136. Then, a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is started.

  In FIG. 118 (f) following FIG. 118 (e), the moving animation for moving above the balloon display f1 is temporarily interrupted, and the balloon display f1 is stopped and displayed at the top of the screen.

  FIG. 118 (g), following FIG. 118 (f), displays a balloon display f2 by the old man character from the right end of the screen after the movement animation of the balloon display f1 is interrupted. In the balloon display f2, a face image of the grandfather character, a character image of "grandfather" displayed on the face image of the grandfather character, a character string of "daytime weather", and a pattern of a cloudy mark are displayed. This is a display that includes a balloon portion that is located.

  FIG. 118 (h) following FIG. 118 (g) shows a state where a balloon animation f2 appearing from the right end of the screen is moved to the left, and is displayed substantially at the center of the screen.

  FIG. 118 (i) following FIG. 118 (h) shows a button notice display h110 and an operation expiration date display imitating the chance button 136 at a position overlapping the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2 on the decorative symbol display device 208. h112 is displayed, indicating a state where a notice effect has been performed to prompt the player to operate the chance button 136.

  FIG. 118 (j) following FIG. 118 (i) shows that when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. , Balloon animations f1 and f2 are moving upward at the same speed. Further, the balloon display f1 is erased so as to protrude from the upper end of the screen.

  In FIG. 118 (k), following FIG. 118 (j), the balloon display f1 is erased from the upper end of the screen, the moving animation moving above the balloon display f2 is temporarily interrupted, and the balloon display f2 stops at the upper part of the screen. Is displayed.

  FIG. 118 (l) subsequent to FIG. 118 (k) displays a balloon display f3 of the princess character such that it appears from the left end of the screen. The balloon display f3 displays a princess character face image, a character image of "princess" displayed on the face image of the princess character, a character string of "afternoon weather", and a picture of a rain mark. This is a display including a balloon portion that is open.

  FIG. 118 (m) subsequent to FIG. 118 (l) shows a state in which a balloon animation f3 appearing from the left end of the screen is moved rightward and is displayed at approximately the center of the screen.

The effect of this example may be used as a pre-reading notice or may be used as a notice of the change. Further, when the effect of the present example is performed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is finally displayed more easily than in the case where the effect of the present example is not performed, or the effect of the present example is performed. In this case, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is finally more easily determined and displayed than when any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 116 to 136 is performed.
Next, an example of the effect of the balloon display will be described with reference to FIG.
FIGS. 119 (a) to 119 (m) show an effect example using balloon display step by step.

  FIG. 119 (a) shows the special figure 1 reserved number aa1, the fourth figure aa2 of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 reserved number aa3, the fourth figure aa4 of the special figure 2, The number of ordinary symbols aa5 and the fourth symbol aa6 of the ordinary symbols are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuating icon display area 280 for displaying a fluctuating icon display, and the fluctuating icon display area 280 displays a fluctuating icon ad1 in a default mode. To the right of the fluctuating icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 reserved icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 reserved icons a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 reserved icons b1 to b3 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed facing. The right side of the special figure 1 and 2 reserved icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, in which a character string of "Under preparation" is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, the contents of the effect currently being performed and the contents of the effect not currently being performed may be displayed. FIG. 119 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c.

  FIG. 119 (b), following FIG. 119 (a), is displayed such that a balloon display f1 by the character of the shrine appears from the left end of the screen. The balloon display f1 displays a face image of the character of the main building, a character image of the main building displayed above the facial image of the main character, a character string of "morning weather", and a pattern of a sunny mark. This is a display that includes a balloon portion that is located. The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap with the decorative symbol, and overlaps with the ordinary symbol reservation number aa5 and the fourth symbol aa6 of the ordinary symbol.

  FIG. 119 (c) following FIG. 119 (b) shows a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 appearing from the left end of the screen moves from left to right on the decorative symbol display device 208, and stops at substantially the center of the screen. Is displayed.

  FIG. 119 (d) following FIG. 119 (c) shows a button notice display h110 and an operation expiration date display h112 imitating the chance button 136 above the balloon display f1 on the decorative symbol display device 208, and Shows a state in which a notice effect prompting operation of the chance button 136 is performed.

  FIG. 119 (e), following FIG. 119 (d), clears the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136. The balloon display f2 by the grandfather character is displayed so as to appear from the right end of the screen. In the balloon display f2, a face image of the grandfather character, a character image of "grandfather" displayed on the face image of the grandfather character, a character string of "daytime weather", and a pattern of a cloudy mark are displayed. This is a display that includes a balloon portion that is located. Further, in this example, the balloon display f2 is a display that has priority over the balloon display f1. Therefore, when the balloon displays f1 and f2 overlap, the balloon display f2 is displayed so as to overlap the balloon display f1.

  FIG. 119 (f) following FIG. 119 (e) shows a state in which a balloon animation f2 appearing from the right end of the screen is moved to the left, and is stopped and displayed approximately at the center of the screen. . The position where the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed is a position where the balloon portion of the balloon display f2 exactly overlaps with the balloon portion of the balloon display 1. Since the balloon display f2 is a display that is prioritized over the balloon display f1, the character string of “morning weather” displayed in the balloon portion of the balloon display f1, the pattern of the sunny mark, and the frame portion of the balloon portion Is hidden in the balloon portion of the balloon display f2, but the face image of the main character and the character image of the "lord" are not hidden in the balloon display f2.

  In FIG. 119 (g) following FIG. 119 (f), after the moving animation for moving the balloon display f2 to the left ends, the moving animation for moving the balloon display f1 upward starts. In FIG. 119 (g), as the balloon display f1 moves upward, the character string of "morning weather" and the pattern of the sunny mark and the frame portion of the balloon portion, which are hidden by the balloon portion of the balloon display f2, Approximately the upper half of is visible. At a certain timing between FIG. 119 (f) and FIG. 119 (g), the balloon portion of the balloon display f1 shows a state where a part of the pattern of the sunny mark is displayed and the character string is not displayed. Become.

  In FIG. 119 (h) following FIG. 119 (g), the moving animation for moving above the balloon display f1 is temporarily interrupted, and the balloon display f1 is stopped and displayed at the top of the screen.

  FIG. 119 (i) following FIG. 119 (h) shows a button notice display h110 and an operation expiration date display imitating the chance button 136 at a position overlapping the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2 on the decorative symbol display device 208. h112 is displayed, indicating a state where a notice effect has been performed to prompt the player to operate the chance button 136.

  FIG. 119 (j) following FIG. 119 (i) shows that when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. , A balloon display f3 by the princess character is displayed so as to appear from the left end of the screen. The balloon display f3 displays a princess character face image, a character image of "princess" displayed on the face image of the princess character, a character string of "afternoon weather", and a picture of a rain mark. This is a display including a balloon portion that is open. In this example, the balloon display f3 is a display that has priority over the balloon display f2. Therefore, when the balloon displays f2 and f3 overlap, the balloon display f3 is displayed so as to overlap the balloon display f2.

  FIG. 119 (k) following FIG. 119 (j) shows a state in which a moving animation in which a balloon display f3 appearing from the left end of the screen moves to the right is performed, and is stopped and displayed at approximately the center of the screen. . The position where the balloon display f3 is stopped and displayed is a position where the balloon portion of the balloon display f3 exactly overlaps with the balloon portion of the balloon display 2. Since the balloon display f3 is a display that is prioritized over the balloon display f2, the character string of "morning weather" and the pattern of the cloudy mark and the frame portion of the balloon portion displayed in the balloon portion of the balloon display f2 Is hidden in the balloon portion of the balloon display f3, but the face image of the grandfather character and the character image of "Grandfather" are not hidden in the balloon display f3.

  FIG. 119 (l) following FIG. 119 (k) shows a state in which a moving animation in which the balloon displays f1 and f2 move upward at the same speed is performed. In FIG. 119 (l), when the balloon display f2 moves upward, the character string of “morning weather” and the pattern of the cloudy mark and the frame portion of the balloon portion hidden by the balloon portion of the balloon display f3 are displayed. Approximately the upper half of is visible. Further, the balloon display f1 is erased so as to protrude from the upper end of the screen.

  FIG. 118 (m) following FIG. 119 (l) shows the balloon display f1 being erased from the upper end of the screen, temporarily interrupting the moving animation moving above the balloon display f2, and the balloon display f2 being stopped at the upper part of the screen. Have been.

  The effect of this example may be used as a pre-reading notice or may be used as a notice of the change. Further, when the effect of the present example is performed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is finally displayed more easily than in the case where the effect of the present example is not performed, or the effect of the present example is performed. In this case, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is finally more easily determined and displayed than when any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 116 to 136 is performed.

  Next, two examples of the effect of the balloon display will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 120 shows an example of pattern 1 for performing the effects of FIGS. 120 (n) to (q) after FIGS. 120 (a) to (m) and FIGS. 120 (r) to 120 (a) to (m) after FIGS. The example of the pattern 2 which performs the effect of (t) is shown.

<Example of Pattern 1>
FIG. 120 (a) shows the special figure 1 reserved number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth design aa2, the special figure 2 reserved number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth design aa4, The number of ordinary symbols aa5 and the fourth symbol aa6 of the ordinary symbols are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuating icon display area 280 for displaying a fluctuating icon display, and the fluctuating icon display area 280 displays a fluctuating icon ad1 in a default mode. To the right of the fluctuating icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 reserved icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 reserved icons a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 reserved icons b1 to b3 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed facing. The right side of the special figure 1 and 2 reserved icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, in which a character string of "Under preparation" is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, the contents of the effect currently being performed and the contents of the effect not currently being performed may be displayed. FIG. 120A shows a state in which the decorative symbol change display is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c.

  FIG. 120 (b), following FIG. 120 (a), shows a balloon display f1 by a tonomiya character from the lower part of the screen (the border between the special figure 1 and 2 reserved icon display area 208ab and the effect display area). Is displayed. The balloon display f1 displays a face image of the character of the main building, a character image of the main building displayed above the facial image of the main character, a character string of "morning weather", and a pattern of a sunny mark. This is a display that includes a balloon portion that is located. The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative design.

  FIG. 120 (c) following FIG. 120 (b) shows a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward on the decorative symbol display device 208, and stops at substantially the center of the screen. This shows the displayed state.

  FIG. 120 (d), which follows FIG. 120 (c), shows a button notice display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 above the balloon display f1 on the decorative symbol display device 208. Shows a state in which a notice effect prompting operation of the chance button 136 is performed.

  FIG. 120E following FIG. 120D shows that when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. In addition, the movement animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is restarted, and the balloon display f2 of the grandfather character is displayed so as to appear from the bottom of the screen. In the balloon display f2, a face image of the grandfather character, a character image of "grandfather" displayed on the face image of the grandfather character, a character string of "daytime weather", and a pattern of a cloudy mark are displayed. This is a display that includes a balloon portion that is located.

  FIG. 120 (f) following FIG. 120 (e) is a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward, and a moving animation in which the balloon display f2 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward. Then, the balloon display f1 is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the screen, and the balloon display f2 shows a state where the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed substantially at the center of the screen. The position where the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed is the position where the balloon display f1 was previously stopped and displayed. Further, the moving speed of the balloon display f1 and the moving speed of the balloon display f2 are configured to be the same, but may be configured to be different. Thus, in this example, the appearing balloon display is configured to be scroll-displayed upward.

  FIG. 120 (g) subsequent to FIG. 120 (f) is a position where the scroll display of the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2 is temporarily interrupted and overlaps with the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2 in the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, a button notice display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 are displayed, indicating a state in which a notice effect for urging the player to operate the chance button 136 is performed.

  FIG. 120H subsequent to FIG. 120G shows that when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. At the same time as the movement animation in which the balloon displays f1 and f2 move upward at the same speed, a balloon display f3 of the princess character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. The balloon display f3 displays a princess character face image, a character image of "princess" displayed on the face image of the princess character, a character string of "afternoon weather", and a picture of a rain mark. This is a display including a balloon portion that is open. Further, the balloon display f1 is erased so as to protrude from the upper end of the screen.

  120 (i) following FIG. 120 (h) is a moving animation in which the balloon display f2 moves upward, and a moving animation in which the balloon display f3 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward. The balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at the top of the screen, and the balloon display f3 shows a state where the balloon display f3 is stopped and displayed substantially at the center of the screen. The position where the balloon display f3 is stopped and displayed is the position where the balloon display f2 was previously stopped and displayed. Further, the moving speed of the balloon display f2 and the moving speed of the balloon display f3 are configured to be the same, but may be configured to be different.

  FIG. 120 (j) following FIG. 120 (i) is a button notice display h110 and an operation expiration date display imitating the chance button 136 at a position overlapping the balloon display f2 and the balloon display f3 on the decorative symbol display device 208. h112 is displayed, indicating a state where a notice effect has been performed to prompt the player to operate the chance button 136.

  FIG. 120 (k) subsequent to FIG. 120 (j) shows that when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. At the same time as the movement animation in which the balloon displays f2 and f3 move upward at the same speed, the balloon display f4 by the Sabohani character is displayed so as to appear from the bottom of the screen. The balloon display f4 displays a character image of "Honey" displayed at a position overlapping the character image of Savohani, a character image of "Savohani", and a character string and pattern of "Lance when reach". This is a display including a balloon. Further, the height of the balloon portion of the balloon display f4 is configured to be substantially half the height of the balloon portion of the balloon display f1 or the like.

  FIG. 120 (l) subsequent to FIG. 120 (k) shows a state in which scroll display of the balloon displays f2 to f4 is temporarily interrupted. The balloon portion f4 that has appeared from the lower part of the screen is stopped and displayed at the position where the balloon portion f4 has completely appeared, and the upward movement of the balloon portion f3 is temporarily stopped and displayed. A substantially lower half of the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at the upper end of the screen.

  FIG. 120 (m), which follows FIG. 120 (l), displays a button notice display h110 and an operation expiration date display h112 imitating the chance button 136 at a position overlapping the balloon display f2 on the decorative symbol display device 208. Shows a state in which a notice effect for urging the player to operate the chance button 136 is performed.

  FIG. 120 (n) subsequent to FIG. 120 (m) shows a state where scroll display of balloon displays f2 to f4 is restarted and balloon display f5 is displayed from the bottom of the screen. The balloon display f5 refers to a balloon image in which the face image of the gale character, the character image of “gust” displayed on the face image of the gale character, and the character string and pattern of “hot fever” are displayed. It is a display that includes. In addition, the height of the balloon portion of the balloon display f5 is configured to be approximately twice the height of the balloon portion of the balloon display f1 or the like.

  In FIG. 120 (o) subsequent to FIG. 120 (n), scroll display of balloon displays f3 to f5 is performed, and balloon display f3 is erased so as to protrude from the upper end of the screen.

  In FIG. 120 (p) following FIG. 120 (o), scroll display of balloon displays f4 and f5 is performed, and balloon display f4 is erased so as to come out from the upper end of the screen.

  FIG. 120 (q) subsequent to FIG. 120 (p) shows a state in which the scroll display of the balloon display f5 has been interrupted or ended, and the balloon display f5 has been stopped. The decorative symbol display device 208 displays the entire balloon display f5. Thereafter, the balloon display f5 may be deleted and the reach effect may be started, or an animation may be performed in which the hold icon or the change icon changes.

<Example of pattern 2>
FIG. 120 (r) following FIGS. 120 (a) to (m) is displayed so that a balloon display f5 appears from the left end of the screen, and balloon displays f2 to f2 which have been stopped and displayed in FIG. 120 (m). This shows a state in which a moving animation for simultaneously moving f3 to the right is displayed. That is, in this example, an effect is provided in which the balloon displays f1 to f4 are sequentially scrolled upward and then the balloon displays f2 to f5 are scrolled rightward.

  In FIG. 120 (s) following FIG. 120 (r), scroll display is performed to the right of the balloon displays f2 to f5, and the balloon displays f2 to f3 are erased so as to simultaneously exit from the right edge of the screen. .

  FIG. 120 (t) subsequent to FIG. 120 (s) shows a state in which the scroll display of the balloon display f5 has been interrupted or ended, and the balloon display f5 has been stopped. The decorative symbol display device 208 displays the entire balloon display f5. Thereafter, the balloon display f5 may be deleted and the reach effect may be started, or an animation may be performed in which the hold icon or the change icon changes.

  The effect of this example may be used as a pre-reading notice or may be used as a notice of the change. Further, when the effect of the present example is performed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is finally displayed more easily than in the case where the effect of the present example is not performed, or the effect of the present example is performed. In this case, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is finally more easily determined and displayed than when any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 116 to 136 is performed. In addition, when the example of the pattern 1 of the present example is performed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is finally displayed more easily than when the example of the pattern 2 of the present example is performed. When the example of the pattern 2 is performed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is finally displayed more easily than when the example of the pattern 1 of the present example is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 121, two examples of the effect example of the balloon display will be described. FIG. 121 shows an example of the pattern 1 for performing the effects shown in FIGS. 121 (k) and (l) after FIGS. 121 (a) to (j) and FIG. 121 (m) after FIGS. 121 (a) to (j). The example of the pattern 2 which performs the effect of (n) is shown.

<Example of Pattern 1>
FIG. 121 (a) shows the special figure 1 reserved number aa1, the fourth figure aa2 of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 reserved number aa3, the fourth figure aa4 of the special figure 2, The number of ordinary symbols aa5 and the fourth symbol aa6 of the ordinary symbols are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuating icon display area 280 for displaying a fluctuating icon display, and the fluctuating icon display area 280 displays a fluctuating icon ad1 in a default mode. To the right of the fluctuating icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 reserved icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 reserved icons a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 reserved icons b1 to b3 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed facing. The right side of the special figure 1 and 2 reserved icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, in which a character string of "Under preparation" is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, the contents of the effect currently being performed and the contents of the effect not currently being performed may be displayed. FIG. 121 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c.

  FIG. 121 (b), following FIG. 121 (a), shows a balloon display f1 by a tonomiya character from the lower part of the screen (the border between the special figure 1 and 2 reserved icon display area 208ab and the effect display area). Is displayed. The balloon display f1 displays a face image of the character of the main building, a character image of the main building displayed above the facial image of the main character, a character string of "morning weather", and a pattern of a sunny mark. This is a display that includes a balloon portion that is located. The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative design.

  FIG. 121 (c) following FIG. 121 (b) shows a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward on the decorative symbol display device 208, and stops at approximately the center of the screen. This shows the displayed state.

  FIG. 121 (d) following FIG. 121 (c) shows a button notice display h110 and an operation expiration date display h112 imitating the chance button 136 above the balloon display f1 on the decorative symbol display device 208, and Shows a state in which a notice effect prompting operation of the chance button 136 is performed.

  FIG. 121 (e), which follows FIG. 121 (d), clears the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136. In addition, the movement animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is restarted, and the balloon display f2 of the grandfather character is displayed so as to appear from the bottom of the screen. In the balloon display f2, a face image of the grandfather character, a character image of "grandfather" displayed on the face image of the grandfather character, a character string of "daytime weather", and a pattern of a cloudy mark are displayed. This is a display that includes a balloon portion that is located.

  FIG. 121 (f) following FIG. 121 (e) shows a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward, and a moving animation in which the balloon display f2 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward. Then, the balloon display f1 is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the screen, and the balloon display f2 shows a state where the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed substantially at the center of the screen. The position where the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed is the position where the balloon display f1 was previously stopped and displayed. Further, the moving speed of the balloon display f1 and the moving speed of the balloon display f2 are configured to be the same, but may be configured to be different. Thus, in this example, the appearing balloon display is configured to be scroll-displayed upward.

  FIG. 121 (g) following FIG. 121 (f) is a position where the scroll display of the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2 is temporarily interrupted and overlaps with the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2 in the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, a button notice display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 are displayed, indicating a state in which a notice effect for urging the player to operate the chance button 136 is performed.

  FIG. 121 (h), which follows FIG. 121 (g), clears the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136. At the same time as the movement animation in which the balloon displays f1 and f2 move upward at the same speed, a balloon display f3 of the princess character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. The balloon display f3 displays a princess character face image, a character image of "princess" displayed on the face image of the princess character, a character string of "afternoon weather", and a picture of a rain mark. This is a display including a balloon portion that is open. Further, the balloon display f1 is erased so as to protrude from the upper end of the screen.

  FIG. 121 (i) following FIG. 121 (h) is a moving animation in which the balloon display f2 moves upward, and a moving animation in which the balloon display f3 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward. The balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at the top of the screen, and the balloon display f3 shows a state where the balloon display f3 is stopped and displayed substantially at the center of the screen. The position where the balloon display f3 is stopped and displayed is the position where the balloon display f2 was previously stopped and displayed. Further, the moving speed of the balloon display f2 and the moving speed of the balloon display f3 are configured to be the same, but may be configured to be different.

  FIG. 121 (j) following FIG. 121 (i) is a button notice display h110 and an operation expiration date display imitating the chance button 136 at a position overlapping the balloon display f2 and the balloon display f3 on the decorative symbol display device 208. h112 is displayed, indicating a state where a notice effect has been performed to prompt the player to operate the chance button 136.

  FIG. 121 (k) following FIG. 121 (j) shows that the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased by the player pressing the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136. Then, the erased balloon display f1 is displayed so as to appear from the upper end of the screen, and the balloon displays f1 to f3 are scrolled downward.

  FIG. 121 (l) subsequent to FIG. 121 (k) shows a state in which scroll display of the balloon displays f1 and f2 is temporarily interrupted or ended. The balloon display f1 that has reappeared from the upper part of the screen is stopped and displayed at a position substantially at the upper part of the screen, and the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at substantially the center of the screen. After that, the balloon displays f1 and f2 may be erased and the reach effect may be started, or an animation in which the hold icon or the change icon changes may be performed.

<Example of pattern 2>
FIG. 121 (m) subsequent to FIGS. 121 (a) to (j) is a button notice display h110 and an operation expiration display h112 when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration of the chance button 136. Is erased, and the balloon display f1 'is displayed so as to appear from the upper end of the screen, and the balloon displays f1', f2, and f3 are scroll-displayed downward. The balloon display f1 'is a balloon in which the face image of the tono character, the character image of "to" displayed on the face image of the tono character, and the character string and pattern of "pseudo ream chance!" It is a display that includes a part.

  FIG. 121 (n) subsequent to FIG. 121 (m) shows a state where the scroll display of the balloon displays f1 ′ and f2 is temporarily interrupted or ended. A balloon display f1 'appearing from the upper part of the screen is stopped and displayed at a position substantially at the upper part of the screen, and a balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at substantially the center of the screen. Thereafter, the balloon displays f1 'and f2 are deleted, and a pseudo continuous announcement effect or a reach effect may be started, or an animation in which the hold icon or the change icon changes may be performed. Good.

The effect of this example may be used as a pre-reading notice or may be used as a notice of the change. Further, when the effect of the present example is performed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is finally displayed more easily than in the case where the effect of the present example is not performed, or the effect of the present example is performed. In this case, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is finally more easily determined and displayed than when any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 116 to 136 is performed. In addition, when the example of the pattern 1 of the present example is performed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is finally displayed more easily than when the example of the pattern 2 of the present example is performed. When the example of the pattern 2 is performed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is finally displayed more easily than when the example of the pattern 1 of the present example is performed.
Next, an example of the effect of the balloon display will be described with reference to FIG.
FIGS. 122 (a) to 122 (i) show an effect example using balloon display step by step.

  FIG. 122 (a) shows the special figure 1 reserved number aa1, the fourth figure aa2 of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 reserved number aa3, the fourth figure aa4 of the special figure 2, The number of ordinary symbols aa5 and the fourth symbol aa6 of the ordinary symbols are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuating icon display area 280 for displaying a fluctuating icon display, and the fluctuating icon display area 280 displays a fluctuating icon ad1 in a default mode. To the right of the fluctuating icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 reserved icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 reserved icons a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 reserved icons b1 to b3 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed facing. The right side of the special figure 1 and 2 reserved icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, in which a character string of "Under preparation" is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, the contents of the effect currently being performed and the contents of the effect not currently being performed may be displayed. FIG. 122 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol change display is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c.

  FIG. 122 (b), following FIG. 122 (a), shows a balloon display f1 ′ by the character of the tongue from the lower part of the screen (the boundary between the special figure 1 and 2 reserved icon display area 208ab and the effect display area). Is displayed in. The balloon display f1 'is a balloon in which the face image of the tono character, the character image of "to" displayed on the face image of the tono character, and the character string and pattern of "pseudo ream chance!" It is a display that includes a part. The balloon display f1 'is displayed so as to overlap the decorative design.

  FIG. 122 (c) following FIG. 122 (b) shows a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 ′ appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward on the decorative symbol display device 208, and stops at approximately the center of the screen. Indicates the state displayed.

  FIG. 122 (d), following FIG. 122 (c), shows a button notice display h110 and an operation expiration date display h112 imitating the chance button 136 above the balloon display f1 ′ on the decorative symbol display device 208, This shows a state in which a notice effect prompting the user to operate the chance button 136 has been performed.

  FIG. 122 (e), which follows FIG. 122 (d), clears the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration display h112 when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration of the chance button 136. In addition, the movement animation in which the balloon display f1 'moves upward is restarted, and the balloon display f2 of the grandfather character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. In the balloon display f2, a face image of the grandfather character, a character image of "grandfather" displayed on the face image of the grandfather character, a character string of "daytime weather", and a pattern of a cloudy mark are displayed. This is a display that includes a balloon portion that is located.

  FIG. 122 (f) following FIG. 122 (e) is a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 ′ moves upward and a balloon display f2 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward. Is performed, the balloon display f1 'is stopped and displayed at the top of the screen, and the balloon display f2 shows a state where the balloon display f2' is stopped and displayed substantially at the center of the screen. The position where the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed is the position where the balloon display f1 'was previously stopped and displayed. Further, the moving speed of the balloon display f1 ′ and the moving speed of the balloon display f2 are configured to be the same, but may be configured to be different. Thus, in this example, the appearing balloon display is configured to be scroll-displayed upward.

  FIG. 122 (g) following FIG. 122 (f) shows that the scroll display of the balloon display f1 ′ and the balloon display f2 is temporarily interrupted in the decorative symbol display device 208, and overlaps with the balloon display f1 ′ and the balloon display f2. A button notice display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and an operation expiration time display h112 are displayed at the position where the chance button 136 is displayed, indicating a state in which a notice effect for urging the player to operate the chance button 136 is performed.

  FIG. 122 (h) following FIG. 122 (g) shows that when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button notice display h 110 and the operation expiration date display h 112 are erased. While the balloon animation f1 'is stopped and displayed, a moving animation in which f2 moves upward is performed, and at the same time, a balloon display f3 of the princess character is displayed so as to appear from the bottom of the screen. The balloon display f3 displays a princess character face image, a character image of "princess" displayed on the face image of the princess character, a character string of "afternoon weather", and a picture of a rain mark. This is a display including a balloon portion that is open. Further, the balloon display f2 is not displayed above the position where the balloon display f1 'is displayed and is deleted. Also, by displaying the balloon display f1 ′ with priority over the balloon display f2, when the balloon display f2 is moving behind the balloon display f1 by scroll display, the balloon display f1 of the balloon display f2 is displayed. 'May not be displayed. In this case, since the face image and the character image of the grandfather character in the balloon display f2 do not overlap with the balloon display f1 ′, the scroll display is performed to the upper end of the screen. As described above, in the present example, when a balloon display with a high jackpot reliability appears, the balloon with a lower jackpot reliability is preferentially erased to leave a balloon display with a high reliability on the screen. It is configured.

  FIG. 122 (i) following FIG. 122 (h) shows a balloon animation in which the balloon display f3 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward while the balloon display f1 ′ is stopped and displayed. f3 indicates a state where the display is stopped at substantially the center of the screen. The position where the balloon display f3 is stopped and displayed is the position where the balloon display f2 was previously stopped and displayed. Thereafter, the balloon displays f1 'and f3 may be erased and the reach effect may be started, or an animation in which the hold icon or the change icon changes may be performed.

The effect of this example may be used as a pre-reading notice or may be used as a notice of the change. Further, when the effect of the present example is performed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is finally displayed more easily than in the case where the effect of the present example is not performed, or the effect of the present example is performed. In this case, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is finally more easily determined and displayed than when any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 116 to 136 is performed.
Next, an example of the effect of the balloon display will be described with reference to FIG.
FIGS. 123 (a) to 123 (i) show an effect example using balloon display step by step.

  FIG. 123 (a) shows the special figure 1 reserved number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth design aa2, the special figure 2 reserved number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth design aa4, The number of ordinary symbols aa5 and the fourth symbol aa6 of the ordinary symbols are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuating icon display area 280 for displaying a fluctuating icon display, and the fluctuating icon display area 280 displays a fluctuating icon ad1 in a default mode. To the right of the fluctuating icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 reserved icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 reserved icons a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 reserved icons b1 to b3 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed facing. The right side of the special figure 1 and 2 reserved icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, in which a character string of "Under preparation" is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, the contents of the effect currently being performed and the contents of the effect not currently being performed may be displayed. FIG. 123 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c.

  FIG. 123 (b), following FIG. 123 (a), shows a balloon display f1 ′ by the tono-character from the lower part of the screen (the boundary between the special figure 1 and 2 reserved icon display area 208ab and the effect display area). Is displayed in. The balloon display f1 displays a face image of the character of the main building, a character image of the main building displayed above the facial image of the main character, a character string of "morning weather", and a pattern of a sunny mark. This is a display that includes a balloon portion that is located. The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative design.

  FIG. 123 (c) following FIG. 123 (b) shows a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward on the decorative symbol display device 208, and stops at substantially the center of the screen. This shows the displayed state.

  FIG. 123 (d), which follows FIG. 123 (c), displays a button notice display h110 and an operation expiration date display h112 imitating the chance button 136 above the balloon display f1 on the decorative symbol display device 208. Shows a state in which a notice effect prompting operation of the chance button 136 is performed.

  FIG. 123 (e), following FIG. 123 (d), erases the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136. After the balloon display f2 of the grandfather character is displayed so as to appear from the bottom of the screen, the moving animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is restarted. In the balloon display f2, a face image of the grandfather character, a character image of "grandfather" displayed on the face image of the grandfather character, a character string of "daytime weather", and a pattern of a cloudy mark are displayed. This is a display that includes a balloon portion that is located. In this example, since a balloon animation f2 by the grandfather character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen and then the balloon display f1 moves upward, the balloon display f2 is substantially below the balloon display f1. It appears to overlap in half.

  FIG. 123 (f), which follows FIG. 123 (e), shows a moving animation in which the lower half of the balloon display f1 overlaps with the balloon display f2 and moves upward together. Thus, in this example, the appearing balloon display is configured to be scroll-displayed upward.

  FIG. 123 (g) following FIG. 123 (f) shows that the decorative symbol display device 208 temporarily interrupts the scroll display of the balloon displays f1 and f2 and provides a chance at a position where the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2 overlap. A button notice display h110 imitating the button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 are displayed, indicating a state in which a notice effect has been performed to urge the player to operate the chance button 136.

  FIG. 123 (h), following FIG. 123 (g), erases the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136. While the balloon displays f1 and f2 are stopped and displayed, the balloon display f3 of the princess character is displayed so as to appear from the bottom of the screen. The balloon display f3 displays a princess character face image, a character image of "princess" displayed on the face image of the princess character, a character string of "afternoon weather", and a picture of a rain mark. This is a display including a balloon portion that is open. Further, the balloon display f3 is displayed so as to overlap substantially the lower half of the balloon display f2. In this example, a part of the balloon portion of the balloon display 1 (the character string of "Today's weather", the pattern of the sunny mark, and the frame portion of the balloon portion) is part of the balloon portion of the balloon display f2 ("Today's weather is"). The balloon part of the balloon display 2 (the character string of "Today's weather") or the frame part of the balloon part overlaps with a part of the character string or the pattern of the cloudy mark or the frame part of the balloon part. ) Is configured to overlap with a part of the balloon part of the balloon display f3 (the character string of “Today's weather”, the picture of the rain mark, and the frame part of the balloon part). There may be cases. For example, the face images of the characters may overlap, the character images of the names of the characters may overlap, or the face images of the characters may overlap in the balloon. May be present, the balloon may overlap the face image of the character, or the character image of the character name may overlap the balloon.

  FIG. 123 (i) following FIG. 123 (h) shows a position where the movement animation for moving the balloon displays f1 to f3 upward is performed, and the upper end of the balloon part f1 and the lower end of the balloon part f3 fit on the screen. Indicates a state in which the moving animation of the balloon displays f1 to f3 has been interrupted or ended. Thereafter, the balloon display f1 to f3 may be deleted and the reach effect may be started, or an animation in which the hold icon or the change icon changes may be performed. In this example, two balloon displays are overlapped. However, two or more balloon displays may be overlapped. For example, as the number of balloon displays overlapped increases, the reliability of a big hit increases. May be the case. Also, in the present example, the balloons are configured so that the overlapping states of the balloon displays are equal, but the balloons may be configured so that the overlapping states of the balloon displays are not uniform. For example, the area where the balloon displays f1 and f2 overlap may be smaller or may be larger than the area where the balloon displays f2 and f3 overlap. Also, the balloon displays f1 and f2 may overlap and the balloon displays f2 and f3 may not overlap, or the balloon displays f2 and f3 may overlap without the balloon displays f1 and f2 overlapping.

The effect of this example may be used as a pre-reading notice or may be used as a notice of the change. Further, when the effect of the present example is performed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is finally displayed more easily than in the case where the effect of the present example is not performed, or the effect of the present example is performed. In this case, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is finally more easily determined and displayed than when any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 116 to 136 is performed.
Next, an example of the effect of the balloon display will be described with reference to FIG.
FIGS. 124 (a) to 124 (i) show an effect example using balloon display step by step.

  FIG. 124 (a) shows the special figure 1 reserved number aa1, the fourth figure aa2 of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 reserved number aa3, the fourth figure aa4 of the special figure 2, The number of ordinary symbols aa5 and the fourth symbol aa6 of the ordinary symbols are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuating icon display area 280 for displaying a fluctuating icon display, and the fluctuating icon display area 280 displays a fluctuating icon ad1 in a default mode. To the right of the fluctuating icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 reserved icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 reserved icons a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 reserved icons b1 to b3 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed facing. The right side of the special figure 1 and 2 reserved icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, in which a character string of "Under preparation" is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, the contents of the effect currently being performed and the contents of the effect not currently being performed may be displayed. FIG. 124 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol change display is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c.

  FIG. 124 (b) following FIG. 124 (a) shows a balloon display f1 by the character of the tongue from the lower part of the screen (the border between the special figure 1 and 2 reserved icon display area 208ab and the effect display area). Is displayed. The balloon display f1 displays a face image of the character of the main building, a character image of the main building displayed above the facial image of the main character, a character string of "morning weather", and a pattern of a sunny mark. This is a display that includes a balloon portion that is located. The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative design.

  FIG. 124 (c) following FIG. 124 (b) shows a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward on the decorative symbol display device 208, and stops at approximately the center of the screen. This shows the displayed state.

  FIG. 124 (d), following FIG. 124 (c), displays a button notice display h110 and an operation expiration date display h112 imitating the chance button 136 above the balloon display f1 on the decorative symbol display device 208, and Shows a state in which a notice effect prompting operation of the chance button 136 is performed.

  FIG. 124 (e) subsequent to FIG. 124 (d) shows that when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. In addition, a balloon display f2 by the grandfather character is displayed so as to appear from the bottom of the screen, and an animation is displayed in which the balloon display f1 is reduced and then moved upward. Further, the balloon display f1 may be gradually reduced while moving upward. Note that the degree of reduction of the balloon display is not limited to this example, and a part of each configuration of the balloon display (weather pattern, character, frame, character name, character face image) may be partially reduced, Only a part may be reduced, all may be reduced, or a reduction ratio may be different for each configuration.

  FIG. 124 (f) following FIG. 124 (e) is a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward, and a moving animation in which the balloon display f2 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward. Then, the balloon display f1 is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the screen, and the balloon display f2 shows a state where the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed substantially at the center of the screen. The position where the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed is the position where the balloon display f1 was previously stopped and displayed. Further, the moving speed of the balloon display f1 and the moving speed of the balloon display f2 are configured to be the same, but may be configured to be different. Thus, in this example, the appearing balloon display is configured to be scroll-displayed upward.

  FIG. 124 (g) following FIG. 124 (f) shows that the decorative symbol display device 208 temporarily interrupts the scroll display of the balloon displays f1 and f2 and places a chance at a position where the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2 overlap. A button notice display h110 imitating the button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 are displayed, indicating a state in which a notice effect has been performed to urge the player to operate the chance button 136.

  FIG. 124H subsequent to FIG. 124G shows that when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. The balloon display f3 by the princess character is displayed so as to appear from the bottom of the screen, and an animation is displayed in which the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2 move upward. Further, the balloon display f2 is configured to be reduced before moving upward, but the balloon display f2 may be gradually reduced while moving upward. Note that the degree of reduction of the balloon display f2 may be the same as or different from the degree of reduction of the balloon display f1. Further, one of the balloon displays f1 and f2 may be reduced to be larger or smaller than the other, or the configuration for reducing the one and the other may be different.

  FIG. 124 (i) subsequent to FIG. 124 (h) shows a state in which the animation moving upward on the balloon displays f2 and f3 has been interrupted or terminated and a stop display has been performed. Thereafter, the balloon displays f2 and f3 may be erased and the reach effect may be started, or an animation in which the hold icon or the change icon changes may be performed.

The effect of this example may be used as a pre-reading notice or may be used as a notice of the change. Further, when the effect of the present example is performed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is finally displayed more easily than in the case where the effect of the present example is not performed, or the effect of the present example is performed. In this case, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is finally more easily determined and displayed than when any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 116 to 136 is performed.
Next, an example of the effect of the balloon display will be described with reference to FIG. 125.
FIGS. 125 (a) to 125 (k) show an effect example using balloon display step by step.

  FIG. 125 (a) shows the special figure 1 reserved number aa1, the fourth figure aa2 of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 reserved number aa3, the fourth figure aa4 of the special figure 2, The number of ordinary symbols aa5 and the fourth symbol aa6 of the ordinary symbols are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuating icon display area 280 for displaying a fluctuating icon display, and the fluctuating icon display area 280 displays a fluctuating icon ad1 in a default mode. To the right of the fluctuating icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 reserved icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 reserved icons a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 reserved icons b1 to b3 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed facing. The right side of the special figure 1 and 2 reserved icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, in which a character string of "Under preparation" is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, the contents of the effect currently being performed and the contents of the effect not currently being performed may be displayed. FIG. 125 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c.

  FIG. 125 (b), following FIG. 125 (a), shows that a balloon display f1 by the tonomiya character appears from the lower part of the screen (the boundary between the special figure 1 and 2 reserved icon display area 208ab and the effect display area). Is displayed. The balloon display f1 displays a face image of the character of the main building, a character image of the main building displayed above the facial image of the main character, a character string of "morning weather", and a pattern of a sunny mark. This is a display that includes a balloon portion that is located. The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative design.

  FIG. 125 (c) following FIG. 125 (b) shows a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward on the decorative symbol display device 208, and stops at substantially the center of the screen. This shows the displayed state.

  FIG. 125 (d), following FIG. 125 (c), displays a button notice display h110 and an operation expiration date display h112 imitating the chance button 136 above the balloon display f1 on the decorative symbol display device 208, and Shows a state in which a notice effect prompting operation of the chance button 136 is performed.

  FIG. 125 (e), following FIG. 125 (d), clears the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136. , A balloon display f1 ′ by the main character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen, and an animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is displayed. The balloon display f1 'is a balloon in which the face image of the tono character, the character image of "to" displayed on the face image of the tono character, and the character string and pattern of "pseudo ream chance!" It is a display that includes a part.

  FIG. 125 (f) subsequent to FIG. 125 (e) is a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward and the balloon display f1 ′ appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward. Is performed, the balloon display f1 is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the screen, and the balloon display f1 'shows a state where the balloon display f1' is stopped and displayed substantially at the center of the screen. The position at which the balloon display f1 'is stopped and displayed is the position at which the balloon display f1 was previously stopped and displayed. Further, the moving speed of the balloon display f1 and the moving speed of the balloon display f1 ′ are configured to be the same, but may be configured to be different. Thus, in this example, the appearing balloon display is configured to be scroll-displayed upward.

  FIG. 125 (g) following FIG. 125 (f) shows a position where the scroll display of the balloon displays f1 and f1 ′ is temporarily interrupted and overlaps the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f1 ′ in the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, a button notice display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 are displayed, indicating a state in which a notice effect for urging the player to operate the chance button 136 is performed.

  FIG. 125 (h), following FIG. 125 (g), erases the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136. Then, an animation in which only the balloon display f1 moves upward is displayed, and the balloon display f1 is erased so as to protrude from the upper end of the screen. Further, an animation in which the balloon display f1 ′ is changed to the balloon display f1a is performed. In the animation, as the balloon portion of the balloon display f1 'expands and the character string of the balloon portion gradually disappears, the character string of the balloon portion of the balloon display f1a floats instead. . The balloon display f1a is a balloon in which the face image of the lord character, the character image of “lord” displayed on the face image of the lord character, and the character string and pattern of “SP reach confirmed” are displayed. It is a display that includes a part. The height of the balloon portion of the balloon display f1a is approximately twice the height of the balloon portion of the balloon display f1. Note that, in this example, the old balloon display f1 is configured to be moved upward and deleted according to the change of the new balloon display f1 ′. May be displayed, may be overlapped by a balloon display f1a changed without moving, or may be erased so as to fade out on the spot.

  In FIG. 125 (i) following FIG. 125 (h), the balloon display f1a is stopped and displayed so as to fit within the frame of the screen.

    FIG. 125 (j), which follows FIG. 125 (i), displays a button notice display h110 and an operation expiration date display h112 imitating the chance button 136 at a position overlapping the balloon display f1a on the decorative symbol display device 208. Shows a state in which a notice effect for urging the player to operate the chance button 136 is performed.

  FIG. 125 (k) following FIG. 125 (j) shows that the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136. , The character string “SP reach reach determined” is deleted and the character string “full rotation reach determined” is displayed. The character string of “complete rotation reach determination” is displayed so as to protrude from the balloon portion of the balloon display f1a. The character string of “complete rotation reach determination” is a character image of a decorative pattern or a hall, a reserved icon, a change icon, a special figure 1 reserved number aa1, a fourth figure aa2 of the special figure 1, a special figure 2 reserved number aa3, or a special figure. The display of the second symbol aa4, the number of reserved symbols aa5, the number of the fourth symbol aa6 of the ordinary symbol, the display of the character string in the tutorial display area tu1, or the display other than these may be possible.

  The effect of this example may be used as a pre-reading notice or may be used as a notice of the change. Further, when the effect of the present example is performed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is finally displayed more easily than in the case where the effect of the present example is not performed, or the effect of the present example is performed. In this case, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is finally more easily determined and displayed than when any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 116 to 136 is performed. Thereafter, the balloon display f1a may be erased and the SP reach effect or the full-rotation reach effect may be started, or an animation in which the hold icon or the change icon changes may be performed.

The effect of this example may be used as a pre-reading notice or may be used as a notice of the change. Further, when the effect of the present example is performed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is finally displayed more easily than in the case where the effect of the present example is not performed, or the effect of the present example is performed. In this case, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is finally more easily determined and displayed than when any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 116 to 136 is performed.
Next, an example of the effect of the balloon display will be described with reference to FIG.
FIGS. 126 (a) to 126 (i) show an effect example using balloon display step by step.

  FIG. 126 (a) shows the special symbol 1 reserved number aa1, the special symbol 1 fourth symbol aa2, the special symbol 2 reserved number aa3, the special symbol 2 fourth symbol aa4, The number of ordinary symbols aa5 and the fourth symbol aa6 of the ordinary symbols are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuating icon display area 280 for displaying a fluctuating icon display, and the fluctuating icon display area 280 displays a fluctuating icon ad1 in a default mode. To the right of the fluctuating icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 reserved icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 reserved icons a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 reserved icons b1 to b3 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed facing. The right side of the special figure 1 and 2 reserved icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, in which a character string of "Under preparation" is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, the contents of the effect currently being performed and the contents of the effect not currently being performed may be displayed. FIG. 126 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c.

  FIG. 126 (b) following FIG. 126 (a) shows a balloon display f1 by the character of the tongue from the lower part of the screen (the boundary between the special figure 1 and 2 reserved icon display area 208ab and the effect display area). Is displayed. The balloon display f1 displays a face image of the character of the main building, a character image of the main building displayed above the facial image of the main character, a character string of "morning weather", and a pattern of a sunny mark. This is a display that includes a balloon portion that is located. The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative design. Also, the princess character display m3 is displayed so as to appear from the left end of the screen. The princess character display m3 is overlapped with the fourth symbol aa2 of the special figure 1, the reserved number aa3 of the special figure 2, the fourth symbol aa4 of the special figure 2, the reserved number aa5 of the ordinary figure, and the fourth symbol aa6 of the ordinary figure. I have.

  FIG. 126 (c) following FIG. 126 (b) shows a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward on the decorative symbol display device 208, and stops at substantially the center of the screen. This shows the displayed state. Further, an animation of moving the princess character m3 rightward is displayed, and the princess character m3 is displayed so as to overlap a part of the face image of the main character in the balloon display f1.

  FIG. 126 (d) following FIG. 126 (c) shows a button notice display h110 and an operation expiration date display h112 imitating the chance button 136 above the balloon display f1 on the decorative symbol display device 208, and Shows a state in which a notice effect prompting operation of the chance button 136 is performed. Also, an animation of the princess character m3 moving to the right is displayed, and the princess character m3 overlaps substantially the entire face image of the character in the balloon display f1 and substantially the entire character image of “dono”. It is displayed to be. Note that, if the balloon display f1 is stopped until the player presses the chance button 136, the princess character m3 may also be configured to stop moving in the right direction.

  FIG. 126 (e) following FIG. 126 (d) shows that when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. In addition, the movement animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is restarted, and the balloon display f2 of the grandfather character is displayed so as to appear from the bottom of the screen. In the balloon display f2, a face image of the grandfather character, a character image of "grandfather" displayed on the face image of the grandfather character, a character string of "daytime weather", and a pattern of a cloudy mark are displayed. This is a display that includes a balloon portion that is located. Also, an animation of the princess character m3 moving rightward is displayed, and the princess character m3 is displayed in the character portion on the left side of the balloon portion of the balloon display f1 and the character portion on the left side of the balloon portion of the balloon display f2. They are displayed as overlapping.

  FIG. 126 (f) following FIG. 126 (e) is a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward, and a moving animation in which the balloon display f2 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward. Then, the balloon display f1 is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the screen, and the balloon display f2 shows a state where the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed substantially at the center of the screen. The position where the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed is the position where the balloon display f1 was previously stopped and displayed. Further, the moving speed of the balloon display f1 and the moving speed of the balloon display f2 are configured to be the same, but may be configured to be different. Thus, in this example, the appearing balloon display is configured to be scroll-displayed upward. The animation of the princess character m3 moving to the right is displayed, and the princess character m3 overlaps the character portion in the middle of the balloon portion of the balloon display f1 and the character portion in the middle of the balloon portion of the balloon display f2. It is displayed to be.

  FIG. 126 (g) following FIG. 126 (f) shows a position where the scroll display of the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2 is temporarily interrupted in the decorative symbol display device 208, and overlaps the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2. In addition, a button notice display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 are displayed, indicating a state in which a notice effect for urging the player to operate the chance button 136 is performed. Also, an animation of the princess character m3 moving to the right is displayed, and the princess character m3 has a character portion on the right side of the balloon portion of the balloon display f1, a pattern portion of the sunny mark, and a balloon portion of the balloon display f2. It is displayed so as to overlap the character portion on the right and the picture portion of the cloudy mark. The princess character m3 is displayed so as to overlap a part of the button notice display h110 and a part of the operation expiration date display h112.

  FIG. 126 (h), following FIG. 126 (g), shows that the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136. At the same time as the movement animation in which the balloon displays f1 and f2 move upward at the same speed, a balloon display f3 of the princess character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. The balloon display f3 displays a princess character face image, a character image of "princess" displayed on the face image of the princess character, a character string of "afternoon weather", and a picture of a rain mark. This is a display including a balloon portion that is open. Further, the balloon display f1 is erased so as to protrude from the upper end of the screen. Also, an animation of the princess character m3 moving to the right is displayed, and the princess character m3 has a pattern portion of the cloudy mark on the right side of the balloon portion of the balloon display f2 and rain on the right side of the balloon portion of the balloon display f3. It is displayed so as to overlap with the design part of the mark and a part of the face image of the grandfather character.

  FIG. 126 (i) following FIG. 126 (h) shows a moving animation in which the balloon display f2 moves upward, and a moving animation in which the balloon display f3 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward. The balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at the top of the screen, and the balloon display f3 shows a state where the balloon display f3 is stopped and displayed substantially at the center of the screen. The position where the balloon display f3 is stopped and displayed is the position where the balloon display f2 was previously stopped and displayed. Further, the moving speed of the balloon display f2 and the moving speed of the balloon display f3 are configured to be the same, but may be configured to be different. Also, an animation of the princess character m3 moving to the right is displayed, and is erased so as to exit from the right end of the screen. A part of the princess character m3 is displayed so as to overlap a part of the face image of the grandfather character. Thereafter, the balloon displays f2 and f3 may be erased and the reach effect may be started, or an animation in which the hold icon or the change icon changes may be performed.

The effect of this example may be used as a pre-reading notice or may be used as a notice of the change. Further, when the effect of the present example is performed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is finally displayed more easily than in the case where the effect of the present example is not performed, or the effect of the present example is performed. In this case, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is finally more easily determined and displayed than when any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 116 to 136 is performed.
Next, an example of the effect of the balloon display will be described with reference to FIG.
FIGS. 127 (a) to 127 (i) show an effect example using balloon display step by step.

  FIG. 127 (a) shows the special figure 1 reserved number aa1, the fourth figure aa2 of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 reserved number aa3, the fourth figure aa4 of the special figure 2, The number of ordinary symbols aa5 and the fourth symbol aa6 of the ordinary symbols are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuating icon display area 280 for displaying a fluctuating icon display, and the fluctuating icon display area 280 displays a fluctuating icon ad1 in a default mode. To the right of the fluctuating icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 reserved icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 reserved icons a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 reserved icons b1 to b3 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed facing. The right side of the special figure 1 and 2 reserved icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, in which a character string of "Under preparation" is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, the contents of the effect currently being performed and the contents of the effect not currently being performed may be displayed. FIG. 127 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c.

  FIG. 127 (b), following FIG. 127 (a), shows a balloon display f1 by the character of the lord from the lower part of the screen (the boundary between the special figure 1 and 2 reserved icon display area 208ab and the effect display area). Is displayed. The balloon display f1 displays a face image of the character of the main building, a character image of the main building displayed above the facial image of the main character, a character string of "morning weather", and a pattern of a sunny mark. This is a display that includes a balloon portion that is located. The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative design. Also, a state is shown in which the structure 247 has moved substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. The structure 247 makes it difficult to visually recognize the frame portion of the balloon display f1.

  FIG. 127 (c) following FIG. 127 (b) shows a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward on the decorative symbol display device 208, and stops at approximately the center of the screen. This shows the displayed state. Further, a structure 247 is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. The structure 247 makes it difficult to visually recognize the frame portion, character string portion, and part of the pattern of the sunny mark of the balloon display f1.

  127 (d) following FIG. 127 (c), a button notice display h110 and an operation expiration date display h112 imitating the chance button 136 are displayed above the balloon display f1 on the decorative symbol display device 208, and Shows a state in which a notice effect prompting the user to operate the chance button 136 is given.

  FIG. 127 (e), following FIG. 127 (d), clears the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136. In addition, the movement animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is restarted, and the balloon display f2 of the grandfather character is displayed so as to appear from the bottom of the screen. In the balloon display f2, a face image of the grandfather character, a character image of "grandfather" displayed on the face image of the grandfather character, a character string of "daytime weather", and a pattern of a cloudy mark are displayed. This is a display that includes a balloon portion that is located. Further, a structure 247 is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. The structure 247 makes it difficult to visually recognize the frame portion, character string portion, and part of the pattern of the sunny mark of the balloon display f1.

  127 (f) following FIG. 127 (e) is a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward, and a moving animation in which the balloon display f2 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward. Then, the balloon display f1 is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the screen, and the balloon display f2 shows a state where the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed substantially at the center of the screen. The position where the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed is the position where the balloon display f1 was previously stopped and displayed. Further, the moving speed of the balloon display f1 and the moving speed of the balloon display f2 are configured to be the same, but may be configured to be different. Thus, in this example, the appearing balloon display is configured to be scroll-displayed upward. Further, a structure 247 is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. The structure 247 makes it difficult to visually recognize the frame portions of the balloon displays f1 and f2, the character string portion, and a part of the pattern of the sunny mark and the cloudy mark.

  FIG. 127 (g) following FIG. 127 (f) shows a position where the scroll display of the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2 is temporarily interrupted in the decorative symbol display device 208, and overlaps the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2. In addition, a button notice display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 are displayed, indicating a state in which a notice effect for urging the player to operate the chance button 136 is performed. Further, a structure 247 is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. The structure 247 makes it difficult to visually recognize the frame portions of the balloon displays f1 and f2, the character string portion, a part of the pattern of the sunny mark and the cloudy mark, the button notice display h110, and the operation expiration date display h112.

  FIG. 127 (h) following FIG. 127 (g) shows that when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. At the same time as the movement animation in which the balloon displays f1 and f2 move upward at the same speed, a balloon display f3 of the princess character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. The balloon display f3 displays a princess character face image, a character image of "princess" displayed on the face image of the princess character, a character string of "afternoon weather", and a picture of a rain mark. This is a display including a balloon portion that is open. Further, the balloon display f1 is erased so as to protrude from the upper end of the screen. Further, a structure 247 is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. The structure 247 makes it difficult to visually recognize the frame portion of the balloon display f2, the character string portion, part of the pattern of the cloudy mark, and part of the frame portion of the balloon display f3.

  127 (i) following FIG. 127 (h) is a moving animation in which the balloon display f2 moves upward, and a moving animation in which the balloon display f3 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward. The balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at the top of the screen, and the balloon display f3 shows a state where the balloon display f3 is stopped and displayed substantially at the center of the screen. The position where the balloon display f3 is stopped and displayed is the position where the balloon display f2 was previously stopped and displayed. Further, the moving speed of the balloon display f2 and the moving speed of the balloon display f3 are configured to be the same, but may be configured to be different. Further, a structure 247 is located substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. The structure 247 makes it difficult to visually recognize the frame portions of the balloon displays f2 and f3, the character string portion, the cloudy mark, and a part of the design of the rain mark.

  In the present example, the balloon display is configured to move while the structure 247 is positioned substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, but while the structure 247 is positioned at the initial position. , The balloon display may be moved, or the balloon display may be moved while the structure 247 overlaps the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208.

The effect of this example may be used as a pre-reading notice or may be used as a notice of the change. Further, when the effect of the present example is performed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is finally displayed more easily than in the case where the effect of the present example is not performed, or the effect of the present example is performed. In this case, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is finally more easily determined and displayed than when any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 116 to 136 is performed.
Next, an example of the effect of the balloon display will be described with reference to FIG.
FIGS. 128 (a) to 128 (i) show an effect example using balloon display step by step.

  FIG. 128 (a) shows the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the fourth figure aa2 of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the fourth figure aa4 of the special figure 2, The number of ordinary symbols aa5 and the fourth symbol aa6 of the ordinary symbols are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuating icon display area 280 for displaying a fluctuating icon display, and the fluctuating icon display area 280 displays a fluctuating icon ad1 in a default mode. To the right of the fluctuating icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 reserved icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 reserved icons a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 reserved icons b1 to b3 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed facing. The right side of the special figure 1 and 2 reserved icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, in which a character string of "Under preparation" is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, the contents of the effect currently being performed and the contents of the effect not currently being performed may be displayed. FIG. 128 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c.

  FIG. 128 (b) following FIG. 128 (a) shows that a balloon display f1 by the character of the tongue appears from the lower part of the screen (the border between the special figure 1 and 2 reserved icon display area 208ab and the effect display area). Is displayed. The balloon display f1 displays a face image of the character of the main building, a character image of the main building displayed above the facial image of the main character, a character string of "morning weather", and a pattern of a sunny mark. This is a display that includes a balloon portion that is located. The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative design. In addition, a luminescent display of a smiling character is displayed on a luminescent panel in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. The light emission makes it difficult to visually recognize the frame portion, character string portion, and part of the pattern of the sunny mark of the balloon display f1.

  FIG. 128 (c) following FIG. 128 (b) shows a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward on the decorative symbol display device 208, and stops at approximately the center of the screen. This shows the displayed state. In addition, light-emitting display is performed by a light-emitting panel in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. The light emission makes it difficult to visually recognize the frame portion, character string portion, and part of the pattern of the sunny mark of the balloon display f1.

  FIG. 128 (d) following FIG. 128 (c) shows a button notice display h110 and an operation expiration date display h112 imitating the chance button 136 above the balloon display f1 on the decorative symbol display device 208, and Shows a state in which a notice effect prompting operation of the chance button 136 is performed. In addition, light-emitting display is performed by a light-emitting panel in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. Due to the light emission, the frame portion, character string portion, part of the pattern of the sunny mark, the button notice display h110, and the operation expiration date display h112 of the balloon display f1 are difficult to visually recognize.

  FIG. 128 (e), following FIG. 128 (d), clears the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136. In addition, the movement animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is restarted, and the balloon display f2 of the grandfather character is displayed so as to appear from the bottom of the screen. In the balloon display f2, a face image of the grandfather character, a character image of "grandfather" displayed on the face image of the grandfather character, a character string of "daytime weather", and a pattern of a cloudy mark are displayed. This is a display that includes a balloon portion that is located. In addition, light-emitting display is performed by a light-emitting panel in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. The light emission makes it difficult to visually recognize the frame portions, character string portions, sunny marks, and cloudy mark portions of the balloon displays f1 and f2.

  FIG. 128 (f) following FIG. 128 (e) is a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward, and a moving animation in which the balloon display f2 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward. Then, the balloon display f1 is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the screen, and the balloon display f2 shows a state where the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed substantially at the center of the screen. The position where the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed is the position where the balloon display f1 was previously stopped and displayed. Further, the moving speed of the balloon display f1 and the moving speed of the balloon display f2 are configured to be the same, but may be configured to be different. Thus, in this example, the appearing balloon display is configured to be scroll-displayed upward. In addition, light-emitting display is performed by a light-emitting panel in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. The light emission makes it difficult to visually recognize the frame portions of the balloon displays f1 and f2, the character string portion, and a part of the pattern of the sunny mark and the cloudy mark.

  FIG. 128 (g) following FIG. 128 (f) shows a position where the scroll display of the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2 is temporarily interrupted in the decorative symbol display device 208, and overlaps with the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2. In addition, a button notice display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 are displayed, indicating a state in which a notice effect for urging the player to operate the chance button 136 is performed. In addition, light-emitting display is performed by a light-emitting panel in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. The light emission makes it difficult to visually recognize the frame portions of the balloon displays f1 and f2, the character string portion, a part of the pattern of the sunny mark and the cloudy mark, the button notice display h110, and the operation expiration date display h112.

  FIG. 128 (h) following FIG. 128 (g) shows that when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. At the same time as the movement animation in which the balloon displays f1 and f2 move upward at the same speed, a balloon display f3 of the princess character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. The balloon display f3 displays a princess character face image, a character image of "princess" displayed on the face image of the princess character, a character string of "afternoon weather", and a picture of a rain mark. This is a display including a balloon portion that is open. Further, the balloon display f1 is erased so as to protrude from the upper end of the screen. In addition, light-emitting display is performed by a light-emitting panel in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. The light emission makes it difficult to visually recognize the frame portions of the balloon displays f2 and f3, the character string portion, a part of the pattern of the cloudy mark and the rain mark, the button notice display h110, and the operation expiration date display h112.

  FIG. 128 (i) following FIG. 128 (h) shows a moving animation in which the balloon display f2 moves upward, and a moving animation in which the balloon display f3 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward. The balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at the top of the screen, and the balloon display f3 shows a state where the balloon display f3 is stopped and displayed substantially at the center of the screen. The position where the balloon display f3 is stopped and displayed is the position where the balloon display f2 was previously stopped and displayed. Further, the moving speed of the balloon display f2 and the moving speed of the balloon display f3 are configured to be the same, but may be configured to be different. In addition, light-emitting display is performed by a light-emitting panel in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. The light emission makes it difficult to visually recognize the frame portions, character string portions, cloudy marks, and rainy mark portions of the balloon displays f2 and f3.

  In this example, the balloon display is configured to move when the light emitting panel positioned in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed, but only when the light emitting panel is not performing the light emitting display. The balloon display may be configured to move.

The effect of this example may be used as a pre-reading notice or may be used as a notice of the change. Further, when the effect of the present example is performed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is finally displayed more easily than in the case where the effect of the present example is not performed, or the effect of the present example is performed. In this case, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is finally more easily determined and displayed than when any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 116 to 136 is performed.
Next, an example of the effect of the balloon display will be described with reference to FIG.

    FIGS. 129 (a) to (i) show an effect example using balloon display step by step.

  FIG. 129 (a) shows the special figure 1 reserved number aa1, the fourth figure aa2 of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 reserved number aa3, the fourth figure aa4 of the special figure 2, The number of ordinary symbols aa5 and the fourth symbol aa6 of the ordinary symbols are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuating icon display area 280 for displaying a fluctuating icon display, and the fluctuating icon display area 280 displays a fluctuating icon ad1 in a default mode. To the right of the fluctuating icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 reserved icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 reserved icons a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 reserved icons b1 to b3 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed facing. The right side of the special figure 1 and 2 reserved icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, in which a character string of "Under preparation" is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, the contents of the effect currently being performed and the contents of the effect not currently being performed may be displayed. FIG. 129 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c.

  FIG. 129 (b), following FIG. 129 (a), shows a balloon display f1 of the main character from the lower part of the screen (the border between the special figure 1 and 2 reserved icon display area 208ab and the effect display area). Is displayed. The balloon display f1 displays a face image of the character of the main building, a character image of the main building displayed above the facial image of the main character, a character string of "morning weather", and a pattern of a sunny mark. This is a display that includes a balloon portion that is located. The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative design. Further, the first display is performed at substantially the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. The first display overlaps the frame portion of the balloon display f1.

  FIG. 129 (c) following FIG. 129 (b) shows a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward on the decorative symbol display device 208, and stops at substantially the center of the screen. This shows the displayed state. Further, the first display is performed at substantially the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. The first display is over the part of the frame part, the whole character string part, the part of the design of the weather mark, the part of the face image of the character of the tongue, and the whole of the character of the tongue in the balloon display f1. I'm wrapping.

  FIG. 129 (d) following FIG. 129 (c) shows, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a button notice display h110 and an operation expiration date display h112 imitating the chance button 136 displayed above the balloon display f1. Shows a state in which a notice effect prompting operation of the chance button 136 is performed. Further, the first display is performed at substantially the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. The first display is over the part of the frame part, the whole character string part, the part of the design of the weather mark, the part of the face image of the character of the tongue, and the whole of the character of the tongue in the balloon display f1. I'm wrapping.

  FIG. 129 (e) following FIG. 129 (d) shows that the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136. In addition, the movement animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is restarted, and the balloon display f2 of the grandfather character is displayed so as to appear from the bottom of the screen. In the balloon display f2, a face image of the grandfather character, a character image of "grandfather" displayed on the face image of the grandfather character, a character string of "daytime weather", and a pattern of a cloudy mark are displayed. This is a display that includes a balloon portion that is located. Further, the first display is performed at substantially the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. The first display overlaps substantially the entire balloon portion of the balloon display f1, a part of the face image of the character of the main hall, a part of the character of the main hall, and a part of the frame of the balloon display f2. .

  129 (f) following FIG. 129 (e) is a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward, and a moving animation in which the balloon display f2 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward. Then, the balloon display f1 is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the screen, and the balloon display f2 shows a state where the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed substantially at the center of the screen. The position where the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed is the position where the balloon display f1 was previously stopped and displayed. Further, the moving speed of the balloon display f1 and the moving speed of the balloon display f2 are configured to be the same, but may be configured to be different. Thus, in this example, the appearing balloon display is configured to be scroll-displayed upward. Further, the first display is performed at substantially the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. The first display is a part of the frame part of the balloon display f1, a part of the pattern of the sunny mark, a part of the face image of the character of the tongue, substantially the entire balloon part of the balloon display f2, the face of the grandfather character. It overlaps part of the image.

  FIG. 129 (g) following FIG. 129 (f) is a position where the scroll display of the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2 is temporarily interrupted in the decorative symbol display device 208, and overlaps with the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2. In addition, a button notice display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 are displayed, indicating a state in which a notice effect for urging the player to operate the chance button 136 is performed. Further, the first display is performed at substantially the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. The first display is a part of the frame part of the balloon display f1, a part of the pattern of the sunny mark, a substantially entire part of the balloon part of the balloon display f2, a part of the face image of the grandfather character, and a button notice display. h110 and the entire operation expiration date display h112.

  FIG. 129 (h) subsequent to FIG. 129 (g) shows that when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. At the same time as the movement animation in which the balloon displays f1 and f2 move upward at the same speed, a balloon display f3 of the princess character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. The balloon display f3 displays a princess character face image, a character image of "princess" displayed on the face image of the princess character, a character string of "afternoon weather", and a picture of a rain mark. This is a display including a balloon portion that is open. Further, the balloon display f1 is erased so as to protrude from the upper end of the screen. Further, the first display is performed at substantially the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. The first display overlaps substantially the entire balloon portion of the balloon display f2, part of the face image of the old man character, part of the frame portion of the balloon display f3, and part of the character image of "princess". I have.

  129 (i) following FIG. 129 (h) is a moving animation in which the balloon display f2 moves upward, and a moving animation in which the balloon display f3 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward. The balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at the top of the screen, and the balloon display f3 shows a state where the balloon display f3 is stopped and displayed substantially at the center of the screen. The position where the balloon display f3 is stopped and displayed is the position where the balloon display f2 was previously stopped and displayed. Further, the moving speed of the balloon display f2 and the moving speed of the balloon display f3 are configured to be the same, but may be configured to be different. Further, the first display is performed at substantially the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. The first display is a part of the frame part of the balloon display f2, a part of the pattern of the cloudy mark, a part of the face image of the old man character, a part of the frame part of the balloon display f3, the whole character string, the rain mark. , And part of the face image of the princess character overlaps with the entire character image of "princess".

  In this example, the balloon display is configured to move when the first display is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, but only when the first display is not displayed. May be configured to move. In addition, the first display is a hold display, a hold icon, a change icon, a notice icon, an icon area display, a decorative pattern, a fourth pattern, a mini decorative pattern, a notice display, a pre-read notice display, a tutorial display, a pseudo continuous display, and a reach. Display, right-handed display, left-handed display, character display, background display, big hit display, round display, big bonus display, AR display, RT display, consecutive play count display, acquired ball count display, acquired number display, volume adjustment display, The display may be at least one of the light amount adjustment display, the button press display, the error display, the ball empty display, the door open display, and the abnormality occurrence display.

The effect of this example may be used as a pre-reading notice or may be used as a notice of the change. Further, when the effect of the present example is performed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is finally displayed more easily than in the case where the effect of the present example is not performed, or the effect of the present example is performed. In this case, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is finally more easily determined and displayed than when any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 116 to 136 is performed.
Next, an example of the effect of the balloon display will be described with reference to FIG.
FIGS. 130 (a) to 130 (h) show an effect example using balloon display step by step.

  FIG. 130 (a) shows the special symbol 1 reserved number aa1, the special symbol 4 fourth symbol aa2, the special symbol 2 reserved number aa3, the special symbol 2 fourth symbol aa4, The number of ordinary symbols aa5 and the fourth symbol aa6 of the ordinary symbols are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuating icon display area 280 for displaying a fluctuating icon display, and the fluctuating icon display area 280 displays a fluctuating icon ad1 in a default mode. To the right of the fluctuating icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 reserved icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 reserved icons a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 reserved icons b1 to b3 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed facing. The right side of the special figure 1 and 2 reserved icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, in which a character string of "Under preparation" is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, the contents of the effect currently being performed and the contents of the effect not currently being performed may be displayed. FIG. 130 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol change display is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c.

  FIG. 130 (b), following FIG. 130 (a), shows a balloon display f1 ′ by the character of the tongue from the lower part of the screen (the border between the special figure 1 and 2 reserved icon display area 208ab and the effect display area). Is displayed in. The balloon display f1 ′ displays a face image of the character of the tongue, a character image of “dono” displayed on the face image of the tongue character, and a character string and a pattern of “pseudo ream chance”! This is a display including a balloon. The balloon display f1 'is displayed so as to overlap the decorative design.

  FIG. 130 (c) following FIG. 130 (b) shows a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 ′ appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward on the decorative symbol display device 208, and stops at the approximate center of the screen. Indicates the state displayed. Further, a special figure 1 hold icon a4 is newly displayed in the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab.

  FIG. 130 (d), which follows FIG. 130 (c), shows a button notice display h110 and an operation expiration date display h112 imitating the chance button 136 above the balloon display f1 ′ on the decorative symbol display device 208, This shows a state in which a notice effect prompting the user to operate the chance button 136 has been performed.

  FIG. 130 (e), which follows FIG. 130 (d), clears the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136. In addition, a balloon display f2 'by the grandfather character is displayed so as to appear from the bottom of the screen, and an animation in which the balloon display f1' moves upward is displayed. The balloon display f2 ′ includes a face image of the grandfather character, a character image of “grandfather” displayed above the face image of the grandfather character, a character string of “hold change”, and a pattern of a cloudy mark. This is a display that includes a balloon portion that is located.

  FIG. 130 (f), following FIG. 130 (e), shows a movement animation in which the balloon display f1 ′ moves upward and a balloon display f2 ′ appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward. The animation is performed, the balloon display f1 'is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the screen, and the balloon display f2' shows a state where the balloon is stopped and displayed substantially at the center of the screen. The position where the balloon display f2 'is stopped and displayed is the position where the balloon display f1' was previously stopped and displayed. Further, the moving speed of the balloon display f1 'and the moving speed of the balloon display f2' are configured to be the same, but may be configured to be different.

  FIG. 130 (g) following FIG. 130 (f) shows a state in which the pattern of the cloudy mark displayed in the balloon display f2 ′ is moving toward the special figure 1 and 2 reserved icon display area 280ab. I have.

  FIG. 130 (h), following FIG. 130 (g), shows the pattern of the cloudy mark displayed in the balloon display f2 ′ as the special figure 1 reservation icon a4 instead of the special form 1 reservation icon a4 in the default mode. Have been. Thereafter, the balloon displays f1 'and f2' may be erased and the SP reach effect or the full rotation reach effect may be started, or an animation in which the hold icon or the change icon changes may be performed. Is also good.

The effect of this example is an example in which a continuous notice is provided by a balloon display f1 'and a balloon display f2'. The balloon display f1 'is used for advance notice of the change, and the balloon display f2' is used for advance notice. In addition, in this example, the pattern of the cloudy mark displayed inside the balloon portion of the balloon display is moved and displayed as a hold icon. The notice icon used may be moved to the inside of the balloon and displayed, or the icon displayed inside the balloon may be overwritten with the notice icon. Further, when the effect of the present example is performed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is finally displayed more easily than in the case where the effect of the present example is not performed, or the effect of the present example is performed. In this case, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is finally more easily determined and displayed than when any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 116 to 136 is performed.
Next, an example of the effect of the balloon display will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIGS. 131 (a) to 131 (i) show an effect example using balloon display step by step. In FIGS. 131 to 133, a sub liquid crystal a208 is provided on the left side of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a sub liquid crystal b208 is provided on the right side.

  FIG. 131 (a) shows the sub-liquid crystal a208 in which the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the fourth figure aa2 of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the fourth figure aa4 of the special figure 2, the general figure reservation number aa5, The fourth symbol aa6 of the ordinary figure is displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuating icon display area 280 for displaying a fluctuating icon display, and the fluctuating icon display area 280 displays a fluctuating icon ad1 in a default mode. To the right of the fluctuating icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 reserved icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 reserved icons a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 reserved icons b1 to b3 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed facing. The right side of the special figure 1 and 2 reserved icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, in which a character string of "Under preparation" is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, the contents of the effect currently being performed and the contents of the effect not currently being performed may be displayed. FIG. 131 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c.

  FIG. 131 (b), following FIG. 131 (a), shows a balloon display from the lower part of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 (the boundary between the special figure 1 and 2 reserved icon display area 208ab and the effect display area) by the character of the main building. At the same time as a part of f1 is displayed so as to appear, the balloon is blown out from the lower part of the screen of the sub liquid crystal a208 (the part having the same height as the boundary between the special figure 1 and 2 reserved icon display area 208ab and the effect display area). The other part of the display f1 is displayed so as to appear. A part of the balloon display f1 is a balloon part in which a character string of “morning weather is” and a pattern of a sunny mark are displayed, and another part of the balloon display f1 is a face image of the character of the house and the house. The character image of "dono" displayed on the face image of the character and a part of the balloon portion correspond to the character image.

  FIG. 131 (c), which follows FIG. 131 (b), shows that a part of the balloon display f1 in the decorative symbol display device 208 and another part of the balloon display f1 in the sub liquid crystal a208 are simultaneously directed upward. This shows a state in which a moving animation for moving is displayed and stopped at approximately the center of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 or the sub liquid crystal a208.

  FIG. 131 (d), which follows FIG. 131 (c), shows a button notice display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 above the balloon display f1 on the decorative symbol display device 208. Shows a state in which a notice effect prompting operation of the chance button 136 is performed.

  FIG. 131 (e), which follows FIG. 131 (d), shows that when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button notice display h110 and the operation validity are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The term display h112 is deleted, a part of the balloon display f2 by the grandfather character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen, and an animation is displayed in which a part of the balloon display f1 moves upward. Further, in the sub liquid crystal b208, another part of the balloon display f2 appears from the lower part of the screen of the sub liquid crystal b208 (the portion having the same height as the boundary between the special figure 1 and 2 reserved icon display area 208ab and the effect display area). It is displayed to be. A part of the balloon display f2 is a balloon part in which a character string of "morning weather" and a pattern of a cloudy mark are displayed, and another part of the balloon display f2 is a face image of the grandfather character and the grandfather. The character image of "grandfather" displayed on the face image of the character and a part of the balloon portion correspond to the character image.

  FIG. 131 (f) following FIG. 131 (e) shows, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a moving animation in which a part of the balloon display f1 moves upward, and a balloon display f2 appearing from the lower part of the screen. Shows a state in which part of the balloon display f1 is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the screen, and part of the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed substantially at the center of the screen. ing. The position where a part of the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed is a position where a part of the balloon display f1 is stopped and displayed before this. Further, the moving speed of the balloon display f1 and the moving speed of the balloon display f2 are configured to be the same, but may be configured to be different. Further, in the sub liquid crystal a208, a moving animation in which another part of the balloon display f1 moves upward is performed to stop the display at the top of the screen, and in the sub liquid crystal b208, another part of the balloon display f2 is displayed. A moving animation that moves upward is performed and stopped at the bottom of the screen.

    FIG. 131 (g) following FIG. 131 (f) shows a button notice display h110 and an operation expiration date display h112 at a position where a part of the balloon display f1 and a part of f2 are overlapped on the decorative symbol display device 208. Is displayed.

  FIG. 131 (h), which follows FIG. 131 (g), shows that when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button notice display h110 and the operation validity are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The term display h112 is deleted, an animation of a part of the balloon display f2 moving upward is displayed, and a part of the balloon display f3 is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. In the sub liquid crystal display b208, another part of the balloon display f1 is erased so as to protrude from the upper end of the screen, and the balloon display f3 is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. Also, on the sub liquid crystal c208, an animation is displayed in which another part of the balloon display f2 moves upward. A part of the balloon display f3 is a balloon part in which a character string “Afternoon Weather” and a pattern of a rain mark are displayed, and another part of the balloon display f3 is a face image of a princess character and a princess. The character image of "Princess" displayed on the face image of the character and a part of the balloon portion correspond to the character image.

  FIG. 131 (i) following FIG. 131 (h) shows, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a moving animation in which a part of the balloon display f2 moves upward, and a balloon display f3 appearing from the lower part of the screen. Shows a state in which part of the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at the top of the screen, and part of the balloon display f3 is stopped and displayed substantially at the center of the screen. ing. The position where a part of the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed is a position where a part of the balloon display f1 is stopped and displayed before this. Further, the moving speed of the balloon display f2 and the moving speed of the balloon display f3 are configured to be the same, but may be configured to be different. In the sub liquid crystal b208, a moving animation in which the other part of the balloon display f2 moves upward is performed to stop the display at the top of the screen, and in the sub liquid crystal a208, another part of the balloon display f3 is displayed. A moving animation of moving upward is performed, and stopped and displayed at approximately the center of the screen.

The effect of this example may be used as a pre-reading notice or may be used as a notice of the change. Further, when the effect of the present example is performed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is finally displayed more easily than in the case where the effect of the present example is not performed, or the effect of the present example is performed. In this case, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is finally more easily determined and displayed than when any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 116 to 136 is performed.
Next, an example of the effect of the balloon display will be described with reference to FIG.
FIGS. 132 (a) to 132 (i) show an effect example using balloon display step by step.

  FIG. 132 (a) shows the sub-liquid crystal a208 in which the special figure 1 reserved number aa1, the fourth figure aa2 of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 reserved number aa3, the fourth figure aa4 of the special figure 2, the regular figure reserved number aa5, The fourth symbol aa6 of the ordinary figure is displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuating icon display area 280 for displaying a fluctuating icon display, and the fluctuating icon display area 280 displays a fluctuating icon ad1 in a default mode. To the right of the fluctuating icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 reserved icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 reserved icons a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 reserved icons b1 to b3 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed facing. The right side of the special figure 1 and 2 reserved icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, in which a character string of "Under preparation" is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, the contents of the effect currently being performed and the contents of the effect not currently being performed may be displayed. FIG. 132 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol change display is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c.

  FIG. 132 (b), following FIG. 132 (a), is a balloon display by the character of the tongue from the lower part of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 (the boundary between the special figure 1 and 2 reserved icon display area 208ab and the effect display area). f1 is displayed so as to appear. The balloon display f1 displays a face image of the character of the main building, a character image of the main building displayed above the facial image of the main character, a character string of "morning weather", and a pattern of a sunny mark. This is a display that includes a balloon portion that is located. The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative design.

  FIG. 132 (c) following FIG. 132 (b) shows a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward on the decorative symbol display device 208, and stops at substantially the center of the screen. This shows the displayed state.

  FIG. 132 (d), which follows FIG. 132 (c), displays a button notice display h110 and an operation expiration date display h112 imitating the chance button 136 above the balloon display f1 on the decorative symbol display device 208. Shows a state in which a notice effect prompting operation of the chance button 136 is performed.

  FIG. 132 (e) following FIG. 132 (d) shows that the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased by the player pressing the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136. A balloon display f2 by the grandfather character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen, and an animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is displayed.

  FIG. 132 (f) subsequent to FIG. 132 (e) shows, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward, and the balloon display f2 appearing from the lower part of the screen is displayed upward. A moving animation of moving toward the camera is performed, and a balloon display f1 is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the screen, and a balloon display f2 shows a state where the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed substantially at the center of the screen. The position where the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed is the position where the balloon display f1 was previously stopped and displayed. Further, the moving speed of the balloon display f1 and the moving speed of the balloon display f2 are configured to be the same, but may be configured to be different. Thus, in this example, the appearing balloon display is configured to be scroll-displayed upward.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 following FIG. 132 (f), FIG. 132 (g) temporarily suspends scroll display of the balloon displays f1 and f2 in the decorative symbol display device 208, and displays the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2. A button notice display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 are displayed at positions where the chance button 136 is overlapped, and a state in which a notice effect for urging the player to operate the chance button 136 is performed.

  FIG. 132 (h), following FIG. 132 (g), shows that the player presses the chance button 136 within the expiration date of the operation of the chance button 136, thereby displaying the button notice h110 and the operation validity on the decorative symbol display device 208. The term display h112 is deleted, a balloon display f3 of the princess character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen, and an animation in which the balloon display f2 moves upward is displayed. Also, from the upper end of the sub liquid crystal b208, the balloon display f1 that has already been erased is displayed so as to appear in a reduced size according to the size of the sub liquid crystal b208.

  132 (i) following FIG. 132 (h), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the animation of moving upward on the balloon displays f2 and f3 is continuously performed, and in the sub liquid crystal b208, the balloon display f1 is displayed. Is moved downward, and a balloon is displayed below the sub liquid crystal b208 so as to accumulate. As described above, the effect of this example is an effect in which the balloon display erased in the decorative symbol display device 208 is stored in the sub liquid crystal b208. When the sub liquid crystal b208 is full of balloon displays, old balloon displays may be deleted, new balloon displays may be deleted, or all balloon displays may be deleted. The half balloon display may be deleted.

The effect of this example may be used as a pre-reading notice or may be used as a notice of the change. Further, when the effect of the present example is performed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is finally displayed more easily than in the case where the effect of the present example is not performed, or the effect of the present example is performed. In this case, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is finally more easily determined and displayed than when any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 116 to 136 is performed. Further, in this example, the balloon display f1 displayed on the sub liquid crystal b208 is configured to be smaller than the balloon display f1 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, but the balloon display f1 displayed on the sub liquid crystal b208 is decorated. The balloon display f1 displayed on the symbol display device 208 may be configured to be larger than the balloon display f1, or may be configured to have the same size.
Next, an example of the effect of the balloon display will be described with reference to FIG.
FIGS. 133 (a) to 133 (m) show an effect example using balloon display step by step.

  FIG. 133 (a) shows the sub-liquid crystal a208 in which the special figure 1 reserved number aa1, the fourth figure aa2 of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 reserved number aa3, the fourth figure aa4 of the special figure 2, the reserved figure aa5, The fourth symbol aa6 of the ordinary figure is displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuating icon display area 280 for displaying a fluctuating icon display, and the fluctuating icon display area 280 displays a fluctuating icon ad1 in a default mode. To the right of the fluctuating icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 reserved icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 reserved icons a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 reserved icons b1 to b3 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed facing. The right side of the special figure 1 and 2 reserved icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, in which a character string of "Under preparation" is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, the contents of the effect currently being performed and the contents of the effect not currently being performed may be displayed. FIG. 133 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c.

  FIG. 133 (b) following FIG. 133 (a) shows the character from the lower part of the screen of the sub liquid crystal b208 (from the same height as the border between the special figure 1 and 2 reserved icon display area 208ab and the effect display area). The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to appear. The balloon display f1 displays a face image of the character of the main building, a character image of the main building displayed above the facial image of the main character, a character string of "morning weather", and a pattern of a sunny mark. This is a display that includes a balloon portion that is located.

  FIG. 133 (c) subsequent to FIG. 133 (b) shows a state in which a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward on the sub liquid crystal b208.

  FIG. 133 (d) subsequent to FIG. 133 (c) shows a state in which the decoration pattern display device 208 has stopped the display of "decoration 3-decoration 8-decoration 4". Also, while the stop display is being displayed, the movement of the balloon display f1 of the sub liquid crystal b208 is also stopped.

  In FIG. 133 (e) following FIG. 133 (d), the next variation is started, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the decorative symbol variation display. In the sub liquid crystal b208, the moving animation of the balloon display f1 has been started.

  FIG. 133 (f), following FIG. 133 (e), shows an animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward in the sub-liquid crystal b208, and the balloon display f2 appearing from the lower part of the screen faces upward. The moving animation to move is performed. Thus, in this example, the appearing balloon display is configured to be scroll-displayed upward.

  In FIG. 133 (g) subsequent to FIG. 133 (f), scroll display of balloon displays f1 and f2 is continuously performed on the sub liquid crystal b208.

  In FIG. 133 (h) subsequent to FIG. 133 (g), scroll display of balloon displays f1 and f2 is continuously performed on the sub liquid crystal b208.

  FIG. 133 (i) subsequent to FIG. 133 (h) shows a state where the decoration pattern display device 208 has stopped the display of “decoration 2-decoration 8-decoration 9”. In FIG. 133 (h), the scroll display of the balloon displays f1 and f2 is continuously performed on the sub liquid crystal b208 even during the stop display of the decorative symbol, and the balloon display f3 is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. .

  In FIG. 133 (j), following FIG. 133 (i), the next variation is started, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the decorative symbol variation display, and the sub liquid crystal b208 scrolls the balloon displays f1 to f3. Has been ongoing.

  FIG. 133 (k) following FIG. 133 (j) shows that the scroll display of the balloon displays f1 to f3 is continuously performed on the sub liquid crystal b208, and the balloon display f6 is displayed from the lower part of the screen. I have. The balloon display f6 is a character image of “Chibihime”, a character image of “Chibihime” displayed on the face image of the character of Chibihime, and a character string of “Is the weather in the evening?” This is a display including a balloon portion in which a picture of a sunny mark is displayed. The balloon display f6 of the present example is a display used as a notice that a reach is performed in the fluctuation.

  133 (l) following FIG. 133 (k), scroll display of balloon displays f1 to f3 and f6 is continuously performed on sub liquid crystal b208, balloon display f1 is erased from the upper end of the screen, and the lower part of the screen is displayed. The scroll display of the balloon displays f2, f3, and f6 has been interrupted or ended at the stage when the entire balloon display f6 appearing from is displayed.

  FIG. 133 (m) following FIG. 133 (l) shows a state in which the reach effect of “decoration 4” is being performed on the decorative symbol display device 208. As described above, the present example is an example in which the balloon display is continuously displayed over a plurality of fluctuations. Further, even during the stop display of the decorative symbol, the effect of the balloon display may be continuously performed by the sub liquid crystal.

  The effect of this example may be used as a prefetch notice. Further, when the effect of the present example is performed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is finally displayed more easily than in the case where the effect of the present example is not performed, or the effect of the present example is performed. In this case, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is finally more easily determined and displayed than when any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 116 to 136 is performed.

  FIG. 134 shows step by step two examples of the effect using the hold icon. FIG. 134 shows an example of pattern 1 for performing the effects of FIGS. 134 (i) to (k) after FIGS. 134 (a) to (h) and FIG. 134 (i ′) after FIGS. 134 (a) to (h). 9 shows an example of a pattern 2 for performing the effects (1) to (1 ′).

<Example of Pattern 1>
Hereinafter, an example of pattern 1 of the present effect example will be described with reference to FIGS. 134 (a) to 134 (k).

  FIG. 134 (a) shows the special figure 1 reserved number aa1, the fourth figure aa2 of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 reserved number aa3, the fourth figure aa4 of the special figure 2, The number of ordinary symbols aa5 and the fourth symbol aa6 of the ordinary symbols are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuating icon display area 280 for displaying a fluctuating icon display, and the fluctuating icon display area 280 displays a fluctuating icon ad1 in a default mode. To the right of the fluctuating icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 reserved icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 reserved icons a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 reserved icons b1 to b3 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed facing. The right side of the special figure 1 and 2 reserved icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, in which a character string of "Under preparation" is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, the contents of the effect currently being performed and the contents of the effect not currently being performed may be displayed. FIG. 134 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c.

  FIG. 134 (b), following FIG. 134 (a), shows a balloon display f1 of the tonomiya character from the lower part of the screen (the border between the special figure 1 and 2 reserved icon display area 208ab and the effect display area). Is displayed. The balloon display f1 displays a face image of the character of the main building, a character image of the main building displayed above the facial image of the main character, a character string of "morning weather", and a pattern of a sunny mark. This is a display that includes a balloon portion that is located. The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative design.

  FIG. 134 (c) following FIG. 134 (b) shows a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward on the decorative symbol display device 208, and stops at approximately the center of the screen. This shows the displayed state.

  FIG. 134 (d), following FIG. 134 (c), shows a button notice display h110 and an operation expiration date display h112 imitating the chance button 136 above the balloon display f1 on the decorative symbol display device 208, and Shows a state in which a notice effect prompting operation of the chance button 136 is performed.

  FIG. 134 (e), following FIG. 134 (d), clears the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136. The second balloon display f1 is displayed so as to appear from the bottom of the screen, and an animation is displayed in which the two balloon displays f1 move upward. Note that three or more same balloon displays may be continuous.

  In FIG. 134 (f) following FIG. 134 (e), a moving animation in which both balloon displays f1 move upward is performed. Thus, in this example, the appearing balloon display is configured to be scroll-displayed upward.

  FIG. 134 (g), following FIG. 134 (f), shows a chance button 136 at the position where the scroll display of the double balloon display f1 is temporarily interrupted and overlapped with the double balloon display f1 in the decorative symbol display device 208. The displayed button notice h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are displayed, indicating a state in which a notice effect for urging the player to operate the chance button 136 is performed.

  FIG. 134 (h), following FIG. 134 (g), clears the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136. An animation in which the two balloon displays f1 move upward is displayed, and immediately before the two balloon displays f1 are erased so as to come out from the upper end of the screen. Also, the balloon display f1b is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. The balloon display f1b includes a face image of the character of the lord and a character image of the lord displayed on the face image of the character of the lord, and the character image of "the lord" What is visible and beneath is something that can be seen intelligently and stupidly. " The balloon portion of the balloon display f1b has a size that does not fit on one screen of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 134 (i) following FIG. 134 (h) shows a state in which the upper end of the balloon display f1b is positioned at the upper end of the screen.

  FIG. 134 (j) subsequent to FIG. 134 (i) shows a state where scroll display of the balloon display f1b is being performed.

  FIG. 134 (k) subsequent to FIG. 134 (j) shows a state where scroll display of the balloon display f1b is performed until the lower end of the balloon display f1b is visually recognized.

<Example of pattern 2>
Hereinafter, an example of pattern 2 of the present effect example will be described with reference to FIGS. 134 (i ′) to (l ′).

  FIG. 134 (i ′) following FIGS. 134 (a) to (h) shows a state in which the scrolling display of the balloon f1b is temporarily stopped. The scroll display of the balloon f1b may be stopped once or plural times.

  FIG. 134 (j ′) following FIG. 134 (i ′) shows a button notice display h110 imitating the chance button 136 on the decorative symbol display device 208, and an operation expiration date display indicating the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 by a gauge. This shows a state where h112 is displayed.

  In FIG. 134 (k ′) following FIG. 134 (j ′), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the scroll display of the balloon part f1b that has been stopped is restarted. You.

  FIG. 134 (l ′) following FIG. 134 (k ′) shows a state in which scroll display of the balloon display f1b is performed until the lower end of the balloon display f1b is visually recognized. Thereafter, the balloon display f1b may be erased and the SP reach effect or the full-rotation reach effect may be started, or an animation in which the hold icon or the change icon changes may be performed. Further, each time the scroll display of the balloon display f1b is stopped, the button announcement effect may be performed, or the button announcement effect may not be performed. In the scroll display of the balloon display f1b, all of the character strings of "When all are above a person, they look foolish but clever, and those underneath are clever and foolish." May be displayed in a scroll or may not be displayed in a scroll. In the case where all the character strings are scroll-displayed, the configuration may be such that the big hit symbol is finally displayed more easily than in the case where all the character strings are not scroll-displayed.

The effect of this example may be used as a pre-reading notice or may be used as a notice of the change. Further, when the effect of the present example is performed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is finally displayed more easily than in the case where the effect of the present example is not performed, or the effect of the present example is performed. In this case, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is finally more easily determined and displayed than when any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 116 to 136 is performed.
Next, an example of the effect of the balloon display will be described with reference to FIG. 135.
FIGS. 135 (a) to 135 (g) show an effect example using balloon display step by step.

  FIG. 135 (a) shows the special figure 1 reserved number aa1, the fourth figure aa2 of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 reserved number aa3, the fourth figure aa4 of the special figure 2, in the left end area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The number of ordinary symbols aa5 and the fourth symbol aa6 of the ordinary symbols are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuating icon display area 280 for displaying a fluctuating icon display, and the fluctuating icon display area 280 displays a fluctuating icon ad1 in a default mode. To the right of the fluctuating icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 reserved icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 reserved icons a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 reserved icons b1 to b3 are alternately arranged from left to right in this order. It is displayed facing. The right side of the special figure 1 and 2 reserved icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, in which a character string of "Under preparation" is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, the contents of the effect currently being performed and the contents of the effect not currently being performed may be displayed. FIG. 135 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c.

  FIG. 135 (b) subsequent to FIG. 135 (a) is displayed such that two balloon displays f1 appear simultaneously from the upper right and lower right of the screen, and an animation of moving to the left at the same speed is displayed. . The balloon display f1 displays a face image of the character of the main building, a character image of the main building displayed above the facial image of the main character, a character string of "morning weather", and a pattern of a sunny mark. This is a display that includes a balloon portion that is located. The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative design. Note that three or more same balloon displays may appear at the same time.

  FIG. 135 (c) following FIG. 135 (b) shows an animation in which balloon displays f2 and f3 appear simultaneously from the right end of the screen on the decorative symbol display device 208, and move to the left at the same speed. Is displayed. Note that two or more different balloon displays may appear at the same time. Also, an animation in which the upper and lower balloon displays f1 move leftward at the same speed has been started.

  In FIG. 135 (d) subsequent to FIG. 135 (c), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs an animation in which the balloon displays f1 to f3 move to the left at the same speed.

  In FIG. 135 (e) subsequent to FIG. 135 (d), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs an animation in which the balloon displays f1 to f3 move to the left at the same speed.

  FIG. 135 (f) following FIG. 135 (e) is an animation in which the balloon displays f1 to f3 move to the left at the same speed in the decorative symbol display device 208, and exit from the left end in the order of appearance. This is the state immediately before erasing. In this example, an animation is performed in which all balloon displays move in the same direction at the same speed, but an animation in which balloon displays move in different directions at different speeds may be performed. Also, the balloon display used for the advance notice of the change or the advance notice may be moved in a different direction from the notice not used for the advance notice of the change or the advance notice, or may be moved at a different speed. There may be cases.

  FIG. 135 (g) following FIG. 135 (f) is an animation in which the balloon displays f1 to f3 move to the left at the same speed in the decorative symbol display device 208, and exit from the left end in the order in which they appeared. This shows the state after erasing. Thereafter, the SP reach effect or the full-rotation reach effect may be started, or an animation in which the hold icon or the change icon changes may be performed. In this example, although the upper balloon display f1 and the lower balloon display f1 that have been simultaneously displayed are simultaneously displayed, one of the upper balloon display f1 and the lower balloon display f1 is earlier than the other. May be terminated, or one of the upper balloon display f1 and the lower balloon display f1 may move faster than the other. Further, the balloon display f2 and the balloon display f3, which have been simultaneously displayed, have been simultaneously terminated, but one of the balloon display f2 and the balloon display f3 may be terminated before the other. One of the display f2 and the balloon display f3 may have a higher moving speed than the other.

The effect of this example may be used as a pre-reading notice or may be used as a notice of the change. Further, when the effect of the present example is performed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is finally displayed more easily than in the case where the effect of the present example is not performed, or the effect of the present example is performed. In this case, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is finally more easily determined and displayed than when any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 116 to 136 is performed.
Next, two examples of the effect example of the balloon display will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 136 (a) is an effect example in which the balloon display f2 is displayed while the balloon display f1 is displayed. The right side of FIG. 136 (a) is an example in which the balloon display f1 is not moved when the balloon display f2 is displayed at a position overlapping the balloon display f1. In this example, since the balloon display f1 overlaps with the balloon display f2, the speech of the character displayed in the balloon display f1 and the speech of the character displayed in the balloon display f2 cannot be visually recognized at the same time.

  FIG. 136 (b) is an effect example in which the balloon display f2 is displayed while the balloon display f1 is displayed. The right side of FIG. 136 (b) is an example of moving the balloon display f1 upward when displaying the balloon display f2 at a position overlapping the balloon display f1. By moving the balloon display f1 upward, it may be possible to simultaneously recognize the words of the character displayed in the balloon display f1 and the characters of the character displayed in the balloon display f2.

  Next, a characteristic configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the embodiment described above will be described.

  (E1) First movable means (for example, movable body 90a) (see, for example, FIG. 86), second movable means (for example, movable body 90b) (for example, see FIG. 86), and first light emitting means (For example, light emitting diodes a22, a32, a33) (see, for example, FIG. 86), and second light emitting means (for example, light emitting diodes a11 to a16, a23, a24) (for example, see FIG. 86). A gaming table, wherein the first movable means is a means having the second movable means (see, for example, FIG. 86), and the first movable means is a means having the first light emitting means (For example, see FIG. 86), and the first movable means is a means having the second light emitting means (for example, see FIG. 86).

  In the first state, one of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means overlaps with the second movable means (see, for example, FIG. 87 (b)), and in the second state, Both the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means do not overlap with the second movable means (see, for example, FIG. 87 (d)), and the light emitting mode of the first light emitting means is the first light emitting means. The light emission mode is the same in both the state (1) and the second state (see, for example, FIGS. 87 (b) and (d)), and the light emission state of the second light emitting means is the first state and the second state. A game console characterized by having the same light emission mode in both of the two states (for example, see FIGS. 87 (b) and 87 (d)).

In some cases, the appearance of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means can be changed, and the interest of the player can be improved.
(E2) the gaming table according to e1,

  In the first state, the first light emitting means can emit light (for example, see FIG. 87 (b)),

In the first state, the first light emitting means is overlapped with the second movable means (for example, see FIG. 87 (b)).
A gaming table characterized by the following.
(E3)
The gaming table according to e1 or e2,

The first light emitting unit is a unit that may be overlapped with a structure (for example, the structure 30c) (see, for example, FIG. 93 (c)).
A gaming table characterized by the following.
(E4)
The gaming table according to any one of e1 to e3,

In the initial state, the first light emitting means overlaps with the second movable means (for example, see FIG. 87 (a)).
A gaming table characterized by the following.
(E5)
The gaming table according to any one of e1 to e4,

The first light emitting unit is a unit that can shift from the initial state to the second state via at least the first state (see, for example, FIGS. 87A to 87D).
A gaming table characterized by the following.
(E6)
The gaming table according to any one of e1 to e5,

  The first movable means has a third light emitting means (for example, light emitting diodes a25, a33, a34),

  The first movable unit is a unit having a third movable unit (for example, a movable body 90c) (for example, see FIG. 86).

  In the first state, the third light emitting means overlaps with the third movable means (see, for example, FIG. 87 (b)),

In the second state, the third light emitting means does not overlap with the third movable means (for example, see FIG. 87 (d)).
A gaming table characterized by the following.
(E7)
The gaming table according to any one of e1 to e6,

  The second movable unit is a unit having a light emitting substrate (for example, an LED substrate 90b2) (for example, see FIG. 86).

In the initial state, the first light emitting means overlaps with the light emitting substrate (for example, see FIG. 87 (a)).
A gaming table characterized by the following.
(E8)
The gaming table according to e7,

In the first state, the first light emitting means may overlap with the light emitting substrate (for example, see FIG. 87 (d)).
A gaming table characterized by the following.
(E9)
The gaming table according to any one of e1 to e8,

  The first movable means is a means having a cover (for example, a cover portion 90a3) (for example, see FIG. 86 (b)).

In the initial state, the first light emitting means is a means that overlaps with the cover (for example, see FIG. 87A).
A gaming table characterized by the following.
(E10)
The gaming table according to any one of e1 to e9,

The first state is a state at a certain timing during the operation of the first movable means (for example, see FIG. 87 (b)).
A gaming table characterized by the following.
(E11)
The gaming table according to any one of e1 to e10,

The second state is a state in which the first movable unit is not operating (for example, see FIGS. 87 (c) to 87 (e)).
A gaming table characterized by the following.
(E12)
The gaming table according to any one of e1 to e11,
A substrate (for example, an LED substrate 90a2) is provided (for example, see FIG. 86B).

  The substrate is a substrate having both the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means (see, for example, FIG. 86 (b)),

A gaming table, wherein the first movable means is a means having the substrate (for example, see FIG. 86 (b)).
(E13)
The gaming table according to any one of e1 to e12,

A game board having a game nail (for example, a game board 125) is provided, and the first movable means is a means operable behind the game board (for example, see FIG. 93).
A gaming table characterized by the following.
(E14)
The gaming table according to any one of e1 to e13,
The gaming table is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).
A gaming table characterized by the following.
(E15)
The gaming table according to any one of e1 to e13,
The gaming table is a slot machine (for example, slot machine 1000).
A gaming table characterized by the following.
In addition,

  The light emitting mode of the first light emitting unit may be the same light emitting mode in both the first state and the second state, and the light emitting mode of the second light emitting unit is the first state and the second state. The light emission mode may be the same in both states.

-The first light emitting means and the second light emitting means may be means covered by the first cover.

-In an initial state, at least one part of one of the first movable means and the second movable means may be overlapped with the structure.

-In an initial state, at least one part of the other of the first movable means and the second movable means may be overlapped with the structure.

The light emitting mode of the first light emitting means may be different between the first state and the second state, or one may be non-light emitting.

The light emitting mode of the second light emitting unit may be different between the first state and the second state, or one may be non-light emitting mode.
-The first light emitting means and the second light emitting means may be covered by different covers.
-The first light emitting means and the second light emitting means may be included in the second movable means.
-The second movable means may be located behind the first movable means.

The second light emitting unit may be a unit that does not overlap with the second movable unit in the initial state, the first state, and the second state.

-Both the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means may be full-color LEDs, both may be single-color LEDs, one may be a single-color LED, the other may be a full-color LED, or one may be A high-brightness LED and the other may be a normal LED.

The display device may include a movable display unit, and the first movable unit may move forward from behind the display unit after the display unit moves.

-A transmission liquid crystal display device may be provided, and the first movable means may operate behind the transmission liquid crystal display device.

-A transparent panel capable of emitting a pattern may be provided, and the first movable means may operate behind the transparent panel.

-At least one of the first movable means and the second movable means may operate after the count notice is counted.

-At least one of the first movable means and the second movable means may operate in response to digestion of the reserve icon indicating operation of the movable object.

-At least one of the first movable means and the second movable means may operate after a notice indicating operation of the movable object.

The operation of the first movable unit, the operation of the second movable unit, the light emission of the first light emitting unit, and the light emission of the second light emitting unit may be performed as a notice or may be performed as a pre-read notice. Good.
(F1)
First movable means (for example, movable body 90a) (see, for example, FIG. 86),
A second movable means (for example, movable body 90b) (see, for example, FIG. 86);

  First light emitting means (for example, light emitting diodes a22, a32, a33) (see, for example, FIG. 86);

Second light emitting means (for example, light emitting diodes a11 to a16, a23, a24) (see, for example, FIG. 86);
A gaming table with

  The first movable means is a means having the second movable means (for example, see FIG. 86).

  The first movable unit is a unit having the first light emitting unit (for example, see FIG. 86),

  The first movable means is a means having the second light emitting means (see, for example, FIG. 86).

  In the first state, one of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means overlaps with the second movable means (for example, see FIG. 87 (b)),

  In the second state, both the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means do not overlap with the second movable means (for example, see FIG. 87 (d)).

  The first light emitting unit is a unit that is covered by a first cover (for example, the cover unit 90a3) (for example, see FIG. 86 (b)).

The second light emitting means is a means covered by the first cover (for example, see FIG. 86 (b)).
A gaming table characterized by the following.

In some cases, the appearance of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means can be changed, and the interest of the player can be improved.
(F2)
The gaming table according to f1,

  In the first state, the first light emitting means can emit light (for example, see FIG. 87 (b)),

In the first state, the first light emitting means is overlapped with the second movable means (for example, see FIG. 87 (b)).
A gaming table characterized by the following.
(F3)
A gaming table according to f1 or f2,

The first light emitting unit is a unit that may be overlapped with a structure (for example, the structure 30c) (see, for example, FIG. 93 (c)).
A gaming table characterized by the following.
(F4)
The gaming table according to any one of f1 to f3,

In the initial state, the first light emitting means overlaps with the second movable means (for example, see FIG. 87 (a)).
A gaming table characterized by the following.
(F5)
The gaming table according to any one of f1 to f4,

The first light emitting unit is a unit that can shift from the initial state to the second state via at least the first state (see, for example, FIGS. 87A to 87D).
A gaming table characterized by the following.
(F6)
The gaming table according to any one of f1 to f5,

  The first movable means has a third light emitting means (for example, light emitting diodes a25, a33, a34),

  The first movable unit is a unit having a third movable unit (for example, a movable body 90c) (for example, see FIG. 86).

  In the first state, the third light emitting means overlaps with the third movable means (see, for example, FIG. 87 (b)),

In the second state, the third light emitting means does not overlap with the third movable means (for example, see FIG. 87 (d)).
A gaming table characterized by the following.
(F7)
The gaming table according to any one of f1 to f6,

  The second movable unit is a unit having a light emitting substrate (for example, an LED substrate 90b2) (for example, see FIG. 86).

In the initial state, the first light emitting means overlaps with the light emitting substrate (for example, see FIG. 87 (a)).
A gaming table characterized by the following.
(F8)
A gaming table according to f7,

In the first state, the first light emitting means may overlap with the light emitting substrate (for example, see FIG. 87 (d)).
A gaming table characterized by the following.
(F9)
The gaming table according to any one of f1 to f8,

  The first movable means is a means having a second cover (for example, the cover portion 90b3) (for example, see FIG. 86 (b)).

In the initial state, the first light emitting means is a means that overlaps with the second cover (for example, see FIG. 87 (a)).
A gaming table characterized by the following.
(F10)
The gaming table according to any one of f1 to f9,

The first state is a state at a certain timing during the operation of the first movable means (for example, see FIG. 87 (b)).
A gaming table characterized by the following.
(F11)
The gaming table according to any one of f1 to f10,

The second state is a state in which the first movable unit is not operating (for example, see FIGS. 87 (c) to 87 (e)).
A gaming table characterized by the following.
(F12) The gaming table according to any one of f1 to f11,
A substrate (for example, an LED substrate 90a2) is provided (for example, see FIG. 86B).

  The substrate is a substrate having both the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means (see, for example, FIG. 86 (b)),

A gaming table, wherein the first movable means is a means having the substrate (for example, see FIG. 86 (b)).
(F13)
The gaming table according to any one of f1 to f12,
A game board having a game nail (for example, a game board 125) is provided,

The first movable means is a means operable behind the game board (for example, see FIG. 93).
A gaming table characterized by the following.
(F14)
The gaming table according to any one of f1 to f13,
The gaming table is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).
A gaming table characterized by the following.
(F15)
The gaming table according to any one of f1 to f13,
The gaming table is a slot machine (for example, slot machine 1000).
A gaming table characterized by the following.
In addition,

The light emitting mode of the first light emitting unit may be the same light emitting mode in both the first state and the second state, and the light emitting mode of the second light emitting unit is the first state and the second state. The light emission mode may be the same in both states.

-The first light emitting means and the second light emitting means may be means covered by the first cover.

-In an initial state, at least one part of one of the first movable means and the second movable means may be overlapped with the structure.

-In an initial state, at least one part of the other of the first movable means and the second movable means may be overlapped with the structure.

The light emitting mode of the first light emitting means may be different between the first state and the second state, or one may be non-light emitting.

The light emitting mode of the second light emitting unit may be different between the first state and the second state, or one may be non-light emitting mode.
-The first light emitting means and the second light emitting means may be covered by different covers.
-The first light emitting means and the second light emitting means may be included in the second movable means.
-The second movable means may be located behind the first movable means.

The second light emitting unit may be a unit that does not overlap with the second movable unit in the initial state, the first state, and the second state.

-Both the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means may be full-color LEDs, both may be single-color LEDs, one may be a single-color LED, the other may be a full-color LED, or one may be A high-brightness LED and the other may be a normal LED.

The display device may include a movable display unit, and the first movable unit may move forward from behind the display unit after the display unit moves.

-A transmission liquid crystal display device may be provided, and the first movable means may operate behind the transmission liquid crystal display device.

-A transparent panel capable of emitting a pattern may be provided, and the first movable means may operate behind the transparent panel.

-At least one of the first movable means and the second movable means may operate after the count notice is counted.

-At least one of the first movable means and the second movable means may operate in response to digestion of the reserve icon indicating operation of the movable object.

-At least one of the first movable means and the second movable means may operate after a notice indicating operation of the movable object.

The operation of the first movable unit, the operation of the second movable unit, the light emission of the first light emitting unit, and the light emission of the second light emitting unit may be performed as a notice or may be performed as a pre-read notice. Good.
(G1)
First movable means (for example, movable body 1);
Second movable means (for example, movable body 1);
A gaming table with

  The first movable means is a means capable of executing a first operation (for example, an operation of moving downward) (for example, see FIG. 83 (c)),

  The second movable unit is a unit capable of executing a second operation (for example, an operation of moving downward) (for example, see FIG. 84 (c)),

  The initial position of the second movable means is located behind the initial position of the first movable means (for example, see FIG. 83 (a)),

The position of the second movable unit that has performed the second operation is located behind the first movable unit that has performed the first operation (for example, see FIG. 85 (c)).
A gaming table characterized by the following.

The appearance of the second movable means can be changed depending on the positional relationship with the first movable means, and the interest of the player can be improved in some cases.
(G2)
The gaming table according to g1,

  The direction in which the first movable means moves in the first operation is the same as the direction in which the second movable means moves in the second operation (for example, see FIG. 85 (c)). A gaming table characterized by the following.

In some cases, the appearance of the second movable means can be changed even during the execution of the second operation.
(G3)
The gaming table according to g1 or g2,

In a state where at least a part of the first movable means and a part of the second movable means overlap in the front-rear direction, another part of the second movable means is visible from the front,
A gaming table characterized by the following.
In some cases, the appearance of the second movable means can be changed.
(G4)
The gaming table according to any one of g1 to g3,
Display means (for example, decorative design display device 208),

The position of the display means is located behind the position of the second movable means that has performed the second operation (for example, see FIG. 85 (c)).
A gaming table characterized by the following.
In some cases, the appearance of the display means can be changed.
(G5)
The gaming table according to g4,

  The display means is a means capable of displaying a first error display (for example, a display of a character string of "Please remove the ball") (see, for example, FIG. 85 (b)).

At least a part of the first error display may be overlapped by at least one of the first movable means and the second movable means (for example, see FIG. 85 (c)).
A gaming table characterized by the following.
In some cases, the appearance of the first error display can be changed.
(G6)
The gaming table according to g5,

The game console according to claim 1, wherein the first error display is a display without a ball (see, for example, FIG. 85 (b)).
In some cases, the appearance of the ball-less display can be changed.
(G7)
The gaming table according to any one of g1 to g6,
The gaming table is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).
A gaming table characterized by the following.
(G8)
The gaming table according to any one of g1 to g5,
The gaming table is a slot machine (for example, slot machine 1000).
A gaming table characterized by the following.
In addition,

The direction in which the first movable means moves in the first operation may be upward, leftward, rightward, or downward, the first operation may be a drop, a component in the front-rear direction, or a left-right direction. Or at least one of the vertical component.

The direction in which the second movable means moves in the second operation may be upward, leftward, rightward, or downward, the first operation may be a drop, a component in the front-rear direction, or a left-right direction. Or at least one of the vertical component.

-Both the first operation and the second operation may be performed simultaneously, one may be performed and then the other may be performed, or only one or the other may be performed.

After both the first operation and the second operation have been performed, both the first movable means and the second movable means may return to the initial position at the same time, and after one returns, the other returns Is also good.

-While one of the first movable means and the second movable means operates and returns to the initial position, the other may operate.

-During the first operation, the LED of the second movable means may perform a light emitting effect, or may perform the same light emitting effect as the LED of the first movable means.

-During the second operation, the LED of the first movable means may perform a light emission effect, or the same light emission effect as the LED of the second movable means may be performed.

-Even when the first movable means is located in front of the second movable means, the LED of the second movable means may perform a light emitting effect, and may perform the same light emitting effect as the LED of the first movable means. Good.
(H1)
First movable means (for example, movable body 90a) (see, for example, FIG. 86),
A second movable means (for example, movable body 90b) (see, for example, FIG. 86);

  First light emitting means (for example, light emitting diodes a22, a32, a33) (see, for example, FIG. 86);

Second light emitting means (for example, light emitting diodes a11 to a16, a23, a24) (see, for example, FIG. 86);
A gaming table with

  The first movable means is a means having the second movable means (for example, see FIG. 86).

  The first movable unit is a unit having the first light emitting unit (for example, see FIG. 86),

  The first movable means is a means having the second light emitting means (see, for example, FIG. 86).

  In the first state, one of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means overlaps with the second movable means (for example, see FIG. 87 (b)),

  In the second state, both the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means do not overlap with the second movable means (for example, see FIG. 87 (d)).

In the initial state, at least a part of one of the first movable means and the second movable means is overlapped with a structure (for example, the structure 30a) (for example, see FIG. 93 (a)). ,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

In some cases, the appearance of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means can be changed, and the interest of the player can be improved.
(H2)
The gaming table according to h1,

  In the first state, the first light emitting means can emit light (for example, see FIG. 87 (b)),

In the first state, the first light emitting means is overlapped with the second movable means (for example, see FIG. 87 (b)).
A gaming table characterized by the following.
(H3)
The gaming table according to h1 or h2,

The first light emitting unit is a unit that may be overlapped with a structure (for example, the structure 30c) (see, for example, FIG. 93 (c)).
A gaming table characterized by the following.
(H4)
The gaming table according to any one of h1 to h3,

In the initial state, the first light emitting means overlaps with the second movable means (for example, see FIG. 87 (a)).
A gaming table characterized by the following.
(H5)
The gaming table according to any one of h1 to h4,

The first light emitting means is means capable of shifting from the initial state to the second state via at least the first state (for example, see FIGS. 87 (a) to 87 (d)). A gaming table.
(H6)
The gaming table according to any one of h1 to h5,

  The first movable means has a third light emitting means (for example, light emitting diodes a25, a33, a34),

  The first movable unit is a unit having a third movable unit (for example, a movable body 90c) (for example, see FIG. 86).

  In the first state, the third light emitting means overlaps with the third movable means (see, for example, FIG. 87 (b)),

In the second state, the third light emitting means does not overlap with the third movable means (for example, see FIG. 87 (d)).
A gaming table characterized by the following.
(H7)
The gaming table according to any one of h1 to h6,

  The second movable unit is a unit having a light emitting substrate (for example, an LED substrate 90b2) (for example, see FIG. 86).

In the initial state, the first light emitting means overlaps with the light emitting substrate (for example, see FIG. 87 (a)).
A gaming table characterized by the following.
(H8)
The gaming table according to h7,

In the first state, the first light emitting means may overlap with the light emitting substrate (for example, see FIG. 87 (d)).
A gaming table characterized by the following.
(H9)
The gaming table according to any one of h1 to h8,

  The first movable unit is a unit having a cover (for example, a cover unit 90a3),

In the initial state, the first light emitting means is a means that overlaps with the cover (for example, see FIG. 87A).
A gaming table characterized by the following.
(H10)
The gaming table according to any one of h1 to h9,

The first state is a state at a certain timing during the operation of the first movable means (for example, see FIG. 87 (b)).
A gaming table characterized by the following.
(H11)
The gaming table according to any one of h1 to h10,

The second state is a state in which the first movable unit is not operating (for example, see FIGS. 87 (c) to 87 (e)).
A gaming table characterized by the following.
(H12)
The gaming table according to any one of h1 to h11,

  A substrate (for example, an LED substrate 90a2) is provided (for example, see FIG. 86 (b)), and the substrate is a substrate having both the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means (for example, FIG. 86). (B)),

A gaming table, wherein the first movable means is a means having the substrate (for example, see FIG. 86 (b)).
(H13)
The gaming table according to any one of h1 to h12,
A game board having a game nail (for example, a game board 125) is provided,

The first movable means is a means operable behind the game board (for example, see FIG. 93).
A gaming table characterized by the following.
(H14)
The gaming table according to any one of h1 to h13,
The gaming table is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).
A gaming table characterized by the following.
(H15)
The gaming table according to any one of h1 to h13,
The gaming table is a slot machine (for example, slot machine 1000).
A gaming table characterized by the following.
In addition,

The light emitting mode of the first light emitting unit may be the same light emitting mode in both the first state and the second state, and the light emitting mode of the second light emitting unit is the first state and the second state. The light emission mode may be the same in both states.

-The first light emitting means and the second light emitting means may be means covered by the first cover.

-In an initial state, at least one part of one of the first movable means and the second movable means may be overlapped with the structure.

-In an initial state, at least one part of the other of the first movable means and the second movable means may be overlapped with the structure.

The light emitting mode of the first light emitting means may be different between the first state and the second state, or one may be non-light emitting.

The light emitting mode of the second light emitting unit may be different between the first state and the second state, or one may be non-light emitting mode.
-The first light emitting means and the second light emitting means may be covered by different covers.
-The first light emitting means and the second light emitting means may be included in the second movable means.
-The second movable means may be located behind the first movable means.

The second light emitting unit may be a unit that does not overlap with the second movable unit in the initial state, the first state, and the second state.

-Both the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means may be full-color LEDs, both may be single-color LEDs, one may be a single-color LED, the other may be a full-color LED, or one may be A high-brightness LED and the other may be a normal LED.

The display device may include a movable display unit, and the first movable unit may move forward from behind the display unit after the display unit moves.

-A transmission liquid crystal display device may be provided, and the first movable means may operate behind the transmission liquid crystal display device.

-A transparent panel capable of emitting a pattern may be provided, and the first movable means may operate behind the transparent panel.

-At least one of the first movable means and the second movable means may operate after the count notice is counted.

-At least one of the first movable means and the second movable means may operate in response to digestion of the reserve icon indicating operation of the movable object.

-At least one of the first movable means and the second movable means may operate after a notice indicating operation of the movable object.

The operation of the first movable means, the operation of the second movable means, the light emission of the first light emitting means, and the light emission of the second light emitting means may be performed as a notice or may be performed as a pre-read notice. Good.
(I1)
Display means (for example, decorative symbol display device 208);
A structure (eg, structure 247);
A gaming table with

  The display unit is a unit capable of displaying a first display (for example, a character display SB of Sabohani) at a first position (for example, a lower center of a display area) (for example, see FIG. 95 (c)).

  At least a part of the structure is located at a position overlapping with a part of the display means (for example, see FIG. 95).

The first display displayed at the first position is a display that may overlap the structure (for example, see FIG. 95 (c)).
A gaming table characterized by the following.

In some cases, it is possible to provide a player with the pleasure of playing by changing the direction in which the player views the gaming table, thereby improving the interest of the player.
(I2)
The gaming table according to i1,
The structure is a movable structure (for example, see FIG. 104),

The first display displayed at the first position is a display that does not overlap with the structure after the movement of the structure,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

In some cases, the appearance of the first display can be changed, and the interest of the player can be improved.
(I3)
A gaming table according to i1 or i2,
The display means is a movable display means,

The first display displayed at the first position is a display that does not overlap with the structure after the movement of the display unit,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

In some cases, the appearance of the first display can be changed, and the interest of the player can be improved.
(I4)
The gaming table according to any one of i1 to i3,

  The display means is a means capable of displaying the first display at a second position (for example, a central portion of a display area),

  The gaming table, wherein the first display displayed at the second position is a display that does not overlap with the structure (for example, see FIG. 95 (e)).

In some cases, the appearance of the first display can be changed, and the interest of the player can be improved.
(I5)
The gaming table according to i4,

The first display may be displayed at the second position after being displayed at the first position (for example, see FIG. 95).
A gaming table characterized by the following.

In some cases, the appearance of the first display can be changed, and the interest of the player can be improved.
(I6)
The gaming table according to any one of i1 to i5,
The first display is a notice display (for example, see FIG. 95).
A gaming table characterized by the following.

In some cases, the appearance of the notice display can be changed, and the interest of the player can be improved.
(I7)
The gaming table according to any one of i1 to i6,
The gaming table is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).
A gaming table characterized by the following.
(I8)
The gaming table according to any one of i1 to i6,
The gaming table is a slot machine (for example, slot machine 1000).
A gaming table characterized by the following.
In addition,

-The first display may be a pre-reading notice display, may be a display including characters, may be an icon display, may be a hold icon display, or may be a variable icon display. , Character display, or error display.

-The first display displayed at the second position may overlap the structure.

-The first display displayed at the second position may overlap the structure after the movement of the display means.

-The structure may include a display means, may include an LED substrate, and may be movable.
-The display means may be movable.

The structure may be a transmissive liquid crystal device, and the first display may be performed at the rear during the display of the transmissive liquid crystal display.

The structure may be a light-emitting panel, and the first display may be performed at the rear during the light-emitting display of the light-emitting panel.
(Drawings)

An example in which the advance notice is moved from the first position where the structure is overlapped to the second position where the notice is not overlapped; andthe second position where the notice is not overlapped from the first position where the structure is overlapped with the structure. Example of moving to the first position again after moving to

Moving the notice indicator from the first position overlapping the structure to the second position not overlapping and then moving to the third position overlapping the other structure

-An example in which the notice display is moved from the fourth position where the structure does not overlap to the first position where the notice display is overlapped to a fifth position where the notice display is not overlapped-An example where the notice display is always partially visible

An example in which the notice is displayed at a first position where the notice is overlapped with the structure and another notice is moved to a second position where the notice is not overlapped.The notice is displayed at the second position and another notice is displayed. Example of the display moving to the first position

-An example in which the notice display is moved from the first position where the structure is overlapped to the second position where it is not overlapped, and the effect display is seen first.

-An example in which the notice is given before the notice is displayed at the first position where the notice overlaps the structure, and an example in which the notice appears to be enlarged

An example in which the advance notice is displayed at the second position, and the advance notice at the second position is hidden by the movement of the structure or the movement of the display means (j1)

A game console provided with display means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208) capable of displaying the decorative symbol variable display,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of icons,
One of the plurality of icons is a hold icon,

  During the display of the decorative design variation display, an animation by the icon (hereinafter, referred to as a “first animation” (for example, a moving animation of the notice display m1)) may be displayed.

After the display of the first animation, a first effect display (for example, an effect of pseudo continuous fluctuation) may be performed in the decorative symbol change display (for example, see FIG. 106).
A gaming table characterized by the following.

In some cases, the decorative symbol variation display can attract the player's attention, and can enhance the interest of the player.
(J2)
The gaming table according to j1,
The display means is a means capable of displaying the hold icon as a change icon,
A gaming table characterized by the following.
In some cases, the behavior of the hold icon and the change icon can be enjoyed.
(J3)
The gaming table according to j1 or j2,

The first animation is an animation including a change display of the icon (for example, see FIGS. 115 (f) and (g)).
A gaming table characterized by the following.
In some cases, you can enjoy the behavior of icons.
(J4)
The gaming table according to any one of j1 to j3,

The game console according to claim 1, wherein the first animation is an animation including a moving display of the icon (for example, see FIGS. 106 (f) to (i)).
In some cases, you can enjoy the behavior of icons.
(J5)
The gaming table according to any one of j1 to j4,

The first animation is an animation including a reduced display of the icon (for example, see FIGS. 106 (f) and (g)).
A gaming table characterized by the following.
In some cases, you can enjoy the behavior of icons.
(J6)
The gaming table according to any one of j1 to j5,

The first animation is an animation including an increase display of the icon (for example, see FIGS. 106 (j) and (k)).
A gaming table characterized by the following.
In some cases, you can enjoy the behavior of icons.
(J7)
The gaming table according to j6,

In some cases, the increase display of one icon may be displayed a plurality of times (for example, see FIG. 110).
A gaming table characterized by the following.
In some cases, the behavior of one icon can be more enjoyed.
(J8)
The gaming table according to any one of j1 to j7,

The first effect display is a pseudo continuous change display in the decorative design change display (for example, see FIG. 106 (h)).
A gaming table characterized by the following.
There is a case where the player's attention can be attracted to the decorative symbol change display.
(J9)
The gaming table according to any one of j1 to j8,

The first effect display is a reach variation display in the decorative design variation display (for example, see FIG. 112 (j)).
A gaming table characterized by the following.
There is a case where the player's attention can be attracted to the decorative symbol change display.
(J10)
The gaming table according to any one of j1 to j9,

The gaming console, wherein the first effect display is an operation effect display in the decorative symbol change display.
There is a case where the player's attention can be attracted to the decorative symbol change display.
(J11)
The gaming table according to any one of j1 to j10,

  The first animation is displayed when the icon is displayed in an icon display area (for example, special figure 1 or 2 reserved icon display area 208ab) (for example, see FIG. 107 (f)).

During at least a part of the display period of the first animation, another display (for example, an icon in which a character string of “under preparation” is displayed) may be displayed in the icon display area (for example, FIG. 107 (g)),
A gaming table characterized by the following.
There are cases where the display of the icon display area can attract the player's attention.
(J12)
The gaming table according to any one of j1 to j11,

  During the display of the decorative design variation display, an animation using two or more icons (hereinafter, referred to as “second animation”) may be displayed (for example, see FIG. 115 (f)).

After the display of the second animation, the first effect display may be performed in the decorative symbol change display (for example, see FIG. 115 (h)).
A gaming table characterized by the following.
In some cases, the behavior of two or more icons can be more enjoyed.
(J13)
The gaming table according to any one of j1 to j12,
The gaming table is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).
A gaming table characterized by the following.
In addition,

・ The icon may be moved and nothing may be displayed in the original icon display area, a temporary icon display may be displayed instead, or another icon may be moved (filled) and displayed. You may.

-When an icon is moved and displayed again (returned display) in the original icon display area after moving, an increase display may be performed, a display may be displayed so as to overlap another icon display, or another icon display may be performed. May be displayed so as to be rejected.

-After the first animation, the decorative symbol may change, may be erased (destructed), may shift from the fluctuation display to the fluctuation display, or temporarily stop the special symbol in the middle symbol. Is also good.
-The first effect display need not be performed after the first animation.
-A plurality of first animations may be performed during one decoration pattern change display.

A plurality of first animations may be performed with one icon during a plurality of decorative symbol change displays.

An icon with a high degree of expectation may be easier to perform the first animation than an icon with a low degree of expectation, or vice versa.

The first animation may be easier to perform in the case of a full hold, or may be reversed in the case of a non-full hold.
-An advance notice indicating that the first animation is performed may be displayed.

A count announcement display (timer effect) indicating the start time of the first animation may be performed. The first animation may be performed when an icon (mini item) different from the hold icon or the change icon is consumed.

The first animation may be performed when the result of the mini game is the first result.
(Drawings)

106 to 115 are examples in which the holding icon collides with the middle symbol of the decorative symbol during the swinging of the missing symbol, and the decorative symbol variation display changes again (pseudo-run).

FIG. 107 shows an example in which a temporary icon is displayed on the pedestal while the pending icon is moving. FIG. 108 shows an example in which the back icon returns to the original position when the back icon is moved back while the holding icon is moving.
FIG. 109 is an example of a gassed effect that does not develop even if the hold icon collides.

FIG. 110 shows an example in which the same icon performs the first animation a plurality of times with one change.

FIG. 111 is an example in which different hold icons perform the first animation with one change.
FIG. 112 shows an example of reaching after the first animation of the hold icon.
FIG. 113 is an example in which the fluctuating icon hits the middle symbol of the decorative symbol.

FIG. 114 is an example in which the same hold icon collides with a plurality of changes and develops into reach.

FIG. 115 is an example in which a plurality of hold icons simultaneously hit a decorative symbol and reach.
(K1)
A game console provided with display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208),
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of displays,

  One of the plurality of displays is a first balloon display (for example, balloon display f1) (for example, see FIG. 117 (f)),

  One of the plurality of displays is a second balloon display (for example, balloon display f2) (for example, see FIG. 117 (f)).

  While the first balloon display is being displayed in the first display area, the display of the second balloon display may be started (for example, see FIG. 117 (e)).

At least a part of the first display area may overlap with at least a part of the second balloon display (for example, see FIG. 117 (e)).
A gaming table characterized by the following.

Since the player can visually recognize the second balloon display without changing his line of sight, the player can concentrate on the game and improve the interest of the player.
(K2)
The gaming table according to k1,

  The display unit is a unit that can display a moving animation of the first balloon display (hereinafter, referred to as a “first moving animation” (for example, an upward moving animation)) (for example, FIG. 117 (d)). ), (E)),

After the first balloon display is displayed in the first display area, the first movement animation may be displayed (for example, see FIGS. 117 (d) and 117 (e)).
A gaming table characterized by the following.

In some cases, the interest of the player can be attracted to the destination of the first balloon display.
(K3) The gaming table according to k2,

  The display unit is a unit that can display a moving animation of the second balloon display (hereinafter, referred to as a “second moving animation” (for example, a moving animation that moves to the left)).

After the second moving animation is displayed, the second balloon display is displayed (for example, see FIG. 117 (f)).
A gaming table characterized by the following.

In some cases, the interest of the player can be attracted to the destination of the second balloon display.
(K4)
A gaming table according to k2 or k3,

  After displaying another moving animation of the first balloon display (hereinafter, referred to as “third moving animation” (for example, moving animation moving rightward)), the first balloon is displayed in the first display area. The display is displayed (for example, see FIGS. 117 (b) and (c)).

In the first moving animation and the third moving animation, the moving direction of the first balloon display may be different (for example, see FIG. 117).
A gaming table characterized by the following.

In some cases, the player's sense of expectation can be increased by changing the moving direction according to the moving animation.
(K5)
The gaming table according to any one of k1 to k4,

At least a part of the first balloon display may overlap with at least a part of the second balloon display (for example, see FIG. 117 (e)).
A gaming table characterized by the following.

In some cases, both the first balloon display and the second balloon display can attract the player's interest.
(K6)
The gaming table according to any one of k1 to k5,

At least a part of the first balloon display may overlap with at least a part of the second balloon display (for example, see FIG. 117 (e)).
A gaming table characterized by the following.
In some cases, the interest of the player can be attracted to the second balloon display in the foreground.
(K7)
The gaming table according to any one of k1 to k6,

  The first balloon display is a display including a character (e.g., a tonomiya character),

  The second balloon display is a display including a character (e.g., a tonomiya character),

The character of the first balloon display may be the same as the character of the second balloon display (for example, see FIGS. 134 (f) and 134 (g)).
A gaming table characterized by the following.

In some cases, balloon display of the same character is continuously displayed, thereby increasing the player's expectation.
(K8)
The gaming table according to any one of k1 to k7,
Operating means (for example, a chance button 136)

When the operating means is operated after the first balloon display is displayed, the display of the second balloon display may be started (for example, see FIGS. 117 (d) and (e)). A gaming table characterized by the following.
In some cases, the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased.
(K9)
The gaming table according to any one of k1 to k8,
The gaming table is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).
A gaming table characterized by the following.
(K10)
The gaming table according to any one of k1 to k8,
The gaming table is a slot machine (for example, slot machine 1000).
A gaming table characterized by the following.
In addition,

The balloon display may be moved or displayed while being overlapped with another display (for example, a notice, an error display, or a ball-off display).

A part of the balloon display may disappear after the moving display, two or more balloon displays may disappear, and two or more balloon displays may be simultaneously or sequentially determined.

-The size of the balloon display may be the same as the first balloon display, may be doubled, or may be half.

It may be displayed again after the balloon display disappears (after performing the erase animation, reverse playback of the erase animation or appearance animation may be performed).

A part of the re-displayed balloon display may have changed (the color may change to red, gold, or rainbow, or the character may change to a character with high expectation).

When displaying a new balloon display, a balloon display with a high degree of expectation may remain and another balloon display (a balloon display with a low degree of expectation) may preferentially disappear.

A display in which the balloon display is enlarged may be performed, or a display in which characters in the balloon display protrude from the frame of the balloon display may be performed.
-The balloon display may disappear without operating the operation means.

The character may be animated during the movement animation of the balloon display.
-A balloon display may be displayed over a plurality of changes.
・ Prefetch notice may be given in a balloon display.

-The balloon display may be performed by the second display means, the balloon display may be performed across the display means and the second display means, or one of the display means and the second display means may be the other. The display in which the balloon display moves may be performed, or the balloon display may be displayed on one of the display unit and the second display unit, and the corresponding character may be displayed on the other.
(Drawings)
FIG. 116 is an example of a conversation notice.

FIG. 117 shows an example of a conversation notice. The appearance animation is moving horizontally, and the animation when a new balloon appears is vertical movement (the animation of the new balloon and the animation of the old balloon are simultaneous). FIG. 118 is an example of a conversation notice. An example of an appearance animation is a horizontal movement, and an animation when a new speech balloon appears is a vertical movement (a modified example of a timing, an animation of a new speech balloon after an animation of an old speech balloon).

FIG. 119 is an example of a conversation notice. An example of an appearance animation is a horizontal movement, and an animation when a new speech balloon appears is a vertical movement (a modified example of a timing, an animation of an old speech balloon after an animation of a new speech balloon).

FIG. 120 shows an example of a conversation notice, an example in which the appearance animation moves vertically, and an example in which the size of the balloon is different from normal, half, or twice.

FIG. 121 is an example of a conversation notice, an example in which a lost character returns, and an example in which the content has changed when returning.

FIG. 122 is an example of a conversation notice. An example in which a specific speech balloon (for example, a speech balloon with a high degree of expectation) is not deleted.
FIG. 123 shows an example of a conversation notice and an example of overlapping speech balloons.
FIG. 124 shows an example of a conversation notice. An example in which an old speech balloon is reduced.

FIG. 125 shows an example of a conversation notice, an example in which speech balloons of the same character are continuous, an example in which speech balloons expand, and an example in which the contents of speech balloons protrude from the speech balloon.
FIG. 126 shows an example of a conversation notice. An example in which a balloon moves while the notice character is moving.

FIG. 127 shows an example of a conversation notice. An example in which the balloon moves while the movable body is operating.

FIG. 128 is an example of a conversation notice. FIG. 128 is an example in which the balloon moves with the light emitting panel in front of the display device emitting light.

FIG. 129 is an example of a conversation notice. FIG. 129 is an example in which the balloon moves while the first display is displayed.

FIG. 130 shows an example of a conversation notice. A balloon is an example of a pre-read notice (the reserved icon changes to a pre-read icon).

FIG. 131 shows an example of a conversation notice. FIG. 131 shows an example in which a character and a balloon are displayed on separate display means.
FIG. 132 shows an example of a conversation notice. An example in which a balloon moves to another display means.
FIG. 133 shows an example of a conversation notice. An example in which a balloon is displayed over a plurality of changes.
(L1)
A game console provided with display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208),
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of displays,

  One of the plurality of displays is a first balloon display (for example, balloon display f1) (for example, see FIG. 117 (f)),

  One of the plurality of displays is a second balloon display (for example, balloon display f2) (for example, see FIG. 117 (f)).

  While the first balloon display is being displayed in the first display area, the display of the second balloon display may be started (for example, see FIG. 117 (e)).

While the second balloon display is being displayed, the first balloon display may be displayed in the second display area (for example, see FIGS. 117 (e) and (f)).
A gaming table characterized by the following.

By displaying the first balloon display in another display area even while the second balloon display is displayed, it becomes easier for the player to grasp the relevance of the two balloon displays, so that the player can concentrate on the game and enjoy the interest of the player. Can be improved.
(L2)
11. The gaming table according to claim 1,

  The display unit is a unit that can display a moving animation of the first balloon display (hereinafter, referred to as a “first moving animation” (for example, an upward moving animation)) (for example, FIG. 117 (d)). ), (E)),

After the first balloon display is displayed in the first display area, the first movement animation may be displayed (for example, see FIGS. 117 (d) and 117 (e)).
A gaming table characterized by the following.

In some cases, the interest of the player can be attracted to the destination of the first balloon display.
(L3)
A gaming table according to l1 or l2,

  The display unit is a unit that can display a moving animation of the second balloon display (hereinafter, referred to as a “second moving animation” (for example, a moving animation that moves to the left)).

After the second moving animation is displayed, the second balloon display is displayed (for example, see FIG. 117 (f)).
A gaming table characterized by the following.

In some cases, the interest of the player can be attracted to the destination of the second balloon display.
(L4)
The gaming table according to any one of l1 to l3,

At least a part of the first balloon display may overlap with at least a part of the second balloon display (for example, see FIG. 117 (e)).
A gaming table characterized by the following.

In some cases, both the first balloon display and the second balloon display can attract the player's interest.
(15)
The gaming table according to any one of l1 to l4,

At least a part of the first balloon display may overlap with at least a part of the second balloon display (for example, see FIG. 117 (e)).
A gaming table characterized by the following.
In some cases, the interest of the player can be attracted to the second balloon display in the foreground.
(L6)
The gaming table according to any one of l1 to l5,

  The first balloon display is a display including a character (e.g., a tonomiya character),

  The second balloon display is a display including a character (e.g., a tonomiya character),

The character of the first balloon display may be the same as the character of the second balloon display (for example, see FIGS. 134 (f) and 134 (g)).
A gaming table characterized by the following.

In some cases, balloon display of the same character is continuously displayed, thereby increasing the player's expectation.
(L7)

  The gaming table according to any one of 11 to 16, further comprising an operation unit (for example, a chance button 136),

When the operating means is operated after the first balloon display is displayed, the display of the second balloon display may be started (for example, see FIGS. 117 (d) and (e)). A gaming table characterized by the following.
In some cases, the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased.
(L8)
The gaming table according to any one of 11 to 17,

  One of the plurality of displays is a third balloon display (for example, balloon display f5) (for example, see FIG. 120 (q)).

While the first balloon display is being displayed in the first display area, the display of the third balloon display may be started (for example, see FIG. 120 (n)).
The width of the first balloon display and the width of the second balloon display are the same,

The width of the first balloon display and the width of the third balloon display are different (for example, see FIG. 120 (q)).
A gaming table characterized by the following.

In some cases, the sense of expectation of the player can be increased by changing the width of the balloon display.
(L9)
The gaming table according to any one of l1 to l8,
The gaming table is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).
A gaming table characterized by the following.
(L10)
The gaming table according to any one of l1 to l8,
The gaming table is a slot machine (for example, slot machine 1000).
A gaming table characterized by the following.
In addition,

The balloon display may be moved or displayed while being overlapped with another display (for example, a notice, an error display, or a ball-off display).

A part of the balloon display may disappear after the moving display, two or more balloon displays may disappear, and two or more balloon displays may be simultaneously or sequentially determined.

-The size of the balloon display may be the same as the first balloon display, may be doubled, or may be half.

It may be displayed again after the balloon display disappears (after performing the erase animation, reverse playback of the erase animation or appearance animation may be performed).

A part of the re-displayed balloon display may have changed (the color may change to red, gold, or rainbow, or the character may change to a character with high expectation).

When displaying a new balloon display, a balloon display with a high degree of expectation may remain and another balloon display (a balloon display with a low degree of expectation) may preferentially disappear.

A display in which the balloon display is enlarged may be performed, or a display in which characters in the balloon display protrude from the frame of the balloon display may be performed.
-The balloon display may disappear without operating the operation means.

The character may be animated during the movement animation of the balloon display.

-A balloon display may be displayed over a plurality of changes.・ Prefetch notice may be given in a balloon display.

-The balloon display may be performed by the second display means, the balloon display may be performed across the display means and the second display means, or one of the display means and the second display means may be the other. The display in which the balloon display moves may be performed, or the balloon display may be displayed on one of the display unit and the second display unit, and the corresponding character may be displayed on the other.

  Each event (each effect) may be executed in series or may be executed in parallel.

  In addition, each event (each effect) can be a combination of a part or the whole of a certain event (a certain effect) and a part or the whole of another event (another effect).

Each event (each effect) may be executed serially or may be executed in parallel.
Each event (each effect) may only be executed in series.
Each event (each effect) may only be executed in parallel.

  Here, execution in series means that a certain event (a certain effect) ends and then another event (another effect) starts, and execution in parallel means a certain event (a certain effect) It is only necessary that there is a state in which a certain effect (another effect) is performed simultaneously with another event (another effect). The start timing and end timing of a certain event (a certain effect) and the start timing of another event (another effect) And the end timing can be appropriately combined.

  Further, each event (each effect) may be configured to be executable in parallel and / or serial only in a certain state, or may be configured to be executable without distinguishing by state. .

  The certain state may be a state to be shifted by a player operation or a state to be shifted without a player operation (for example, a shift after a player operation without a player operation). If so, it may be the final opportunity or the first opportunity.)

  Here, “transition without depending on player operation” may be transition based on lottery, may be transitioned in accordance with the control state, or a combination of both. It may be.

  Here, the “lottery” may be a lottery related to the advantage for the player, or may be a lottery not related to the advantage for the player.

  Here, the “control state” may be a state related to the advantage to the player, or may be a state not related to the advantage to the player (for example, the control state 1 and the control state 2). Thus, the degree of advantage with respect to the player may be different or may not be different.)

  The state in which the degree of advantage to the player is different will be specifically described. In the case where the control state 1 and the control state 2 are present, staying in the control state N is different from the state of staying. In this case, the degree of advantage does not differ, and there may be a difference in the degree of advantage after staying.

  The image used in the explanation of each figure (each event (each effect)) is an image for explanation, and may of course be another image, for example, an image of a lord (male character). It is also possible to replace the image with a princess (female character) image.

  Further, even when an image explaining a certain effect and an image explaining another effect are the same image, replacing the image explaining another effect with another image, Other renderings can be performed in parallel and / or serially.

  Further, when an image explaining a certain effect and an image explaining another effect are the same image, it is not possible to execute the image in parallel and / or in series, but as an alternative method. Is also good.

  In addition to the case where the images are the same, there is a case where the timing is the same (for example, both are in super-reach production) and the place is the same (for example, both are in the hold display area).

Specifically, even when the timing is the same, for example, the super-reach may be executed serially in the first half and the second half. Or in series with the first and second half of the Super Reach at the same location.
Each event (each effect) is realized by a certain means (effect means).

  A certain means (producing means) may be constituted by a plurality of devices (a plurality of producing devices).

  Each event (each effect) performed by each of a plurality of devices (a plurality of effect devices) may be performed by one device (effect device).

  Each event (each effect) performed by one device (the effect device) may be performed by a plurality of devices (a plurality of effect devices).

  In addition, as a device (production device), a display device such as the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the movable bodies 700 and 702, and the like. Movable body.

  In addition, each event (each production) may be described using one device (production device) as an example. For example, if it is a notification, it is applied to another device (production device) capable of reporting. Is possible.

  In addition, for example, for notification, a configuration in which a plurality of devices (a plurality of effect devices) can be realized may be used.

  Further, in the case where a configuration is realized by a plurality of devices (a plurality of effect devices), some or all of the characteristics of a certain notification may be applied to each of the plurality of devices (a plurality of effect devices).

Each configuration in each event (each production) may be merely an example, and even when only one of each event (each production) is provided with a configuration, the other configuration may be used. May be complemented and a combination may be possible, or a combination provided after removing a certain configuration provided only on one side may be possible.
Further, a combination may be denied due to a difference in configuration.

  FIG. 137 to FIG. 158 are diagrams showing in stages the effects centered on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 applicable to the present embodiment. 137 to 158, the first special figure display unit 212, the second special figure display unit 214, the general figure display unit 210, the first special figure reservation lamp 218, the second special figure reservation lamp 220, and the general figure reservation unit Illustration of the lamp 216 is omitted. Although FIGS. 137 to 158 show the pachinko machine 100 including one decorative symbol display device 208, the pachinko machine 100 may include a plurality of decorative symbol display devices. Further, in the present embodiment, the transparent light guide plate IL described above is provided on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the crest role object 224E is arranged. A POV display or the like may be provided.

  FIG. 137 (A (1) -1) to FIG. 137 (A (4) -2) are diagrams showing steps of an example of the button effect executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 137 (A (1) -1), the decorative symbol combination of “decorative 2-decorative 5-decorative 7” is stopped and displayed. Although the background here is not displayed, for example, a default background image is displayed. In the following description, when the background is not displayed, a default background image is displayed unless otherwise specified. Various background images different from the default background image (for example, a background image according to the mode) may be displayed. In addition, a second hold number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, a fourth symbol or a second decorative symbol may be displayed. On the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208, a navigation character YM is displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 137 (A (1) -1), since the symbol is stopped and displayed, the change icon h0 is not displayed.

  Further, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 137 (A (1) -1) to FIG. 137 (A (4) -2) is a special figure low probability general figure low probability state. On the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric support state, the hold icon of the special figure 1 is displayed. Note that a reserved icon display area of the special figure 2 may be provided in a predetermined area (for example, the right end of the display screen) of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric support state.

  In a reserve icon display area formed on the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208, a reserve icon representing the reservation of the special figure 1 is displayed. The number of reservations in Toku-zu 1 is represented by the number of the holding icons in Toku-zu 1 and the second number-of-holds display, in addition to the number of lighting of the Toku-zu 1 holding lamp 218. In addition to the number of lighting of the holding lamp 220, the number of the holding icons in the special map 2 and the second holding number display are also displayed. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest winning) may be referred to as a first hold icon, the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as a second hold icon. In the holding icon display area, the holding icons are displayed side by side, and the holding icon on the right side is the holding icon with the older winning.

  In FIG. 137 (A (1) -1), three reserved icons h11, h12, and h13 of the special figure 1 are displayed in the reserved icon display area, and these three reserved icons h11, h12, and h12 of the special figure 1 are displayed. Each of h13 is displayed in a default display mode (circular pattern and white display mode). That is, the default hold icon of Toku-zu 1 is a round hold icon.

  On the other hand, none of the suspension icons of the special map 2 are displayed. As described above, the control state (game state) shown in FIGS. 137 (A (1) -1) to (A (4) -2) is a non-electric support state (non-time saving state). This is because the electric chute is hard to open and it is difficult to win the special figure 2 start port 232.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the special icon of the special figure which is easier to win in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is displayed according to the control state (game state), and the reserve icon of the other special figure is displayed. It is not displayed. That is, when the control state is the non-power support state, as shown in FIG. 137 (A (1) -1), the hold icon of the special figure 1 is displayed in the hold icon display area, and the hold of the special figure 2 is held. No icon is displayed. On the other hand, when the control state is the power support state, on the other hand, the hold icon of Toku-zu 2 is displayed and the hold icon of Toku-zu 1 is not displayed. In the non-power support state, the hold icon of the special figure 2 may be displayed, or in the power support state, the hold icon of the special figure 1 may be displayed.

  In the present embodiment, the start of the design change display of the special figure is performed in the order of the start of change in the special figure display device → the start of moving animation of the reserved icon or the deletion → the start of change of the decorative design. Is also good.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 137 (A (1) -2), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is exhausted and the symbol change display of the special figure 1 is started, and the first special figure display device The symbol variation display at 212 is started. In addition, a moving animation of the holding icons h11 to h13 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the holding icon (the holding icon which is a target of the current symbol change) at the display position of the first holding icon h11 is changed to the decorative symbol display device. The moving icon is moved to a changing icon display area formed at the lower center of the center 208 and is displayed as a changing icon h0, the second holding icon h12 is moved to the display position of the first holding icon h11, and the first holding icon h11 is changed. , The third holding icon h13 moves to the display position of the second holding icon h12, and is displayed as the second holding icon h12. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol has also been started. The display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 is the same as the display mode of the digested hold icon h11, but may be different.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 137 (A (1) -3), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 illustrated in FIG. 137 (A (1) -4), the second stop is performed, “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and the reach state is formed. Then, as shown in FIG. 137 (A (2) -1), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “reach” in the vicinity of the navigation character YM and notifies that the vehicle has reached the reach state. On the other hand, in the middle symbol, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 137 (A (2) -2), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state in which a weak Sabohani group notice with a smaller number of Sabohani SBHNs is performed than the strong Sabohani group notice described above. Have been. The weak Sabohani group notice is more reliable than the case where the Sabohani group notice is not performed, but the reliability is lower than the case where the strong Sabohani group notice is performed. In addition, "SP development" is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, and it is also notified that the navigation system will be developed into a super reach.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 137 (A (3) -1), the decorative symbol display device 208 develops into super reach (swordsman reach), and displays a screen in which the main character, the lord, and the enemy swordsman confront each other. . At this time, the character "Swordsman Reach" is displayed near the navigation character YM to notify the type of super reach.

    In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 137 (A (3) -2), a button image 136a as a default display mode is displayed, and a remaining time display meter MT is displayed below the button image 136a. It notifies that a notice by an effect (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “normal button effect”) has started. Thereafter, the operation effective period of the effect button 136 is started, and the display of the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT decreasing is also started. At this time, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character "press" is displayed to urge the operation of the effect button 136.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 137 (A (3) -3), as shown in FIG. Together with the close-up image, a cut-in image including a balloon image in which the word “game” is arranged in the balloon is displayed. The cut-in image displayed here is the weak cut-in image CI1b in which the number face is not decorated around the character of “game” in the balloon, and has a larger hit than when the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed. Implies that the reliability of is low. In the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a question mark is attached together with the character of "chance", which excites a sense of expectation for a big hit.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 137 (A (3) -5), the crest actor 224E ascends and the upper end portion overlaps the decorative symbol display device 208, and moves up and down to judge whether or not a big hit will occur. It shows a state in which a leading role is being performed. Note that, in the present embodiment, the directing effect before the judge is performed by the display effect by the decorative symbol display device 208, although the directing effect using the family crest role object 224E is performed as the directing effect before the judge. Is also good.

  However, as shown in FIG. 137 (A (3) -6), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a screen in which the hero's lord lost to the enemy swordsman and was defeated, and the decorative symbol display device 208 was omitted. In the center, “decoration 3” to be stopped and displayed in the middle symbol is displayed, and it is notified that the display is to be stopped and displayed in the combination of the decoration symbols of “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2”. On the other hand, it is shown that the judge's previous role of the role of the crest actor 224E ends, and the crest actor 224E descends and returns to the initial position.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 137 (A (4) -1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, temporary stop due to swing fluctuation is performed in the decorative symbol combination of “decorative 2-decorative 3-decorative 2”. The situation is shown. At this time, the character "Sorry" is displayed near the navigation character YM, and it is notified that a loss result will be displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 137 (A (4) -2), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the final decorative symbol combination of “decorative 2-decorative 3-decorative 2”. At this time, the change icon h0 is also deleted.

  As described above, in this effect example, the cut-in image (weak cut-in image CI1b) is displayed as a result of the operation of the effect button 136 in the button effect by the effect button 136, and thereafter, the effect movable body (crest actor 224E) In this case, the appearance of a combination of decorative patterns is displayed without performing a jackpot determination of a jackpot.

  FIG. 137 (B (1) -1) to FIG. 137 (B (4) -2) are diagrams showing stepwise another effect pattern of the button effect executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. 137 (B (1) -1) to (B (3) -3) are the same as FIGS. 137 (A (1) -1) to (A (3) -3). Therefore, the description is omitted.

  In this effect example, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 137 (B (3) -3), the cut-in image is not displayed as shown in FIG. 137 (B (3) -4). , A new button effect is started. This button effect is a super projecting button effect in which the super projecting button image 136aS is displayed. In the button effect in FIGS. 137 (B (3) -2) to (B (3) -3), the effect button 136 is displayed. This is another button effect that is started in response to an operation. This super projecting button image 136aS is a button image that schematically shows a mode in which the effect button 136 protrudes upward, and is displayed in a mode in which a character display of “push-no-ja” is added below together with the grandfather character. is there. Further, at this time, the character “super heat” is displayed near the navigation character YM, which suggests that the reliability of the big hit is high. That is, it is suggested that when the super-protruding button effect is performed, a big hit is more likely to occur than the normal button effect (that is, the big hit symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed). Also, at this time, the effect button 136 is also projected upward, thereby promoting the operation of the effect button 136 for the player. That is, it can be said that the operation promotion effect of the effect button 136 is being performed by the projecting operation of the effect button 136. The effect button 136 may vibrate when the effect button 136 protrudes, or may vibrate and rotate. As described above, in this effect example, a state in which the super projecting button effect is performed by the display of the super projecting button image 136aS and the projecting operation of the effect button 136 is shown. Further, in this effect example, a character string is different between the character display in the operation promotion display displayed in the normal button effect and the character display in the operation promotion display displayed in the super protruding button effect. It should be noted that the wording may be different from the wording directly instructing to “press” the effect button 136. For example, in the first button effect, the character display of “press” is displayed, and the character is executed thereafter. In the second button effect, a character display of “super press” may be displayed, a character display of “hard press” may be displayed, or a character display of “hit” may be displayed. In addition, when a super protruding button effect is performed, a big hit may be made. Further, in this effect example, the display position of the remaining time display meter MT is different from the case where the button image 136a in the default mode is displayed, and when the super protruding button image 136aS is displayed. The remaining time display meter MT is displayed at the upper left corner of the display screen. The display position may be the same as when the button image 136a in the default mode is displayed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the first button effect, the effect button 136 is operated and the projecting operation of the effect button 136 is started at the timing when the display of the super projecting button image 136aS is started. When the effect button 136 is operated in the effect, the projecting operation of the effect button 136 is started, and then the super projecting button effect may be started, or the super projecting button effect is started and the super projecting button image is started. After the start of the display of 136aS, the projecting operation of the effect button 136 may be started.

  Thereafter, when the depressing button of the effect button 136 is performed at the timing shown in FIG. 137 (B (3) -5), a judge effect with a fixed jackpot is started as shown in FIG. 137 (B (3) -6). Is shown. For the judge effect, a judge effect of a big hit determination indicating that the big hit is determined, and an off-judge effect of indicating a loss will be prepared. Note that the off-judge effect may be an effect in which it is determined that an out-of-game will occur, or may be an effect in which a reversal effect may result in a big hit. That is, in this production example, it can be said that the judge production is a production that produces a big hit. In the judge effect of confirming the jackpot, the crest role item 224E rises to a position overlapping the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the light guide plate IL emits light to imitate the image of the face of the lord. The effect which appears on the display device 208 is performed. Thereby, it is notified that the big hit is determined. In addition, this judge effect is not limited to the one started by the button operation in the button effect, and may be executed, for example, after the judge's previous role actor effect. Further, the judge effect may be performed following the other types of effects described in the present embodiment, or the judge effect may be suddenly started without any notice. In addition, the judge effect is performed before being executed before the big hit symbol is definitely displayed, but may be started at a timing other than before the big hit symbol is definitely displayed, for example, a decorative symbol variation display May be executed immediately after the start of the process. In addition, the judge effect may be performed other than during the execution of the decorative symbol change display. For example, by executing during the jackpot game, it is notified that the game state after the jackpot game will be in a certain state. May be performed, or it may be notified that a pending consecutive change occurs.

  Then, after the light emission of the light guide plate IL is completed and the image imitating the face of the lord is erased, and the crest actor 224E is lowered to the initial position, the decorative pattern shown in FIG. 137 (B (3) -7) On the display device 208, a screen where the main character defeated the enemy swordsman and defeated the swordsman is displayed, and "decoration 2", which is to be stopped and displayed in the middle symbol, is displayed at approximately the center of the ornament symbol display device 208. It is notified that the display is scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the combination of the decoration patterns of “decoration 2−decoration 2−decoration 2”. In addition, the character “Ya-taze” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, celebrating a big hit.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 illustrated in FIG. 137 (B (4) -1), a state in which the temporary stop due to the swing fluctuation is performed in the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 2−decoration 2−decoration 2” is shown. Have been. At this time, the character "Big hit" is displayed near the navigation character YM. After that, as shown in FIG. 137 (B (4) -2), the decorative symbol display device 208 finally displays the combination of the big hit decorative symbols of “decorative 2-decorative 2-decorative 2”. At this time, the change icon h0 is also deleted.

  As described above, in this effect example, when the effect button 136 is operated in the first button effect, a new button effect in which the super projecting button image 136aS is displayed and the effect button 136 projects (super projecting button effect). Is started, and when the protruding effect button 136 is pressed in this button effect, a judge effect in which the effect movable body (the crest role object 224E) operates is performed, and thereafter, a combination of the jackpot decoration patterns is displayed to be a big hit. It is shown.

  Further, in this effect example, the effect button 136 is operated in the first button effect and the second button is operated, as compared with the case where the effect button 136 is operated in the first button effect and the weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed. It is shown that, when the effect is started, the jackpot symbol mode is more likely to be finally confirmed and displayed.

  FIG. 138 (A (1) -1) to FIG. 138 (A (4) -2) are diagrams showing step-by-step another effect patterns of button effects executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. Note that FIGS. 138 (A (1) -1) to (A (3) -2) are the same as FIGS. 137 (A (1) -1) to (A (3) -2). Therefore, the description is omitted.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 138 (A (3) -3), a state is shown in which the operation of the effect button 136 is valid and the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT is decreasing.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 138 (A (3) -4), a state is shown during the operation effective period of the effect button 136 and immediately before the operation effective period elapses.

  Thereafter, when the operation effective period has elapsed without operating the effect button 136, as shown in FIG. 138 (A (3) -5), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the weak cut-in image CI1b. In the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a question mark is attached together with the character of "chance", which excites a sense of expectation for a big hit.

    Then, as shown in FIG. 138 (A (3) -6), a judge-in-advanced actor-flicking effect is performed.

  However, as shown in FIG. 138 (A (3) -7), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a screen in which the hero's lord lost to the enemy swordsman and was defeated, and the decorative symbol display device 208 was omitted. In the center, “decoration 3” to be stopped and displayed in the middle symbol is displayed, and it is notified that the display is to be stopped and displayed in the combination of the decoration symbols of “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2”. On the other hand, it is shown that the judge's previous role of the role of the crest actor 224E ends, and the crest actor 224E descends and returns to the initial position.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 138 (A (4) -1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the temporary stop due to the swing fluctuation is performed in the decorative symbol combination of “decorative 2-decorative 3-decorative 2”. The situation is shown. At this time, the character "Sorry" is displayed near the navigation character YM, and it is notified that a loss result will be displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 138 (A (4) -2), the decorative symbol display device 208 finally displays the combination of the lost decorative symbols of “decorative 2-decorative 3-decorative 2”. At this time, the change icon h0 is also deleted.

  As described above, in this effect example, in the button effect by the effect button 136, when the operation effective period elapses without operating the effect button 136, the cut-in image (weak cut-in image CI1b) is displayed, and thereafter, the effect is movable. A state is shown in which a combination of decorative patterns that have been lost is displayed without performing a judge effect of determining a big hit by the body (the family crest role object 224E).

  FIG. 138 (B (1) -1) to FIG. 138 (B (4) -2) are diagrams showing step-by-step another effect patterns of button effects executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. Note that FIGS. 138 (B (1) -1) to (B (3) -4) are the same as FIGS. 138 (A (1) -1) to (A (3) -4). Therefore, the description is omitted.

  After the operation effective period in the first button effect starts, if the operation effective period elapses without operating the effect button 136, as shown in FIG. 138 (B (3) -5), no effect is performed. The production of super reach continues without being heard.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 138 (B (3) -6), a judge-in-advanced actor production effect is performed.

  However, as shown in FIG. 138 (B (3) -7), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a screen in which the hero's lord lost to the enemy swordsman and was defeated, and the decorative symbol display device 208 was omitted. In the center, “decoration 3” to be stopped and displayed in the middle symbol is displayed, and it is notified that the display is to be stopped and displayed in the combination of the decoration symbols of “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2”. On the other hand, it is shown that the judge's previous role of the role of the crest actor 224E ends, and the crest actor 224E descends and returns to the initial position.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 138 (B (4) -1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a temporary stop due to swing fluctuation is performed in the decorative symbol combination of “decorative 2-decorative 3-decorative 2”. The situation is shown. At this time, the character "Sorry" is displayed near the navigation character YM, and it is notified that a loss result will be displayed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 138 (B (4) -2), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the final decorative symbol combination of “decorative 2-decorative 3-decorative 2”. At this time, the change icon h0 is also deleted.

  As described above, in this effect example, in the button effect using the effect button 136, the operation response effect using the effect button 136 is not executed when the operation effective period has elapsed without operating the effect button 136. After that, the combination of the decorative patterns is displayed without performing the judge effect of determining the big hit by the effect movable body (family crest role object 224E).

  FIG. 139 (A (1) -1) to FIG. 139 (A (4) -2) are diagrams showing step-by-step another effect patterns of button effects executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. 139 (A (1) -1) to (A (3) -3) are the same as FIGS. 137 (A (1) -1) to (A (3) -3). Therefore, the description is omitted.

  In this effect example, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 139 (A (3) -3), the cut-in image is not displayed as shown in FIG. 139 (A (3) -4). , A new button effect is started. This button effect is a deca-button effect in which the deca-button image 136aL is displayed, and the effect button 136 is operated in the button effects in FIGS. 139 (A (3) -2) to (A (3) -3). This is another button effect that is started with the trigger. The deca-button image 136aL is a button image that is larger in size than the default button image 136a and is displayed over the entire display screen. When the deca-button effect is performed, it is suggested that a big hit is more likely to occur than the normal button effect (that is, the big hit symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed). In the present embodiment, the case where the super protruding button effect is performed is more likely to be a big hit than the case where the deca button effect is performed.However, the case where the deca button effect is performed is more likely to be a big hit. You may do so. In addition, when the deca-button effect is performed, a big hit may be made. Further, in this effect example, the display position of the remaining time display meter MT is displayed at a position substantially overlapping the center of the deca-button image 136aL, which may make it easier to focus on the remaining time display meter MT. . The display position may be the same as when the button image 136a in the default mode is displayed.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 139 (A (3) -5), the judge effect of the jackpot determination is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 139 (A (3) -6). It is shown how it is started.

  Then, after the light emission in the light guide plate IL is completed and the image imitating the face of the lord is erased, and the crest actor 224E is lowered to the initial position, the decorative pattern shown in FIG. 139 (A (3) -7). On the display device 208, a screen where the main character defeated the enemy swordsman and defeated the swordsman is displayed, and "decoration 2", which is to be stopped and displayed in the middle symbol, is displayed at approximately the center of the ornament symbol display device 208. It is notified that the display is scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the combination of the decoration patterns of “decoration 2−decoration 2−decoration 2”. In addition, the character “Ya-taze” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, celebrating a big hit.

  Thereafter, the decorative symbol display device 208 illustrated in FIG. 139 (A (4) -1) illustrates a state in which the temporary stop due to the swing fluctuation is performed in the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 2−decoration 2−decoration 2”. Have been. At this time, the character "Big hit" is displayed near the navigation character YM. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 139 (A (4) -2), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols “decorative 2-decorative 2-decorative 2”. At this time, the change icon h0 is also deleted.

  As described above, in this effect example, when the effect button 136 is operated in the first button effect, a new button effect (decabutton effect) in which the deca-button image 136aL is displayed is started, and the effect button 136 in this button effect. Is operated, a judge effect in which the effect movable body (house crest role object 224E) operates is performed, and thereafter, a combination of the jackpot decorative patterns is displayed to show a state of the jackpot.

  FIG. 139 (B (1) -1) to FIG. 139 (B (4) -2) are diagrams showing step-by-step another effect patterns of button effects executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. 139 (B (1) -1) to (B (3) -3) are the same as FIGS. 137 (A (1) -1) to (A (3) -3). Therefore, the description is omitted.

  In this effect example, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 139 (B (3) -3), the cut-in image is not displayed, as shown in FIG. 139 (B (3) -4). , A state in which a lever effect is started is shown. That is, a state is shown in which an effect that requires operation of an operation means (effect lever 136V) different from the effect button 136 is being performed. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a character of "hot" is displayed, suggesting that the reliability is high. That is, this lever effect is a lever effect in which the lever image 136Va is displayed, and the effect button 136 is operated in the button effects in FIGS. 139 (B (3) -2) to (B (3) -3). This is an effect using another operation means which is started in response to the above. The lever image 136Va is an image imitating the effect lever 136V. When this lever effect is performed, it is suggested that a big hit is more likely to occur than a normal button effect (that is, a big hit symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed). In addition, in this embodiment, the case where the lever effect is performed is more likely to be a big hit than the case where the super projecting button effect is performed, but the case where the super projecting button effect is performed is the big hit. You may make it easy to become. When a lever button effect is performed, a big hit may be made.

  Thereafter, when the effect lever 136V is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 139 (B (3) -5), the judge effect of determining the jackpot is performed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 139 (B (3) -6). It is shown how it is started.

  Then, after the light emission of the light guide plate IL ends and the image imitating the face of the shrine is erased, and the crest actor 224E descends to the initial position, the decorative pattern shown in FIG. 139 (B (3) -7) On the display device 208, a screen where the main character defeated the enemy swordsman and defeated the swordsman is displayed, and "decoration 2", which is to be stopped and displayed in the middle symbol, is displayed at approximately the center of the ornament symbol display device 208. It is notified that the display is scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the combination of the decoration patterns of “decoration 2−decoration 2−decoration 2”. In addition, the character “Ya-taze” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, celebrating a big hit.

  Thereafter, the decorative symbol display device 208 illustrated in FIG. 139 (B (4) -1) illustrates a state in which the temporary stop due to the swing fluctuation is performed in the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 2−decoration 2−decoration 2”. Have been. At this time, the character "Big hit" is displayed near the navigation character YM. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 139 (B (4) -2), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of “decorative 2-decorative 2-decorative 2”. At this time, the change icon h0 is also deleted.

  As described above, in this effect example, when the effect button 136 is operated in the first button effect, the lever image 136Va is displayed, and a lever effect using another operating means is newly started. When the effect lever 136V is operated, a judge effect in which the effect movable body (house crest role 224E) operates is performed, and thereafter, a combination of the jackpot decorative symbols is displayed to show a state of the jackpot.

  FIG. 140 (A (1) -1) to FIG. 140 (A (4) -2) are diagrams showing step-by-step another effect patterns of button effects executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. The effect examples shown in FIGS. 140 (A (1) -1) to (A (4) -2) are shown in FIGS. 137 (B (1) -1) to (B (4) -2). In the effect pattern, an effect pattern performed when the effect button 136 is not operated in the first button effect is shown. Note that FIGS. 140 (A (1) -1) to (A (3) -2) are the same as FIGS. 137 (B (1) -1) to (B (3) -2). Therefore, the description is omitted.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 140 (A (3) -3), it is shown that the operation of the effect button 136 is in the effective period and the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT is decreasing.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 140 (A (3) -4), a state is shown during the operation valid period of the effect button 136 and immediately before the operation valid period elapses.

  After that, when the operation effective period elapses without operating the effect button 136, as shown in FIG. 140 (A (3) -5), the effect of the super reach continues without any effect being performed.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 140 (A (3) -6), a judge-in-advance role is produced.

  In this production example, since the production pattern is to be a judge production, a judge production with a jackpot confirmation is performed as shown in FIG. Is started.

  Then, after the light emission of the light guide plate IL is completed and the image imitating the face of the lord is erased, and the family crest role item 224E is lowered to the initial position, the decorative pattern shown in FIG. 140 (A (3) -8) is obtained. On the display device 208, a screen where the main character defeated the enemy swordsman and defeated the swordsman is displayed, and "decoration 2", which is to be stopped and displayed in the middle symbol, is displayed at approximately the center of the ornament symbol display device 208. It is notified that the display is scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the combination of the decoration patterns of “decoration 2−decoration 2−decoration 2”. In addition, the character “Ya-taze” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, celebrating a big hit.

  Thereafter, the decorative symbol display device 208 illustrated in FIG. 140 (A (4) -1) illustrates a state in which the temporary stop due to the swing fluctuation is performed in the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 2−decoration 2−decoration 2”. Have been. At this time, the character "Big hit" is displayed near the navigation character YM. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 140 (A (4) -2), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of “decorative 2-decorative 2-decorative 2”. At this time, the change icon h0 is also deleted.

  As described above, in this effect example, if the operation button 136 is not operated in the first button effect and the operation effective period has elapsed, the second button effect is not started, but the effect movable body (the crest actor 224E). ) Is operated, and thereafter, there is a case where the combination of the decorative patterns of the big hit is displayed and the big hit may be made. In the case of this effect example, when the effect button 136 is operated during the operation validity period of the first button effect, FIG. 137 (B (3) -4) to FIG. 137 (B (3) -5) The super projecting button effect shown in FIG.

  FIG. 140 (B (1) -1) to FIG. 140 (B (4) -2) are diagrams showing step by step another effect patterns of button effects executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. The effect examples shown in FIGS. 140 (B (1) -1) to (B (4) -2) are shown in FIGS. 137 (B (1) -1) to (B (4) -2). In the effect pattern, another effect pattern performed when the effect button 136 is not operated in the first button effect is shown. 140 (B (1) -1) to FIG. 140 (B (3) -4) are the same as FIGS. 140 (A (1) -1) to FIG. 140 (A (3) -4). Therefore, the description is omitted.

  In this effect example, after the operation effective period in the first button effect starts, if the operation effective period elapses without operating the effect button 136, as shown in FIG. 140 (B (3) -5), In the decorative design display device 208, a cut-in image including a balloon image in which characters “game” is arranged in a balloon is displayed together with an image of an up of the character of the lord. The cut-in image displayed here is a strong cut-in image CI1a in which a number of (for example, nine) face-length faces are arranged around the character “game” in the balloon. In addition, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character of “strong cut-in” is displayed, and it is reported that the strong cut-in image CI1a having a higher hit than the weak cut-in and higher reliability is displayed.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 140 (B (3) -6), a judge-in-advance actor-flicking effect is performed. In the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character “Atsui” is displayed, suggesting that the reliability of the big hit is high.

  In this effect example, since the effect pattern is a judge effect scheduled to be performed, the judge effect with the jackpot determined as shown in FIG. Is started.

  Then, after the light emission of the light guide plate IL is completed and the image imitating the face of the lord is erased, and the crest actor 224E is lowered to the initial position, the decorative pattern shown in FIG. 140 (B (3) -8) is obtained. On the display device 208, a screen where the main character defeated the enemy swordsman and defeated the swordsman is displayed, and "decoration 2", which is to be stopped and displayed in the middle symbol, is displayed at approximately the center of the ornament symbol display device 208. It is notified that the display is scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the combination of the decoration patterns of “decoration 2−decoration 2−decoration 2”. In addition, the character “Ya-taze” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, celebrating a big hit.

  Thereafter, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 140 (B (4) -1) shows that temporary stop due to swing fluctuation is performed in the combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2”. Have been. At this time, the character "Big hit" is displayed near the navigation character YM. After that, as shown in FIG. 140 (B (4) -2), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a fixed display of the combination of the big hit decorative symbols of “decorative 2-decorative 2-decorative 2”. At this time, the change icon h0 is also deleted.

  As described above, in this effect example, if the operation button 136 is not operated in the first button effect and the operation effective period has elapsed, the second button effect is not started, but instead, the cut-in image is displayed. The displayed effect is performed. After that, a judge effect in which the effect movable body (the crest role object 224E) operates is performed, and thereafter, a combination of the decorative patterns of the jackpot is displayed to show a case where the jackpot may become a jackpot. In the case of this effect example, when the effect button 136 is operated during the operation validity period of the first button effect, FIG. 137 (B (3) -4) to FIG. 137 (B (3) -5) The super projecting button effect shown in FIG. In the example of the effect, the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed when the operation effective period elapses without operating the effect button 136 in the first button effect, but the weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed. May be displayed.

  FIG. 141 (A (1) -1) to FIG. 141 (A (4) -2) are diagrams showing step-by-step another effect patterns of button effects executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. The effect examples shown in FIGS. 141 (A (1) -1) to (A (4) -2) are shown in FIGS. 137 (B (1) -1) to (B (4) -2). In the effect pattern, another effect pattern performed when the effect button 136 is not operated in the first button effect is shown. Note that FIGS. 141 (A (1) -1) to (A (3) -4) are the same as FIGS. 140 (A (1) -1) to (A (3) -4). Therefore, the description is omitted.

  In this effect example, after the operation effective period in the first button effect starts and the operation effective period elapses without operating the effect button 136, as shown in FIG. 141 (A (3) -5), The state where the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT is full again and the button effect is started again is shown. That is, a state in which the second button effect may be started after the operation effective period elapses without operating the effect button 136 in the first button effect. At this time, the button image 136a, which is the default mode, is continuously displayed, and furthermore, the letters "One more change" are displayed at the top of the display screen to inform that the second button effect has started. In addition, in the vicinity of the navigator character, the character of "must be pressed" is displayed, and the operation of the effect button 136 is strongly promoted. Thereafter, the second operation validity period is started.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 141 (A (3) -6), the judge effect of determining the big hit is started as shown in FIG. 141 (A (3) -7). It is shown. Thereby, it is notified that the big hit is determined.

  Then, after the light emission in the light guide plate IL is completed and the image imitating the face of the lord is erased, and the crest actor 224E is lowered to the initial position, the decorative pattern shown in FIG. 141 (A (3) -8). On the display device 208, a screen where the main character defeated the enemy swordsman and defeated the swordsman is displayed, and "decoration 2", which is to be stopped and displayed in the middle symbol, is displayed at approximately the center of the ornament symbol display device 208. It is notified that the display is scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the combination of the decoration patterns of “decoration 2−decoration 2−decoration 2”. In addition, the character “Ya-taze” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, celebrating a big hit.

  Thereafter, the decorative symbol display device 208 illustrated in FIG. 141 (A (4) -1) illustrates a state in which the temporary stop due to the swing fluctuation is performed in the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2”. Have been. At this time, the character "Big hit" is displayed near the navigation character YM. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 141 (A (4) -2), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the decorative symbols with the big hit of “decorative 2-decorative 2-decorative 2”. At this time, the change icon h0 is also deleted.

  Thus, in this effect example, when the operation button 136 is not operated in the first button effect and the operation valid period elapses, the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT becomes full again, and the button effect starts again. It is shown. That is, a state in which the second button effect may be started after the operation effective period elapses without operating the effect button 136 in the first button effect. Then, when the effect button 136 is operated in the second button effect, a judge effect in which the effect movable body (the crest role object 224E) operates is performed, and thereafter, a combination of the jackpot decorative patterns is displayed and the jackpot is achieved. It is shown.

  FIG. 141 (B (1) -1) to FIG. 141 (B (4) -2) are diagrams showing step-by-step another effect patterns of button effects executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. Note that FIGS. 141 (B (1) -1) to (B (3) -1) are the same as FIGS. 137 (A (1) -1) to (A (3) -1). Therefore, the description is omitted.

    In this effect example, as shown in FIG. 141 (B (3) -1), after developing into super reach (swordsman reach), as shown in FIG. 141 (B (3) -2), a decorative symbol display device In 208, the first button effect is started. In the first button effect in this effect example, a projecting button effect in which the projecting button image 136aP1 is displayed instead of the button image 136a in the default display mode is started. The protruding button image 136aP1 schematically represents a mode in which the effect button 136 protrudes upward. However, unlike the super protruding button image 136aS, the protruding button image 136aP1 does not include a grandfather character. When the protruding button effect is performed, it is suggested that the jackpot is more likely to be a big hit than the normal button effect (that is, the big hit symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed). In addition, it is designed to make it easier for a super-protruding button effect to be a big hit than when a protruding button effect is performed. Or the jackpot reliability may be the same. Also, at this time, the effect button 136 is also projected upward, thereby promoting the operation of the effect button 136 for the player. That is, it can be said that the operation promotion effect of the effect button 136 is being performed by the projecting operation of the effect button 136. In addition, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a character “press” is displayed, which also prompts the operation of the effect button 136. As described above, in this effect example, a state in which the protrusion button effect is performed by the display of the protrusion button image 136aP1 and the protrusion operation of the effect button 136 is shown. It should be noted that when a protruding button effect is performed, a big hit may be made. In this effect example, the display position of the remaining time display meter MT is different from the case where the button image 136a in the default mode is displayed or the case where the super projecting button image 136aS is displayed. When the protrusion button image 136aP1 is displayed, the remaining time display meter MT is displayed at the lower left corner of the display screen. The display position may be the same as when the button image 136a in the default mode is displayed.

  In the present embodiment, the projecting operation of the effect button 136 is started at the timing when the projecting button effect is started and the display of the projecting button image 136aP1 is started. However, after the projecting operation of the effect button 136 is started. Alternatively, the projecting button effect may be started, or the projecting operation of the effect button 136 may be started after the projecting button effect is started and the display of the projecting button image 136aP1 is started.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is pressed at the timing shown in FIG. 141 (B (3) -3), a new button effect is started as shown in FIG. 141 (B (3) -4). The situation is shown. This button effect is a super projecting button effect in which the super projecting button image 136aS is displayed, and is an effect button 136 in the projecting button effect in FIGS. 141 (B (3) -2) to (B (3) -3). Is another button effect that is started when the is operated. Also, at this time, the effect button 136 has been pressed once, but is in a state of projecting upward again, thereby promoting the operation of the effect button 136 for the player. In this example of the effect, when the effect button 136 protrudes in the projecting button effect as the first button effect, the effect button 136 does not vibrate, and the effect button 136 in the super projecting button effect as the second button effect. The effect button 136 may be made to vibrate when is projected. In addition, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character of "hot heat" is displayed, which suggests that the reliability of the big hit is high.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the first button effect, the effect button 136 is operated and the projecting operation of the effect button 136 is started at the timing when the display of the super projecting button image 136aS is started. When the effect button 136 is operated in the effect, the projecting operation of the effect button 136 is started, and then the super projecting button effect may be started, or the super projecting button effect is started and the super projecting button image is started. After the start of the display of 136aS, the projecting operation of the effect button 136 may be started.

  Thereafter, when the staging button 136 is pressed at the timing shown in FIG. 141 (B (3) -5), a judge effect with a big hit decision is started as shown in FIG. 141 (B (3) -6). Is shown.

  Then, after the light emission of the light guide plate IL is completed and the image imitating the face of the shrine is erased, and the crest actor 224E is lowered to the initial position, the decorative pattern shown in FIG. 141 (B (3) -7). On the display device 208, a screen where the main character defeated the enemy swordsman and defeated the swordsman is displayed, and "decoration 2", which is to be stopped and displayed in the middle symbol, is displayed at approximately the center of the ornament symbol display device 208. It is notified that the display is scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the combination of the decoration patterns of “decoration 2−decoration 2−decoration 2”. In addition, the character “Ya-taze” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, celebrating a big hit.

  Thereafter, the decorative symbol display device 208 illustrated in FIG. 141 (B (4) -1) illustrates a state in which the temporary stop due to the swing fluctuation is performed in the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 2−decoration 2−decoration 2”. Have been. At this time, the character "Big hit" is displayed near the navigation character YM. After that, as shown in FIG. 141 (B (4) -2), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a fixed display of the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of “decorative 2-decorative 2-decorative 2”. At this time, the change icon h0 is also deleted.

  As described above, in this effect example, in the first button effect, not the default button image 136 but the projecting button image 136aP1 in which the effect button is projected and the effect button 136 is projected. A button effect is performed, and if there is a pressing operation of the effect button 136 during execution of the projecting button effect, a new button effect (super projecting button effect) in which the super projecting button image 136aS is displayed and the effect button 136 projects again. ) Is started, and when the effect button 136 protruding in this button effect is pressed, a judge effect in which the effect movable body (family crest object 224E) operates is performed, and then a combination of the decorative patterns of the jackpot is displayed and the jackpot is achieved. The situation is shown.

  FIG. 142 (A (1) -1) to FIG. 142 (A (4) -2) are diagrams showing step-by-step another effect patterns of button effects executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. FIGS. 142 (A (1) -1) to (A (3) -1) are the same as FIGS. 137 (A (1) -1) to (A (3) -3). Therefore, the description is omitted.

  In this effect example, as shown in FIG. 142 (A (3) -1), after developing into super reach (swordsman reach), as shown in FIG. 142 (A (3) -2), a decorative symbol display device In 208, the first button effect is started. In the first button effect in this effect example, a super projecting button effect in which the super projecting button image 136aS is displayed instead of the button image 136a in the default display mode is started. Also, at this time, the effect button 136 is also projected upward, thereby promoting the operation of the effect button 136 for the player. That is, it can be said that the operation promotion effect of the effect button 136 is being performed by the projecting operation of the effect button 136. In addition, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a character “press” is displayed, which also prompts the operation of the effect button 136. As described above, in this effect example, a state in which the super projecting button effect is performed by the display of the super projecting button image 136aS and the projecting operation of the effect button 136 is shown. In addition, when a super protruding button effect is performed, a big hit may be made.

  In the present embodiment, the projecting operation of the effect button 136 is started at the timing when the super projecting button effect is started and the display of the super projecting button image 136aS is started, but the projecting operation of the effect button 136 is started. After that, the super projecting button effect may be started, or the projecting operation of the effect button 136 may be started after the super projecting button effect is started and the display of the super projecting button image 136aS is started.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is pressed at the timing shown in FIG. 142 (A (3) -3), a new button effect is started as shown in FIG. 142 (A (3) -4). The situation is shown. This button effect is a super projecting button effect in which the super projecting button image 136aS is displayed, and is an effect button in the super projecting button effect in FIGS. 142 (A (3) -2) to (A (3) -3). This is another button effect that is started when the user operates the button 136. That is, a state is shown in which the super projecting button effect is performed again as the second button effect in response to the operation button being operated in the super projecting button effect as the first button effect. At this time, the effect button 136 has once been pushed in, but is again in a state of protruding upward, thereby promoting the operation of the effect button 136 for the player. In addition, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character of "hot heat" is displayed, which suggests that the reliability of the big hit is high. Note that, in the present embodiment, the effect button 136 is operated during the execution of the super-projection button effect and the super-projection is performed, compared to the case where the effect button 136 is operated during the execution of the projection button effect and the super-projection button effect is started. When the button effect is performed again, it is easier to finally display the jackpot symbol mode in the final display. However, the present invention is not limited thereto. Ultimately, the jackpot symbol mode is more likely to be confirmed and displayed when the effect button 136 is operated and the super projecting button effect is started during the execution of the projecting button effect, than when the projecting button effect is performed again. A case where the effect button 136 is operated during the execution of the super projecting button effect and the super projecting button effect is performed again; Performance button 136 during the execution of the output button effect is operated in the case of super-protruding button effect is started, it may be a reliability of jackpot are the same.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the first button effect, the effect button 136 is operated and the projecting operation of the effect button 136 is started at the timing when the display of the super projecting button image 136aS is started. When the effect button 136 is operated in the effect, the projecting operation of the effect button 136 is started, and then the super projecting button effect may be started, or the super projecting button effect is started and the super projecting button image is started. After the start of the display of 136aS, the projecting operation of the effect button 136 may be started.

  Thereafter, when the pressing operation of the effect button 136 is performed at the timing shown in FIG. 142 (A (3) -5), a judge effect with a big hit decision is started as shown in FIG. 142 (A (3) -6). Is shown.

  Then, after the light emission of the light guide plate IL is completed and the image imitating the face of the lord is erased, and the crest actor 224E is lowered to the initial position, the decorative pattern shown in FIG. 142 (A (3) -7) is obtained. On the display device 208, a screen where the main character defeated the enemy swordsman and defeated the swordsman is displayed, and "decoration 2", which is to be stopped and displayed in the middle symbol, is displayed at approximately the center of the ornament symbol display device 208. It is notified that the display is scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the combination of the decoration patterns of “decoration 2−decoration 2−decoration 2”. In addition, the character “Ya-taze” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, celebrating a big hit.

  Thereafter, the decorative symbol display device 208 illustrated in FIG. 142 (A (4) -1) illustrates a state in which the temporary stop due to the swing fluctuation is performed in the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2”. Have been. At this time, the character "Big hit" is displayed near the navigation character YM. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 142 (A (4) -2), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of “decorative 2-decorative 2-decorative 2”. At this time, the change icon h0 is also deleted.

  As described above, in this effect example, in the first button effect, the super projecting button effect in which the super projecting button 136aS is displayed is performed instead of the button effect by the button image 136 which is the default mode. If there is a pressing operation of the effect button 136 during execution of the effect, a new super projecting button effect in which the super projecting button image 136aS is displayed and the effect button 136 protrudes again is started, and the effect button protruding in this button effect. When 136 is pushed in, a judge effect in which the effect movable body (house crest role object 224E) operates is performed, and thereafter, a combination of the jackpot decorative patterns is displayed to show a state of the jackpot.

  FIG. 142 (B (1) -1) to FIG. 142 (B (4) -2) are diagrams showing step-by-step another effect patterns of button effects executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. FIGS. 142 (B (1) -1) to (B (3) -1) are the same as FIGS. 137 (A (1) -1) to (A (3) -1). Therefore, the description is omitted.

  In this effect example, as shown in FIG. 142 (B (3) -1), after developing into super reach (swordsman reach), as shown in FIG. 142 (B (3) -2), a decorative symbol display device In 208, the first button effect is started. In the first button effect in this effect example, a weakly protruding button effect in which the weakly protruding button image 136aP2 is displayed instead of the button image 136a in the default display mode is started. The weakly protruding button image 136aP2 schematically represents a mode in which the effect button 136 protrudes upward, but has a mode in which the size is smaller than that of the protruding button image 136aP1. When the weakly protruding button effect is performed, it is more likely to be a big hit than the normal button effect, but it indicates that the reliability of the big hit is lower than when the protruding button effect is performed. Also, at this time, the effect button 136 is also projected upward, thereby promoting the operation of the effect button 136 for the player. That is, it can be said that the operation promotion effect of the effect button 136 is being performed by the projecting operation of the effect button 136. In addition, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a character “press” is displayed, which also prompts the operation of the effect button 136. As described above, in this effect example, the display of the weakly protruding button image 136aP2 and the protruding operation of the effect button 136 show that the weakly protruding button effect is performed. In addition, when the weakly protruding button effect is performed, a big hit may be surely achieved. Further, in this effect example, the display position of the remaining time display meter MT is the same position as when the button image 136a in the default mode is displayed, but may be displayed at a different position.

  In the present embodiment, the projecting operation of the effect button 136 is started at the timing when the weak button effect is started and the display of the weak button image 136aP2 is started. However, the projecting operation of the effect button 136 is started. After that, the weak projection button effect may be started, or the projection operation of the production button 136 may be started after the weak projection button effect is started and the display of the weak projection button image 136aP2 is started.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is pressed at the timing shown in FIG. 142 (B (3) -3), a new button effect is started as shown in FIG. 142 (B (3) -4). The situation is shown. This button effect is a super projecting button effect in which the super projecting button image 136aS is displayed, and is an effect button in the weak projecting button effect in FIGS. 142 (B (3) -2) to (B (3) -3). This is another button effect that is started when the user operates the button 136. Also, at this time, the effect button 136 has been pressed once, but is in a state of projecting upward again, thereby promoting the operation of the effect button 136 for the player. In addition, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character of "hot heat" is displayed, which suggests that the reliability of the big hit is high.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the first button effect, the effect button 136 is operated and the projecting operation of the effect button 136 is started at the timing when the display of the super projecting button image 136aS is started. When the effect button 136 is operated in the effect, the projecting operation of the effect button 136 is started, and then the super projecting button effect may be started, or the super projecting button effect is started and the super projecting button image is started. After the start of the display of 136aS, the projecting operation of the effect button 136 may be started. In the present embodiment, the effect button 136 is not vibrated in the weak protrusion button effect, and the effect button 136 is vibrated in the super protrusion button effect. However, the vibration of the effect button 136 is also suppressed in the weak protrusion button effect. The effect button 136 may not be vibrated in the super projecting button effect.

  Thereafter, when the staging button 136 is pressed at the timing shown in FIG. 142 (B (3) -5), a judge effect with a big hit decision is started as shown in FIG. 142 (B (3) -6). Is shown.

  Then, after the light emission of the light guide plate IL ends and the image imitating the face of the lord is erased, and the crest actor 224E descends to the initial position, the decorative pattern shown in FIG. 142 (B (3) -7) is obtained. On the display device 208, a screen where the main character defeated the enemy swordsman and defeated the swordsman is displayed, and "decoration 2", which is to be stopped and displayed in the middle symbol, is displayed at approximately the center of the ornament symbol display device 208. It is notified that the display is scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the combination of the decoration patterns of “decoration 2−decoration 2−decoration 2”. In addition, the character “Ya-taze” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, celebrating a big hit.

  Thereafter, the decorative symbol display device 208 illustrated in FIG. 142 (B (4) -1) illustrates a state in which the temporary stop due to the swing fluctuation is performed in the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 2−decoration 2−decoration 2”. Have been. At this time, the character "Big hit" is displayed near the navigation character YM. After that, as shown in FIG. 141 (B (4) -2), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a fixed display of the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of “decorative 2-decorative 2-decorative 2”. At this time, the change icon h0 is also deleted.

  As described above, in this effect example, in the first button effect, instead of the button image 136 which is the default mode, the weakly protruding button image 136aP2 having the effect button protruding is displayed and the effect button 136 protrudes. When a weakly protruding button effect is performed, and a pressing operation of the effect button 136 is performed during execution of the weakly protruding button effect, a new button effect (super) in which the super projecting button image 136aS is displayed and the effect button 136 protrudes again. When a protruding effect button 136 is pressed in this button effect, a judge effect in which the effect movable body (house crest role object 224E) is operated is performed, and then a combination of a jackpot decorative pattern is displayed. The appearance of a big hit is shown.

  FIG. 143 (A (1) -1) to FIG. 143 (A (4) -2) are diagrams showing step-by-step another effect patterns of button effects executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. 143 (A (1) -1) to (A (3) -1) are the same as FIGS. 137 (A (1) -1) to (A (3) -1). Therefore, the description is omitted.

  In this effect example, as shown in FIG. 143 (A (3) -1), after developing into super reach (swordsman reach), as shown in FIG. 143 (A (3) -2), a decorative symbol display device In 208, the first button effect is started. In the first button effect in this effect example, a weakly protruding button effect in which the weakly protruding button image 136aP2 is displayed instead of the button image 136a in the default display mode is started. In the weakly protruding button effect in this effect example, a blue effect EFB in which the periphery of the upper surface of the weakly protruding button image 136aP2 emits blue light is displayed, and the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT is displayed in blue. In this respect, the mode is different from the weak projection button effect shown in FIG. 142 (B (3) -2). Also, at this time, the effect button 136 is also projected upward, thereby promoting the operation of the effect button 136 for the player. In addition, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a character “press” is displayed, which also prompts the operation of the effect button 136.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is pressed at the timing shown in FIG. 143 (A (3) -3), a new button effect is started as shown in FIG. 143 (A (3) -4). The situation is shown. This button effect is a projecting button effect in which the projecting button image 136aP1 is displayed, and the effect button 136 in the weak projecting button effect in FIGS. 143 (A (3) -2) to (A (3) -3) is shown. This is another button effect that is started in response to an operation. In the protruding button effect in this effect example, the red effect EFR in a mode in which the periphery of the upper surface of the protruding button image 136aP1 emits red light is displayed, and the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT is displayed in red. The mode is different from the projection button effect shown in FIG. 141 (B (3) -2). Also, at this time, the effect button 136 has been pressed once, but is in a state of projecting upward again, thereby promoting the operation of the effect button 136 for the player. In addition, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character of "hot heat" is displayed, which suggests that the reliability of the big hit is high.

  In the present embodiment, in the first button effect, the effect button 136 is operated, and the projecting operation of the effect button 136 is started at the timing when the display of the projecting button image 136aP1 is started. However, the first button effect is performed. When the effect button 136 is operated in the above, the projecting operation of the effect button 136 may be started, and then the projecting button effect may be started, or the projecting button effect may be started and the projecting button image 136aP1 may be displayed. After that, the projecting operation of the effect button 136 may be started.

  Thereafter, when the staging button 136 is pressed at the timing shown in FIG. 143 (A (3) -5), as shown in FIG. 143 (A (3) -6), a judge effect with a fixed jackpot is started. Is shown.

  Then, after the light emission of the light guide plate IL is completed and the image imitating the face of the shrine is erased, and the crest actor 224E is lowered to the initial position, the decorative pattern shown in FIG. 143 (A (3) -7) is obtained. On the display device 208, a screen where the main character defeated the enemy swordsman and defeated the swordsman is displayed, and "decoration 2", which is to be stopped and displayed in the middle symbol, is displayed at approximately the center of the ornament symbol display device 208. It is notified that the display is scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the combination of the decoration patterns of “decoration 2−decoration 2−decoration 2”. In addition, the character “Ya-taze” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, celebrating a big hit.

  Thereafter, the decorative symbol display device 208 illustrated in FIG. 143 (A (4) -1) illustrates a state in which the temporary stop due to the swing fluctuation is performed in the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 2−decoration 2−decoration 2”. Have been. At this time, the character "Big hit" is displayed near the navigation character YM. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 143 (A (4) -2), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of “decorative 2-decorative 2-decorative 2”. At this time, the change icon h0 is also deleted.

  As described above, in this effect example, in the first button effect, instead of the button image 136 which is the default mode, the effect button is protruded and the weakly protruding button image 136aP2 in which the effect is emitted with a blue effect is displayed. A weakly protruding button effect in which the button 136 protrudes is performed. If the effect button 136 is pressed during execution of the weakly protruding button effect, the protruding button image 136aP1 that emits light with a red effect is displayed and the effect button 136 is displayed. Starts a new button effect (projecting button effect) that projects again, and when the projecting button 136 that is protruded in this button effect is pressed, a judge effect is performed in which the effect movable body (the crest role object 224E) operates. A combination of the decorative patterns is displayed and a big hit is shown.

  FIG. 143 (B (1) -1) to FIG. 143 (B (4) -2) are diagrams showing stepwise another effect pattern of the button effect executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. The effect examples shown in FIGS. 143 (B (1) -1) to (B (4) -2) are shown in FIGS. 137 (B (1) -1) to (B (4) -2). This is an effect pattern that is different from the effect pattern, in which the button effect is not started even when the first button effect is started, and the button effect is started after a predetermined time delay. I have. Note that FIGS. 143 (B (1) -1) to (B (3) -1) are the same as FIGS. 137 (B (1) -1) to (B (3) -1). Therefore, the description is omitted.

  In this effect example, as shown in FIG. 143 (B (3) -1), after the game has developed into a super reach (swordsman reach), as shown in FIG. 143 (B (3) -2), the first button The figure shows that the button effect is not started even when the effect is started. In addition, a question mark is displayed near the navigation character YM, giving a sense of incongruity that the first button effect is not started.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 143 (B (3) -3), if the first button effect has been started, it is shown that the operation is valid, and a question is displayed along with the “button” near the navigation character YM. A mark is displayed to indicate that the first button effect was not started.

  Thereafter, the button effect is started at the timing shown in FIG. 143 (B (3) -4). This button effect is a super projecting button effect in which the super projecting button image 136aS is displayed, and the button effect is not started at the timing when the first button effect is started, but after a predetermined time elapses, the button effect (super (Protruding button effect) may be started. At this time, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character “KITTER” is displayed, indicating that the user is waiting for the start of the button effect. In this effect example, the button effect is not started at the timing when the first button effect is started, and the button effect is started with a delay of a predetermined time, so that the reliability of the big hit is improved. When the button effect is started with a delay as in the example of this effect, the super-protruding button effect may be started without fail, and in this case, a big hit may be made.

  Thereafter, when the staging button 136 is pressed at the timing shown in FIG. 143 (B (3) -5), as shown in FIG. 143 (B (3) -6), a judge effect with a fixed jackpot is started. Is shown.

  Then, after the light emission of the light guide plate IL is finished and the image imitating the face of the lord is erased, and the crest actor 224E is lowered to the initial position, the decorative pattern shown in FIG. 143 (B (3) -7) is obtained. On the display device 208, a screen where the main character defeated the enemy swordsman and defeated the swordsman is displayed, and "decoration 2", which is to be stopped and displayed in the middle symbol, is displayed at approximately the center of the ornament symbol display device 208. It is notified that the display is scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the combination of the decoration patterns of “decoration 2−decoration 2−decoration 2”. In addition, the character “Ya-taze” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, celebrating a big hit.

    Thereafter, the decorative symbol display device 208 illustrated in FIG. 143 (B (4) -1) illustrates a state in which the temporary stop due to the swing fluctuation is performed in the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 2−decoration 2−decoration 2”. Have been. At this time, the character "Big hit" is displayed near the navigation character YM. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 143 (B (4) -2), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of “decorative 2-decorative 2-decorative 2”. At this time, the change icon h0 is also deleted.

  As described above, in this effect example, the button effect is not started even when the first button effect is started, and the button effect (super projecting button effect) is performed at a timing after a predetermined time has elapsed (delayed). When the effect button 136 protrudes in this button effect and is pressed, a judge effect in which the effect movable body (house crest role object 224E) operates is performed, and thereafter, a combination of the jackpot decorative patterns is displayed and the state of the jackpot is achieved. It is shown.

  FIG. 144 (A (1) -1) to FIG. 144 (A (4) -2) are diagrams showing step-by-step another effect patterns of button effects executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. In this effect example, when the button operation is performed in the first button effect to start the second button effect, an animation in which the mode of the button image gradually changes is performed. Note that FIGS. 144 (A (1) -1) to (A (3) -3) are the same as FIGS. 137 (A (1) -1) to (A (3) -3). Therefore, the description is omitted.

  In this effect example, when the operation of the effect button 136 is performed at the timing shown in FIG. 144 (A (3) -3), as shown in FIG. 144 (A (3) -4), in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, , “Attention” is displayed, and the button animation is started. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 144 (A (3) -4) to FIG. 144 (A (3) -6), after the animation in the mode in which the button image 136a gradually protrudes is displayed, The state where the button image 136aP1 is deformed is shown. At this time, a red effect EFR that emits red light is displayed around the upper surface of the protruding button image 136aP1. The remaining time display meter MT also shows that the gauge portion changes to red and the remaining amount of the gauge increases and becomes full at the timing shown in FIG. 144 (A (3) -6). . Thus, the second button effect is started.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 144 (A (3) -7), a projecting button effect as a second button effect is started. This protruding button effect is another button effect that is started when the effect button 136 is operated in the button effects in FIGS. 144 (A (3) -2) to (A (3) -3). is there. In the protruding button effect in this effect example, the red effect EFR in a mode in which the periphery of the upper surface of the protruding button image 136aP1 emits red light is displayed, and the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT is displayed in red. Also, at this time, the effect button 136 is in a protruding state, thereby promoting the operation of the effect button 136 for the player. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character “press” is displayed to urge the operation of the effect button 136.

  In the present embodiment, the effect button 136 is operated in the first button effect to start the button animation, the button animation ends, and the effect button 136 projects at the timing at which the second button effect starts the projecting button effect. The operation is started, but the projecting operation of the effect button 136 may be started at the timing when the button animation starts, or the projecting button 136 is projected after the projecting button effect as the second button effect starts. The operation may be started.

  Thereafter, when the staging button 136 is pressed at the timing shown in FIG. 144 (A (3) -8), as shown in FIG. 144 (A (3) -9), a judge effect with a big hit decision is started. Is shown.

  Then, after the light emission of the light guide plate IL is completed and the image imitating the face of the lord is erased, and the family crest actor 224E is lowered to the initial position, the decorative pattern shown in FIG. 144 (A (3) -10). On the display device 208, a screen where the main character defeated the enemy swordsman and defeated the swordsman is displayed, and "decoration 2", which is to be stopped and displayed in the middle symbol, is displayed at approximately the center of the ornament symbol display device 208. It is notified that the display is scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the combination of the decoration patterns of “decoration 2−decoration 2−decoration 2”. In addition, the character “Ya-taze” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, celebrating a big hit.

  Thereafter, the decorative symbol display device 208 illustrated in FIG. 144 (A (4) -1) illustrates a state in which the temporary stop due to the swing fluctuation is performed in the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2”. Have been. At this time, the character "Big hit" is displayed near the navigation character YM. After that, as shown in FIG. 144 (A (4) -2), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a fixed display of the combination of the big hit decorative symbols of “decorative 2-decorative 2-decorative 2”. At this time, the change icon h0 is also deleted.

  Thus, in this effect example, when the effect button 136 is operated in the first button effect, the button animation starts and the button image changes, and when the change of the button image is completed, the second button effect (protruding button) Direction) is starting to appear. Then, when the protruding effect button 136 is pressed in the protruding button effect as the second button effect, a judge effect in which the effect movable body (house crest role object 224E) is operated is performed, and then a combination of the jackpot decorative patterns is displayed. It shows a big hit. The button animation described above is not limited to being executed only in this effect example, and may be executed in another effect example.

  In the present embodiment, two states of the button, that is, a normal button state which is a default state and a state where the button is protruded, have been described, for example, as shown in FIG. 144 (a). In contrast to the default state, another state may be the state in which the effect button 136 vibrates as shown in (b) of FIG. The effect button 136 as shown in (c) may vibrate and may be further rotated. That is, when the state of the effect button 136 shown in (a) of FIG. 144 (B) is set to the first state, the state of the effect button 136 shown in (b) of FIG. 144 (B) or FIG. The state of the effect button 136 shown in FIG. 144C can be referred to as a second state, and the state of the effect button 136 shown in FIG. The state of the effect button 136 shown in (c) of (B) can also be referred to as a second state.

  FIG. 145 is a diagram illustrating a stepwise example of a mini-game effect performed on the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment.

  On the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 145 ((1) -1), the decorative symbol combination of "decorative 2-decorative 5-decorative 7" is stopped and displayed. Although the background here is not displayed, for example, a default background image is displayed. In the following description, when the background is not displayed, a default background image is displayed unless otherwise specified. Various background images different from the default background image (for example, a background image according to the mode) may be displayed. In addition, a second hold number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, a fourth symbol or a second decorative symbol may be displayed. On the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208, a navigation character YM is displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 145 ((1) -1), since the symbols are stopped and displayed, the change icon h0 is not displayed.

  Further, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 145 is a special figure low probability general figure low probability state. On the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric support state, the hold icon of the special figure 1 is displayed. Note that a reserved icon display area of the special figure 2 may be provided in a predetermined area (for example, the right end of the display screen) of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric support state.

  In a reserve icon display area formed on the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208, a reserve icon representing the reservation of the special figure 1 is displayed. The number of reservations in Toku-zu 1 is represented by the number of the holding icons in Toku-zu 1 and the second number-of-holds display, in addition to the number of lighting of the Toku-zu 1 holding lamp 218. In addition to the number of lighting of the holding lamp 220, the number of the holding icons in the special map 2 and the second holding number display are also displayed. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest winning) may be referred to as a first hold icon, the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as a second hold icon. In the holding icon display area, the holding icons are displayed side by side, and the holding icon on the right side is the holding icon with the older winning.

  In FIG. 145 ((1) -1), the three reserved icons h11, h12, and h13 of the special figure 1 are displayed in the reserved icon display area, and the three reserved icons h11, h12, and h13 of the special figure 1 are displayed. Are displayed in a default display mode (circular, unpatterned and white display mode). That is, the default hold icon of Toku-zu 1 is a round hold icon.

  On the other hand, none of the suspension icons of the special map 2 are displayed. This is because, as described above, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 145 is the non-power support state (non-time saving state), so that the power chute is hard to open and it is difficult to win the special figure 2 start port 232. This is because it is in a state.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the special icon of the special figure which is easier to win in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is displayed according to the control state (game state), and the reserve icon of the other special figure is displayed. It is not displayed. That is, when the control state is the non-power support state, as shown in FIG. 145 ((1) -1), the hold icon of the special figure 1 is displayed in the hold icon display area, and the hold icon of the special figure 2 Is not displayed. On the other hand, when the control state is the power support state, on the other hand, the hold icon of Toku-zu 2 is displayed and the hold icon of Toku-zu 1 is not displayed. In the non-power support state, the hold icon of the special figure 2 may be displayed, or in the power support state, the hold icon of the special figure 1 may be displayed.

  In the present embodiment, the start of the design change display of the special figure is performed in the order of the start of change in the special figure display device → the start of moving animation of the reserved icon or the deletion → the start of change of the decorative design. Is also good.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 145 ((1) -2), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is exhausted and the symbol change display of the special figure 1 is started, and the first special figure display device 212 is displayed. Is started. In addition, a moving animation of the holding icons h11 to h13 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the holding icon (the holding icon which is a target of the current symbol change) at the display position of the first holding icon h11 is changed to the decorative symbol display device. The moving icon is moved to a changing icon display area formed at the lower center of the center 208 and is displayed as a changing icon h0, the second holding icon h12 is moved to the display position of the first holding icon h11, and the first holding icon h11 is changed. , The third holding icon h13 moves to the display position of the second holding icon h12, and is displayed as the second holding icon h12. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol has also been started. The display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 is the same as the display mode of the digested hold icon h11, but may be different.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 145 ((1) -3), a state is displayed in which the decorative symbol during the variable display is reduced and displayed at the upper left corner of the display screen. In addition, a question mark is displayed near the navigation character YM, suggesting that some effect is started.

  Thereafter, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 145 ((1) -4) shows a state in which a “dice slot game”, which is one of the mini games, has been started. At this time, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character of "mini game" is displayed to notify the start of the mini game. When the “dice slot game” is started, an explanation display of “shake the dice with a button” is displayed in the upper center of the display screen, and the effect button 136 is operated three times within the validity period of the dice to roll the dice. It is shown that the mission is to change the combination of (symbols) to a specific combination, and that when the mission is achieved, a notice effect according to the combination of dice rolls is started. Specifically, in the effect example shown in FIG. 145 ((1) -4), when the combination of the rolls of “4-5-6” is displayed, the display mode of the hold icon changes, and the look-ahead notice Is started, and when the combination of the dice roll of “5-5-5” is displayed, the button icon for notifying that the button effect is started is stocked, and “1-1-1” is displayed. When the combination of the dice rolls is displayed, it is notified that it is a notice of a fever. It should be noted that other combinations of dice rolls may be displayed and another type of notice (for example, a hidden notice) may be started.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 145 ((1) -5), the variable display of the three dice is started, and the button images 136a1 to 136a3 are provided below each of the three dice in the variable display. It is displayed, and the character of "three hits" is displayed at the top of the display screen to urge the user to operate the effect button 136 three times. Further, a remaining time display meter MT is also displayed below these button images 136a1 to 136a3, and the gauge decreases as the operation valid period elapses. Then, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the word "start" is displayed to notify that the mini game has started.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated once at the timing shown in FIG. 145 ((1) -6), the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. The dice symbol is stopped and displayed, and "5" is displayed. At this time, the character display displayed at the upper center of the display screen changes from “three hits” to “two hits”, prompting the user to operate the effect button 136 two more times.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated once at the timing shown in FIG. 145 ((1) -8), the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. The dice symbol is stopped and displayed, and "5" is displayed. At this time, the character display displayed at the upper center of the display screen changes from “double hit” to “last”, prompting to operate the effect button 136 one more time.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated once at the timing shown in FIG. 145 ((1) -10), the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. The dice symbol is stopped and displayed, "5" is displayed, and the combination of the dice roll of "5-5-5" is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 145 ((1) -12), the character "button stock determined!" Is displayed at the center of the display screen, and "x1" is displayed together with the button icon BTN on the right side of the navigation character YM. The character and the word “waiting” are displayed, and a notice is given that the button effect is started at least once.

  After that, when the mini game is over, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 145 ((1) -13) enlarges the decorative symbol, moves it to the center of the display screen, and continues the variable display.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 145 ((1) -14), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 145 ((1) -15), the second stop is performed, and “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and as shown in FIG. 145 ((2) -1). A reach state is formed. On the other hand, in the middle symbol, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 145 ((2) -2), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state in which a weak Sabohani group notice is being performed.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 145 ((3) -1), the decorative symbol display device 208 develops into a super reach (swordsman reach), and displays a screen in which the main character, the main character, and the enemy swordsman confront each other.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 illustrated in FIG. 145 ((3) -2), the character “Activate!” Is displayed near the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the button effect is started. Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 145 ((3) -3) to ((3) -4), a button effect start animation in which the button icon BTN moves to the center of the display screen while expanding is displayed. Then, when the button effect start animation is completed as shown in FIG. 145 ((3) -4), the button image 136a which is the default display mode is displayed as shown in FIG. 145 ((3) -5). At the same time, a remaining time display meter MT is displayed below the button image 136a to notify that the notice by the button effect has started. Thereafter, the operation effective period of the effect button 136 is started, and the display of the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT decreasing is also started. At this time, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character "press" is displayed to urge the operation of the effect button 136.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 145 ((3) -6), as shown in FIG. 145 ((3) -7), the decorative design display device 208 displays the weak cut-in image CI1b. Is displayed. In the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a question mark is attached together with the character of "chance", which excites a sense of expectation for a big hit.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 145 ((3)-8), the crest actor 224 </ b> E rises and the upper end portion overlaps the decorative symbol display device 208, and moves up and down to judge whether or not a big hit will occur. There is a role-playing role.

  However, as shown in FIG. 145 ((3) -9), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a screen in which the hero's lord lost to the enemy swordsman and was defeated. , "Decoration 3" which is to be stopped and displayed in the middle symbol is displayed, and it is notified that the display is to be stopped and displayed in the combination of the decoration symbols of "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2". On the other hand, it is shown that the judge's previous role of the role of the crest actor 224E ends, and the crest actor 224E descends and returns to the initial position.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 145 ((4) -1), the decorative symbol display device 208 temporarily stops due to swing fluctuations in the decorative symbol combination of “decorative 2-decorative 3-decorative 2”. It is shown. At this time, the character "Sorry" is displayed near the navigation character YM, and it is notified that a loss result will be displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 145 ((4) -2), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the final decorative symbol combination of “decorative 2-decorative 3-decorative 2”. At this time, the change icon h0 is also deleted.

  As described above, in this effect example, as a result of the mini-game performed by operating the effect button 136, the button icon for notifying that the button effect is to be performed is stocked, and then one of the stocked button icons is consumed. Button production is performed.

  FIG. 146 is a view showing step by step another effect pattern of the mini game effect executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 146 ((1) -1), the decorative symbol combination of “decorative 2-decorative 5-decorative 7” is stopped and displayed. Although the background here is not displayed, for example, a default background image is displayed. In the following description, when the background is not displayed, a default background image is displayed unless otherwise specified. Various background images different from the default background image (for example, a background image according to the mode) may be displayed. In addition, a second hold number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, a fourth symbol or a second decorative symbol may be displayed. On the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208, a navigation character YM is displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 146 ((1) -1), since the symbols are stopped and displayed, the change icon h0 is not displayed.

  Further, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 146 is a special figure low probability general figure low probability state. On the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric support state, the hold icon of the special figure 1 is displayed. Note that a reserved icon display area of the special figure 2 may be provided in a predetermined area (for example, the right end of the display screen) of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric support state.

  In a reserve icon display area formed on the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208, a reserve icon representing the reservation of the special figure 1 is displayed. The number of reservations in Toku-zu 1 is represented by the number of the holding icons in Toku-zu 1 and the second number-of-holds display, in addition to the number of lighting of the Toku-zu 1 holding lamp 218. In addition to the number of lighting of the holding lamp 220, the number of the holding icons in the special map 2 and the second holding number display are also displayed. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest winning) may be referred to as a first hold icon, the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as a second hold icon. In the holding icon display area, the holding icons are displayed side by side, and the holding icon on the right side is the holding icon with the older winning.

  In FIG. 146 ((1) -1), the three reserved icons h11, h12, and h13 of the special figure 1 are displayed in the reserved icon display area, and the three reserved icons h11, h12, and h13 of the special figure 1 are displayed. Are displayed in a default display mode (circular, unpatterned and white display mode). That is, the default hold icon of Toku-zu 1 is a round hold icon.

  On the other hand, none of the suspension icons of the special map 2 are displayed. This is because, as described above, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 145 is the non-power support state (non-time saving state), so that the power chute is hard to open and it is difficult to win the special figure 2 start port 232. This is because it is in a state.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the special icon of the special figure which is easier to win in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is displayed according to the control state (game state), and the reserve icon of the other special figure is displayed. It is not displayed. That is, when the control state is the non-power support state, as shown in FIG. 146 ((1) -1), the hold icon of the special figure 1 is displayed in the hold icon display area, and the hold icon of the special figure 2 is displayed. Is not displayed. On the other hand, when the control state is the power support state, on the other hand, the hold icon of Toku-zu 2 is displayed and the hold icon of Toku-zu 1 is not displayed. In the non-power support state, the hold icon of the special figure 2 may be displayed, or in the power support state, the hold icon of the special figure 1 may be displayed.

  In the present embodiment, the start of the design change display of the special figure is performed in the order of the start of change in the special figure display device → the start of moving animation of the reserved icon or the deletion → the start of change of the decorative design. Is also good.

  Further, in this effect example, the characters "x1" and "waiting" are displayed together with the button icon BTN on the right side of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the button effect is started at least once. You. That is, a state is shown in which the button icon BTN is stocked before the previous symbol change display, and the pre-reading notice is performed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 146 ((1) -2), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is exhausted, the symbol change display of the special figure 1 is started, and the first special figure display device 212 is displayed. Is started. In addition, a moving animation of the holding icons h11 to h13 of the special figure 1 is performed, and the holding icon (the holding icon which is a target of the current symbol change) at the display position of the first holding icon h11 is changed to the decorative symbol display device. The moving icon is moved to a changing icon display area formed at the lower center of the center 208 and is displayed as a changing icon h0, the second holding icon h12 is moved to the display position of the first holding icon h11, and the first holding icon h11 is changed. , The third holding icon h13 moves to the display position of the second holding icon h12, and is displayed as the second holding icon h12. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the decorative symbol has also been started. The display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 is the same as the display mode of the digested hold icon h11, but may be different.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 146 ((1) -3), a state is displayed in which the decorative symbol during variable display is reduced and displayed at the upper left corner of the display screen.

  Thereafter, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 146 ((1) -4) shows a state in which a “dice slot game”, which is one of the mini games, has been started. When the “dice slot game” is started, an explanation display of “shake the dice with a button” is displayed in the upper center of the display screen, and the effect button 136 is operated three times within the validity period of the dice to roll the dice. It is shown that the mission is to change the combination of (symbols) to a specific combination, and that when the mission is achieved, a notice effect according to the combination of dice rolls is started. Specifically, in the effect example shown in FIG. 146 ((1) -4), when the combination of the roll of “4-5-6” is displayed, the display mode of the hold icon changes, and the look-ahead notice Is started, and when the combination of the dice roll of “5-5-5” is displayed, the button icon for notifying that the button effect is started is stocked, and “1-1-1” is displayed. When the combination of the dice rolls is displayed, it is notified that it is a notice of a fever. It should be noted that other combinations of dice rolls may be displayed and another type of notice (for example, a hidden notice) may be started.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 146 ((1) -5), the variable display of the three dice is started, and the button images 136a1 to 136a3 are provided below each of the three dice in the variable display. It is displayed, and the character of "three hits" is displayed at the top of the display screen to urge the user to operate the effect button 136 three times. Further, a remaining time display meter MT is also displayed below these button images 136a1 to 136a3, and the gauge decreases as the operation valid period elapses.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated once at the timing shown in FIG. 146 ((1) -6), the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. The dice symbol is stopped and displayed, and "5" is displayed. At this time, the character display displayed at the upper center of the display screen changes from “three hits” to “two hits”, prompting the user to operate the effect button 136 two more times.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated once at the timing shown in FIG. 146 ((1) -8), the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. The dice symbol is stopped and displayed, and "5" is displayed. At this time, the character display displayed at the upper center of the display screen changes from “double hit” to “last”, prompting to operate the effect button 136 one more time.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated once at the timing shown in FIG. 146 ((1) -10), the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. The dice symbol is stopped and displayed, "5" is displayed, and the combination of the dice roll of "5-5-5" is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 146 ((1) -12), the character "Button stock determined!" Is displayed at the center of the display screen, and the button icon BTN displayed on the right side of the navigation character YM is changed to one. The display of the character of “× 1” indicating that the button is stocked changes to “× 2”, and a notice is given that the button effect is started at least twice.

  After that, when the mini game is finished, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 146 ((1) -13) enlarges the decorative symbol, moves it to the center of the display screen, and continues the variable display.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 146 ((1) -14), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 146 ((1) -15), the second stop is performed, and “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, as shown in FIG. 146 ((2) -1). A reach state is formed. On the other hand, in the middle symbol, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 146 ((2) -2), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state where a weak Sabohani group notice is being performed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 146 ((3) -1), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a screen in which the main character, the lord, and the enemy swordsman confront each other in the super-reach (swordsman reach).

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 146 ((3) -2), the character “Activate!” Is displayed near the navigation character YM, and “× 2” indicating the stock number of the button icon BTN is displayed. Is changed to “× 1”, and it is notified that one button icon BTN is digested and the button effect is started. Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 146 ((3) -3) to (3) -4), a button effect start animation in which the button icon BTN moves to the center of the display screen while expanding is displayed. Then, when the button effect start animation is completed as shown in FIG. 146 ((3) -4), the button image 136a which is the default display mode is displayed as shown in FIG. 146 ((3) -5). At the same time, a remaining time display meter MT is displayed below the button image 136a to notify that the notice by the button effect has started. Thereafter, the operation effective period of the effect button 136 is started, and the display of the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT decreasing is also started. At this time, the character "press" is displayed above the button image 136a to urge the operation of the effect button 136.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 146 ((3) -6), as shown in FIG. 146 ((3) -7), a new button effect is displayed instead of displaying the cut-in image. Is started. This button effect is a deca-button effect in which a deca-button image 136aL is displayed, and indicates that the effect button 136 has been operated in the button effects in FIGS. 146 ((3) -5) to (A (3) -6). This is another button effect that is started as an opportunity. At this time, the light emission mode of the chance button lamp 138 that causes the effect button 136 to emit light changes. For example, the light emission in blue in the first button effect changes to red when the second button effect is started. Emits light.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 146 ((3) -8), the judge effect of determining the big hit is started in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 146 ((3) -9). Is shown.

  Then, after the light emission of the light guide plate IL is completed and the image imitating the face of the lord is erased, and the crest actor 224E is lowered to the initial position, the decorative symbol display shown in FIG. 146 ((3) -10) is made. In the device 208, a screen where the main character defeated the enemy swordsman and defeated the swordsman is displayed, and "decoration 2" to be stopped and displayed in the middle symbol is displayed substantially in the center of the ornament symbol display device 208, It is notified that the display is to be stopped and displayed with the combination of the decoration symbols of “decoration 2−decoration 2−decoration 2”. In addition, near the navigation character YM, a character "x1" and a character "waiting" are displayed together with the button icon BTN, indicating that one button icon BTN is still stocked. .

  Thereafter, the decorative symbol display device 208 illustrated in FIG. 146 ((4) -1) illustrates a state in which the temporary stop due to the fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2”. ing. At this time, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the effect EF1 is displayed so as to cover the entire button icon BTN, and a state in which the effect of erasing the button icon BTN is being performed. After that, as shown in FIG. 146 ((4) -2), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the decorative symbol combination of the big hit of “decorative 2-decorative 2-decorative 2”. At this time, the change icon h0 is also deleted. In this embodiment, when the symbol is stopped and displayed, the button icon BTN is deleted when the stock remains, but the button icon BTN stock is displayed without being deleted. Is also good. Further, the timing at which the button icon BTN is deleted is not limited to the one performed during the swing fluctuation as described above, and may be, for example, during the execution of the big hit game or after the big hit game ends.

  As described above, in this effect example, as a result of the mini-game performed by operating the effect button 136, the button icon BTN for notifying that the button effect is to be performed is stocked, and thereafter, the stocked button icon BTN is one. A state in which the button effect is performed by digestion is shown. Further, in this effect example, a new button effect (deca button effect) is started by operating the effect button 136 in the first button effect, and when the effect button 136 is operated in this button effect, the effect movable body A judge effect in which the (home crest role item 224E) operates is performed, and thereafter, a combination of the jackpot decoration patterns is displayed to show a state of the jackpot. Also, in this effect example, the button effect is performed twice, but only one button icon BTN is consumed. Note that each time the button effect is performed, the button icon BTN may be digested one by one.

  FIG. 147 is a diagram showing step by step another effect pattern of the mini game effect executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. Note that FIGS. 147 ((1) -1) to ((3) -6) are the same as FIGS. 146 ((1) -1) to ((3) -6), and thus description thereof will be omitted. Omitted. Also, as shown in FIG. 147 ((1) -1), in this effect example as well, the button icons BTN are stocked before the previous symbol change display, that is, the button icons BTN extend over a plurality of symbol change displays. The state where the stock display of the BTN is performed is shown.

  In this effect example, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 147 ((3) -6), a new button effect is started as shown in FIG. 147 ((3) -7). It is shown. This button effect is a super projecting button effect in which the super projecting button image 136aS is displayed, and the effect button 136 is operated in the button effects in FIGS. 147 ((3) -5) to ((3) -6). This is another button effect that is started in response to the fact. It is suggested that when the super protruding button effect is performed, a big hit is more likely to occur (that is, the big hit symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed) than when the normal button effect or the deca button effect is performed. Also, at this time, the effect button 136 is also projected upward, thereby promoting the operation of the effect button 136 for the player. That is, it can be said that the operation promotion effect of the effect button 136 is being performed by the projecting operation of the effect button 136. As described above, in this effect example, a state in which the super projecting button effect is performed by the display of the super projecting button image 136aS and the projecting operation of the effect button 136 is shown. In addition, when a super protruding button effect is performed, a big hit may be made.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the first button effect, the effect button 136 is operated and the projecting operation of the effect button 136 is started at the timing when the display of the super projecting button image 136aS is started. When the effect button 136 is operated in the effect, the projecting operation of the effect button 136 is started, and then the super projecting button effect may be started, or the super projecting button effect is started and the super projecting button image is started. After the start of the display of 136aS, the projecting operation of the effect button 136 may be started.

  Thereafter, when the pressing operation of the effect button 136 is performed at the timing shown in FIG. 147 ((3) -8), the appearance of the judge effect of determining the big hit is started as shown in FIG. 147 ((3) -9). It is shown. In this judge effect, the crest role item 224E rises to a position that overlaps the center of the display screen of the decorative design display device 208, and the light guide plate IL emits light to imitate the image of the lord's face. The effect that appears on the screen is performed. Thereby, it is notified that the big hit is determined.

  Then, after the light emission of the light guide plate IL is finished and the image imitating the face of the lord is erased, and the crest actor 224E is lowered to the initial position, the decorative symbol display shown in FIG. 147 ((3) -10). In the device 208, a screen where the main character defeated the enemy swordsman and defeated the swordsman is displayed, and "decoration 2" to be stopped and displayed in the middle symbol is displayed substantially in the center of the ornament symbol display device 208, It is notified that the display is to be stopped and displayed with the combination of the decoration symbols of “decoration 2−decoration 2−decoration 2”. In addition, near the navigation character YM, a character "x1" and a character "waiting" are displayed together with the button icon BTN, indicating that one button icon BTN is still stocked. .

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 illustrated in FIG. 147 ((4) -1), a state in which the temporary stop due to the swing fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 2−decoration 2−decoration 2” is shown. ing. In this effect example, the button icon BTN displayed near the navigation character YM is not deleted, and is displayed even after the big hit game is started. In addition, in this effect example, it is digested in the symbol fluctuation display after the big hit game ends. In other words, it can be said that a pre-reading advance notice regarding the symbol change display started after the big hit game is performed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 147 ((4) -2), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of “decorative 2-decorative 2-decorative 2”. At this time, the change icon h0 is also deleted.

  As described above, in this effect example, as a result of the mini-game performed by operating the effect button 136, the button icon BTN for notifying that the button effect is to be performed is stocked, and thereafter, the stocked button icon BTN is one. A state in which the button effect is performed by digestion is shown. Further, in this effect example, a new button effect (super-protruding button effect) is started by operating the effect button 136 in the first button effect, and when the effect button 136 is operated in this button effect, the effect is effected. A judge effect in which the movable body (the crest role object 224E) operates is performed, and thereafter, a combination of the jackpot decorative patterns is displayed to show a state of the jackpot. Also, in this effect example, the button effect is performed twice, but only one button icon BTN is consumed.

  FIG. 148 is a view showing step by step another effect pattern of the mini game effect executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. 148 ((1) -1) to ((1) -3) are the same as FIGS. 146 ((1) -1) to ((1) -3), and will not be described. Omitted. Further, as shown in FIG. 148 ((1) -1), also in this effect example, the button icons BTN are stocked before the previous symbol variation display, that is, the button icons BTN extend over a plurality of symbol variation displays. The state where the stock display of the BTN is performed is shown.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 148 ((1) -4) shows a state in which a “dice slot game”, which is one of the mini games, has been started. In the effect example shown in FIG. 148 ((1) -4), when the combination of the dice roll of “4-5-6” is displayed, the look-ahead notice in which the display mode of the hold icon changes is started, and “ When the combination of the dice rolls of "5-5-5" is displayed, the button icon for notifying that the button effect is started is stocked, and the roll of the dice of "1-1-1" is performed. When the combination is displayed, it indicates that some notice has begun.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 148 ((1) -5), the variable display of the three dice starts, and the button images 136a1 to 136a3 are provided below each of the three dice in the variable display. It is displayed, and the character of "three hits" is displayed at the top of the display screen to urge the user to operate the effect button 136 three times. Further, a remaining time display meter MT is also displayed below these button images 136a1 to 136a3, and the gauge decreases as the operation valid period elapses.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated once at the timing shown in FIG. 148 ((1) -6), the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 148 ((1) -7) displays the variable display in the left column. The dice symbol is stopped and displayed, and "1" is displayed. At this time, the character display displayed at the upper center of the display screen changes from “three hits” to “two hits”, prompting the user to operate the effect button 136 two more times.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated once at the timing shown in FIG. 148 ((1) -8), the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. The dice symbol is stopped and displayed, and "1" is displayed. At this time, the character display displayed at the upper center of the display screen changes from “double hit” to “last”, prompting to operate the effect button 136 one more time.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated once at the timing shown in FIG. 148 ((1) -10), the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. The dice symbol is stopped and displayed, "1" is displayed, and the combination of the dice roll of "1-1-1" is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 148 ((1) -12), the character of "decabutton stock!" Is displayed at the center of the display screen, and the button in the default mode displayed on the right side of the navigation character YM is displayed. A protruding button icon BTP is displayed above the icon BTN, and a notice is given that a protruding button effect or a super protruding button effect is to be started.

  Thereafter, when the mini game is over, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 148 ((1) -13), the decorative symbol is enlarged and moved to the center of the display screen, and the variable display is continued.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 148 ((1) -14), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 148 ((1) -15), the second stop is performed, "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed on the right symbol, and as shown in FIG. 148 ((2) -1). A reach state is formed. On the other hand, in the middle symbol, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed. In this effect example, the stocked protruding button icon BTP is overlapped with the decorative design, and is more difficult to see than when it is not overlapped with the decorative design. Here, the protruding button icon BTP may be displayed so as to overlap the decorative pattern.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 148 ((2) -2), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state in which a weak Sabohani group notice is being performed.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 148 ((3) -1), the decorative symbol display device 208 develops into super reach (swordsman reach), and displays a screen where the main character, the lord, and the enemy swordsman confront each other.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 148 ((3) -2), a state in which the super reach is continued is shown, but in this effect example, the button icon BTN is digested and the button effect is performed. There is no notification that it will be started. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 148 ((3) -3), the button icon 136a, which is the default display mode, is displayed without the button icon BTN and the protruding button icon BTP being digested, and the button image 136a is displayed below the button image 136a. Displays the remaining time display meter MT, and the button effect is started. Thereafter, the operation effective period of the effect button 136 is started, and the display of the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT decreasing is also started. At this time, the character "press" is displayed above the button image 136a to urge the operation of the effect button 136.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 148 ((3)-4), as shown in FIG. 148 ((3)-5), “displayed near the protruding button icon BTP”. It is informed that the display of “× 1” changes to the character of “activate” and the protruding button icon BTP is consumed. Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 148 ((3) -6) to ((3) -7), a button effect start animation in which the protruding button icon BTP moves to the center of the display screen while expanding is displayed. At this time, a display in which the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT displayed below the button image 136a becomes “0” and moves to the upper left corner of the display screen is also performed. Then, after the projecting button icon BTP becomes the projecting button image 136aP1 as shown in FIG. 148 ((3) -7), as shown in FIG. The character "J" is added to change to the super projecting button image 136aS, and it is notified that the super projecting button effect as a new button effect has started. At this time, the effect button 136 is also protruding. The timing at which the effect button 136 protrudes may be the timing when the display of the button effect start animation is completed, the timing before the display of the button effect start animation is started, or the start of the button effect start. The timing may be a timing after the display of the animation is started but before the display is completed, or a timing when the display of the button effect start animation is completed and the timing is changed to the super projecting button image 136aS. The timing after the change to the protruding button image 136aS may be used. The effect start animation may not be displayed, and may or may not be displayed.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is pressed down at the timing shown in FIG. 148 ((3) -9), the judge effect of determining the big hit starts on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 148 ((3) -10). Is shown.

  Then, after the light emission of the light guide plate IL is completed and the image imitating the face of the lord is erased, and the family crest actor 224E is lowered to the initial position, the decorative symbol display shown in FIG. 148 ((3) -11). In the device 208, a screen where the main character defeated the enemy swordsman and defeated the swordsman is displayed, and "decoration 2" to be stopped and displayed in the middle symbol is displayed substantially in the center of the ornament symbol display device 208, It is notified that the display is to be stopped and displayed with the combination of the decoration symbols of “decoration 2−decoration 2−decoration 2”. In addition, near the navigation character YM, a character "x1" and a character "waiting" are displayed together with the button icon BTN, indicating that one button icon BTN is still stocked. .

  Thereafter, the decorative symbol display device 208 illustrated in FIG. 148 ((4) -1) illustrates a state in which the temporary stop due to the fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2”. ing. In this effect example, the button icon BTN displayed near the navigation character YM is not deleted, and is displayed even after the big hit game is started. In addition, in this effect example, it is digested in the symbol fluctuation display after the big hit game ends. In other words, it can be said that a pre-reading advance notice regarding the symbol change display started after the big hit game is performed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 148 ((4) -2), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the decorative symbol combination of "big two-color two-color decoration 2". At this time, the change icon h0 is also deleted.

  As described above, in this effect example, as a result of the mini-game performed by operating the effect button 136, the projecting button icon BTP for notifying that the projecting button effect or the super projecting button effect is performed is stocked. When the effect button 136 is operated in the button effect that was started without being exhausted, a state in which the stocked protruding button icon BTP is digested and a new button effect (super projecting button effect) is performed is shown. ing. Then, when the effect button 136 is operated in this button effect, a judge effect in which the effect movable body (the crest role object 224E) operates is performed, and thereafter, a combination of the jackpot decorative patterns is displayed to show a state of the jackpot. Have been. Further, in this effect example, the button effect is performed twice, but only the protruding button icon BTP of the protruding button icon BTP and the button icon BTN is digested.

  FIG. 149 is a diagram showing step by step another effect pattern of the mini game effect executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. Note that FIGS. 149 ((1) -1) to ((3) -1) are the same as FIGS. 148 ((1) -1) to ((3) -1), and thus description thereof will be omitted. Omitted. Further, as shown in FIG. 149 ((1) -1), also in this effect example, the button icons BTN are stocked before the previous symbol variation display, that is, the button icons BTN are straddled over a plurality of symbol variation displays. The state where the stock display of the BTN is performed is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 149 ((3) -2), after the super reach is started, the display of “× 1” displayed near the button icon BTN is changed to “Activate” on the decorative symbol display device 208. It is notified that the button icon BTN has been digested and the button effect is started. In this effect example, as shown in FIG. 149 ((3) -3), the button icon BTN is deleted without executing the button effect start animation, and the button image 136a as a default display mode is displayed. At the same time, the remaining time display meter MT is displayed below the button image 136a, and the button effect is started. Thereafter, the operation effective period of the effect button 136 is started, and the display of the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT decreasing is also started. At this time, the character "press" is displayed above the button image 136a to urge the operation of the effect button 136. Thereafter, the effects shown in FIG. 149 ((3) -4) to FIG. 149 ((3) -10) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 149 ((3) -4) to ((3) -10) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 148 ((3) -10) except that the display of the stocked button icon BTN is not performed. ) -4) to ((3) -10), which are the same as the effects shown in FIG.

  After the judge effect shown in FIG. 149 ((3) -10) is completed, the light emission of the light guide plate IL is completed, the image imitating the lord's face is erased, and the family crest role item 224E is lowered to the initial position. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 149 ((3) -11), a screen in which the protagonist of the hero defeated the enemy swordsman and won is displayed, and the middle of the decorative symbol display device 208 has a middle. "Decoration 2" to be stopped and displayed on the symbol is displayed, and it is notified that the symbol is to be stopped and displayed with the combination of the decoration symbols "Decoration 2-Decoration 2-Decoration 2". In addition, the character “Ya-taze” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, celebrating a big hit.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 illustrated in FIG. 149 ((4) -1), a state in which the temporary stop due to the swing fluctuation is performed in the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2” is shown. ing. At this time, the character "Big hit" is displayed near the navigation character YM. Then, as shown in FIG. 149 ((4) -2), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the final symbol with a combination of the big hit decorative symbols of “decorative 2-decorative 2-decorative 2”. At this time, the change icon h0 is also deleted.

  As described above, in this effect example, as a result of the mini-game performed by operating the effect button 136, the projecting button icon BTP for notifying that the projecting button effect or the super projecting button effect is performed is stocked. One BTN is digested, and the first button effect is started without performing the button effect start animation. Then, when the effect button 136 is operated in this button effect, the protruding button icon BTP that has been stocked is digested, a button effect start animation is performed, and then a new button effect (super projecting button effect) is performed. . Then, when the effect button 136 is operated in this button effect, a judge effect in which the effect movable body (the crest role object 224E) operates is performed, and thereafter, a combination of the jackpot decorative patterns is displayed to show a state of the jackpot. Have been. That is, in this effect example, the button effect is performed twice, but the button icon BTN and the protruding button icon BTP are respectively digested and executed. Further, in this effect example, at the time of starting the first button effect that is started by digesting the button icon BTN, the button effect start animation is not executed, and the protruding button icon BTP is digested and started. At the start of the second button effect, a state in which a button effect start animation is executed is shown. Thereby, among the button effects performed a plurality of times, there may be a case where attention is paid to an effect with higher expectations. In this effect example, a button effect start animation using the button icon BTN may be performed when the first button effect is started.

  FIG. 150 is a view showing step by step another effect pattern of the mini game effect executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. Note that FIG. 150 ((1) -1) to FIG. ((2) -1) are the same as FIG. 148 ((1) -1) to FIG. 148 ((2) -1). Omitted. Also, as shown in FIG. 150 ((1) -1), also in this effect example, the button icons BTN are stocked before the previous symbol change display, that is, the button icons BTN extend over a plurality of symbol change displays. The state where the stock display of the BTN is performed is shown.

  Thereafter, the reach effect is started as shown in FIG. 150 ((2) -1), and then a weak Sabohani group notice is given on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 150 ((2) -2). Is shown. In this effect example, a timer notice display TM1 is displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen, and a state in which the timer notice is started is shown. "30:00" is displayed on the timer notice display TM1 as a timer display, which informs that a certain notice effect will start 30 seconds later.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 150 ((3) -1), the decorative symbol display device 208 develops into a super reach (swordsman reach), and displays a screen in which the hero's lord and the enemy swordsman confront each other. In the timer notice display TM1, the countdown continues, and “28:32” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 150 ((3) -1).

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 150 ((3) -2), a state in which the super reach is continued is shown. In this effect example, the button icon BTN is digested and the button effect is started. No notification is given. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 150 ((3) -3), the button image 136a, which is the default display mode, is displayed without the button icon BTN and the protruding button icon BTP being digested, and the button image 136a is displayed below the button image 136a. Displays the remaining time display meter MT, and the button effect is started. Thereafter, the operation effective period of the effect button 136 is started, and the display of the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT decreasing is also started. At this time, the character "press" is displayed above the button image 136a to urge the operation of the effect button 136. In the timer notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continues, and “17:88” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 150 ((3) -3).

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 150 ((3) -4), as shown in FIG. 150 ((3) -5), the display is performed in the vicinity of the protruding button icon BTP. It is informed that the display of “× 1” changes to the character of “activate” and the protruding button icon BTP is consumed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 150 ((3) -6) to FIG. 150 ((3) -7), a button effect start animation in which the protruding button icon BTP moves to the center of the display screen while expanding is displayed. At this time, a display in which the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT displayed below the button image 136a becomes “0” and moves to the upper left corner of the display screen is also performed. Then, after the protruding button icon BTP becomes the protruding button image 136aL as shown in FIG. 150 ((3) -7), the grandfather character is added as shown in FIG. 150 ((3) -8). The display changes to the super projecting button image 136aS, and it is notified that the super projecting button effect as a new button effect has been started. At this time, the effect button 136 is also protruding. The timing at which the effect button 136 protrudes may be the timing when the display of the button effect start animation is completed, the timing before the display of the button effect start animation is started, or the start of the button effect start. The timing may be a timing after the display of the animation is started but before the display is completed, or a timing when the display of the button effect start animation is completed and the timing is changed to the super projecting button image 136aS. The timing may be a timing after changing to the protruding button image 136aS, or a timing at which the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is completed and becomes “00:00”. Also, in this effect example, the super-protruding button effect was started as the second button effect, but the operation validity period was not started. On the other hand, in the timer notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display continued. At the timing shown in FIG. 150 ((3) -8), “04:17” is displayed. That is, in this effect example, the user is notified in advance that the effect button 136 in the super-protruding button effect, which is the second button effect, can be operated as a result of the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1. .

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 150 ((3) -9), the moving display of the timer notice display TM1 has been started, the display has moved from the upper left corner to the center, and the timer notice is displayed for the second time. It is suggested that the button corresponds to the button effect of (1). Further, in the timer notice display TM1, the countdown of the timer display is also continued, and “02:26” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 150 ((3) -9). This may make it easier to grasp the timing at which a certain announcement effect is started.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 150 ((3) -10), the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is completed, and when “00:00” is displayed on the timer display, the timer is displayed below the super projecting button image 136aS. The character "press" is added, and the operation validity period of the effect button 136 in the super projecting button effect as the second button effect is started. The timer notice display TM1 is thereafter deleted.

  Then, when the effect button 136 is pressed at the timing shown in FIG. 150 ((3) -11), the judge effect of determining the big hit starts on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 150 ((3) -12). Is shown.

  Then, after the light emission of the light guide plate IL ends and the image imitating the face of the lord is erased, and the family crest actor 224E descends to the initial position, the decorative symbol display shown in FIG. 150 ((3) -13). In the device 208, a screen where the main character defeated the enemy swordsman and defeated the swordsman is displayed, and "decoration 2" to be stopped and displayed in the middle symbol is displayed substantially in the center of the ornament symbol display device 208, It is notified that the display is to be stopped and displayed with the combination of the decoration symbols of “decoration 2−decoration 2−decoration 2”. In addition, near the navigation character YM, a character "x1" and a character "waiting" are displayed together with the button icon BTN, indicating that one button icon BTN is still stocked. .

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 illustrated in FIG. 150 ((4) -1), a state in which the temporary stop due to the swing fluctuation is performed in the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 2−decoration 2−decoration 2” is shown. ing. In this effect example, the button icon BTN displayed near the navigation character YM is not deleted, and is displayed even after the big hit game is started. In addition, in this effect example, it is digested in the symbol fluctuation display after the big hit game ends. In other words, it can be said that a pre-reading advance notice regarding the symbol change display started after the big hit game is performed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 150 ((4) -2), the decorative symbol display device 208 finally displays the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of “decorative 2-decorative 2-decorative 2”. At this time, the change icon h0 is also deleted.

  As described above, in this effect example, as a result of the mini-game being performed by operating the effect button 136, the projecting button icon BTP for notifying that the projecting button effect or the super projecting button effect is to be performed is stocked. Is started, a timer notice is given. After that, when the effect button 136 is operated in the button effect that is started without the button icon being digested, the stocked protruding button icon BTP is digested and a new button effect (super projecting button effect) is performed. The situation is shown. After that, when the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM1 is completed, the operation button 136 in the second button effect can be operated. Then, when the effect button 136 is operated in this button effect, a judge effect in which the effect movable body (the crest role object 224E) operates is performed, and thereafter, a combination of the jackpot decorative patterns is displayed to show a state of the jackpot. Have been. Further, in this effect example, the button effect is performed twice, but only the protruding button icon BTP of the protruding button icon BTP and the button icon BTN is digested.

  FIG. 151 (A (1) -1) to FIG. 151 (A (4) -2) are diagrams showing stepwise an example of the selection effect performed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. Note that FIGS. 151 (A (1) -1) to (A (3) -1) are the same as FIGS. 137 (A (1) -1) to (A (3) -1). Therefore, the description is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 151 (A (3) -1), after the super reach effect has been started, the decorative effect display device 208 shown in FIG. 151 (A (3) -2) has started the selected effect. The situation is shown. When the selection effect is started, the decoration design display device 208 displays an effect explanation display MS1 stating "Emergency notification! The final judge effect is determined by the button effect", indicating that the selection effect is started. The effect explanation display MS1 is overlapped with the decorative pattern that is displayed in a reduced size.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 151 (A (3) -3), an option display SL1 is displayed. In the option display SL1, the default button image 136a and the protruding button image 136aP1 are displayed side by side, and the display of the mode in which the button image 136a is surrounded by the cursor CSL represented in a square by a blue dashed line is displayed. Is being done.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 151 (A (3) -4), in the option display SL1, a display is performed in which the projection button image 136aP is surrounded by the cursor CSL. At this time, the display mode of the cursor CSL is changed to a red dashed line, and characters of “heat” are displayed on the left and right. It is reported that a big hit is more likely to occur when the image 136aP1 is selected.

  Thereafter, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 151 (A (3) -5) shows a state in which the button operation display BT1 is displayed so as to overlap the option display SL1. In the button operation display BT1, the remaining time display meter MT is displayed together with the button image 136a, and the character "Push!" Is displayed below the remaining time display meter MT to urge the operation of the effect button 136. In this selection effect, one of the button image 163a and the protrusion button image 137aP1 in the option display SL1 is selected by operating the effect button 136.

  After the operation effective period of the effect button 136 starts, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 151 (A (3) -6), the decorative symbol display shown in FIG. 151 (A (3) -7) In the device 208, the button operation display BT1 is deleted, and in the option display SL1, the cursor CSL surrounds the protruding button image 136aP1 to notify that the protruding button image 136aP1 has been selected. That is, a state in which the start of the projecting button effect is notified in advance is shown. Thus, in this effect example, a state in which the selection effect is performed as the first button effect is shown.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 151 (A (3) -8), when the option display SL1 is erased and the selected effect ends, the process returns to the super reach effect.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 illustrated in FIG. 151 (A (3) -9), the button effect is started. In this effect example, a protruding button effect in which the protruding button image 136aP1 selected in the selected effect is displayed is started as a button effect. In this protruding button effect, a red effect EFR in which the periphery of the upper surface of the protruding button image 136aP1 emits red light is displayed, and the color of the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen is changed. It is represented in red. Also, at this time, the effect button 136 is also projected upward, thereby promoting the operation of the effect button 136 for the player. In addition, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character of "hot heat" is displayed, indicating that the reliability of the big hit is high. As described above, in this effect example, a state in which the protrusion button effect is performed by the display of the protrusion button image 136aP1 and the protrusion operation of the effect button 136 is shown. That is, in this effect example, a state in which the projecting button effect displaying the projecting button image 136aP1 selected in the selected effect as the first button effect is performed as the second button effect is shown. It should be noted that when this protruding button effect is performed, a big hit may be made.

  In the present embodiment, the projecting operation of the effect button 136 is started at the timing when the projecting button effect is started and the display of the projecting button image 136aP1 is started. However, after the projecting operation of the effect button 136 is started. Alternatively, the projecting button effect may be started, or the projecting operation of the effect button 136 may be started after the projecting button effect is started and the display of the projecting button image 136aP1 is started.

  Thereafter, when the staging button 136 is pressed at the timing shown in FIG. 151 (A (3) -10), as shown in FIG. 151 (A (3) -11), a judge effect with a fixed jackpot is started. Is shown.

  Then, after the light emission of the light guide plate IL is completed and the image imitating the face of the lord is erased, and the family crest actor 224E is lowered to the initial position, the decorative pattern shown in FIG. 151 (A (3) -12). On the display device 208, a screen where the main character defeated the enemy swordsman and defeated the swordsman is displayed, and "decoration 2", which is to be stopped and displayed in the middle symbol, is displayed at approximately the center of the ornament symbol display device 208. It is notified that the display is scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the combination of the decoration patterns of “decoration 2−decoration 2−decoration 2”. In addition, the character “Ya-taze” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, celebrating a big hit.

  Thereafter, the decorative symbol display device 208 illustrated in FIG. 151 (A (4) -1) illustrates a state in which the temporary stop due to the swing fluctuation is performed in the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 2−decoration 2−decoration 2”. Have been. At this time, the character "Big hit" is displayed near the navigation character YM. After that, as shown in FIG. 151 (A (4) -2), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a fixed display of the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of “decorative 2-decorative 2-decorative 2”. At this time, the change icon h0 is also deleted.

  As described above, in this effect example, the selection effect is performed as the first button effect, and the button effect using the button image selected in the selection effect is performed as the second button effect. I have.

  Note that the button images selectable in the option display SL1 displayed in the selection effect in the present embodiment are not limited to those described above, and a different type of option display SL1 different from the above may be displayed.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 151 (I), a selection effect in which an option display SL1 including a button image 136a in a default mode and a deca button 136aL may be displayed, or as shown in FIG. 151 (II). In addition, a selection effect in which the option display SL1 including the button image 136a in the default mode and the lever image 136Va is displayed may be performed, or the button image 136a in the default mode as shown in FIG. 151 (III). A selection effect in which an option display SL1 for selecting from three or more button images including the button image 136aP1 and the lever image 136Va and displaying the option display SL1 may be performed. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. The gauge in which the remaining time display meter MT and the button image 136a of the mode and the image imitating the face of the bancho are displayed. And a time display meter MTa and Dekabotan image 136AL, selection effect that alternative display SL1 which is adapted to vary the reliability of the big hit by the display mode of at least remaining time display meter is displayed may be performed.

  FIG. 151 (B (1) -1) to FIG. 152 (B (4) -2) are diagrams showing step by step different effect patterns of the selection effect executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. The effects shown in FIGS. 151 (B (1) -1) to 152 (B (4) -2) are shown in FIGS. 151 (A (1) -1) to 151 (A (4) -2). In an effect pattern in which the indicated effect is to be executed, an effect executed when the effect button 136 is not operated in the selected effect is shown. Here, FIGS. 151 (B (1) -1) to 152 (B (3) -5) are similar to FIGS. 151 (A (1) -1) to (A (3) -5). Therefore, the description is omitted.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 152 (B (3) -6), after the operation effective period of the effect button 136 starts, the operation button 136 is in the effective operation period, and the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT is decreasing. The situation is shown.

  After that, when the operation valid period has elapsed without operating the effect button 136, the effect EF2 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 152 (B (3) -7) so as to overlap the option display SL1. Then, the selection effect is ended without any button image being selected due to time out, and the option display SL1 is erased.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 152 (B (3) -8), when the option display SL1 is erased and the selected effect ends, the process returns to the super reach effect.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 152 (B (3) -9), a button effect is started. In this effect example, a normal button effect in which a button image 136a in a default mode is displayed is started as a button effect, and the character “press” is displayed near the navigation character YM, and the operation of the effect button 136 is prompted. It is. In other words, in this effect example, when the effect button 136 is operated in the selected effect, the projecting button image 136aP1 is selected to start the effect button effect, but the effect button 136 is operated in the selected effect. Since none of the button images was selected, a normal button effect having a larger hit and a lower reliability than the protruding button effect is started. In addition, even when the effect button 136 is not operated and no button image is selected in the selected effect, when the effect button 136 is operated in the selected effect, the effect pattern in which the projecting button image 136aP1 is selected is executed. In this case, the projected button effect in which the projected button image 136aP1 is displayed as the second button effect may be started as scheduled. As described above, in this effect example, when the effect button 136 is not operated and the button image is not selected in the selection effect as the first button effect, the projecting button effect is not started and the projecting button effect is performed. A state in which a button effect with low jackpot reliability is started is shown.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 152 (B (3) -10), as shown in FIG. 152 (B (3) -11), a judge effect with a fixed jackpot is started. The situation is shown.

  Then, after the light emission of the light guide plate IL ends and the image imitating the face of the shrine is erased, and the crest actor 224E descends to the initial position, the decorative pattern shown in FIG. 152 (B (3) -12). On the display device 208, a screen where the main character defeated the enemy swordsman and defeated the swordsman is displayed, and "decoration 2", which is to be stopped and displayed in the middle symbol, is displayed at approximately the center of the ornament symbol display device 208. It is notified that the display is scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the combination of the decoration patterns of “decoration 2−decoration 2−decoration 2”. In addition, the character “Ya-taze” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, celebrating a big hit.

  Thereafter, the decorative symbol display device 208 illustrated in FIG. 152 (B (4) -1) illustrates a state in which the temporary stop due to the swing fluctuation is performed in the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2”. Have been. At this time, the character "Big hit" is displayed near the navigation character YM. After that, as shown in FIG. 152 (B (4) -2), the decorative symbol display device 208 finally displays the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of “decorative 2-decorative 2-decorative 2”. At this time, the change icon h0 is also deleted.

  As described above, in this effect example, the selection effect is performed as the first button effect, and when the effect button 136 is not operated and the button image is not selected in the selection effect, the button effect with a low jackpot reliability is performed. (Normal button effect in which the default button image 136a is displayed) is shown as the second button effect.

  FIG. 152 (C (1) -1) to FIG. 153 (C (4) -2) are diagrams showing step by step different effect patterns of the selection effect executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. The effects shown in FIGS. 152 (C (1) -1) to 153 (C (4) -2) are shown in FIGS. 151 (A (1) -1) to 151 (A (4) -2). Another effect example executed when the effect button 136 is not operated in the selected effect in the effect pattern in which the indicated effect is to be executed is shown. Here, FIGS. 152 (C (1) -1) to (C (3) -8) are the same as FIGS. 151 (B (1) -1) to 152 (B (3) -8). Therefore, the description is omitted.

  After the option display SL1 is erased and the selected effect is completed and the process returns to the super-reach effect, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 152 (C (3) -9) does not start the button effect and performs strong cut-in. The image CI1a is displayed, and the character “strong cut-in” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, thereby notifying that the strong cut-in image CI1a having a high jackpot reliability is displayed. In other words, in this effect example, when the effect button 136 is operated in the selected effect, the projecting button image 136aP1 is selected to start the effect button effect, but the effect button 136 is operated in the selected effect. Since no button image was selected, the second button effect is not started and a cut-in image is displayed instead. In addition, even when the effect button 136 is not operated and no button image is selected in the selected effect, when the effect button 136 is operated in the selected effect, the effect pattern in which the projecting button image 136aP1 is selected is executed. In this case, the projected button effect in which the projected button image 136aP1 is displayed as the second button effect may be started as scheduled. As described above, in this effect example, when the effect button 136 is not operated and the button image is not selected in the selection effect as the first button effect, the button effect is not started and another notice effect ( (Display of a cut-in image) is started.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 152 (C (3) -10), a judge-in-advance role is performed.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 152 (C (3) -11), a judge effect of determining a big hit is started.

  Then, after the light emission of the light guide plate IL is completed and the image imitating the face of the lord is erased, and the crest actor 224E is lowered to the initial position, the decorative pattern shown in FIG. 153 (C (3) -12). On the display device 208, a screen where the main character defeated the enemy swordsman and defeated the swordsman is displayed, and "decoration 2", which is to be stopped and displayed in the middle symbol, is displayed at approximately the center of the ornament symbol display device 208. It is notified that the display is scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the combination of the decoration patterns of “decoration 2−decoration 2−decoration 2”. In addition, the character “Ya-taze” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, celebrating a big hit.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 illustrated in FIG. 153 (C (4) -1), a state in which the temporary stop due to the fluctuation is performed in the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 2−decoration 2−decoration 2” is shown. Have been. At this time, the character "Big hit" is displayed near the navigation character YM. After that, as shown in FIG. 153 (C (4) -2), the decorative symbol display device 208 finally displays the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of “decorative 2-decorative 2-decorative 2”. At this time, the change icon h0 is also deleted.

  As described above, in this effect example, the selection effect is performed as the first button effect, and when the effect button 136 is not operated and the button image is not selected in the selection effect, the second button effect starts. However, a state in which another notice effect (display of a cut-in image) is performed is shown.

  FIG. 153 (D (1) -1) to FIG. 153 (D (4) -2) are views showing stepwise an example of a continuous hitting operation effect executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. 153 (D (1) -1) to (D (3) -2) are the same as FIGS. 151 (A (1) -1) to (D (3) -2). Therefore, the description is omitted.

  After the effect explanation display MS1 shown in FIG. 153 (D (3) -2) is displayed, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 153 (D (3) -3), instead of the option display SL1, the effect lever 136V is displayed. Image VC that imitates the shape of, and the icon TDR of the face of the bancho at the foot of the meter image VC is displayed, and the character of "Turn the meter up and down!" Is reported to have started. The meter image VC is composed of 10-stage meters, the three meters from the lower end are displayed in blue, the three meters displayed above the blue meter are displayed in green, and the three meters displayed above the green meter The three displayed meters are displayed in red. In addition, above the red meter, a final point which is formed in a hexagonal shape and in which the letter “V” is displayed is displayed. In this continuous hitting operation effect, the icon TDR of the count head face rises in accordance with the number of times the staging button 136 is operated, and the position of the icon TDR of the count head face at the time when the operation validity period has elapsed indicates the reliability of the big hit. Is done. In other words, the reliability of the big hit is higher when the bancho face icon TDR is on the green meter than on the blue meter, and the icon is on the red meter than when it is on the green meter. In the case, the reliability of the jackpot is higher. In addition, when the icon TDR of the bancho face reaches the final point of the meter image VC, it is notified that the big hit has been determined. That is, it can be said that the effect explanation display MS1 shown in FIG. 153 (D (3) -2) is not a display of the explanation of the selected effect, but a display of the explanation of the continuous hit operation effect.

    Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 153 (D (3) -4), the character "READY" is displayed together with the button image 136a, and it is notified that the continuous hitting operation has not been started yet.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 153 (D (3) -5), the remaining time display meter MT is displayed and the character “GO” is displayed, and the reception of the continuous hitting operation has been started. Has been informed. The player who has seen this may try to raise the icon TDR of the clerk's face to the position of the meter with higher reliability by operating the effect button 136 repeatedly.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 153 (D (3) -6), a state is shown in which the player has performed the continuous tapping operation of the effect button 136, and the icon TDR of the bancho face is positioned on the blue meter. ing. The operation validity period is ongoing, and the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136 is continuously being accepted.

  FIG. 153 (D (3) -7) shows a state in which the operation effective period has elapsed. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT indicates “0”, and the icon TDR of the face of the chief is located on the red meter. . After that, as shown in FIG. 153 (D (3) -8), the icon TDR of the bancho face is enlarged and displayed to notify that the position has been determined, and corresponds to the red meter in the meter image VC. The character "It's hot!" Is displayed, suggesting that a high-reliability and high-precision notice production will start.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 153 (D (3) -9), when the meter image VC is deleted and the continuous hitting operation effect ends, the process returns to the super reach effect.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 153 (D (3) -10), the lever image 136Va is displayed, and a state in which a lever effect with a large hit and high reliability is started is shown. Also, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a character of "hot" is displayed, suggesting that the big hit reliability is high, and a character of "pull the lever!" Is displayed on the left side of the display screen. This prompts the operation of the lever 136V. In this effect example, as the second button effect, a lever effect in which a lever image 136Va is displayed in response to the fact that the bancho face icon TDR reaches the red meter in the meter image VC in the continuous hitting operation effect is started. You. As described above, in this effect example, as a result of performing the continuous hitting operation effect as the first button effect, the lever effect is performed as the second button effect according to the position where the icon TDR of the bancho's face has arrived. Is shown. When the lever effect is performed, a big hit may be made. Further, instead of the lever effect, a button effect in which a button image is displayed (for example, a super projecting button effect or a projecting button effect) may be started.

  Thereafter, when the effect lever 136V is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 153 (D (3) -11), the appearance of the judge effect in which the big hit is confirmed is started as shown in FIG. 153 (D (3) -12). It is shown.

  Then, after the light emission of the light guide plate IL is completed and the image imitating the face of the lord is erased, and the family crest actor 224E is lowered to the initial position, the decorative pattern shown in FIG. 153 (D (3) -13) On the display device 208, a screen where the main character defeated the enemy swordsman and defeated the swordsman is displayed, and "decoration 2", which is to be stopped and displayed in the middle symbol, is displayed at approximately the center of the ornament symbol display device 208. It is notified that the display is scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the combination of the decoration patterns of “decoration 2−decoration 2−decoration 2”. In addition, the character “Ya-taze” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, celebrating a big hit.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 illustrated in FIG. 153 (D (4) -1), a state in which the temporary stop due to the swing fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2”. Have been. At this time, the character "Big hit" is displayed near the navigation character YM. After that, as shown in FIG. 153 (D (4) -2), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols of “decorative 2-decorative 2-decorative 2”. At this time, the change icon h0 is also deleted.

  As described above, in this effect example, a continuous tapping operation effect is performed as the first button effect, and as a result of the continuous tapping operation performed in the continuous tapping operation effect, according to the position where the icon TDR of the face number face in the meter image VC reaches. The state where the lever effect is started as the second button effect is shown. In other words, it can be said that the lever effect is started by the fact that the number icon face TDR in the meter image VC reaches the red meter in the continuous hitting operation effect. Further, in this effect example, the operation means (effect button 136) used in the continuous hit operation effect as the first button effect and the operation means (effect lever 136V) used in the lever effect as the second button effect are different. You can also say that.

  Next, another effect pattern of the continuous hitting operation effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 154 (D (3) -4 ′) to (D (4) -2 ′). The effects shown in FIG. 154 (D (3) -4 ′) to FIG. 154 (D (4) -2 ′) show another effect pattern following FIG. 153 (D (3) -3). The effects shown in FIGS. 154 (D (3) -4 ') to (D (3) -6') are shown in FIGS. 153 (D (3) -4) to (D (3) -6). ) Is the same as the effect shown in FIG.

  FIG. 154 (D (3) -7 ') shows a state in which the operation effective period has elapsed. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT indicates “0”, and it is shown that the icon TDR of the bancho face is positioned on the green meter. . Then, as shown in FIG. 154 (D (3) -8 '), the icon TDR of the bancho face is enlarged and displayed to notify that the position has been determined, and also corresponds to the green meter in the meter image VC. , The word “chance” is displayed, and the big hit reliability is higher than when the blue face icon TDR is stopped, but the big hit is higher than when the red face icon TDR is stopped. It has been suggested that a low-reliability announcement production is started.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 154 (D (3) -9 '), when the meter image VC is deleted and the continuous hitting operation effect ends, the process returns to the super reach effect.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 154 (D (3) -10 ′), a normal button image 136aL is displayed, and the button image 136a in a default mode is displayed, although the reliability is lower than the lever effect, but the default button image 136a is displayed. A state in which a deca-button effect with higher hit reliability than the button effect is started is shown. Further, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a character of "chance" is displayed, suggesting that the big hit reliability is high. In this effect example, as a second button effect, a deca-button effect in which a deca-button image 136aL is displayed in response to the fact that the bancho face icon TDR has reached the green meter in the meter image VC in the continuous hit operation effect is started. You. As described above, in this effect example, as a result of the continuous hitting operation effect as the first button effect, the deca-button effect is performed as the second button effect in accordance with the position where the icon TDR of the bancho's face has arrived. Is shown. When the deca-button effect is performed, a big hit may be made.

    Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 154 (D (3) -11 ′), the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 154 (D (3) -12 ′) determines the jackpot. The state where the production is started is shown.

  Then, after the light emission of the light guide plate IL is completed and the image imitating the face of the lord is erased, and the crest actor 224E is lowered to the initial position, the decoration shown in FIG. 154 (D (3) -13 ') is obtained. The symbol display device 208 displays a screen in which the main character defeated the enemy swordsman and won, and "decoration 2", which is to be stopped and displayed in the middle symbol, is displayed at approximately the center of the ornament symbol display device 208. Then, the user is notified that the display is scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the combination of the decoration patterns of “decoration 2−decoration 2−decoration 2”. In addition, the character “Ya-taze” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, celebrating a big hit.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 illustrated in FIG. 154 (D (4) -1 ′), the temporary stop due to the swing fluctuation is performed in the decorative symbol combination of “decorative 2-decorative 2-decorative 2”. It is shown. At this time, the character "Big hit" is displayed near the navigation character YM. After that, as shown in FIG. 154 (D (4) -2 ′), the decorative symbol display device 208 finally displays the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols “decorative 2-decorative 2-decorative 2”. At this time, the change icon h0 is also deleted.

  As described above, in this effect example, a continuous tapping operation effect is performed as the first button effect, and as a result of the continuous tapping operation performed in the continuous tapping operation effect, according to the position where the icon TDR of the face number face in the meter image VC reaches. A state in which a deca-button effect is started as the second button effect is shown. In other words, it can be said that the fact that the number icon face TDR in the meter image VC reaches the green meter in the continuous hitting operation effect indicates that the deca-button effect is started. In this effect example, the operation means (effect button 136) used in the continuous hit operation effect as the first button effect is the same as the operation means (effect button 136) used in the deca-button effect as the second button effect. However, in the case, the effect button 136 is changed between the first button effect (normal mode) and the second button effect (protruding mode or vibrating mode). You may make it different.

  Next, another effect pattern of the continuous hitting operation effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 154 (D (3) -4 ″) to (D (4) -2 ″). The effects shown in FIG. 154 (D (3) -4 ″) to FIG. 154 (D (4) -2 ″) show another effect pattern following FIG. 153 (D (3) -3). . The effects shown in FIGS. 154 (D (3) -4 ″) to (D (3) -6 ″) are shown in FIGS. 153 (D (3) -4) to (D (3)). Since the effect is the same as the effect shown in -6), description is omitted.

  FIG. 154 (D (3) -7 '') shows a state where the operation effective period has elapsed. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT indicates “0”, and the face icon TDR of the bancho is displayed on the blue meter because the number of operation of the effect button is small. Is shown. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 154 (D (3) -8 ″), the icon TDR of the bancho face is enlarged and displayed to notify that the position has been fixed, and the icon TDR corresponding to the blue meter in the meter image VC is displayed. However, the character "How" is displayed, which suggests that a warning effect that is not very high in jackpot reliability may be started.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 154 (D (3) -9 ''), when the meter image VC is deleted and the continuous hitting operation effect ends, the process returns to the super reach effect.

    Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 154 (D (3) -10 ″), the lever image 136Va is displayed, and a state in which a lever effect with a large hit and high reliability is started is shown. Also, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a character of "hot" is displayed, suggesting that the big hit reliability is high, and a character of "pull the lever!" Is displayed on the left side of the display screen. This prompts the operation of the lever 136V. In this effect example, as a second button effect, a lever effect in which the lever image 136Va is displayed despite the fact that the bancho face icon TDR is the blue meter in the meter image VC in the continuous hit operation effect is started. The situation is shown. As described above, in this effect example, as a result of performing the continuous tapping operation effect as the first button effect, the lever effect, which is an effect different from the effect corresponding to the position where the bancho face icon TDR has arrived, is performed for the second time. This shows a state in which a so-called "rule breaking" effect is performed as a button effect. When the lever effect is performed, a big hit may be made. Instead of the lever effect, a button effect in which a button image is displayed (for example, a super projecting button effect, a projecting button effect, a button effect in which a default button image 136a is displayed, or the like) may be started.

  Thereafter, when the staging lever 136V is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 154 (D (3) -11 ″), as shown in FIG. It is shown how it is started.

  Then, after the light emission in the light guide plate IL is completed and the image imitating the face of the lord is erased, and the crest actor 224E is lowered to the initial position, it is shown in FIG. 153 (D (3) -13 ''). In the decorative design display device 208, a screen where the main character defeated the enemy swordsman and won the game is displayed, and “decoration 2” to be stopped and displayed in the middle design is displayed at the approximate center of the decorative design display device 208. It is displayed, and it is notified that the display is scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the combination of the decoration patterns of “decoration 2−decoration 2−decoration 2”. In addition, the character “Ya-taze” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, celebrating a big hit.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 illustrated in FIG. 154 (D (4) -1 ″), the temporary stop due to the swing fluctuation is performed in the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2”. It is shown. At this time, the character "Big hit" is displayed near the navigation character YM. After that, as shown in FIG. 154 (D (4) -2 ″), the decorative symbol display device 208 finally displays the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols “decorative 2-decorative 2-decorative 2”. At this time, the change icon h0 is also deleted.

  As described above, in this effect example, the continuous hitting operation effect is performed as the first button effect, and as a result of the continuous hitting operation performed in the continuous hitting operation effect, it does not correspond to the position where the number icon face TDR in the meter image VC has reached. The state where the lever effect is started as the second button effect is shown. Further, in this effect example, the operation means (effect button 136) used in the continuous hit operation effect as the first button effect and the operation means (effect lever 136V) used in the lever effect as the second button effect are different. You can also say that. Note that, as described above, an effect in which a rule break occurs may be performed in advance, or an effect according to the number of times of operation of the effect button 136 may be started as a second button effect. When the head icon TDR is a blue meter, the normal button effect in which the button image 136a in the default mode is displayed may be performed as the second button effect.

  Next, another effect pattern of the continuous hitting operation effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 155 (D (3) -4 '' ') to (D (4) -2' ''). The effect shown in FIG. 155 (D (3) -4 ″ ″) to FIG. 155 (D (4) -2 ′ ″) shows another effect pattern following FIG. 153 (D (3) -3). ing. In this effect example, the meter image VC shown in FIG. 153 (D (3) -3) has no pattern as shown in FIG. 155 (D (3) -4 ′ ″). There is no solid display mode.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 illustrated in FIG. 155 (D (3) -4 ″ ′), the character “READY” is displayed together with the button image 136a, and it is notified that the continuous hitting operation has not been started yet.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 155 (D (3) -5 ′ ″), the remaining time display meter MT is displayed and the character “GO” is displayed, and reception of the continuous tapping operation is started. Is reported. The player who has seen this may be able to improve his / her willingness to operate the staging button 136 in succession to reach the bancho's face icon TDR to the final point.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 155 (D (3) -6 ″ ′), the player has performed a continuous tapping operation of the effect button 136, and the icon TDR of the bancho face is located at the lower position of the meter image VC. Is shown. In a state where the icon of the longest face TDR is at the lower position of the meter image VC, the meter portion corresponding to the position changes to blue. The operation validity period is ongoing, and the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136 is continuously being accepted.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 155 (D (3) -7 ″ ′), the player has performed the continuous tapping operation of the effect button 136, and the icon TDR of the bancho face has approached the upper position of the meter image VC. It is shown. In a state in which the head face icon TDR approaches the upper position of the meter image VC, the meter portion at the middle position changes to green corresponding to the position, and the meter reached by the head face icon TDR at the upper position. The part turns red. The operation validity period is ongoing, and the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136 is continuously being accepted.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 155 (D (3) -8 ″ ′), the effect button 136 is operated a predetermined number of times before the effective operation period of the effect button 136 elapses, and the icon TDR of the face number head reaches the final point. This is shown. At this time, the meter image VC indicates that all the meter portions are colored, and that the continuous hitting operation effect has been successfully performed.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 155 (D (3) -9 ′ ″), the lever icon VLV is stocked in the upper right part of the navigation character YM, and it is notified that the lever effect will be started.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 155 (D (3) -10 '' '), when the meter image VC is deleted and the continuous hitting operation effect ends, the process returns to the super reach effect.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 155 (D (3) -11 ″ ′), a lever image 136Va is displayed, and a state in which a lever effect with a large hit and high reliability is started is shown. Also, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, a character of "hot" is displayed, suggesting that the big hit reliability is high, and a character of "pull the lever!" Is displayed on the left side of the display screen. This prompts the operation of the lever 136V. In this effect example, as the second button effect, the lever image 136Va is displayed in response to the fact that the bancho face icon TDR reaches the final point in the meter image VC and the lever icon VLV is stocked in the continuous hitting operation effect. Lever production is started. As described above, in this effect example, as a result of performing the continuous hitting operation effect as the first button effect, the lever effect is performed as the second button effect according to the position where the icon TDR of the bancho's face has arrived. Is shown. When the lever effect is performed, a big hit may be made.

  Thereafter, when the effect lever 136V is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 155 (D (3) -12 '' '), as shown in FIG. The state where the production is started is shown.

  Then, after the light emission of the light guide plate IL ends and the image imitating the face of the lord is erased, and the crest actor 224E descends to the initial position, FIG. 155 (D (3) -13 '' ') In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown, the main character defeats the enemy swordsman and displays a screen in which the victory is won, and “decoration 2” scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the middle symbol in the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208. Is displayed, and it is notified that the display is to be stopped and displayed in the combination of the decoration patterns of “decoration 2−decoration 2−decoration 2”. In addition, the character “Ya-taze” is displayed in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, celebrating a big hit.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 illustrated in FIG. 155 (D (4) -1 ′ ″), the temporary stop due to the fluctuation is performed by the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 2−decoration 2−decoration 2”. The situation is shown. At this time, the character "Big hit" is displayed near the navigation character YM. After that, as shown in FIG. 155 (D (4) -2 ′ ″), the decorative symbol display device 208 determines and displays the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols “decorative 2-decorative 2-decorative 2”. At this time, the change icon h0 is also deleted.

  As described above, in this effect example, the continuous hitting operation effect is performed as the first button effect, and as a result of the continuous hitting operation in the continuous hitting operation effect, the icon TDR of the face of the bancho in the meter image VC reaches the final point. Accordingly, a state in which the lever effect is started as the second button effect is shown. In other words, it can be said that the lever effect is started when the icon TDR of the face number in the meter image VC reaches the final point in the continuous hitting operation effect. Further, in this effect example, the operation means (effect button 136) used in the continuous hit operation effect as the first button effect and the operation means (effect lever 136V) used in the lever effect as the second button effect are different. You can also say that.

  Next, another effect pattern of the continuous hit operation effect will be described with reference to FIG. 155 (D (3) -4 ″ ″) to FIG. 155 (D (4) -2 ″ ″). The effects shown in FIG. 155 (D (3) -4 ″ ″) to FIG. 155 (D (4) -2 ″ ″) are different effect patterns following FIG. 153 (D (3) -3). Is shown. In this effect example, the meter image VC shown in FIG. 153 (D (3) -3) has no pattern as shown in FIG. 155 (D (3) -4 ″ ″). It is a plain display mode that is not displayed. The effects shown in FIGS. 155 (D (3) -4 ″ ″) to (D (3) -7 ″ ″) are shown in FIGS. Since it is the same as the effect shown in FIG. (D (3) -7 ″ ′), the description is omitted.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 155 (D (3) -8 ″ ″), the player has performed a continuous tapping operation of the effect button 136, and the icon TDR of the bancho face is located at the upper end of the upper position of the meter image VC. The state of approaching is shown. In the state where the head face icon TDR approaches the upper end of the upper position of the meter image VC, the meter part at the middle position changes to green corresponding to the position, and the head face icon TDR at the upper position reaches. The changed meter turns red. The operation validity period is ongoing, and the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136 is continuously being accepted.

  After that, if the operation valid period of the effect button 136 elapses before the bancho face icon TDR reaches the final point, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 155 (D (3) -9 ″ ″) The bancho's face icon TDR slides down to the foot of the meter image VC, and the character "Sorry" is displayed to inform that the continuous hitting operation effect has failed. As a result, no notice icon such as a lever icon or a button icon is displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 155 (D (3) -10 '' ''), when the meter image VC is deleted and the continuous hitting operation effect ends, the process returns to the super reach effect.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 155 (D (3) -11 ″ ″), the button image 136a that is the default display mode is displayed, and the remaining time display meter is displayed below the button image 136a. MT is displayed to notify that the notice by the normal button effect has been started. Thereafter, the operation effective period of the effect button 136 is started, and the display of the gauge of the remaining time display meter MT decreasing is also started. At this time, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character "press" is displayed to urge the operation of the effect button 136. That is, in this effect example, the normal button effect as the second button effect is started instead of the lever effect in response to the failure in the continuous hit operation effect.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 155 (D (3) -12 ″ ″), the big hit is determined as shown in FIG. 155 (D (3) -13 ″ ″). Judgment production is not started, the main character's lord is defeated by the enemy swordsman, the defeated screen is displayed, and "decoration 3" scheduled to be stopped and displayed at the middle of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the middle symbol Is displayed, and it is notified that the display is to be stopped and displayed in the combination of the decoration patterns of "decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2". In this example of production, the screen where the defeat was performed without starting the judge's previous role actor production by the crest role 224E was displayed. It may be displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 155 (D (4) -1 ″ ″), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the temporary stop due to the swing fluctuation is performed in the decorative symbol combination of “decorative 2-decorative 3-decorative 2”. What is happening is shown. At this time, the character "Sorry" is displayed near the navigation character YM, and it is notified that a loss result will be displayed. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 155 (D (4) -2 ″ ″), the decorative symbol display device 208 confirms and displays the combination of the lost decorative symbols of “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2”. . At this time, the change icon h0 is also deleted.

  As described above, in this effect example, the continuous tapping operation effect is performed as the first button effect, and as a result of the repeated tapping operation in the continuous tapping operation effect, the icon TDR of the face number in the meter image VC does not reach the final point. Accordingly, a state in which a button effect (normal button effect) in which the button image 136a in the default mode is displayed as the second button effect is started is shown. In other words, it can be said that the lever effect is not started because the icon TDR of the face number in the meter image VC does not reach the final point in the continuous hitting operation effect. Further, in this effect example, the operating means (effect button 136) used in the continuous hit operation effect as the first button effect and the operating means (effect lever 136V) used in the lever effect as the second button effect are the same. Has become. Also, in this effect example, a state is shown in which the lever icon or the button icon as a reward for success is not displayed because the continuous hit operation effect has failed.

  FIG. 156 (E (4) -2) to FIG. 156 (E (5) -18) are diagrams showing, in a stepwise manner, an example of a big hit effect executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 156 (E (4) -2), the combination of the decorative symbols with the big hit of “decorative 2-decorative 2-decorative 2” is stopped and displayed. Although the background here is not displayed, for example, a default background image is displayed. In the following description, when the background is not displayed, a default background image is displayed unless otherwise specified. Various background images different from the default background image (for example, a background image according to the mode) may be displayed. In addition, a second hold number display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, a fourth symbol or a second decorative symbol may be displayed. On the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208, a navigation character YM is displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 156 (E (4) -2), since the symbols are stopped and displayed, the change icon h0 is not displayed.

  Further, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 156 (E (4) -2) is a special figure low probability general figure low probability state. On the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric support state, the hold icon of the special figure 1 is displayed. Note that a reserved icon display area of the special figure 2 may be provided in a predetermined area (for example, the right end of the display screen) of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric support state.

  In a reserve icon display area formed on the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208, a reserve icon representing the reservation of the special figure 1 is displayed. The number of reservations in Toku-zu 1 is represented by the number of the holding icons in Toku-zu 1 and the second number-of-holds display, in addition to the number of lighting of the Toku-zu 1 holding lamp 218. In addition to the number of lighting of the holding lamp 220, the number of the holding icons in the special map 2 and the second holding number display are also displayed. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest winning) may be referred to as a first hold icon, the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as a second hold icon. In the holding icon display area, the holding icons are displayed side by side, and the holding icon on the right side is the holding icon with the older winning.

  In FIG. 156 (E (4) -2), two reserved icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 are displayed in the reserved icon display area, and both the reserved icons h11 and h12 of the two special figures 1 are displayed. Are displayed in a default display mode (a circular pattern and a white display mode). That is, the default hold icon of Toku-zu 1 is a round hold icon.

  On the other hand, none of the suspension icons of the special map 2 are displayed. This is because, as described above, since the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 156 (E (4) -2) is the non-power support state (non-time saving state), the power chute is hard to open and the special figure 2 starts. This is because the winning of the mouth 232 is difficult.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, the special icon of the special figure which is easier to win in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is displayed according to the control state (game state), and the reserve icon of the other special figure is displayed. It is not displayed. That is, when the control state is the non-power support state, as shown in FIG. 156 (E (4) -2), the hold icon of the special figure 1 is displayed in the hold icon display area, and the hold of the special figure 2 is held. No icon is displayed. On the other hand, when the control state is the power support state, on the other hand, the hold icon of Toku-zu 2 is displayed and the hold icon of Toku-zu 1 is not displayed. In the non-power support state, the hold icon of the special figure 2 may be displayed, or in the power support state, the hold icon of the special figure 1 may be displayed.

  In the present embodiment, the start of the design change display of the special figure is performed in the order of the start of change in the special figure display device → the start of moving animation of the reserved icon or the deletion → the start of change of the decorative design. Is also good.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 156 (E (5) -1), a state in which a big hit start effect is performed is shown. When the jackpot start effect is started, a character MCK of the teacher Machiko in a wedding dress (Mr. Wedding Machiko) celebrates the jackpot with four copandas. Also, when the big hit start effect starts, a right-handed display is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen to encourage the player to right-handed.

  FIG. 156 (E (5) -2) shows a state in which the big hit game has started and the game has shifted to the first round. In this effect example, an effect for introducing an effect during a jackpot game is performed. In the first round, a character of “effect introduction from next round” is displayed together with the character of the co-panda, and the effect is notified.

  FIG. 156 (E (5) -3) shows a state where the process has shifted to the second round. In the second round, on the decorative symbol display device 208, a character display of "When the character comes out ..." is displayed along with the icon of Sabohani, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 156 (E (5) -4). Along with the demonstration of the strong Sabohani group notice, the word “Expect for the group notice!” Is displayed on top of this, and the Sabohani group notice is explained.

  FIG. 156 (E (5) -5) shows a state where the process has shifted to the third round. In the third round, on the decorative symbol display device 208, a character display of "When the character comes out ..." is displayed together with the bomb icon, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 156 (E (5) -6). Along with the demonstration display of the timer notice effect, the character "Timer notice is activated" is displayed to explain the timer notice effect.

  FIG. 156 (E (5) -7) shows a state where the process has shifted to the fourth round. In this production example, in the fourth round, a god character KGG with a cane appears, and the characters "Emergency announcement!" And "Win with button PUSH!" Are displayed. A state in which a certain “dice game” is started is shown. In this dice game, the effect button 136 is operated within the operation valid period after the start of the variable display of one die, thereby displaying the dice roll, and according to the displayed dice roll, a big hit game An effect indicating a later game state is performed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 156 (E (5) -8), an explanation display of the dice game is performed, and in the effect example shown in FIG. 156 (E (5) -8), "4" is displayed. Is displayed, it is notified that the gaming state after the jackpot game is 100 times reduced in time (special figure low probability ordinary figure high probability state), and the "5" die roll is displayed. Then, it is notified that the gaming state after the big hit game is a probable change state (special figure high probability, normal figure high probability), and when the die roll of “6” is displayed, the gaming state after the big hit game is played. Is reported to be in the probable change state, and it is suggested that the probability setting in the pachinko machine 100 is the “setting 6” which is the highest setting. In addition, the result of other dice may be displayed, and another type of notice (for example, a pre-reading notice of a reserved consecutive chan) may be started. In the present embodiment, for example, a probability setting switch is provided in the main control unit 300, and the probability setting switch can be set in six stages from setting 1 to setting 6. The settings have different jackpot probabilities and specifications, and the administrator of the game arcade can select any setting. In addition, the main board 156 is provided with a setting display section, so that the settings set by the administrator of the game arcade can be displayed. In the present embodiment, the distribution ratio of the variation time of the symbol variation display is set according to the setting, and the setting may be estimated based on the execution frequency of the variation display pattern of the decorative symbol determined by the variation time. is there. In addition, the main substrate 156 may be provided with an accessory ratio display section for displaying the accessory ratio. The setting display unit and the accessory ratio display unit are configured by, for example, 7-segment LEDs, but are not limited thereto. In addition, what does not have a probability setting function may be used.

  FIG. 156 (E (5) -9) shows a state where the process has shifted to the fifth round. In this effect example, when the fifth round is performed, one dice symbol DC is stopped and displayed at “1”, the character “READY” is displayed, and the variable display of the dice symbol DC is started. Is done.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 156 (E (5) -10), after the variable display of the dice symbol DC is started, as shown in FIG. 156 (E (5) -11), a button is displayed on the right side of the display screen. The remaining time display meter MT is displayed together with the image 136a, and the operation validity period is started.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 156 (E (5) -12), as shown in FIG. 156 (E (5) -13), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a weak cut-in. Image CI1b is displayed, suggesting that the degree of expectation for the result of the dice game is low.

  FIG. 156 (E (5) -14) shows a state where the process has shifted to the sixth round. In addition, the variable display of the dice symbol DC is still continuously performed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 156 (E (5) -15), the dice symbol DC is stopped and displayed, and "4" is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 156 (E (5) -16), above the dice symbol DC of “4”, a character “GET 100 times” is displayed and the dice symbol DC is displayed. In the lower part, the character "I will not give up" is displayed, and it is notified that the gaming state after the big hit game is reduced to a time saving state, and a state in which an effect for comforting the player is being performed.

  FIG. 156 (E (5) -17) shows a state where the process has shifted to the 16th round. When the game proceeds to the 16th round, the character of the lord appears and the character of "final R" is displayed to inform the player that the final round is in progress.

  In FIG. 156 (E (5) -18), the 16th round has ended, and the big hit end effect has started. At this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the character "100 hours reduction", and informs that after the big hit game ends, the time saving state will be reached until the special figure is fluctuated 100 times.

  As described above, in this effect example, a button effect as a mini game is performed in the big hit game, and the state of the game and the setting after the big hit game are suggested according to the result. That is, a state in which an effect of operating the effect button 136 in an effect other than the judge effect of determining whether or not a big hit is being performed is shown.

  FIG. 156 (F (4) -2) to FIG. 157 (F (5) -20) are diagrams showing step-by-step another effect patterns of the big hit effect executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. The effects shown in FIGS. 156 (F (4) -2) to 157 (F (5) -12) are shown in FIGS. 156 (E (4) -2) to (E (5) -12). Since the effect is the same as that shown, the description is omitted.

  When the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 157 (F (5) -12), as shown in FIG. 157 (F (5) -13), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a cut-in image or a die. The result of the symbol DC is not displayed, the replay symbol is displayed, and the character of "one more time" is displayed to inform that the variable display of the dice symbol DC is started again.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 157 (F (5) -14), the replay symbol is displayed in a reduced size and the character "READY" is displayed, and the re-variation of the dice symbol DC may be started. Be informed.

  After the display of the re-variation of the dice symbol DC is started, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 157 (F (5) -15), the remaining time display meter MT is displayed together with the super projecting button image 136aS on the right side of the display screen. , The operation validity period starts. Also, at this time, the effect button 136 is also projected upward, thereby promoting the operation of the effect button 136 for the player. That is, it can be said that the operation promotion effect of the effect button 136 is being performed by the projecting operation of the effect button 136. In this effect example, as a result of the operation of the effect button 136 in the dice game as the first button effect, a replay symbol is displayed, and the re-variation display of the dice game as the second button effect starts accordingly. Is shown. Further, in this effect example, the super-projection button image 136aS is displayed in the re-change display of the dice game, suggesting that a result advantageous to the player in the dice game is likely to be derived.

  Note that, in the present embodiment, the projecting operation of the effect button 136 is started at the timing when the re-change display of the dice game is started and the display of the super projecting button image 136aS is started. After the start, the re-variation display of the dice game may be started, or after the re-variation display of the dice game is started and the display of the super projecting button image 136aS is started, the projecting operation of the effect button 136 is started. May be started.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is pressed at the timing shown in FIG. 157 (F (5) -16), the dice symbol DC is stopped in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 157 (F (5) -17). The result "6" is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 157 (F (5) -18), the character “probability variation GET” is displayed above the dice symbol DC of “6” and the lower portion of the dice symbol DC Is displayed, the notification that the gaming state after the jackpot game is in a stable state is notified, and the setting of the pachinko machine 100 is likely to be “setting 6”. Has been suggested.

  FIG. 157 (F (5) -19) shows a state in which the process has shifted to the 16th round. When the game proceeds to the 16th round, the character of the lord appears and the character of "final R" is displayed to inform the player that the final round is in progress.

  In FIG. 157 (F (5) -20), the 16th round has ended, and the big hit end effect has started. At this time, on the decorative symbol display device 208, the character of the probable change is displayed while the character of the shrine riding the motorcycle is boarded, and it is notified that the state changes to a certain state after the end of the big hit game. In addition, a question mark is displayed together with the character “6”, suggesting that the possibility of “setting 6” is high.

  As described above, in this effect example, a button effect as a mini game is performed in the big hit game, and the state of the game and the setting after the big hit game are suggested according to the result. That is, a state in which an effect of operating the effect button 136 in an effect other than the judge effect of determining whether or not a big hit is being performed is shown. In this effect example, a dice game is performed as the first button effect, and when the effect button 136 is operated in this dice game, a replay symbol is displayed. A state is shown in which the re-variation display of the dice symbol DC as an effect is performed.

  FIGS. 157 (G (4) -1) to 158 (G (4) -20) are diagrams showing step-by-step the different effect patterns of the mini game effect executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. . 157 (G (4) -1) to (G (4) -3) are the same as FIGS. 145 ((1) -1) to ((1) -3), Description is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 157 (G (4) -3), after the decoration pattern during the variable display is displayed in a reduced size at the upper left corner of the display screen, the decoration shown in FIG. 157 (G (4) -4). The symbol display device 208 shows that a “dice slot game”, which is one of the mini games, has been started. At this time, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the character of "mini game" is displayed to notify the start of the mini game. When the “dice slot game” is started, an explanation display of “shake the dice with a button” is displayed in the upper center of the display screen, and the effect button 136 is operated three times within the validity period of the dice to roll the dice. It is shown that the mission is to change the combination of (symbols) to a specific combination, and that when the mission is achieved, a notice effect according to the combination of dice rolls is started. In the effect example shown in FIG. 157 (G (4) -4), when the combination of the dice roll of “4-5-6” is displayed, it is a notice that the super reach will be performed, and “5-5 When the combination of the dice roll of “−5” is displayed, a hold change notice in which the display mode of the hold icon changes is performed, and when the combination of the dice roll of “1-1-1” is displayed. , "5-5-5", a super-hold change notice with a higher reliability of a big hit is performed than a hold change notice executed when a combination of dice rolls is displayed. It should be noted that other combinations of dice rolls may be displayed and another type of notice (for example, a hidden notice) may be started.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 157 (G (4) -5), the variable display of the three dice is started, and the button images 136a1 to 136a3 are provided below each of the three dice in the variable display. Is displayed, and the character of "three hits" is displayed at the upper part of the display screen to urge the user to operate the effect button 136 three times. Further, a remaining time display meter MT is also displayed below these button images 136a1 to 136a3, and the gauge decreases as the operation valid period elapses. Then, in the vicinity of the navigation character YM, the word "start" is displayed to notify that the mini game has started.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated once at the timing shown in FIG. 157 (G (4) -6), the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 157 (G (4) -7) changes in the left column. The symbol of the displayed dice is stopped and displayed, and “5” is displayed. At this time, the character display displayed at the upper center of the display screen changes from “three hits” to “two hits”, prompting the user to operate the effect button 136 two more times.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated once at the timing shown in FIG. 157 (G (4) -8), the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 157 (G (4) -9) changes in the middle row. The symbol of the displayed dice is stopped and displayed, and “5” is displayed. At this time, the character display displayed at the upper center of the display screen changes from “double hit” to “last”, prompting to operate the effect button 136 one more time.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated once at the timing shown in FIG. 157 (G (4) -10), the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 157 (G (4) -11) displays the strong cut-in image. CI1a is displayed, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 157 (G (4) -12), the symbol of the dice being displayed in the right column is stopped and displayed, and "5" is displayed, and "5-5-5" is displayed. The dice roll combination is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 157 (G (4) -13), the character "hold change confirmed" is displayed at the center of the display screen, and it is notified that the hold change is performed.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 157 (G (4) -14), a hold change animation in which the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes is started, and thereafter, FIG. 157 (G (4)-). As shown in 15), the display mode of the first hold icon h11 changes from the default display mode to the display mode of the prefetch notice displayed in blue. In the symbol variation display executed when the hold icon in the blue display mode is exhausted, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be determined and displayed than in the symbol variation display executed when the hold icon in the default display mode is exhausted.

  After that, when the mini-game ends, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 157 (G (4) -16) enlarges the decorative symbol, moves it to the center of the display screen, and continues the variable display.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 157 (G (4) -17), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 157 (G (4) -18), the second stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. On the other hand, in the middle symbol, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 158 (G (4) -19) subsequent to FIG. 157 (G (4) -18), the third stop is performed, and "decorative 5" is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol. The temporary stop due to the fluctuation is performed, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 158 (G (4) -20), the decorative symbol display device 208 combines the lost decorative symbols of “decorative 2-decorative 5-decorative 5”. Is displayed. At this time, the change icon h0 is also deleted.

  As described above, in this effect example, a state is shown in which a pre-reading notice in which the display mode of the hold icon changes is performed as a result of the mini-game performed by operating the effect button 136.

  FIG. 158 (H (4) -1) to FIG. 158 (H (4) -26) are diagrams showing step-by-step the different effect patterns of the mini game effect executed in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. . 158 (H (4) -1) to (H (4) -10) are the same as FIGS. 158 (G (4) -1) to (G (4) -10). Therefore, the description is omitted.

  When the effect button 136 is operated once at the timing shown in FIG. 158 (H (4) -10), the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 158 (H (4) -11). The symbol of the dice that is being displayed in a variable manner is stopped and displayed in the right column, "5" is displayed, and the combination of the dice roll of "5-5-5" is displayed. However, in this effect example, thereafter, as shown in FIG. 158 (H (4) -13), the symbols of the three dice start to change and display, and the effect that the second button effect has been started is effected. ing.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 158 (H (4) -14), the super projecting button image 136aS and the remaining time display meter MT are displayed so as to overlap with the symbol of the dice being displayed in a variable manner. At the same time, the character "Blow!" Is displayed on the right side of the super projecting button image 136aS, and the operation validity period is restarted. At this time, the effect button 136 also protrudes upward, thereby promoting the operation of the effect button 136 for the player. That is, it can be said that the operation promotion effect of the effect button 136 is being performed by the projecting operation of the effect button 136. In this effect example, as a result of the operation of the effect button 136 in the dice slot game as the first button effect, a combination of dice symbols is displayed. However, a re-variable display of the dice slot game as the second button effect. Is started. Further, in this effect example, it is suggested that by displaying the super protruding button image 136aS in the re-change display of the dice slot game, it is highly possible that a result advantageous to the player is derived in the dice slot game. I have.

  In the present embodiment, the projecting operation of the effect button 136 is started at the timing when the re-change display of the dice slot game is started and the display of the super projecting button image 136aS is started, but the projecting operation of the effect button 136 is started. May be started after the start of the dice slot game, or the display of the effect button 136 may be started after the start of the display of the super projecting button image 136aS after the start of the display of the super change button of the dice slot game The projecting operation may be started.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is pressed at the timing shown in FIG. 158 (H (4) -15), the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 158 (H (4) -16) has three dice symbols. Are stopped and displayed at the same time, and the combination of dice rolls of “1-1-1” is derived. Then, in the center of the display screen, the character "super hold change confirmed" is displayed, suggesting that the hold icon changes to a display mode with high reliability.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 158 (H (4) -17), a hold change animation in which the display mode of the second hold icon h12 changes is started, and thereafter, FIG. 158 (H (4)-). As shown in 18), the display mode of the second hold icon h12 changes from the default display mode to the display mode of the pre-reading notice displayed in red. The symbol variation display that is executed with the red display mode being digested is executed more easily than the symbol variation display that is executed with the blue display mode digested.

  However, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 158 (H (4) -19), the character “Still yet” is displayed near the navigation character YM, and the display mode of the hold icon may further change. Be informed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 158 (H (4) -20), the holding change animation is started again at the second holding icon h12, and the display mode of the second holding icon h12 further changes. It is shown.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 158 (H (4) -21), when the hold change animation is completed, the display mode of the second hold icon h12 changes from the red display mode to the display mode of the ninja character, A state is shown in which a pre-reading advance notice, which is a pre-reading advance notice that the symbol variation display of the jackpot determination is performed, is being performed. It should be noted that in the symbol change display executed by digesting the hold icon of the display mode of the ninja character, the off-set symbol mode may be definitely displayed.

  After that, when the mini-game ends, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 158 (H (4) -22) enlarges the decorative symbol, moves it to the center of the display screen, and continues the variable display.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 158 (H (4) -23), the first stop is performed, and "decoration 2" is stopped and displayed on the left symbol. In the middle symbol and the right symbol, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 158 (H (4) -24), the second stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the right symbol. On the other hand, in the middle symbol, the decorative symbol is continuously displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 illustrated in FIG. 158 (H (4) -25), the third stop is performed, “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed on the middle symbol, and the temporary stop is performed by swing fluctuation. As shown in 158 (H (4) -26), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the lossy decorative symbol combination of “decoration 2-decoration 5-decoration 5” is definitely displayed. At this time, the change icon h0 is also deleted.

  As described above, in this effect example, a mini game is performed by operating the effect button 136 as the first button effect, and after the combination of dice rolls is displayed once, the symbol of the dice fluctuates again. During the execution of the change, the operation of the effect button 136 as the second button effect is required. As a result, a state is shown in which a look-ahead notice in which the display mode of the hold icon is changed to a display mode having a high jackpot reliability is performed. Further, in this effect example, the display mode of the hold icon is increased by two stages in one hold change animation, and the hold change animation is further performed on the same hold icon, and the display mode of the hold icon is further ranked. The appearance that it is up is shown.

  In the above-described embodiment, that is, the effect by the two button effects is applied to the judge effect of determining the big hit and the notice effect of the gaming state after the big hit game during the big hit, but is applied to other notice effects. For example, the present invention can also be applied to other types of notice effects as a result of performing two button effects, for example, it is also applicable to a look-ahead notice such as a pending change or another type of change notice. It is.

  In the above-described embodiment, the effect button 136 and the effect lever 136V have been described as operation means. However, other devices may be used. For example, in addition to a button and a lever, a touch sensor, an infrared sensor, an ultrasonic Alternatively, a sensor using a non-contact type sensor, such as a sensor, may be used.

  In addition, although an example in which the operation request display described above is the same as the operation unit to be instructed to operate and the operation unit to accept the operation is different, the operation unit may be different, for example, requesting operation of the effect button 136 The display is performed, but the operation of the effect lever 136V may be accepted.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, in the button effect requesting the single operation of the effect button 136, the operation of the effect button 136 may be requested a plurality of times, or the continuous hitting operation may be requested. Yes, or may require a long press.

  Also, in the above-described embodiment, an example of the effect in which the second button effect may be performed as the operation response effect in the first button effect has been described. However, the third example is the operation response effect in the second button effect. May be performed in some cases. In this case, the operation request mode of the effect button 136 may be changed for each button effect. For example, in the first button effect, one operation of the effect button 136 is requested, but in the second button effect, May require continuous operation of the effect button 136, and may require one operation of the effect button 136 in the third button effect. In one button effect, a plurality of operation request modes of the effect button 136 may be prepared. For example, in the first button effect, one operation of the effect button 136 is requested, and the second button effect is requested. In the effect, an effect of requesting a continuous hitting operation first, for example, requesting a single operation of the effect button 136 in response to the filling gauge being full, may be performed. Further, a fourth button effect, a fifth button effect, etc. may be performed.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, an example is shown in which the mode of the button image in the second button effect has higher hitting reliability than the mode of the button image in the first button effect. In other words, it can be said that a step-up effect in which a button image with high hit reliability is displayed every time the number of button effects is repeated.
In the above description,

[Operation means provided at a position operable by the player [for example, effect button 136, effect lever 136V, etc.]

Effect means (for example, decorative symbol display device 208, family crest role item 224E, etc.) capable of executing a plurality of effects,
A gaming table with

  One of the plurality of effects is a first effect [for example, a normal button effect shown in FIG. 137 (A (3) -2) to FIG. 137 (A (3) -3)).

  One of the effects is a second effect [for example, a weak cut-in image CI1b illustrated in FIG. 137 (A (3) -4) or an effect illustrated in FIG. 140 (B (3) -5)). And the like in which the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed)

  One of the plurality of effects is a third effect [for example, a super protruding button effect shown in FIG. 137 (B (3) -4) to FIG. 137 (B (3) -5)). ,

  The first effect is an effect that prompts the operation of the operation means [for example, the normal button effect illustrated in FIGS. 137 (A (3) -2) to (A (3) -3)) is an effect button. 136, etc.],

The second effect is an operation response effect of the operating means in the first effect. [For example, the effect in which the weak cut-in image CI1b illustrated in FIG. 137 (A (3) -4) is displayed is an effect. The effect is performed in response to the operation of the button 136, etc.],
The second effect is an effect that does not include an effect that prompts operation of the operation unit,

  The third effect is an operation response effect of the operating means in the first effect [for example, a super-projection illustrated in FIGS. 137 (B (3) -4) to (A (3) -5)). The button effect is an effect that is executed when the effect button 136 is operated in the normal button effect, etc.],

  The third effect is an effect that prompts the operation of the operation means [for example, the super protruding button effect shown in FIGS. 137 (B (3) -4) to (B (3) -5)) is an effect. The effect is to prompt the operation of the button 136],

The execution of the first effect is started more than the case where the execution of the second effect is started after the execution of the first effect is started (hereinafter, referred to as “first case”). When the execution of the third effect is started after this (hereinafter, referred to as “second case”), the jackpot symbol mode is more likely to be finally displayed in a finalized manner.
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was explained.

  According to the conventional game console, there is room for improvement in the production means. However, according to this game console, a game console having characteristics of the production means can be provided.

  Further, according to this gaming table, it may be possible to expect which of the second effect and the third effect is started by performing the first effect.

  Here, the operation means may be provided at a position where only the player can operate, or may be provided at a position where other persons than the player can operate. The operation means may be provided at a position where the player can always operate, or may not be provided at a position where the player cannot operate.

  Further, the effect means may be capable of executing only a plurality of effects, or may be capable of executing something other than the plurality of effects. Further, the effect means may be one that always executes a plurality of effects, or may be one that does not always execute the plurality of effects.

  In addition, the production means may be capable of executing only the first production, the second production, and the third production, or the production other than the first production, the second production, and the third production. May also be executable. Also, the directing means may always execute the first effect, the second effect, and the third effect, or when the first effect, the second effect, and the third effect are not executed. There may be something.

  In addition, the first effect may include only an effect that prompts the operation of the operation means, or may include an effect other than the effect that prompts the operation of the operation means. In addition, the first effect may include an effect prompting the operation of the operation unit, or may not include an effect prompting the operation of the operation unit.

  Further, the second effect may include only an operation response effect of the operating means in the first effect, or may include an effect other than the operation response effect of the operating means in the first effect. Is also good. In addition, the second effect may include the operation response effect of the operating means in the first effect, or may not include the operation response effect of the operating device in the first effect. You may.

  Further, the second effect may not include only an effect for prompting operation of the operation means, or may not include an effect other than an effect for prompting operation of the operation means. In addition, the second effect may not necessarily include an effect that prompts operation of the operation unit, or may include an effect that prompts operation of the operation unit.

  In addition, the second effect may be started only in response to the operation of the operating means in the first effect, or may be other than in response to the operation of the operating means in the first effect May be started in some cases. Further, the second effect may be always started in response to the operation of the operating means in the first effect, or may not be started in response to the operation of the operating means in the first effect It may be.

  Further, the third effect may include only an operation response effect of the operating means in the first effect, or may include an effect other than the operation response effect of the operating means in the first effect. Is also good. Further, the third effect may include the operation response effect of the operating means in the first effect, or may not include the operation response effect of the operating device in the first effect. You may.

  In addition, the third effect may include only an effect that prompts the operation of the operation means, or may include an effect other than the effect that prompts the operation of the operation means. Further, the third effect may include an effect prompting the operation of the operating means, or may not include an effect prompting the operation of the operating means.

  Further, the third effect may be started only in response to the operation of the operating means in the first effect, or may be other than in response to the operation of the operating means in the first effect May be started in some cases. Further, the third effect may be always started in response to the operation of the operating means in the first effect, or may not be started in response to the operation of the operating means in the first effect. It may be.

  In addition, when the execution of the second effect is started after the execution of the first effect is started, the lost symbol may be definitely displayed or the big hit symbol mode may be definitely displayed. You may. Further, when the execution of the third effect is started after the execution of the first effect is started, the jackpot symbol mode may be definitely displayed or the lost symbol may be definitely displayed. You may.

  In addition, the execution of the first effect is started more than the case where the execution of the second effect is started after the execution of the first effect is started (hereinafter, referred to as a “first case”). When the execution of the third effect is started after the start of the second effect (hereinafter, referred to as “second case”), the jackpot symbol mode is more likely to be finally determined and displayed. The execution of the first effect is started more than the case where the execution of the second effect is started after the execution of the first effect is started (hereinafter, referred to as “first case”). When the execution of the third effect is started later (hereinafter, referred to as “second case”), an advantageous state is more likely to be provided ”.

  In addition, one of the plurality of effects is a fourth effect [for example, a jackpot-determined judge effect shown in FIG. 137 (B (3) -6)).

The fourth effect is an effect that may be started when the operation means is operated during execution of the third effect [for example, FIG. 137 (B (3) -5) to FIG. B (3) -6), when the production button 136 is pressed down during the execution of the super-projection button production, a judge production with a big hit decision is started, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, there is a case where the sense of expectation when the third effect is executed can be increased.

  Here, the fourth effect may be started only when the operation means is operated during the execution of the third effect, or may be operated during the execution of the third effect. The operation may be started in a case other than when the means is operated. Further, the fourth effect may be started whenever the operation means is operated during the execution of the third effect, or may be performed during the execution of the third effect. May not be started in the event of a failure.

In addition, “the fourth effect is an effect that may be started after the second effect is executed [for example, FIG. 140 (B (3) -5) to FIG. ) -6), the display of the cut-in image (strong cut-in image CI1a) is performed, and then the judge effect to determine the big hit is started],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.
According to this gaming table, there are cases where expectations can be expected even when the second effect is executed.

Here, the fourth effect may be started only after the second effect is executed, or may be started even after the second effect is executed. There may be some cases. Further, the fourth effect may be one that always starts after the second effect is executed, or may be one that is not started after the second effect is executed. .
Also, "The fourth performance is a judge performance on a big hit,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to the gaming table, there is a case where the sense of expectation that the fourth effect is executed can be increased.

  In addition, "the second effect may be started when the operating means is not operated during the execution of the first effect [for example, FIG. 140 (A (3) -2) to FIG. (As shown in (A (3) -5), in the normal button effect, the strong cut-in image CI1a may be displayed when the operation effective period elapses without operating the effect button 136),

The third effect is not started when the operation means is not operated during the execution of the first effect [for example, FIG. 140 (A (3) -2) to FIG. As shown in 3) -5), in the normal button effect, the button effect is not started when the operation effective period elapses without operating the effect button 136],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, there is a case where it is possible to increase the desire to perform an operation on the operation means during the execution of the first effect.

  Here, when the operating means is not operated during the execution of the first effect, only the second effect may be started, or the operating means may be operated during the execution of the first effect. If not, an effect other than the second effect may be started. Further, the second effect may be started when the operating means is not operated during the execution of the first effect, or the second effect may be performed when the operating means is not operated during the execution of the first effect. The second effect may not be started in some cases.

  Further, the second effect may be started only when the operating means is not operated during the execution of the first effect, or the operating means is not operated during the execution of the first effect. In other cases, the second effect may be started. Further, the second effect may be started when the operating means is not operated only during the execution of the first effect, or the operating means may be operated other than during the execution of the first effect. If not, the second effect may be started.

  Note that the second effect is not started when the operating means is not operated during the execution of the first effect, and the third effect is obtained when the operating means is not operated during the execution of the first effect. Production may be started.

Also, "the first effect may be started when the operating means is not operated during the execution of the first effect [for example, FIG. 141 (A (3) -2) to FIG. (As shown in (A (3) -5), the normal button effect is started again when the operation effective period elapses without operating the effect button 136 in the normal button effect],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the first effect is started again even if the operating means is not operated during the execution of the first effect, so that a sense of security may be given to the player.

  Here, when the operating means is not operated during the execution of the first effect, only the first effect may be started, or the operating means may be operated during the execution of the first effect. If not, an effect other than the first effect may be started. Further, the first effect may be always started when the operating means is not operated during the execution of the first effect, or may be started when the operating means is not operated during the execution of the first effect. One production may not be started.

Further, the first effect may be started only when the operating means is not operated during the execution of the first effect, or the operating means is not operated during the execution of the first effect. In other cases, the first effect may be started. Further, the first effect may be started when the operating means is not operated only during the execution of the first effect, or the operating means may be operated other than during the execution of the first effect. If not, the first effect may be started.
Also, "the operation means is means capable of being in a plurality of states,

  One of the plurality of states is a first state [for example, an aspect in which the effect button 136 does not protrude].

  One state of the plurality of states is a second state [for example, an aspect in which the effect button 136 is protruded],

  The mode of the first effect is a mode that prompts the operation of the operation unit in the first state. [For example, the operation promotion display illustrated in FIG. 137 (B (3) -2) indicates that the operation is not protruded. Including display of a button image 136a imitating the effect button 136],

The third effect mode is a mode for prompting the operation of the operating means in the second state. [For example, the operation prompting display shown in FIG. 137 (B (3) -4) indicates an effect in a protruding state. Including the display of a super protruding button image 136aS imitating the button 136],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the appearance of the operation effect of the operation means in the second state may be noticed in some cases.

  Here, the operating means may be capable of being in only the first state and the second state, or may be in a state other than the first state and the second state. It may be something. Further, the operating means may be capable of being always in the first state and the second state, or may be one that may not be in the first state and the second state. .

  The first state and the second state may be a state in which the operating means does not protrude and a state in which the operating means protrudes, or a state in which the operating means does not vibrate and a state in which the operating means vibrates. The operating means may be in a state of vibrating and vibrating and rotating, the operating means may be in a state of non-rotating and rotating, or the operating means may be vibrating and rotating. It may be in a state where it is not rotating and in a state of vibration and rotation, in a state where the operating means is not emitting light and in a state where it is emitting light, or in a case where the operating means emits light of a certain color. It may be a state in which a light is emitted in a certain color different from a certain color,

  In addition, "one of the plurality of effects is a fifth effect [for example, a weakly protruding button effect shown in FIGS. 143 (A (3) -2) to (A (3) -3)). ]

  The fifth effect mode is a mode for prompting the operation of the operating means in the second state [for example, the operation prompting display illustrated in FIG. 143 (A (3) -2) indicates a protruding effect. Including displaying a weakly protruding button image 136aP2 imitating the button 136],

The execution of the third effect may be started after the execution of the fifth effect is started [for example, FIG. 143 (A (3) -2) to FIG. 143 (A (3) -4). ), After the weakly protruding button effect has been started, if there is a pressing operation of the effect button 136 during the execution of the weakly protruding button effect, the protruding button effect is started.
The aspect of the fifth production and the aspect of the third production are different aspects,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

    According to this gaming table, it may be possible to make the player expect the operation effect to be performed first.

  Here, the mode of the fifth effect may be a mode that prompts only the operation of the operation unit in the second state, or a mode that prompts an operation other than the operation of the operation unit in the second state. Good. Further, the mode of the fifth effect may be a mode in which the operation of the operation means in the second state is always prompted, or a mode in which the operation of the operation means in the second state is not always requested. Good.

  Also, only the execution of the third effect may be started after the execution of the fifth effect is started, or the execution of the third effect may be started after the execution of the fifth effect is started. Execution of an effect other than execution may be started. Further, the execution of the third effect may be started after the execution of the fifth effect is started, or the execution of the third effect is not started after the execution of the fifth effect is started. There may be cases.

  Also, the execution of the third effect may be started only after the execution of the fifth effect has been started, or the third effect may be performed even after the execution of the fifth effect has been started. May be started.

  In addition, the fifth effect mode and the third effect mode may be partially different modes or entirely different modes.

  In addition, "the third effect is a display imitating the operation means in the second state (hereinafter, a" third display [for example, an effect button 136 shown in FIG. 143 (A (3) -4)] "). 136aP1 or the like that simulates a form in which the projection is protruded] [for example, the projection shown in FIGS. 143 (A (3) -4) to (A (3) -5). Button effect etc.]

  In the fifth effect, the effect button 136 shown in the display imitating the operation means in the second state (hereinafter, referred to as a “fifth display [for example, FIG. (For example, a weakly protruding button image 136aP2 imitating an aspect])] (for example, the weakly protruding button shown in FIG. 143 (A (3) -2) to FIG. Directing etc.]

In the third display and the fifth display, the third display is larger [for example, as shown in FIG. 143 (A (3) -2) than the weakly protruding button image 136aP2 shown in FIG. 143 (A (3) -2). ) -4), the projection button image 136aP1 is larger, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, there is a case where the player can have expectation by clarifying the development of the button display.

  Here, the third effect may include only a display of a display imitating the operation means in the second state, or a display other than the display of the display imitating the operation means in the second state. May be included. Further, the third effect may include a display of a display imitating the operation means in the second state, or may not include a display of the display imitating the operation means in the second state. There may be some.

  In addition, the fifth effect may include only a display of a display imitating the operation means in the second state, or may include a display other than the display of the display imitating the operation means in the second state. It may be something. In addition, the fifth effect may include a display of a display imitating the operation means in the second state, or may not include a display of the display imitating the operation means in the second state. There may be some.

    In the third display and the fifth display, the fifth display may be larger or may have the same size.

  In addition, "the third effect is a display imitating the operation means in the second state (hereinafter, a" third display [for example, an effect button 136 shown in FIG. 143 (A (3) -4)] "). 136aP1 or the like that simulates a form in which the projection is protruded] [for example, the projection shown in FIGS. 143 (A (3) -4) to (A (3) -5). Button effect etc.]

  In the fifth effect, the effect button 136 shown in the display imitating the operation means in the second state (hereinafter, referred to as a “fifth display [for example, FIG. (For example, a weakly protruding button image 136aP2 imitating an aspect])] (for example, the weakly protruding button shown in FIG. 143 (A (3) -2) to FIG. Directing etc.]

  At least one of the third display and an effect display surrounding the third display [for example, a display of a red effect EFR added to the protruding button image 136aP1 shown in FIG. 143 (A (3) -4)]. One display is displayed in a third color [for example, red, etc.]

Among the fifth display and an effect display surrounding the fifth display [for example, a display of a blue effect EFB added to the weakly protruding button image 136aP2 shown in FIG. 143 (A (3) -2) or the like]. At least one of the indications is displayed in a fifth color [eg, blue, etc.],
The third color and the fifth color are different colors,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, there is a case where the player can have expectation by clarifying the development of the button display.

  Here, the third effect may include only a display of a display imitating the operation means in the second state, or a display other than the display of the display imitating the operation means in the second state. May be included. Further, the third effect may include a display of a display imitating the operation means in the second state, or may not include a display of the display imitating the operation means in the second state. There may be some.

  In addition, the fifth effect may include only a display of a display imitating the operation means in the second state, or may include a display other than the display of the display imitating the operation means in the second state. It may be something. In addition, the fifth effect may include a display of a display imitating the operation means in the second state, or may not include a display of the display imitating the operation means in the second state. There may be some.

  In addition, only the third display of the effect display surrounding the third display and the third display may be displayed in the third color, or the effect display surrounding the third display and the third display may be displayed. Only the effect display surrounding the third display may be displayed in the third color, or both the third display and the effect display surrounding the third display may be displayed in the third color. . Further, at least a part of the third display and the effect display surrounding the third display may be displayed in the third color, or the effect display surrounding the third display and the third display may be displayed. All of at least one of them may be displayed in the third color.

  Further, only the fifth display among the fifth display and the effect display surrounding the fifth display may be displayed in the fifth color, or the fifth display and the effect display surrounding the fifth display may be displayed. Only the effect display surrounding the fifth display may be displayed in the fifth color, or both the fifth display and the effect display surrounding the fifth display may be displayed in the fifth color. . Further, at least one of the fifth display and the effect display surrounding the fifth display may be displayed in the fifth color, or the fifth display and the effect display surrounding the fifth display may be displayed. All of at least one of them may be displayed in the fifth color.

The third color and the fifth color may be partially different colors or entirely different colors.
Also, "the first state is a state in which the operating means is not vibrating,
The second state is a state in which the operating means is vibrating,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.
According to this gaming table, the first state and the second state may be easy to grasp.

  In addition, "the first effect is a display imitating the operation means in the first state (hereinafter, a" first display [for example, a button image 136a shown in FIG. 144 (A (3) -2)] "). ] (For example, the normal button effect shown in FIG. 144 (A (3) -2) to FIG. 144 (A (3) -3)).

  The third effect is a display imitating the operation means in the second state (hereinafter, “third display [e.g., a protruding button image 136aP1 shown in FIG. 144 (A (3) -6)]). This is an effect that includes the display of

In the second case, after the execution of the first effect is started, and before the execution of the third effect is started, a change animation that changes from the first display to the third display. [For example, as shown in FIGS. 144 (A (3) -2) to (A (3) -7)), the effect button 136 is operated in the first button effect (normal button effect). Then, when the second button effect (protruding button effect) is started, when the effect button 136 is operated in the normal button effect, an animation in which the button image 136a changes to the protruding button image 136aP1 is displayed, etc.),
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.
According to this gaming table, the change of the effect may be easy to understand.

  Here, the first effect may include only a display of a display imitating the operation unit in the first state, or a display other than the display of the display imitating the operation unit in the first state. May be included. Further, the first effect may include a display of a display imitating the operation means in the first state, or may not include a display of the display imitating the operation means in the first state. There may be some.

  In addition, the third effect may include only a display of a display imitating the operation means in the second state, or may include a display other than the display of the display imitating the operation means in the second state. It may be something. Further, the third effect may include a display of a display imitating the operation means in the second state, or may not include a display of the display imitating the operation means in the second state. There may be some.

  In addition, “the operating means is an operating means constituted by a plurality of operating means [for example, effect button 136, effect lever 136V, etc.]

  One operation means of the plurality of operation means is a first operation means [for example, a production button 136 or the like],

  One operation means of the plurality of operation means is a second operation means [for example, effect lever 136V or the like],

  The first effect is an effect that prompts the operation of the first operation means [for example, the normal button effect shown in FIGS. 139 (B (3) -2) to (A (3) -3)) , An effect that prompts the operation of the effect button 136, etc.],

The third effect is an effect that prompts the operation of the second operation means [for example, the lever effect illustrated in FIGS. 139 (B (3) -4) to (B (3) -5)) The effect is to prompt the operation of the effect lever 136V],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  Further, according to this gaming table, there is a case where expectations can be given that the second operation means can be operated.

  Here, the plurality of operating means may be only the first operating means and the second operating means, or may include operating means other than the first operating means and the second operating means.

  Further, the first effect may include only an effect for prompting operation of the first operating means, or may include an effect other than the effect for prompting operation of the first operating means. . In addition, the first effect may necessarily include an effect prompting the operation of the first operating means, or may not include an effect prompting the operation of the first operating means. Good.

  In addition, the third effect may include only an effect that prompts the operation of the second operation means, or may include an effect other than the effect that prompts the operation of the second operation means. . In addition, the third effect may include an effect prompting the operation of the second operating means, or may not necessarily include an effect prompting the operation of the second operating means. Good.

  Also, there is a case where the execution of the third effect is started after the execution of the first effect is started during the execution of the symbol change display in a certain change pattern [for example, FIG. (3) -2) to (B (3) -4), the super-protruding button effect is started after the normal button effect is started, etc.),

During the execution of the symbol fluctuation display in the certain fluctuation pattern, the execution of the first effect is not started at the timing when the execution of the first effect is started, and then the execution of the third effect is started. [For example, as shown in FIG. 143 (B (3) -2) to FIG. 143 (B (3) -4), the normal button effect is not started, and after a predetermined time delay, the super protruding button is displayed. Production has begun, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, it is possible to give the player a sense of incongruity with respect to the delay of the production start, and thereby, it may be possible to give expectations.

  Here, during the execution of the symbol fluctuation display in a certain fluctuation pattern, only the execution of the third effect may be started after the execution of the first effect is started, or a certain fluctuation may be started. After the execution of the first effect is started during the execution of the symbol variation display in the pattern, the execution of an effect other than the execution of the third effect may be started. In addition, during the execution of the symbol variation display in a certain variation pattern, the execution of the third effect may be started after the execution of the first effect is started, or the symbol variation in a certain variation pattern may be started. The execution of the third effect may not be started after the execution of the first effect is started during the execution of the display.

  Further, the execution of the third effect may be started only after the execution of the first effect is started during the execution of the symbol change display in a certain change pattern, or a certain change pattern The execution of the third effect may be started even after the execution of the first effect is started during the execution of the symbol variation display in the above. Also, the execution of the third effect may be started after the execution of the first effect is started only during the execution of the symbol change display in a certain change pattern, or the certain change pattern The execution of the third effect may be started after the execution of the first effect is started even when the symbol variation display is not being executed.

  In addition, during the execution of the symbol variation display in a certain variation pattern, the execution of the first rendering is not started at the timing when the execution of the first rendering is started, and thereafter, only the execution of the third rendering is started. The execution of the first effect is not started at the timing when the execution of the first effect is started during the execution of the symbol change display in a certain change pattern, and thereafter, the third effect is executed. The execution of an effect other than the execution of the effect may be started. Also, during the execution of the symbol effect display in a certain fluctuation pattern, the execution of the first effect is not started at the timing when the execution of the first effect is started, and thereafter, the execution of the third effect is always started. Alternatively, the execution of the first effect is not started at the timing when the execution of the first effect is started during the execution of the symbol variation display in a certain variation pattern, and the execution of the third effect is thereafter performed. It may not be started.

  Further, the execution of the first effect is not started at the timing when the execution of the first effect is started only during the execution of the symbol change display in a certain fluctuation pattern, and thereafter, the execution of the third effect is started. The execution of the first effect is not started at the timing when the execution of the first effect is started even during the execution of the symbol change display in a certain change pattern, and the The execution of the third effect may be started.

  The first effect is an effect including a display of an operation request display [for example, a display including a character display of “press” shown in FIG. 137 (B (3) -2)).

  The third effect is an effect including a display of an operation request display [for example, a display including a character display of “push-no-ja” shown in FIG. 137 (B (3) -4)).

A character string included in the operation request display displayed in the first effect is different from a character string included in the operation request display displayed in the third effect.
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, there are cases where the sense of expectation can be changed due to the difference in character strings.

  Here, the first effect may include only the display of the operation request display, or may include a display other than the display of the operation request display. In addition, the first effect may include a display of an operation request display or may not include a display of an operation request display.

  Further, the third effect may include only the display of the operation request display, or may include a display other than the display of the operation request display. In addition, the third effect may include a display of an operation request display, or may not include a display of an operation request display.

  Further, the character string included in the operation request display displayed in the first effect and the character string included in the operation request display displayed in the third effect may be partially different, or all may be different. May be different.

  In addition, one of the plurality of effects is a sixth effect [for example, a normal button effect or the like executed as a second button effect], and the sixth effect is the first effect. An operation response effect of the operation means in the effect,

  The execution of the sixth effect may be started after the execution of the first effect is started [for example, FIG. 151 (A (3) -3) to FIG. 151 (A (3) -7). ), When the button image 136a is selected in the selection effect as the first button effect, the normal button effect is started as the second button effect, etc.)

The first effect is an effect that selects whether execution of the third effect is started or execution of the sixth effect is started as an effect after the first effect is executed. [For example, in the selection effects shown in FIGS. 151 (A (3) -3) to (A (3) -7), a button image is selected from a plurality of types of button images (button image 136a and protruding button image 136aP1). To select whether a normal button effect or a protruding button effect is started as the second button effect, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, there is a case where the player's willingness to operate can be improved by determining the contents of the effect by the subsequent operation means by the selected effect.

  Here, only the execution of the sixth effect may be started after the execution of the first effect is started, or the sixth effect after the execution of the first effect is started. The execution of an effect other than the execution of may be started. Further, the execution of the sixth effect may be necessarily started after the execution of the first effect is started, or the execution of the sixth effect is not started after the execution of the first effect is started. There may be cases.

In addition, there is a case where the execution of the sixth effect is started when the operating means is not operated during the execution of the first effect [for example, FIG. 151 (B (3) -3) to FIG. As shown in FIG. 152 (B (3) -9), when the operation effective period elapses without operating the effect button 136 in the selected effect as the first button effect, a normal button effect as the second button effect Is started, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, there is a case where the desire to operate the operation means can be improved in order to perform the third effect.

  Here, when the operating means is not operated during the execution of the first effect, only the execution of the sixth effect may be started, or the operating means may be operated during the execution of the first effect. When no operation has been performed, execution of an effect other than execution of the sixth effect may be started. In addition, when the operating means is not operated during the execution of the first effect, the execution of the sixth effect may be started without fail, or when the operating means is not operated during the execution of the first effect. The execution of the sixth effect may not be started.

  Further, the execution of the sixth effect may be started only when the operating means is not operated during the execution of the first effect, or the operating means may be operated during the execution of the first effect. The execution of the sixth effect may be started in cases other than the case where it is not performed.

  In addition, the “producing means is a dice slot game of“ 5-5-5 ”in the dice slot game shown in FIG. 146 ((1) -4) to FIG. 146 (1) -12). The button icon BTN is stocked by displaying the combination, etc.]

  The stock effect is an effect that suggests an effect that prompts one or more operations of the operation unit by the icon stock,

  In the first case, one of the icons is digested [for example, as shown in FIG. 145 ((3) -2) to FIG. 145 ((3) -7)), one button icon BTN is digested. After the normal button effect is performed, the weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed in response to the operation of the effect button 136],

Also in the second case, one icon is digested [for example, as shown in FIG. 146 ((3) -2) to FIG. 146 ((3) -7)), one button icon BTN is digested. After the normal button effect is performed, the deca button effect is started in response to the operation of the effect button 136, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the effect by the operation means is actually performed twice, but the consumption of the icon stock can be suppressed to one, so that the player may be made to feel better.

  Also, according to this gaming table, there is a case where even if the stock of the icon in the stock effect is one, expectation can be given to the start of the effect by the operation means.

  Here, the effect means may be capable of executing only a stock effect, or may be capable of executing effects other than the stock effect. The effect means may be one that always executes a stock effect, or one that does not always execute a stock effect.

  In addition, the stock effect may suggest an effect that prompts one operation of the operation means by the icon stock, or may suggest a effect that prompts the operation of the operation means a plurality of times by the icon stock. It may be something.

  In the first case, only one icon may be consumed, or two or more icons may be consumed.

  Also, in the second case, only one icon may be digested, or two or more icons may be digested.

In addition, the “first effect is an effect that prompts a single operation of the operating means [for example, the normal button shown in FIG. 137 (B (3) -2) to FIG. 137 (B (3) -3)). The production prompts one operation with the production button 136, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

In addition, "the first effect is a continuous hit effect requiring a plurality of operations of the operating means [for example, as shown in FIG. 153 (D (3) -2) to FIG. 153 (D (3) -8)). In the continuous hitting operation effect, it is an effect requesting a continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

In addition, "the operation validity period of the operation means in the first effect and the operation validity period of the operation means in the third effect are different periods [for example, FIG. 137 (B (3) -2). (B (3) -5), the operation effective period in the normal button effect as the first button effect and the operation effective period in the super protruding button effect as the second button effect are different. Etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  In addition, the operation validity period of the operation means in the first effect and the operation validity period of the operation means in the third effect may be partially overlapped, may be partially overlapped, They do not have to overlap.

Also, "The gaming table is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG.
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  In addition, “a plurality of operation means [for example, a production button 136, a production lever 136V, etc.] provided at a position operable by a player,

Effect means (for example, decorative symbol display device 208, family crest role item 224E, etc.) capable of executing a plurality of effects,
A gaming table with

  One of the plurality of effects is a first effect [for example, a normal button effect shown in FIG. 139 (B (3) -2) to FIG. 139 (A (3) -3)).

  One of the effects is a second effect [for example, a weak cut-in image CI1b illustrated in FIG. 137 (A (3) -4) or an effect illustrated in FIG. 140 (B (3) -5)). And the like in which the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed)

  One of the plurality of effects is a third effect [for example, a lever or the like illustrated in FIG. 139 (B (3) -4)).

  One operation means of the plurality of operation means is a first operation means [for example, a production button 136 or the like],

  One operation means of the plurality of operation means is a second operation means [for example, effect lever 136V or the like],

  The first effect is an effect that prompts the operation of the first operation means [for example, the normal button effect shown in FIGS. 139 (B (3) -2) to (A (3) -3)) , An effect that prompts the operation of the effect button 136, etc.],

The second effect is an operation response effect of the first operating means in the first effect [for example, an effect in which a weak cut-in image CI1b illustrated in FIG. 137 (A (3) -4) is displayed). Is an effect executed in response to the operation of the effect button 136, etc.],
The second effect is an effect that does not include an effect that prompts the operation of the first operation means,

  The third effect is an operation response effect of the first operation means in the first effect [for example, in FIG. 139 (B (3) -4) to FIG. 139 (A (3) -5)). The lever effect shown is an effect executed when the effect button 136 is operated in the normal button effect, etc.],

  The third effect is an effect that prompts the operation of the second operation means [for example, the lever effect illustrated in FIG. 139 (B (3) -4) to FIG. 139 (B (3) -5)) The effect is to prompt the operation of the effect lever 136V],

The execution of the third effect starts after the execution of the first effect is started, compared to the case where the execution of the second effect is started after the execution of the first effect is started. If it is done, it is easier to finally display the jackpot design mode,
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to the conventional game console, there is room for improvement in the production means. However, according to this game console, a game console having characteristics of the production means can be provided.

  Further, according to this gaming table, there is a case where expectations can be given that the second operation means can be operated.

  Here, the plurality of operation means may be provided at a position where only the player can operate, or may be provided at a position where other than the player can operate. Further, the plurality of operation means may be provided at a position where the player can always operate, or may be provided at a position where the player cannot operate.

  Further, the effect means may be capable of executing only a plurality of effects, or may be capable of executing something other than the plurality of effects. Further, the effect means may be one that always executes a plurality of effects, or may be one that does not always execute the plurality of effects.

  In addition, the production means may be capable of executing only the first production, the second production, and the third production, or the production other than the first production, the second production, and the third production. May also be executable. Also, the directing means may always execute the first effect, the second effect, and the third effect, or when the first effect, the second effect, and the third effect are not executed. There may be something.

  Further, the plurality of operating means may be only the first operating means and the second operating means, or may include operating means other than the first operating means and the second operating means.

  Further, the first effect may include only an effect for prompting operation of the first operating means, or may include an effect other than the effect for prompting operation of the first operating means. . In addition, the first effect may necessarily include an effect prompting the operation of the first operating means, or may not include an effect prompting the operation of the first operating means. Good.

  Further, the second effect may include only an operation response effect of the first operation means in the first effect, or an effect other than the operation response effect of the first operation means in the first effect. May also be included. In addition, the second effect may include the operation response effect of the first operation means in the first effect, or may not include the operation response effect of the first operation device in the first effect. There may be some cases.

  Further, the second effect may not include only the effect prompting the operation of the first operating means, or may not include the effect other than the effect prompting the operation of the first operating means. Is also good. Further, the second effect may not necessarily include an effect that prompts the operation of the first operation means, or may include an effect that prompts the operation of the first operation means. Good.

  Further, the second effect may be started only in response to the operation of the first operating means in the first effect, or the operation of the first operating means in the first effect May be started in cases other than the above. Further, the second effect may be always started in response to the operation of the first operation means in the first effect, or may be started in response to the operation of the first operation means in the first effect Some may not be started.

  Further, the third effect may include only an operation response effect of the first operation means in the first effect, or an effect other than the operation response effect of the first operation means in the first effect. May also be included. Further, the third effect may include the operation response effect of the first operation means in the first effect, or may not include the operation response effect of the first operation means in the first effect. There may be some cases.

  In addition, the third effect may include only an effect that prompts the operation of the second operation means, or may include an effect other than the effect that prompts the operation of the second operation means. . In addition, the third effect may include an effect prompting the operation of the second operating means, or may not necessarily include an effect prompting the operation of the second operating means. Good.

  Further, the third effect may be started only in response to the operation of the first operating means in the first effect, or may be the operation of the first operating means in the first effect May be started in cases other than the above. Further, the third effect may be always started in response to the operation of the first operating means in the first effect, or may be started in response to the operation of the first operating means in the first effect Some may not be started.

  In addition, when the execution of the second effect is started after the execution of the first effect is started, the lost symbol may be definitely displayed or the big hit symbol mode may be definitely displayed. You may. Further, when the execution of the third effect is started after the execution of the first effect is started, the jackpot symbol mode may be definitely displayed or the lost symbol may be definitely displayed. You may.

  In addition, "after the execution of the first effect has been started, the execution of the second effect has been started after the execution of the first effect has been started, the execution of the third effect has been started after the execution of the first effect has been started. The case where the execution is started is easier to finally display the jackpot symbol mode when the execution is started. "The case where the execution of the second effect is started after the execution of the first effect is started. An advantageous state is more likely to be provided when the execution of the third effect is started after the execution of the first effect is started. "

  FIG. 159 to FIG. 174 are diagrams illustrating step-by-step change effects centering on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 applicable to the present embodiment. The effect examples shown in FIGS. 159 to 174 are examples of the effect executed by one pachinko machine 100. The pachinko machines 100 capable of executing the effect examples shown in FIGS. 159 to 174 are shown in other drawings. Various effects can also be performed. Further, in FIGS. 159 to 174, instead of the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol display device 208 </ b> L of the three decorative symbol display devices 208 </ b> L to 208 </ b> N may be used. The decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are not shown. 159 to 174, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the general figure display device 210, the first special figure reservation lamp 218, the second special figure reservation lamp 220, and the general figure reservation Illustration of the lamp 216 is omitted. Further, a transparent light guide plate IL or a POV display may be arranged on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  The reference numerals shown in FIGS. 159 to 174 represent common components when the same reference numerals are used. Further, even when different codes are used, there are cases where the technical ideas are common. That is, as the technical ideas, the technical ideas shown in FIGS. 14 to 158 and the technical ideas shown in other drawings can be applied to the technical ideas shown in FIGS. 159 to 174. Conversely, the technical ideas shown in FIGS. 159 to 174 can be applied to the technical ideas shown in FIGS. 14 to 158 and the technical ideas shown in other drawings. At this time, components having the same reference numerals may be treated as the same component, and may be replaced.

  The description in FIGS. 159 to 174 can be applied to any of the effect examples in this specification, but is preferably applied to the effect examples described with reference to FIGS. 14 to 158.

  FIG. 159 is a diagram illustrating some examples in which both the first variable icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN1 and the second variable icon h02 displayed separately from the first variable icon h01 are displayed. .

  In the example shown in FIG. 159 (A1) to FIG. 159 (A8), first, in FIG. 159 (A1), the decorative symbol display device 208 completes the variation display of the decorative symbol, and the combination of the lost decorative symbols (“decoration”). 2 "-" decoration 3 "-" decoration 2 ") is stopped and displayed. Note that a second decorative symbol smaller in size than the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed at the upper left of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 159 (A1).

  A holding frame UI is displayed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 159 (A1). The hold frame UI has a hold icon display area HIS, a change icon display area CIS, and an effect icon display area DIS. The variable icon display area CIS is provided at the center, and the pedestal hs0 is arranged in the variable icon display area CIS. The change icon is displayed in the icon display area HN1 formed on the pedestal hs0. In this effect example, the position of the icon display area HN1 is indicated by a dashed line for the sake of convenience, but is not actually visible. Further, the icon display area HN1 is an area in which the changeable icon can execute the standby animation, and the same applies to the icon display area HN1 in FIGS. 151 to 174. The reserved icon display area HIS is provided on the left side of the variable icon display area CIS, and four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) are arranged on the left base icon bI1. The effect icon display area DIS is provided on the right side of the variable icon display area CIS, and the navigation character YM of the lord character may be displayed on the right base icon bIr. In the effect icon display area DIS, various displays such as icons and mini items may be performed.

  In FIG. 159 (A1), the number of reservations in the special figure 1 is four, and the first reservation icon h11, the second reservation icon h12, the third reservation icon h13, and the fourth reservation icon h14 of the special figure 1 are displayed. ing. Each of the hold icons has a default (white) display mode. That is, at least a part of each of the hold icons is displayed in white. In other words, the whole may be displayed in white, or only a part (for example, the area inside the line of the black edge) may be displayed in white. In addition, the second reserved number display is displayed at the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 159 (A1), and the reserved number of the special figure 1 is 4 and the reserved number of the special figure 2 is 0. Is reported to be.

  Further, FIG. 159 (A1) shows a state in which the combination of the decorative patterns of the loss (“decoration 2” − “decoration 3” − “decoration 2”) is definitely displayed, and the change icon is deleted.

  In FIG. 159 (A2), the reservation of the special figure 1 is exhausted, and the decorative symbol display device 208 has started to display the decorative symbols in a fluctuating manner, and the moving animation of the reserved icon of the special figure 1 has been completed. As a result, in the hold icon display area HIS, three hold icons of the first hold icon h11, the second hold icon h12, and the third hold icon h13 are displayed, and the icon display area HN1 of the variable icon display area CIS is displayed. The icon that was the first hold icon h11 is displayed as the first change icon h01. Both the hold icons h11 to h13 and the first change icon h01 are in the default (white) display mode. This change icon is also displayed at least partially in white. In other words, the whole may be displayed in white, or only a part (for example, the area inside the line of the black edge) may be displayed in white. In the second holding number display displayed on the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 159 (A2), the holding number of the special figure 1 is 3 and the holding number of the special figure 2 is 0. Is reported.

  FIG. 159 (A3) shows a state in which a second variable icon h02 different from the first variable icon h01 appears from the upper center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 and falls in the vertical direction. . The second variation icon h02 in this effect example has the same size as the first variation icon h01, but has a different color, and has a blue display mode. Subsequently, as shown in FIGS. 159 (A4) to (A6), a state where the second fluctuation icon h02 continuously falls and overlaps a part of the first fluctuation icon h01 is shown. Then, as shown in FIG. 159 (A6), when all of the second fluctuation icons H02 overlap with all of the first fluctuation icons h01, as shown in FIG. 159 (A7), the first fluctuation icons h01 are deleted. Thus, a second change icon h02 is displayed in the icon display area HN1, and a state in which the change icon is changed from a default display mode to a preview display mode (blue display mode) is shown.

  The icon change animation described above may be considered to be started from FIG. 159 (A3) and ended immediately before (A7) in FIG. 159, or while the second change icon h02 is moving and displayed (FIG. ) To (A6) in FIG. During the display of the icon change animation, the first decorative symbol may be deleted and the variable display may be performed only in the second decorative symbol, or the second decorative symbol may be deleted and the variable display may be performed only in the first decorative symbol. May be performed. In addition, the period during which the decorative symbol is deleted may be all of the period during which the icon change animation is being displayed, or may be a part of the period.

  The change of the display mode of the change icon means that a jackpot notice (normal notice) in the change display of the decorative symbol currently being performed has been performed, but the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 159 (A8). In this example, the variation display of the decorative symbols is completed, the combination of the lost decorative symbols ("decoration 4"-"decoration 5"-"decoration 5") is stopped and displayed, and thereafter, it is confirmed and displayed. Therefore, the normal notice here is a false notice. At the point in time when the variable display of the decorative symbol is confirmed and displayed, the variable icon (second variable icon h02) whose display mode has changed is deleted. It should be noted that the fluctuating icon whose display mode has changed may disappear earlier in the case of false notice than in the case of true notice. Note that, in this example of the effect, the combination of the decorative patterns of the loss has been confirmed and displayed with the change-on-hold effect, but the combination of the decorative symbols of the big hit may be definitely displayed. This is the same in the following description.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 159 (A1) to (A8) described above, the second variable icon h02 appears separately from the first variable icon h01, and the variable icon in the default display mode is changed to the A color. This is an example of changing at the A-th frequency (probability).

  Next, the example shown in FIGS. 159 (B1) to (B8) will be described focusing on the differences from the example shown in FIGS. 159 (A1) to (A8), and duplicate description will be omitted. There is. Note that in the following description, the description that overlaps with the example shown in FIGS. 159 (A1) to (A8) may be omitted, but the description in the example shown in FIGS. 159 (A1) to (A8) will be omitted. Is true. In the example shown in FIGS. 159 (B1) to (B8), FIGS. 159 (A1) to (B4) are the same as FIGS. 159 (A1) to (A4) described above. The state where the second fluctuation icon h02 falls is shown. Subsequently, in FIG. 159 (B5), after all of the second variation icons h02 overlap with all of the first variation icons 01, the display does not remain in the icon display area HN1 but further falls in the vertical direction, and the display screen is displayed. A frame-out is started from the lower end of the frame. Thereafter, FIGS. 159 (B6) to (B7) show a state in which the second change icon h02 has completely framed out from the lower end of the display screen, and the display mode of the change icon has not changed. When the display mode of the variable icon does not change from the first variable icon h01 to the second variable icon h02, the second variable icon h02 may pass behind the first variable icon h01. After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 159 (B8), the variable symbol display is terminated, and the combination of the lost decorative symbols (“decoration 4”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 5”) is stopped and displayed. After that, it is confirmed and displayed. When the decorative symbol is fixedly displayed, the first variable icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN1 is deleted. In this effect example, it is shown that the display mode of the fluctuating icon displayed in the icon display area does not change from the default display mode, and the hold change effect has failed. In this example of the effect, the combination of the decorative patterns of the loss has been confirmed and displayed due to the failure of the pending change effect, but the combination of the decorative symbols of the big hit may be definitely displayed. This is the same in the following description.

  In the example shown in FIG. 159 (C1) to FIG. 159 (C8), first, in FIG. 159 (C1), the decorative symbol display device 208 completes the variation display of the decorative symbol, and the combination of the lost decorative symbols (“decoration”). 2 "-" decoration 3 "-" decoration 2 ") is stopped and displayed. Note that a second decorative symbol smaller in size than the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed at the upper left of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 159 (C1).

  A holding frame UI is displayed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 159 (C1). The hold frame UI has a hold icon display area HIS, a change icon display area CIS, and an effect icon display area DIS. The variable icon display area CIS is provided at the center, and the pedestal hs0 is arranged in the variable icon display area CIS. The change icon is displayed in the icon display area HN1 formed on the pedestal hs0. In this effect example, the position of the icon display area HN1 is indicated by a dashed line for the sake of convenience, but is not actually visible. The reserved icon display area HIS is provided on the left side of the variable icon display area CIS, and four stages (first stage hs1 to fourth stage hs4) are arranged on the left base icon bI1. The effect icon display area DIS is provided on the right side of the variable icon display area CIS, and the navigation character YM of the lord character may be displayed on the right base icon bIr. In the effect icon display area DIS, various displays such as icons and mini items may be performed.

  In FIG. 159 (C1), the number of reservations in Toku-zu 1 is 4, and the first holding icon h11, the second holding icon h12, the third holding icon h13, and the fourth holding icon h14 in Toku-zu 1 are displayed. ing. In this effect example, only the second hold icon h12 of the four hold icons is displayed in blue, and the display mode of the prefetch notice is displayed, but all other hold icons are displayed in default (white). It is an aspect. The second reserved number display is displayed at the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 159 (C1), and the reserved number of the special figure 1 is four and the reserved number of the special figure 2 is zero. Is reported to be.

  Further, FIG. 159 (C1) shows a state in which the combination of the lost decorative patterns (“decoration 2”-“decoration 3”-“decoration 2”) is confirmed and displayed, and the change icon is deleted.

  In FIG. 159 (C2), the reservation of the special figure 1 is exhausted, and the decorative symbol display device 208 has started to display the variation of the decorative symbol, and the moving animation of the reserved icon of the special figure 1 has been completed. As a result, in the hold icon display area HIS, three hold icons of the first hold icon h11, the second hold icon h12, and the third hold icon h13 are displayed, and the icon display area HN1 of the variable icon display area CIS is displayed. The icon that was the first hold icon h11 is displayed as the first change icon h01. In this effect example, the display mode of the first hold icon h11 is the display mode of the prefetch notice, but the other hold icons h12 and h13 and the first change icon h01 are the default (white) display mode. This change icon is also displayed at least partially in white. In other words, the whole may be displayed in white, or only a part (for example, the area inside the line of the black edge) may be displayed in white. In the second reserved number display displayed on the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 159 (C2), the reserved number of the special figure 1 is 3 and the reserved number of the special figure 2 is 0. Is reported.

  FIG. 159 (C3) shows a state in which a second variable icon h02 different from the first variable icon h01 appears from the upper center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 and falls in the vertical direction. . The second variation icon h02 in this effect example has a larger size than the first variation icon h01, has a different color, and has a blue display mode. Subsequently, as shown in FIGS. 159 (C4) to (C6), a state is shown in which the second fluctuation icon h02 continuously falls and overlaps a part of the first fluctuation icon h01. Then, as shown in FIG. 159 (C6), when a part of the second variable icon H02 overlaps with all of the first variable icon h01, the second variable icon h02 is reduced as shown in FIG. 159 (C7). The icon is displayed to have the same size as the first variable icon h01, the first variable icon h01 is deleted, the second variable icon h02 is displayed in the icon display area HN1, and the variable icon is changed from the default display mode to the advance display mode. (Blue display mode) is shown. In this effect example, as shown in FIG. 159 (C6), the second fluctuation icon h02 is displayed in a large size, and overlaps the hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area HIS. Further, in this effect example, it can be said that the second change icon h02 overlaps the first hold icon h11 which is a display mode of the notice, and the second change icon h02 overlaps the notice display.

  The icon change animation described above may be considered to be started from FIG. 159 (C3) and ended immediately before (C7) in FIG. 159, or while the second change icon h02 is moving and displayed ((C3 in FIG. 159)). ) To (C6)), it may be regarded as an animation performed only.

  By changing the display mode of the change icon, a jackpot notice (normal notice) in the change display of the decoration symbol currently being performed has been performed, but the decoration symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 159 (C8). In this example, the variation display of the decorative symbols is completed, the combination of the lost decorative symbols ("decoration 4"-"decoration 5"-"decoration 5") is stopped and displayed, and thereafter, it is confirmed and displayed. Therefore, the normal notice here is a false notice. At the point in time when the variable display of the decorative symbol is confirmed and displayed, the variable icon (second variable icon h02) whose display mode has changed is deleted. It should be noted that the fluctuating icon whose display mode has changed may disappear earlier in the case of false notice than in the case of true notice. Note that, in this effect example, the hold change effect in which the display mode of the fluctuating icon changes is performed and the combination of the decorative patterns of the loss is confirmed and displayed. However, the combination of the decorative patterns of the jackpot may be definitely displayed. Is also good. This is the same in the following description.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 159 (C1) to (C8) described above, the second variable icon h02 appears separately from the first variable icon h01, and the variable icon in the default display mode is changed to the A-color. This is an example of changing at the A-th frequency (probability).

  Next, the example shown in FIGS. 159 (D1) to (D8) will be described focusing on the differences from the example shown in FIGS. 159 (C1) to (C8), and duplicate description will be omitted. There is. In the effect examples shown in FIGS. 159 (C1) to (C8), a part of the hold icons is in the notice display mode, but in the effect examples shown in FIGS. 159 (D1) to (D8). , All the hold icons are in a default display mode. In the example shown in FIGS. 159 (D1) to (D8), FIGS. 159 (C1) to (D4) are the same as FIGS. 159 (C1) to (C4) described above. The state where the second fluctuation icon h02 having a size larger than the first fluctuation icon h01 falls is shown. Subsequently, in FIG. 159 (D5), after a part of the second fluctuation icon h02 overlaps with the whole of the first fluctuation icon h01, the animation in which the second fluctuation icon h02 is reduced and displayed is not performed in the vertical direction. A state is shown in which further dropping is performed and frame-out is started from the lower end of the display screen. Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 159 (D6) to (D7), a state is shown in which the second change icon h02 completely frames out from the lower end of the display screen, and the display mode of the change icon has not changed. I have. When the display mode of the variable icon does not change from the first variable icon h01 to the second variable icon h02, the second variable icon h02 may pass behind the first variable icon h01. Further, after a part of the second fluctuation icon h02 overlaps with the whole of the first fluctuation icon h01, an animation in which the second fluctuation icon h02 is displayed in a reduced size is performed, and thereafter, the second fluctuation icon h02 is moved to the lower end of the display screen. From the frame. Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 illustrated in FIG. 159 (D8), the variable symbol display is terminated, and the combination of the lost decorative symbols (“decoration 4”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 5”) is stopped and displayed. After that, it is confirmed and displayed. When the decorative symbol is fixedly displayed, the first variable icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN1 is deleted. In this effect example, a state is shown in which the display mode of the fluctuating icon displayed in the icon display area does not change from the default display mode, and the hold change effect has failed.

  As described above, all of the examples described with reference to FIG. 159 are examples of changing icons, but may be performed on hold icons.

  In addition, as an example of the second variation icon h02, blue has been described as an example, but other colors such as green and red or other patterns may be used. That is, a plurality of types of modes are prepared as modes that indicate the player's advantage and the jackpot expectation. For example, the lowest aspect is a white or non-patterned aspect (A-th aspect), a blue or diagonal pattern aspect (B-th aspect), a green or diamond-shaped aspect (C-th aspect), a red or The shape of the lattice pattern (the D-th embodiment), the color and the vertical line pattern (the E-th embodiment) increase in order, and the rainbow color and the horizontal line-pattern (the F-th embodiment) become the highest. . A plurality of types of modes are prepared for each of the change icon and the hold icon, but the respective modes are not limited to the modes described with reference to FIG. That is, white in the example described with reference to FIG. 159 may be replaced with blue. For example, the first change icon h01 having a white display mode may be a blue display mode or a green display mode. Furthermore, the first variation icon h01 that was in the white display mode may be in a red display mode, a gold display mode, or a rainbow display mode. Further, blue in the example described with reference to FIG. 159 may be replaced with white or green. In addition, when the modes are roughly divided, a mode of a green color or a rhombus pattern (a C mode) (the first group which is a group of the A mode, the B mode, and the C mode) and a red or Lattice Pattern Mode (D-th Mode) The grid pattern can be divided into the above-described modes (the second group which is a group of the D-th mode, the E-th mode, and the F-th mode). Here, the mode belonging to the first group cannot be changed to the mode belonging to the second group, and the mode belonging to the second group cannot be changed to the mode belonging to the first group. On the other hand, the modes may be interchanged in the first group, and the modes may be interchanged in the second group. Further, in addition to the color and the pattern, the player's advantage and the expectation of a big hit may be represented by a difference in size or number. In addition, the player's advantage is that the player is likely to be in an advantageous control state (for example, a probable change state and / or a time saving state), that a premiere effect is easily started, or that a big hit confirmation effect is started. It may be easy. In addition, it is easy to execute an effect that is indirectly connected to the jackpot without directly connecting to the jackpot. For example, an SP reach production with a high jackpot reliability may be started, or another announcement with a high jackpot reliability may easily appear. The matters related to the mode described in this paragraph are the same in the examples before and in the examples thereafter.

    Furthermore, the mode of each icon may be the mode of the entire icon (entire area) or the mode of only a part (partial area) of the icon.

  In each of the examples described with reference to FIG. 159, the normal notice by the fluctuating icon whose display mode has changed is a false notice, but may be a true notice due to a big hit. Further, even when the hold change effect in which the display mode of the fluctuating icon changes fails, a big hit may occur, or the game may be missed.

  FIG. 160: is a figure which shows some other examples in which both the 1st change icon h01 displayed on the icon display area HN1 and the 2nd change icon h02 displayed separately from the 1st change icon h01 are displayed. It is. The effect examples shown in FIGS. 160 (A1) to (A8), the effect examples shown in FIGS. 160 (B1) to (B8), the effect examples shown in FIGS. 160 (C1) to (C8), and In the effect example shown in FIGS. 160 (D1) to 160 (D8), the mode of the icon display area in which the fluctuating icon is displayed is formed in a rectangular frame, and the icon display area is displayed to the player. HN2 is made visible. 160 (A1) to the effect example shown in FIG. 160 (A8), the effect example shown in FIGS. 160 (B1) to (B8), the effect example shown in FIG. 160 (C1) to FIG. The effect examples shown in (D1) to (D8) are the effect examples shown in FIGS. 159 (A1) to (A8), and FIG. 159 (B1) to FIG. The effect example shown in (B8), the effect example shown in FIGS. 159 (C1) to (C8), and the effect example shown in FIGS. 159 (D1) to (D8) are respectively the same. Here, in the effect shown in FIG. 160 (D5), when the holding change effect fails, the second variable icon h02 may be displayed behind the icon display area HN2.

  FIG. 161 is a diagram illustrating another example in which both the first variable icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN1 and the second variable icon h02 displayed separately from the first variable icon h01 are displayed.

  First, the effect examples shown in FIGS. 161 (A1) to (A8) will be described. The effect examples shown in FIGS. 161 (A1) to (A2) are similar to the effect example shown in FIG. 159 (A1) except that a navigation character YM in a display mode wearing a blue kimono is displayed in the effect icon display area DIS. ). Here, the navigation character YM shown in FIG. 161 (A1) to FIG. 161 (A2) is displayed in a display mode wearing a blue kimono. That is, at least a portion is displayed in blue. In other words, the whole may be displayed in blue, or only a part (for example, a kimono part) may be displayed in blue. The navigation character YM is a display that may be displayed across a plurality of continuous symbol change displays. Further, the display mode of the navigation character YM may change while the display is continued. Details of this point will be described later. The navigation character YM is displayed in an initial posture facing the front. Note that the navigation character YM may be continuously displayed while performing a standby animation (for example, an animation that repeats a certain operation).

  In FIG. 161 (A3), the navigation character YM in the initial posture starts the icon change animation, faces the first change icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN1, pulls out the sword, and shakes it. Change to a pose. Then, a second variation icon h02 different from the first variation icon h01 appears above the head of the navigation character YM, and an animation is started to show the appearance of moving toward the icon display area HN1. The second variation icon h02 in this effect example has the same size as the first variation icon h01, but has a different color, and has a blue display mode. Subsequently, as shown in FIGS. 161 (A4) to (A6), the state where the second variable icon h02 continues to move to the icon display area HN1 and overlaps a part of the first variable icon h01. It is shown. Then, as shown in FIG. 161 (A6), when all of the second fluctuation icons H02 overlap with all of the first fluctuation icons h01, as shown in FIG. 161 (A7), the first fluctuation icons h01 are deleted. Thus, a second change icon h02 is displayed in the icon display area HN1, and a state in which the change icon is changed from a default display mode to a preview display mode (blue display mode) is shown. That is, a state in which the first variable icon h01 in the default display mode is replaced with the second variable icon h02 which is the same display mode (blue display mode) as the kimono of the navigation character YM is shown. In other words, it may be possible that the display mode of the navigation character YM suggests (preliminary notice) the display mode of the changed icon after the change. At this time, the navigation character YM ends the icon change animation and returns to the initial posture.

  The icon change animation described above may be regarded as being started from FIG. 161 (A3) and ended immediately before (A7) in FIG. 161 or while the second variable icon h02 is moving and displayed (FIG. ) To (A6) in FIG.

  A change in the display mode of the change icon means that a jackpot notice (normal notice) has been given in the change display of the decorative symbol currently being performed, but the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 161 (A8). In this example, the variation display of the decorative symbols is completed, the combination of the lost decorative symbols ("decoration 4"-"decoration 5"-"decoration 5") is stopped and displayed, and thereafter, it is confirmed and displayed. Therefore, the normal notice here is a false notice. At the point in time when the variable display of the decorative symbol is confirmed and displayed, the variable icon (second variable icon h02) whose display mode has changed is deleted. It should be noted that the fluctuating icon whose display mode has changed may disappear earlier in the case of false notice than in the case of true notice. Note that, in this example of the effect, the combination of the decorative patterns of the loss has been confirmed and displayed with the change-on-hold effect, but the combination of the decorative symbols of the big hit may be definitely displayed. This is the same in the following description.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 161 (A1) to (A8) described above, the second variable icon h02 appears separately from the first variable icon h01, and the variable icon in the default display mode is changed to the A-color. This is an example of changing at the A-th frequency (probability).

  Next, the example shown in FIGS. 161 (B1) to (B8) will be described focusing on the differences from the example shown in FIGS. 161 (A1) to (A8), and duplicate description will be omitted. There is. In the following description, the same description as the example shown in FIGS. 161 (A1) to (A8) may be omitted, but the description in the example shown in FIGS. 161 (A1) to (A8) may be omitted. Is true. In the example shown in FIGS. 161 (B1) to (B8), FIGS. 161 (B1) to (B4) are the same as FIGS. 161 (A1) to (A4) described above. The state where the second change icon h02 moves to the icon display area HN1 is shown. Subsequently, in FIG. 161 (B5), after all of the second variation icons h02 overlap with all of the first variation icons h01, they fall downward without staying in the icon display area HN1 and frame out from the lower end of the display screen. Is started. After that, FIGS. 161 (B6) to (B7) show a state in which the second change icon h02 has completely framed out from the lower end of the display screen, and the display mode of the change icon has not changed. When the display mode of the variable icon does not change from the first variable icon h01 to the second variable icon h02, the second variable icon h02 may pass behind the first variable icon h01. After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 161 (B8), the variable symbol display is terminated, and the combination of the lost decorative symbols (“decoration 4”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 5”) is stopped and displayed. After that, it is confirmed and displayed. When the decorative symbol is fixedly displayed, the first variable icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN1 is deleted. In this effect example, it is shown that the display mode of the fluctuating icon displayed in the icon display area does not change from the default display mode, and the hold change effect has failed. In this example of the effect, the combination of the decorative patterns of the loss has been confirmed and displayed due to the failure of the pending change effect, but the combination of the decorative symbols of the big hit may be definitely displayed. This is the same in the following description.

  Next, the effect examples shown in FIGS. 161 (C1) to (C8) will be described. Here, the effects shown in FIGS. 161 (C1) and (C2) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 161 (A1) and (A2), and therefore description thereof will be omitted.

  In FIG. 161 (C3), the navigation character YM in the initial posture starts the icon change animation, faces the first change icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN1, pulls the sword, and shakes it. Change to a pose. Then, a second variation icon h02 different from the first variation icon h01 appears above the head of the navigation character YM, and an animation is started to show the appearance of moving toward the icon display area HN1. The second variation icon h02 in this effect example is larger in size than the first variation icon h01, has a different color, and has a blue display mode. Subsequently, as shown in FIGS. 161 (C4) to (C6), when a part of the second fluctuation icon h02 overlaps with all of the first fluctuation icon h01, as shown in FIG. 161 (C7), The second variable icon h02 is reduced in size and becomes the same size as the first variable icon h01, the first variable icon h01 is deleted, the second variable icon h02 is displayed in the icon display area HN1, and the variable icon is defaulted. Is changed from the display mode to the preview display mode (blue display mode). That is, a state in which the first variable icon h01 in the default display mode is replaced with the second variable icon h02 which is the same display mode (blue display mode) as the kimono of the navigation character YM is shown. In other words, it may be possible that the display mode of the navigation character YM suggests (preliminary notice) the display mode of the changed icon after the change. At this time, the navigation character YM ends the icon change animation and returns to the initial posture. In this effect example, as shown in FIG. 161 (C6), the second fluctuation icon h02 is displayed in a large size, and overlaps with the hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area HIS. Further, when the hold icon is displayed in the display mode of the notice, the hold icon in the display form of the notice may overlap with the second change icon h02.

  The icon change animation described above may be regarded as being started from FIG. 161 (C3) and ended immediately before (C7) in FIG. ) To (C6) in FIG.

  A change in the display mode of the change icon means that a jackpot notice (normal notice) has been made in the change display of the decorative symbol currently being performed, but the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 161 (C8). In this example, the variation display of the decorative symbols is completed, the combination of the lost decorative symbols ("decoration 4"-"decoration 5"-"decoration 5") is stopped and displayed, and thereafter, it is confirmed and displayed. Therefore, the normal notice here is a false notice. At the point in time when the variable display of the decorative symbol is confirmed and displayed, the variable icon (second variable icon h02) whose display mode has changed is deleted. It should be noted that the fluctuating icon whose display mode has changed may disappear earlier in the case of false notice than in the case of true notice. Note that, in this effect example, the hold change effect in which the display mode of the fluctuating icon changes is performed and the combination of the decorative patterns of the loss is confirmed and displayed. However, the combination of the decorative patterns of the jackpot may be definitely displayed. Is also good. This is the same in the following description.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 161 (C1) to (C8) described above, the second variable icon h02 appears separately from the first variable icon h01, and the variable icon in the default display mode is changed to the A color. This is an example of changing at the A-th frequency (probability).

  Subsequently, the example shown in FIGS. 161 (D1) to (D8) will be described focusing on the differences from the example shown in FIGS. 161 (C1) to (C8), and the overlapping description will be omitted. There is. In the example shown in FIGS. 161 (D1) to (D8), FIGS. 161 (D1) to (D4) are the same as FIGS. 161 (C1) to (C4) described above. A state is shown in which the second variable icon h02 having a size larger than the first variable icon h01 moves toward the icon display area HN1. Subsequently, in FIG. 161 (D5), after a part of the second fluctuation icon h02 overlaps with all of the first fluctuation icon h01, the second fluctuation icon h02 falls downward without performing the animation for reducing the display. , The frame-out from the lower end of the display screen is started. Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 161 (D6) to (D7), a state is shown in which the second variation icon h02 completely frames out from the lower end of the display screen, and the display mode of the variation icon has not changed. I have. When the display mode of the variable icon does not change from the first variable icon h01 to the second variable icon h02, the second variable icon h02 may pass behind the first variable icon h01. Further, after a part of the second fluctuation icon h02 overlaps with the whole of the first fluctuation icon h01, an animation in which the second fluctuation icon h02 is displayed in a reduced size is performed, and thereafter, the second fluctuation icon h02 is moved to the lower end of the display screen. From the frame. Further, in this effect example, the navigation character YM returns to the initial posture after the second fluctuation icon h02 goes out of the frame. After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 161 (D8), the variable symbol display is terminated, and the combination of the lost decorative symbols (“decoration 4”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 5”) is stopped and displayed. After that, it is confirmed and displayed. When the decorative symbol is fixedly displayed, the first variable icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN1 is deleted. In this effect example, a state is shown in which the display mode of the fluctuating icon displayed in the icon display area does not change from the default display mode, and the hold change effect has failed.

  As described above, all of the examples described with reference to FIG. 161 are examples of changing icons, but may be performed on hold icons.

  In each of the examples described with reference to FIG. 161, the normal notice by the fluctuating icon whose display mode has been changed is a false notice, but may be a big hit and a true notice. Further, even when the hold change effect in which the display mode of the fluctuating icon changes fails, a big hit may occur, or the game may be missed.

  FIG. 162 is a diagram illustrating some other examples in which both the first variable icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN1 and the second variable icon h02 displayed separately from the first variable icon h01 are displayed. It is. It should be noted that the effect examples shown in FIGS. 162 (A1) to (A8), the effect examples shown in FIGS. 162 (B1) to (B8), the effect examples shown in FIGS. 162 (C1) to FIG. In the effect examples shown in FIGS. 162 (D1) to (D8), the mode of the icon display area in which the fluctuating icon is displayed is formed in a rectangular frame, and the icon display area is displayed to the player. HN2 is made visible. 162 (A1) to the effect examples shown in FIG. 162 (A8), the effect examples shown in FIGS. 162 (B1) to (B8), the effect examples shown in FIGS. 162 (C1) to (C8) and FIG. The effect examples shown in (D1) to (D8) are the effect examples shown in FIGS. 161 (A1) to (A8), and FIGS. 161 (B1) to FIG. The effect example shown in (B8), the effect example shown in FIGS. 161 (C1) to (C8), and the effect example shown in FIGS. 161 (D1) to (D8) are respectively the same, and a description thereof will be omitted. . Here, in the effect shown in FIG. 162 (D5), when the hold change effect fails, the second change icon h02 may be displayed behind the icon display area HN2.

  FIGS. 163 (A1) to (A16) show both the first variable icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN1 and the second variable icon h02 displayed separately from the first variable icon h01. It is a figure showing another production pattern. The effects shown in FIGS. 163 (A1) to (A2) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 163 (A3), a frame change animation is started, and a first frame image FL1 having the same display mode as the entire display screen appears, and is gradually reduced and displayed. ing. As shown in FIGS. 163 (A3) to 163 (A5), the first frame image FL1 moves to the center of the display screen while being gradually reduced. Note that, in this effect example, during the period in which the frame change animation is displayed, the first decorative symbol is deleted and the variable display is performed only in the second decorative symbol, but the second decorative symbol is deleted and the first decorative symbol is deleted. The variable display may be performed only on the symbol. Further, the period during which the decorative symbols are deleted may be all of the period during which the frame change animation is displayed, or may be a part of the period. In the first frame image FL1, in addition to the first change icon h01, the hold icons h11, h12, and h13 displayed in the hold icon display area HIS are also reduced in accordance with the reduced display of the first frame image FL1. At this time, a copy of the reserved frame UI is displayed on the back side of the first frame image FL1, and the copy of the reserved frame UI is displayed with a copy variable icon h01 'as a copy of the first variable icon h01. At the same time, copy hold icons h11 ′, h12 ′, and h13 ′ are displayed as copies of the hold icons h11, h12, and h13. The copy change icon h01 'may or may not execute the standby animation in the change icon display area HN1. The first change icon h01 may or may not execute the standby animation during at least a part of the period in which the frame change animation is displayed. Further, the first change icon h01 may or may not execute the standby animation during at least a part of the period in which the reduced display after the frame change animation is executed is displayed. The same applies during and after the execution of the frame change animation in FIGS. 159 to 174.

  When the reduced display of the first frame image FL1 is completed, the first frame image FL1 starts moving leftward as shown in FIG. 163 (A6). Then, in decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 163 (A7), a state where second frame image FL2 different from first frame image FL1 is framed in from the right side of the display screen is shown. Similarly to the first frame image FL1, the second frame image FL2 includes a display of a holding frame UI including a change icon (second change icon h02) and three hold icons (hold icons h21, h22, h23). However, the second frame image FL2 includes a second variable icon h02 different from the first variable icon h01 included in the first frame image FL1, and the display mode is also a blue display mode. . On the other hand, the display modes of the hold icons h21, h22, and h23 included in the second frame image FL2 are all default display modes, and are the same display modes as the hold icons h11, h12, and h13 included in the first frame image FL1. It has become. Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 163 (A7) to (A12), the first frame image FL1 moves out of the left side of the display screen, while the second frame image FL2 moves toward the center of the display screen. I do. At this time, a period occurs in which both the first change icon h01 and the second change icon h02 are displayed. Note that the second frame image FL2 moves at a higher moving speed than the moving speed of the first frame image FL1 until it becomes a position adjacent to the first frame image FL1, and the second frame image FL2 moves to a position adjacent to the first frame image FL1. After that, the first frame image FL1 is moving at the same moving speed as the moving speed. The second change icon h02 may or may not execute the standby animation in at least a part of the period in which the reduced display is displayed. In addition, both or one of the fluctuating icons of the first frame image FL1 and the second frame image FL2 may or may not perform the standby animation. The same applies during the display of the reduced display in FIGS. 159 to 174.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 163 (A11) to (A12), the movement of the second frame image FL2 to the center of the display screen is completed, while the first frame image FL1 continues to move leftward and is displayed. Frame out from the screen.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 163 (A13), the enlarged display of the second frame image FL2 including the second variable icon h02 is started, and thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 163 (A13) to (A15). As shown, the enlarged display of the second frame image FL2 is performed until the second frame image FL2 is displayed on the entire display screen. Here, the copy fluctuation icon h01 'and the copy hold icons h11', h12 ', h13' are shown as overlapping the second frame image FL2, making it difficult to view.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 illustrated in FIG. 163 (A15), the display of the second frame image FL2 is displayed on the entire display screen, and the variable icon in the icon display area HN1 is changed from the first variable icon h01 to the second variable icon h01. A state in which the change icon is changed to the change icon h02 from the default display mode to the notice display mode (blue display mode) is shown. That is, in this effect example, it is shown that the change of the frame image succeeds in the suspension change notice.

  The change of the display mode of the change icon means that a jackpot notice (normal notice) in the change display of the decorative symbol currently being performed has been performed, but the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 163 (A16). In this example, the variation display of the decorative symbols is finished, the combination of the lost decorative symbols ("decoration 4"-"decoration 5"-"decoration 5") is stopped and then displayed. Therefore, the normal notice here is a false notice. At the point in time when the variable display of the decorative symbol is confirmed and displayed, the variable icon (second variable icon h02) whose display mode has changed is deleted. It should be noted that the fluctuating icon whose display mode has changed may disappear earlier in the case of false notice than in the case of true notice. Note that, in this example of the effect, the combination of the decorative patterns of the loss has been confirmed and displayed with the change-on-hold effect, but the combination of the decorative symbols of the big hit may be definitely displayed. Further, in this effect example, the first frame image FL1 moves parallel to move out of the frame, and the second frame image FL2 moves parallel to move in to the frame. The first frame image FL1 rotates in the left direction and disappears in the left depth direction, and the second frame image FL2 appears in the right depth direction and rotates in the left direction. The display may be such that the image is rotated to the right. This is the same in the following description.

  FIGS. 163 (B1) to 163 (B16) show both a first variable icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN1 and a second variable icon h02 displayed separately from the first variable icon h01. It is a figure showing another production pattern. The effects shown in FIGS. 163 (B1) to (B9) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 163 (A1) to (A9), and thus description thereof will be omitted.

  In this effect example, after the first frame image FL1 and the second frame image FL2 are displayed side by side in FIG. 163 (B9), each moves to the left on the display screen, but FIG. 163 (B9) to FIG. As shown in B10), a third frame image FL3 different from the first frame image FL1 and the second frame image FL2 enters the right side of the display screen so as to be adjacent to the right side of the second frame image FL2. Similar to the first frame image FL1, the third frame image FL3 includes a display of a hold frame UI including a change icon (third change icon h03) and three hold icons (hold icons h31, h32, h33). However, the third frame image FL3 includes a first variable icon h01 included in the first frame image FL1 and a third variable icon h03 different from the second variable icon h02 included in the second frame image FL2. The display mode is the same default display mode as the first change icon h01. In addition, the display modes of the hold icons h31, h32, and h33 included in the third frame image FL3 are all default display modes. Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 163 (B10) to (B12), the first frame image FL1 and the second frame image FL2 frame out from the left side of the display screen, while the third frame image FL3 is displayed on the display screen. Move towards the center of. At this time, a period occurs in which both the first and second fluctuation icons h01 and h02 are displayed, and a period occurs in which both the second fluctuation icon h02 and the third fluctuation icon h03 are displayed. The third change icon h03 may or may not execute the standby animation in at least a part of the period in which the reduced display is displayed. In addition, both or one of the change icons of the second frame image FL2 and the third frame image FL3 may or may not perform the standby animation. The same applies during the display of the reduced display in FIGS. 159 to 174.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 163 (B11) to FIG. 163 (B12), while the movement of the third frame image FL3 to the center of the display screen is completed, the first frame image FL1 and the second frame image FL2 continue to move to the left. Move in the direction and frame out of the display screen.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 163 (B13), the enlarged display of the third frame image FL3 including the third variation icon h03 is started, and thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 163 (B13) to (B15). As shown, the enlarged display of the third frame image FL3 is performed until the third frame image FL3 is displayed on the entire display screen. Here, the copy fluctuation icon h01 'and the copy hold icons h11', h12 ', h13' are shown as overlapping the third frame image FL3, making it difficult to view.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 illustrated in FIG. 163 (B15), the display of the third frame image FL3 is displayed on the entire display screen, and the variable icon in the icon display area HN1 is changed from the first variable icon h01 to the third variable icon h01. A state in which the fluctuating icon changes from the default display mode to the default display mode by changing to the fluctuating icon h03 is shown.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 163 (B16), the variable display of the decorative symbols ends, and the combination of the lost decorative symbols (“decoration 4”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 5”) is stopped and displayed. After that, it is confirmed and displayed. When the decorative design is confirmed and displayed, the third change icon h03 displayed in the icon display area HN1 is deleted. In this effect example, a state is shown in which the display mode of the fluctuating icon displayed in the icon display area does not change from the default display mode, and the hold change effect has failed. In this example of the effect, the combination of the decorative patterns of the loss has been confirmed and displayed due to the failure of the pending change effect, but the combination of the decorative symbols of the big hit may be definitely displayed. This is the same in the following description.

  FIGS. 164 (A1) to (A16) show both the first variable icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN1 and the second variable icon h02 displayed separately from the first variable icon h01. It is a figure showing another production pattern. The effect examples shown in FIGS. 164 (A1) to (A16) are the same as the effect examples shown in FIGS. This is the same as the effect example shown in FIGS. 163 (A1) to 163 (A16), except that the UI copy is not displayed.

  FIGS. 164 (B1) to (B16) show both the first variable icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN1 and the second variable icon h02 displayed separately from the first variable icon h01. It is a figure showing another production pattern. The effect examples shown in FIGS. 164 (B1) to (B16) are the effect examples shown in FIGS. 163 (B1) to 163 (B16), except that a copy of the UI is not displayed.

  FIGS. 165 (A1) to (A16) show both the first variable icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN2 and the second variable icon h02 displayed separately from the first variable icon h01. It is a figure showing another production pattern. In the effect examples shown in FIGS. 165 (A1) to (A16), the mode of the icon display area in which the fluctuating icon is displayed is formed in a rectangular frame. The display area HN2 is visible. The effect examples shown in FIGS. 165 (A1) to (A16) are the same as the effect examples shown in FIGS. 163 (A1) to (A16) except that the form of the icon display area is different.

  FIG. 165 (B1) to FIG. 165 (B16) show both the first variable icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN2 and the second variable icon h02 displayed separately from the first variable icon h01. It is a figure showing another production pattern. In the effect examples shown in FIGS. 165 (B1) to (B16), the mode of the icon display area in which the fluctuating icons are displayed is formed in a rectangular frame. The display area HN2 is visible. The effect examples shown in FIGS. 165 (B1) to (B16) are the same as the effect examples shown in FIGS. 163 (B1) to (B16) except that the form of the icon display area is different.

  FIGS. 166 (A1) to (A16) show both the first variable icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN2 and the second variable icon h02 displayed separately from the first variable icon h01. It is a figure showing another production pattern. The effect examples shown in FIGS. 166 (A1) to (A16) are the effect examples shown in FIGS. 165 (A1) to (A16) and the holding frame when the first frame image FL1 is displayed in a reduced size. This is the same as the effect example shown in FIGS. 165 (A1) to (A16), except that a copy of the UI is not displayed.

  FIGS. 166 (B1) to (B16) show both the first variable icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN2 and the second variable icon h02 displayed separately from the first variable icon h01. It is a figure showing another production pattern. The effect examples shown in FIGS. 166 (B1) to (B16) are the effect examples shown in FIGS. This is the same as the effect example shown in FIGS. 165 (B1) to (B16) except that a copy of the UI is not displayed.

  FIGS. 167 (A1) to (A16) show both the first variable icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN1 and the second variable icon h02 displayed separately from the first variable icon h01. It is a figure showing another production pattern. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 167 (A1) to (A2) are the same as those in FIG. 161 (A1) to FIG. 161 (A2), and a description thereof will be omitted. The navigation character YM in a display mode wearing a white kimono is a default display mode.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 167 (A3), a state is shown in which the first frame image FL1 having the same display form as the entire display screen appears and is gradually reduced and displayed. As shown in FIGS. 167 (A3) to 167 (A5), this first frame image FL1 moves to the center of the display screen while being gradually reduced. In the first frame image FL1, in addition to the first change icon h01, the navigation character YM and the reserved icons h11, h12, and h13 displayed in the reserved icon display area HIS are also reduced in accordance with the reduced display of the first frame image FL1. Is done. At this time, a copy of the reserved frame UI is displayed on the back side of the first frame image FL1, and the copy of the reserved frame UI is displayed with a copy variable icon h01 'as a copy of the first variable icon h01. At the same time, copy hold icons h11 ′, h12 ′, and h13 ′ are displayed as copies of the hold icons h11, h12, and h13. A copy of the navigation character YM is also displayed.

  When the reduced display of the first frame image FL1 is completed, the first frame image FL1 starts moving leftward as shown in FIG. 167 (A6). Then, in decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 167 (A7), a state in which a second frame image FL2 different from first frame image FL1 is framed in from the right side of the display screen is shown. Similarly to the first frame image FL1, the second frame image FL2 includes a holding frame UI including a changing icon (second changing icon h02), three holding icons (hold icons h21, h22, h23), and a navigation character YM. However, the display mode of the second variable icon h02 included in the second frame image FL2 is also the default display mode, like the first variable icon h01 included in the first frame image FL1. The display modes of the hold icons h21, h22, and h23 included in the second frame image FL2 are all default display modes, and are the same display modes as the hold icons h11, h12, and h13 included in the first frame image FL1. It has become. Note that, in this effect example, the display mode of the navigation character YM in the second frame image FL2 is the default display mode (wearing a white kimono), but may be a display mode wearing a blue kimono. Good. Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 167 (A7) to (A9), both the first frame image FL1 and the second frame image FL2 move to the left. At this time, a period occurs in which both the first change icon h01 and the second change icon h02 are displayed. Note that the second frame image FL2 moves at a higher moving speed than the moving speed of the first frame image FL1 until it becomes a position adjacent to the first frame image FL1, and the second frame image FL2 moves to a position adjacent to the first frame image FL1. After that, the first frame image FL1 is moving at the same moving speed as the moving speed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 167 (A9), when the entire first frame image FL1 and the entire second frame image FL2 are displayed, the navigation included in the first frame image FL1 in the initial posture is performed. The character YM and the navigation character YM included in the second frame image FL2 start icon change animation, respectively, and turn toward the first change icon h01 and the second change icon h02, and change to a pose in which the sword is pulled out and shaken. I do. Then, a wave is oscillated from the sword of the navigation character YM, and at least a part of the first fluctuating icon h01 included in the first frame image FL1 and at least a part of the second fluctuating icon h02 included in the second frame image FL2. Are respectively covered by the effect image Eh0 of the smoke image, and the first variation icon h01 and the second variation icon h02 are more difficult to recognize than before being covered by the effect image Eh0. Note that the first change icon h01 and the second change icon h02 may be partially covered with the effect image Eh0, or may be entirely covered with the effect image Eh0. After that, the first variation icon h01 and the second variation icon h02, which were the default (white) display modes before the effect image Eh0 disappeared and were covered with the effect image Eh0, are respectively the same display mode as the kimono of the navigation character YM. Is changed to the blue display mode. In this example, the display mode of the navigation character YM indicates (preliminary) the display mode of the changed icon h0 after the change. In addition, the mode of the effect image Eh0 may be the same as the mode after the icon change, and in this case, the mode of the effect image Eh0 is the display mode of the first variable icon h01 and the second variable icon h02 after the change. Will be suggested (notified).

  When the effect image Eh0 is deleted and the first change icon h01 and the second change icon h02 are displayed, as shown in FIGS. 167 (A9) to (A10), the first frame image FL1 and the second frame image FL2 resumes moving to the left. Thereafter, the navigation character YM returns to the initial posture. Although the wave has disappeared from the sword of the navigation character YM shown in FIG. 167 (A10), the wave may still be oscillating, or the navigation character YM may be initialized at the timing when the effect image Eh0 is erased. You may return to your posture.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 167 (A11) to (A12), the movement of the second frame image FL2 to the center of the display screen is completed, while the first frame image FL1 continues to move leftward and is displayed. Frame out from the screen.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 167 (A13), the enlarged display of the second frame image FL2 including the second variable icon h02 is started, and thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 167 (A13) to (A15). As shown, the enlarged display of the second frame image FL2 is performed until the second frame image FL2 is displayed on the entire display screen. Here, the copy fluctuation icon h01 'and the copy hold icons h11', h12 ', h13' are shown as overlapping the second frame image FL2, making it difficult to view.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 167 (A15), the display of the second frame image FL2 is displayed on the entire display screen, and the variable icon in the icon display area HN1 is changed from the first variable icon h01 to the second variable icon h01. A state in which the change icon is changed to the change icon h02 from the default display mode to the notice display mode (blue display mode) is shown. That is, in this effect example, it is shown that the change of the frame image succeeds in the suspension change notice.

  A change in the display mode of the change icon means that a jackpot notice (normal notice) has been made in the change display of the decorative symbol currently being performed, but the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 167 (A16). In this example, the variation display of the decorative symbols is completed, the combination of the lost decorative symbols ("decoration 4"-"decoration 5"-"decoration 5") is stopped and displayed, and thereafter, it is confirmed and displayed. Therefore, the normal notice here is a false notice. At the point in time when the variable display of the decorative symbol is confirmed and displayed, the variable icon (second variable icon h02) whose display mode has changed is deleted. It should be noted that the fluctuating icon whose display mode has changed may disappear earlier in the case of false notice than in the case of true notice. Note that, in this example of the effect, the combination of the decorative patterns of the loss has been confirmed and displayed with the change-on-hold effect, but the combination of the decorative symbols of the big hit may be definitely displayed. This is the same in the following description.

  FIGS. 167 (B1) to (B16) show both the first variable icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN1 and the second variable icon h02 displayed separately from the first variable icon h01. It is a figure showing another production pattern. The effects shown in FIGS. 167 (B1) to (B9) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 167 (A1) to (A9), and a description thereof will be omitted.

  In this effect example, as shown in FIG. 167 (B9), the icon change animation by the navigation character YM is performed in the first frame image FL1 and the second frame image FL2, but the effect image Eh0 disappears and the first change icon h01. And the second change icon h02 appear, but neither the first change icon h01 nor the second change icon h02 has changed from the default (white) display mode. That is, a state in which the notice effect by the icon change animation has failed is shown. Thereafter, when the first change icon h01 and the second change icon h02 are displayed, the first frame image FL1 and the second frame image FL2 move leftward as shown in FIGS. 167 (B9) to (B10). Resume the move. Thereafter, the navigation character YM returns to the initial posture. Although the wave has disappeared from the sword of the navigation character YM shown in FIG. 167 (B10), the wave may still be oscillating, or the navigation character YM may be initialized at the timing when the effect image Eh0 is erased. You may return to your posture.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 167 (B11) to (B12), while the movement of the second frame image FL2 to the center of the display screen is completed, the first frame image FL1 continues to move leftward and is displayed. Frame out from the screen.

    Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 167 (B13), the enlarged display of the second frame image FL2 including the second change icon h02 is started, and thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 167 (B13) to (B15). As shown, the enlarged display of the second frame image FL2 is performed until the second frame image FL2 is displayed on the entire display screen. Here, the copy fluctuation icon h01 'and the copy hold icons h11', h12 ', h13' are shown as overlapping the second frame image FL2, making it difficult to view.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 illustrated in FIG. 167 (B15), the display of the second frame image FL2 is displayed on the entire display screen, and the variable icon in the icon display area HN1 is changed from the first variable icon h01 to the second variable icon h01. A state in which the fluctuating icon changes from the default display mode to the default display mode by changing to the fluctuation icon h02 is shown.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 167 (B16), the variable symbol display is terminated, and the combination of the lost decorative symbols (“decoration 4”-“decoration 5”-“decoration 5”) is stopped and displayed. After that, it is confirmed and displayed. When the decorative design is confirmed and displayed, the second change icon h02 displayed in the icon display area HN1 is deleted. In this effect example, a state is shown in which the display mode of the fluctuating icon displayed in the icon display area does not change from the default display mode, and the hold change effect has failed. In this example of the effect, the combination of the decorative patterns of the loss has been confirmed and displayed due to the failure of the pending change effect, but the combination of the decorative symbols of the big hit may be definitely displayed. This is the same in the following description.

  FIGS. 168 (A1) to (A16) show both the first variable icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN1 and the second variable icon h02 displayed separately from the first variable icon h01. It is a figure showing another production pattern. The effect examples shown in FIGS. 168 (A1) to (A16) are the effect examples shown in FIGS. 167 (A1) to (A16) and the holding frame when the first frame image FL1 is reduced and displayed. 167 (A1) to FIG. 167 (A16), except that a copy of the UI is not displayed.

  FIGS. 168 (B1) to (B16) show both the first variable icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN1 and the second variable icon h02 displayed separately from the first variable icon h01. It is a figure showing another production pattern. The effect examples shown in FIGS. 168 (B1) to (B16) are the effect examples shown in FIGS. 167 (B1) to (B16) and the holding frame when the first frame image FL1 is reduced and displayed. 167 (B1) to FIG. 167 (B16), except that a copy of the UI is not displayed.

  FIGS. 169 (A1) to (A16) show both the first variable icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN1 and the second variable icon h02 displayed separately from the first variable icon h01. It is a figure showing another production pattern. The effects shown in FIGS. 169 (A1) to (A8) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 169 (A9), when the state where all of the first frame image FL1 and all of the second frame image FL2 are displayed is included in the first frame image FL1 in the initial posture. Out of the navigation character YM included in the second frame image FL2 and the navigation character YM included in the second frame image FL2, the navigation character YM included in the second frame image FL2 starts the icon change animation, and faces the second variable icon h02. It changes to the pose that you are pulling over. On the other hand, the navigation character YM included in the first frame image FL1 does not start the icon change animation with the initial posture. Then, a wave oscillates from the sword of the navigation character YM in the second frame image FL2, and at least a part of the second fluctuation icon h02 included in the second frame image FL2 is covered with the effect image Eh0 of the smoke image. The fluctuating icon h02 is more difficult to recognize than before being covered with the effect image Eh0. Note that the second change icon h02 may be partially covered with the effect image Eh0, or may be entirely covered with the effect image Eh0. Thereafter, the second variation icon h02, which was the default (white) display mode before the effect image Eh0 disappeared and was covered with the effect image Eh0, is changed to a blue display mode, which is the same display mode as the kimono of the navigation character YM. Is changing. In this example, the display mode of the navigation character YM indicates (preliminary) the display mode of the changed icon h0 after the change. Note that the mode of the effect image Eh0 may be the same as the mode after the icon change, and in this case, the mode of the effect image Eh0 suggests (notices) the display mode of the changed second variable icon h02. It will be.

  When the effect image Eh0 is deleted and the second fluctuation icon h02 is displayed, as shown in FIGS. 169 (A9) to (A10), the first frame image FL1 and the second frame image FL2 move to the left. Resume the move. Thereafter, the navigation character YM in the second frame image FL2 returns to the initial posture. Although the wave has disappeared from the sword of the navigation character YM shown in FIG. 169 (A10), the wave may still be oscillating, or the navigation character YM may be initialized at the timing when the effect image Eh0 is erased. You may return to your posture. Thereafter, the effects shown in FIGS. 169 (A11) to (A16) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 169 (A11) to (A16) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS.

  FIGS. 169 (B1) to (B16) show both the first variable icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN1 and the second variable icon h02 displayed separately from the first variable icon h01. It is a figure showing another production pattern. The effects shown in FIGS. 169 (B1) to (B8) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 167 (B1) to (B8), and thus description thereof will be omitted.

  In this effect example, as shown in FIG. 169 (B9), the icon change animation by the navigation character YM is performed in the second frame image FL2 of the first frame image FL1 and the second frame image FL2, but the effect image Eh0 Disappears and the second variation icon h02 appears, but the second variation icon h02 has not changed from the default (white) display mode. That is, a state in which the notice effect by the icon change animation has failed is shown. Thereafter, when the second change icon h02 is displayed, the first frame image FL1 and the second frame image FL2 restart moving leftward as shown in FIGS. 169 (B9) to (B10). Thereafter, the navigation character YM in the second frame image FL2 returns to the initial posture. Although the wave has disappeared from the sword of the navigation character YM shown in FIG. 169 (B10), the wave may still be oscillating, or the navigation character YM may be initialized at the timing when the effect image Eh0 is erased. You may return to your posture. Thereafter, the effects shown in FIGS. 169 (B11) to (B16) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 169 (B11) to (B16) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 167 (B11) to (B16), and thus description thereof will be omitted.

  FIGS. 170 (A1) to (A16) show both the first variable icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN1 and the second variable icon h02 displayed separately from the first variable icon h01. It is a figure showing another production pattern. The effect examples shown in FIGS. 170 (A1) to (A16) are the effect examples shown in FIGS. 169 (A1) to (A16) and the holding frame when the first frame image FL1 is displayed in reduced size. 169 (A1) to FIG. 169 (A16), except that a copy of the UI is not displayed.

    FIGS. 170 (B1) to (B16) show both the first variable icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN1 and the second variable icon h02 displayed separately from the first variable icon h01. It is a figure showing another production pattern. Note that the effect examples shown in FIGS. 170 (B1) to (B16) are the effect examples shown in FIGS. 169 (B1) to FIG. 169 (B16), except that a copy of the UI is not displayed.

  FIGS. 171 (A1) to (A16) show both the first variable icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN1 and the second variable icon h02 displayed separately from the first variable icon h01. It is a figure showing another production pattern. The effect shown in FIG. 171 (A1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 171 (A2), the holding of the special figure 1 is exhausted, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, and the moving animation of the holding icon of the special figure 1 is completed. As a result, in the hold icon display area HIS, three hold icons of the first hold icon h11, the second hold icon h12, and the third hold icon h13 are displayed, and the icon display area HN1 of the variable icon display area CIS is displayed. The icon that was the first hold icon h11 is displayed as the first change icon h01. Both the hold icons h11 to h13 and the first change icon h01 are in the default (white) display mode. This change icon is also displayed at least partially in white. In other words, the whole may be displayed in white, or only a part (for example, the area inside the line of the black edge) may be displayed in white. Note that, in the second reserved number display displayed on the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 171 (A2), the reserved number of the special figure 1 is 3 and the reserved number of the special figure 2 is 0. Is reported. Further, in this effect example, a timer notice display TM is displayed on the left side of the display screen, and a state in which the timer notice effect is started is shown. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 171 (A2), the character “Attention!” Is displayed in the timer notice display TM to notify the user that the countdown of the timer display will start. Further, the timer notice display TM is displayed so as to overlap with the decorative pattern being displayed in a variable manner.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 illustrated in FIG. 171 (A3), a state is shown in which the first frame image FL1 having the same display mode as the entire display screen appears and is gradually reduced and displayed. As shown in FIGS. 171 (A3) to 171 (A5), the first frame image FL1 moves to the center of the display screen while being gradually reduced and displayed. In the first frame image FL1, in addition to the first change icon h01, the navigation character YM and the reserved icons h11, h12, and h13 displayed in the reserved icon display area HIS are also reduced in accordance with the reduced display of the first frame image FL1. Is done. At this time, a copy of the reserved frame UI is displayed on the back side of the first frame image FL1, and the copy of the reserved frame UI is displayed with a copy variable icon h01 'as a copy of the first variable icon h01. At the same time, copy hold icons h11 ′, h12 ′, and h13 ′ are displayed as copies of the hold icons h11, h12, and h13. A copy of the navigation character YM is also displayed. In this effect example, as shown in FIG. 171 (A4), a timer display is displayed in the timer notice display TM, and the countdown of the timer display is started. That is, in this timer announcement effect, it is produced that a certain announcement effect starts after 40 seconds. At the timing shown in FIG. 171 (A4), the timer display in the timer notice display TM is “39.99”, and the countdown of the timer display is continuously performed. In addition, the timer notice display TM is displayed so as to overlap the first frame image FL1, but may be displayed so as to overlap the first frame image FL1.

  When the reduced display of the first frame image FL1 is completed, the first frame image FL1 starts moving to the left as shown in FIG. 171 (A6). Then, in decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 171 (A7), a state in which a second frame image FL2 different from first frame image FL1 is framed in from the right side of the display screen is shown. Similarly to the first frame image FL1, the second frame image FL2 includes a holding frame UI including a changing icon (second changing icon h02), three holding icons (hold icons h21, h22, h23), and a navigation character YM. However, the display mode of the second variable icon h02 included in the second frame image FL2 is also the default display mode, like the first variable icon h01 included in the first frame image FL1. At this time, the first change icon h01 and the hold icons h11 to h13 included in the first frame image FL1 are overlapped with the timer notice display TM, and are more visible than when the timer notice display TM is not displayed. It is difficult. The display modes of the hold icons h21, h22, and h23 included in the second frame image FL2 are all default display modes, and are the same display modes as the hold icons h11, h12, and h13 included in the first frame image FL1. It has become. Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 171 (A7) to (A9), both the first frame image FL1 and the second frame image FL2 move to the left. Note that the second frame image FL2 moves at a higher moving speed than the moving speed of the first frame image FL1 until it becomes a position adjacent to the first frame image FL1, and the second frame image FL2 moves to a position adjacent to the first frame image FL1. After that, the first frame image FL1 is moving at the same moving speed as the moving speed. At the timing shown in FIG. 171 (A9), the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance display TM continues, and the timer display in the timer advance display TM indicates “36.00”.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 illustrated in FIG. 171 (A9), when the entire first frame image FL1 and the entire second frame image FL2 are displayed, the state is included in the first frame image FL1 in the initial posture. Among the navigation characters YM included in the second frame image FL2 and the navigation characters YM included in the second frame image FL2, the navigation character YM included in the second frame image FL2 starts the icon change animation, and faces the second variable icon h02, It changes to the pose that you are pulling over. On the other hand, the navigation character YM included in the first frame image FL1 is overlapped by the timer notice display TM and is difficult to see, but the icon change animation has not started in the initial posture. Then, a wave oscillates from the sword of the navigation character YM in the second frame image FL2, and at least a part of the second fluctuation icon h02 included in the second frame image FL2 is covered with the effect image Eh0 of the smoke image. The fluctuating icon h02 is more difficult to recognize than before being covered with the effect image Eh0. Note that the second change icon h02 may be partially covered with the effect image Eh0, or may be entirely covered with the effect image Eh0. Thereafter, the second variation icon h02, which was the default (white) display mode before the effect image Eh0 disappeared and was covered with the effect image Eh0, is changed to a blue display mode, which is the same display mode as the kimono of the navigation character YM. Is changing. In this example, the display mode of the navigation character YM indicates (preliminary) the display mode of the changed icon h0 after the change. Note that the mode of the effect image Eh0 may be the same as the mode after the icon change, and in this case, the mode of the effect image Eh0 suggests (notices) the display mode of the changed second variable icon h02. It will be.

  When the effect image Eh0 is deleted and the second change icon h02 is displayed, as shown in FIGS. 171 (A9) to 171 (A10), the first frame image FL1 and the second frame image FL2 move to the left. Resume the move. Thereafter, the navigation character YM in the second frame image FL2 returns to the initial posture. Although the wave has disappeared from the sword of the navigation character YM shown in FIG. 171 (A10), the wave may still be oscillating, or the navigation character YM may be initialized at the timing when the effect image Eh0 is erased. You may return to your posture. When the second frame image FL2 moves to the left, the second frame image FL2 is displayed so as to be overlapped with the timer notice display TM, and is more difficult to view than in a state where it is not overlapped with the timer notice display TM. ing. At the timing shown in FIG. 171 (A10), the hold icons h21 to h23 are overlapped by the timer notice display TM and are thus difficult to view. At the timing shown in FIG. 171 (A10), the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance display TM continues, and the timer display in the timer advance display TM indicates “35.00”. Thereafter, the effects shown in FIGS. 171 (A11) to (A16) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 171 (A11) to (A16) are the effects shown in FIGS. 167 (A11) to (A16) except that the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM is continued. Therefore, the description is omitted. Note that, in this effect example, the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM is performed over the next symbol change display. When the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM is completed, for example, a pseudo continuous effect starts. . At the timing shown in FIG. 171 (A16), the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance display TM continues, and the timer display in the timer advance display TM indicates “32.00”.

  FIGS. 171 (B1) to (B16) show both the first variable icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN1 and the second variable icon h02 displayed separately from the first variable icon h01. It is a figure showing another production pattern. The effects shown in FIGS. 171 (B1) to (B9) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 171 (A1) to (A9), and thus description thereof will be omitted.

  In this effect example, as shown in FIG. 171 (B9), the icon change animation by the navigation character YM is performed in the second frame image FL2 of the first frame image FL1 and the second frame image FL2, but the effect image Eh0 Disappears and the second change icon h02 appears, but the second change icon h02 has not changed from the default (white) display mode. That is, a state in which the notice effect by the icon change animation has failed is shown. Thereafter, when the second change icon h02 is displayed, the first frame image FL1 and the second frame image FL2 restart moving leftward as shown in FIGS. 171 (B9) to (B10). Thereafter, the navigation character YM in the second frame image FL2 returns to the initial posture. Although the wave has disappeared from the sword of the navigation character YM shown in FIG. 171 (B10), the wave may still be oscillating, or the navigation character YM may be initialized at the timing when the effect image Eh0 is erased. You may return to your posture. Thereafter, the effects shown in FIGS. 171 (B11) to (B16) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 171 (B11) to (B16) are the effects shown in FIGS. 167 (B11) to (B16) except that the countdown of the timer display is performed in the timer notice display TM. Therefore, the description is omitted.

  FIGS. 172 (A1) to (A16) show both the first variable icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN1 and the second variable icon h02 displayed separately from the first variable icon h01. It is a figure showing another production pattern. The effect shown in FIG. 172 (A1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 167 (A1), and a description thereof will be omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 172 (A2), the reservation of the special figure 1 is exhausted, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, and the moving animation of the reserved icon of the special figure 1 is completed. As a result, in the hold icon display area HIS, three hold icons of the first hold icon h11, the second hold icon h12, and the third hold icon h13 are displayed, and the icon display area HN1 of the variable icon display area CIS is displayed. The icon that was the first hold icon h11 is displayed as the first change icon h01. Both the hold icons h11 to h13 and the first change icon h01 are in the default (white) display mode. This change icon is also displayed at least partially in white. In other words, the whole may be displayed in white, or only a part (for example, the area inside the line of the black edge) may be displayed in white. In the second hold number display displayed on the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 172 (A2), the hold number of the special figure 1 is 3 and the hold number of the special figure 2 is 0. Is reported. Further, in this effect example, a timer notice display TM is displayed on the right side of the display screen, and a state in which the timer notice effect is started is shown. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 172 (A2), the word “attention!” Is displayed in the timer notice display TM to notify the user that the countdown of the timer display will start. Further, the timer notice display TM is displayed so as to overlap with the decorative pattern being displayed in a variable manner.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 172 (A3), a state is shown in which the first frame image FL1 having the same display mode as the entire display screen appears and is gradually reduced and displayed. As shown in FIGS. 172 (A3) to (A5), the first frame image FL1 moves to the center of the display screen while being gradually reduced and displayed. In the first frame image FL1, in addition to the first change icon h01, the navigation character YM and the reserved icons h11, h12, and h13 displayed in the reserved icon display area HIS are also reduced in accordance with the reduced display of the first frame image FL1. Is done. At this time, a copy of the reserved frame UI is displayed on the back side of the first frame image FL1, and the copy of the reserved frame UI is displayed with a copy variable icon h01 'as a copy of the first variable icon h01. At the same time, copy hold icons h11 ′, h12 ′, and h13 ′ are displayed as copies of the hold icons h11, h12, and h13. A copy of the navigation character YM is also displayed. Further, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 172 (A4), a timer display is displayed in the timer notice display TM, and the countdown of the timer display is started. That is, in this timer announcement effect, it is produced that a certain announcement effect starts after 40 seconds. At the timing shown in FIG. 172 (A4), the timer display in the timer notice display TM is “39.99”, and the countdown of the timer display is continuously performed. In addition, the timer notice display TM is displayed so as to overlap the first frame image FL1, but may be displayed so as to overlap the first frame image FL1. 172 (A4) to 172 (A5) show a state in which the navigation character YM is overlapped with the timer notice display TM.

  When the reduced display of the first frame image FL1 is completed, the first frame image FL1 starts moving leftward as shown in FIG. 172 (A6). Then, in decorative pattern display device 208 shown in FIG. 172 (A7), a state is shown in which a second frame image FL2 different from first frame image FL1 enters the frame from the right side of the display screen. Similarly to the first frame image FL1, the second frame image FL2 includes a holding frame UI including a changing icon (second changing icon h02), three holding icons (hold icons h21, h22, h23), and a navigation character YM. However, the display mode of the second variable icon h02 included in the second frame image FL2 is also the default display mode, like the first variable icon h01 included in the first frame image FL1. Note that the second change icon h02 and the hold icons h21 to h23 included in the second frame image FL2 overlap with the timer notice display TM, and are more difficult to visually recognize than the state where the timer notice display TM is not displayed. ing. The display modes of the hold icons h21, h22, and h23 included in the second frame image FL2 are all default display modes, and are the same display modes as the hold icons h11, h12, and h13 included in the first frame image FL1. It has become. Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 172 (A7) to (A9), both the first frame image FL1 and the second frame image FL2 move to the left. Note that the second frame image FL2 moves at a higher moving speed than the moving speed of the first frame image FL1 until it becomes a position adjacent to the first frame image FL1, and the second frame image FL2 moves to a position adjacent to the first frame image FL1. After that, the first frame image FL1 is moving at the same moving speed as the moving speed. At the timing shown in FIG. 172 (A9), the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance display TM continues, and the timer display in the timer advance display TM indicates "36.00".

    In the decorative symbol display device 208 illustrated in FIG. 172 (A9), when the entire first frame image FL1 and the entire second frame image FL2 are displayed, the state is included in the first frame image FL1 in the initial posture. Of the navigation character YM included in the second frame image FL2 and the navigation character YM included in the second frame image FL2, the navigation character YM included in the second frame image FL2 starts the icon change animation, but is overlapped with the timer notice display TM. It is said that the appearance is difficult to see. On the other hand, the navigation character YM included in the first frame image FL1 has not started the icon change animation with the initial posture. In this effect example, the icon change animation that is overlapped with the timer notice display TM and performed in the second frame image FL2 cannot be visually recognized, but when the icon change animation is completed, the default (white) display mode is used. The second change icon h02 changes to a blue display mode that is the same display mode as the kimono of the navigation character YM.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 172 (A9) to (A10), the first frame image FL1 and the second frame image FL2 restart moving to the left. Then, as shown in FIG. 172 (A10), the second change icon h02 and the hold icons h21 to h23 included in the second frame image FL2 can be visually recognized. Although the navigation character YM in the second frame image FL2 returns to the initial posture, it is overlapped with the timer notice display TM, and the state cannot be visually recognized. At the timing shown in FIG. 172 (A10), the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance display TM continues, and the timer display in the timer advance display TM indicates "35.00". Thereafter, the effects shown in FIGS. 172 (A11) to (A16) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 172 (A11) to (A16) are the effects shown in FIGS. 167 (A11) to (A16) except that the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM is continued. Therefore, the description is omitted. Note that, in this effect example, the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM is performed over the next symbol change display. When the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM is completed, for example, a pseudo continuous effect starts. . At the timing shown in FIG. 172 (A16), the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance display TM continues, and the timer display in the timer advance display TM indicates “32.00”.

  FIGS. 172 (B1) to (B16) show both the first variable icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN1 and the second variable icon h02 displayed separately from the first variable icon h01. It is a figure showing another production pattern. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 172 (B1) to (B9) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 172 (A1) to (A9), and a description thereof will be omitted.

  In FIG. 172 (B9) of this effect example, the icon change animation is performed in the second frame image FL2, and the icon change animation is overlapped with the timer notice TM, and the state cannot be visually recognized. The icon h02 has not changed from the default (white) display mode. That is, a state in which the notice effect by the icon change animation has failed is shown. Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 172 (B9) to (B10), the first frame image FL1 and the second frame image FL2 restart moving to the left. Then, as shown in FIG. 172 (B10), the second change icon h02 and the hold icons h21 to h23 included in the second frame image FL2 can be visually recognized. Although the navigation character YM in the second frame image FL2 returns to the initial posture, it is overlapped with the timer notice display TM, and the state cannot be visually recognized. At the timing shown in FIG. 172 (B10), the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance display TM continues, and the timer display in the timer advance display TM indicates "35.00". Thereafter, the effects shown in FIGS. 172 (B11) to (B16) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 172 (B11) to (B16) are the effects shown in FIGS. 167 (B11) to (B16) except that the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM is continued. Therefore, the description is omitted. Note that, in this effect example, the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM is performed over the next symbol change display. When the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display TM is completed, for example, a pseudo continuous effect starts. . At the timing shown in FIG. 172 (B16), the countdown of the timer display in the timer advance display TM continues, and the timer display in the timer advance display TM indicates "32.00".

  FIG. 173 is a diagram showing another effect pattern in which both the first variable icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN1 and the second variable icon h02 displayed separately from the first variable icon h01 are displayed. . Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 173 (A1) to (A12) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 164 (A1) to (A12), and a description thereof will be omitted.

  In this effect example, as shown in FIG. 173 (A12), after the first frame image FL1 is completely framed out, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 173 (A13) is different from the second frame image FL2. 3 shows a state in which the third frame image FL3 is moved into a position adjacent to the second frame image FL2. Similar to the second frame image FL2, the third frame image FL2 includes a display of a hold frame UI including a change icon (third change icon h03) and three hold icons (hold icons h31, h32, and h33). However, the third frame image FL3 includes a third variable icon h03 different from the second variable icon h02 included in the second frame image FL2, and the display mode is also a red display mode. . On the other hand, the display modes of the hold icons h31, h32, and h33 included in the third frame image FL3 are all default display modes, and are the same display modes as the hold icons h21, h22, and h23 included in the second frame image FL2. It has become. Thereafter, the second frame image FL2 and the third frame image FL3 start moving leftward, and as shown in FIGS. 173 (A14) to (A15), the second frame image FL2 is moved to the left side of the display screen. , While the third frame image FL3 moves toward the center of the display screen. At this time, a period occurs in which both the second change icon h02 and the third change icon h03 are displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 173 (A15) to (A16), when the third frame image FL3 reaches the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, it is stopped and displayed, and only the second frame image FL2 is displayed on the left. Continue moving in the direction. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 173 (A17), the second frame image FL2 is framed out of the display screen.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 173 (A18), the enlarged display of the third frame image FL3 including the third variation icon h03 is started, and thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 173 (A18) to (A20). As shown, the enlarged display of the third frame image FL3 is performed until the third frame image FL3 is displayed on the entire display screen.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 173 (A20), the display of the third frame image FL3 is displayed on the entire display screen, and the variable icon in the icon display area HN1 is changed from the first variable icon h01 to the third variable icon h01. A state in which the change icon is changed from the default display mode to the notice display mode (red display mode) is shown as a change icon h03. That is, in this effect example, it is shown that the change of the frame image succeeds in the suspension change notice.

  The change of the display mode of the change icon means that a jackpot notice (normal notice) in the change display of the decorative symbol currently being performed has been performed, but the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 173 (A21). In this example, the variation display of the decorative symbols is finished, the combination of the lost decorative symbols ("decoration 4"-"decoration 5"-"decoration 5") is stopped and then displayed. Therefore, the normal notice here is a false notice. At the point in time when the variation display of the decorative symbol is finalized, the variation icon (third variation icon h03) whose display mode has changed is deleted. It should be noted that the fluctuating icon whose display mode has changed may disappear earlier in the case of false notice than in the case of true notice. Note that, in this example of the effect, the combination of the decorative patterns of the loss has been confirmed and displayed with the change-on-hold effect, but the combination of the decorative symbols of the big hit may be definitely displayed. This is the same in the following description.

  FIG. 174 is a diagram illustrating another effect pattern in which both the first variable icon h01 displayed in the icon display area HN1 and the second variable icon h02 displayed separately from the first variable icon h01 are displayed. . The effects shown in FIGS. 174 (A1) to (A6) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS.

  When the reduced display of the first frame image FL1 is completed and the first frame image FL1 starts moving leftward as shown in FIG. 174 (A6), the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 174 (A7) A state in which a second frame image FL2 different from the first frame image FL1 enters the frame from the right side of the display screen is shown. The second frame image FL2 in this effect example includes a display of a hold frame UI including a change icon (second change icon h02) and three hold icons (hold icons h21, h22, h23). Each of the second change icon h02 and the reserve icons h21, h22, h23 included in the frame image FL2 has the default display mode similarly to the first frame image FL1. On the other hand, in the second frame image FL2 in this effect example, the background color is not the default background color (for example, white) as in the first frame image FL1, but the background color of the notice (for example, blue), It functions as a jackpot notice. That is, in this effect example, a state in which a notice effect is performed when an element other than the change icon changes is shown. Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 174 (A7) to (A12), the first frame image FL1 moves out of the left side of the display screen, while the second frame image FL2 moves toward the center of the display screen. I do. At this time, a period occurs in which both the first change icon h01 and the second change icon h02 are displayed. Note that the second frame image FL2 moves at a higher moving speed than the moving speed of the first frame image FL1 until it becomes a position adjacent to the first frame image FL1, and the second frame image FL2 moves to a position adjacent to the first frame image FL1. After that, the first frame image FL1 is moving at the same moving speed as the moving speed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 174 (A11) to (A12), when the movement of the second frame image FL2 to the center of the display screen is completed, only the first frame image FL1 continuously moves to the left, Frame out from the display screen.

  As shown in FIG. 174 (A12), after the first frame image FL1 is completely framed out, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 174 (A13) displays a third frame image different from the second frame image FL2. The state in which FL3 enters the frame and moves to a position adjacent to the second frame image FL2 is shown. Similar to the second frame image FL2, the third frame image FL3 includes a display of a hold frame UI including a change icon (third change icon h03) and three hold icons (hold icons h31, h32, h33). The third change icon h03 and the reserve icons h31, h32, h33 included in the third frame image FL3 are all in the default display mode. On the other hand, the third frame image FL3 in this effect example has a different background color from the first frame image FL1 and the second frame image FL2, and has a red background color. The red background color in the third frame image FL3 is the background color of the notice, and is a background color having higher hitting reliability than the blue background color. That is, in this effect example, a state in which a notice effect is performed when an element other than the change icon changes is shown. Thereafter, the second frame image FL2 and the third frame image FL3 start moving leftward, and as shown in FIGS. 174 (A14) to (A15), the second frame image FL2 is located on the left side of the display screen. , While the third frame image FL3 moves toward the center of the display screen. At this time, a period occurs in which both the second change icon h02 and the third change icon h03 are displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 174 (A15) to (A16), when the third frame image FL3 reaches the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, it is stopped and displayed, and only the second frame image FL2 is displayed on the left. Continue moving in the direction. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 174 (A17), the second frame image FL2 is framed out of the display screen.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 174 (A18), the enlarged display of the third frame image FL3 including the third variation icon h03 is started, and thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 174 (A18) to (A20). As shown, the enlarged display of the third frame image FL3 is performed until the third frame image FL3 is displayed on the entire display screen.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 174 (A20), the display of the third frame image FL3 is displayed on the entire display screen, and the variable icon in the icon display area HN1 is changed from the first variable icon h01 to the third variable icon h01. The change icon h03 is shown as changing. Also, in this effect example, a state is shown in which the background color changes due to the switching of the frame image, and a notice is thereby given. Note that, in this effect example, the notice is given by changing the display mode other than the change icon, but the display mode of the change icon may be changed.

  In this effect example, although the background color has changed, a jackpot notice (normal notice) in the currently-displayed decorative pattern change display has been performed, but the decorative pattern display shown in FIG. In the device 208, the variation display of the decorative symbol is finished, the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss ("decoration 4"-"decoration 5"-"decoration 5") is stopped and then displayed. Therefore, the normal notice here is a false notice. At the point in time when the variation display of the decorative symbol is confirmed and displayed, the variation icon (third variation icon h03) is deleted. In the case where the decorative color is fixedly displayed when the background color changes, the variable icon may be deleted and the background color may be returned to the default display mode. In this effect example, although the background color is changed, the combination of the decorative patterns of the loss is definitely displayed, but the combination of the decorative patterns of the big hit may be definitely displayed.

  In the above description, it is assumed that the game console is provided with a display means [for example, the decorative symbol display device 208 or the like], and the display means displays an icon related to a symbol variation display being executed (hereinafter, “variable icon [for example, FIG. 159 (A3), a first change icon h01, a second change icon h02, etc.]), and the display means is a display area [ For example, the variable icon can be displayed in the icon display area HN1 shown in FIG. 159 (A3) or the like. [For example, as shown in FIG. 159 (A3), the first variable icon h0 is displayed in the icon display area HN1. Displayed, etc.], the display means is a means capable of displaying two of the fluctuating icons (hereinafter referred to as “two fluctuating icons”), and the two fluctuating icons are displayed. One of the change icons is a first change icon [for example, a first change icon h01 shown in FIG. 159 (A3)], and one of the two change icons is a second change icon. 159 (A3) shown in FIG. 159 (A3), and the second variable icon is displayed in a display area different from the certain display area [for example, FIG. ), The second change icon h02 is displayed in an area other than the icon display area HN1, etc.]. ] Was explained.

  According to the conventional game console, there is room for improvement in the display means, but according to this game console, a game console having a characteristic display device can be provided.

  Further, according to this gaming table, the effect of the change icon can be diversified, and in some cases, it can be expected that the change may be a big hit.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the fluctuating icon, or may be capable of displaying other than fluctuating icon. Further, the display means may be one that always displays the fluctuating icon, or may be one that does not always display the fluctuating icon.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the fluctuating icon in a certain display area of the display area of the display means, or may be capable of displaying other than the fluctuating icon in a certain display area of the display area of the display means. May also be displayable. Further, the display means may be configured to always display the change icon in a certain display area of the display area of the display means, or may display the change icon in a certain display area of the display area of the display means. There may be cases where there is no such case.

  The display means may be capable of displaying a variable icon only in a certain display area of the display area of the display means, or may be a display area other than a certain display area of the display area of the display means. May be able to display the change icon.

The display means may be capable of displaying only two fluctuating icons, or may be capable of displaying other than two fluctuating icons. Further, the display means may be one that always displays two variable icons, or one that does not always display two variable icons.
The display means may be capable of displaying three or more change icons.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the first fluctuation icon and the second fluctuation icon, or may be capable of displaying fluctuation icons other than the first fluctuation icon and the second fluctuation icon. It may be. Further, the display means may be one that always displays the first fluctuation icon and the second fluctuation icon, or may not display the first fluctuation icon and the second fluctuation icon. Is also good.

Further, the second change icon may be displayed only in a display area different from a certain display area, or may be displayed in a display area other than a display area different from the certain display area. May be something. The second change icon may be always displayed in a display area different from a certain display area, or may not be displayed in a display area different from a certain display area. There may be.
Further, the second change icon may be displayed in a certain display area.

Further, “animation in which the second variation icon moves during the period in which the first variation icon is displayed (hereinafter referred to as“ second movement animation [for example, FIG. 159 (A3) to FIG. 164 (A7) to (A15) in FIG. 164 (A7) to the frame change animation shown in FIG. 164 (A15)).
A gaming table characterized by the following. ] Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the effect of the variable icon can be diversified by the moving animation of the second variable icon, and the expectation of a big hit can be improved in some cases.

  Here, only the first moving animation may be displayed, or animation other than the first moving animation may be displayed. Further, the first moving animation may be always displayed, or the first moving animation may not be displayed.

  Also, there is a case in which the second change icon is displayed in the certain display area after the second moving animation is displayed (hereinafter, referred to as “first case”) [for example, FIG. (A3)-After the icon change animation shown in FIG. (A6) is displayed, the second change icon h02 may be displayed in the icon display area HN1, etc.]. ] Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, by displaying the second change icon in a certain display area, the effect of the change icon can be diversified, and the expectation of a big hit may be further improved.

  Here, the second fluctuation icon may be displayed only in a certain display area after the second moving animation is displayed, or the second fluctuation icon may be displayed after the second moving animation is displayed. The icon may be displayed in a display area other than a certain display area. Further, the second change icon may be always displayed in a certain display area after the second moving animation is displayed, or the second change icon may be displayed after the second moving animation is displayed. It may not be displayed in the area.

  Further, only the second change icon may be displayed in a certain display area after the second move animation is displayed, or the second change icon may be displayed after the second move animation is displayed. Other variation icons may be displayed in a certain display area.

  Also, the second change icon may be displayed in a certain display area only after the second moving animation is displayed, or the second changing icon may be displayed after the second moving animation is displayed. May be displayed in a certain display area.

  Also, in the first case, the size of the second variable icon displayed in the certain display area is the size of the second variable icon displayed during the period in which the second moving animation is displayed. The size of the second variable icon h02 in the icon change animation shown in FIGS. 159 (C3) to (C6) is different from the size of the variable icon h02 displayed in the icon display area HN1. Larger than the size of the game]. ] Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, by making the size of the second fluctuating icon different, the effect of the fluctuating icon can be diversified, and the sense of expectation for the big hit can be further enhanced.

  Note that the size of the second variable icon displayed in a certain display area may be smaller than the size of the second variable icon displayed during the period in which the second moving animation is displayed, It may be large.

  Also, "the second variable icon may overlap the first variable icon during at least a part of the period in which the second moving animation is displayed [for example, FIG. 159 (A4) to FIG. As shown in FIG. (A6), the second change icon h02 overlaps the first change icon h01 during the display of the icon change animation, etc.]. ] Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the effect of the fluctuating icons can be diversified by overlapping the fluctuating icons, and in some cases, it can be expected that the fluctuating might hit a great hit.

  Here, in at least a part of the period in which the second moving animation is displayed, the second moving icon may overlap with only the first moving icon, or the second moving animation may be displayed. There may be a case where the second fluctuating icon overlaps other than the first fluctuating icon during at least a part of the time period. In addition, the second moving icon may always overlap the first moving icon during at least a part of the period in which the second moving animation is displayed, or the period in which the second moving animation is displayed. There may be a case where the second change icon does not overlap with the first change icon during at least a part of the period.

  Also, only the second moving icon may overlap the first moving icon during at least a part of the period in which the second moving animation is displayed, or the second moving animation may be displayed. There may be a case where a fluctuating icon other than the second fluctuating icon overlaps with the first fluctuating icon in at least a part of the time period.

  Further, the second moving icon may overlap the first moving icon only during at least a part of the period in which the second moving animation is displayed, or the second moving animation may be displayed. The second variable icon may overlap the first variable icon during periods other than at least a part of the period.

  Note that the second moving icon may overlap the first moving icon during a part of the period in which the second moving animation is displayed, or the second moving animation is displayed. The second change icon may overlap the first change icon during the entire period.

  In addition, “the at least part of the period in which the second moving animation is displayed may be overlapped with the announcement display [for example, as shown in FIG. The second change icon h02 overlaps the first hold icon h11 in the display mode of the pre-reading notice during the display of the change animation, and the like]. ] Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the effect of the fluctuating icon can be diversified by overlapping the second fluctuating icon and the notice display, and in some cases, it can be expected that the fluctuating might be a big hit.

    Here, in at least a part of the period in which the second animation is displayed, the second fluctuation icon may overlap only with the notice display, or in the period in which the second animation is displayed. The second change icon may overlap with a display other than the notice display at least in part of the period. In addition, the second fluctuation icon may always overlap the notice display during at least a part of the period in which the second animation is displayed, or at least a part of the period in which the second animation is displayed. The second change icon may not overlap with the notice display during the period.

  In addition, at least a part of the period during which the second animation is displayed, only the second fluctuation icon may overlap with the notice display, or at least the period during which the second animation is displayed. A change icon other than the second change icon may overlap with the notice display in some periods.

  In addition, the second fluctuation icon may overlap with the notice display only during at least a part of the period in which the second animation is displayed, or at least during the period in which the second animation is displayed. The second fluctuation icon may overlap with the notice display in a period other than a part of the period.

  It should be noted that the second fluctuation icon may overlap with the notice display during a part of the period in which the second animation is displayed, or the entire period in which the second animation is displayed. In some cases, the second change icon may overlap the notice display.

In addition, "the second change icon may overlap with the first change icon and the notice display at least during a part of the period in which the second moving animation is displayed [see, for example, FIG. 159 (C6). ), The second change icon h02 overlaps the first hold icon h11 and the first change icon h01 in the display mode of the pre-reading advance notice during the display of the icon change animation, etc.),
A gaming table characterized by the following. ] Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the effect of the fluctuating icon can be diversified by overlapping the second fluctuating icon with the first fluctuating icon and the notice display, and in some cases, it can be expected that the fluctuating might hit a big hit. is there.

  Here, in at least a part of the period in which the second moving animation is displayed, the second changing icon may overlap with only the first changing icon and the notice display, or the second moving icon may be displayed. In at least a part of the period during which the animation is displayed, the second variable icon may overlap with a display other than the first variable icon and the notice display. Further, in at least a part of the period in which the second moving animation is displayed, the second moving icon may necessarily overlap the first moving icon and the notice display, or the second moving animation may be displayed. There may be a case where the second change icon does not overlap with the first change icon and the notice display during at least a part of the period.

  Also, only the second variable icon may overlap the first variable icon and the notice display during at least a part of the period in which the second moving animation is displayed, or the second moving animation may be displayed. May be overlapped with the first change icon and the notice display in at least a part of the period in which is displayed.

  Also, the second moving icon may overlap the first moving icon and the notice display only during at least a part of the period in which the second moving animation is displayed, or the second moving animation may be displayed. The second variable icon may overlap the first variable icon and the notice display in a period other than at least a part of the period in which is displayed.

  Note that the second moving icon may overlap the first moving icon and the notice display during a part of the period in which the second moving animation is displayed, or the second moving animation may be displayed. The second change icon may overlap with the first change icon and the notice display during the entire period of the displayed period.

  Also, the display means is a means capable of displaying a first decorative symbol variation display [for example, a first decorative symbol variation display shown in FIG. 164 (A2) or the like] in response to the execution of the symbol variation display.

  The display means is a means capable of displaying a second decorative symbol variation display [for example, a second decorative symbol variation display or the like shown in FIG. 164 (A2)] in response to execution of the symbol variation display,

  The first decorative design change display and the second decorative design change display are different decorative design change display,

  During at least a part of the period in which the second moving animation is displayed, only one of the first decorative design change display and the second decorative design change display is displayed. In some cases, for example, as shown in FIGS. 164 (A3) to (A15), during the period in which the frame change animation is displayed, the first decorative symbol is deleted and only the variable display by the second decorative symbol is performed. A game console. ] Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, only one of the first decorative symbol variable display and the second decorative symbol variable display is displayed during the moving icon moving animation, so that the player can concentrate on the moving animation. May be possible.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the first decorative symbol variation display according to the execution of the symbol variation display, or may be the first decorative symbol variation display according to the execution of the symbol variation display. Other displays may also be displayed. In addition, the display means may always display the first decorative symbol variation display according to the execution of the symbol variation display, or may display the first decoration symbol variation display according to the execution of the symbol variation display. There may be cases where there is no such case.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the second decorative symbol variation display according to the execution of the symbol variation display, or may be other than the second decorative symbol variation display according to the execution of the symbol variation display. May be displayed. Further, the display means may be configured to always display the second decorative symbol variation display according to the execution of the symbol variation display, or to display the second decorative symbol variation display according to the execution of the symbol variation display. There may be cases where there is no such case.

  In addition, only at least one of the first decorative symbol variation display and the second decorative symbol variation display is displayed during at least a part of the period in which the second moving animation is displayed. There may be cases, and also during the period other than at least a part of the period in which the second moving animation is displayed, one of the first decorative symbol variable display and the second decorative symbol variable display Only the decorative design variation display may be displayed. Also, only at least one of the first decorative design variable display and the second decorative design variable display is always displayed during at least a part of the period in which the second moving animation is displayed. Alternatively, only at least one of the first decorative design variation display and the second decorative design variation display is not displayed during at least a part of the period in which the second moving animation is displayed. There may be cases.

  Also, there is a case where only one of the first decorative pattern change display and the second decorative pattern change display is displayed during a part of the period in which the second moving animation is displayed. It may be, or only one of the first decorative design variation display and the second decorative design variation display is displayed in the entire period of the period in which the second moving animation is displayed May be present.

  In addition, the “movement display of the first frame image FL1 in the frame change animation shown in FIG. 164 (A3) to FIG. Etc.]) may be displayed.

  The display of the second moving animation may be started after the display of the first moving animation is started [for example, as shown in FIGS. 164 (A3) to (A15), the first frame is displayed. The moving display of the second frame image FL2 is started after the moving display of the image FL1 is started, and the like]. ] Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, by displaying a plurality of moving animations of the fluctuating icon, the effect of the fluctuating icon can be diversified, and in some cases, it can be expected that the fluctuating might be a big hit.

  Here, only the first moving animation may be displayed, or animation other than the first moving animation may be displayed. Further, the first moving animation may be always displayed, or the first moving animation may not be displayed.

  Also, only the display of the second moving animation may be started after the display of the first moving animation is started, or the second moving animation may be started after the display of the first moving animation is started. Display other than animation display may also be started. Further, the display of the second moving animation may be started after the display of the first moving animation is started, or the display of the second moving animation may be started after the display of the first moving animation is started. It may not be started.

In addition, “animation for moving the first fluctuating icon (hereinafter referred to as“ first moving animation [for example, moving display of the first frame image FL1 in the frame change animation illustrated in FIGS. 164 (A3) to (A12)] ”). Etc. ") may be displayed.
A gaming table characterized by the following. 』
Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the effect of the fluctuating icon can be diversified by the moving animation of the first fluctuating icon, and in some cases, it can be expected that the fluctuating might be a big hit.

  Here, only the first moving animation may be displayed, or animation other than the first moving animation may be displayed. Further, the first moving animation may be always displayed, or the first moving animation may not be displayed.

The display means is a means capable of displaying a certain display (for example, a navigation character YM shown in FIG. 168), and the certain display is a display capable of being displayed in a plurality of display modes. One of the plurality of display modes is a first display mode [for example, a navigation character YM in a display mode of wearing a white kimono shown in FIG. 168 (A1)]. One of the modes is a second display mode [for example, a navigation character YM in a display mode wearing a blue kimono shown in FIG. 161 (A1)], in which the first moving animation is displayed. The moving display of the certain display in the first display mode is displayed during at least a part of the period in which the second moving animation is displayed, and the second display The moving display of the certain display in the display mode is Is displayed,
A gaming table characterized by the following. ] Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, it is possible to provide a variety of effects by changing icons by performing a display indicating the degree of expectation of a big hit during the moving animation of the changing icon, and it may be possible to expect that the change may be a big hit. is there.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a certain display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than a certain display. Further, the display means may be one that always displays a certain display, or may be one that does not always display a certain display.

  Further, a certain display may be displayed only in a plurality of types of display modes, or may be displayed in a display mode other than the plurality of types of display modes. In addition, a certain display may be always displayed in a plurality of types of display modes, or may not be displayed in a plurality of types of display modes.

  In addition, a certain display may be one that can display only the first display mode and the second display mode, or one that can display a display mode other than the first display mode and the second display mode. It may be. In addition, a certain display may be always displayed in the first display mode and the second display mode, or may not be displayed in the first display mode and the second display mode. You may.

  Note that a moving display of a certain display of the first display mode may be displayed during a part of the period in which the first moving animation is displayed, or a period in which the first moving animation is displayed. The moving display of a certain display in the first display mode may be displayed in all the periods.

  In addition, a moving display of a certain display of the second display mode may be displayed in a part of a period in which the second moving animation is displayed, or a period in which the second moving animation is displayed. The moving display of a certain display in the second display mode may be displayed during the entire period.

  In addition, “After the display of the first moving animation is started, the first change icon is displayed in a display area different from the certain display area [for example, FIG. 164 (A2) to FIG. As shown in A3), when the movement display of the first frame image FL1 in the frame change animation is started, the first change icon h01 is moved and displayed in a display area different from the icon display area HN1. A gaming table characterized by the following. ] Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, by displaying the first fluctuating icon in a display area different from a certain display area, the effect of the fluctuating icon can be diversified, and it can be expected that the fluctuation may be a big hit. May be possible.

  Here, after the display of the first moving animation is started, the first change icon may be displayed only in a display area different from a certain display area, or the display of the first moving animation is started. After that, the first change icon may be displayed in a display area other than the display area different from the certain display area. Further, after the display of the first moving animation is started, the first change icon may be always displayed in a display area different from a certain display area, or the display of the first moving animation is started. Later, the first change icon may not be displayed in a display area different from a certain display area.

  Further, the first change icon may be displayed in a display area different from a certain display area only after the display of the first moving animation is started, or the display of the first moving animation is started. The first change icon may be displayed in a display area different from a certain display area other than after.

  In addition, "in the case where the first state is changed to the second state during the execution of one symbol change display, the second state is changed to the third state (hereinafter," the second case ") ), And the first state is a state in which only the first fluctuation icon of the two fluctuation icons is displayed [for example, as illustrated in FIG. 164 (A5), the first fluctuation icon Or the like, in which only the first variation icon h01 of the icon h01 and the second variation icon h02 is displayed], and the second state is a state in which both of the two variation icons are displayed [ For example, as shown in FIG. 164 (A9), a state where both the first fluctuation icon h01 and the second fluctuation icon h02 are displayed], and the third state is the two fluctuation icons The second floating icon of the Only the state in which only the second variable icon h02 of the first variable icon h01 and the second variable icon h02 is displayed as shown in FIG. 164 (A12), for example. , A gaming table characterized by that. ] Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, by changing the number of the fluctuating icons, the effect of the fluctuating icons can be diversified, and in some cases, it can be expected that the fluctuating might be a big hit.

  Here, during the execution of one symbol change display, there may be a case where the first state is changed to the second state and then the second state is changed to the third state. During the execution of the symbol variation display, there may be a case where the state does not change from the second state to the third state after the state changes from the first state to the second state. In addition, during the execution of one symbol change display, the second state may be changed to the third state only after the first state is changed to the second state. During the execution of the symbol variation display, there may be a case where the state changes from the second state to the third state other than after the state changes from the first state to the second state. Also, only during the execution of one symbol change display, there may be a case where the first state is changed to the second state and then the second state is changed to the third state. Even when the symbol variation display is not being executed, the second state may be changed to the third state after the first state is changed to the second state.

  The display means is a means capable of displaying a third change icon [for example, a third change icon h03 shown in FIG. 173 (A17)], and the third change icon is the first change icon. The third variation icon is a variation icon different from the variation icon, and the third variation icon is a variation icon different from the second variation icon. After the state, the fourth state may be changed to the fifth state, and the fourth state is a state in which the second fluctuation icon and the third fluctuation icon are displayed. [For example, as shown in FIG. 173 (A14), a state where both the second fluctuation icon h02 and the third fluctuation icon h03 are displayed, etc.], and the fifth state is the second state. The fluctuation icon and the third fluctuation In the state in which only the third variation icon h03 is displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 173 (A17), only the third variation icon h03 of the second variation icon h02 and the third variation icon h03 is displayed. A displayed state or the like]. ] Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, by changing the number of the fluctuating icons, the effect of the fluctuating icons can be diversified, and in some cases, it can be expected that the fluctuating might be a big hit.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the third variable icon, or may be capable of displaying variable icons other than the third variable icon. Further, the display means may be one that always displays the third variable icon, or may be one that does not always display the third variable icon.

  Further, the third change icon may be partially different from the first change icon, or may be entirely different.

  In addition, the third change icon may be partially different from the second change icon, or may be entirely different.

  Also, after the second case, after the third state to the fourth state, there may be a case where the fourth state to the fifth state, or the second case After that, the third state may be changed to the fourth state, and then the fourth state may not be changed to the fifth state. Also, after the second case, there may be a case where the fourth state becomes the fifth state only after the third state becomes the fourth state, or the second case. Other than after the transition from the third state to the fourth state, the fourth state may transition to the fifth state after the transition from the third state to the fourth state. Also, only after the second case, the third state may be changed to the fourth state, and then the fourth state may be changed to the fifth state. Other than after the case, the fourth state may be changed to the fifth state after the third state is changed to the fourth state.

In addition, "the at least part of the period in which the two fluctuating icons are displayed includes a period in which none of the two fluctuating icons are displayed in the certain display area [for example, in FIG. 164 (A9). As shown, during the period in which the first change icon h01 and the second change icon h02 are displayed, no change icon is displayed in the icon display area HN1, etc.],
A gaming table characterized by the following. ] Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, the effect of the fluctuating icon can be diversified by not displaying the fluctuating icon in a certain display area, and in some cases, it can be expected that the fluctuating might be a big hit.

  Here, in a part of the period in which the two fluctuating icons are displayed, there may be a period in which none of the two fluctuating icons are displayed in a certain display area, or the two fluctuating icons are displayed. There may be a period during which none of the two change icons is displayed in a certain display area in the entire period.

  Further, the display means is a means capable of displaying an icon related to suspension of the symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as a “suspension icon [for example, suspension icons h11, h12, h13, etc. shown in FIG. 164 (A2)]”). Yes,

In a period during which the two fluctuation icons are displayed [for example, a period during which the first fluctuation icon h01 and the second fluctuation icon h02 are displayed as shown in FIGS. 164 (A7) to (A10)]. The number of the reserved icons (for example, six, etc.) is determined before the two variable icons are displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 164 (A6), the first variable icon h01 and the second variable icon h02. During the period in which only the first change icon h01 is displayed], the number of the suspension icons [for example, three, etc.]
A gaming table characterized by the following. ] Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, there are cases where the effect can be diversified by changing the number of reserved icons.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the hold icon, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the hold icon. Further, the display means may be one that always displays the hold icon, or may be one that does not always display the hold icon.

Further, the display means is a means capable of displaying an icon related to suspension of the symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as a “suspension icon [for example, suspension icons h11, h12, h13, etc. shown in FIG. 164 (A2)]”). In addition, the display means can display a display (hereinafter, referred to as “numerical hold display [for example, a second hold number display shown in FIG. 164 (A2)], etc.]” that indicates the number of holdings of the symbol variation display by numbers. The number of holds indicated by the number hold display [for example, as shown in FIGS. 164 (A7) to (A10), during the period in which the first change icon h01 and the second change icon h02 are displayed. , The number of holdings in the special figure 1 in the second holding number display indicates “3”, etc.] is the number of the holding icons during the period in which the two variable icons are displayed [eg, FIG. 164 (A7) (A10), during the period in which the first change icon h01 and the second change icon h02 are displayed, six hold icons are displayed, etc.].
A gaming table characterized by the following. ] Was also explained.

  According to this gaming table, there are cases where the effect can be diversified by changing the number of reserved icons.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the hold icon, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the hold icon. Further, the display means may be one that always displays the hold icon, or may be one that does not always display the hold icon.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the numeric hold display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the numeric hold display. In addition, the display means may be one that always displays the numeric hold display, or may be one that does not always display the numeric hold display.

In addition, "the at least part of the period in which the first moving animation is displayed, the moving display of the hold icon is displayed, and at least part of the period in which the second moving animation is displayed. A gaming table, wherein a moving display of the hold icon is displayed during a period. ] Was also explained.
According to this gaming table, there are cases in which effects produced by the hold icon can be diversified.

  Here, in a part of the period in which the first moving animation is displayed, the moving display of the hold icon may be displayed, or in the entire period in which the first moving animation is displayed. Alternatively, a move display of the hold icon may be displayed.

  In addition, during a part of the period in which the second moving animation is displayed, the moving display of the hold icon may be displayed, or in the entire period in which the second moving animation is displayed, A move display of the hold icon may be displayed.

Also, the gaming machine is characterized in that the gaming machine is a pachinko machine (for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1). ] Was also explained.
In the following, additional information including what has been described so far will be added.

  (Supplementary Note 1) A gaming table provided with an image display means, wherein the image display means is a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays, and one of the plurality of types of displays is: The first display, the first display is a display that informs the time until a certain effect is performed, one of the plurality of types of display is a second display Yes, the second display is a display that may notify that the time until the certain effect is started may change, the second display is displayed during the display of the first display A game console characterized by the following:

  Here, the “certain effect” may be an effect by display and effect movable means (including an image display means such as a sub liquid crystal, a versa lighter, and a light guide plate).

  (Supplementary Note 2) The gaming table according to Supplementary Note 1, wherein in a case where the second display is displayed, a display mode of the first display changes after the second display is displayed. It is configured,

A gaming table characterized by the following. Here, the display mode of the first display may change even if the second display is not displayed. The display mode of the first display may be changed only when the second display is displayed.

  (Supplementary Note 3) The gaming table according to Supplementary Note 1 or 2, wherein the image display unit is a unit including a plurality of image display units, and one of the plurality of image display units. Is a first image display means, one of the plurality of image display means is a second image display means, the second image display means, the first image display means A game console, which is configured to be located closer to the display means.

  (Supplementary Note 4) The gaming table according to Supplementary Note 3, wherein the second display may be displayed on the second image display means, and the second display may be displayed. A game console, wherein the image display means may overlap the first image display means.

  (Supplementary Note 5) In the gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes 1 to 4, the time notified by the first display is advanced even when the second display is displayed. A gaming table that features.

  (Supplementary Note 6) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes 1 to 5, wherein a display different from the second display is displayed after the timer reaches 0. Stand.

  (Supplementary Note 7) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes 1 to 6, wherein the second display is easier to hit than when the second display is not displayed.

  (Supplementary Note 8) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes 1 to 7, wherein one of the plurality of types of display is a third display, and the certain effect is: A game console, wherein the display is the third display displayed by the image display means, and the display of the substitute sign is an effect display.

  (Supplementary Note 9) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes 1 to 7, further comprising an effect movable unit, wherein the effect movable unit is a unit capable of executing a plurality of types of operations, and An amusement machine, wherein one type of operation is an effect operation, and the certain effect is an effect operation by effect movable means.

  Here, an operation other than the effect operation may be executed, and the operation other than the effect operation includes, for example, an operation at the time of turning on the power, an initial position return operation, or a retreat operation. Further, the effect movable means is not limited to the one provided on the game board, and may be, for example, one provided on a frame (front door).

  (Supplementary Note 10) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes 1 to 9, wherein the certain effect is more likely to cause a big hit than when the certain effect does not occur. .

  (Supplementary Note 11) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes 1 to 10, wherein a hot effect display is displayed after the first display is displayed until the second display is displayed. A game console characterized by the following:

  (Supplementary Note 12) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes 1 to 11, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko machine.

  (Supplementary Note 13) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes 1 to 11, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine.

  (Supplementary Note 14) A game console provided with image display means, wherein the image display means is capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays, and one of the plurality of types of displays is a One effect display, one type of display among the plurality of types of display is a second effect display, the period display is a display displayed during a certain period during the reach, The period display is a display for notifying a timing at which the first effect display may be displayed (hereinafter, referred to as a “first timing”), and the period display is performed before the first timing. A game console characterized in that the display may be deleted.

  Here, the display period of the period display is not limited to the reach period, and may be a change period or a big hit. Further, even during the reach, the information may be displayed in the first reach but not displayed in the second reach.

  (Supplementary Note 15) The gaming table according to Supplementary Note 14, wherein one of the plurality of types of display is a third effect display, and the period display indicates the third effect display. A gaming table, wherein the timing at which the game is performed may not be notified, and the period display is not displayed during the display of the third effect display.

  Here, in addition to the effect display, for example, an error notification such as a ball-drop error, a notification indicating the firing position, a notification other than an error such as a notification of preventing a prepaid card from being forgotten, a light emission by an LED, an effect operation by a character May be performed. Further, the timing at which the third display is displayed may be notified by the period display. The timing at which the third display is displayed may not be notified by the period display.

  (Supplementary Note 16) In the gaming table according to Supplementary Note 15, the third effect display may be displayed in a symbol change in which the result of the hit determination is a big hit (hereinafter, referred to as “big hit symbol change”). A game console characterized by a certain effect display.

  (Supplementary Note 17) In the gaming table according to Supplementary Note 16, the third effect display may be displayed in a symbol variation (hereinafter, referred to as a “losing symbol variation”) in which a result of the right / wrong determination is lost. A game console, wherein the effect display is a certain effect display, wherein the big hit symbol change is configured to display the third effect display more frequently than the losing symbol change.

  (Supplementary Note 18) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes 15 to 17, further comprising an effect movable unit, wherein the effect movable unit is a unit that may perform an effect operation, and the third effect A game console, wherein the electric-power-moving means may perform the effect operation while a display is being displayed.

  (Supplementary note 19) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary notes 14 to 18, wherein the period display is in an easily visible state after the period display is hidden. Stand.

  (Supplementary note 20) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary notes 14 to 19, wherein the display of the period is not displayed until a certain period during the reach ends.

  (Supplementary note 21) The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes 14 to 19, wherein the period display is a display that is always displayed during a certain period during the reach. .

  (Supplementary Note 22) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes 14 to 21, wherein the period display indicates a timing at which a second effect display is displayed (hereinafter, referred to as “second timing”). A game console characterized by the following:

  Here, the timing displayed by the period display may be three or more times. In addition, a portion that reports a chance up in response to a reach may be fixed, such that a chance up is reported three times whenever a certain reach occurs and two times whenever another reach occurs. Alternatively, the same reach may be used. In such a case, the notification of the chance up may be changed so that the notification is performed three times and the notification is performed only once. In that case, the case of “notifying a lot of timings” may be more likely to be a big hit than the case of “notifying much,” or may be easier to lose. Also, the likelihood of a big hit need not vary depending on the number of times that the timing has been notified. In addition, the larger the number of chance-ups, the greater the chance of a big hit, or the smaller the number of chance-ups, the greater the chance of a big hit.

  (Supplementary Note 23) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes 14 to 22, wherein the image display unit is a unit including a plurality of image display units, and the image display unit includes a plurality of image display units. One image display means is a first image display means, one of the plurality of image display means is a second image display means, the first image display means, The image display means that may display the period display, the second image display means is an image display means that may perform a staging operation, by the second image display means, A game console characterized in that at least a part thereof may be overlapped.

  (Supplementary note 24) The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes 14 to 23, wherein the gaming table is a pachinko machine.

  (Supplementary Note 25) A game console provided with image display means, wherein the image display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays, and one of the plurality of types of displays is a One effect display, one of the plurality of types of display is a second effect display, and one of the plurality of types of display is a third display. The period display is a display that is displayed during a certain period during the reach, and the period display is a timing at which the first effect display may be displayed (hereinafter, “first timing”). ), Wherein at least a part of the first effect display may be overlapped by the third display before the first timing is reached. A gaming table.

  (Supplementary Note 26) A game console provided with a display means, wherein the display means is a means capable of displaying a first display, and at least a part of the first display is displayed as time passes. The mode changes at a first speed, and the display unit is a unit capable of displaying a second display, and at least a part of the second display mode is changed to a second mode according to a lapse of time. A game console that changes at a speed, wherein the first speed and the second speed are different.

  (Supplementary Note 27) The gaming table according to Supplementary Note 26, wherein the display unit is a unit capable of displaying a plurality of types of display, and one of the plurality of types of display is a time display. Yes, the time display is a display in which at least a part of the display mode of the time display changes in accordance with the passage of time in a certain period, and one of the time displays is the display A game console, which is a first display, wherein one of the time displays is the second display.

  (Supplementary note 28) The gaming table according to Supplementary note 26 or 27, wherein the second display may be displayed while the first display is being displayed.

(Supplementary Note 29) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes 26 to 28, wherein the first display is a display in which a display mode changes until a first time elapses, and the second display is The display is a display in which the display mode changes until the second time elapses. When the first time elapses, a third display is displayed. When the second time elapses, a fourth display is displayed. Is displayed,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

  Here, the third display and the fourth display may be the same or different. Further, the third display may have higher reliability than the fourth display, or the fourth display may have higher reliability than the third display.

  (Supplementary Note 30) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes 26 to 29, wherein one of the plurality of types of display is a first type of display, and the first type of display is the first type of display. As the type of display, there is the first display and the second display,

A gaming table characterized by the following. Here, the first display and the second display may be different types of displays.

  (Supplementary Note 31) The gaming table according to Supplementary Note 30, wherein the first type of display is a timer notice display, and one of the plurality of types of display is a first type of display. The gaming table, wherein the timer notice display is a display for notifying the time until the first effect display is displayed.

  (Supplementary Note 32) The gaming table according to Supplementary Note 30, further comprising an operation unit, wherein the first type of display is an operation valid period display, and the operation valid period display is the operation unit. A display indicating a period in which the operation is valid.

  (Supplementary Note 33) In the gaming table according to Supplementary Note 30, the first type of display is a period display, and one type of the plurality of types of display is a second type of display. It is an effect display, and the period display is a display that may notify a timing at which the second effect display may be displayed in the first period (hereinafter, referred to as “first timing”). Wherein the first timing is reported from the start of the first period to the end thereof.

  (Supplementary note 34) The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes 26 to 33, wherein the gaming table is a pachinko machine.

  (Supplementary Note 35) A gaming table provided with display means, wherein the display means is capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays, and one of the plurality of types of displays is a countdown display. The countdown display is an effect in which notification of time until a certain effect is performed (hereinafter, referred to as “time notification”) may be performed, and the time notification is performed by the countdown display. The display mode of the countdown display may be displayed in the first display mode, and when the time notification is being performed by the count gown display, the countdown display is displayed in the first display mode. A game console, wherein the mode may change from the mode to the second display mode.

  (Supplementary Note 36) The gaming table according to Supplementary Note 35, wherein the first display mode is a display mode in which the countdown display is displayed at a first display size, and the second display mode. The game console is a display mode in which the countdown display is displayed in a second display size, and the second display size is larger than the first display size.

  (Supplementary note 37) The gaming table according to supplementary note 35 or 36, wherein when the countdown display starts to be displayed, the countdown display is displayed in a first display mode.

  (Supplementary Note 38) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes 35 to 37, wherein when the countdown display is displayed, the display mode always changes from the first display mode to the second display mode. A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Supplementary Note 39) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes 35 to 37, wherein the game console changes to the second display mode rather than being displayed in the first display mode. Eventually, the jackpot symbol is easily confirmed and displayed,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

(Supplementary Note 40) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes 35 to 39, wherein the start and end of the countdown display are performed within a single symbol change display period.
A gaming table characterized by the following.

  (Supplementary note 41) The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes 35 to 40, wherein when the countdown display changes from the first display mode to the second display mode, the countdown display moves. A gaming table characterized by the following.

  (Supplementary note 42) The gaming table according to supplementary note 41, wherein the time notification by the countdown display is continued even while the countdown display is moving.

  (Supplementary note 43) The gaming table according to supplementary note 41, wherein the time notification by the countdown display is interrupted while the countdown display is moving.

  (Supplementary note 44) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary notes 35 to 43, wherein when the time until the certain effect is performed becomes 0, the time until the certain effect is performed by the countdown display. The notification indicating that the time is 0 is performed, and after the notification indicating that the time until the certain effect is performed is performed by the countdown display, the countdown display is erased. A gaming table, which is configured.

  (Supplementary note 45) The gaming table according to supplementary note 44, wherein when the time until the certain effect is performed reaches 0, a specific display is displayed and then the game console is not displayed.

  (Supplementary note 46) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary notes 35 to 45, wherein the game console may not change to the second display mode.

  (Supplementary Note 47) In the gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes 35 to 46, the display unit includes a plurality of display units, and one of the plurality of display units is a display unit. , A first display means, one of the plurality of display means is a second display means, the first display means the countdown display of the first display mode is displayed A game console characterized by the following:

  (Supplementary note 48) The gaming table according to supplementary note 47, wherein the second display means may display a countdown display of the second display means.

  (Supplementary Note 49) The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes 35 to 48, wherein the gaming table is a pachinko machine.

  (Supplementary note 50) The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes 35 to 48, wherein the gaming table is a slot machine.

(Supplementary Note 51) A game console including display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display, wherein one of the plurality of types of display is a first display, and the first display is a period. Display, the first display is a display that may be displayed in a certain period of the period during which the reach effect display is performed, one of the plurality of types of display, The second display, the second display is a notice display, the first display is a display to notify the first timing, and the first timing, the second display is It is the timing at which display may be started, and before the first timing after the first display is started, the first display may be erased,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

  (Supplementary Note 52) The gaming table according to Supplementary Note 51, wherein one of the plurality of types of display is a third display, the third display is an effect display, and the third display is an effect display. The display is a display different from the second display, and the third display may be displayed before the first timing, and the first display is the third display. A game console which does not notify the start timing of display and wherein the first display is deleted while the third display is being displayed.

  (Supplementary note 53) The gaming table according to supplementary note 52, wherein the third display is a notice display.

  (Supplementary Note 54) The gaming table according to Supplementary Note 53, wherein the big hit symbol is more likely to be finally displayed when the third display is displayed than when the third display is not displayed. , A gaming table characterized by that.

  (Supplementary note 55) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary notes 52 to 54, further comprising: a production movable unit capable of executing a plurality of types of operations, wherein one of the plurality of types of operations is a first The gaming table, wherein the first operation is a staging operation, and the first operation may be performed while the third display is being displayed.

  (Supplementary Note 56) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes 51 to 55, wherein the first display is displayed again after the first display is deleted. , A gaming table characterized by that.

  (Supplementary note 57) The gaming table according to Supplementary notes 51 to 55, wherein the first display is not displayed until the certain period elapses after the first display is erased. A gaming table characterized by the following.

  (Supplementary Note 58) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes 51 to 55, wherein the first display is restarted until the certain period elapses after the first display is deleted. A game console configured to be displayed.

  (Supplementary note 59) The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes 51 to 58, wherein the certain period is a period during which super-reach is being executed.

  (Supplementary Note 60) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes 51 to 59, wherein one of the plurality of types of display is a fourth display, and the fourth display is an effect display. The fourth display is a display different from the second display, the first display is a display that may also notify the second timing, and the second timing A game console, at which there is a possibility that the fourth display is started to be displayed.

  (Supplementary note 61) The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes 51 to 60, wherein the gaming table is a pachinko machine.

  (Supplementary Note 62) A game console provided with display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays, wherein one of the plurality of types of display is a first display, and the first display is a countdown. The countdown display is a display that may include timing notification, and the timing notification is a notification that the timing at which a certain effect is performed is performed by updating the display of the countdown display. And wherein the display mode of the first display may change from the first display mode to the second display mode during the display of the countdown display.

  (Supplementary Note 63) The gaming table according to supplementary note 62, wherein the first display mode and the second display mode are different display modes.

  (Supplementary note 64) The gaming table according to supplementary note 63, wherein the first display mode is a display mode in which the first display is displayed at a first display size, and the second display mode is a display mode in which the first display is displayed at a first display size. The display mode is a display mode in which the first display is displayed at a second display size. In the first display size and the second display size, the second display size A gaming table characterized by having a larger size.

  (Supplementary Note 65) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes 62 to 64, wherein when the display of the countdown display starts, the first display is displayed in the first display mode. A gaming table characterized by the following.

  (Supplementary Note 66) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes 62 to 65, wherein the first display is changed from the first display mode to the second display mode during the display of the countdown display. A game console that always changes.

  (Supplementary note 67) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary notes 62 to 65, wherein the first display does not change from the first display mode to the second display mode. A gaming table, characterized in that a big hit symbol is more likely to be finally determined and displayed when one display changes from the first display mode to the second display mode.

  (Supplementary note 68) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary notes 62 to 67, wherein the display of the first display is started and ended during the execution of one symbol change display. A gaming table.

  (Supplementary note 69) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary notes 62 to 68, wherein the first display is a display whose display position may change.

  (Supplementary note 70) The gaming table according to supplementary note 69, wherein the display position of the first display changes when the first display changes from the first display mode to the second display mode. A gaming table characterized by the following.

  Here, the first display of the first display mode is displayed at a first position, and the first display of the second display mode is displayed at a second position. It may be a gaming table that does.

  (Supplementary Note 71) In the gaming table according to Supplementary Note 69 or 70, the first display is a display that may be moved and displayed, and the display position of the first display is changed by the moving display. , A gaming table characterized by that.

  (Supplementary note 72) The gaming table according to supplementary note 71, wherein the countdown display is updated while the moving display is being displayed.

  (Supplementary note 73) The gaming table according to supplementary note 71, wherein the update display of the countdown display is interrupted while the movement display is being displayed.

  (Supplementary note 74) The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes 62 to 73, wherein the countdown display is a time countdown display.

  (Supplementary Note 75) In the gaming table according to Supplementary Note 74, the timing notification indicates that the certain effect has been performed by displaying a display indicating 0 in the countdown display. A game console characterized by information.

  (Supplementary note 76) The gaming table according to supplementary note 74 or 75, wherein the countdown display is erased after a display indicating 0 is displayed in the countdown display. A gaming table.

  (Supplementary note 77) The gaming table according to supplementary note 76, wherein one of the plurality of types of display is a second display, and the second display is not included in the certain effect. Display, when the display indicating 0 in the countdown display is displayed, after the second display is displayed, the countdown display is configured to be erased,

A gaming table characterized by the following. (Supplementary Note 78) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes 62 to 77, wherein the display unit is a unit including a plurality of display units, and one of the plurality of display units. Is a first display means, one of the plurality of display means is a second display means, when the first display of the first display mode is displayed, A gaming table, wherein the first display is displayed on the first display means.

  (Supplementary note 79) The gaming table according to supplementary note 78, wherein the first display in the second display mode may be displayed on the second display means. .

  (Supplementary note 80) The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes 62 to 79, wherein the gaming table is a pachinko machine.

  (Supplementary Note 81) The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes 62 to 79, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine.

  (Supplementary Note A1) A game console provided with display means, wherein the display means is capable of displaying a plurality of types of meter displays, and one of the plurality of types of meter displays is a first meter display. A meter display, one of the plurality of types of meter displays is a fourth meter display, the first meter display is a display having a plurality of types of states, and the first meter display One state of the plurality of states in the display is a first state, one state of the plurality of states in the first meter display is a third state, the first state The meter display is a display that may change from the first state to the third state, the fourth meter display is a display having a plurality of types of states, the fourth meter display Of the plurality of states in Is a fourth state, one of the plurality of types of states in the fourth meter display is a sixth state, and the fourth meter display is from the fourth state. It is a display that may change to the sixth state, and when the first meter display changes from the first state to the third state, the first meter display changes to the first state. The expectation of the big hit is higher than the case where the state has not changed to the third state, and when the fourth meter display changes from the fourth state to the sixth state, the fourth state is displayed. A gaming table having a higher expectation of a big hit than when the meter display does not change from the fourth state to the sixth state.

    (Supplementary Note A2) In the gaming table according to Supplementary Note A1, the degree of expectation that the fourth meter display changes from the fourth state to the sixth state is that the first meter display is in the first state. A game console that is higher than the degree of expectation of changing from the third state to the third state.

  (Supplementary Note A3) The gaming table according to Supplementary Note A1 or A2, wherein the display unit is a unit capable of displaying a decorative symbol, and the first meter display is displayed while the decorative symbol is stopped. A game console, which is a display that may be displayed.

  (Supplementary Note A4) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes A1 to A3, wherein the fourth meter display is a display started to be displayed in the fourth state. Stand.

  (Supplementary Note A5) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes A1 to A4, wherein one of the plurality of states in the first meter display is a second state, and One meter display is a display that may change from the first state to the second state, and the first meter display may change from the second state to the third state. There is a display, the first meter display is a display that may be started in the first state, the first meter display, the display is started in the second state There is a display, the first meter display, when the display is started in the second state, than when the display is started in the first state, the expectation of big hit is higher, A gaming table that features.

  (Supplementary Note A6) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes A1 to A5, wherein, among the plurality of types of displays, one display is a first icon, and the first meter display is the first meter display. The first icon is displayed for the first number of times, so that the display changes from the first state to the third state.The fourth meter display indicates that the first icon is the second state. By being displayed the number of times, it is a display that changes from the fourth state to the sixth state, wherein the second number is a number smaller than the first number, A gaming table.

  (Supplementary Note A7) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes A1 to A6, wherein one of the plurality of displays is a big hit display and the third state in the first meter display. Is a display state indicating that the big hit display is displayed in the variation of the decorative symbol in which the third state is displayed, and the sixth state in the fourth meter display is the sixth state A gaming table, wherein the big hit display is displayed when the decorative symbol changes in the displayed decorative symbol.

    (Supplementary Note A8) The gaming table according to Supplementary Note A7, wherein the second state of the first meter display is such that the big hit display is displayed in a change of the decorative symbol in which the second state is displayed. The fifth state of the fourth meter display is a state of display indicating that there is a case where the big hit display is displayed in the variation of the decorative symbol in which the fifth state is displayed A gaming state, wherein the big hit display is more easily displayed when the fifth state is displayed than in the second state.

  (Supplementary Note A9) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes A1 to A8, wherein one of the plurality of types of effects is a pseudo-sequence effect, and the pseudo-serial notice is the first consecutive effect. This is a display that may be started when the meter display changes to the third state, and the pseudo consecutive notice may start when the fourth meter display changes to the sixth state. A game console characterized by a certain display.

  (Supplementary Note A10) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes A1 to A9, wherein one of the plurality of types of displays is an operation promotion display of the operation unit, and the operation promotion display is The display may be started when the first meter display changes to the third state, and the operation prompting display starts when the fourth meter display changes to the sixth state. A gaming table, which is a display that may be displayed.

  (Supplementary Note A11) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes A1 to A10, wherein the display unit is a unit capable of displaying a plurality of types of effects, and one of the plurality of types of effects. Is a certain effect, the certain effect is an effect in which the big hit display is easily displayed in the variation of the decorative pattern in which the certain effect is displayed, and the certain effect is the first effect. This is an effect that may be started when the meter display changes to the third state, and the certain effect may be that the display is started when the fourth meter display changes to the sixth state. A gaming console characterized by directing.

  (Supplementary Note A12) A game console provided with display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays, wherein one of the plurality of types of display is a period display, and one of the plurality of types of display is Is a first effect display, one of the plurality of types of display is a notice display, and the period display is a display that notifies the start of a certain period in a period during which the reach effect display is performed. Yes, the period display, during the display of the reach effect display, is a display to notify the first timing, and the first timing, during the display of the reach effect display, the first effect display May be started, and the notice display is a display for giving notice that the first timing is notified by the period display, and the certain display is displayed by the period display. Period Amusement machine which of before the start is announced, said some cases predictive display is displayed, characterized in that.

  (Supplementary Note A13) The gaming table according to Supplementary Note A12, wherein the period display is a display including a cursor display, and the cursor display is a third position through a first position from a second position (start position). Is moved to a position (end position), so that the start to end of the first period is notified, and the second position is a position before the first position. The first position is a position before the third position, and when the cursor display reaches the first position, it is notified that the first timing is reached. , A gaming table characterized by that.

  (Supplementary Note A14) The gaming table according to Supplementary Note A13, wherein the period display is a display in which a chance-up display (first chance-up display) may be displayed. It is a display that informs that the first effect display has been started at the first timing, and when the display of the first effect display has been started at the first timing, the first position is displayed at the first position. A gaming table, wherein the chance-up display is displayed at a corresponding display position.

  (Supplementary Note A15) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes A12 to A14, wherein the period display is a display in which a moving display may be performed.

  (Supplementary note A16) The gaming table according to supplementary note A15, wherein the moving display is performed before the start of a certain period is notified by the period display.

  (Supplementary note A17) The gaming table according to supplementary note A15 or A16, wherein the display position of the period display changes when the moving display is performed.

  (Supplementary Note A18) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes A12 to A17, wherein the notice display may be displayed in a plurality of display modes, and one of the plurality of display modes may be displayed. The mode is a first display mode, and one display mode of the plurality of display modes is a second display mode, and a mode in which the notice display is displayed in the second display mode. However, the gaming table is characterized in that the jackpot symbol mode is more likely to be finally determined and displayed (in the symbol variation display in which the period display is displayed) than when displayed in the first display mode.

  (Supplementary Note A19) The gaming table according to Supplementary Note A18, wherein the notice display is displayed in the second display mode than in the first display mode. A game console wherein the first effect display is easily started when one timing comes.

  (Supplementary Note A20) The gaming table according to Supplementary Note A18 or A19, wherein the notice display displayed in the first display mode may change to the second display mode. Game console.

  (Supplementary Note A21) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes A12 to A20, wherein the period display may be displayed in a plurality of display modes, and one of the plurality of display modes may be displayed. The mode is a third display mode (for example, a defmeter), one of the plurality of display modes is a fourth display mode (for example, a red meter), and the period display is the second display mode. A gaming table characterized in that the big hit symbol form is more likely to be finally determined and displayed in the case of being displayed in the fourth display form than in the case of being displayed in the third display form.

  (Supplementary Note A22) The gaming table according to Supplementary Note A21, wherein the display mode of the period display is displayed in the third display mode or the fourth display mode, depending on the display mode of the notice display. A gaming table characterized by the fact that it is not known.

  (Supplementary Note A23) In the gaming table according to Supplementary Note A21 or A22, the notice display is displayed in the first display mode when the notice display is displayed in the second display mode. A gaming table, wherein the period display is more easily displayed in the fourth display mode than in a case.

  (Supplementary Note A24) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes A21 to A23, wherein the notice display is the second display when the notice display is displayed in the first display mode. A gaming table, wherein the period display is easier to be displayed in the third display mode than when displayed in a mode.

  (Supplementary Note A25) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes A12 to A24, wherein one of the plurality of types of display is a second notice display, and the notice display is a first notice display. A game console, which is a notice display, wherein the display of the first notice display may be notified by the second notice display in some cases.

(Supplementary Note A26) The gaming table according to Supplementary Note A25, wherein a symbol change display in which the period display is displayed rather than a case where the first advance display is not notified by the second advance display. A gaming table characterized by the fact that it tends to be a big hit.

  (Supplementary Note A27) In the gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes A12 to A26, the period display is displayed when the notice display is displayed before the period display is displayed. A gaming table, characterized in that the jackpot symbol mode is more likely to be finally determined and displayed than when the notice display is not displayed before.

  (Supplementary Note A28) The game console according to any one of Supplementary Notes A12 to A27, wherein the notice display is a display performed by at least a part of the period display.

  (Supplementary Note A29) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes A12 to A27, wherein the notice display is different from the period display.

  (Supplementary Note A30) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes A12 to A29, wherein the display of the reach effect display is notified by the notice display, whereby the period display is displayed. A gaming table characterized by the advance notice.

  (Supplementary Note A31) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes A12 to A30, wherein the notice display may be performed in the same symbol variation display as the period display in some cases. .

(Supplementary Note A32) In the gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes A12 to A31, the notice display may be performed in a symbol variation display preceding a symbol variation display in which the period display is performed. is there,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

  (Supplementary Note A33) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes A12 to A32, wherein the notice display is also displayed during a period in which the symbol stop display is performed.

  (Supplementary Note A34) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes A12 to A32, wherein the notice display is not displayed during a period in which a symbol stop display is performed.

  (Supplementary Note A35) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes A12 to A34, wherein the notice display is a display that may be displayed during the display of the reach effect display. Game console.

  (Supplementary Note A36) The gaming table, wherein the notice display is a display that may be displayed before the reach effect display is started.

  (Supplementary Note A37) A gaming table provided with a display means, wherein the display means is a means that may display a first display, and the first display is a case where a certain effect is started. Is a display that notifies a certain timing, and the display means is a means in which the A-th display may be displayed as a certain effect, and the timing at which the A-th display is started (hereinafter, referred to as “ At this time, the A-th display may be displayed at a position overlapping at least a part of the first display.

A gaming table characterized by the following. Here, the certain effect may be the A-th display. Further, the display of the Pth display may be started as a certain effect.

  (Supplementary Note A38) The gaming table according to Supplementary Note A37, wherein the first display is a period display, and the period display is a possibility that the A-th display is displayed in a certain period. It is a display that informs a certain timing, and at least a part of the display mode of the period display changes according to the passage of time of a certain period, and the display mode of at least a part of the period display changes, A game console, wherein a timing at which the A-th display is started is notified.

(Supplementary Note A39) The gaming table according to Supplementary Note A38, wherein the period display is a display in which a B-th display may be displayed, and the A-th display is displayed at the A-th timing. And the B display is displayed.

(Supplementary Note A40) The gaming table according to Supplementary Note A37, wherein the first display is a timer display, and the timer display is a display for notifying a timing at which the A-th display is displayed. In response to the passage of time, at least a part of the display mode of the timer display changes, and when the change of at least a part of the display mode of the timer display ends, the A-th display is displayed.
A gaming table characterized by the following.

  (Supplementary Note A41) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes A37 to A40, wherein the A-th display may be displayed when the A-th timing comes, and the A-th display may be displayed. The game console, wherein the A-th display may not be displayed when the timing comes.

  (Supplementary Note A42) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes A37 to A40, wherein the A-th display is always displayed when the A-th timing comes. Stand.

  (Supplementary Note A43) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes A37 to A42, wherein the display unit is a unit that may display a second display, and the second display is the second display. A gaming table, which is a display for giving notice that one display will be displayed.

  (Supplementary Note A44) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes A37 to A43, wherein the first display is a display in which a moving display may be performed. A game console, wherein the display position of the first display changes.

  Here, the moving display may be always performed, or the moving display may or may not be performed.

  (Supplementary Note A45) The gaming table according to Supplementary Note A44, wherein at least a part of the display mode of the first display may change as time passes. A moving table may be displayed after the display is displayed and before the display mode of at least a part of the first display is changed.

  (Supplementary Note A46) The gaming table according to Supplementary Note A44, wherein at least a part of the display mode of the first display may change with time. A moving table may be displayed during a change in the display mode of at least a part of the display of the game table.

  (Supplementary Note A47) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes A37 to A46, wherein, when the Ath display is displayed at the Ath timing, the first display is performed by the Ath display. A game console characterized in that at least a part of the display is overlapped.

  (Supplementary Note A48) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes A37 to A47, wherein when the A-th display is displayed at the A-th timing, the first display is not displayed. A game console, wherein the A-th display is displayed in an area overlapping at least a part of the area in which the first display is displayed.

  (Supplementary Note A49) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes A37 to A48, wherein the display unit includes a plurality of image display units, and the display unit includes a plurality of image display units. The one image display means is a first image display means, one of the plurality of types of image display means is a second image display means, and the second image display means is A means provided on the front side of the first image display means, wherein the first display is displayed by the first image display means, and the A-th display is displayed by the second image display means. A game console, which is displayed.

  (Supplementary Note A50) The gaming table according to Supplementary Note A49, wherein the second image display unit is a unit that may perform a rendering operation, and the first display is displayed by the first image display unit. A game console characterized in that the second image display means may perform the first-stage effecting operation when the A-th timing is reached in such a case.

(Supplementary Note A51) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes A37 to A50, further including an operation unit, wherein the A-th display is a display related to the operation unit.
A gaming table characterized by the following.

  (Supplementary Note A52) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes A37 to A51, wherein the display unit is a unit that may display a C-th display as a certain effect, and A game console characterized in that the C-th display may be displayed at a timing when the display is started (hereinafter, referred to as “C-th timing”).

  (Supplementary Note A53) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes A37 to A52, wherein the gaming table is a pachinko machine.

  (Supplementary Note A54) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes A37 to A52, wherein the gaming table is a slot machine.

  (Supplementary Note A55) A game console provided with a display means, wherein the display means is a means that may display a first display, and the first display is a timing at which a certain effect is started. , And wherein the first display is a display that may be displayed over a plurality of symbol variation displays.

  (Supplementary Note A56) The gaming table according to Supplementary Note A55, wherein the first display is a period display, and the period display is a timing at which a certain effect may be started in a certain period. (Hereinafter, referred to as “certain timing”). At least a part of the period display is changed according to the elapse of a certain period of time, and at least a part of the period display is changed. A timing at which the certain effect is started while the display mode is changing.

  (Supplementary Note A57) The gaming table according to Supplementary Note A56, wherein the period display is a display in which a B-th display may be displayed, and when the certain effect is started at the certain timing, A gaming table, wherein the B-th display is displayed.

  (Supplementary Note A58) The gaming table according to Supplementary Note A55, wherein the first display is a timer display, and the timer display is a display for notifying the certain timing, and the display is based on a lapse of time. A game console characterized in that the certain effect is started when at least a part of the display mode of the timer display changes and at least a part of the display mode of the timer display changes.

  (Supplementary Note A59) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes A55 to A58, wherein the certain effect may be started when the certain timing is reached, and the certain timing may be started. A game machine, wherein the certain effect may not be started when the game is performed.

  (Supplementary Note A60) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes A55 to A58, wherein the certain effect is always started when the certain timing is reached.

  (Supplementary Note A61) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes A55 to A60, wherein the display unit is a unit that may display a second display, and the second display is the second display. A gaming table, which is a display for giving notice that one display will be displayed.

  (Supplementary Note A62) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes A55 to A61, wherein the first display is a display in which a moving display may be performed. A game console, wherein the display position of the first display changes.

  Here, the moving display may be always performed, or the moving display may or may not be performed.

  (Supplementary Note A63) The gaming table according to Supplementary Note A62, wherein at least a part of the display mode of the first display may change with time. A moving table may be displayed after the display is displayed and before the display mode of at least a part of the first display is changed.

  (Supplementary Note A64) The gaming table according to Supplementary Note A62, wherein at least a part of the display mode of the first display may change with time. A moving table may be displayed during a change in the display mode of at least a part of the display of the game table.

  (Supplementary Note A65) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes A55 to A64, wherein the display of the first display is started in a first symbol variation display of the plurality of symbol variation displays. In the second symbol variation display of the plurality of symbol variation displays, the timing at which the certain effect is started is notified, and the first symbol variation display is performed before the second symbol variation display. A gaming table, wherein the symbol variation display is performed.

  (Supplementary Note A66) The gaming table according to Supplementary Note A65, wherein at least a part of the display mode of the first display is changed according to a lapse of time in a certain period, and In the second symbol variation display, the certain period is started, and in the first symbol variation display, the display mode of the first display is configured not to change.

(Supplementary Note A67) The gaming table according to Supplementary Note A65, wherein at least a part of the display mode of the first display is changed according to a lapse of time in a certain period, and In one symbol variation display, the certain period is started,
A gaming table characterized by the following.

  (Supplementary Note A68) The gaming table according to Supplementary Note A67, wherein the first symbol variation display is completed after the first symbol variation display is completed until the next symbol variation display is started. A game console wherein the display mode of the display is not changed.

  (Supplementary Note A68) The gaming table according to Supplementary Note A67, wherein the first symbol variation display is completed after the first symbol variation display is completed until the next symbol variation display is started. A game console characterized in that at least a part of display may be changed in display mode.

  (Supplementary Note A69) The gaming table according to Supplementary Note A65, wherein the display unit is a unit that may display a second display, and the second display is the first display. A gaming machine, wherein the second display is a display that may be displayed in the first symbol variation display.

  Here, the second display may be displayed in the second symbol change display. The second display may be always displayed in the first symbol change display.

  (Supplementary Note A70) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes A55 to A69, wherein the gaming table is a pachinko machine.

  (Supplementary Note A71) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes A55 to A69, wherein the gaming table is a slot machine.

  (Supplementary Note A72) A gaming table provided with a display means, wherein the display means is a means that may display a first display, and the first display is a case where a certain effect is started. This is a display that informs a certain timing (hereinafter, referred to as “a certain timing”), and at least a part of the first display is displayed according to a lapse of time until the certain effect is started. The mode may change, and before the change of the display mode of at least a part of the first display according to the elapse of time until the certain effect is started, the first display is used. A game console characterized by the fact that a notice is displayed.

(Supplementary Note A73) The gaming table according to Supplementary Note A72, wherein the first display is a period display, and the period display is a display for notifying the certain timing, and a time of a certain period. A display mode of at least a part of the period display changes according to progress of the period display, and the certain timing is notified during a change of the display mode of at least a part of the period display. Stand.
(Appendix A74)

  The gaming table according to Supplementary Note A73, wherein the period display is a display in which the B-th display may be displayed, and when the certain effect is started at the certain timing, the B-th display is displayed. A game console on which a display is displayed.

  (Supplementary Note A75) The gaming table according to Supplementary Note A72, wherein the first display is a timer display, and the timer display is a display for notifying the certain timing, and the display is based on a lapse of time. A game console characterized in that the certain effect is started when at least a part of the display mode of the timer display changes and at least a part of the display mode of the timer display changes.

  (Supplementary Note A76) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes A72 to A75, wherein the certain effect may be started at the certain timing, and the certain timing may be started. A game machine, wherein the certain effect may not be started when the game is performed.

  (Supplementary note A77) The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes A72 to A75, wherein the certain effect is always started when the certain timing is reached.

  (Supplementary Note A78) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes A72 to A77, wherein the display unit is a unit that may display a second display, and the second display is the second display. A gaming table, which is a display for giving notice that one display will be displayed.

  (Supplementary Note A79) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes A72 to A78, wherein the first display is a display in which a moving display may be performed. A game console, wherein the display position of the first display changes.

  Here, the moving display may be always performed, or the moving display may or may not be performed.

  (Supplementary Note A80) The gaming table according to Supplementary Note A79, wherein the movement is performed after the first display is displayed and before the display mode of at least a part of the first display is changed. A game console, which may be displayed.

  (Supplementary note A81) The gaming table according to supplementary note A79, wherein the moving display may be performed during a change in the display mode of at least a part of the first display.

  (Supplementary Note A82) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes A72 to A81, wherein the notice display indicates a time until the certain effect displayed by the first display is started. A gaming table, which is a display.

  (Supplementary Note A83) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes A72 to A82, further including an operation unit, wherein the notice display is a display related to the operation unit.

  (Supplementary Note A84) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes A72 to A83, wherein after the notice display is performed, a time until the certain effect is started is notified by the first display. A gaming table characterized by being performed.

  (Supplementary Note A85) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes A72 to A84, in which at least a part of the first display is displayed according to a lapse of time until the certain effect is started. A gaming table characterized in that a notice is always displayed by the first display before the change is made.

  (Supplementary Note A86) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes A72 to A85, wherein, when the first display is displayed, the time corresponding to a lapse of time until the certain effect is started. A game console, wherein a change in a display mode of at least a part of the first display is started.

  (Supplementary Note A87) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes A72 to A86, wherein the gaming table is a pachinko machine.

  (Supplementary Note A88) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes A72 to A86, wherein the gaming table is a slot machine.

  (Supplementary Note A89) A game console provided with display means, wherein the display means is a means in which a first display may be displayed, and a certain effect is started with the first display. This is a display that notifies a certain timing (hereinafter, referred to as “a certain timing”), and the display means is a means that may display a second display, and the second display is , Is a display for giving a notice that the first display is to be displayed, and a plurality of the second displays (hereinafter, referred to as “a plurality of second displays”) may be displayed. A gaming table.

  (Supplementary Note A90) The gaming table according to supplementary note A89, wherein the first display is a period display, and the period display is a display for notifying the certain timing in a certain period. The display mode of at least a part of the period display changes in accordance with the passage of time of the period, and the certain timing is notified during the change of the display mode of at least a part of the period display. A gaming table that features.

  (Supplementary Note A91) In the gaming table according to Supplementary Note A90, the period display is a display in which a B-th display may be displayed, and when the certain effect is started at the certain timing, A gaming table, wherein the B-th display is displayed.

  (Supplementary Note A91) The gaming table according to Supplementary Note A89, wherein the first display is a timer display, and the timer display is a display for notifying the certain timing, and according to a lapse of time. A game console characterized in that the certain effect is started when at least a part of the display mode of the timer display changes and at least a part of the display mode of the timer display changes.

  (Supplementary Note A92) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes A89 to A91, wherein the certain effect may be started when the certain timing is reached, and the certain timing may be started. A game machine, wherein the certain effect may not be started when the game machine becomes a game machine.

  (Supplementary Note A93) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes A89 to A91, wherein the certain effect is always started when the certain timing is reached.

    (Supplementary Note A94) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes A89 to A93, wherein the first display is a display in which a moving display may be performed. A game console, wherein the display position of the first display changes. Here, the moving display may be always performed, or the moving display may or may not be performed.

  (Supplementary Note A95) The gaming table according to Supplementary Note A94, wherein at least a part of the display mode of the first display may change as time passes. A moving table may be displayed after the display is displayed and before the display mode of at least a part of the first display is changed.

  (Supplementary Note A96) The gaming table according to Supplementary Note A94, wherein at least a part of the display mode of the first display may change with time. A moving table may be displayed during a change in the display mode of at least a part of the display of the game table.

  (Supplementary Note A97) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes A89 to A96, wherein the first display is always displayed when the second display is displayed. Stand.

  (Supplementary Note A98) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes A89 to A96, wherein when the second display is displayed, the first display may be displayed. A gaming table.

  (Supplementary Note A99) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes A89 to A98, wherein the second display is a display in preparation, and the display of the plurality of brothers is a plurality of display. One of the plurality of preparing displays is a first preparing display, and one of the plurality of preparing displays is a second preparing display. A gaming table, wherein the first preparation display is a display displayed earlier than the second preparation display.

  (Supplementary Note A100) The gaming table according to Supplementary Note A99, wherein after the first preparation display is displayed, a timer display corresponding to the first preparation display (hereinafter, “first timer display”) Is displayed, and after the second preparation display is displayed, a timer display corresponding to the second preparation display (hereinafter, referred to as “second timer display”) is displayed. A game console, wherein the first timer display is displayed prior to the second timer display. Here, one timer notice may be displayed for a plurality of preparation displays.

  (Supplementary Note A101) The gaming table according to Supplementary Note A99, wherein after the first preparation display is displayed, a timer display corresponding to the first preparation display (hereinafter, “first timer display”) Is displayed, and after the second preparation display is displayed, a timer display corresponding to the second preparation display (hereinafter, referred to as “second timer display”) is displayed. A game console, wherein the first timer display may be displayed earlier than the second timer display.

  (Supplementary Note A102) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes A89 to A101, wherein the gaming table is a pachinko machine.

  (Supplementary Note A103) The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes A89 to A101, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine.

  (Supplementary Note A104) A game console provided with display means, wherein the display means may display a first display, and the first display is a timing at which a certain effect is started. It is a display that informs that, according to the passage of time until the certain effect is started, at least a part of the display mode of the first display may change, the certain effect is Before at least a part of the display mode of the first display is changed according to the elapse of the time until the start, a notice may be given, and the notice may refer to the first display. A gaming machine, which is a notice that gives notice that at least a part of the display mode will start to change.

  (Supplementary Note A105) The gaming table according to Supplementary Note A104, wherein the first display is a period display, and the period display may start the certain effect in a certain period. This is a display for notifying a timing (hereinafter, referred to as “certain timing”), and that a timing at which the certain effect is started is notified during a change in a display mode of at least a part of the period display. A gaming table that features.

  (Supplementary Note A106) The gaming table according to Supplementary Note A105, wherein the period display is a display in which a B-th display may be displayed, and when the certain effect is started at the certain timing, A gaming table, wherein the B-th display is displayed.

  (Supplementary Note A107) The gaming table according to Supplementary Note A104, wherein the first display is a timer display, and the timer display indicates a timing at which the certain effect is started (hereinafter, “a certain timing”). ). The gaming machine is characterized in that the certain effect is started when at least a part of the display mode of the timer display is changed.

  (Supplementary Note A108) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes A104 to A107, wherein the certain effect may be started when the certain timing comes, and the certain timing may be started. A game machine, wherein the certain effect may not be started when the game is performed.

  (Supplementary note A109) The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes A104 to A107, wherein the certain effect is always started when the certain timing is reached.

  (Supplementary Note A110) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes A104 to A109, wherein the display unit is a unit that may display a second display, and the second display is the first display. A game console, which is a display for giving a notice that the display of (1) will be displayed.

  (Supplementary Note A111) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes A104 to A110, wherein the first display is a display in which a moving display may be performed. A game console, wherein the display position of the first display changes. Here, the moving display may be always performed, or the moving display may or may not be performed.

  (Supplementary Note A112) The gaming table according to Supplementary Note A111, wherein the movement is performed after the first display is displayed and before the display mode of at least a part of the first display is changed. A game console, which may be displayed.

  (Supplementary note A113) The gaming table according to supplementary note A111, wherein the moving display may be performed during a change in at least a part of the display mode of the first display.

    (Supplementary Note A114) The game console according to any one of Supplementary Notes A104 to A113, wherein the notice is a notice display by the first display.

  (Supplementary Note A115) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes 104 to A114, wherein at least a part of the first display is displayed in accordance with a lapse of time until the certain effect is started. A false notice may be given before the change is made, and even if the false notice is given, the change of the display mode of at least a part of the first display is not started. Stand.

  (Supplementary Note A116) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes 104 to A115, wherein at least a part of the first display is displayed in accordance with a lapse of time until the certain effect is started. A game console configured to give a notice before a change is made.

  (Supplementary Note A117) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes A104 to A116, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko machine.

  (Supplementary Note A118) The gaming table according to any one of supplementary notes A104 to A116, wherein the gaming table is a slot machine.

  (Supplementary Note A119) A gaming machine provided with an effect means capable of executing a timer effect, wherein the timer effect is a display indicating a certain time after the timer display is started. (Hereinafter referred to as "a certain effect"), and at least a part of the timer effect is performed during execution of the big hit game. A gaming table characterized by the following.

  (Supplementary Note A120) The gaming table according to Supplementary Note A119, wherein the big hit game is constituted by a plurality of round games, and the timer effect is an effect that may be executed in one round game. A gaming table characterized by the following.

  (Supplementary Note A121) The gaming table according to Supplementary Note A119, wherein the big hit game is configured by a plurality of round games, and the timer effect may be performed over two or more round games. A game console characterized by an effect.

  (Supplementary Note A122) The gaming table according to Supplementary Note A120 or A121, wherein the timer display is a display configured to indicate the certain time by displaying the initial value and then subtracting the initial value from the initial value. The display indicating the certain time is a display indicating the time when the timer display becomes 0, and the timer display in a certain timer effect (hereinafter, referred to as “first timer effect”) is the initial value. It indicates the first time as a value, the first timer effect may be executed over a first number of round games, the first timer effect may be a second time May be executed over a round game, the second number is a number greater than the first number, the first number is one or more times, A gaming table.

  (Supplementary Note A123) The gaming table according to Supplementary Note A120 or A121, wherein one round game is configured to end when a first time has elapsed, and the timer display indicates an initial value. Is a display configured to indicate the certain time by being subtracted from the initial value after the display, and the display indicating the certain time is a display indicating a time when the timer display becomes 0, A game console, wherein a second time may be displayed as an initial value, wherein the second time is shorter than the first time.

(Supplementary Note A124) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes A119 to A123, wherein the certain effect is started without displaying the timer display (hereinafter, “first case”). ) Is an effect, and the certain effect is an effect in which the timer display is started as a display indicating a certain time (hereinafter, referred to as a “second case”). The certain effect in the first case is an effect performed in the first mode (hereinafter, referred to as a “first effect”), and the certain effect in the second case is a second effect. (Hereinafter, referred to as “second effect”), wherein the first aspect and the second aspect are different aspects.
A gaming table characterized by the following.

  (Supplementary Note A125) The gaming table according to Supplementary Note A124, wherein the timing at which the second effect can be started is more likely to be earlier than the timing at which the first effect can be started, A gaming table characterized by the following.

  (Supplementary Note A126) The gaming table according to Supplementary Note A124 or A125, wherein the first effect may be executed as the certain effect in the second case, and the second effect may be performed in the second case. A gaming table, wherein a timing at which one effect is executed is different from a timing at which the second effect is executed.

  (Supplementary note A127) The gaming table according to Supplementary notes A119 to A126, wherein the certain effect is a confirmed effect for notifying that a benefit that is advantageous to the player is provided.

  (Supplementary Note A128) The gaming table according to Supplementary Note A127, in which any one of Supplementary Notes A124 to A126 is cited, wherein the confirmed effect includes a symbol change display that becomes a big hit in the hold. It is an effect, and if the number of symbol variation display that becomes a big hit included in the hold is one, so that there is a case where one of the first effect and the second effect is executed In the case where the number of the symbol change display that is a big hit included in the hold is two or more, it may be that both the first effect and the second effect are executed. A gaming table, characterized in that:

  (Supplementary Note A129) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes A124 to A126, wherein the certain effect is an effect indicating that there is a possibility that a benefit advantageous to a player may be provided, It is configured that the advantage of the second effect is more likely to be given to the player than the first effect, and the first effect is given the advantage of the player. There is a case where the first effect is not a confirmed effect (hereinafter, referred to as a “second case”). ), The second effect is a confirmed effect that informs that a benefit advantageous to the player is given, and the second case is more effective than the first case in the second effect. A gaming table characterized in that the effect is easily executed.

  (Supplementary Note A130) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes A119 to A129, wherein the timer display is displayed during execution of a symbol variation display performed before the start of the big hit game, and A game console characterized in that the timer display may be a display indicating the certain time during execution.

  (Supplementary Note A131) The gaming table according to Supplementary Note A130, wherein the timer effect is configured to be executed in one symbol change display (hereinafter, referred to as a “third case”). The gaming table, wherein the certain effect in the third case is a notice effect relating to the symbol change display being executed.

  (Supplementary Note A132) The gaming table according to Supplementary Note A119, wherein the timer display is displayed during the execution of the big hit game, and the timer display is displayed during the execution of the symbol variation display performed after the big hit game is completed. A gaming table, which is configured to be able to display a time indicating a game time.

  (Supplementary Note A133) The gaming table according to Supplementary Note A132, wherein the timer display is configured to start a display change to indicate the certain time when a certain condition regarding a game is achieved. The symbol change display executed after the big hit game is completed in accordance with the timing at which the certain condition is achieved, the symbol change display may be displayed to indicate the certain time, A game console characterized in that a display indicating the certain time may be displayed during execution of the big hit game in accordance with a timing at which a certain condition is achieved.

  (Supplementary Note A134) The gaming table according to Supplementary Note A119, A132, or A133, wherein, as the certain effect, an effect indicating a game state after the end of the big hit game (hereinafter, referred to as an “eleventh effect”). ) May be executed, and as the certain effect, an effect that informs that a symbol change display that will be a big hit in the hold (hereinafter, referred to as a “twelfth effect”) is executed. May be performed, the certain effect is configured to be executed even if the timer display does not indicate the certain time, the timer is executed during the execution of the big hit game A game console, wherein when the display does not show the certain time, the eleventh effect is more easily executed than the twelfth effect.

  (Supplementary Note A135) A gaming machine provided with an effect means capable of executing a timer effect, wherein the timer effect is a display indicating a certain time after the timer display is started. (Hereinafter referred to as "a certain effect"), and at least a part of the timer effect may be performed during execution of the big hit game. And an effect (hereinafter, referred to as a “fourth effect”) indicating that a benefit advantageous to the player is provided during execution of the big hit game is configured to be executed, The gaming table, wherein the fourth effect is an effect that may be executed when the certain effect is executed at least once or more.

(Supplementary Note A136) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes A119 to A135, wherein the effect unit is a display unit.
A gaming table characterized by the following.

  (Supplementary Note A137) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes A119 to A136, wherein the gaming table is a pachinko machine.

  (Supplementary Note A138) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes A119 to A137, wherein the certain time is a time when the remaining time of the timer indicates 0. .

  (Supplementary Note A139) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes A119 to A138, wherein the certain effect is an effect that can be executed even during an interval during execution of the big hit game. Stand.

  (Supplementary Note A140) A gaming machine provided with an effect means capable of executing a timer effect, wherein the timer effect is a display indicating a certain time after the timer display is started. (Hereinafter referred to as "a certain effect"), and a timer effect is performed at least during the execution of the symbol variation display, and after the symbol variation display ends, a new effect is created. A gaming console, wherein the certain effect may be performed during a period in which no symbol change display is performed.

  (Supplementary Note A141) A game console including a display unit, an operation unit, and a display unit, wherein the display unit is a unit that may display an operation display, and the operation display is a display of a display related to the operation unit. That is, the display means is a means in which a timer display may be displayed, the timer display is a display that gives advance notice of the timing at which the operation display is displayed, and the timer display is This is a display in which at least a part of the timer display changes according to the elapse of time until the operation display is displayed, and the operation display may be displayed after the timer display is displayed. , A gaming table characterized by that.

  (Supplementary Note A142) The gaming table according to Supplementary Note A141, wherein a first timer display may be displayed as the timer display.

  Since the change of the display of at least a part of the first timer display is started, when the first time elapses as a certain time, the operation display of the first display mode may be displayed, As the timer display, a second timer display may be displayed, and after at least a part of the display change of the second timer display is started, when a second time elapses as a certain time, the second timer display is displayed. A gaming table, wherein the operation display in the second display mode may be displayed, and the second time is longer than the first time.

  (Supplementary Note A143) The gaming table according to Supplementary Note A141 or A142, further including a second operation unit, wherein the operation unit is a first operation unit, and the operation display is a first operation unit. It is an operation display, the display means is a display in which a second operation display may be displayed, and the second operation display is a display related to the second operation means, A game console wherein the second operation display may be displayed if a certain time elapses before the operation display is displayed while the timer display is being displayed.

  (Supplementary Note A144) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes A141 to A143, wherein a display mode of the timer display changes when the operation unit is operated while the timer display is being displayed. There is a gaming table.

  (Supplementary Note A145) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes A141 to A144, wherein a display mode is changed according to a lapse of a certain time until the operation display is displayed by the timer display. The display mode of the timer display may be changed when the game is being played.

  (Supplementary Note A146) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes A141 to A145, wherein the display unit is a unit that may display an advance notice, and the advance notice is the timer advance notice. A game console, which is a display for giving notice of being displayed.

  (Supplementary Note A147) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes A141 to A146, wherein whether the big hit symbol mode is finally displayed or the lost symbol mode is finally displayed is determined by the symbol type. It is configured to be determined by a big hit determination performed at the start of the change, the result of the big hit determination does not change depending on the display mode of the operation display, and the big hit determination is performed by a start provided on the game board. It is configured to be determined in accordance with the result of a jackpot lottery using a random number obtained when a game ball enters the mouth, and the probability of being determined as a jackpot in the jackpot lottery (hereinafter, “jackpot probability”) ) Is predetermined, and the jackpot probability does not change depending on the display mode of the operation display.

  (Supplementary Note B1) A gaming table including operating means provided at a position operable by a player and effecting means capable of executing a plurality of effects, wherein the operating means is in a plurality of states. Is possible means, one state of the plurality of states is a first state, one state of the plurality of states is a second state, the plurality of effects of One of the effects is a first effect, one of the effects is a second effect, and one of the effects is a third effect. Yes, the first effect is an effect that prompts the operation of the operating means in the first state, the second effect is an operation response effect of the operating means in the first effect, the The second effect is not an effect that prompts the operation of the operation means, but the third effect is the first effect. The third effect is an effect that urges the operation of the operating means in the second state, a certain effect is an effect having a plurality of patterns, One of the plurality of patterns is a first pattern, one of the plurality of patterns is a second pattern, and the first pattern is the first effect. A pattern including that the second effect is started after being started, and the second pattern is that the third effect is started after the first effect is started. A large hit symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed when the certain effect according to the second pattern is executed than when the certain effect according to the first pattern is executed. A gaming table characterized by the following.

  (Supplementary Note B2) The gaming table according to Supplementary Note B1, wherein one of the plurality of effects is a fourth effect, and the fourth effect is the operation means in the third effect. The fourth effect is an effect that may be started after the second effect is executed, and the fourth effect is a running effect. A game console, which is a suggestive effect regarding whether or not a symbol variation display is appropriate.

  (Supplementary note B3) The gaming table according to supplementary note B1 or B2, wherein the first pattern is the second pattern even when the operation unit is not operated during execution of the first effect. Wherein the third effect is not started when the operation means is not operated during execution of the first effect in the second pattern.

  (Supplementary Note B4) The gaming table according to Supplementary Note B3, wherein the second effect is started when the operation unit is not operated during execution of the first effect in the second pattern. A gaming table characterized by the following.

  (Supplementary Note B5) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes B1 to B4, wherein one of the plurality of effects is a fifth effect, and one of the plurality of patterns is an effect. The pattern is a third pattern, the third pattern is a pattern including that the third effect is started after the fifth effect is started, the fifth effect is A game console that prompts the operation of the operating means in the second state, wherein the fifth effect mode and the third effect mode are different modes.

  (Supplementary Note B6) The gaming table according to Supplementary Note B5, wherein the third effect includes an effect in which a display imitating the operation means (hereinafter, referred to as “third display”) is displayed. The fifth effect includes an effect in which a display imitating the operation means (hereinafter, referred to as a “fifth display”) is displayed, and the third display and the fifth display include the fifth display. A game console characterized by a larger display.

  (Supplementary Note B7) The gaming table according to supplementary note B5 or B6, wherein the third effect is an effect in which a display imitating the operation means (hereinafter, referred to as a “thirteenth display”) is displayed. The fifth effect includes an effect in which a display imitating the operation means (hereinafter, referred to as a “fifteenth display”) is displayed, and the thirteenth display and the thirteenth display are included. Is displayed in a thirteenth color, and at least one of the fifteenth display and the effect display surrounding the fifteenth display is a fifteenth color. A game console displayed in color, wherein the thirteenth color and the fifteenth color are different colors.

  (Supplementary Note B8) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes B1 to B7, wherein one of the plurality of patterns is a fourth pattern, and the fourth pattern is the fourth pattern. In the second pattern, the effect is not started at the timing when the first effect is started, and the fourth pattern is the third pattern at the time when the third effect is started in the second pattern. A game console characterized by a pattern in which the production of the game is started.

  (Supplementary Note B9) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes B1 to B7, wherein one of the plurality of patterns is a fourth pattern, and the fourth pattern is the fourth pattern. A pattern including a pattern in which a sixth effect is started after one effect is started, wherein the sixth effect is an operation response effect of the operation means in the first effect; Is an effect of selecting whether the third effect is started or the sixth effect is started as an effect after the first effect is executed, Stand.

(Supplementary Note B10) The gaming table according to Supplementary Note B9, wherein the sixth effect is an effect that prompts an operation of the operation unit in the first state.
A gaming table characterized by the following.

  (Supplementary Note B11) The gaming table according to Supplementary Note B9 or B10, wherein, when the operating means is not operated in the first effect, the sixth effect is performed after the first effect is completed. A gaming table to be started

  (Supplementary Note B12) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes B1 to B11, wherein the effect means indicates that the effect that encourages operation of the operation means is stocked. The stock effect is an effect capable of stocking an effect that prompts one or more operations of the operating means, and the stock effect is an operation of the operating means. Is an effect in which the stock is reduced in relation to the execution of the effect of prompting, and the first pattern is a pattern in which one stock is reduced in the stock effect,

  The gaming table, wherein the second pattern is a pattern in which one stock is reduced in the stock effect.

  (Supplementary Note B13) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes B1 to B12, wherein, when the operation means is not operated in the first effect, after the first effect is completed, A game console, wherein a second effect is started.

  (Supplementary Note B14) A gaming table including a plurality of operation means provided at positions operable by a player and a production means capable of executing a plurality of productions, wherein one of the plurality of productions is provided. The effect is a first effect, one effect of the plurality of effects is a second effect, one effect of the plurality of effects is a third effect, One effect is an effect prompting the operation of the first operation means, the second effect is an operation response effect of the first operation means in the first effect, and the second effect Is not an effect prompting the operation of the first operating means, the third effect is an operation response effect of the first operating means in the first effect, the third effect is the The effect is to promote the operation of the second operation means, a certain effect is an effect having a plurality of patterns One of the plurality of patterns is a first pattern, one of the plurality of patterns is a second pattern, and the first pattern is the first effect. Is a pattern including that the second effect is started after is started, and the second pattern is that the third effect is started after the first effect is started It is a pattern including, when the certain effect by the second pattern is executed than when the certain effect by the first pattern is executed, the jackpot symbol is more likely to be confirmed and displayed, A gaming table characterized by the following.

  (Supplementary Note B14-1) A gaming table provided with a plurality of operation means provided at positions operable by a player and a production means capable of executing a plurality of productions, wherein One production is a first production, one production of the plurality of productions is a second production, one production of the plurality of productions is a third production, One operation means of the plurality of operation means is a first operation means, one operation means of the plurality of operation means is a second operation means, the first effect is The effect is to prompt the operation of the first operating means, the second effect is an operation response effect of the first operating means in the first effect, the second effect is the second effect An effect that does not include an effect that prompts the operation of one operating means, and the third effect is the effect in the first effect. It is an operation response effect of the first operating means, the third effect is an effect for prompting the operation of the second operating means, the second effect after the execution of the first effect is started In the case where the execution of the third effect is started after the execution of the first effect is started, the big hit symbol mode is finally determined and displayed, compared with the case where the execution of the effect is started. A gaming table characterized by being easily played.

  (Supplementary Note B15) A gaming table provided with a display means, wherein the display means is a means capable of displaying an icon (hereinafter, referred to as a "variable icon") relating to a symbol change display being executed. The variable icon can be displayed in a first display area of the display area of the display means, and the display means displays the two variable icons (hereinafter, referred to as “two variable icons”). A displayable means, wherein one of the two change icons is a first change icon, one of the two change icons is a second change icon, and the second change icon is Wherein the change icon is displayed in a display area different from the first display area.

  (Supplementary Note B16) The gaming table according to Supplementary Note B15, wherein a moving animation of the second moving icon (hereinafter, referred to as “second moving animation”) is displayed during a display period of the first moving icon. A gaming table characterized by the following.

  (Supplementary Note B17) The gaming table according to Supplementary Note B16, wherein the second change icon may be displayed in the first display area after the second movement animation. Stand.

  (Supplementary Note B18) The gaming table according to Supplementary Note B16 or B17, wherein the size of the second variable icon displayed in the first display area after the second moving animation is the size of the moving animation. A game console having a size different from the size of the second variable icon in at least a part of the period.

  (Supplementary Note B19) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes B16 to B18, wherein the second change icon is the first change icon during at least a part of a period of the second movement animation. A gaming table, which may overlap with the game table.

  (Supplementary Note B20) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes B16 to B19, wherein the second change icon may overlap with a preview display during at least a part of a period of the second movement animation. A gaming table characterized by the following.

  (Supplementary Note B21) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes B16 to B20, wherein the second change icon is the first change icon during at least a part of a period of the second movement animation. A game console that overlaps the notice display.

  (Supplementary Note B22) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes B16 to B21, wherein only one decorative symbol variation display is displayed in at least a part of a period of the second movement animation. A gaming table characterized by the following.

  (Supplementary Note B23) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes B16 to B22, wherein only one mini-decorative symbol variation display is displayed in at least a part of the period of the second movement animation. A gaming table characterized by the following.

  (Supplementary Note B24) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes B16 to B23, wherein the decorative symbol change display and the mini-decorative symbol change display are performed in at least a part of the period of the second movement animation. A game console characterized in that only one of them is displayed.

  (Supplementary Note B25) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes B15 to B24, in which a moving animation of the first fluctuating icon (hereinafter, referred to as “first moving animation”) may be displayed. A gaming table characterized by the following.

  (Supplementary Note B26) The gaming table according to Supplementary Note B25, which quotes any one of Supplementary Notes B16 to B24, wherein the second moving animation may be started after the first moving animation is started. A gaming table characterized by the following.

  (Supplementary Note B27) The gaming table according to Supplementary Note B25 or B26, in which any one of Supplementary Notes B16 to B24 is cited, wherein the display unit can display a first display indicating a first big hit expectation degree. A moving display of the first display is performed during at least a part of a period of the first moving animation, and the display means displays a second display indicating a second big hit expectation degree. A possible game console, wherein the moving display of the second display is performed during at least a part of the period of the second moving animation.

  (Supplementary Note B28) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes B25 to B27, in which any one of Supplementary Notes B16 to B24 is cited, wherein the gaming table is provided in at least a part of a period of the first moving animation. A game console, wherein the display of the hold icon is performed, and the display of the hold icon is performed during at least a part of the period of the second movement animation.

  (Supplementary Note B29) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes B25 to B28, wherein the first variable icon is displayed in a display area different from the first display area after the start of the first movement animation. A gaming table, which may be displayed.

  (Supplementary Note B30) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes B15 to B29, wherein the variable icon is displayed in the first display area during at least a part of a display period of the two variable icons. A gaming table characterized by not being performed.

  (Supplementary Note B31) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes B15 to B30, wherein the number of the fluctuating icons increases from one to two and then decreases to one during the period of one decorative symbol fluctuating display. There is a gaming table.

  (Supplementary Note B32) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes B15 to B31, wherein during the period of one decorative symbol variable display, the number of the variable icons increases from one to two, and then decreases to one, A gaming table, characterized in that after the decrease, it may increase to 2 and then decrease to 1.

  (Supplementary Note B33) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes B15 to B32, wherein the display unit is a unit capable of displaying a hold icon, and the display unit displays the hold icon during a display period of the two variable icons. A gaming table, wherein the number is larger than the number of the holding icons before displaying the two variable icons.

  (Supplementary Note B34) The gaming table according to any one of Supplementary Notes B15 to B33, wherein the display unit is a unit capable of displaying a numeric hold display, and the number of holds indicated by the numeric hold display is 2 A gaming table, wherein the number of the icons is less than the number of the holding icons during the display period of the two variable icons.

<Operation display>
Next, a specific example of the operation effect display (hereinafter, may be referred to as “button effect”) executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described.

<Operation effect display / Example 1-1>
FIG. 175 (a) is a diagram illustrating, in chronological order, operation effect displays according to Example 1-1. In the present example, a description will be given of an example of an effect in which a button effect is performed in the display area of the reduced display during the reduced display of the background display, and an operation by the operation unit is received during the button effect.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 175 (a) (1), the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2” is stopped as the first decoration symbol at the center of the display area of the decoration symbol display device 208. Is displayed. Behind this combination of decorative symbols, a clear-sky background image bg composed of images of the sun, clouds, and the like has a first size (in this example, the same size as the maximum display area of the decorative symbol display device 208). Is displayed.

  The type of the background image during the various effects is not limited to this example, and may be, for example, a default background image (shore background image) as shown in FIG. Various background images different from the image (for example, a background image of a cloudy sky, a background image at night, a background image according to a mode, and the like) may be used.

  Also, the second reserved number display SP is displayed at the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the second decorative symbol SS is displayed at the upper left corner. The second decorative symbol SS is also stopped and displayed at the numeral combination “232” corresponding to the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2” in accordance with the stop display of the first decoration symbol. At the timings shown in FIGS. 175 (a) and (1), since the symbols are stopped and displayed, the fluctuating icon ho is not displayed, but the fluctuating icon display area he where the fluctuating icon ho is displayed is partitioned by a broken line. It is expressed as

  Further, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 175 (a) (1) is a special figure low probability general figure low probability state. In the decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric support state, the hold icon of the special figure 1 is displayed on the second UI unit 281. Note that a reserved icon display area of the special figure 2 may be provided in a predetermined area (for example, the right end of the display area) of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric support state.

  In FIG. 175 (a) (1), four reserved icons h11 to h14 of the special figure 1 are displayed in the second UI unit 281. In this example, the hold icons h13 and h14 of Toku-zu 1 are both in the default display mode (circular blank pattern and white display mode), and the hold icon h12 of Toku-zu 1 is the default display mode. Is a different second display mode (circular stripe pattern and blue display mode), and the hold icon h11 in Tokuju 1 is a third display mode (round hatched pattern) different from the default display mode. And a yellow display mode). In the second UI unit 281, the holding icons h11 to h14 are displayed side by side, and the holding icon on the right side is the holding icon with the older winning. On the other hand, nothing is displayed on the first UI unit 280 formed on the lower right side of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 175 (a) (2) shows a state in which the second reserved number display SP is updated from 4 to 3, and the variable display of the second decorative symbol SS is started. Note that the update display of the second reserved number display SP and the start of the variable display of the second decorative symbol SS may be performed simultaneously, or the second decoration may be performed after the updated display of the second reserved number display SP is performed. The variable display of the symbol SS may be started, or the update display of the second reserved number display SP may be performed after the variable display of the second decorative symbol SS starts.

  Also, in FIGS. 9A and 9B, the hold icon, which was the first hold icon h11 before the start of the change, reaches the pedestal hso of the change icon and is displayed as the change icon ho. The hold icons that were the second to fourth hold icons h12 to h14 reach the display positions of the first to third hold icons h11 to h13, are displayed as the first hold icons h11 to h13, and thereafter, The variable display of the first decorative symbol is started.

  Here, various displays that can be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 include “first display” in which the size of the display area can be enlarged and reduced, and “second display” in which the size of the display area does not change. ,are categorized. In this example, the fine weather background image bg, the fluctuation icon ho, the pedestal hso of the fluctuation icon, the hold icons h11 to h14, and the like correspond to an example of the “first display”, and the second decorative pattern SS and the second hold number display The SP, the change icon display area he, and the like correspond to an example of “second display”. The images, display areas, character strings, icons, and the like included in the “first display” in which the size of the display area can be enlarged or reduced are not limited to this example. A hold number display SP, a change icon display area he, and the like may be included.

  In the subsequent periods shown in FIGS. 175 (a) (3) to (a) (5), the first display (in this example, the background image bg of fine weather, the change icon ho, the pedestal hso of the change icon, the hold icon The display including h11 to h14 (hereinafter, may be referred to as "background display") is gradually reduced. In addition, at the timings shown in FIGS. 3A and 3B, a frame display wp surrounding at least a part of the background display (in this example, all the surroundings) is displayed while the background display is continuously reduced. At the timings shown in FIGS. 9A and 9B, the reduction of the background display is completed, and the background display of the second size smaller than the first size (the size of the entire display area of the decorative symbol display device 208) is performed. (Hereinafter, also referred to as “reduced background display”).

  In this example, the first size is the size of the entire display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the second size is the size of the reduced background display shown in FIGS. 175 (a) and (5). However, the “first size” and the “second size” according to the present invention are not limited to this example, and the second size may be smaller than the first size. Therefore, for example, the first size is the size of the reduced background display shown in FIGS. 175 (a) and (3), and the second size is the size of the reduced background display shown in FIGS. 175 (a) and (4). It may be good.

  At the subsequent timings shown in FIGS. 175 (a) and (6), during the display of the reduced background display, the button effect (operation effect display) be is started in the display area of the reduced background display. As described above, if the image and the character string constituting the button effect be configured to overlap the reduced background display, the button effect be can attract the player's attention and the interest of the game can be enhanced. May be possible.

  Here, the button effect be of the present example is an operation prompting display for prompting the operation of a certain operation means (for example, the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 1) (display of a button image imitating the appearance of the chance button 136 in this example). , "PUSH" or "press!", Display of an image of a downward arrow), and a meter display indicating an operation valid period during which an operation by a certain operation means is valid. In the button effect be, a character string “press!” And an image of a downward arrow perform a change animation in which the image moves up and down as the operation valid period elapses. The display mode of the change animation is not limited to this example, and may be, for example, an animation in which only the button moves up and down, or an animation in which only the downward arrow moves up and down.

  At the subsequent timings shown in FIGS. 175 (a) and (8), an operation by a certain operation means (chance button 136) is performed while the button effect be is being displayed, and at the subsequent timings shown in FIGS. Based on the operation performed, the result display kp (display of the image of the family crest in this example) corresponding to the operation is displayed in the display area of the reduced background display so as to overlap the variable icon ho. ing. In this example, a part of the result display kp is configured to overlap with the change icon ho. As described above, if at least a part of the result display kp is configured to overlap the change icon ho, the player's attention is focused on the result display kp and the change icon ho overlapped with the result display kp. May be able to enhance the interest of the game.

  In the subsequent periods shown in FIGS. 175 (a) and (10) to FIGS. 175 (a) and (13), the size of the reduced background display is increased step by step when the display of the result display kp is deleted. At the timings shown in FIGS. 13A and 13B, the frame display wp is erased, the enlargement of the reduced background display is ended, and the background display is returned to the original size (the entire display area of the decorative symbol display device 208). (Size) to the background display. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIGS. 175 (a) and (14), the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 4-decoration 5-decoration 5” is stopped and displayed as a result of the success or failure of the variable game. .

<Operation effect display / Example 1-2>
FIG. 175 (b) is a diagram illustrating, in chronological order, operation effect displays according to Example 1-2. In this example, a description will be given of an example of an effect in the case where a button effect is performed in the display area of the reduced display during the reduced display of the background display, and no operation by the operation unit is received during the button effect.

  The effects shown in FIGS. 175 (b) (1) to (b) (8) and FIGS. 175 (b) (16) to (b) (16) are the same as those described in the above <Operation effect display / Example). 1-1> described in FIGS. 175 (a) (1) to (a) (8), and (a) (13) to (a) (14) described above. In the drawings, the same reference numerals are given, and the description is omitted.

  In the period shown in FIGS. 175 (b) (6) to (b) (10), the button effect be is displayed. However, the player operates with a certain operation means (in this example, the chance button 136). Since the operation is not performed, a decrease display is performed to gradually reduce the scale of the meter display indicating the operation valid period.

  In the subsequent periods shown in FIGS. 175 (b) (11) to (b) (13), the button is activated when the remaining time of the operation effective period becomes a certain time or less (for example, 2 seconds or less). The effect be and the size of the reduced background display are gradually increased, and at the timings shown in FIGS. 13B and 13B, the frame display wp is deleted, and the enlargement of the button effect be and the reduced background display ends. While the background display is returned to the original background display of the first size (the size of the entire display area of the decorative design display device 208), the size of the button effect be is enlarged.

  At the subsequent timings shown in FIGS. 176 (b) and (14), the button effect be is erased and the result display kp (display of a family crest image in this example) is displayed when the operation valid period has elapsed. At the subsequent timings shown in FIGS. 15B and 15, the result display kp (display of the family crest image) is deleted. In this example, a part of the result display kp is configured to overlap with the variable icon ho and a part of the first decorative symbol. As described above, if at least a part of the result display kp is configured to overlap with the fluctuating icon ho or the decorative design display, the result display kp, the fluctuating icon ho overlapping the result display kp, or the first In some cases, the decorative pattern can attract the player's attention, and can enhance the interest of the game.

  In the present example, the expansion of the reduced background display was started when the remaining time of the operation valid period became a certain time or less. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The expansion of the reduced background display may be started when a certain time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed, or when the operation validity period ends (the remaining time becomes 0 seconds). Alternatively, the expansion of the reduced background display may be started.

<Operation effect display / Example 2-1>
FIG. 176 (a) is a diagram illustrating, in chronological order, operation effect displays according to Example 2-1. In this example, a description will be given of an example of an effect in which a button effect is performed outside the display area of the reduced display during the reduced display of the background display, and an operation by the operation unit is received during the button effect.

  The effects shown in FIGS. 176 (a) (1) to (a) (5) and FIGS. (A) (10) to (a) (14) are the same as those described in the above <Operation effect display / Example> 1-1> described in FIGS. 175 (a) (1) to (a) (5) and FIGS. (A) (10) to (a) (14). In the drawings, the same reference numerals are given, and the description is omitted.

  At the timings shown in FIGS. 176 (a) and (6), during the display of the reduced background display, the button effect (operation effect display) be is started outside the display region of the reduced background display. In this way, if the images and character strings constituting the button effect be are configured not to overlap with the reduced background display, the visibility of the background display can be improved and an unexpected effect can be performed. May be possible.

  In addition, at the timings shown in FIGS. 176 (a) and (8), an operation by a certain operation means (in this example, the chance button 136) is performed while the button effect be is being displayed, and the subsequent FIGS. At the timing shown in (), based on the operation performed, the result display kp (in this example, the display of the image of the family crest in this example) corresponding to the operation extends over the display area of the reduced background display and outside the display area. ) Is displayed. In the present example, a part of the result display kp is configured to overlap most of the display area of the reduced background display. As described above, if at least a part of the result display kp is configured to overlap most of the display area of the reduced background display, the result display kp can attract the player's attention and enhance the interest of the game. May be able to.

<Operation effect display / Example 2-2>
FIG. 176 (b) is a diagram illustrating, in chronological order, operation effect displays according to Example 2-2. In this example, a description will be given of an example of an effect in which a button effect is performed outside the display area of the reduced display during the reduced display of the background display, and no operation by the operation unit is received during the button effect.

  The effects shown in FIGS. 176 (b) (1) to (b) (8) correspond to FIGS. 176 (a) (1) to FIG. 176 described in the above <Operation effect display / Example 2-1>. (A) The effect shown in (8) is the same as the effect shown in FIGS. 176 (b) (14) to (b) (16). 175 (b) and (14) to (b) and (16) described in FIGS. 175 (b) and (16), the same reference numerals are given in the drawings, and description thereof will be omitted.

  In the period shown in FIGS. 176 (b) (6) to (b) (10), the button effect is displayed, but the player operates with a certain operation means (in this example, the chance button 136). Is not performed, so that the scale of the meter display indicating the operation validity period is gradually reduced so as to decrease the scale.

  In the subsequent periods shown in FIGS. 176 (b) (11) to (b) (13), when the remaining time of the operation validity period becomes a certain time or less (for example, 2 seconds or less), the contraction is performed. The size of the background display is gradually increased, and at the timings shown in FIGS. 13B and 13B, the frame display wp is erased, the expansion of the reduced background display is ended, and the background display is restored to the original first display. The display is returned to the background display of the size (the size of the entire display area of the decorative symbol display device 208).

  On the other hand, the images and character strings that make up the button effect do not expand or contract in size or move the position until the operation validity period elapses, and the fluctuation displayed on the reduced background display with the expansion of the reduced background display It is configured to overlap the icon ho. As described above, if at least a part of the image or the character string configuring the button effect be is configured to overlap the change icon ho, the button effect be or the change icon ho overlapped with the button effect be is set. In some cases, the player's attention can be attracted and the interest of the game can be increased.

<Operation effect display / Example 3-1>
FIG. 177 (a) is a diagram illustrating an operation effect display according to Example 3-1 in chronological order. In this example, a description will be given of an example of an effect in which a button effect is performed during the reduced display of the background display regardless of the reduced display, and an operation by the operation unit is received during the button effect.

  The effects shown in FIGS. 177 (a) (1) to (a) (5) and FIGS. (A) (9) to (a) (14) are the same as those described in the above <Operation effect display / Example). 2-1> are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 176 (a) (1) to (a) (5) and FIGS. (A) (9) to (a) (14) described in FIGS. In the drawings, the same reference numerals are given, and the description is omitted.

  During the periods shown in FIGS. 177 (a) (6) to (a) (8), during the display of the reduced background display, regardless of the reduced background display (in this example, the display area of the reduced background display is Button effect (operation effect display) be has begun. In this way, if the images and character strings constituting the button effect be are displayed irrespective of the reduced background display, the visibility of the button effect can be improved, and an unexpected effect can be performed. May be possible.

<Operation effect display / Example 3-2>
FIG. 177 (b) is a diagram illustrating, in chronological order, operation effect displays according to Example 3-2. In this example, a description will be given of an example of an effect in which a button effect is performed during the reduced display of the background display regardless of the reduced display, and an operation by the operation unit is not received during the button effect.

  The effects shown in FIGS. 177 (b) (1) to (b) (8) correspond to FIGS. 177 (a) (1) to FIG. 177 described in the above <Operation effect display / Example 3-1>. (A) It is the same as the effect shown in (8), and the effects shown in FIGS. 177 (b), (14) to (b), (16) are described in the above <Operation effect display / Example 1-2>. 175 (b) (14) to (b) (16) shown in FIGS. 175 (b) and (16), the same reference numerals are given in the drawings, and description thereof will be omitted.

  In the period shown in FIGS. 177 (b) (6) to (b) (10), the button effect is displayed, but the player operates with a certain operation means (in this example, the chance button 136). Is not performed, so that the scale of the meter display indicating the operation validity period is gradually reduced so as to decrease the scale.

  In the subsequent periods shown in FIGS. 176 (b) (11) to (b) (13), when the remaining time of the operation validity period becomes a certain time or less (for example, 2 seconds or less), the contraction is performed. The size of the background display is gradually increased, and at the timings shown in FIGS. 13B and 13B, the frame display wp is erased, the expansion of the reduced background display is ended, and the background display is restored to the original first display. The display is returned to the background display of the size (the size of the entire display area of the decorative symbol display device 208).

  On the other hand, the images and character strings that compose the button effect are not enlarged or reduced in size or moved until the operation effective period elapses, and are configured to always overlap the center of the reduced background display. I have. In this way, if at least a part of the image or the character string configuring the button effect be overlaps with the reduced background display, the visibility of the button effect can be improved, and the button effect is surprising. You may be able to produce a performance.

<Operation effect display / Example 4-1>
FIG. 178 (a) is a diagram illustrating an operation effect display according to Example 4-1 in chronological order. In this example, during the reduced display of the background display, a button effect (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as a “long press button effect”) that prompts a long press in the display area of the reduced display is performed, and the long press button effect is performed. A description will be given of an effect example in which a long press operation by the operation unit is received.

  The effects shown in FIGS. 178 (a) (1) to (a) (5) and FIGS. 178 (a) (15) to (a) (16) are the same as those described in the above <Operation effect display / Example> 1-1> described in FIGS. 175 (a) (1) to (a) (5) and FIGS. (A) (13) to (a) (14). In the drawings, the same reference numerals are given, and the description is omitted.

  At the timings shown in FIGS. 178 (a) and (6), while the reduced background display is being displayed, the long press button effect (operation effect display) ne is started in the display region of the reduced background display. As described above, if the image and the character string forming the long-press button effect ne are configured to overlap with the reduced background display, the long-press button effect ne can attract the player's attention, and the interest of the game can be enhanced. May be enhanced.

  Here, the long press button effect ne of the present example is an operation promotion display (this example) that prompts a long press operation (for example, an operation of pressing and holding for two seconds or more) of a certain operation means (for example, the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 1). (Display of a button image imitating the appearance of the chance button 136, display of a character string such as "PUSH" or "long press", display of an image of a downward arrow), and an operation in which an operation by a certain operation means is effective. It consists of a meter display that indicates the validity period. In the long press button effect ne, a change animation is performed in which a character string “long press” and an image of a downward arrow move up and down as the operation effective period elapses.

  In addition, at the timings shown in FIGS. 178 (a) and (8), when the long press operation by a certain operation means (chance button 136) is started during the display of the long press button effect ne, the “long” By moving the position of the character string “press” and the position of the image of the downward arrow downward, it indicates that a long press operation has been received. During the subsequent periods shown in FIGS. 178 (a) (9) to (a) (10), the player is performing a long-press operation with a certain operation means (chance button 136), and in the long-press button effect ne, A decrease display that gradually reduces the scale of the meter display indicating the operation validity period is performed.

  In the subsequent periods shown in FIGS. 178 (a) (11) to (a) (13), when the remaining time of the operation validity period becomes a certain time or less (for example, 2 seconds or less), a long time is set. The sizes of the push button effect ne and the reduced background display are enlarged stepwise, and at the timings shown in FIGS. 13A and 13B, the frame display wp is deleted, and the long press button effect ne and the reduced background display are enlarged. Is ended, the background display is returned to the original background display of the first size (the size of the entire display area of the decorative symbol display device 208), and the size of the long press button effect ne is enlarged.

  At the subsequent timings shown in FIGS. 178 (a) and (14), the long press button effect ne is erased and the result display kp (display of the family crest image in this example) is triggered by the elapse of the operation validity period. The result display kp (display of the image of the family crest) is deleted at the subsequent timing shown in FIGS.

<Operation effect display / Example 4-2>
FIG. 178 (b) is a diagram illustrating an operation effect display according to the example 4-2 in chronological order. In this example, while the background display is being reduced, a long-press button effect is performed in the display area of the reduced display, and a long-press operation by the operation unit is not received during the long-press button effect. Will be described.

  The effects shown in FIGS. 178 (b) (1) to (b) (7) and FIGS. (B) (14) to (b) (16) are the same as those described in the above <Operation effect display / Example). 4-2> described in FIGS. 178 (a) (1) to (a) (7) and FIGS. (A) (14) to (a) (16). In the drawings, the same reference numerals are given, and the description is omitted.

  During the periods shown in FIGS. 178 (b) (8) to (a) (9), the player is not performing a long-press operation with a certain operation means (in this example, the chance button 136), In the long press button effect ne, a decrease display is performed in which the scale of the meter display indicating the operation valid period is gradually reduced.

  In the subsequent periods shown in FIG. 178 (b) (11) to FIG. 178 (b) (13), when the remaining time of the operation valid period has become a certain time or less (for example, 2 seconds or less), a long time has elapsed. The sizes of the push button effect ne and the reduced background display are gradually increased, and at the timings shown in FIGS. 13B and 13C, the frame display wp is deleted, and the long press button effect ne and the reduced background display are enlarged. Is ended, the background display is returned to the original background display of the first size (the size of the entire display area of the decorative symbol display device 208), and the size of the long press button effect ne is enlarged.

<Operation effect display / Example 5-1>
FIG. 179 (a) is a diagram illustrating, in chronological order, operation effect displays according to Example 5-1. In this example, during the reduced display of the background display, a button effect is performed in the display area of the reduced display, and a button hold occurs during the button effect, and the button effect is exhausted by the first operation by the operation unit. A description will be given of an example of an effect in a case where the button hold is exhausted by the second operation by the operation means.

  The effects shown in FIGS. 179 (a) (1) to (a) (6) correspond to FIGS. 175 (a) (1) to FIG. 175 described in the above <Operation effect display / Example 1-1>. (A) Since it is the same as the effect shown in (6), the same reference numerals are given in the drawings, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  At the timings shown in FIGS. 179 (a) and (7), the button is suspended during the display of the reduced background display and the button effect be, so the second UI unit 281 of the reduced background display displays the first display mode (the book display). In the example, a button holding icon bi of a round image with the letters “PUSH”) is displayed.

  Here, the button hold means that the right to perform an operation by a certain operation means is temporarily held. In this example, during the period in which the operation by a certain operation unit is prompted by the button effect, the right to further perform the operation by a certain operation unit has been generated. Therefore, the right to perform the operation is temporarily suspended. At the same time, the occurrence of the hold (button hold) is notified by displaying the button hold icon bi.

  At the subsequent timings shown in FIGS. 179 (a) and (8), the first operation by a certain operation means (in this example, the chance button 136) is performed while the button effect be is being displayed. At the timing shown in (9), based on the fact that the operation has been performed, the result display kp (display of the image of the family crest in this example) corresponding to the operation is displayed in the display area of the reduced background display. I have.

  At the subsequent timings shown in FIGS. 179 (a) and (9), the second operation by a certain operation means (in this example, the chance button 136) is performed while the button hold icon bi is being displayed. In addition to gradually increasing the size of the reduced background display, a change animation for changing the display mode of the button hold icon bi to the second display mode (in this example, the character image of the palace) has started. Then, at the timings shown in FIGS. 13A and 13B, the frame display wp is erased, the enlargement of the reduced background display is ended, and the background display is returned to the original first size (all of the decorative design display device 208). The display is returned to the background display (the size of the display area), and the button hold icon bi changed to the character image of the palace is enlarged and displayed.

<Operation effect display / Example 5-2>
FIG. 179 (b) is a diagram illustrating an operation effect display according to the example 5-2 in chronological order. In this example, during the reduced display of the background display, a button effect is performed in the display area of the reduced display, and a button hold occurs during the button effect, and the button operation and the button effect are performed by the first operation by the operation unit. A description will be given of an example of an effect in the case where the suspension is simultaneously digested.

  The effects shown in FIGS. 179 (b) (1) to (b) (9) correspond to FIGS. 179 (a) (1) to FIG. 179 described in the above <Operation effect display / Example 5-1>. (A) Since it is the same as the effect shown in (9), the same reference numerals are given in the drawings, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  At the timings shown in FIGS. 179 (b) and (8), when the first operation by a certain operation means (in this example, the chance button 136) is performed while the button hold icon bi is being displayed, the following operation is performed. At the timings shown in FIGS. 9A and 9B, a result display kp (in this example, display of a family crest image) corresponding to the operation is displayed in the display area of the reduced background display (the button effect is digested). At the same time, a change animation for changing the display mode of the button hold icon bi to the second display mode (in this example, the character image of the palace) is started (button hold is being exhausted).

  In the subsequent periods shown in FIGS. 179 (b) (10) to (b) (13), the size of the reduced background display is increased stepwise, and at the timings shown in FIGS. The display wp is erased, the enlargement of the reduced background display is ended, the background display is returned to the original background display of the first size (the size of the entire display area of the decorative design display device 208), and the main character is displayed. The button hold icon bi changed to an image is enlarged and displayed.

<Operation effect display / Example 6-1>
FIG. 180A is a diagram illustrating the operation effect display according to the example 6-1 in chronological order. In this example, a description will be given of an effect example in which a striking suggestion display that is not enlarged or reduced is displayed in the operation effect display described in <Operation effect display / Example 1-1>.

  Note that, other than the hitting suggestion display, the effects are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 175 (a) (1) to (a) (14) described in the <operation effect display / Example 1-1>. The same reference numerals are given in the drawings, and description thereof will be omitted.

  Here, the hitting suggestion display refers to a display suggesting an operation method (hitting method) of a certain operation means (the ball firing handle 134 in this example). Hitting display (for example, a display including a character string of “right-handed”, a right-pointing arrow, etc.), a left-handed display that prompts the player to make a left-handed display (for example, a display including a character string of “left-handed”, a left-pointing arrow Etc.). In the present example, a hit suggestion display is realized by horizontally scrolling a telop including a character string of “right-stroke” and a right-pointing arrow at two positions above and below the decorative symbol display device 208.

  As described above, various displays that can be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 include “first display” in which the size of the display area can be enlarged and reduced, and “second display” in which the size of the display area does not change. In this example, in addition to the second decorative symbol SS, the second reserved number display SP, the variable icon display area he, and the like, a hitting suggestion display is also included in the “second display”. .

  Therefore, the hitting suggestion display of this example is not enlarged or reduced without changing the size of the display area in all the periods of FIGS. 180 (a) (1) to (a) (14). . For this reason, the visibility of the hitting suggestion display may be improved in some cases.

  Further, in this example, the hitting suggestion display is displayed so as to overlap the second reserved number display SP, but is not displayed so as to overlap the second decorative symbol SS. For this reason, it is possible to perform a hitting suggestion display without impairing the visibility of information important to the player such as the second decorative symbol SS, and to provide necessary information to the player while securing the profit of the player. You may be able to.

<Operation effect display / Example 7-1>
FIG. 180 (b) is a diagram illustrating the operation effect display according to the example 7-1 in chronological order. In this example, a description will be given of an effect example in which a striking suggestion display that is enlarged or reduced is displayed in the operation effect display described in <Operation effect display / Example 1-1>.

  Note that, other than the hitting suggestion display, the effects are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 175 (a) (1) to (a) (14) described in the <operation effect display / Example 1-1>. The same reference numerals are given in the drawings, and description thereof will be omitted.

  As described above, various displays that can be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 include “first display” in which the size of the display area can be enlarged and reduced, and “second display” in which the size of the display area does not change. In this example, in addition to the fine weather background image bg, the change icon ho, the change icon pedestal hso, the hold icons h11 to h14, etc., the hitting suggestion display is also included in the “first display”. ing.

  Therefore, the hitting suggestion display of the present example is performed as a part of the background display (first display) in all the periods of FIGS. 180 (b) (1) to (b) (14). Or with the character string. For this reason, the player's attention may be able to be focused on the hitting suggestion display.

  Further, in this example, the first size hitting suggestion display (for example, the hitting suggestion display shown in FIG. 180 (b) (1)) is displayed while overlapping the second hold number display SP. Thus, the second decorative symbol SS is configured not to overlap and be displayed. For this reason, a hitting suggestion display can be performed without impairing the visibility of the second decorative symbol SS, and necessary information can be provided without impairing the profit of the player in some cases.

  Further, in this example, the hitting suggestion display of the second size smaller than the first size (for example, the hitting suggestion display shown in FIGS. 180 (b) and (3)) is overlapped with the clear sky background image bg. On the other hand, the variable icons ho, the hold icons h11 to h13, the button effect be, the result display kp, and the like are not overlapped and displayed. For this reason, a hitting suggestion display can be performed without impairing the visibility of the fluctuating icon ho, the hold icons h11 to h13, the button effect be, the result display kp, and the like. We may be able to provide necessary information.

<Operation effect display / Example 8>
FIGS. 181 (a) and (b) are diagrams illustrating the operation effect display according to the eighth embodiment in chronological order. In this example, an effect example in which an error display that is not enlarged or reduced is displayed in the operation effect display described in <Operation effect display / Example 1-1> will be described.

  Note that, except for the error display, the effects are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 175 (a) (1) to (a) (14) described in the above <Operation effect display / Example 1-1>. The same reference numerals are given and the description is omitted.

  Here, the error display refers to a display that notifies an error detected in the above-described device monitoring process or the like, and includes, for example, a front frame door opening error, a lower plate full error, a ball emptying error, a door opening error, and a ball opening error. Full tank error etc. correspond. In the example shown in FIG. 181 (a), a ball-stripping error display is realized by displaying a character string "Please pull out the ball". In the example shown in FIG. 181 (b), "the door is open" By displaying the character string, a door open error display is realized.

  As described above, various displays that can be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 include “first display” in which the size of the display area can be enlarged and reduced, and “second display” in which the size of the display area does not change. In this example, in addition to the second decorative symbol SS, the second reserved number display SP, the variable icon display area he, and the like, an error display is included in the “second display”.

  Therefore, the error display of this example is not enlarged or reduced without changing the size of the display area in all the periods shown in FIGS. 180 (a) and 180 (b). For this reason, the visibility of the error display can be improved, and various errors can be quickly dealt with.

  Further, in this example, the error display is displayed so as to overlap the first decorative symbol or the like, but is not overlapped with the second decorative symbol SS, the change icon ho, or the hold icons h11 to h13. I have. For this reason, an error display can be performed without impairing the visibility of information important to the player such as the second decorative symbol SS, the change icon ho, and the hold icons h11 to h13, while securing the profit of the player. In some cases, necessary information can be provided to a player.

  In this example, the error display is included in the “second display” in which the size of the display area does not change. However, the error display is included in the “first display” in which the size of the display area can be enlarged or reduced. The display size may be configured to be enlarged or reduced together with the background image bg or the like.

<Operation effect display / Example 9>
FIGS. 182 (a) and (b) are diagrams illustrating the operation effect display according to the ninth embodiment in chronological order. In this example, a description will be given of an example of an effect in which the minimum volume and the maximum volume of the output sound of the speaker 120 are displayed in the operation effect display described in the above <Operation effect display / Example 1-1>.

  Note that, except for the sound volume display, the effects are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 175 (a) (1) to (a) (14) described in <Operation Effect Display / Example 1-1> above. The same reference numerals are given and the description is omitted.

  Here, the volume display refers to a display representing the output sound from the speaker 120, and for example, a display representing the volume by a plurality of scales (meters), a display representing the volume by a number, and the like. In the example shown in FIG. 182 (a), one of the eight scales (meters) is displayed to realize the minimum volume display, and in FIG. 182 (b), all of the eight scales (meters) are displayed. Is displayed to realize the maximum volume display.

  As described above, various displays that can be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 include “first display” in which the size of the display area can be enlarged and reduced, and “second display” in which the size of the display area does not change. In this example, in addition to the second decorative symbol SS, the second reserved number display SP, the variable icon display area he, and the like, the volume display is included in the “second display”.

  Therefore, the volume display of this example is not enlarged or reduced without changing the size of the display area in all the periods shown in FIGS. 182 (a) and 182 (b). For this reason, the visibility of the volume display can be enhanced, and the current volume can be accurately transmitted to the player in some cases.

  Further, in the present example, the volume display of the minimum volume is displayed so as to overlap with the first decorative symbol or the like, but is not overlapped and displayed with the second decorative symbol SS. For this reason, error display can be performed without impairing the visibility of information important to the player such as the second decorative symbol SS, and the necessary information is provided to the player while securing the profit of the player. May be possible.

  In this example, the volume display is included in the “second display” in which the size of the display area does not change. However, the volume display is included in the “first display” in which the size of the display area can be enlarged or reduced. The display size may be configured to be enlarged or reduced together with the background image bg or the like. Further, instead of (or in addition to) the volume display, the light amount of the LED or the lamp may be displayed.

<Operation effect display / Example 9-2>
FIG. 183 (a) is a diagram illustrating, in chronological order, operation effect displays according to Example 9-2. In this example, a description will be given of an example of an effect in the case where the volume of the output sound of the speaker 120 is gradually increased in the operation effect display described in <Operation effect display / Example 9-1>.

  FIGS. 183 (a) (1) to (a) (5) and FIGS. (A) (10) to (a) (14) show the above <operation effect display / Example 9-1. 182 (a) (1) to (a) (5) and FIGS. 182 (b) (10) to (b) (14) described in FIGS. The same reference numerals are given and the description is omitted.

  In the period shown in FIGS. 183 (a) (6) to (a) (9), since the operation of gradually increasing the volume of the output sound of the speaker 120 is received, the scale (meter) is increased by one. The volume display to be performed is performed. As a result, at the timings shown in FIGS. 183 (a) and (7), a part of the volume display is overlapped with the button effect be and a part of the hold icons h11 to h13, and the subsequent figures (a) and (8) At the timing shown in FIG. 7, a part of the volume display is further overlapped and displayed on a part of the fluctuation icon ho, and at the subsequent timing shown in FIGS. Some overlaps are displayed.

<Operation effect display / Example 9-3>
FIG. 183 (b) is a diagram illustrating an operation effect display according to Example 9-3 in chronological order. In this example, a description will be given of an effect example in which the volume of the output sound of the speaker 120 is gradually reduced in the operation effect display described in <Operation effect display / Example 9-1>.

  Note that FIGS. 183 (b) (1) to (b) (5) and FIGS. (B) (10) to (b) (14) show the above <operation effect display / Example 9-1. 183 (b) (1)-(b) (5) and FIGS. 182 (a) (10)-(a) (14) described in FIG. The same reference numerals are given and the description is omitted.

  In the period shown in FIGS. 183 (b) (6) to (b) (9), since the operation of gradually decreasing the volume of the output sound of the speaker 120 has been accepted, the scale (meter) is reduced by one. The volume display to be performed is performed. As a result, at the timings shown in FIGS. 183 (b) (7) to (8), the visibility of a part of the button effect be overlapped with the volume display gradually increases, and the subsequent FIG. At the timing shown in (9), almost all of the result display kp is visible.

<Operation effect display / Example 10-1>
FIG. 184 (a) is a diagram illustrating an operation effect display according to Example 10-1 in chronological order. In this example, in the operation effect display described in <Operation effect display / Example 1-1>, the effect movable body 224 described with reference to FIG. 3 moves during the reduced background display. An effect example in the case where the effect movable bodies 224 do not overlap will be described.

  Note that, other than the effect movable body 224 and the result display kp, the effect is the same as the effect shown in FIGS. 175 (a) (1) to (a) (14) described in <Operation effect display / Example 1-1> above. Therefore, the same reference numerals are given in the drawings, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  As described above, the staging movable body 224 includes the upper arm 224a and the forearm 224b imitating the upper arm and the forearm of the right arm of a human, and an upper arm motor and an elbow (not shown) for rotating the upper arm 224a to the shoulder position. A forearm motor (not shown) for rotating the forearm portion 224b at a position is provided. The effect movable body 224 moves in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by the upper arm motor and the forearm motor.

  At the timings shown in FIGS. 184 (a) and (8), an operation by a certain operation means (in this example, the chance button 136) is performed during the display of the button effect be, and the subsequent FIGS. In the periods shown in FIGS. 13A and 13B, the forearm portion 224b of the effect movable body 224 is rotated based on the operation performed. In this example, the effect movable body 224 is moved to the reduced background. The display is configured not to overlap.

<Operation effect display / Example 10-2>
FIG. 184 (b) is a diagram illustrating, in chronological order, operation effect displays according to Example 10-2. In this example, in the operation effect display described in <Operation effect display / Example 1-1> above, the effect movable body 224 described with reference to FIG. An example of an effect in the case of rapping will be described.

  Note that, other than the effect movable body 224 and the result display kp, the effect is the same as the effect shown in FIGS. 175 (a) (1) to (a) (14) described in <Operation effect display / Example 1-1> above. Therefore, the same reference numerals are given in the drawings, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  At the timings shown in FIGS. 184 (b) and (8), an operation by a certain operation means (in this example, the chance button 136) is performed while the button effect be is being displayed, and the subsequent FIGS. In the periods shown in FIGS. 13B and 13, the forearm portion 224 b of the effect movable body 224 is rotated based on the operation performed. In this example, the effect movable body 224 is displayed in a reduced background. It is configured to overlap. As described above, if at least a portion of the effect movable body 224 is configured to overlap at least a part of the reduced background display, the effect movable body 224 and a reduced background display overlapping the effect movable body 224 are provided. In some cases, the player's attention can be attracted and the interest of the game can be increased.

<Operation effect display / Example 11-1>
FIG. 185 (a) is a diagram illustrating an operation effect display according to Example 11-1 in chronological order. In this example, in the operation effect display described in the above <Operation effect display / Example 1-1>, the illuminant (illumination light emission) of the light guide plate IL described with reference to FIG. 14 and the like is displayed during the reduced background display. However, an effect example in which the illumination background does not overlap with the reduced background display will be described.

  Except for the illumination light emitter ih1 and the result display kp, the effects are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 175 (a) (1) to (a) (14) described in the above <Operation effect display / Example 1-1>. Therefore, the same reference numerals are given in the drawings, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  As described above, the transparent light guide plate IL is arranged on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208 (not shown in FIG. 185), and the player can display the decorative symbol display device 208 via the light guide plate IL. And the operation of each stage movable body can be visually recognized. The light guide plate IL has a predetermined lens cut in the transmission area. A light-emitting body (illumination light-emitting body) such as an LED is provided at an appropriate position near the side end of the light guide plate IL, and light from the light-emitting body is reflected forward by a lens cut portion, so that a transmission area is predetermined. It is configured to be able to make it look as if it is emitting light in a pattern of.

  At the timings shown in FIGS. 185 (a) and (8), an operation by a certain operation means (in this example, the chance button 136) is performed during the display of the button effect be, and the subsequent FIGS. In the periods shown in FIGS. 13A and 13B, the heart-shaped illuminant ih1 is displayed based on the operation performed, but in this example, the illuminant illuminant ih1 is displayed in a reduced background display. It is configured not to overlap.

<Operation effect display / Example 11-2>
FIG. 185 (b) is a diagram illustrating an operation effect display according to the example 11-2 in chronological order. In this example, in the operation effect display described in the above <Operation effect display / Example 1-1>, the illuminant (illumination light emission) of the light guide plate IL described with reference to FIG. 14 and the like is displayed during the reduced background display. However, a description will be given of an effect example in the case where an illumination light emitter overlaps the reduced background display.

  Except for the illumination light emitters ih1 and ih2 and the result display kp, the effects shown in FIGS. 175 (a) (1) to (a) (14) described in the above <Operation effect display / Example 1-1>. Therefore, the same reference numerals are given in the drawings, and the description is omitted.

  At the timings shown in FIGS. 185 (b) and (8), an operation by a certain operation means (in this example, the chance button 136) is performed during the display of the button effect be, and the subsequent FIGS. In the periods shown in FIGS. 13B and 13C, a heart-shaped illumination light emitter ih1 and an illumination light emitter ih2 composed of a certain character are displayed based on the operation performed. In this example, The illumination illuminant ih2 composed of a certain character is configured to overlap the reduced background display.

  As described above, if at least a part of the illumination light emitter is configured to overlap at least a part of the reduced background display, the player can display the illumination light emitter or the reduced background display overlapping the illumination light emitter. May attract attention and may enhance the interest of the game.

<Operation effect display / Example 12-1>
FIG. 186 (a) is a diagram illustrating an operation effect display according to Example 12-1 in chronological order. In the present example, a description will be given of an effect example in which the result display kp does not overlap with the reduced background display in the operation effect display described in <Operation effect display / Example 1-1>.

  Note that, except for the result display kp, the effects are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 175 (a) (1) to (a) (14) described in the above <Operation effect display / Example 1-1>. , The same reference numerals are given, and the description thereof is omitted.

  At the timings shown in FIGS. 186 (a) and (9), based on the operation performed, the result display kp (in this example, the display of the image of the family crest in this example) corresponding to the operation is displayed outside the reduced background display area. ) Is displayed, and the result display kp is configured not to overlap the reduced background display over the periods shown in FIGS. (A), (9) to (a), and (13). As described above, if the result display kp is configured not to overlap with at least a part of the reduced background display, the result display kp can attract the player's attention, and the interest of the game can be enhanced. .

  In the subsequent periods shown in FIGS. 186 (a) (10) to (a) (13), the size of the reduced background display is increased stepwise, so that the result display kp overlaps the reduced background display, At the timings shown in FIGS. 13A and 13B, the frame display wp is erased, the enlargement of the reduced background display is ended, and the background display is returned to the original first size background display.

<Operation effect display / Example 12-2>
FIG. 186 (b) is a diagram illustrating, in chronological order, operation effect displays according to Example 12-2. In this example, a description will be given of an example of an effect in a case where the result display kp overlaps with the reduced background display in the operation effect display described in <Operation Effect Display / Example 1-1>.

  Note that, except for the result display kp, the effects are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 175 (a) (1) to (a) (14) described in the above <Operation effect display / Example 1-1>. , The same reference numerals are given, and the description thereof is omitted.

  At the timings shown in FIGS. 186 (b) and (9), based on the fact that the operation has been performed, the result display kp (in this example) corresponding to the operation extends over the display area of the reduced background display and outside the display area. In this example, the display of the image of the family crest) is displayed, and the size of the reduced background display is enlarged stepwise over the period shown in FIGS. At the same time, the result display kp is configured to overlap the reduced background display and the background display.

  As described above, if at least a part of the result display kp is configured to overlap with the reduced background display and at least a part of the background display, the result display kp and the reduced background display overlapped with the result display kp are provided. In some cases, the attention of the player can be attracted to the background display and the interest of the game can be increased.

<Operation effect display / Example 13-1>
FIG. 187 (a) is a diagram illustrating an operation effect display according to the example 13-1 in chronological order. In this example, an effect example in which the operation effect display described in the above <Operation effect display / Example 1-1> is performed over two pseudo-runs will be described.

  Except for the pseudo-ream, the effects are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 175 (a) (1) to (a) (14) described in <Operation Effect Display / Example 1-1> above. The same reference numerals are given and the description is omitted.

  At the timings shown in FIGS. 187 (a) and (7), during the button effect, the second decorative symbol SS is temporarily stopped (pseudo-stop) with the decorative symbol combination of “decoration 3-decoration 5-decoration 4” and shakes. At the subsequent timing shown in FIGS. 8A and 8B, the temporary stop display is terminated and the display of the variation of the second decorative symbol SS is restarted. In this way, if the button effect is performed over a plurality of pseudo runs, the game after the pseudo stop can be expected, and the player's willingness to play the game may be maintained.

<Operation effect display / Example 13-2>
FIG. 187 (b) is a diagram illustrating, in chronological order, operation effect displays according to Example 13-2. In this example, an effect example in the case where the operation effect display described in the above <Operation effect display / Example 1-1> is performed over two symbol changes will be described.

  Note that the effects other than the number of symbol changes are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 175 (a) (1) to (a) (14) described in <Operation Effect Display / Example 1-1> above. The same reference numerals are given in the drawings, and description thereof will be omitted.

  At the timings shown in FIGS. 187 (b) and (7), during the button effect, the second decorative symbol SS is displayed as a final stop with a combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 3−decoration 5−decoration 4”. b) At the timing shown in (8), one suspension of the special figure variable game is exhausted and the next special figure variable game is started. In this way, if the button effect is performed over a plurality of special figure changing games, it is possible to have an expectation for the next special figure changing game after the main stop, and to maintain the player's willingness to play the game. There are cases.

<Operation effect display / Example 14>
FIG. 188 is a diagram illustrating an operation effect display according to the fourteenth embodiment in chronological order. In this example, an effect example in which the reduced background display is enlarged or reduced or deformed will be described.

  In the period shown in FIGS. 188 (3) to (11), the background display is surrounded by a frame display wp, and the size of the background display is enlarged or reduced or deformed. At the timing shown in parentheses), the scaling of the background display and the deformation have been completed, and the reduced background display is displayed.

  At the subsequent timing shown in FIG. 188 (12), during the display of the reduced background display, the button effect be starts in the display area of the reduced background display, and during the subsequent period shown in FIGS. In the example, the size of the reduced background display is enlarged or reduced while the display of the button effect be is continued. At the timings shown in FIGS. 188 (14) and (15), since the reduced background display is deformed, a character string constituting the button effect be (in this example, a character string "press!"). Etc. are also distorted.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 188 (16), an operation by a certain operation means (in this example, the chance button 136) is performed while the button effect be is displayed, and at the subsequent timing shown in FIG. A result display kp (display of a family crest image in this example) corresponding to the operation is displayed in the display area of the reduced background display based on the performed operation. In this example, a part of the result display kp is configured to overlap with the change icon ho. As described above, if at least a part of the result display kp is configured to overlap the change icon ho, the player's attention is focused on the result display kp and the change icon ho overlapped with the result display kp. May be able to enhance the interest of the game.

  In the subsequent periods shown in FIGS. 188 (18) to (21), the size of the reduced background display is increased stepwise by erasing the display of the result display kp, as shown in FIG. At the timing, the frame display wp is erased, the enlargement of the reduced background display is ended, and the background display is returned to the original first size (the size of the entire display area of the decorative symbol display device 208). I have.

<Operation effect display / Example 15>
FIG. 189 is a diagram illustrating an operation effect display according to Example 15 in chronological order. In this example, an effect example in which reduced background display is started by a symbol re-lottery at the time of a big hit will be described.

  Note that FIGS. 189 (1) to (13) show the effects shown in FIGS. 175 (a) (1) to (a) (13) described in the above <Operation Effect Display / Example 1-1>. Therefore, the same reference numerals are given in the drawings, and the description is omitted.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 189 (14), temporary stop display and swing fluctuation of the first decorative symbol are performed, and at the subsequent timing shown in FIG. 189 (15), reduced background display is started and symbol re-lottery is performed. .

  In the subsequent periods shown in FIGS. 189 (15) to (17), the background display is surrounded by a frame display wp, the size of the background display is reduced stepwise, and the fluctuation display of the first decorative symbol is performed. Has continued. During the same period, the button effect be is started while the reduced background is displayed.

  At the subsequent timing shown in FIG. 189 (17), an operation by a certain operation means (in this example, the chance button 136) is performed while the button effect be is being displayed, and at the subsequent timing shown in FIG. As a result, the combination of the first decorative symbols “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” is stopped and the reduced background display is changed to the first size It is expanding to a third size larger than that. At the subsequent timing shown in FIG. 19, the enlargement of the background display is ended, and the background display is returned to the original first size (the size of the entire display area of the decorative symbol display device 208). ing.

  As described above, the gaming table (for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 and the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 196) according to the embodiment described above uses display means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 175). A game console provided with the display means having a first size (for example, the size of the entire display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 175 (a) (1) or the like). A display (for example, a display including a background image bg on a clear sky, a fluctuating icon ho, a pedestal hso of fluctuating icons, and holding icons h11 to h14) shown in FIGS. The display means can display the first display in a second size smaller than the first size (for example, the size of the reduced background display shown in FIGS. 175 (a) and (5)). Means, The means is means capable of displaying the first display of the second size after displaying the first display of the first size, and the display means is configured to display the first display of the second size. Means for displaying the first display of the first size after displaying the first display, wherein the display means is operated during display of the first display of the second size. A gaming table characterized by being a means capable of starting display of an effect display (for example, display of a button effect be shown in FIGS. 175 (a) and (6)).

  According to the gaming table according to the present embodiment, the operation effect display is started to be displayed during the display of the first display of the second size, thereby facilitating the attention of the player to the operation effect display more than before. May be able to enhance the interest of the player.

  Further, the operation effect display, which was not displayed before the display of the first display of the second size, may be started to be displayed after the display of the first display is started. With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the variations of the display start of the operation effect display, to increase the effect of the effect, and to improve the interest of the player in some cases.

  In addition, the first display having the second size is a display in which the size of the first display changes (hereinafter, referred to as “change display”. For example, FIG. 175 (a) (3) to FIG. 175). (A) Reduced display shown in (5), enlarged display shown in FIGS. 175 (a) (10) to (a) (13), deformed display and rotation shown in FIGS. 188 (7) to (19) Display)) may be included. With such a configuration, it is possible to more easily attract the player's attention to the operation effect display, and it may be possible to improve the interest of the player.

  Further, the operation effect display includes a display including an animation (hereinafter, referred to as a “change animation”) that changes as the operation valid period elapses (for example, FIGS. 175 (b) (6) to (b) (b)). 12) is a change animation in which a character string “press!” And an image of a downward arrow move up and down), and the change animation may be displayed while the change display is being displayed. With such a configuration, it is possible to more easily attract the player's attention to the operation effect display, and it may be possible to improve the interest of the player.

  Further, the size of the operation effect display changes during the display of the change display (for example, as shown in FIGS. 176 (b) (10) to (b) (12), the first display is enlarged). The operation effect display may be enlarged during the operation). With such a configuration, it is possible to more easily attract the player's attention to the operation effect display, and it may be possible to improve the interest of the player.

  Further, the display position of the operation effect display changes during the display of the change display (for example, as shown in FIGS. 177 (b) (10) to (b) (12), the first display is enlarged. The operation effect display may move upward during the operation). With such a configuration, it is possible to more easily attract the player's attention to the operation effect display, and it may be possible to improve the interest of the player.

  In addition, during the display of the first display of the second size, display surrounding at least a part of the periphery of the first display (hereinafter, referred to as “second display”. For example, FIG. 175 (a) A frame display wp) shown in (3) may be displayed. With such a configuration, the first display can be emphasized, so that the operation effect display displayed on the first display can more easily attract the player's attention, and the interest of the player can be enhanced. Can be improved in some cases.

  Further, the second display may not be displayed while the first display of the first size is being displayed. With such a configuration, the first display and the second display can be clearly distinguished, and the operation effect display displayed on the first display can more easily attract the player's attention. In some cases, the interest of the player can be improved.

  Further, the first display may be a background display. Further, during the display of the first display of the first size, a third display is displayed on the first display (for example, a hitting suggestion display shown in FIG. 180 (b), FIG. 186 (a) and FIG. The result display kp) shown in FIG. 8B is displayed so as to overlap, and the third display is displayed at a display position different from the first display during the display of the first display having the second size. May be displayed. With such a configuration, the first display and the second display can be clearly distinguished, and the operation effect display displayed on the first display can more easily attract the player's attention. In some cases, the interest of the player can be improved.

  In addition, during the display of the first display of the first size, a fourth display is displayed on the first display (for example, a hitting suggestion display shown in FIG. 180 (a), an error display shown in FIG. 182 to 183 are displayed so as to overlap each other, and the fourth display overlaps with the first display while the first display having the second size is being displayed. It may be displayed. With such a configuration, even when the size of the first display changes, the fourth display can more easily attract the player's attention, and sometimes the player's interest can be improved. is there.

  In addition, during the display of the first display of the first size, a fifth display (for example, illumination display ih1, ih2 shown in FIG. 185 (b)) overlaps the first display and is displayed. The first display having the second size may be displayed such that a part of the fifth display overlaps the first display while the first display is being displayed. With such a configuration, the first display and the second display can be clearly distinguished, and the operation effect display displayed on the first display can more easily attract the player's attention. In some cases, the interest of the player can be improved.

  Further, the first display of the first size is a display including a certain character (for example, a character “press!” Shown in FIGS. 175 (b) (13) and 188 (14)). , The first display of the second size is a display including the certain character, and the certain character in the first display of the second size (for example, FIG. 188 (14) Is a character corresponding to the certain character (for example, the character “Press!” Shown in FIGS. 175 (b) and (13)) in the first display of the first size. May be distorted. According to such a configuration, the distortion of a certain character can make it easier to attract the player's attention to the operation effect display displayed on the first display of the second size, and the player's interest can be improved. Can be improved in some cases.

<Operation effect display / Example 16-1>
FIG. 190A is a diagram illustrating an operation effect display according to the example 16-1 in chronological order.

  In this example, the operation effect display (button effect) be described in the above <operation effect display / Example 1-1> is included in the operation effect display (button effect) be while moving from left to right in the horizontal direction. A description will be given of an effect example in which the operation validity period display (meter display) is reduced.

  At the timings shown in FIGS. 190 (a) and (3), an image of the operation effect display (button effect) be appears from the left end of the decorative symbol display device 208 during the variable display started in FIGS. Thus, the operation effect display (button effect) be is started.

  As described above, the operation effect display (button effect) be of the present example is an operation prompting display (in this example, the appearance of the chance button 136 in the present example) for prompting operation of a certain operation means (for example, the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 1). Display of a button image, display of a character string such as "PUSH" or "press!", Or display of an image of a downward arrow) and an operation validity period display indicating an operation validity period during which an operation by a certain operation means is valid. (Meter display) md. The operation effect display according to the present invention is not limited to this example. For example, the operation effect display may include only the operation valid period display md, or a combination of the operation valid period display md and another display other than the operation promotion display. May be configured.

  The operation effective period display md is a display for performing an animation display in which at least a part of the display area is reduced as time elapses, and in this example, the remaining period (operation effective period) during which the operation by the operation unit is effective. The time is indicated by the size of the area of the gauge (black rectangular portion). Needless to say, the display mode of the gauge is not limited to this example. At the timings shown in FIGS. 190 (a) and (3), the area of the gauge of the operation effective period display md decreases at the same time as the operation effect display (button effect) be started according to the passage of time (remaining time of the operation effective period). To start decreasing display (animation display).

  In the subsequent periods shown in FIGS. 190 (a) (4) to (a) (6), the operation effect display (button effect) be is moved in the first direction (in this example, from the left side to the right side in the horizontal direction). In addition to performing the movement display, the area of the gauge of the operation effective period display md is changed in accordance with the passage of time (the remaining time of the operation effective period) in the same first direction as the movement display of the operation effect display (button effect) be (this example). In this example, a decrease display (animation display) is performed in which the display decreases from the left side to the right side in the horizontal direction.

  At the subsequent timings shown in FIGS. 190 (a) and (7), since the right end of the operation validity period display md has reached the right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the movement display of the operation effect display (button effect) be is displayed. On the other hand, the decrease display of the gauge of the operation validity period display md is continued.

  Note that the condition for terminating the movement display of the operation effect display (button effect) be is not limited to this example, and may be, for example, a certain time (for example, 10 seconds) after the start of the movement display of the operation effect display (button effect) be. (Seconds) has elapsed, or the end condition may be that the remaining time of the operation valid period has reached a certain time (for example, 5 seconds) (similarly in other embodiments). . Further, even when the right end of the operation validity period display md reaches the right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the movement display of the operation effect display (button effect) be may be continued. Part or all of the operation validity period display md may move to a position outside the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 (a position that cannot be visually recognized from the front).

  In the subsequent periods shown in FIGS. 190 (a), (8) to (a), (9), the display of decreasing the gauge of the operation effective period display md is continued, and at the timing shown in FIGS. Since an operation is performed by a certain operation means (chance button 136) during the operation validity period, the result display kp (this example) corresponding to the operation is performed at the timing shown in FIG. Displays the image of the family crest).

  According to the gaming table according to the present example, even if the display area (gauge) of a part of the operation validity period display is small, the area (gauge) of the operation validity period display is reduced due to the afterimage due to the movement. In some cases, it is possible to make the player feel the condition small and to prompt the operation of the operation means. Further, by making the size of the operation effect display the same at the start of the display of the moving display and at the end of the display, the player may be able to easily recognize the display.

<Operation effect display / Example 16-2>
FIG. 190 (b) is a diagram illustrating an operation effect display according to the example 16-2 in chronological order.

  In this example, the operation effect display (button effect) be described in <Operation effect display / Example 1-1> is included in the operation effect display (button effect) be while moving from the right to the left in the horizontal direction. A description will be given of an effect example in which the operation validity period display (meter display) is reduced.

  At the timings shown in FIGS. 190 (b) and (3), an image of the operation effect display (button effect) be appears from the right end of the decorative symbol display device 208 during the variable display started in FIGS. 190 (b) and (2). Thus, the operation effect display (button effect) be is started. At the timings shown in FIGS. 190 (b) and (3), at the same time as the start of the operation effect display (button effect) be, the gauge area of the operation effective period display md is changed according to the passage of time (the remaining time of the operation effective period). Has started a reduced display (animation display).

  In the subsequent periods shown in FIGS. 190 (b) (4) to (b) (6), the operation effect display (button effect) be is moved in the second direction (in this example, from the right to the left in the horizontal direction). In addition to performing the movement display, the area of the gauge of the operation effective period display md is changed according to the elapse of time (the remaining time of the operation effective period) in the first direction (book operation) different from the movement display of the operation effect display (button effect) be. In the example, a decrease display (animation display) is performed in which the display is decreased from left to right in the horizontal direction.

  At the subsequent timings shown in FIGS. 190 (b) and (7), since the left end of the operation effective period display md reaches the left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the movement display of the operation effect display (button effect) be is displayed. On the other hand, the decrease display of the gauge of the operation validity period display md is continued.

  Note that the condition for terminating the movement display of the operation effect display (button effect) be is not limited to this example. For example, when the left end of the operation validity period display md reaches the left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Even if there is, the movement display of the operation effect display (button effect) be may be continued. In this case, a part or all of the operation effective period display md is outside the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 (visible from the front). (A position where it cannot be performed).

  In the subsequent period shown in FIGS. 190 (b) (8) to (b) (9), the display of the gauge of the operation effective period display md is continued to be reduced, and at the timing shown in FIGS. Since an operation is performed by a certain operation means (chance button 136) during the operation validity period, the result display kp (this example) corresponding to the operation is performed at the timing shown in FIG. Displays the image of the family crest).

  According to the gaming table according to the present example, even if the display area (gauge) of a part of the operation validity period display is small, the area (gauge) of the operation validity period display is reduced due to the afterimage due to the movement. In some cases, it is possible to make the player feel the condition small and to prompt the operation of the operation means. Further, by making the size of the operation effect display the same at the start of the display of the moving display and at the end of the display, the player may be able to easily recognize the display.

<Operation effect display / Example 17-1>
FIG. 191 (a) is a diagram illustrating an operation effect display according to Example 17-1 in chronological order.

  In this example, the operation effect display (button effect) be described in the above <operation effect display / Example 1-1> is included in the operation effect display (button effect) be while moving from the lower side in the vertical direction to the upper side. A description will be given of an effect example in which the display of the operation effective period display (meter display) is displayed in a reduced manner.

  At the timings shown in FIGS. 191 (a) and (3), an image of the operation effect display (button effect) be is displayed at the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 during the variable display started in FIGS. Has appeared, the operation effect display (button effect) be has begun. At the timings shown in FIGS. 191 (a) and (3), the area of the gauge of the operation effective period display md is changed according to the lapse of time (remaining time of the operation effective period) simultaneously with the start of the operation effect display (button effect) be. Has started a reduced display (animation display).

  In the subsequent periods shown in FIGS. 191 (a) (4) to (a) (7), the operation effect display (button effect) be is moved in the third direction (in this example, from the lower side in the vertical direction to the upper side). In addition to performing the movement display, the area of the gauge of the operation effective period display md is changed according to the passage of time (the remaining time of the operation effective period) in a first direction (button direction) different from the movement display of the operation effect display (button effect) be. In this example, a decrease display (animation display) is performed in which the distance decreases from left to right in the horizontal direction (a direction orthogonal to the third direction).

  At the timings shown in FIGS. 191 (a) and (7), since the upper end of the operation validity period display md reaches the upper end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the movement display of the operation effect display (button effect) be Is ended, the gauge decrease display of the operation validity period display md is continued.

  The condition for ending the movement display of the operation effect display (button effect) be is not limited to this example. For example, when the upper end of the operation effective period display md reaches the upper end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Even if there is, the movement display of the operation effect display (button effect) be may be continued. In this case, a part or all of the operation effective period display md is outside the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 (visible from the front). (A position where it cannot be performed).

  In the subsequent period shown in FIGS. 191 (a) (8) to (a) (9), the gauge display of the operation effective period display md is continued to be reduced, and at the timing shown in FIGS. 191 (a) (9). Since an operation is performed by a certain operation means (chance button 136) during the operation validity period, the result display kp (this example) corresponding to the operation is performed at the timing shown in FIG. Displays the image of the family crest).

  According to the gaming table according to the present example, even if the display area (gauge) of a part of the operation validity period display is small, the area (gauge) of the operation validity period display is reduced due to the afterimage due to the movement. In some cases, it is possible to make the player feel the condition small and to prompt the operation of the operation means. Further, by making the size of the operation effect display the same at the start of the display of the moving display and at the end of the display, the player may be able to easily recognize the display.

<Operation effect display / Example 17-2>
FIG. 191 (b) is a diagram illustrating an operation effect display according to Example 17-2 in chronological order.

  In the present example, the operation effect display (button effect) be described in the above <operation effect display / Example 1-1> is included in the operation effect display (button effect) be while moving from the upper side to the lower side in the vertical direction. A description will be given of an effect example in which the display of the operation effective period display (meter display) is displayed in a reduced manner.

  At the timings shown in FIGS. 191 (b) and (3), the image of the operation effect display (button effect) be is displayed at the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 during the variable display started in FIGS. Has appeared, the operation effect display (button effect) be has begun. At the timings shown in FIGS. 191 (b) and (3), the area of the gauge of the operation effective period display md is changed according to the lapse of time (remaining time of the operation effective period) at the same time as the start of the operation effect display (button effect) be. Has started a reduced display (animation display).

  In the subsequent periods shown in FIGS. 191 (b) (4) to (b) (6), the operation effect display (button effect) be is moved in the fourth direction (in this example, from the upper side to the lower side in the vertical direction). In addition to performing the movement display, the area of the gauge of the operation effective period display md is changed according to the passage of time (the remaining time of the operation effective period) in a first direction (button direction) different from the movement display of the operation effect display (button effect) be. In this example, a decrease display (animation display) is performed in which the display is decreased from the left side to the right side in the horizontal direction (a direction orthogonal to the fourth direction).

  At the subsequent timings shown in FIGS. 191 (b) and (7), since the lower end of the operation effective period display md has reached the lower end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the movement display of the operation effect display (button effect) be is displayed. On the other hand, the decrease display of the gauge of the operation validity period display md is continued.

  Note that the condition for ending the movement display of the operation effect display (button effect) be is not limited to this example. For example, when the lower end of the operation effective period display md reaches the lower end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Even if there is, the movement display of the operation effect display (button effect) be may be continued. In this case, a part or all of the operation effective period display md is outside the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 (visible from the front). (A position where it cannot be performed).

  In the subsequent periods shown in FIGS. 191 (b) (8) to (b) (9), the display of the gauge of the operation effective period display md is continued to be reduced, and at the timing shown in FIGS. 191 (b) (9). Since an operation is performed by a certain operation means (chance button 136) during the operation validity period, the result display kp (this example) corresponding to the operation is performed at the timing shown in FIG. Displays the image of the family crest).

  According to the gaming table according to the present example, even if the display area (gauge) of a part of the operation validity period display is small, the area (gauge) of the operation validity period display is reduced due to the afterimage due to the movement. In some cases, it is possible to make the player feel the condition small and to prompt the operation of the operation means. Further, by making the size of the operation effect display the same at the start of the display of the moving display and at the end of the display, the player may be able to easily recognize the display.

<Operation effect display / Example 18-1>
FIG. 192 (a) is a diagram illustrating, in chronological order, operation effect displays according to Example 18-1.

  In this example, the operation effect display (button effect) be included in the operation effect display (button effect) be described while rotating the operation effect display (button effect) be described in <Operation effect display / Example 1-1> clockwise. A description will be given of an effect example in which the display (meter display) is reduced.

  At the timings shown in FIGS. 192 (a) and (3), an image of the operation effect display (button effect) be is displayed at the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 during the variable display started in FIGS. Has appeared, the operation effect display (button effect) be has begun. At the timing shown in FIGS. 192 (a) and (3), the area of the gauge of the operation effective period display md is changed according to the elapse of time (remaining time of the operation effective period) at the same time as the start of the operation effect display (button effect) be. Has started a reduced display (animation display).

  In the subsequent periods shown in FIGS. 192 (a) (4) to (a) (7), the posture effect display for rotating the operation effect display (button effect) be in the first rotation direction (clockwise in this example). Is performed, and the area of the gauge of the operation effective period display md is changed in accordance with the lapse of time (remaining time of the operation effective period) in a direction not along the rotation direction of the attitude change display of the operation effect display (button effect) be ( A decrease display (animation display) for reducing the straight line from one side to the other side is performed.

  At the subsequent timings shown in FIGS. 192 (a) and (8), since the operation effect display (button effect) be has made one rotation, the attitude change display of the operation effect display (button effect) be ends, while the operation valid period is terminated. The decrease display of the gauge of the display md is continued.

  Note that the condition for terminating the posture change display of the operation effect display (button effect) be is not limited to this example. For example, even when the operation effect display (button effect) be rotates one turn, the operation effect display (button effect) be The operation effect display (button effect) be may be rotated a plurality of times by continuing the posture change display of the button effect) be. The rotation may be performed once or a plurality of times until the operation effective period elapses. Alternatively, only the operation validity period display (meter display) of the operation effect display (button effect) be may be rotated.

  During the period shown in FIGS. 192 (a) (8) to (a) (9), the gauge of the operation effective period display md is continuously reduced, and at the timing shown in FIGS. 192 (a) (9), Since an operation is performed by a certain operation means (chance button 136) during the operation validity period, a result display kp (in this example, corresponding to the operation) at the next timing shown in FIGS. , Display of crest image).

  According to the gaming table according to the present example, even if the display area (gauge) of a part of the operation effective period display is small, the area of the operation effective period display is reduced by the afterimage due to the posture change. In some cases, the player can be made to feel small and can be prompted to operate the operation means.

<Operation effect display / Example 18-2>
FIG. 192 (b) is a diagram illustrating, in chronological order, operation effect displays according to Example 18-2.

  In this example, while the operation effect display (button effect) be described in <Operation effect display / Example 1-1> is rotated counterclockwise, the operation included in the operation effect display (button effect) be is enabled. A description will be given of an effect example in which the period display (meter display) is reduced.

  At the timings shown in FIGS. 192 (b) and (3), an image of the operation effect display (button effect) be is displayed at the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 during the variable display started in FIGS. Has appeared, the operation effect display (button effect) be has begun. In addition, at the timings shown in FIGS. 192 (b) and (3), the area of the gauge of the operation effective period display md is changed according to the passage of time (the remaining time of the operation effective period) at the same time as the start of the operation effect display (button effect) be. Has started a reduced display (animation display).

  In the subsequent periods shown in FIGS. 192 (b) (4) to (b) (7), the posture change in which the operation effect display (button effect) be is rotated in the second rotation direction (counterclockwise in this example). In addition to performing the display, the area of the gauge of the operation effective period display md is changed according to the passage of time (remaining time of the operation effective period) in a direction not along the rotation direction of the attitude change display of the operation effect display (button effect) be ( A decrease display (animation display) for reducing the straight line from one side to the other side is performed.

  At the subsequent timings shown in FIGS. 192 (b) and (8), since the operation effect display (button effect) be has made one rotation, the attitude change display of the operation effect display (button effect) be ends, while the operation effective period is terminated. The decrease display of the gauge of the display md is continued.

  Note that the condition for terminating the posture change display of the operation effect display (button effect) be is not limited to this example. For example, even when the operation effect display (button effect) be rotates one turn, the operation effect display (button effect) be The operation effect display (button effect) be may be rotated a plurality of times by continuing the posture change display of the button effect) be. The rotation may be performed once or a plurality of times until the operation effective period elapses. Alternatively, only the operation validity period display (meter display) of the operation effect display (button effect) be may be rotated.

  During the period shown in FIGS. 192 (b) (8) to (b) (9), the gauge of the operation effective period display md is continuously reduced, and at the timing shown in FIGS. 192 (b) (9), Since an operation is performed by a certain operation means (chance button 136) during the operation validity period, a result display kp (in this example, corresponding to the operation) at the next timing shown in FIG. , Display of crest image).

  According to the gaming table according to the present example, even if the display area (gauge) of a part of the operation effective period display is small, the area of the operation effective period display is reduced by the afterimage due to the posture change. In some cases, the player can be made to feel small and can be prompted to operate the operation means.

<Operation effect display / Example 19-1>
FIG. 193 (a) is a diagram illustrating an operation effect display according to Example 19-1 in chronological order.

  In this example, the operation effect display (button effect) be described in <Operation effect display / Example 1-1> starts, and the operation validity period display (meter) included in the operation effect display (button effect) be An effect example in which the size of the operation effect display (button effect) be and the size of the first display (background display) are reduced or enlarged stepwise while performing the decrease display of (display) will be described.

  At the timings shown in FIGS. 193 (a) and (2), the operation effect display (button effect) be is displayed at the center of the first display (background display) during the variable display, thereby displaying the operation effect display (button effect). Direction) be has begun. At the timings shown in FIGS. 193 (a) and (2), the gauge area of the operation validity period display md changes the gauge area of the operation validity period display md according to the lapse of time (the remaining time of the operation validity period) at the same time as the start of the operation effect display (button effect) be. Has started a reduced display (animation display).

  In the periods shown in FIGS. 193 (a) (2) to (a) (5), the first display (background display) of the first size shown in FIGS. (A) While reducing the size in steps to the second size shown in (5), the operation effect display (button effect) be of the third size shown in FIGS. (5) A reduction display (animation display) in which the area of the gauge of the operation valid period display md is reduced in accordance with the passage of time (remaining time of the operation valid period) while gradually reducing the size to the fourth size shown in (5). It is carried out. Note that the reduction ratio per unit time of the first display (background display) and the operation effect display (button effect) be may be the same or different (the same applies to other embodiments).

  In addition, at the timings shown in FIGS. 3A and 3B, while the first display (background display) continues to be reduced, a frame display that surrounds at least a part of the background display (all the surroundings in this example) is displayed. wp is displayed, and at the timings shown in FIGS. 9A and 9B, the reduction of the first display (background display) is completed, and the first display (background display) of the second size is displayed. The operation effect display (button effect) be is reduced, and the operation effect display (button effect) be of the fourth size is displayed, and the first display (background display) of the second size and the fourth effect are displayed. The display of the operation effect display (button effect) be of the size is maintained until the timings shown in FIGS.

  In the subsequent period shown in FIGS. 193 (a) (6) to (a) (9), the first display (background display) of the second size is changed to the first display (background display) shown in FIGS. While gradually expanding to one size, the operation effect display (button effect) be of the fourth size is gradually expanded to the third size shown in FIGS. A decrease display (animation display) is performed in which the area of the gauge of the operation effective period display md is reduced according to the progress (remaining time of the operation effective period). The ratio of the enlargement per unit time of the first display (background display) and the operation effect display (button effect) be may be the same or different (the same applies to other embodiments).

  At the timings shown in FIGS. 9A and 9B, the enlargement of the first display (background display) is ended, the first display (background display) of the first size is displayed, and the operation effect is displayed. Ending the expansion of the display (button effect) be, displaying the operation effect display (button effect) be of the third size, and performing an operation by a certain operation means (chance button 136) within the operation validity period. For this reason, the result display kp (in this example, the display of the image of the family crest) corresponding to the operation is displayed at the timings shown in FIGS.

  According to the gaming table according to this example, the movement of the operation effective period display and the movement of the first display are performed while the operation effective period display is decreasing, so that the player can determine how the area of the operation effective period display is reduced. It can make you feel smaller.

  The start timing (start timing) and / or the end timing (end timing) of the operation effect display (button effect) be and the operation effective period display md decrease display are before the background display is reduced (or enlarged). It may be either during reduction (or enlargement) of the background display or after reduction (or enlargement) of the background display (the same applies to other embodiments).

<Operation effect display / Example 19-2>
FIG. 193 (b) is a diagram illustrating an operation effect display according to Example 19-2 in chronological order.

  In this example, the operation effect display (button effect) be described in <Operation effect display / Example 1-1> starts, and the operation validity period display (meter) included in the operation effect display (button effect) be A description will be given of an example of an effect in which the size of the operation effect display (button effect) be and the size of the first display (background display) are reduced, moved, and enlarged in a stepwise manner while the display is reduced.

  At the timings shown in FIGS. 193 (b) and (2), the operation effect display (button effect) be is displayed at the center of the first display (background display) during the variable display, so that the operation effect display (button effect) is displayed. Direction) be has begun. At the timings shown in FIGS. 193 (b) and (2), the area of the gauge of the operation effective period display md is changed according to the passage of time (the remaining time of the operation effective period) at the same time as the start of the operation effect display (button effect) be. Has started a reduced display (animation display).

  In the periods shown in FIGS. 193 (b) (2) to (b) (5), the first display (background display) of the first size shown in FIGS. (B) The operation effect display (button effect) be of the third size shown in FIGS. (B) and (2) is gradually reduced to the second size shown in FIG. (5) A reduction display (animation display) in which the area of the gauge of the operation valid period display md is reduced in accordance with the passage of time (remaining time of the operation valid period) while gradually reducing the size to the fourth size shown in (5). It is carried out.

  In addition, at the timings shown in FIGS. 6B and 5, the reduction of the first display (background display) is completed, the first display (background display) of the second size is displayed, and the operation effect is produced. The reduction of the display (button effect) be is completed, and the operation effect display (button effect) be of the fourth size is displayed.

  In the subsequent periods shown in FIGS. 193 (b) (5) to (b) (6), the first display (background display) of the second size and the operation effect display (button effect) of the fourth size ) Be is moved in the first direction (in this example, from left to right in the horizontal direction). Note that the moving direction of the first display (background display) and the operation effect display (button effect) be are not limited to this example, and may be an up-down direction, an oblique direction, or the like. You may let it.

  In the subsequent periods shown in FIGS. 193 (b) (6) to (b) (8), the first display (background display) of the second size is displayed in the second display shown in FIGS. While gradually expanding to one size, the operation effect display (button effect) be of the fourth size is gradually expanded to the third size shown in FIGS. A decrease display (animation display) is performed in which the area of the gauge of the operation effective period display md is reduced according to the progress (remaining time of the operation effective period).

  At the timings shown in FIGS. 8B and 8C, the enlargement of the first display (background display) is ended, the first display (background display) of the first size is displayed, and the operation effect is displayed. The operation effect display (button effect) be of the third size is displayed after the enlargement of the display (button effect) be is completed, and at the timing shown in FIGS. Since the operation by the operation means (chance button 136) is performed, the result display kp (in this example, the display of the image of the family crest in this example) corresponding to the operation is performed at the timings shown in FIGS. ) Is displayed.

  According to the gaming table according to this example, the movement of the operation effective period display and the movement of the first display are performed while the operation effective period display is decreasing, so that the player can determine how the area of the operation effective period display is reduced. It can make you feel smaller.

<Operation effect display / Example 20-1>
FIG. 194 (a) is a diagram illustrating an operation effect display according to Example 20-1 in chronological order.

  In this example, the operation effect display (button effect) be described in <Operation effect display / Example 1-1> starts, and the operation validity period display (meter) included in the operation effect display (button effect) be Display), the size of the operation effect display (button effect) be and the size of the first display (background display) are reduced and enlarged in a stepwise manner, and the operation effect display (button effect) be and the first effect are displayed. An effect example in which the posture (angle) of the display (background display) is changed will be described.

  At the timings shown in FIGS. 194 (a) and (2), the operation effect display (button effect) be is displayed at the center of the first display (background display) during the fluctuation display, thereby displaying the operation effect display (button). Direction) be has begun. In addition, at the timing shown in FIGS. 194 (a) and (2), the area of the gauge of the operation effective period display md is changed according to the lapse of time (remaining time of the operation effective period) simultaneously with the start of the operation effect display (button effect) be. Has started a reduced display (animation display).

  In the periods shown in FIGS. 194 (a) (2) to (a) (5), the first display (background display) of the first size shown in FIGS. (A) The posture is changed while gradually reducing the size to the second size shown in (5) (in this example, swinging by a certain angle to the left and right), and the second size shown in (a) and (2) of FIG. The operation effect display (button effect) be of the third size is changed in posture while gradually reducing it to the fourth size shown in FIGS. Display), and a decrease display (animation display) for reducing the area of the gauge of the operation effective period display md according to the passage of time (remaining time of the operation effective period).

  Note that the postures of the first display (background display) and the operation effect display (button effect) be may be changed integrally, or may be changed individually. In addition, the manner in which the postures of the operation effect display (button effect) be and the first display (background display) are changed is not limited to swing (change in angle), but may be rotation, linear movement, curved movement, meandering, or the like. May be present (similarly in other embodiments).

  At the timings shown in FIGS. 9A and 9B, the reduction of the first display (background display) is completed, the first display (background display) of the second size is displayed, and the operation effect is displayed. The reduction of the display (button effect) be is completed, and the operation effect display (button effect) be of the fourth size is displayed.

  In the subsequent periods shown in FIGS. 194 (a) (6) to (a) (9), the first display (background display) of the second size is displayed as the first display (background display) shown in FIGS. The attitude is changed while gradually expanding to one size (in this example, swinging by a certain angle to the left and right), and the operation effect display (button effect) be of the fourth size is shown in FIG. The posture is changed while gradually expanding to the third size shown in (9) (in this example, swinging right and left integrally with the first display (background display)), and the time elapses (the operation effective period (Remaining time), a decrease display (animation display) for reducing the area of the gauge of the operation effective period display md is performed.

  At the timings shown in FIGS. 9A and 9B, the enlargement of the first display (background display) is ended, the first display (background display) of the first size is displayed, and the operation effect is displayed. Ending the expansion of the display (button effect) be, displaying the operation effect display (button effect) be of the third size, and performing an operation by a certain operation means (chance button 136) within the operation validity period. For this reason, the result display kp (in this example, the display of the image of the family crest) corresponding to the operation is displayed at the timings shown in FIGS.

  According to the gaming table according to this example, the movement of the operation effective period display and the movement of the first display are performed while the operation effective period display is decreasing, so that the player can determine how the area of the operation effective period display is reduced. It can make you feel smaller.

<Operation effect display / Example 20-2>
FIG. 194 (b) is a diagram illustrating an operation effect display according to Example 20-2 in chronological order.

  In this example, the operation effect display (button effect) be described in <Operation effect display / Example 1-1> starts, and the operation validity period display (meter) included in the operation effect display (button effect) be Display), the size of the operation effect display (button effect) be and the size of the first display (background display) are reduced and enlarged in a stepwise manner, and the operation effect display (button effect) be and the first effect are displayed. An effect example of changing the posture (rotation in a three-dimensional space) of the display (background display) will be described.

  At the timings shown in FIGS. 194 (b) and (2), the operation effect display (button effect) be is displayed at the center of the first display (background display) during the fluctuation display, so that the operation effect display (button Direction) be has begun. In addition, at the timing shown in FIGS. 194 (b) and (2), the area of the gauge of the operation effective period display md is changed according to the lapse of time (the remaining time of the operation effective period) at the same time as the start of the operation effect display (button effect) be. Has started a reduced display (animation display).

  In the period shown in FIGS. 194 (b) (2) to (b) (5), the first display (background display) of the first size shown in FIGS. (B) The posture is changed while being reduced stepwise to the second size shown in (5) (rotated in three-dimensional space in this example), and the third size shown in FIGS. The operation effect display (button effect) be is gradually reduced to a fourth size shown in FIG. 5B and (5), and the posture is changed (in this example, the first display (background display) and The rotation is integrally performed in a three-dimensional space), and a decrease display (animation display) is performed in which the area of the gauge of the operation effective period display md is reduced in accordance with the passage of time (remaining time of the operation effective period).

  In addition, at the timings shown in FIGS. 6B and 5, the reduction of the first display (background display) is completed, the first display (background display) of the second size is displayed, and the operation effect is produced. The reduction of the display (button effect) be is completed, and the operation effect display (button effect) be of the fourth size is displayed.

  In the subsequent periods shown in FIGS. 194 (b) (6) to (b) (9), the first display (background display) of the second size is changed to the first display (background display) shown in FIGS. At the same time as changing the posture (rotating in a three-dimensional space in this example) while gradually expanding to one size, the operation effect display (button effect) be of the fourth size is displayed in FIG. ), The posture is changed while gradually expanding to a third size (in this example, the rotation is performed in a three-dimensional space integrally with the first display (background display)), and the time elapses (the remaining operation valid period). (Animation display) in which the area of the gauge of the operation validity period display md is reduced according to the time).

  In addition, at the timings shown in FIGS. 9B and 9C, the enlargement of the first display (background display) ends, the first display (background display) of the first size is displayed, and the operation effect is displayed. Ending the expansion of the display (button effect) be, displaying the operation effect display (button effect) be of the third size, and performing an operation by a certain operation means (chance button 136) within the operation validity period. For this reason, the result display kp (display of the image of the family crest in this example) corresponding to the operation is displayed at the timings shown in FIGS.

  According to the gaming table according to this example, the movement of the operation effective period display and the movement of the first display are performed while the operation effective period display is decreasing, so that the player can determine how the area of the operation effective period display is reduced. It can make you feel smaller.

  As described above, the gaming table (for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 and the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 196) according to the present example includes the operating means (for example, the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 1) and the display means. (For example, a decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 3), wherein the display means can display an operation effect display (for example, a button effect be shown in FIGS. 190 to 194). Means, and the operation effect display is a display including an operation effective period display (for example, a meter display md shown in FIGS. 190 to 194) indicating an operation effective period of the operation means. An animation display (for example, a decrease display) for reducing the area of at least a part of the display (for example, a gauge of the meter display md) according to the passage of time, The movement display of the operation effect display (for example, the movement display shown in FIGS. 190 (a) (3) to (a) (8) and FIGS. 190 (b) (3) to (b) (8)) 191 (a) (3) to (a) (8), and FIGS. 191 (b) (3) to (b) (8)). The size of the operation effect display is the same at the start of the display of the moving display and at the end of the display of the moving display, and the animation display is performed during the display of the moving display. (Hereinafter, referred to as “first case”).

According to the gaming table according to the present example, even in a period in which the display area of a part of the operation effective period display is small, the degree of reduction in the area of the operation effective period display is reduced to the player due to an afterimage due to movement. In some cases, it is possible to make the user feel it and to prompt the user to operate the operation means. Further, by making the size of the operation effect display the same at the start of the display of the moving display and at the end of the display, the player may be able to easily recognize the display.
Note that the “moving display” according to the present invention is not limited to a display that moves from one side to the other on a straight line, for example, a display that moves back and forth once or a plurality of times on a straight line, A display that moves in one direction or both directions, a display that moves randomly up, down, left, and right, a meandering display, and the like may be used. In addition, the “operation validity period display” according to the present invention is not limited to a rectangular gauge, and is an animation display in which the area of a part of a circular, elliptical, or polygonal image is reduced with time, and a character image is displayed. May be an animation display or the like in which a part of the area is reduced with time.

  In the first case, the animation display may end at a time after the end of the moving display.

  With such a configuration, the player may be able to easily recognize the period in which the animation display of the operation valid period display ends.

  In addition, the animation display is a display that changes along a moving direction of at least a part of the operation validity period display in the moving display (for example, in FIGS. 190 (a) (3) to (a) (9)). (Reduced display of the validity period display shown).

  With such a configuration, there is a case where the degree of reduction in the area of the operation effective period display can be made smaller by the player due to the afterimage due to the movement.

  Further, the display means is a means capable of displaying a first display in a first size, and the first display is a background display (for example, a background display shown in FIGS. 175, 193, and 194). Wherein the display means is a means capable of displaying the first display in a second size smaller than the first size, the display means, the display of the second size Means for displaying a moving display of the first display (hereinafter, referred to as a "second moving display"), and in a state where the first display is displayed at the first size, The operation effect display may be displayed in a third size, and in a state where the first display is displayed in the second size, a fourth size smaller than the third size In some cases, the operation effect display may be displayed, and the display of the second movement display The mobile display may be may be displayed in.

  With such a configuration, the movement of the operation validity period display and the movement of the first display are performed during the decrease of the operation validity period display, so that the player can reduce the reduction in the area of the operation validity period display. In some cases, it can be felt.

  Also, the size of the first display may change during the display of the second moving display.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to more easily attract the player's attention to the operation effect display, and it may be possible to improve the interest of the player.

  The display means may be a means capable of displaying a size change animation display for changing the size of the first display from one of the first size and the second size to the other. .

  With such a configuration, it is possible to more easily attract the player's attention to the operation effect display, and it may be possible to improve the interest of the player.

  In addition, during the display of the first display of the second size, a display surrounding at least a part of the periphery of the first display (hereinafter, referred to as a “second display”. For example, FIG. 193 (a) A frame display wp) shown in (3) may be displayed.

  With such a configuration, the first display can be emphasized, so that the operation effect display displayed on the first display can more easily attract the player's attention, and the interest of the player can be enhanced. Can be improved in some cases.

  Further, the second display may not be displayed while the first display of the first size is being displayed.

  With such a configuration, the first display and the second display can be clearly distinguished, and the operation effect display displayed on the first display can more easily attract the player's attention. In some cases, the interest of the player can be improved.

  Further, the first display of the first size is a display including a certain character (for example, a character “press!” Shown in FIGS. 175 (b) (13) and 188 (14)). The first display of the second size is a display including the certain character, and the certain character in the first display of the second size is the first size. 188 may be distorted with respect to the certain character (for example, the character “press!” Shown in FIG. 188 (14)).

  According to such a configuration, the distortion of a certain character can make it easier to attract the player's attention to the operation effect display displayed on the first display of the second size, and the player's interest can be improved. Can be improved in some cases.

In addition, the gaming table (for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 and the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 196) according to the present example includes an operation unit (for example, a chance button 136 shown in FIG. 1) and a display unit (for example, FIG. A decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 3), wherein the display means is a means capable of displaying an operation effect display (for example, a button effect be shown in FIGS. 190 to 194), The operation effect display is an operation effective period display (for example, a meter display md shown in FIGS. 190 to 194) indicating an operation effective period of the operation means (for example, a meter display md shown in FIGS. 190 (a) and 190 (3)). The operation validity period display is an animation display that reduces the area of at least a part of the display (for example, a gauge of the meter display md) as time passes. 192 (a) (3) to (a) and (8), for example, a rotation change display shown in FIGS. 192 (a) and (8). FIGS. 192 (b) (3) to (b) (8) show the rotation display, FIGS. 194 (a) (3) to (a) (8) show the posture display, and FIG. 194 (b) ( (3) to (b) and (7) shown in FIG. 7), in which the animation display is performed during the display of the posture change display (hereinafter, referred to as “first case”). ).
Note that the “posture change display” according to the present invention is not limited to swing or rotation, and is, for example, a display that moves in one direction on a straight line or in both directions, and moves in one direction or on both directions on a curve. It may be a display, a display that moves randomly up, down, left and right, a meandering display, or the like. In addition, the “operation validity period display” according to the present invention is not limited to a rectangular gauge, and is an animation display in which the area of a part of a circular, elliptical, or polygonal image is reduced with time, and a character image is displayed. May be an animation display or the like in which a part of the area is reduced as time elapses.

  According to the gaming table according to the present example, even in a period in which the display area of a part of the operation effective period display is small, the after-image due to the change in the posture indicates to the player how the area of the operation effective period display is reduced. In some cases, it is possible to make the user feel small and to prompt the operation of the operation means.

  In the first case, the animation display may end at a time after the end of the posture change display.

  With such a configuration, the player may be able to easily recognize the period in which the animation display of the operation valid period display ends.

  Further, the animation display may be a display that changes without following at least a part of a movement direction of the operation validity period display in the posture change display.

  With such a configuration, there is a case where the degree of reduction in the area of the operation effective period display can be made smaller by the player due to the afterimage due to the movement.

Further, the display means is means capable of displaying a first display in a first size, the first display is a display including a background display, and the display means is the first size. It is a means capable of displaying the first display in a second size smaller than the first, the display means is a means capable of displaying a moving display of the first display of the second size, In a state where the first display is displayed at the first size, the operation effect display may be displayed at a third size, and the first display may be displayed at the second size. Is displayed, the operation effect display may be displayed in a fourth size smaller than the third size, and the posture change display is displayed during the display of the movement display. There may be.
Note that the “moving display” according to the present invention is not limited to a display that moves from one side to the other on a straight line, for example, a display that moves back and forth once or a plurality of times on a straight line, A display that moves in one direction or both directions, a display that moves randomly up, down, left, and right, a meandering display, and the like may be used.

  With such a configuration, the posture change display and the movement of the first display are performed while the operation effective period display is decreasing, so that the player can feel that the reduced area of the operation effective period display is smaller. May be possible.

  Further, the size of the first display may change during the display of the moving display.

  With such a configuration, it is possible to more easily attract the player's attention to the operation effect display, and it may be possible to improve the interest of the player.

  The display means may be a means capable of displaying a size change animation display for changing the size of the first display from one of the first size and the second size to the other. .

  With such a configuration, it is possible to more easily attract the player's attention to the operation effect display, and it may be possible to improve the interest of the player.

  In addition, during the display of the first display of the second size, a display surrounding at least a part of the periphery of the first display (hereinafter, referred to as a “second display”. For example, FIG. 193 (a) A frame display wp) shown in (3) may be displayed.

  With such a configuration, the first display can be emphasized, so that the operation effect display displayed on the first display can more easily attract the player's attention, and the interest of the player can be enhanced. Can be improved in some cases.

  Further, the second display may not be displayed while the first display of the first size is being displayed.

  With such a configuration, the first display and the second display can be clearly distinguished, and the operation effect display displayed on the first display can more easily attract the player's attention. In some cases, the interest of the player can be improved.

  Further, the first display of the first size is a display including a certain character (for example, a character “press!” Shown in FIGS. 175 (b) (13) and 188 (14)). The first display of the second size is a display including the certain character, and the certain character in the first display of the second size is the first size. 188 may be distorted with respect to the certain character (for example, the character “press!” Shown in FIG. 188 (14)).

  According to such a configuration, the distortion of a certain character can make it easier to attract the player's attention to the operation effect display displayed on the first display of the second size, and the player's interest can be improved. Can be improved in some cases.

  The configuration of the game console according to the present invention is not limited to the configuration of the game console according to the embodiment. For example, the game console according to the present invention may include a plurality of types of game consoles described with reference to FIGS. A game console provided with all the effects may be provided, or a game console provided with one or more of the plurality of types of effects.

  Further, the first display according to the present invention is not limited to the background display, and may be, for example, a blue background, or may include icons (for example, change icons, hold icons), characters, numbers, and the like. You may. Further, the second display according to the present invention may be any display that surrounds at least a part of the periphery of the first display during the display of the first display of the second size. Only the upper and lower edges of the display may be enclosed. Further, a case where the player is surrounded by the second display may be more likely to be given a profit (for example, a big hit or a bonus) advantageous to the player than a case where the player is not surrounded by the second display, or vice versa. .

  Further, during the display of the first display of the first size, a movable body (for example, the effect movable body 224 shown in FIG. 184 (a)) is displayed on the first display so as to overlap with the first display. The movable body may not overlap the first display while the first display of the second size is being displayed. Further, during the display of the first display of the first size, a movable body (for example, the effect movable body 224 shown in FIG. 184 (b)) is displayed on the first display so as to overlap with the first display. The movable body may overlap the first display while the first display of the second size is being displayed.

  In addition, when the change animation or the change display according to the present invention is not performed, a profit (eg, a big hit, a bonus) that is advantageous to the player may be more easily given to the player, or vice versa. There may be.

  In addition, during the display of the first display of the first size, a third display overlaps the first display and is displayed, and the display of the first display of the second size is displayed. In the case where the third display is displayed at a display position different from the first display, the same as the first display during the display of the first display of the second size It may be easier for the player to be given an advantage (for example, a big hit or a bonus) than when the third display is displayed at the display position, or vice versa.

  In addition, during the display of the first display of the first size, a fifth display overlaps the first display and is displayed, and the display of the first display of the second size is displayed. When the first display is partially overlapped with the fifth display, the first display is displayed while the first display having the second size is displayed. May be more likely to be given a profit (eg, a big hit, a bonus) to the player than when the fifth display is displayed in an overlapping manner, or vice versa.

  Further, when the certain character in the first display of the second size is distorted with respect to the certain character in the first display of the first size, It may be easier for a player to be given a benefit (eg, a big hit, a bonus) than when a certain character is not distorted, or vice versa.

  The button effect is illustrated as a single-press effect pattern in which the operation means is terminated by a single press and the result is displayed. However, a long-press effect pattern in which the operation means is long-pressed and the result is displayed after the valid period ends, the operation means. May be repeated, and the result is displayed after a predetermined number of presses or the end of the valid period.

  The display imitating the operation means (for example, a button) performs an animation display in which an image imitating the non-pressed state of the operation means (button) and an image imitating the pressed state of the operation means (button) are alternately displayed. When the operation means (button) is not pressed, an image simulating the non-pressed state of the operation means (button) is displayed, and when the operation means (button) is pressed, the pressed state of the operation means (button) is simulated. The displayed image may be displayed. Further, the image simulating the pressed state of the operation means (button) may be smaller or larger than the image simulating the non-pressed state of the operation means (button). The operation means according to the present invention may be a lever, a dial, a touch panel, a numeric keypad, or the like.

  Further, the operation effect display according to the present invention may be a display including an operation display imitating the operation unit, or an operation promotion display for prompting the operation by the operation unit (for example, “press!” Shown in FIG. 190 and the like). The display may include a character display or a downward arrow). Further, a moving display for moving the operation promotion display in the vertical direction (or the horizontal direction) may be performed.

  In addition, the display time (display timing) of the operation validity period display is as follows: Start of decreasing display of operation validity period display → Start moving display of operation validity period display → End moving display of operation validity period display → End of decreasing display of operation validity period display , Start of moving display of operation valid period display → start of decreasing display of operation valid period display → end of decreasing display of operation valid period display → end of moving display of operation valid period display, start of decreasing display of operation valid period display → operation valid period display Start of moving display → end of decreasing display of operation valid period display → end of moving display of operation valid period display, start moving display of operation valid period display → start decreasing display of operation valid period display → end moving display of operation valid period display → End of reduced display of operation validity period display, simultaneously start decreasing display of operation validity period display and move display of operation validity period display → Move display of operation validity period display and operation available Simultaneous completion of the reduction display of the period display, may be any one of the display time of.

  In addition, the display timing (display timing) of the operation valid period display and the posture change display is as follows: the start of the decrease display of the operation valid period display → the start of the posture change display → the end of the posture change display → the end of the decrease of the operation valid period display, the posture change display Start → Operation effective period display decrease display start → Operation effective period display decrease display end → Posture change display end, operation effective period display decrease display start → Posture change display start → Operation effective period display decrease display end → Posture change End of display, start of posture change display → Start of decrease display of operation valid period display → End of posture change display → End of decrease display of operation effective period display, simultaneous start of decrease display of operation effective period display and posture change display → Posture change display And the simultaneous display of the reduced display of the operation validity period display may be any of the display timings.

  In addition, what is described as the variable display of the decorative symbol may be a variable display of the symbol (more specifically, a special figure), and the description that the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed is the symbol (the more Specifically, a stop display of a special figure) may be used. In addition, the above “may be” may be replaced with “always on”, “always on”, or “always on”. It may be replaced with "always OO".

  FIG. 195 is a front view of an enclosed pachinko machine to which the present invention can be applied. In the enclosed pachinko machine 900 shown in FIG. 195, a predetermined number of game media (for example, game balls) are circulated inside the game console. That is, the game medium fired from the firing means 901 to the game area 902 is discharged from the game area 902 and can be supplied to the firing means 901 again. Further, a display means 903 for displaying information on the number of game media (prize balls, rental balls, the total number of balls held, and the like) and other information is provided below the game area 902 on the front of the gaming table. The upper plate 126 and the lower plate 128 shown in FIG. 1 are not provided.

  In addition, a mode in which the above-described display means 903 is further provided on the upper plate 126 of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 and described above may be adopted, and further, a mode in which the display means 903 is provided with a touch panel. You may. That is, the touch panel provided on the display unit 903 can function as an operation unit. Then, an effect related to the operation of the effect button 136 may be executed by a single touch operation, a continuous tapping operation, or a long press operation on the touch panel, or if the long press auto continuous tap function is enabled, the touch panel May be configured such that a pseudo continuous tapping operation on the touch panel is performed in a state in which is continuously touched. Further, the configuration may be such that the long-pressing automatic continuous tapping function is not enabled. Further, in some effects, the long-pressing automatic continuous hitting function may be enabled. In other words, the touch-and-hold auto-stroke function may be activated on the touch panel, may not be activated, or may be configured to activate more or less effects. . In addition, there are a plurality of effects by a continuous tapping operation on the touch panel, and when performing with the touch panel, the long-pressing automatic continuous tapping function may be configured not to be in an effective state in many cases, or may be configured to be small. .

  As described above, the pachinko machine 900 encloses a ball, circulates the enclosed ball in the pachinko machine, and uses the enclosed ball as a firing ball, and pays out the ball by credit. May be performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 196, a slot machine (turning machine) as a gaming table applicable to the present invention will be described. Here, FIG. 196 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 1000 applicable to the present invention as viewed from the front side (player side).

  A slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 196 includes a main body 1001 and a front door 1002 attached to the front of the main body 1001 and capable of opening and closing with respect to the main body 1001. Three reels (left reel 1010, middle reel 1011, right reel 1012) having a plurality of types of symbols arranged on the outer peripheral surface (not shown in FIG. 196) are housed in the center of the main body 1001. It is configured to be able to rotate inside. These reels 1010 to 1012 are rotationally driven by driving means such as a stepping motor.

  In this embodiment, each symbol is printed on a belt-shaped member at an equal interval in an appropriate number, and this belt-shaped member is stuck to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame material to constitute each of the reels 1010 to 1012. When viewed from the player, three symbols on the reels 1010 to 1012 are displayed in a vertical direction from the symbol display window 1013, so that a total of nine symbols can be seen. By rotating each of the reels 1010 to 1012, the combination of symbols seen by the player changes. That is, each of the reels 1010 to 1012 functions as a display unit that variably displays a combination of a plurality of types of symbols. In addition, as such display means, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can be employed other than the reel. Further, in the present embodiment, three reels are provided inside the center of the slot machine 1000, but the number of reels and the installation positions of the reels are not limited to this.

  On the back of each of the reels 1010 to 1012, a reel backlight (not shown) for illuminating each symbol displayed on the symbol display window 1013 is arranged. It is desirable that the reel backlight is shielded for each symbol so that each symbol can be evenly irradiated. An optical sensor (not shown) including a light projecting unit and a light receiving unit is provided in the vicinity of each of the reels 1010 to 1012 inside the slot machine 1000, and the light projecting unit and the light receiving unit of the optical sensor are provided. It is configured such that a light-shielding piece of a fixed length provided on the reel passes between the spaces. The position of the symbol on the reel in the rotation direction is determined based on the detection result of this sensor, and the reels 1010 to 1012 are stopped so that the target symbol is displayed on the winning line.

  The pay line display lamp 1020 is a lamp that indicates a valid pay line 1014. The activated pay line is determined in advance by the number of medals bet as a game medium. There are five pay lines 1014. For example, if one medal is bet, the middle horizontal pay line is valid, and if two medals are bet, the upper horizontal pay line and the lower horizontal pay line are added. If three medals are activated and three medals are bet, five lines, in which a rightward prize line and a rightward prize line are added, are valid as a prize line. The number of the winning lines 1014 is not limited to five lines. For example, when one medal is bet, a middle horizontal winning line, an upper horizontal winning line, a lower horizontal winning line, a right horizontal winning line, Five lines, a down winning line and an upper right winning line, may be made effective as winning lines. Hereinafter, the activated pay line may be referred to as an activated line.

  The notification lamp 1023 is, for example, a lamp that notifies a player that a specific winning combination (specifically, a bonus) has been internally won in an internal lottery described later, or that a bonus game is being performed. The game medal insertion possible lamp 1024 is a lamp for notifying that a player can insert a game medal. The re-game lamp 1022 informs the player that the current game can be re-gamed (there is no need to insert medals) when the player has won a re-game which is one of the winning combinations in the previous game. It is a lamp. The reel panel lamp 1028 is an effect lamp.

  The medal insertion buttons 1030 to 1032 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) stored electronically in the slot machine 1000. In the present embodiment, each time the medal insertion button 1030 is pressed, one card is inserted up to a maximum of three sheets. When the medal insertion button 1031 is pressed, two sheets are inserted. It is designed to be inserted. Hereinafter, the medal insertion button 1032 is also referred to as a MAX medal insertion button. The game medal insertion lamp 1029 turns on a number of lamps according to the number of inserted medals, and when a predetermined number of medals have been inserted, notifies that the game can be started. The lamp 1021 lights up.

  The medal insertion slot 1041 is an insertion slot for a player to insert medals when starting a game. In other words, medals can be inserted electronically using the medal insertion buttons 1030 to 1032, or actual medals can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal insertion slot 1041, and the insertion includes both. It is. The stored number display 1025 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000. The game information display 126 is a display for numerically displaying various kinds of internal information (for example, the number of medals paid out during a bonus game). The payout number display 1027 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning some winning combination. In the present embodiment, the stored number display 1025, the game information display 1026, and the payout number display 1027 are configured by 7-segment (SEG) displays.

  The start lever 1035 is a lever-type switch for starting rotation of the reels 1010 to 1012. That is, when the desired number of medals is inserted into the medal insertion slot 1041 or the start lever 1035 is operated by operating the medal insertion buttons 1030 to 1032, the reels 1010 to 1012 start rotating. An operation on the start lever 1035 is called a game start operation.

  The stop button unit 1036 is provided with stop buttons 1037 to 1039 as an example of operation means. The stop buttons 1037 to 1039 are button-type switches for individually stopping the reels 1010 to 1012 that have started rotating by operating the start lever 1035, and are associated with the reels 1010 to 1012. Hereinafter, the operation on the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 is referred to as a stop operation, the first stop operation is referred to as a first stop operation, the next stop operation is referred to as a second stop operation, and the last stop operation is referred to as a third stop operation. Further, a reel to be subjected to the first stop operation is referred to as a first stop reel, a reel to be subjected to the second stop operation is referred to as a second stop reel, and a reel to be subjected to the third stop operation is referred to as a third stop reel. A light emitter may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 1037 to 1039. When the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 can be operated, the light emitter may be turned on to notify the player.

  The medal return button 1033 is a button for pressing down and removing medals when the inserted medals are jammed. The settlement button 1034 is a button for adjusting the medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000 and the medals bet, and discharging the medals from the medal payout port 1055. The door key hole 1040 is a hole into which a key for unlocking the front door 1002 of the slot machine 1000 is inserted. The medal payout port 1055 is a payout port for paying out medals.

  On the right side of the medal insertion button 1032, a chance button 1100 as an example of operation means is provided. The chance button 1100 allows an operation related to the operation of the reels 1010 to 1012 or an operation related to the display of the liquid crystal display device 1057. Further, the chance button 1100 can take a plurality of states as in the case of the pachinko machine 100 according to the above-described embodiment, and the state may be changed during the operation valid period of the chance button 1100.

  The information display button unit 1050 is provided with an information display button 1046. The information display button 1046 is, for example, an operation button for calling a user menu (for example, a menu for setting game history information of a player), and includes a plurality of buttons. In the present embodiment, the information display button 1046 corresponds to an operation unit.

  Below the stop button unit 1036, a title panel 1062 for displaying the model name and attaching various types of certificate stamps is provided. A title panel lamp 1064 is a lamp for lighting the title panel 1062. A medal payout port 1055 and a medal tray 1061 are provided below the title panel 1062.

  The sound hole 1081 is a hole for outputting the sound of a speaker provided inside the slot machine 1000 to the outside. Side lamps 1044 provided on left and right portions of the front door 1002 are decoration lamps for exciting games. An effect device 1060 is provided above the front door 1002, and a sound hole 1043 is provided above the effect device 1060. The effect device 1060 includes a shutter (shielding device) 1063 including two right shutters 1063 a and a left shutter 1063 b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 1057 (not shown) disposed behind the shutter 1063. When the right shutter 1063a and the left shutter 1063b are opened in the horizontal direction in front of the liquid crystal display device 1057, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1057 (not shown) is displayed in front of the slot machine 1000 (game device). Side).

  It is to be noted that the present invention is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, but may be configured to be able to display various effect images and various game information. For example, a multi-segment display (7-segment display), a dot matrix display, an organic EL display, a plasma display , A reel (drum), or a display device including a projector and a screen. In addition, the display screen is formed in a rectangular shape, and the entirety thereof is configured to be visually recognizable by a player. In the case of the present embodiment, the display screen is rectangular, but may be square. In addition, a decoration (not shown) may be provided on the periphery of the display screen, and a part of the periphery of the display screen may be hidden by the decoration, so that the display screen may appear irregular. The display screen is a flat surface in the present embodiment, but may be a curved surface.

  The gaming table according to the present invention, as shown in FIG. 197 (a), "inserts a bill into the bill insertion slot 2002, executes a lottery based on a bet 2004 and a start 2006 operation, and displays a lottery result on the lottery result display device 2008. Then, at the time of winning, the number of privilege coins is added to the number of remaining credits, and when cashout 2009 is selected, the casino machine 2000 which issues a receipt describing a code corresponding to the number of remaining credits from the receipt issuing machine 2010 " It may be.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 4B, a mobile phone 3000 having a storage unit for storing electronic data for realizing the present invention, and as shown in FIG. 5C, electronic data for realizing the present invention The present invention may be applied to a portable game machine 4000 having a storage unit for storing the information and a home video game machine 5000 having a storage unit for storing electronic data for realizing the present invention.

  More specifically, the mobile phone 3000 in FIG. 2B includes an operation unit operated by a player, a data obtaining unit that obtains data related to the game through a mobile phone line, A storage unit for storing electronic data for realizing the present invention), and a control unit for controlling the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit.

  The portable game machine 4000 shown in FIG. 13C has an operation unit operated by a player, a data acquisition unit for acquiring data relating to the game from a predetermined storage medium (such as a DVD), and data relating to the acquired game (the present invention). And a control unit that controls the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit. A home video game machine 5000 in FIG. 3D includes an operation unit operated by a player, a data acquisition unit that acquires data related to the game from a predetermined storage medium (such as a DVD), and a data ( A storage unit for storing electronic data for realizing the present invention), and a control unit for controlling the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 11E, the present invention may be applied to a data server 6000 storing electronic data for realizing the present invention. In some cases, electronic data for implementing the present invention is downloaded from the data server 6000 to the home video game machine 5000 shown in FIG.

  Further, the present invention can be applied to a game program in which the operation of a real machine such as a pachinko machine is executed in a pseudo manner for a home game machine. In that case, a DVD-ROM, CD-ROM, FD (flexible disk), or any other recording medium can be used as a recording medium for recording the game program.

  Furthermore, the present invention has been described by taking a pachinko machine and a slot machine as an example of a game console, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may be applied to an arrangement ball game machine, a rock ball game machine, a smart ball, and the like.

  Further, the actions and effects described in the embodiments of the present invention merely enumerate the most preferable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects according to the present invention are described in the embodiments of the present invention. It is not limited to what was done. In addition, among the plurality of configurations described in the embodiment, the content described in one configuration may be applied to another configuration to further expand the range of the game. That is, unless there is a factor that hinders application, the constituent elements included only in the descriptions of the embodiment, the example, the modification, the various examples, and the additional notes, etc., are included in other embodiments, examples, and modifications. Even when applied to examples, various examples, additional notes, and the like, it can be realized as one coherent technical idea.

  The gaming machine according to the present invention can be applied to a gaming machine represented by a ball-and-ball game machine (pachinko machine), a torso gaming machine (slot machine), an enclosed game machine or a medalless slot machine. it can.

100 Pachinko machine 120 Speaker 136 Effect button 208 Decorative pattern display device 212 First special figure display device 214 Second special figure display device 224 Rendering movable body 246 Shielding device 300 Main control unit 304 CPU
306 ROM
308 RAM
400 first sub-control unit 404 CPU
406 ROM
408 RAM
418 Various lamps 500 Second sub control unit 504 CPU
506 ROM
508 RAM
532 Lamp for game board 542 Lamp for game board frame

Claims (11)

Operating means;
Display means;
A gaming table with
The display means is a means capable of displaying an operation effect display,
The operation effect display is a display including an operation effective period display indicating an operation effective period of the operation unit,
The operation validity period display is an animation display in which the area of at least a part of the display is reduced as time passes.
The display means is a means capable of displaying a moving display of the operation effect display,
The size of the operation effect display is the same at the start of the display of the moving display and at the end of the display of the moving display,
The animation display may be performed while the moving display is being displayed (hereinafter, referred to as “first case”).
A gaming table characterized by the following. The gaming table according to claim 1,
In the first case, the animation display ends at a time after the end of the moving display,
A gaming table characterized by the following. The gaming table according to claim 1 or 2,
The animation display is a display that changes along a moving direction of at least a part of the operation validity period display in the moving display.
A gaming table characterized by the following. The gaming table according to any one of claims 1 to 3,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a first display in a first size,
The first display is a display including a background display,
The display means is a means capable of displaying the first display in a second size smaller than the first size,
The display unit is a unit capable of displaying a moving display of the first display of the second size (hereinafter, referred to as “second moving display”),
In a state where the first display is displayed at the first size, the operation effect display may be displayed at a third size,
In the state where the first display is displayed in the second size, the operation effect display may be displayed in a fourth size smaller than the third size,
The movement display may be displayed during the display of the second movement display,
A gaming table characterized by the following. The gaming table according to claim 4,
The size of the first display may change during the display of the second moving display,
A gaming table characterized by the following. The gaming table according to claim 4 or 5,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a size change animation display for changing the size of the first display from one of the first size and the second size to the other.
A gaming table characterized by the following. The gaming table according to any one of claims 4 to 6,
During the display of the first display of the second size, a display (hereinafter, referred to as “second display”) surrounding at least a part of the periphery of the first display is displayed.
A gaming table characterized by the following. The gaming table according to claim 7,
The second display is not displayed during the display of the first display of the first size,
A gaming table characterized by the following. The gaming table according to claim 4, wherein:
The first display of the first size is a display including a certain character,
The first display of the second size is a display including the certain character,
The certain character in the first display of the second size is distorted with respect to the certain character in the first display of the first size;
A gaming table characterized by the following. The gaming table according to any one of claims 1 to 9,
The gaming table is a pachinko machine,
A gaming table characterized by the following. The gaming table according to any one of claims 1 to 9,
The gaming table is a slot machine,
A gaming table characterized by the following.